Skip to main content
  • Capital Adequacy

    • Regulations Re Capital Adequacy

      C 52/2017 Effective from 23/2/2017
      • Introduction

        The Central Bank seeks to promote the effective and efficient development and functioning of the banking system. To this end, banks are required to manage their capital in a prudent manner. It is important that banks’ risk exposures are backed by a strong capital base of high quality in order to contribute to the stability of the financial system of the UAE.

        In introducing these Capital Adequacy Regulations, the Central Bank intends to ensure that banks’ capital adequacy is in line with revised rules outlined by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in ‘Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems’, commonly referred to as ‘Basel III’. These Regulations are supported by accompanying Standards, which elaborate on the supervisory expectations of the Central Bank with respect to capital adequacy requirements.

        These Regulations and the accompanying Standards are issued pursuant to the powers vested in the Central Bank under the Central Bank Law.

        Where these Regulations, or their accompanying Standards, include a requirement to provide information or to take certain measures, or to address certain items listed at a minimum, the Central Bank may impose requirements, which are additional to the listing provided in the relevant article.

      • Objective

        The objective of these Regulations is to establish minimum capital adequacy requirements for banks with a view to:

        1. i. Ensuring the soundness of banks; and
           
        2. ii. Enhancing financial stability.
           
      • Scope of Application

        These Regulations and the accompanying Standards apply to all banks. Banks must ensure that these Regulations and Standards are adhered to on the following two levels:

        1. The solo level capital adequacy ratio requirements, which measure the capital adequacy of an individual bank based on its standalone capital strength; and
           
        2. The group level capital adequacy ratio requirements, which measure the capital adequacy of a bank based on its capital strength and risk profile after regulatory consolidation of assets and liabilities of its subsidiaries.
           
      • Article (1): Definitions

        1. Bank: A financial institution which is authorized by the Central Bank to accept deposits as a bank.
           
        2. Central Bank: The Central Bank of the United Arab Emirates.
           
        3. Central Bank Law: Union Law No (10) of 1980 concerning the Central Bank, the Monetary System and Organization of Banking as amended or replaced from time to time.
           
        4. Terminology used in these Regulations: As defined in the Basel III capital framework, for example ‘Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems’ published by the Basel Committee for Banking Supervision in December 2010 and revised in June 2011.
           
      • Article (2): Quantitative Requirements

        1. Total regulatory capital comprises the sum of the following items:
           
          1. Tier 1 capital, composed of
            1. Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) and
            2. Additional Tier 1 (AT1);
          2. Tier 2 capital.
             
        2. All regulatory capital components referred to in Article 2.1 are net of regulatory adjustments. A bank must comply with the following minimum requirements, at all times:
           
          1. CET1 must be at least 7.0% of risk weighted assets (RWA);
             
          2. Tier 1 Capital must be at least 8.5% of RWA;
             
          3. Total Capital, calculated as the sum of Tier 1 Capital and Tier 2 Capital, must be at least 10.5% of RWA.
             
        3. Based on the outcome of the Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process conducted by the Central Bank, a bank may be subject to an additional capital add-on, also referred to as individual supervisory capital guidance requirement (SCG). Banks concerned must comply with the individual SCG requirement, set by the Central Bank
           
      • Article (3): Capital Components

        1. CET1 capital comprises the sum of the following items:
           
          1. Common shares issued by a bank which are eligible for inclusion in CET1;
             
          2. Share premium resulting from the issue of instruments included in CET1;
             
          3. Retained earnings;
             
          4. Legal reserves;
             
          5. Statutory reserves;
             
          6. Accumulated other comprehensive income and other disclosed reserves;
             
          7. Common shares issued by consolidated subsidiaries of a bank and held by third parties, also referred to as minority interest, which are eligible for inclusion in CET1;
             
          8. Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of CET1.
             
        2. AT1 capital comprises the sum of the following items:
           
          1. Instruments issued by a bank which are eligible for inclusion in AT1 and are not included in CET1;
             
          2. Stock surplus, or share premium, resulting from the issue of instruments included in AT1;
             
          3. Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the bank and held by third parties which are eligible for inclusion in AT1 and are not included in CET1;
             
          4. Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of AT1.
             
        3. Tier 2 capital comprises the sum of the following items:
           
          1. Banks using the standardized approach for credit risk: general provisions/general loan loss reserves up to a maximum of 1.25 % of credit RWA;
             
          2. Perpetual equity instruments, not included in Tier 1 capital;
             
          3. Share premium resulting from the issue of instruments included in Tier 2 capital;
             
          4. Instruments which are eligible for inclusion of Tier 2;
             
          5. Perpetual instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries, not included in Tier 1 capital;
             
          6. Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of Tier 2.
             
        4. Profit-sharing investment accounts must not be classified as part of an Islamic bank’s regulatory capital as referred to in Article 2 of these Regulations.
           
        5. Investment risk reserves and a portion of the profit equalization reserve (PER), if any, belong to the equity of investment account holders, and thus must not be used in the calculation of an Islamic bank’s regulatory capital. As the purpose of a PER is to smooth the profit payouts and not to cover losses, any portion of a PER that is part of the Islamic bank’s reserves must not be treated as regulatory capital as referred to in Article 2 of these Regulations.
           
      • Article (4): Regulatory Adjustments

        1. The following regulatory adjustments must be applied to CET1 capital:
           
          1. Goodwill and other intangibles;
             
          2. Deferred tax assets;
             
          3. Cash Flow hedge reserve;
             
          4. Gain on sale related to securitization transactions;
             
          5. Cumulative gains and losses due to changes in own credit risk on fair valued financial liabilities;
             
          6. Defined benefit pension fund assets and liabilities;
             
          7. Investments in own shares, or treasury stock;
             
          8. Reciprocal cross holdings in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities;
             
          9. Investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities, that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation and where the bank does not own more than 10% of the issued common share capital of the entity;
             
          10. Significant investments in capital of banking, financial and insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation;
             
          11. Threshold deductions.
             
        2. For the following items, which under Basel II were deducted 50% from Tier 1 and 50% from Tier 2, or had the option of being deducted or risk weighted, banks must apply a risk weight, which is calculated as the reciprocal of the minimum requirement of the Total Capital.
           
          1. Certain securitization exposures;
             
          2. Non-payment/delivery on non-Delivery-versus-Payment and non-Payment-versus-Payment transactions;
             
          3. Significant investments in commercial entities.
             
      • Article (5): Capital Conservation Buffer

        1. In addition to the minimum CET1 capital of 7.0% of RWA, banks must maintain a capital conservation buffer (CCB) of 2.5% of RWAs in the form of CET1 capital
           
        2. Outside of periods of stress, banks are encouraged to hold buffers of capital above the capital adequacy requirements
           
        3. A bank that does not comply with the buffer requirement:
           
          1. Must restrict its dividends pay out to its shareholders in accordance with table 1;
             
          2. Must have a definite plan to replenish the buffer as part of its internal capital adequacy assessment process;
             
          3. Must bring the buffer to the required level within a time limit agreed with the Central Bank; and
             
          4. Will be monitored closely by the Central Bank.
        Table 1
        Individual Bank Minimum Capital Conservation Standards
        CET 1 RatioMinimum Capital Conservation Ratios (expressed as a percentage of earnings)
        7.0% - 7.625%100%
        > 7.625% - 8.25%80%
        > 8.25% - 8.875%60%
        > 8.875% - 9.5%40%
        > 9.5%0%
      • Article (6): Countercyclical Buffer

        To achieve the broader macro-prudential goal of protecting the banking sector from periods of excess aggregate credit growth and in addition to the CCB requirements, banks may be required to implement the countercyclical buffer (CCyB). Banks must meet the CCyB requirements by using CET1 capital. The level of the CCyB requirements will vary between 0% - 2.5% of RWA and be communicated by the Central Bank with an adequate notice period.

      • Article (7): Domestic Systemically Important Banks

        Banks classified as domestically systemically important banks will be required to hold additional capital buffers applied to CET1. Banks concerned will be notified by the Central Bank.

      • Article (8): Disclosure Requirements

        1. To help improve transparency of regulatory capital and market discipline, banks will be required, at a minimum, to disclose the following items:
           
          1. Full reconciliation of all regulatory capital elements back to the balance sheet in the audited financial statements;
             
          2. Separate disclosure of all regulatory adjustments and the items not deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 according to paragraphs 87 and 88 of Basel III;
             
          3. Description of all limits and minima, identifying the positive and negative elements of capital to which the limits and minima apply;
             
          4. Description of the main features of capital instruments issued;
             
          5. Banks, which disclose ratios involving components of regulatory capital, for example ‘Equity Tier 1’, ‘Core Tier 1’ or ‘Tangible Common Equity’ ratios, must accompany such disclosures with a comprehensive explanation of how these ratios are calculated;
             
          6. Full terms and conditions of all instruments included in the regulatory capital. Issuances that fall under a grandfathering rule are exempted.
             
      • Article (9): Transitional Arrangements

        1. For the purpose of the value calculation of the following items:
           
          1. Regulatory adjustments referred to in Article 4.1 of these Regulations; and
          2. Capital issued from a subsidiary, also referred to as minority interest;
             

          banks must apply the following percentages:

          1. a) 80% for the time period from 1st January 2017 to 31st December 2017;
             
          2. b) 100% for the time period starting from 1st January 2018.
             
        2. Capital instruments that no longer qualify as non-common equity Tier 1 capital or Tier 2 capital will be phased out over a time horizon of 10 years, starting from 1st January 2017. The detailed phasing out rules of such capital instruments will be set out in the Standards.
           
        3. Capital instruments included in CET1 that do not meet the requirements of these Regulations will be excluded from CET1 starting from 31st December 2017.
           
        4. Table 2: Minimum Transitional Arrangements:
           
        Table 2: Minimum Transitional Arrangements
        Capital ElementBasel II 2016Basel III 2017Basel III 2018Basel III 2019
        Minimum Common Equity Tier 1 Ratio-7.0%7.0%7.0%
        Minimum Tier 1 Capital Ratio8.0%8.5%8.5%8.5%
        Minimum Capital Adequacy Ratio12.0%10.5%10.5%10.5%
        Capital Conservation Buffer-1.25%1.875%2.5%
        Domestic Systemically Important Banks Buffer; in percentage of individual capital surcharge-50%75%100%
        Countercyclical buffer--0% 1.25%-0% 1.875%2.5%-0%
      • Article (10): Reporting

        1. Banks must report to the Central Bank on their capital position in the format and frequency prescribed in the Standards.
           
        2. A bank must provide upon request any specific information with respect to its capital positions.
           
      • Article (11): Interpretation

        The Regulatory Development Division of the Central Bank shall be the reference for interpretation of the provisions of these Regulations.

      • Article (12): Publication and Application

        These Regulations shall be published in the Official Gazette and become effective from 1 February 2017.

    • Standards for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE

      C 52/2017 STA Effective from 1/12/2022
      • I. Introduction and Scope

        • I. Introduction

          1.The Central Bank seeks to promote the effective and efficient development and functioning of the banking system. To this end, banks are required to manage their capital in a prudent and sustainable manner. It is important that banks’ risk exposures are backed by a strong capital base of high quality in order to contribute to the stability of the financial system of the UAE.

          2.In introducing these Standards, the Central Bank intends to ensure that banks’ capital adequacy is in line with the minimum standards as published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, i.e. the Basel II: International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, June 2006, which was implemented in the UAE in 2009 (Capital Adequacy Standards, Standardised Approach), and the ‘Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems’, commonly referred to as ‘Basel III’.

          3.These Standards support the regulations and elaborate on the supervisory expectations of the Central Bank with respect to capital adequacy requirements. These standards are issued pursuant to the powers vested in the Central Bank under the Central Bank Law.

          4.Where these standards, include a requirement to provide information or to take certain measures, or to address certain items listed at a minimum, the Central Bank may impose requirements, which are additional to the listing provided in the relevant article.

          5.The Standards follow the calibration developed by the Basel Committee, which includes a maximum risk weight of 1250%, calibrated on a total capital adequacy requirement of 8%. The UAE instituted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% (excluding capital buffers), applicable to all licensed banks. Consequently, the maximum capital charge for a single exposure will be the lesser of the value of the exposure after applying valid credit risk mitigation, netting and haircuts, and the capital resulting from applying a risk weight of 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%) to this exposure.

        • II. Scope of Application

          6.These Standards apply to all banks. Banks must ensure that these Standards are adhered to on a consolidated basis. The group level capital adequacy ratio requirements must measure the capital adequacy of a bank based on its capital strength and risk profile after regulatory consolidation of assets and liabilities of its subsidiaries as specified herein.

          7.Note that the solo-level capital adequacy ratio requirements, which measure the capital adequacy of an individual bank based on its stand-alone capital strength, will be issued at a later stage

          8.These Standards should be read in conjunction with the associated guidance issued by the Central Bank (Guidance for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE – September 2020).

        • III. Domestic Systemically Important Banks (D-SIBs)

          9.Banks designated by the Central Bank as domestic systemically important banks are required to hold additional risk-based capital ratio buffers, applied to Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1). Banks are notified individually by the Central Bank with regard to the additional requirements.

          10.All banks must maintain a leverage ratio of at least 3.0%. Designated domestic systemically important banks must maintain a leverage ratio of at least 3.5%.

        • IV. Reporting

          11.Banks must report to the Central Bank on their capital position in the format and frequency determined by the Central Bank.

          12.A bank must provide the Central Bank with any specific information with respect to its capital positions upon request.

        • V. Independent Review

          13.An Independent review of the Central Bank’s Capital framework implementation by internal audit is required every year. However, if the Central Bank is not satisfied with the internal audit, Central Bank may require an external review.

          14.For D-SIBs, in addition, an independent external review is required every 3 years.

        • VI. Interpretation

          15.The Regulatory Development Division of the Central Bank shall be the reference for interpretation of the provisions of these Standards.

        • VII. Application

          16.The following Standards are already in effect as follows:

          • The Tier Capital Supply Standard
          • Tier Capital Instruments Standard
          • Pillar 2 Standard

          17.The remaining Standards will be effective from Q2 2021 onwards.

          18.Banks must continue to submit the existing Basel Capital reports (live reporting (production) for BRF 95, CAR Returns workbook and Pillar 3).

           

      • Pillar 1

        • II. Tier Capital Supply

          • 1. Scope of Application

            1.This Standard formulates capital adequacy requirements that need to be applied to all banks in UAE on a consolidated basis. The consolidated entity includes all worldwide banking subsidiaries, however it excludes insurance companies and non-financial commercial entities that are subsidiaries of the entity licensed in the UAE.

            2.Banks are required to deduct, from CET1, the full amount of any capital shortfall of subsidiaries that are regulated and are subject to capital requirements on a worldwide basis. Additionally, any shortfall in the capital requirement of unconsolidated subsidiary (e.g. insurance, commercial entity) must be fully deducted from the CET1 capital (at stand-alone as well as consolidated level)

            3.The amount of the capital requirement and capital shortfall for this deduction is to be based on the regulations issued by the subsidiary’s regulator (i.e. based on the host regulator’s capital adequacy requirements).

            4.The Standards follow the international calibration as developed by the Basel Committee, imposing risk weights up to 1250% for assets. The UAE adopted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% minimum CAR (without the capital conservation buffer). Taking into consideration the higher minimum capital requirements of 10.5% in the UAE, the risk weight shall be capped at 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%).

            • 1.1 Investments in the Capital of Banking Subsidiaries

              5.Majority-owned or controlled banking entities, securities entities (where subject to broadly similar regulation or where securities activities are deemed banking activities) and other financial entities should generally be fully consolidated. Notwithstanding the banks decision on exercising control over an entity and the subsequent consolidation of that entity, the Central Bank reserves the right to determine whether the bank exercises control over an entity and hence may require banks to consolidate/deconsolidate entities.

              6.In instances where it is not feasible to consolidate certain majority-owned banking, securities or other regulated financial entities1, banks may, subject to prior Central Bank approval, opt for non-consolidation of such entities for regulatory capital purposes.

              7.For group level reporting, if any majority-owned financial subsidiaries are not consolidated for capital purposes, all assets, liabilities and third-party capital investments in the subsidiaries will be removed from the bank’s balance sheet. All equity and other investments in regulatory capital instruments in those entities attributable to the bank / banking group will be deducted.

              8.Banks are required to deduct from CET1 the full amount of any capital shortfalls of subsidiaries excluded from regulatory consolidation, that are regulated entities and are subject to capital requirements. The amount of the capital requirement and capital shortfall for this deduction is to be based on the regulations issued by the subsidiary’s regulator (i.e. based on the host regulator’s local capital adequacy requirements).


              1 Examples of the types of activities that financial entities might be involved in include financial leasing, issuing credit cards, portfolio management, investment advisory, custodial and safekeeping services and other similar activities that are ancillary to the business of banking.

            • 1.2 Investments in the Capital of Banking, Securities, Financial and Insurance Entities

              Banking, securities, financial and insurance entities – (ownership in entity does not exceed 10%)

              9.A bank’s equity interests in banking, securities, insurance and other financial entities are defined as investments in the capital of banking, securities, insurance and other financial entities if the bank owns up to 10% of the investee’s common share capital.

              For detailed treatment of investments in such entities, refer to Section 3.9 - Regulatory Adjustments.

              Banking, securities, financial and insurance entities – Significant investments (ownership in entity exceeds 10%)

              10.Significant investments in banking, securities and other financial entities are defined as investments in the capital of banking, securities and other financial entities (that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation) wherein the bank owns more than 10% of the investee’s common share capital. Such investments will be subject to the treatment outlined in Section 3.10 - Regulatory Adjustments.

            • 1.3 Investments in Commercial Entities

              11.Significant investments in commercial entities are subject to the treatment outlined in section 5. Subsidiaries that are commercial entities are not to be consolidated for regulatory capital purposes. In cases where a subsidiary that is a commercial entity has been consolidated for accounting purposes, the entity is to be deconsolidated for regulatory purposes (i.e. all assets, liabilities and equity will be removed from the bank’s balance sheet) and the book value of the investment will be subject to the treatment.

              For detailed treatment of investments in such entities, refer to Section 5.

          • 2. Eligible Capital

            • 2.1 Component of Capital

              12.Total regulatory capital will consist of the sum of the following items:

              1. i.Tier 1 capital, composed of
                1. a.Common Equity Tier 1 (“CET1”)
                2. b.Additional Tier 1 (“AT1”)
              2. ii.Tier 2 capital.

              These regulatory capital components are net of regulatory adjustments.

              13.Article (2.2) of Capital Adequacy Regulation requires banks to apply the following minimum requirement, at all times:

              1. i.CET1 capital must be at least 7.0% of risk-weighted assets (RWA).
              2. ii.Tier 1 capital must be at least 8.5% of RWA.
              3. iii.Total capital, calculated as sum of Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital, must be at least 10.5% of RWA.
            • 2.2 Capital Buffers:

              14.Article (5.1) of Capital Adequacy Regulation requires banks to maintain a capital conservation buffer (CCB) of 2.5% of total risk weighted assets, in the form of CET1 capital.

              15.Article (6) of Capital Adequacy Regulation requires banks to implement a countercyclical buffer (CCyB). Banks must meet the CCyB requirements by using CET1 capital exclusively. Banks will be subject to a countercyclical buffer that varies between zero and 2.5% of total risk weighted assets. The buffer that will apply to each bank will reflect the geographic composition of its portfolio of credit exposures. The CCyB buffer extends the capital conservation buffer (CCB).

              16.Domestic Systemically Important Banks (D-SIBs) are required to comply with article (7) of the Capital Adequacy Regulation. The additional requirements for identified D-SIBs will be communicated individually by the Central Bank to each relevant bank. Banks must meet the D-SIB buffer requirements by using CET1 capital. The D-SIB buffer extends the capital conservation buffer (CCB).

              17.Based on the outcome of the Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process (SREP) conducted by the Central Bank, a bank may be subject to an additional capital add-on, also referred to as individual Supervisory Capital Guidance requirement (SCG). Banks notified must apply the individual SCG requirement, as set by the Central Bank. The Individual SCG increases the minimum capital requirement.

              18.The aggregation of all the capital buffers (CCB, CCyB and D-SIB) form an effective capital conservation buffer. Any breach of the capital conservation buffers will lead to the following additional supervisory requirements and constraints on distributions:

              1. i.The relevant bank must immediately inform the Central Bank of the breach.
              2. ii.The relevant bank shall submit an approved plan to restore its regulatory capital to meet the buffer level requirement.
              3. iii.The relevant bank will be subjected to more intense supervision.
              4. iv.Capital conservation restrictions will immediately become effective in the form of restriction of dividends as prescribed by the Central Bank.
            • 2.3 Common Equity Tier 1

              19.As per Article 3.1 of the Capital Adequacy Regulation, CET1 capital consists of the sum of the following elements:

              1. i.Common shares issued by a bank which are eligible for inclusion in CET1 (or the equivalent for non-joint stock companies);
              2. ii.Share premium resulting from the issue of instruments included in CET1;
              3. iii.Retained earnings;
              4. iv.Legal reserves;
              5. v.Statutory reserves;
              6. vi.Accumulated other comprehensive income and other disclosed reserves;
              7. vii.Common shares issued by consolidated subsidiaries of a bank and held by third parties, also referred to as minority interest, which are eligible for inclusion in CET1;
              8. viii.Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of CET1.

              20.Retained earnings and other comprehensive income include audited/reviewed interim profit or loss. Expected dividend payments are excluded from CET1.

              Common shares issued by the bank

              21.For an instrument to be included in CET1 capital, it must meet all of the following criteria stated below. In cases where banks issue non-voting common shares, they must be identical to voting common shares of the issuing bank in all respects except the absence of voting rights for inclusion in CET1.

              1. i.Represents the most subordinated claim in liquidation of the bank.
              2. ii.The investor is entitled to a claim on the residual assets that is proportional to its share of issued capital, after all senior claims have been paid in liquidation (i.e. has an unlimited and variable claim, not a fixed or capped claim).
              3. iii.The principal is perpetual and never repaid outside of liquidation (setting aside discretionary repurchases or other means of effectively reducing capital in a discretionary manner that is allowable under relevant law and subject to the prior approval of the Central Bank).
              4. iv.The bank does nothing to create an expectation at issuance that the instrument will be bought back, redeemed or cancelled, nor do the statutory or contractual terms provide any feature that might give rise to such an expectation.
              5. v.Distributions are paid out of distributable items, including retained earnings. The level of distributions is not in any way tied or linked to the amount paid in at issuance and is not subject to a contractual cap (except to the extent that a bank is unable to pay distributions that exceed the level of distributable items).
              6. vi.There are no circumstances under which the distributions are obligatory. Non-payment is, therefore, not an event of default.
              7. vii.Distributions are paid only after all legal and contractual obligations have been met and payments on more senior capital instruments have been made. This means that there are no preferential distributions, including in respect of other elements classified as the highest quality issued capital.
              8. viii.The issued capital takes the first and proportionately greatest share of any losses as they occur. Within the highest quality capital, each instrument absorbs losses on a going concern basis proportionately and pari passu with all the others.
              9. ix.The paid-in amount is recognized as equity capital (i.e. not recognized as a liability) for determining balance sheet insolvency.
              10. x.The paid-in amount is classified as equity under the relevant accounting standards.
              11. xi.It is directly issued and paid-in and the bank cannot directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument.
              12. xii.The paid-in amount is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or related entity or subject to any other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the claim.
              13. xiii.It is either only issued with the approval of the owners of the issuing bank, given directly by the owners or, if permitted by applicable law, given by the Board of Directors or by other persons duly authorized by the owners.
              14. xiv.It is clearly and separately disclosed on the bank’s balance sheet.
            • 2.4 Additional Tier 1 Capital

              22.Articles 3.2 of the Capital Adequacy Regulation, AT1 capital consists of the sum of the following elements:

              1. i.Instruments issued by a bank which are eligible for inclusion in AT1 and are not included in CET1 (e.g. perpetual equity instruments, not included in CET1);
              2. ii.Stock surplus, or share premium, resulting from the issue of instruments included in AT1;
              3. iii.Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the bank and held by third parties which are eligible for inclusion in AT1 and are not included in CET1;
              4. iv.Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of AT1.

              23.The treatment of instruments issued out of consolidated subsidiaries of the bank and the regulatory deductions applied in the calculation of AT1 capital are addressed in the Tier Capital Instruments Standard.

              Instruments issued by the bank that meet the Additional Tier 1 criteria

              24.The following is the minimum set of criteria for an instrument issued by the bank to meet or exceed in order for it to be included in Additional Tier 1 capital:

              1. i.Issued and paid-in
              2. ii.Subordinated to depositors, general creditors and subordinated debt of the bank
              3. iii.Is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or related entity or other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the claim vis-à-vis bank creditors
              4. iv.Is perpetual, i.e. there is no maturity date and there are no step-ups or other incentives to redeem
              5. v.May be callable at the initiative of the issuer only after a minimum of five years:
                1. a.To exercise a call option a bank must receive prior Central Bank approval; and
                2. b.A bank must not do anything which creates an expectation that the call will be exercised; and
                3. c.Banks must not exercise a call unless:
                  1. 1)They replace the called instrument with capital of the same or better quality and the replacement of this capital is done at conditions which are sustainable for the income capacity of the bank; or
                  2. 2)The bank demonstrates that its capital position is well above the minimum capital requirements after the call option is exercised.
              6. vi.Any repayment of principal (e.g. through repurchase or redemption) must be with prior Central Bank’s approval and banks should not assume or create market expectations that Central Bank’s approval will be given.
              7. vii.Dividend/coupon discretion:
                1. a.the Central Bank and the bank must have full discretion at all times to cancel distributions/payments
                2. b.cancellation of discretionary payments must not be an event of default
                3. c.banks must have full access to cancelled payments to meet obligations as they fall due
                4. d.Cancellation of distributions/payments must not impose restrictions on the bank except in relation to distributions to common stockholders.
              8. viii.Dividends/coupons must be paid out of distributable items
              9. ix.The instrument cannot have a credit-sensitive dividend feature, that is a dividend/coupon that is reset periodically based in whole or in part on the banking organization’s credit standing.
              10. x.The instrument cannot contribute to liabilities exceeding assets in the required balance sheet test to determine insolvency.
              11. xi.Instruments classified as liabilities for accounting purposes must have principal loss absorption through a write-down mechanism which allocates losses to the instrument at a pre-specified trigger point. The loss absorption trigger must be set at a level of 7.625% of CET1. The write-down will have the following effects:
                1. 1.Reduce the claim of the instrument in liquidation;
                2. 2.Reduce the amount re-paid when a call is exercised; and
                3. 3.Partially or fully reduce coupon/dividend payments on the instrument.
              12. xii.Neither the bank nor a related party over which the bank exercises control or significant influence can have purchased the instrument or otherwise come into possession of the instrument, such as through receipt of collateral or a reverse repurchase agreement, nor can the bank directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument.
              13. xiii.The instrument cannot have any features that hinder recapitalization, such as provisions that require the issuer to compensate investors if a new instrument is issued at a lower price during a specified time frame.
              14. xiv.[Applicable for Islamic banks only] If the instrument is not issued out of an operating entity or the holding company in the consolidated group (e.g. a special purpose vehicle – “SPV”), proceeds must be immediately available without limitation to an operating entity or the holding company in the consolidated group in a form which meets or exceeds all of the other criteria for inclusion in AT1 capital (Refer to the Capital Instruments Standards).
              15. xv.In addition to the criteria outlined above, the instrument must meet criteria for minimum requirements to ensure loss absorbency at the point of non-viability. Please refer to the Capital Instruments Standards.

              Share premium resulting from the issue of instruments included in Additional Tier 1 capital;

              25.Share premium that is not eligible for inclusion in CET1, will only be permitted to be included in AT1 capital if the shares giving rise to the stock surplus are permitted to be included in AT1 capital.

            • 2.5 Tier 2 Capital

              26.Articles 3.3 of the Capital Adequacy Regulation, Tier 2 capital consists of the sum of the following elements:

              1. i.Banks using the standardized approach for credit risk: general provisions or general loan loss reserves, up to maximum of 1.25% of credit RWA;
              2. ii.Instruments issued by the bank that meet the criteria for inclusion in Tier 2 capital, and are not included in Tier 1 capital;
              3. iii.Share premium resulting from the issue of instruments included in Tier 2 capital;
              4. iv.Instruments which are eligible for inclusion of Tier 2 (refer to paragraph 27)
              5. v.Instruments issued by consolidated subsidiaries of the bank and held by third parties that meet the criteria for inclusion in Tier 2 capital, and are not included in Tier 1 capital;
              6. vi.Regulatory adjustments applied in the calculation of Tier 2.

              27.The treatment of instruments issued out of consolidated subsidiaries of the bank and the regulatory deductions applied in the calculation of Tier 2 capital are addressed in the Tier Capital Instrument Standard.

              Instruments issued by the bank that meet the Tier 2 criteria

              28.The objective of Tier 2 capital is to provide loss absorption on a gone-concern basis. Based on this objective, the minimum set of criteria for an instrument to meet or exceed in order for it to be included in Tier 2 capital are set out below.

              Criteria for inclusion in Tier 2 Capital

              1. i.Issued and paid-in.
              2. ii.Subordinated to depositors and general creditors of the bank.
              3. iii.Is neither secured nor covered by a guarantee of the issuer or related entity or other arrangement that legally or economically enhances the seniority of the claim vis-à-vis depositors and general bank creditors
              4. iv.Maturity:
                1. a.minimum original maturity of at least five years
                2. b.recognition in regulatory capital in the remaining five years before maturity will be amortized on an annualized straight line basis (i.e. 20% incremental reduction in recognition every successive year in the last five years)
                3. c.there are no step-ups or other incentives to redeem
              5. v.May be callable at the initiative of the issuer only after a minimum of five years:
                1. a.To exercise a call option a bank must receive prior Central Bank’s approval;
                2. b.A bank must not do anything that creates an expectation that the call will be exercised; and
                3. c.Banks must not exercise a call unless:
                  1. 1.They replace the called instrument with capital of the same or better quality and the replacement of this capital is done at conditions which are sustainable for the income capacity of the bank; or
                  2. 2.The bank demonstrates that its capital position is well above the minimum capital requirements after the call option is exercised.
              6. vi.The investor must have no rights to accelerate the repayment of future scheduled payments (coupon or principal), except in bankruptcy and liquidation.
              7. vii.The instrument cannot have a credit-sensitive dividend feature, that is a dividend/coupon that is reset periodically based in whole or in part on the banking organization’s credit standing.
              8. viii.Neither the bank nor a related party over which the bank exercises control or significant influence can have purchased the instrument or otherwise come into possession of the instrument, such as through receipt of collateral or a reverse repurchase agreement, nor can the bank directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument.
              9. ix.[Applicable for Islamic banks only] If the instrument is not issued out of an operating entity or the holding company in the consolidated group (e.g. a special purpose vehicle – “SPV”), proceeds must be immediately available without limitation to an operating entity or the holding company in the consolidated group in a form which meets or exceeds all of the other criteria for inclusion in Tier 2 Capital (Refer to the Capital Instruments Standards).

              29.In addition to the criteria outlined above, the instrument must meet the minimum requirements to ensure loss absorbency at the point of non-viability. Please refer to the Capital Instruments Standards.

              Share premium resulting from the issue of instruments included in Tier 2 capital

              30.Share premium that is not eligible for inclusion in Tier 1, will only be permitted to be included in Tier 2 capital if the shares giving rise to the stock surplus are permitted to be included in Tier 2 capital.
               

              General provisions/General loan-loss reserves:

              31.Provisions or loan-loss reserves held against future, presently unidentified losses are freely available to meet losses which subsequently materialize and therefore qualify for inclusion within Tier 2. Provisions ascribed to identified deterioration of particular assets or known liabilities, whether individual or grouped, should be excluded. Furthermore, general provisions or general reserves for loan losses will be limited to a maximum of 1.25% of credit risk weighted risk assets calculated under the standardised approach.
               

              Capital component of Capital Adequacy Regulation

              32.If a bank has complied with the minimum CET1 and Tier 1 capital ratios, the excess AT1 capital can be counted to meet the total capital ratio, also referred to as Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR).
               

              33.Profit-sharing investment accounts must not be classified as part of an Islamic bank’s regulatory capital as referred to in Article 2 of Capital Adequacy Regulation.

              34.Investment risk reserves and a portion of the Profit Equalization Reserve (PER), if any, belong to the equity of investment account holders, and thus must not be used in the calculation of an Islamic bank’s regulatory capital. As the purpose of a PER is to smooth the profit pay-outs and not to cover losses, any portion of a PER that is part of the Islamic bank’s reserves must not be treated as regulatory capital as referred to in Article 2 of Capital Adequacy Regulations.

            • 2.6 Additional Criteria for AT1 and Tier 2 Instruments: Minimum Requirements to Eensure Loss Absorbency at the Point of Non-Vability.

              35.In order for an instrument issued by a bank to be included in AT1 or Tier 2 capital, it must also meet or exceed the minimum requirements defined in Capital Instruments Standards. These requirements are in addition to the criteria for AT1 and Tier 2 instruments stated above.

            • 2.7 Minority Interest (i.e. Non-Controlling Interest) and Other Capital Issued Out of Consolidated Subsidiaries

              Common shares issued by consolidated subsidiaries (that is within the scope of regulatory consolidation)

              36.Minority interest arising from the issue of common shares by a fully consolidated subsidiary of the bank may receive recognition in CET1 only if:

              1. i.The instrument giving rise to the minority interest would, if issued by the bank, meet all of the criteria for classification as common shares for regulatory capital purposes; and
              2. ii.The subsidiary that issued the instrument is itself a bank. (It is noted that minority interest in a subsidiary that is a bank is strictly excluded from the parent bank’s common equity if the parent bank or affiliate has entered into any arrangements to fund directly or indirectly minority investment in the subsidiary whether through an SPV or through another vehicle or arrangement. The treatment outlined here, thus, is strictly available where all minority investments in the bank subsidiary solely represent genuine third party common equity contributions to the subsidiary.)

              37.The amount of capital meeting the above criteria that will be recognized in consolidated CET1 is calculated as follows

              Total minority interest meeting the two criteria above minus the amount of the surplus CET1 of the subsidiary attributable to the minority shareholders.

              1. i.Surplus CET1 of the subsidiary is calculated as the CET1 (after the application of regulatory deductions) of the subsidiary minus the lower of:
                1. a.the minimum CET1 requirement of the subsidiary plus the capital conservation buffer (i.e. 9.5% of risk weighted assets) and
                2. b.the portion of the parent’s consolidated minimum CET1 requirement plus the capital conservation buffer (i.e. 9.5% of consolidated risk weighted assets) that relates to the subsidiary.
              2. ii.The amount of the surplus CET1 that is attributable to the minority shareholders is calculated by multiplying the surplus CET1 by the percentage of CET1 that is held by minority shareholders.

              Tier 1 qualifying capital issued by consolidated subsidiaries (that is within the scope of regulatory consolidation)

              38.Tier 1 capital instruments issued by a fully consolidated subsidiary of the bank to third party investors (including amounts under paragraph 37) may receive recognition in Tier 1 capital only if the instruments would, if issued by the bank meet all of the criteria for classification as Tier 1 capital.
               

              39.The amount of this capital that will be recognized in Tier 1 will be calculated as follows:

              Total Tier 1 of the subsidiary issued to third parties minus the amount of the surplus Tier 1 of the subsidiary attributable to the third party investors.

              1. i.Surplus Tier 1 of the subsidiary is calculated as the Tier 1 of the subsidiary (after the application of regulatory deductions) minus the lower of:
                1. a.the minimum Tier 1 requirement of the subsidiary plus the capital conservation buffer (i.e. 11% of risk weighted assets) and
                2. b.the portion of the parent’s consolidated minimum Tier 1 requirement plus the capital conservation buffer (i.e. 11% of consolidated risk weighted assets) that relates to the subsidiary.
              2. ii.The amount of the surplus Tier 1 that is attributable to the third party investors is calculated by multiplying the surplus Tier 1 by the percentage of Tier 1 that is held by third party investors.

              The amount of this Tier 1 capital that will be recognized in Additional Tier 1 will exclude amounts recognized in CET1 under paragraph 37.

              Tier 1 and Tier 2 qualifying capital issued by consolidated subsidiaries (that is within the scope of regulatory consolidation)

              40.Total capital instruments (i.e. Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments) issued by a fully consolidated subsidiary of the bank to third party investors (including amounts under paragraph 37 and 39) may receive recognition in Total Capital only if the instruments would, if issued by the bank, meet all of the criteria for classification as Tier 1 or Tier 2 capital
               

              41.The amount of this capital that will be recognized in consolidated Total Capital will be calculated as follows:

              Total capital instruments of the subsidiary issued to third parties minus the amount of the surplus Total Capital of the subsidiary attributable to the third party investors.

              1. i.Surplus Total Capital of the subsidiary is calculated as the Total Capital of the subsidiary (after the application of regulatory deductions) minus the lower of:
                1. a.the minimum Total Capital requirement of the subsidiary plus the capital conservation buffer (i.e. 13% of risk weighted assets) and
                2. b.the portion of the parent’s consolidated minimum Total Capital requirement plus the capital conservation buffer (i.e.13% of consolidated risk weighted assets) that relates to the subsidiary.
              2. ii.The amount of the surplus Total Capital that is attributable to the third party investors is calculated by multiplying the surplus Total Capital by the percentage of Total Capital that is held by third party investors.

              The amount of this Total Capital that will be recognized in Tier 2 will exclude amounts recognized in CET1 under paragraph 37 and amounts recognized in AT1 under paragraph 39 above.

              42.An illustrative example for calculation of minority interest and other capital issued out of consolidated subsidiaries that is held by the third parties is furnished as Appendix 4 in Guidance for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE.

              Other Instructions relating to the calculation of the amount of minority interest

              43.All calculations must be undertaken in respect of the subsidiary on a sub-consolidated basis (i.e. the subsidiary must consolidate all of its subsidiaries that are also included in the wider consolidated group). However, the bank may elect to give no recognition (in consolidated capital of the group) to the capital issued by the subsidiary to third parties.

              44.Where capital has been issued to third parties out of an SPV, none of this capital can be included in CET1. However, such capital can be included in consolidated AT1 or Tier 2 capital and treated as if the bank itself had issued the capital directly to the third-parties only if:

              1. i.it meets all the relevant entry criteria; and
              2. ii.the only asset of the SPV is its investment in the capital of the bank in a form that meets or exceeds all the relevant entry criteria (as required by criterion xiv for Additional Tier 1 and criterion ix for Tier 2 capital)

              In cases where the capital has been issued to third parties through an SPV via a fully consolidated subsidiary of the bank, such capital may, subject to the requirements of this paragraph, be treated as if the subsidiary itself had issued it directly to the third parties and may be included in the bank’s consolidated AT1 or Tier 2 in accordance with the treatment outlined in paragraphs 39 and 41.

          • 3. Regulatory Adjustments

            45.This Standard sets out the regulatory adjustments to be applied to regulatory capital. In all cases, these adjustments are applied in the calculation of CET1.

            • 3.1 Goodwill and Other Intangibles

              46.Goodwill and all other intangibles must be deducted in the calculation of CET1 (this deduction includes mortgage servicing rights), including any goodwill included in the valuation of significant investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation. The full amount is to be deducted net of any associated deferred tax liability, which would be extinguished if the intangible assets become impaired or derecognized under the relevant accounting standards.

              47.Banks are required to use the IFRS definition of intangible assets to determine which assets are classified as intangible and required to be deducted.

            • 3.2 Deferred Tax Assets

              48.Deferred tax assets (DTAs) that rely on future profitability of the bank to be realized are to be deducted in the calculation of CET1. Deferred tax assets may be netted with associated deferred tax liabilities (DTLs) only if the DTAs and DTLs relate to taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the relevant taxation authority permits offsetting.

              49.The treatment for DTA are classified as:

              1. i.Where these DTAs relate to temporary differences (e.g. allowance for credit losses) the amount to be deducted is set out in the “threshold deductions”.
              2. ii.All other DTAs, e.g. those relating to operating losses, such as the carry forward of unused tax losses, or unused tax credits, are to be deducted in full net of DTL as described above.

              50.The DTLs permitted to be netted against DTAs must exclude amounts that have been netted against the deduction of goodwill, intangibles and defined benefit pension assets, and must be allocated on a pro rata basis between DTAs subject to the threshold deduction treatment and DTAs that are to be deducted in full.

              51.An over-instalment of tax or, in some jurisdictions, current year tax losses carried back to prior years may give rise to a claim or receivable from the government or local tax authority. Such amounts are typically classified as current tax assets for accounting purposes. The recovery of such a claim or receivable would not rely on the future profitability of the bank and would be assigned the relevant sovereign risk weighting.

            • 3.3 Cash Flow Hedge Reserve

              52.The amount of the cash flow hedge reserve that relates to the hedging of items that are not fair valued on the balance sheet (including projected cash flows) should be derecognized in the calculation of CET1. This means that positive amounts should be deducted and negative amounts should be added back.

              53.This treatment specifically identifies the element of the cash flow hedge reserve that is to be derecognized for prudential purposes. It removes the element that gives rise to artificial volatility in common equity, as in this case the reserve only reflects one half of the picture (the fair value of the derivative, but not the changes in fair value of the hedged future cash flow).

            • 3.4 Gain on Sale Related to Securitization Transactions

              54.Derecognize in the calculation of CET1 any increase in equity capital resulting from a securitization transaction, such as that associated with expected Future Margin Income (FMI) resulting in a gain-on-sale.

            • 3.5 Cumulative Gains and Losses Due to Changes in Own Credit Risk on Fair Valued Financial Liabilities

              55.Derecognize in the calculation of CET1, all unrealized gains and losses that have resulted from changes in the fair value of liabilities that are due to changes in the bank’s own credit risk.

            • 3.6 Defined Benefit Pension Fund Assets and Liabilities

              56.Defined benefit pension fund liabilities, as included on the balance sheet, must be fully recognized in the calculation of CET1 (i.e. CET1 cannot be increased through derecognizing these liabilities).

              57.For each defined benefit pension fund that is an asset on the balance sheet, the asset should be deducted in the calculation of CET1 net of any associated deferred tax liability, which would be extinguished if the asset should become impaired or derecognized under the relevant accounting standards.

              58.Assets in the fund to which the bank has unrestricted and unfettered access can, with Central Bank’s approval, offset the deduction. Such offsetting assets should be given the risk weight they would receive if they were owned directly by the bank.

              59.This treatment addresses the concern that assets arising from pension funds may not be capable of being withdrawn and used for the protection of depositors and other creditors of a bank. The concern is that their only value stems from a reduction in future payments into the fund. The treatment allows banks to reduce the deduction of the asset if they can address these concerns and show that the assets can be easily and promptly withdrawn from the fund.

            • 3.7 Investments in Own Shares (Treasury Stock)

              60.All of a bank’s investments in its own common shares, whether held directly or indirectly, will be deducted in the calculation of CET1 (unless already derecognized under the relevant accounting standards).

              61.In addition, any own stock, which the bank could be contractually obliged to purchase, should be deducted in the calculation of CET1. The treatment described will apply irrespective of the location of the exposure in the banking book or the trading book. In addition:

              1. i.Gross long positions may be deducted net of short positions in the same underlying exposure only if the short positions involve no counterparty risk.
              2. ii.Banks should look through holdings of index securities to deduct exposures to own shares. However, gross long positions in own shares resulting from holdings of index securities may be netted against short position in own shares resulting from short positions in the same underlying index. In such cases, the short positions may involve counterparty risk (which will be subject to the relevant counterparty credit risk charge).

              62.Following the same approach outlined above, banks must deduct investments in their own AT1 in the calculation of their AT1 capital and must deduct investments in their own Tier 2 in the calculation of their Tier 2 capital.

            • 3.8 Reciprocal Cross Holdings in the Capital of Banking, Financial and Insurance Entities

              63.Reciprocal cross holdings of capital that are designed to artificially inflate the capital position of banks will be deducted in full from CET1.
               

            • 3.9 Investments in the Capital of Banking, Securities, Financial and Insurance Entities Where the Bank Owns up to 10% of the Issued Common Share Capital of the Entity

              64.The regulatory adjustment described in this Standard applies to investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation and where the bank does not own more than 10% of the issued common share capital of the entity. In addition,

              1. i.Investments include direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of capital instruments. For example, banks should look through holdings of index securities to determine their underlying holdings of capital.

                If banks find it operationally burdensome to look through and monitor their exact exposure to the capital of other financial institutions as a result of their holdings of index securities, Central Bank may permit banks, subject to prior supervisory approval, to use a conservative estimate. The methodology for the estimate should demonstrate that in no case will the actual exposure be higher than the estimated exposure. If a look-through or an acceptable estimate are not possible, the full amount of the investment should be accounted for.
                 
              2. ii.Holdings in both the banking book and trading book are to be included. Capital includes common stock and all other types of cash and synthetic capital instruments (e.g. subordinated debt). It is the net long position that is to be included (i.e. the gross long position net of short positions in the same underlying exposure where the maturity of the short position either matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year).
              3. iii.Underwriting positions held for five working days or less can be excluded. Underwriting positions held for longer than five working days must be included.
              4. iv.If the capital instrument of the entity in which the bank has invested does not meet the criteria for CET1, AT1, or Tier 2 capital of the bank, the capital is to be considered common shares for the purposes of this regulatory adjustment.
              5. v.Banks may, with prior Central Bank’s approval, exclude temporarily certain investments where these have been made in the context of resolving or providing financial assistance to reorganize a distressed institution.

              65.If the total of all holdings listed above in aggregate exceed 10% of the bank’s common equity (after applying all other regulatory deductions in full, apart from the deductions outlined in this Standard (paragraph 63 to 71)) then the amount above 10% is required to be deducted from CET1.

              66.Amounts below the threshold that are not deducted are to be risk weighted as follows:

              1. i.Amounts below the threshold that are in the banking book are to be risk weighted as per the credit risk (i.e. investments that are not listed and not marked to market will be risk weighted at 150% and investments that are listed will be risk weighted at 100%).
              2. ii.Amounts below the threshold that are in the trading book are to be risk weighted as per the market risk rules.
            • 3.10 Significant Investments in the Capital of Banking, Securities, Financial and Insurance Entities That are Outside the Scope of Regulatory Consolidation

              67.The regulatory adjustment described in this Standard applies to investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation where the bank owns more than 10% of the issued common share capital of the issuing entity or where the entity is an affiliate of the bank. An affiliate of a bank is defined as a company that controls, or is controlled by, or is under common control with, the bank. Control of a company is defined as (1) ownership, control, or holding with power to vote 20% or more of a class of voting securities of the company; or (2) consolidation of the company for financial reporting purposes. In addition,

              1. i.Investments include direct, indirect and synthetic holdings of capital instruments. For example, banks should look through holdings of index securities to determine their underlying holdings of capital.
              2. ii. Holdings in both the banking book and trading book are to be included. Capital includes common stock and all other types of cash and synthetic capital instruments (e.g. subordinated debt). It is the net long position that is to be included (i.e. the gross long position net of short positions in the same underlying exposure where the maturity of the short position either matches the maturity of the long position or has a residual maturity of at least one year)
              3. iii.Underwriting positions held for five working days or less can be excluded. Underwriting positions held for longer than five working days must be included.
              4. iv.If the capital instrument of the entity in which the bank has invested does not meet the criteria for CET1, AT1, or Tier 2 capital of the bank, the capital is to be considered common shares for the purposes of this regulatory adjustment. If the investment is issued out of a regulated financial entity and not included in regulatory capital in the relevant sector of the financial entity, it is not required to be deducted.
              5. v.Banks may, with prior Central Bank’s approval, exclude temporarily certain investments where these have been made in the context of resolving or providing financial assistance to reorganize a distressed institution.

              68.All investments included above that are not common shares must be fully deducted from CET1.

              69.Investments included above that are common shares will be subject to the “Threshold deductions” treatment described in the section 4 below.

          • 4. Threshold Deductions

            70.Instead of a full deduction, the following items may each receive limited recognition when calculating CET1, with recognition capped at 10% of the bank’s common equity (after applying all other regulatory deductions in full, apart from the deductions outlined in this Standard (paragraph 69 to 71)):

            1. i.Significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial institutions (banking, securities and other financial entities) and insurance entities as referred to in Section 3.10 (paragraph 66). Any amount exceeding this 10% threshold is deducted from CET1 capital;
            2. ii.DTAs that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary differences. Any amount exceeding this 10% threshold is deducted from CET1 capital

            The amount below the 10% threshold of the above two items are aggregated and must not exceed 15% of the Common Equity Tier 1 capital (after application of all other regulatory adjustments and the amount of significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial institutions and deferred tax assets in full). The calculation for threshold deduction is explained with an example in Appendix 5 in Guidance for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE.

            71.The amount of the two items (outlined in paragraph 69) that are not deducted in the calculation of CET1 will be risk weighted at 250%.

            Former deductions from capital

            72.The following items, which under former Central Bank’s Regulations were deducted 50% from Tier 1 and 50% from Tier 2 (or had the option of being deducted or risk weighted), will receive a 1250% risk weight:

            1. i.Certain securitization exposures;
            2. ii.Non-payment/delivery on non-DvP and non-PvP transactions; and
            3. iii.Significant investments in commercial entities
          • 5. Significant Investments in Commercial Entities

            73.Significant investments in commercial entities are defined as investments in commercial entities that are, on an individual basis, greater than or equal to 10% of the bank’s CET1 capital (after the application of all regulatory deductions). The amount in excess of the threshold of 10% (for each individual investment) will be risk weighted at 1250%.

            74.If the aggregate of the amount of such significant investments that is not in excess of the threshold (i.e. amount of such investments not risk weighted at 1250%) is greater than 25% of the bank’s CET1 capital (after the application of all regulatory deductions), the amount in excess of 25% must also be risk weighted at 1250%. The amount in excess will be allocated to individual investments in a proportionate basis (refer to Appendix 3 in Guidance for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE for an illustrative example).

            75.Amounts below the thresholds that are not risk weighted at 1250% are to be risk weighted as follows:

            1. i.Amounts below the thresholds that are in the banking book are to be risk weighted as per the credit risk rules (i.e. investments that are not listed will be risk weighted at 150% and investments that are listed will be risk weighted at 100%).
            2. ii.Amounts below the thresholds that are in the trading book are to be risk weighted as per the market risk rules.
          • 6. Transitional Arrangements

            76.Minority investment in banking, financial and insurance entities that are not deducted as per section 3.9 will be risk weighted at 100% if the entity is listed and 150% if the entity is unlisted. Application of risk weight for unlisted entities will have transitional arrangement as follows:

            YearEnd of 20171st Jan 20181st Jan 20191st Jan 2020 onwards
            Risk weights100%115%130%150%

             

            77.Equity investment in commercial entities that are below the thresholds as per section 5 will be risk weighted at 100% if the entity is listed and 150% if the entity is unlisted. Application of risk weight for unlisted companies will have transitional arrangement as follows:

            YearEnd of 20171st Jan 20181st Jan 20191st Jan 2020 onwards
            Risk weights100%115%130%150%


             

        • III. Tier Capital Instruments

          • 1. Introduction

            1.This Standard must be read in conjunction with the Capital Regulations Circular No 52/2017, in which Tier Capital the Tier Capital Supply Standard defines criteria required for capital to be classified as Additional Tier 1 (AT1) and Tier 2 (T2). Non-exhaustive examples of features are optional calls, coupon payments, and distributable items.

            2.The purpose of this Standard is to:

            • Clarify the requirements for classification of AT1 and T2 instruments in the UAE
            • Provide a robust Tier Capital instrument framework to the industry,
            • Support a standardisation of AT1 and T2 instruments in the market
            • Implement a clear application and approval process.
          • 2. Capital Approval

            3.Banks wishing to issue any type of capital, including AT1 and T2, must request approval of the Central Bank of the UAE prior to issuance of the instrument. The bank may only issue the intended capital component after having submitted documentation described in the Application Process in the Appendix to this Standard and after the Board of the Central Bank of the UAE has approved the issuance of the instrument.

            4.The Central Bank requires banks to issue AT1 and T2 instruments that are simple and robust in absorbing loss. The capital instrument Standard intends to:

            • Ensure the soundness of individual institutions
            • Reduce the variety of capital instruments in the market
            • Regulate the quality of instruments issued in the UAE
            • Monitor the amount of capital being issued in the market; and
            • Enhance the financial stability of the banking sector.
          • 3. Scope of Application

            5.This Standard explains the requirements for Tier Capital instruments, the application process, and approval procedures followed by the Central Bank. It applies to all local banks operating in the UAE since only local banks are permitted to issue Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 instruments. Foreign branches, however, are permitted to issue Tier 2 subordinated term loans from their Head Offices restricted to a maximum of 3% of their risk-weighted assets. Banks are responsible for ensuring that their capital instruments comply with all applicable requirements. This Standard will be updated from time to time to reflect relevant regulatory development.

          • 4. Definitions and Interpretations

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a.Capital Regulations, Standards and Guidance, means regulatory capital requirements for the maintenance of capital applicable to the issuer, including transitional rules. It includes the Capital Regulation, the Capital Standards, and Capital Guidance.
            2. b.Central Bank means the Central Bank of the United Arab Emirates.
            3. c.Distributable Items means the amount of the issuer's consolidated retained earnings and reserves after the transfer of any amounts to non-distributable reserves, all as set out in the most recent audited or auditor reviewed consolidated financial statements of the issuer or any equivalent or successor term from time to time as prescribed by the Capital Regulations, including the applicable criteria for Tier 1 capital instruments that do not constitute Common Equity Tier 1 Capital;
            4. d.Grandfathering is part of the transition process. In order to qualify for the grandfathering arrangements, an instrument must have a particular cut-off date. Any instrument entered into before 1st January 2018, which does not meet the qualifying criteria for the particular tier of capital, in this Standard will be grandfathered.
            5. e.Non-Viable: The bank shall be Non-Viable if it is at least (a) insolvent, bankrupt, unable to pay a material part of its obligations as they fall due or unable to carry on its business, or (b) any other event or circumstance occurs that the Central Bank deems necessary to declare the bank to be Non-Viable.
            6. f.Point of Non-Viability (PONV): A Point of Non-Viability means that the Regulator has determined that the bank has or will become non-viable without: (a) a write-down of the principal amount of the instrument, or (b) a public injection of capital (or equivalent support).
            7. g.Tier Capital Instruments: Capital instruments other than Core Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital, that qualify for recognition as Additional Tier 1 (AT1) or Tier 2 (T2) regulatory capital instruments according to the requirements of this Standard.
          • 5. General Requirements for Tier Capital Instruments

            6.Tier Capital Instruments must fulfil the criteria described in these capital standards, including additional requirements described hereunder.

            Point of Non Viability (PONV)

            1. i.The terms and conditions of Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 instruments must have a provision that requires the principal amount of such instruments to be written-down upon the occurrence of a trigger event.
            2. ii.Banks will be informed in writing upon the occurrence of the bank’s financial position reaching a PONV in the view of the Central Bank.
            3. iii.When a PONV occurs on or after the issue date of the instrument, the instrument will be cancelled and all and any rights of any holder of the instrument for payment of any amounts under or in respect of the instrument (including, without limitation, any amounts that may be due and payable) shall be cancelled and not restored under any circumstances.
            4. iv.The write-down at the PONV will occur in full and be permanent in nature. A partial write-down may be considered only in exceptional cases as decided by the Central Bank.
            5. v.There must not be any impression to the holders that a write-down notice will be sent before the issuer can write-down the principal amount of the instrument.
            6. vi.If a bank issues Tier Capital out of a subsidiary and with the intention that such capital is eligible in the consolidated group’s capital, the terms and conditions must specify an additional trigger event. The trigger is the earlier of: (1) a decision that a write-down is required, without which the subsidiary would become non-viable, is necessary, as determined by the regulator of the subsidiary in the home jurisdiction, and (2) Central Bank has determined a Point of Non-Viability for the consolidated bank.

            Subordination

            7.To ensure subordination of Tier Capital instruments, Tier Capital instruments must be fully written-down upon liquidation or bankruptcy.
             

            Solvency Conditions

            8.Capital issuances must define Solvency Conditions in the terms and conditions of the instrument. Solvency Conditions must contain at least the following:

            1. i.The issuer must be solvent at all times.
            2. ii.Ability of the issuer to make payments on the obligations and any payments required to be made, on the relevant date, with respect to all senior obligations and pari passu obligations.
            3. iii.The total share capital of the issuer must be greater than zero at all times from the first day of the relevant coupon period to the time of payment of obligations.

            Capital Event

            9.If the instrument ceases to count as Tier Capital (for example due to a change in the Capital Regulation), the Central Bank will inform the bank in writing of such event accordingly.
             

            10.A capital event may occur at any time, due to its unforeseen nature, on or after the issue date. Any attempt to redeem must be subject to the Central Bank’s prior written consent.

            Redemption

            11.To ensure that Tier Capital instruments comply with the capital requirements as defined in this Standard, any redemption of the instrument requires prior written consent of Central Bank, satisfaction of the solvency conditions and satisfaction of the requirements set out in the Capital Regulations, Standards, and Guidance.
             

            12.The issuer may redeem all, but not some part, of the instrument. Only in certain exceptional cases would the Central Bank consider approving partial redemption.

            13.The terms and conditions of the instrument must not include terms that in any way indicate that the repurchase or redemption of the instrument may occur at any time.

            Redemption Notices

            14.All notices are revocable before the relevant redemption date.
             

            Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV)

            15.Only Islamic banks may use a SPV for capital issuances. The requirements for these issuances are as follows:

            1. i.The Mudaraba contract between the issuer and the SPV:
              1. a.Must be subordinated.
              2. b.No such contract will be given on the cancelled coupons so that flexibility of payments is given at any time.
            2. ii.The contract must be specific enough and its scope is restricted to a change affecting the issuer, such as a restructure or a merger. The Central Bank will reassess the eligibility of the instrument.
            3. iii.Each capital instrument requires a separate SPV that should not engage in any other business or activity.

            Currencies

            16.Only instruments denominated in UAE Dirhams (AED) or US Dollars (USD) will be accepted for banks incorporated in the UAE. This also applies to instruments issued through a SPV by Islamic banks.
             

            17.For issuances by subsidiaries, the respective local currency will be acceptable only in exceptional circumstances with the written approval of the Central Bank.

            Specific Requirements for Additional Tier 1

            Coupon Cancellation

            18.In the event of a coupon cancellation (as stated in the terms and conditions of the instrument), the issuer (as bank or SPV) will not pay the coupon and the following events should be covered as a minimum (Non-Payment Event):

            1. i.The coupon payable, when aggregated with any distributions or amounts payable by the issuer as bank or SPV, on any pari passu obligations having:
              1. a.the same dates in respect of payment of such distributions or amounts as, or;
              2. b.otherwise due and payable on the dates for payment of the coupon, exceeds the Distributable Items (on the relevant date for payment of such coupon);
            2. ii.The issuer is, on that coupon date:
              1. a.in breach of the Capital Regulations and Standards including any payment restrictions due to breach of capital buffers imposed on the issuer by the Central Bank, as appropriate;
              2. b.or payment of the relevant coupon would cause it to be in breach thereof;
            3. iii.The Central Bank requires that the coupon due on the coupon date will not be paid (for any reason the Central Bank may deem necessary);
            4. iv.The Solvency Conditions are not satisfied or would no longer be satisfied if the relevant coupon was paid; or
            5. v.The issuer, in its sole discretion, has elected that coupon shall not be paid to holders of the capital securities on any coupon date, for example but not limited to, due to a net loss for that period. Other than in respect of any amounts due on any date on which the capital securities are to be redeemed in full, unless the redemption notice is revoked.

            Therefore, cancellation of the distributions can be discretionary (v) or mandatory (i)-(iv). Any distributions on the instrument so cancelled, must be cancelled definitively and must not accumulate or be payable at any time thereafter.
             

            Non-Payment Event Notice

            19.All notices are revocable before a non-payment event is exercised.
             

            20.Any failure to provide a notice of a non-payment event will not invalidate the right to cancel the payment of the coupon.

            Enforcement Event

            21.The right to institute winding-up proceedings is limited to circumstances where payment has become due. Solvency Conditions have to be met in order for the principal, coupon, or any other amount to be due on the relevant payment date. Payments on the instrument can be cancelled after which it will not be due on the relevant payment date. Upon the occurrence of an enforcement event, any holder of the instrument may give written notice to the issuer of the instrument. An enforcement event is related to a non-payment when due and to insolvency.
             

            Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA):

            22.Distributions are restricted if the bank does not have sufficient capital to fulfill the effective capital conservation buffer. Banks are hence prohibited from making a distribution if their CET1 is below the Combined Buffer Requirement (CBR). The distributions have to be lower than the maximum distributable amount which is calculated as follows:

            MDA is calculated as the sum of:

            1. i.Interim profits not included in CET1 capital and
            2. ii.Year-end profits not included in CET1 capital minus
            3. iii.Amounts that would be payable by tax if i) and ii) were to be retained, multiplied by a factor set at:
              1. a.Zero if the CET1 ratio not used to meet the own funds requirement is within the first quartile (i.e. the lowest) of the CBR;
              2. b.0.2 if the CET1 is in the second quartile;
              3. c.0.4 if the CET1 is in the third quartile; and
              4. d.0.6 if the CET1 is in the fourth quartile

            MDA should be reduced by:

            1. i.A distribution in connection with CET1 capital;
            2. ii.Variable remuneration pay or discretionary pension benefits, or variable remuneration pay if the obligation to pay was created at a time when the institution failed to meet the CBR; and
            3. iii.Payments on additional tier 1 instruments.

            Specific Requirements for Tier 2 instruments

            23.Banks have to follow the Tier 2 criteria in the Tier Capital Supply Standard as well as the following additional requirements of this Standard:

            Amortisation of Tier 2 Instruments

            24.Recognition of the instrument as Tier 2 Capital in its final 5 years to maturity is amortised on a straight-line basis by 20% per annum.

            25.If the instrument is repayable in separate tranches, each tranche shall be amortised individually, as if it were a separate loan.

            Transition Period

            Grandfathering Rules for Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2

            26.The below two grandfathering rules apply only to instruments that were issued before the effective date of the Capital Regulation (being 1 February 2017).

            1. i.Instruments that are fully Basel III complaint will be grandfathered at 100% eligibility for 10 years starting from Jan 1, 2018 until 31 Dec 2027.
            2. ii.Instruments that are not Basel III compliant do no longer qualify as non-common equity Tier 1 capital or Tier 2 capital and will be phased out beginning 1st January 2018.

            27.Fixing the base at the nominal amount of such instruments outstanding on 1 January 2018, their recognition is/was capped at 90% from 1 January 2018, with the cap reducing by 10 percentage points in each subsequent year.

            28.This cap is applied to Additional Tier 1 and Tier 2 Instruments on an individual instrument base and refers to the amount of that instrument outstanding that no longer meets the relevant entry criteria.

            29.If an instrument is repaid in separate tranches, the cap is applied to the reduced amount in all circumstances.

          • Appendix A: Application Process:

            The application process for banks issuing Additional Tier 1 or Tier 2 is a two-stage process:

            1.Initial information to be provided to the Central Bank:

            The bank shall inform the Central Bank prior to making an official application for approval of any and every issuance. The bank must provide to the Central Bank the following information:

            1. 1.Reason(s) for the issuance of the instrument.
            2. 2.Main features of the planned instrument: Section 1, 2 and 3 of the Capital Notification form (signature not required).
            3. 3.Capital planning for 5 years including balance sheet growth and business performance:
              1. i.assuming approval of the proposed instrument
              2. ii.without the proposed instrument
            4. 4.Stress Testing with a stress scenario of the top 2 credit customers are defaulting with the proposed instrument
            5. 5.The Central Bank – Financial Stability Stress Department Test results

            The intention of such instrument request will be reviewed by the Central Bank and a Non-objection may be granted, so that the bank can proceed with the second stage of the approval process.

            2.Actual application to the Central Bank:

            To start the approval process, the bank must submit all of the following documents:

            1. i.Legal Opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the terms and conditions are compliant with the requirements detailed in the Capital Regulations, Standards and Guidance.
            2. ii.Legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the obligations contained in terms and conditions will constitute legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.
            3. iii.Legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the Self-Assessment of the issuing bank meets the Conditions and the Capital Regulations.
            4. iv.Written confirmation from the bank’s external auditor on the accounting treatment of the Instrument.
            5. v.Fully completed Application form (CN1-form), signed by the CEO, CFO, Head of Internal Audit, Head of Compliance and Head of Risk.
            6. vi.Detailed terms and conditions of the Instrument that will be part of the prospectus/contract
              1. a.Note that the CN-1 form must contain details of any new, unusual or different features of the instrument
              2. b.Comparison of the intended terms and conditions with a version that is already publicly available and approved by the Central Bank. (Black-lined version)
            7. vii.Key SPV-related incorporation documents and underlying mudaraba agreement, if applicable:
            8. viii.Market Conformity Analysis (if the instrument will be privately placed).
            9. ix.Any other documents requested by the Central Bank, if deemed necessary.
          • Appendix B: Central Bank of UAE – Processes and Requirements Form for Financial Institutions Operating in UAE

            Summary checklist notification to the Central Bank in relation to a regulatory_capital instrument. In addition, kindly supply the following specific information: the CN1-form and the draft terms and conditions of the instrument. Please note that a submission is incomplete unless all requested information has been supplied.

            DocumentationEnter
            Stage 1:
            Initial Information to the Central Bank
             
            Name of the bank 
            Reasons for the issuance of the instrument 
            Bank to inform the Central Bank from the beginning of the instrument and main features of the capital increase 
            Main features of the planned capital Instrument (section 1, 2 and 3 of the Capital Notification Form 1- CN1 Form which is uploaded on the online Central Bank’s portal under Basel tab) 
            Capital Planning for 5 years under:
            1. i.Business as usual conditions
            2. ii.Without the Instrument
             
            Stress testing results, including results for one scenario in which top 2 credit customers default 
            Central Bank- Financial Stability Department stress test results 
            Stage 2:
            Application Content
            Check
            The bank must submit the following documents to start the approval process: 
            1. a.A legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the terms and conditions are in compliance with the requirements detailed in the Capital Regulations, Standards and Guidance.
             
            1. b.Legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the obligations contained in terms and conditions will constitute legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.
             
            1. c.Legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the Self-Assessment of the issuing bank meets the Conditions and the Capital Regulations.
             
            1. d.Written confirmation from the bank’s external auditor on the accounting treatment of the Instrument
             
            1. e.Fully completed CN1-form signed by the CEO, CFO, Head of Internal Audit, Head of Compliance and Head of Risk
             
            1. f.Detailed terms and conditions that will be part of the prospectus (Note that a comparison of the terms and conditions need to be black-lined if any changes occur)
             
            1. g.Key SPV-related incorporation documents and underlying mudaraba agreement, if applicable.
             
            1. h.Market Conformity Analysis (if the instrument will be privately placed)
             
            1. i.Any other documents requested by the Central Bank, if deemed necessary.

             

             

          • Appendix C: Process of the Eligibility of Capital Instruments

            Banks will adhere to the following process when an application for the eligibility of a current capital instrument is submitted to the Central Bank:

            1. i)The bank has to determine if the current capital instrument has the following features:
              1. a)A conditional Point of Non-Viability (PONV) that;
              2. b)Needs to be activated by the Central Bank.
            2. ii)Once (i) has been met as:
              1. a)Yes: A letter from the Central Bank, the bank should request a letter from the Central Bank, which activates the PONV.
              2. b)No: The bank may directly go to (iii) without approaching the Central Bank for a letter to activate the PONV.
            3. iii)The bank will need to follow the Stage 2 process in Appendix B then approach its appointed external lawyers who will certify if the capital instrument conforms to the requirements of the Central Bank for grandfathering purposes. This certification will have to accompany the eligibility application to the Central Bank.
            4. iv)The Central Bank will determine if the application fulfills the necessary requirements as approved by the Board of the Central Bank.
            5. v)The final application will be submitted to the Central Bank. The Central Bank will decide as to which grandfathering clause to apply to the capital instrument.

            It should be noted that a separate eligibility application for each current capital instrument is required by the Central Bank.

             

        • IV. Credit Risk

          • I. Introduction and Scope

            1.All banks operating in the UAE must use the Standardised Approach to calculate their capital requirements for credit risk with effect from 31st March 2021.

            2.The requirements of the standardised approach for risk weighting of banking book exposures set out in the below sections with regards to exposures related to securitization are risk weighted based on the Standards on Capital for Securitisation Exposures.

            3.Exposures related to banks’ equity investments in funds are risk weighted based on the requirements of the below Standard on Equity Investments in Funds. The credit equivalent amount of over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives that expose a bank to counterparty credit risk is calculated under the requirements set forth in the below Standard on Counterparty Credit Risk Capital. Risk-weighted asset amounts for Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) risk are calculated based on the provisions set out below in the Standard, Credit Valuation Adjustment

            4.In determining the risk weights in the standardised approach, banks must use assessments by external credit assessment institutions recognised as eligible for capital purposes by the Central Bank in accordance with the criteria defined in the Guidance on Recognition of External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAI). Exposures must be risk-weighted net of specific provisions.

            5.The Standards follow the calibration developed by the Basel Committee, which includes a maximum risk weight of 1250%, calibrated on a total capital adequacy requirement of 8%. The UAE instituted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% (excluding capital buffers), applicable to all licensed banks. Consequently, the maximum capital charge for a single exposure will be the lesser of the value of the exposure after applying valid credit risk mitigation, netting and haircuts, and the capital resulting from applying a risk weight of 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%) to this exposure

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, the following terms have the meanings defined in this Standard.

            1. a.Credit conversion factors (CCF): factors used to convert off-balance-sheet items into credit exposure equivalents. Counterparty risk weightings for OTC derivative transactions will not be subject to any specific ceiling.
            2. b.Credit risk mitigation (CRM): technique used by a credit institution to reduce the credit risk associated with an exposure it holds.
            3. c.Non-Commercial PSEs: Administrative bodies accountable to UAE Federal Government and Emirates Governments or to Local Authorities and other non-commercial undertakings owned by the UAE Federal Government and Emirates Governments or Local Authorities.
            4. d.Delivery versus payment (DvP): a securities delivery arrangement in which there is simultaneous exchanges of securities for cash.
            5. e.LTV Ratio: The LTV ratio is the amount of the loan divided by the value of the property. The value of the property must be maintained at the value measured at origination unless the Central Bank requires banks to revise the property value downward. The value must be adjusted if an extraordinary, idiosyncratic event occurs resulting in a permanent reduction of the property value. Modifications made to the property that unequivocally increase its value could also be considered in the LTV.
            6. f.Multilateral Development Bank (MDB): an international financial institution chartered by two or more countries for the purpose of encouraging economic development.
            7. g.Over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives: contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties, without going through an exchange or other intermediary.
            8. h.Payment versus payment (PvP): a mechanism in a foreign exchange settlement system to ensure that a final transfer of one currency occurs only if a final transfer of the other currency or currencies also takes place.
            9. i.Specific provisions: the specific provision requirements as set out in the Regulation for Classification of Loans and their Provisions (Circular 28/2010) and the Clarification and Guidelines Manual for Circular No 28/2010.
            10. j.Undertakings for collective investments in transferable securities (UCITS): a regulatory framework of the European Commission that creates a harmonized regime throughout Europe for the management and sale of mutual funds. UCITS funds can be registered in Europe and sold to investors worldwide using unified regulatory and investor protection requirements.
          • III. Individual Exposures

            • A. Sovereigns and Central Banks

              6.Exposure to the Federal Government and Emirates Government receives 0% risk weight, if such exposures are denominated and funded in AED or USD for a transition period of 7 years from the date of implementation of this Standard. After the transition period, 0% risk weights are only applied to exposures that are denominated and funded in AED.

              7.A 0% risk weight may also be applied to exposures to other GCC sovereigns and their central banks only if these exposures are denominated and funded in the domestic currency of that sovereign and the Supervisory authority of that sovereign has adopted such preferential treatment for exposures to its own sovereign and central bank.

              8.Exposure to the Federal Government and Emirates Government in currencies other than AED or USD and claims on other sovereigns and central banks that do not meet the criteria set out in paragraph 6, are risk weighted as follows:

              Credit AssessmentAAA to AA-A+ to A-BBB+ to BBB-BB+ to B-Below B-Unrated
              Risk Weight0%20%50%100%150%100%

               

              9.Exposure to the Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, the European Central Bank, the European Union, the European Stability Mechanism (ESM) and the European Financial Stability Facility (EFSF) receive a 0% risk weight.

            • B. Public Sector Entities (PSEs)

              10.PSEs include the following categories:

              1. (i)Non-Commercial PSEs; and
              2. (ii)Other PSEs including commercial PSEs (Government Related Entity (GRE) i.e. commercial PSEs that are fully owned or more than 50% in ownership by the UAE government).

              11.Non-Commercial PSEs that are acknowledged by the Central Bank may be treated in the same as Claims on Bank. However, the preferential treatment for short-term claims under Claims on Bank must not be applied to non-commercial PSE. The Central Bank issues a GRE list to banks on a regular basis that the Central Bank considers Non-Commercial PSEs that qualify for this treatment. The Central Bank may allow certain domestic Non-Commercial PSEs to be treated same manner as claims on UAE sovereign if these entities have specific revenue raising powers and have specific institutional arrangements the effect of which is to reduce their risks of default.

              12.Exposure to all other PSEs that are not included on the Central Bank’s list must be treated like exposures to corporates as per section III.F below.

            • C. Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs)

              13.With the exception of the MDBs that meet the criteria specified at paragraph 14 below, the risk weights applied to exposures to MDBs must be based on external credit assessments as set out in the table below.

              Credit assessment of MDBsAAA to AA-A+ to A-BBB+ to BBB-BB+ to B-Below B-Unrated
              Risk weight20%50%50%100%150%50%

               

              14.A 0% risk weight will be applied to exposures to highly rated MDBs that meet the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) eligibility criteria for MDBs risk weighted at 0%.

              1. (i)The BCBS will continue to evaluate eligibility on a case-by-case basis so it is not possible to provide a definitive list of the MDBs that satisfy the BCBS's eligibility criteria. The up-to-date list of MDBs that meet the BCBS's eligibility criteria can be found on the BCBS's website www.bis.org.
              2. (ii)As a national discretion, exposures to the Arab Monetary Fund (AMF) receive 0% risk weight.
            • D. Banks

              15.Claims on banks must be risk weighted based on the external credit assessment of the bank itself as set out in the table below. For the purposes of calculating capital requirements, a bank exposure is defined as a claim on any financial institution that is licensed to take deposits from the public and is subject to appropriate prudential standards and level of supervision.

              16.Claims on unrated banks shall be risk-weighted at 50%. No claim on an unrated bank may receive a risk weight lower than that applied to claims on its sovereign of incorporation.

              17.A preferential risk weight that is one category more favourable shall be applied to claims with an original maturity of three months or less, subject to a floor of 20%. This treatment shall be available to both rated and unrated banks, but not to banks risk weighted at 150%. Short-term claims in the table below are defined as having an original maturity of three months or less. However, claims with (contractual) original maturity under three months which are rolled over (i.e., where the effective maturity is longer than three months) shall not qualify as short-term claims and shall not enjoy the preferential risk weighting treatment.

              Credit assessment of BanksAAA to AA-A+ to A-BBB+ to BBB-BB+ to B-Below B-Unrated
              Risk Weight20%50%50%100%150%50%
              Risk Weight Short Term claims20%20%20%50%150%20%

               

            • E. Securities Firms

              18.Claims on securities firms shall be treated as claims on banks provided the securities firms are authorized by a competent authority and subject to supervisory and regulatory arrangements that are the same or equivalent to those under this standards, including, in particular, risk-based capital requirements. Otherwise, such claims must follow the rules for claims on corporates as per section III F below.

            • F. Corporates

              19.The table provided below in the next paragraph illustrates the risk weighting of rated corporate claims, including claims on insurance companies.

              20.The standard risk weight for unrated claims on corporates shall be 100%. No claim on an unrated corporate may be given a risk weight that is lower than that assigned to its sovereign of incorporation. For unrated exposures to Small- and Medium-sized Entities (SME) that do not meet the criteria in paragraph 21, an 85% risk weight will be applied. The Central Bank may, at its sole discretion, require a higher risk weighting for some unrated corporates as advised to banks directly where appropriate.

              Credit assessmentAAA to AA-A+ to A-BBB+ to BB-Below BB-Unrated
              Risk Weight20%50%100%150%100%

               

            • G. Regulatory Retail Portfolios

              21.A 75% risk weighting may apply for exposures classified as “Retail” except as provided below for past due loans as per section III J below. For an exposure to be classified as “Retail” the Central Bank will need to be satisfied that the four criteria listed below are met:

              1. (i)Orientation criterion – Exposure to a natural person or persons, or Small- and Medium-sized Entities (SME);
              2. (ii)Product criterion – Eligible products included are credit cards, revolving credit, personal lending and small business credit facilities. Residential mortgage products are excluded as these are treated separately as “Claims Secured by Residential Property” as per section H below;
              3. (iii)Granularity criterion – No exposure to any one counterparty can exceed 0.20% of the total regulatory retail portfolio being evaluated (exposure is gross before any credit risk mitigation; and one counterparty includes connected persons);
              4. (iv)Value criterion –
                1. (i)Maximum aggregated exposure to one counterparty must not exceed the value of AED 4,000,000 for exposures to SME,
                2. (ii)For all other exposures, the maximum aggregated exposure to one counterparty must not exceed the value of AED 2,000,000.

              22.The Central Bank reserves the right to increase the 75% risk weight if this risk weight value is deemed to be too low based on the default experience for these types of exposures in the UAE. Exposures to SMEs that do not meet all of the above criteria set out in paragraph 21 are treated as under the corporate asset class and must follow the rules for claims on corporates as per Section III F above.

            • H. Claims Secured by Residential Property

              23.A 35% risk weighting shall apply to exposures fully secured by eligible immovable residential property that is occupied by the owner or that is rented, and where the purpose of the facility is to fund the purchase of the property. This risk weight value shall be applied only where there exists a substantial margin of additional security over the amount of the loan.

              24.Residential property shall be considered eligible immovable property if the following criteria are met:

              1. (i)A mortgage is enforceable in all jurisdictions which are relevant at the time of the conclusion of the credit agreement and shall be appropriately filed within a reasonable time;
              2. (ii)All legal requirements for establishing the mortgage have been fulfilled;
              3. (iii)The protection agreement and the legal process underpinning it enable the bank to realise the value of the property within a reasonable timeframe;
              4. (iv)Location of the property must be in the UAE; and
              5. (v)Banks shall have in place procedures to monitor that the property taken as credit protection is adequately insured against the risk of damage.

              25.Banks shall be responsible to monitor on an ongoing basis that the criteria listed in paragraph 24 above are met. In case of failure to conduct such internal monitoring or if the results of such internal monitoring indicate that the criteria are not met, the residential property cannot be considered eligible immovable property for the application of the 35% risk weight.

              26.Banks shall clearly document the types of residential immovable property they accept and their lending policies in this regard.

              27.Exposures secured by eligible residential real estate, as specified by the eligibility criteria set out in paragraph 24 above, and for which the 35% risk weight applies must not exceed any of the two items below:

              1. (i)85% of the market value of the property (i.e., the LTV ratio must be less than or equal to 85%); and
              2. (ii)AED 10 million;

              28.If the two criteria listed above in paragraph 27 cannot be definitively established or met, then the 35% risk weight cannot be applied. If the exposure meets the criteria for regulatory retail claims as set out at paragraph 21 then a 75% risk weight applies, otherwise a 100% risk weighting must be used.

              29.The Central Bank may increase the 35% risk weight if this risk weight is deemed to be too low based on the default experience for these types of exposures in the UAE.

            • I. Claims Secured by Commercial Real Estate

              30.A 100% risk weighting shall apply to exposures secured by commercial real estate. For the purposes of this paragraph, a commercial real estate exposure is an exposure secured by immovable property that is not residential real estate as per section III H above.

            • J. Past Due Loans

              31.The unsecured portion of any loan (other than a residential mortgage loan as per section H above) that is past due for more than 90 days, net of specific provisions (including partial write-offs), must be risk-weighted as follows:

              1. (i)150% risk weight when specific provisions are less than 20% of the outstanding amount of the loan;
              2. (ii)100% risk weight when specific provisions are 20% and above of the outstanding amount of the loan.

              32.In the case of residential mortgage loans as per section H above, when such loans are past due for more than 90 days they shall be risk weighted at 100%, net of any specific provisions.

              33.For the purpose of defining the secured portion of the past due loan, eligible collateral and guarantees shall be the same as for Credit Risk Mitigation set out below at section IV.

              34.Past due retail loans are to be excluded from the overall regulatory retail portfolio when assessing the granularity criterion specified in Paragraph 21, for risk-weighting purposes.

            • K. Higher Risk Categories

              35.The following claims shall be risk weighted at 150% or higher:

              1. (i)Claims on sovereigns, PSEs, banks, and securities firms rated below B-;
              2. (ii)Claims on corporates rated below BB-;
              3. (iii)Past due loans as set out in section J above; and
              4. (iv)Real estate acquired in settlement of debt and not liquidated within the statutory period (Article 93 of Federal Law).

              36.The Central Bank may apply a 150% or higher risk weight reflecting the higher risks associated with the assets.

              37.The risk weights applicable to securitisation and re-securitisation exposures are set out in the Standards on Capital for Securitisation Exposures.

            • L. Other Assets

              38.Gold bullion held in own vaults or on an allocated basis to the extent backed by bullion liabilities shall be treated as cash and therefore risk-weighted at 0%.

              39.Cash items in the process of collection are risk-weighted at 20%.

              40.Investments in commercial entities shall be treated as per the Capital Supply standard.

              41.Exposure to investments in the capital of banking, securities, financial and insurance entities, must be treated as per the Capital Supply standard.

              42.The treatment of securitisation exposures is presented separately in line with Securitisation Standard below in these standards.

              43.The standard risk weight for exposure to all other assets not specifically mentioned shall be 100%.

            • M. Off-Balance Sheet Items

              44.Off-balance sheet items must be converted into credit exposure equivalents through the use of CCF.

              Credit Conversion Factor of 100%

              45.The following items must be converted into credit exposure equivalents through the use of CCF of 100%:

              1. (i)All direct credit substitutes, including general guarantees of indebtedness (such as standby letters of credit serving as financial guarantees for loans and securities) and acceptances (such as endorsements with the character of acceptances);
              2. (ii)Sale and repurchase agreements and asset sales with recourse, where the credit risk remains with the bank;
              3. (iii)Forward asset purchases, forward deposits and commitments for the unpaid portion of partly-paid shares and securities which represent commitments with certain draw-downs, and which shall be risk-weighted according to the type of asset and not according to the type of counterparty with whom the transaction has been entered into;
              4. (iv)The lending of banks’ securities or the posting of securities as collateral by banks, including instances where these arise out of repo-style transactions (i.e., repurchase/reverse repurchase and securities lending/securities borrowing transactions). Section IV on credit risk mitigation sets out the requirements for the calculation of risk-weighted assets where the credit converted exposure is secured by eligible collateral;
              5. (v)Off-balance sheet items that are credit substitutes not explicitly included in any other category (including credit derivatives such as credit default swaps).

              Credit Conversion Factor of 50%

              46.The following items must be converted into credit exposure equivalents through the use of CCF of 50%:

              1. (i)Transaction-related contingent items (e.g., performance bonds, bid bonds warranties, and standby letters of credit related to particular transactions);
              2. (ii)Underwriting commitments under note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities regardless of maturity of the underlying facility;
              3. (iii)Other commitments that are not unconditionally cancellable with an original maturity exceeding one year.

              Credit Conversion Factor of 20%

              47.The following items must be converted into credit exposure equivalents through the use of CCF of 20%:

              1. (i)Other commitments not unconditionally cancellable with an original maturity of one year or less; and
              2. (ii)Short-term self-liquidating trade letters of credit arising from the movement of goods (e.g., documentary credits collateralised by the underlying shipment), for both issuing and confirming banks.

              Credit Conversion Factor of 0%

              48.Any commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the bank without prior notice, or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower’s creditworthiness must be converted into credit exposure equivalents using CCF of 0%.

              Other Principles

              49.Where there is an undertaking to provide a commitment on an off-balance sheet item (i.e., commitment for a commitment), banks shall apply the lower of the two applicable CCFs.

              50.The credit equivalent amount of OTC derivatives that expose a bank to counterparty credit risk shall be calculated under the rules set forth below in the Counterparty Credit Risk Standard below.

              Failed Trades and Non-DvP Transactions

              51.Banks shall closely monitor securities, commodities, and foreign exchange transactions that have failed or not been timely settled.

              Principles for Failed Trades and Non-DvP Transactions

              52.DvP also refers to PvP transactions for the purpose of this Standard. Transactions settled through a DvP system, providing simultaneous exchanges of securities for cash, expose firms to a risk of loss on the difference between the transaction valued at the agreed settlement price and the transaction valued at current market price (i.e., positive current exposure). Transactions where cash is paid without receipt of the corresponding receivable (securities, foreign currencies, gold, or commodities) or, conversely, deliverables were delivered without receipt of the corresponding cash payment (i.e., non-DvP, or free-delivery transactions) expose firms to a risk of loss on the full amount of cash paid or deliverables delivered. Specific capital charges address these two kinds of exposures.

              53.The following capital treatment is applicable to all transactions on securities, foreign exchange instruments, and commodities that give rise to a risk of delayed settlement or delivery. This includes transactions through recognised clearing houses that are subject to daily mark-to-market and payment of daily variation margins and that involve a mismatched trade. Repurchase and reverse-repurchase agreements as well as securities lending and borrowing that have failed to settle are excluded from this capital treatment. (All repurchase and reverse-repurchase agreements as well as securities lending and borrowing, including those that have failed to settle, shall be treated in accordance with the sections on CRM below).

              54.In cases of a system wide failure of a settlement or clearing system, the Central Bank may use its discretion to waive capital charges until the situation is rectified.

              55.Failure of a counterparty to settle a trade in itself shall not be deemed a default for purposes of credit risk.

              Capital Requirements for Failed Trades and Non-DvP Transactions

              56.The capital requirement for failed trades and Non-DvP transactions shall be calculated as follows:

              1. (i)For DvP transactions, if the payments have not yet taken place five business days after the settlement date, firms must calculate a capital charge by multiplying the positive current exposure of the transaction by the appropriate factor, according to the table below.
                 
                Number of working days after the agreed settlement dateCorresponding risk multiplier
                From 5 to 158%
                From 16 to 3050%
                From 31 to 4575%
                46 or more100%
              2.  
              3. (ii)For Non-DvP transactions (i.e., free deliveries), after the first contractual payment/delivery leg, the bank that has made the payment shall treat its exposure as a loan if the second leg has not been received by the end of the business day. This means that a bank shall use the risk weights set forth in the exposure classes set out in this Standard. However, when exposures are not material, banks may choose to apply a uniform 100% risk-weight to these exposures, in order to avoid the burden of a full credit assessment.
              4. (iii)If five business days after the second contractual payment/delivery date the second leg has not yet effectively taken place, the bank that has made the first payment leg shall deduct from capital the full amount of the value transferred plus replacement cost, if any. This treatment shall apply until the second payment/delivery leg is effectively made.
          • IV. Credit Risk Mitigation

            • A. Introduction and General Requirements

              Introduction

              57.Banks may use a number of techniques to mitigate the credit risks to which they are exposed. For example, exposures may be collateralised by first priority claims, in whole or in part with cash or securities, a loan exposure may be guaranteed by a third party, or a bank may buy a credit derivative to offset various forms of credit risk. Additionally, banks may agree to net loans owed to them against deposits from the same counterparty.

              58.In this Standard, “counterparty” is used to denote a party to whom a bank has an on or off-balance sheet credit exposure. That exposure may, for example, take the form of a loan of cash or securities (where the counterparty would traditionally be called the borrower), of securities posted as collateral, of a commitment or of exposure under an OTC derivatives contract

              General Requirements for legal certainty

              59.The Central Bank recognizes certain credit risk mitigation techniques for regulatory capital purposes, provided that all documentation used in collateralised transactions and for documenting on-balance sheet netting, guarantees and credit derivatives are binding on all parties and legally enforceable in all relevant jurisdictions, and that banks have conducted sufficient legal review to verify this and have a well-founded legal basis to reach this conclusion, and undertake such further review as necessary to ensure continuing enforceability.

              60.Where a bank has a single exposure covered either by more than one type of credit risk mitigation, or by differing maturities of protection provided by the same credit protection provider, the bank shall:

              1. (i)Subdivide the exposure into parts covered by each type or maturity of credit risk mitigation tool; and
              2. (ii)Calculate the risk-weighted assets for each part obtained in point (i) above separately in accordance with the risk weights applicable to each exposure category as described in the relevant section.

              61.The comprehensive approach for the treatment of collateral (described further below from paragraph 85) shall also be applied to calculate the counterparty risk charges for OTC derivatives and repo-style transactions booked in the trading book.

              62.No transaction in which CRM techniques are used shall receive a higher capital requirement than an otherwise identical transaction where such techniques are not used.

              63.The effects of CRM shall not be double counted. Therefore, no additional supervisory recognition of CRM for regulatory capital purposes shall be granted on claims for which an issue-specific rating is used that already reflects that CRM. Principal-only ratings shall also not be allowed within the framework of CRM to claims for which an external credit assessment can be conducted.

              64.Considering that, while the use of CRM techniques reduces or transfers credit risk, it simultaneously may increase other risks (residual risks), and that residual risks include legal, operational, liquidity and market risks, banks shall employ robust procedures and processes to control these risks, including strategy, consideration of the underlying credit, valuation, policies and procedures, systems, control of roll-off risks, and management of concentration risk arising from the bank’s use of CRM techniques and its interaction with the bank’s overall credit risk profile. Where these risks are not adequately controlled, the Central Bank may impose additional capital charges or take other supervisory actions under Pillar 2.

              65.The banks shall also observe the Central Bank’s Pillar 3 requirements to obtain capital relief in respect of any CRM techniques.

            • B. Collateralised Transactions

              66.A collateralised transaction is one in which:

              1. (i)Banks have a credit exposure or potential credit exposure; and
              2. (ii)Credit exposure or potential credit exposure is hedged in whole or in part by collateral posted by a counterparty or by a third party on behalf of the counterparty.

              67.Where banks take eligible financial collateral (e.g., cash or securities, more specifically as per section IV C (a)), they are allowed to reduce their credit exposure to a counterparty when calculating their capital requirements to take account of the risk mitigating effect of the collateral.

              Overall framework

              68.Banks may opt for either the simple approach (described further in Section IV C(c)), which substitutes the risk weighting of the collateral for the risk weighting of the counterparty for the collateralised portion of the exposure (generally subject to a 20% floor), or for the Comprehensive Approach (described further in Section IV C(b)), which allows fuller offset of collateral against exposures, by effectively reducing the exposure amount by the value ascribed to the collateral.

              69.Partial collateralisation is recognised in both approaches.

              70.Mismatches in the maturity of the underlying exposure and the collateral shall only be allowed under the comprehensive approach.

              71.Banks shall operate under either the simple approach or comprehensive approach, but not both approaches, in the banking book, but only under the comprehensive approach in the trading book.

              72.Banks that intend to apply the comprehensive approach require prior approval from the Central Bank.

              Minimum Conditions

              73.The minimum conditions set out below must be met before capital relief will be granted in respect of any form of collateral under either the simple approach or comprehensive approach.

              74.In addition to the general requirements for legal certainty set out above at paragraph 59 to 65, the legal mechanism by which collateral is pledged or transferred shall ensure that the bank has the right to liquidate or take legal possession of it, in a timely manner, in the event of the default, insolvency or bankruptcy (or one or more otherwise-defined credit events set out in the transaction documentation) of the counterparty (and, where applicable, of the custodian holding the collateral). Furthermore, banks shall take all steps necessary to fulfil those requirements under the law applicable to the bank’s interest in the collateral for obtaining and maintaining an enforceable security interest, e.g., by registering it with a registrar, or for exercising a right to net or set off in relation to title transfer collateral.

              75.In order for collateral to provide protection, the credit quality of the counterparty and the value of the collateral must not have a material positive correlation (for example, securities issued by the counterparty - or by any related group entity - would provide little protection and so would be ineligible).

              76.Banks shall have clear and robust procedures for the timely liquidation of collateral to ensure that any legal conditions required for declaring the default of the counterparty and liquidating the collateral are observed, and that collateral can be liquidated promptly.

              77.Where the collateral is held by a custodian, banks shall take reasonable steps to ensure that the custodian segregates the collateral from its own assets.

              78.A capital requirement shall be applied to a bank on either side of the collateralised transaction (for example, both repos and reverse repos shall be subject to capital requirements). Likewise, both sides of a securities lending and borrowing transaction shall be subject to explicit capital charges, as shall the posting of securities in connection with a derivative exposure or other borrowing.

              79.Where a bank, acting as an agent, arranges a repo-style transaction (i.e., repurchase/reverse repurchase and securities lending/borrowing transactions) between a customer and a third party and provides a guarantee to the customer that the third party will perform on its obligations, then the risk to the bank shall be the same as if the bank had entered into the transaction as a principal. In such circumstances, a bank shall be required to calculate capital requirements as if it were itself the principal.

              The simple approach

              80.In the simple approach the risk weighting of the collateral instrument collateralising or partially collateralising the exposure shall be substituted for the risk weighting of the counterparty. Details of this framework are provided further below at section IV C (c).

              The comprehensive approach

              81.In the comprehensive approach, when taking collateral, banks shall calculate their adjusted exposure amount to a counterparty for capital adequacy purposes in order to take account of the effects of that collateral. Using haircuts, banks shall adjust both the amount of the exposure to the counterparty and the value of any collateral received in support of that counterparty to take account of possible future fluctuations in the value of either, occasioned by market movements (exposure amounts may vary, for example where securities are being lent.) This will produce volatility-adjusted amounts for both exposure and collateral. Unless either side of the transaction is cash, the volatility-adjusted amount for the exposure shall be higher than the exposure and for the collateral, it shall be lower.

              82.Where the exposure and collateral are held in different currencies an additional downwards adjustment shall be made to the volatility adjusted collateral amount to take account of possible future fluctuations in exchange rates.

              83.Where the volatility-adjusted exposure amount is greater than the volatility-adjusted collateral amount (including any further adjustment for foreign exchange risk), banks shall calculate their risk-weighted assets as the difference between the two multiplied by the risk weight of the counterparty. The framework for performing these calculations is set out further below in paragraph 97 to 100.

              84.Banks shall use the standard supervisory haircuts and the parameters therein as set by the Central Bank. The use of own-estimate haircuts that rely on banks own internal estimates of market price volatility is prohibited.

              85.The size of the individual haircuts shall depend on the type of instrument, type of transaction and the frequency of marking-to-market and re-margining (for example, repo style transactions subject to daily marking-to-market and to daily re-margining will receive a haircut based on a 5-business day holding period and secured lending transactions with daily mark-to-market and no re-margining clauses will receive a haircut based on a 20-business day holding period. These haircut numbers will be scaled up using the square root of time formula depending on the frequency of re-margining or marking-to-market).

              86.For certain types of repo-style transactions (broadly speaking government bond repos) banks are permitted in certain cases not to apply the standard supervisory haircuts in calculating the exposure amount after risk mitigation. Paragraph 108 lists cases where such treatment is allowed.

              87.The effect of master netting agreements covering repo-style transactions can be recognised for the calculation of capital requirements subject to the conditions specified in Paragraph 110.

              On-balance sheet netting

              88.Where banks have legally enforceable netting arrangements for loans and deposits they may calculate capital requirements on the basis of net credit exposures subject to the conditions in paragraphs 120.

              Guarantees and credit derivatives

              89.Where guarantees or credit derivatives are direct, explicit, irrevocable and unconditional, and the Central Bank is satisfied that banks fulfil certain minimum operational conditions relating to risk management processes, banks are allowed to take account of such credit protection in calculating capital requirements.

              90.A range of guarantors and protection providers are recognized by the Central Bank. A substitution approach shall be applied. Thus only guarantees issued by or protection provided by entities with a lower risk weight than the counterparty will lead to reduced capital charges since the protected portion of the counterparty exposure is assigned the risk weight of the guarantor or protection provider, whereas the uncovered portion retains the risk weight of the underlying counterparty. Detailed operational requirements for the recognition of guarantees and credit derivatives are given below in paragraphs 122 to 128.

              Maturity mismatch

              91.Where the residual maturity of the CRM is less than that of the underlying credit exposure a maturity mismatch occurs.

              92.Where there is a maturity mismatch and the CRM has an original maturity of less than one year, the CRM shall not be recognised for capital purposes. In other cases where there is a maturity mismatch, partial recognition shall be given to the CRM for regulatory capital purposes as detailed below in paragraphs 137 to 140.

              93.Under the simple approach, such partial recognition is not allowed for collateral maturity mismatches.

              Miscellaneous

              94.The treatments for pools of credit risk mitigants and first- and second-to-default credit derivatives are given in paragraphs 141 to 145.

            • C. Collateral

              a) Eligible financial collateral

              95.The following collateral instruments are eligible for recognition in the simple approach:

              1. (i)Cash (as well as certificates of deposit or comparable instruments issued by the lending bank) on deposit with the bank which is incurring the counterparty exposure.

                Note 1: Cash funded credit linked notes issued by the bank against exposures in the banking book which fulfil the criteria for credit derivatives will be treated as cash collateralised transactions.

                Note 2: When cash on deposit, certificates of deposit or comparable instruments issued by the lending bank are held as collateral at a third-party bank in a noncustodial arrangement, if they are openly pledged/assigned to the lending bank and if the pledge/assignment is unconditional and irrevocable, the exposure amount covered by the collateral (after any necessary haircuts for currency risk) will receive the risk weight of the third-party bank);
                 
              2. (ii)Gold;
              3. (iii)Debt securities rated by a recognised external credit assessment institution where these are either:
                • Rated at least BB- when issued by sovereigns or PSEs that are treated as sovereigns by the Central Bank; or
                • At least BBB- when issued by other entities (including banks and securities firms); or
                • At least A-3/P-3 for short-term debt instruments.
              4. (iv)Debt securities not rated by a recognised external credit assessment institution where these are:
                • Issued by a bank; and
                • Listed on a recognised exchange; and
                • Classified as senior debt; and
                • All rated issues of the same seniority by the issuing bank must be rated at least BBB- or A-3/P-3 by a recognised external credit assessment institution; and
                • The bank holding the securities as collateral has no information to suggest that the issue justifies a rating below BBB- or A-3/P-3 (as applicable); and
                • The Central Bank is sufficiently confident about the market liquidity of the security.
              5. (v)Equities (including convertible bonds) that are included in a main index (a widely accepted index that ensures adequate liquidity, depth of market, and size of bid-ask spread).
              6. (vi)UCITS and mutual funds where:
                • A price for the units is publicly quoted daily; and
                • The UCITS/mutual fund is limited to investing in the instruments listed in this paragraph. However, the use or potential use by a UCITS/mutual fund of derivative instruments solely to hedge investments listed in this paragraph and the next paragraph shall not prevent units in that UCITS/mutual fund from being eligible financial collateral.

              96.The following collateral instruments are eligible for recognition in the comprehensive approach:

              1. (i)All of the collateral instruments that are eligible for recognition in the Simple Approach, as outlined in the above at paragraph 95;
              2. (ii)Equities (including convertible bonds) which are not included in a main index but which are listed on a recognised exchange;
              3. (iii)UCITS/mutual funds which include such equities.

              b) The Comprehensive Approach

              Calculation of Adjusted exposure

              97.For a collateralised transaction, the exposure amount after risk mitigation is calculated as follows:

              E=max{0,[Ex(1+He)C×(1HcHfx)]}

              where:

               
              E*=The exposure value after risk mitigation;
              E=Current value of the exposure;
              He=Haircut appropriate to the exposure;
              C=The current value of the collateral received;
              Hc=Haircut appropriate to the collateral; and
              Hfx=Haircut appropriate for currency mismatch between the collateral and exposure.
               

              98.The exposure amount after risk mitigation shall be multiplied by the risk weight of the counterparty to obtain the risk-weighted asset amount for the collateralised transaction.

              99.The treatment for transactions where there is a mismatch between the maturity of the counterparty exposure and the collateral is given in paragraphs 137 to 140.

              100.Where the collateral is a basket of assets, the haircut on the basket will be

              H=ΣıaiHi

              where:

               
              ai=The weight of the asset (as measured by units of currency) in the basket;
              Hi=The haircut applicable to that asset.
               

              Standard supervisory haircuts

              101.The following table sets the standard supervisory haircuts (assuming daily mark-to-market, daily re-margining and a 10-business day holding period), expressed as percentages:

              Issue rating for debt securitiesResidual MaturitySovereigns (a)Other issuers
              AAA to AA-/A-1≤ 1 year0.51
              >1 year, ≤ 5 years24
              > 5 years48
              A+ to BBB-/A-2/A-3/P-3 and unrated bank securities≤ 1 year12
              >1 year, ≤ 5 years36
              > 5 years612
              BB+ to BB-All15 
              Gold  15

              Equities (including convertible bonds) listed on a recognized exchange, including main index equities

                25
              UCITS/Mutual funds

              Highest haircut applicable to any security in which the fund can invest

              Cash in the same currency (b)  0

               

              (a) includes multilateral development banks receiving a 0% risk weight.

              (b) represents eligible cash collateral specified as 'Cash' as per item (i), in Paragraph 95.
               

               

              102.The standard supervisory haircut for currency risk where exposure and collateral are denominated in different currencies is 8% (also based on a 10-business day holding period and daily mark-to-market).

              103.For transactions in which the bank lends non-eligible instruments (e.g., noninvestment grade corporate debt securities), the haircut to be applied on the exposure must be the same as the one for equity traded on a recognised exchange.

              Adjustment for different holding periods and non-daily mark-to-market or re-margining

              104.For some transactions, depending on the nature and frequency of the revaluation and re-margining provisions, different holding periods are appropriate. The framework for collateral haircuts distinguishes between repo-style transactions (i.e., repo/reverse repos and securities lending/borrowing), “other capital-market-driven transactions” (i.e., OTC derivatives transactions and margin lending) and secured lending. In capital-market-driven transactions and repo-style transactions, the documentation contains re-margining clauses; in secured lending transactions, it generally does not.

              105.The minimum holding period for various products or transactions is summarised in the table below:

              Transaction typeMinimum holding periodCondition
              Repo-style transactionFive business daysDaily re-margining
              Other capital market transactionsTen business daysDaily re-margining
              Secured lendingTwenty business daysDaily re-margining

               

              106.When the frequency of re-margining or revaluation is longer than the minimum, the minimum haircut numbers shall be scaled up depending on the actual number of business days between re-margining or revaluation using the square root of time formula below:

              1

              where:

               
              H=Haircut;
              HM=Haircut under the minimum holding period;
              TM=Minimum holding period for the type of transaction; and
              NR=Actual number of business days between re-margining for capital market transactions or revaluation for secured transactions.

              107.When a bank calculates the volatility on a TN day holding period which is different from the specified minimum holding period TM, the HM will be calculated using the square root of time formula:

              2

              where:

               
              TN=Holding period used by the bank for deriving HN; and
              HN=Haircut based on the holding period TN
               

              For example, the 10-business day haircuts provided in the table under Paragraph 101 shall be the basis and this haircut shall be scaled up or down depending on the type of transaction and the frequency of re-margining or revaluation using the formula below:

              3

              where:

               
              H=Haircut;
              H10=10-business day standard supervisory haircut for instrument;
              NR=Actual number of business days between re-margining for capital market transactions or revaluation for secured transactions; and
              TM=Minimum holding period for the type of transaction.
               

              Conditions for zero Haircut on repo-style transactions with a core market participant

              108.For repo-style transactions where the following conditions are satisfied, and the counterparty is a Core Market Participant (see definition in the next paragraph), banks may choose not to apply the haircuts specified in the Comprehensive Approach and may instead apply a haircut of zero. However, counterparties specified in 109 (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi) require prior approval from the Central Bank.

              1. (i)Both the exposure and the collateral are cash or a sovereign security or PSE security qualifying for a 0% risk weight in the standardised approach;
              2. (ii)Both the exposure and the collateral are denominated in the same currency;
              3. (iii)Either the transaction is overnight or both the exposure and the collateral are marked-to-market daily and are subject to daily re-margining;
              4. (iv)Following a counterparty’s failure to re-margin, the time that is required between the last mark-to-market before the failure to re-margin and the liquidation of the collateral is considered to be no more than four (4) business days. It is noted this does not require the bank to always liquidate the collateral but rather to have the capability to do so within the given time frame;
              5. (v)The transaction is settled across a settlement system proven for that type of transaction;
              6. (vi)The documentation covering the agreement is standard market documentation for repo-style transactions in the securities concerned;
              7. (vii)The transaction is governed by documentation specifying that if the counterparty fails to satisfy an obligation to deliver cash or securities or to deliver margin or otherwise defaults, then the transaction is immediately terminable; and
              8. (viii)Upon any default event, regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt, the bank has the unfettered, legally enforceable right to immediately seize and liquidate the collateral for its benefit.

              109.Core Market Participants are the following entities:

              1. (i)Sovereigns, central banks and Non-commercial PSEs;
              2. (ii)Banks and securities firms;
              3. (iii)Other financial companies (including insurance companies) eligible for a 20% risk weight in the standardised approach;
              4. (iv)Regulated mutual funds that are subject to capital or leverage requirements;
              5. (v)Regulated pension funds; and
              6. (vi)Recognised clearing organisations.

              Treatment of repo-style transactions covered under master netting agreements

              110.The effects of bilateral netting agreements covering repo-style transactions will be recognised on a counterparty-by-counterparty basis if the agreements are legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt. In addition, netting agreements must:

              1. (i)Provide the non-defaulting party the right to terminate and close-out in a timely manner all transactions under the agreement upon an event of default, including in the event of insolvency or bankruptcy of the counterparty; and
              2. (ii)Provide for the netting of gains and losses on transactions (including the value of any collateral) terminated and closed out under it so that a single net amount is owed by one party to the other; and
              3. (iii)Allow for the prompt liquidation or setoff of collateral upon the event of default; and
              4. (iv)Be, together with the rights arising from the provisions required in (i) to (iii) above, legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of the counterparty's insolvency or bankruptcy.

              111.Netting across positions in the banking and trading book will only be recognized when the netted transactions fulfil both of the following two conditions:

              1. (i)All transactions are marked to market daily. It is noted that the holding period for the haircuts will depend as in other repo-style transactions on the frequency of margining; and
              2. (ii)The collateral instruments used in the transactions are recognised as eligible financial collateral in the banking book.

              112.The formula in paragraphs 97 will be adapted to calculate the capital requirements for transactions with netting agreements.

              113.For banks using the standard supervisory haircuts, the framework below will apply to take into account the impact of master netting agreements.

              E=max{0,[(Σ(E)Σ(C))+Σ(Es×Hs)+Σ(Efx×Hfx)]}

              where:

               
              E*=The exposure value after risk mitigation;
              E=Current value of the exposure;
              C=The value of the collateral received;
              Es=Absolute value of the net position in a given security;
              Hs=Haircut appropriate to Es;
              Efx=Absolute value of the net position in a currency different from the settlement currency; and
              Hfx=Haircut appropriate for currency mismatch.
               

              114.The intention here is to obtain a net exposure amount after netting of the exposures and collateral and have an add-on amount reflecting possible price changes for the securities involved in the transactions and for foreign exchange risk if any. The net long or short position of each security included in the netting agreement will be multiplied by the appropriate haircut. All other rules regarding the calculation of haircuts stated in paragraphs under the comprehensive approach equivalently apply for banks using bilateral netting agreements for repo-style transactions.

              c) The Simple Approach

              Minimum conditions

              115.For collateral to be recognised in the simple approach the collateral must be pledged for at least the life of the exposure and it must be marked to market and revalued with a minimum frequency of six months. Those portions of claims collateralised by the market value of recognised collateral receive the risk weight applicable to the collateral instrument. The risk weight on the collateralised portion will be subject to a floor of 20% except under the conditions specified in paragraphs 116 to 118. The remainder of the claim must be assigned to the risk weight appropriate to the counterparty. A capital requirement will be applied to banks on either side of the collateralised transaction: for example, both repos and reverse repos will be subject to capital requirements.

               

              Exceptions to the risk weight floor

               

              116.Transactions that fulfil the criteria outlined in paragraph 108 and are with a core market participant, as defined in paragraph 109; receive a risk weight of 0%. If the counterparty to the transactions is not a core market participant, the transaction must receive a risk weight of 10%.

              117.OTC derivative transactions subject to daily mark-to-market, collateralised by cash and where there is no currency mismatch must receive a 0% risk weight. Such transactions collateralised by sovereign can receive a 10% risk weight.

              118.The 20% floor for the risk weight on a collateralised transaction will not be applied and a 0% risk weight can be applied where the exposure and the collateral are denominated in the same currency, and either:

              1. (i)The collateral is cash on deposit as defined in item (i), namely Cash, in paragraph 95; or
              2. (ii)The collateral is in the form of sovereign and its market value has been discounted by 20%.

              d) Collateralised OTC derivatives transactions

              119.Under the SA-CCR Standard, the calculation of risk weighted assets for counterparty credit risk depends on replacement cost and an add-on for potential future exposure, and takes into account collateral in the manner specified in that Standard. The haircut for currency risk (Hfx) must be applied when there is a mismatch between the collateral currency and the settlement currency. Even in the case where there are more than two currencies involved in the exposure, collateral and settlement currency, a single haircut assuming a 10- business day holding period scaled up as necessary depending on the frequency of mark- to-market will be applied.

            • D. On-Balance Sheet Netting

              120.A bank may use the net exposure of loans and deposits as the basis for its capital adequacy calculation in accordance with the formula in Paragraph 97, where the bank:

              1. (i)Has a well-founded legal basis for concluding that the netting or offsetting agreement is enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt;
              2. (ii)Is able at any time to determine those assets and liabilities with the same counterparty that are subject to the netting agreement;
              3. (iii)Monitors and controls its roll-off risks; and
              4. (iv)Monitors and controls the relevant exposures on a net basis.

              121.Assets (loans) are treated as exposure and liabilities (deposits) as collateral. The haircuts will be zero except when a currency mismatch exists. A 10-business day holding period will apply when daily mark-to-market is conducted and all the requirements stipulated under paragraphs 101, 107, and 137 to 140 will apply.

            • E. Guarantees and Credit Derivatives

              a) Operational requirements

              Operational requirements common to guarantees and credit derivatives

              122.A guarantee (counter-guarantee) or credit derivative must represent a direct claim on the protection provider and must be explicitly referenced to specific exposures or a pool of exposures, so that the extent of the cover is clearly defined and incontrovertible. Other than non-payment by a protection purchaser of money due in respect of the credit protection contract it must be irrevocable; there must be no clause in the contract that would allow the protection provider unilaterally to cancel the credit cover or that would increase the effective cost of cover as a result of deteriorating credit quality in the hedged exposure (Note that the irrevocability condition does not require that the credit protection and the exposure be maturity matched; rather that the maturity agreed ex ante may not be reduced ex post by the protection provider. Paragraph 138 sets forth the treatment of call options in determining remaining maturity for credit protection). It must also be unconditional; there must be no clause in the protection contract outside the direct control of the bank that could prevent the protection provider from being obliged to pay out in a timely manner in the event that the original counterparty fails to make the payment(s) due.

              Additional operational requirements for guarantees

              123.In addition to the legal certainty requirements described in paragraph 59, in order for a guarantee to be recognised, the following conditions must be satisfied:

              1. (i)On the qualifying default/non-payment of the counterparty, the bank may pursue the guarantor for any monies outstanding under the documentation governing the transaction within a reasonable time period. The guarantor may make one lump sum payment of all monies under such documentation to the bank, or the guarantor may assume the future payment obligations of the counterparty covered by the guarantee. The bank must have the right to receive any such payments from the guarantor without first having to take legal actions in order to pursue the counterparty for payment;
              2. (ii)The guarantee is an explicitly documented obligation assumed by the guarantor; and
              3. (iii)Except as noted in the following sentence, the guarantee covers all types of payments the underlying obligor is expected to make under the documentation governing the transaction, for example notional amount, margin payments etc. Where a guarantee covers payment of principal only, interests and other uncovered payments must be treated as an unsecured amount in accordance with paragraph 136.

              Additional operational requirements for credit derivatives

              124.In order for a credit derivative contract to be recognised, the following conditions must be satisfied:

              1. (i)The credit events specified by the contracting parties must at a minimum cover:
                • Failure to pay the amounts due under terms of the underlying obligation that are in effect at the time of such failure (with a grace period that is closely in line with the grace period in the underlying obligation);
                • Bankruptcy, insolvency or inability of the obligor to pay its debts, or its failure or admission in writing of its inability generally to pay its debts as they become due, and analogous events; and
                • Restructuring of the underlying obligation involving forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest or fees that results in a credit loss event (i.e., charge-off, specific provision or other similar debit to the profit and loss account). When restructuring is not specified as a credit event, refer to the next paragraph;
              2. (ii)If the credit derivative covers obligations that do not include the underlying obligation, item (vii) below governs whether the asset mismatch is permissible;
              3. (iii)The credit derivative shall not terminate prior to expiration of any grace period required for a default on the underlying obligation to occur as a result of a failure to pay, subject to the provisions of paragraph 137;
              4. (iv)Credit derivatives allowing for cash settlement are recognised for capital purposes insofar as a robust valuation process is in place in order to estimate loss reliably. There must be a clearly specified period for obtaining post-credit event valuations of the underlying obligation. If the reference obligation specified in the credit derivative for purposes of cash settlement is different than the underlying obligation, item (vii) below governs whether the asset mismatch is permissible;
              5. (v)If the protection purchaser’s right/ability to transfer the underlying obligation to the protection provider is required for settlement, the terms of the underlying obligation must provide that any required consent to such transfer may not be unreasonably withheld;
              6. (vi)The identity of the parties responsible for determining whether a credit event has occurred must be clearly defined. This determination must not be the sole responsibility of the protection seller. The protection buyer must have the right/ability to inform the protection provider of the occurrence of a credit event;
              7. (vii)A mismatch between the underlying obligation and the reference obligation under the credit derivative (i.e. the obligation used for purposes of determining cash settlement value or the deliverable obligation) is permissible if (i) the reference obligation ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation, and (ii) the underlying obligation and reference obligation share the same obligor (i.e., the same legal entity) and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place; and
              8. (viii)A mismatch between the underlying obligation and the obligation used for purposes of determining whether a credit event has occurred is permissible if (i) the latter obligation ranks pari passu with or is junior to the underlying obligation, and (ii) the underlying obligation and reference obligation share the same obligor (i.e., the same legal entity) and legally enforceable cross-default or cross-acceleration clauses are in place.

              125.When the restructuring of the underlying obligation is not covered by the credit derivative, but the other requirements in the previous paragraph are met, partial recognition of the credit derivative will be allowed. If the amount of the credit derivative is less than or equal to the amount of the underlying obligation, 60% of the amount of the hedge can be recognized as covered. If the amount of the credit derivative is larger than that of the underlying obligation, then the amount of eligible hedge is capped at 60% of the amount of the underlying obligation.

              126.Only credit default swaps and total return swaps that provide credit protection equivalent to guarantees will be eligible for recognition. The exception stated in paragraph 127 below applies.

              127.Where a bank buys credit protection through a total return swap and records the net payments received on the swap as net income, but does not record offsetting deterioration in the value of the asset that is protected (either through reductions in fair value or by an addition to reserves), the credit protection will not be recognised. The treatment of first-to-default and second-to-default products is covered separately in paragraphs 142 to 145.

              128.Other types of credit derivatives will not be eligible for recognition at this time. Note that cash funded credit linked notes issued by the bank against exposures in the banking book which fulfil the criteria for credit derivatives will be treated as cash collateralised transactions.

              b) Range of eligible guarantors (counter-guarantors)/protection providers

              129.Credit protection given by the following entities will be recognised:

              1. (i)Sovereign entities (including the Bank for International Settlements, the International Monetary Fund, the European Central Bank and the European Community, as well as those MDBs eligible for 0% risk weight listed in paragraph 14), PSEs, banks (including other MDBs) and Securities Firms with a lower risk weight than the counterparty;
              2. (ii)Other entities rated A- or better by an eligible credit assessment institution. This would include credit protection provided by parent, subsidiary and affiliate companies when they have a lower risk weight than the obligor.

              c) Risk weights

              130.The protected portion is assigned the risk weight of the protection provider. The uncovered portion of the exposure is assigned the risk weight of the underlying counterparty.

              131.Materiality thresholds on payments below which no payment is made in the event of loss are equivalent to retained first loss positions and must be deducted in full from the capital of the bank purchasing the credit protection.

              Proportional cover

              132.Where the amount guaranteed, or against which credit protection is held, is less than the amount of the exposure, and the secured and unsecured portions are of equal seniority, i.e., the bank and the guarantor share losses on a pro-rata basis capital relief will be afforded on a proportional basis: i.e., the protected portion of the exposure will receive the treatment applicable to eligible guarantees/credit derivatives, with the remainder treated as unsecured.

              Tranched cover

              133.Where the bank transfers a portion of the risk of an exposure in one or more tranches to a protection seller or sellers and retains some level of risk of the loan and the risk transferred and the risk retained are of different seniority, banks may obtain credit protection for either the senior tranches (e.g., second loss portion) or the junior tranche (e.g., first loss portion). In this case, the rules as set out in the Securitisation chapter below will apply.

              d) Currency mismatches

              134.Where the credit protection is denominated in a currency different from that in which the exposure is denominated — i.e., there is a currency mismatch — the amount of the exposure deemed to be protected will be reduced by the application of a haircut HFX, i.e.

              GA=G×(1HFX)

              where:

               
              G=Nominal amount of the credit protection;
              HFX=Haircut appropriate for currency mismatch between the credit protection and underlying obligation.

               

              135.The appropriate haircut based on a 10-business day holding period (assuming daily marking-to-market) will be applied. Banks using the supervisory haircuts shall apply 8%. The haircut value of 8% must be scaled up using the square root of time formula, depending on the frequency of revaluation of the credit protection as described in paragraphs 106.

              e) Sovereign guarantees and counter-guarantees

              136.Portions of claims guaranteed by the UAE sovereign, where the guarantee is denominated in AED and the exposure is funded in AED are risk weighted at 0%. A claim may be covered by a guarantee that is indirectly counter-guaranteed by a sovereign. Such a claim may be treated as covered by a sovereign guarantee provided that:

              1. (i)The sovereign counter-guarantee covers all credit risk elements of the claim;
              2. (ii)Both the original guarantee and the counter-guarantee meet all operational requirements for guarantees, except that the counter-guarantee need not be direct and explicit to the original claim; and
              3. (iii)The Central Bank is satisfied that the cover is robust and that no historical evidence suggests that the coverage of the counter-guarantee is less than effectively equivalent to that of a direct sovereign guarantee.
            • F. Maturity Mismatches

              137.For the purposes of calculating risk-weighted assets, a maturity mismatch occurs when the residual maturity of a hedge is less than that of the underlying exposure.

              a) Definition of maturity

              138.The maturity of the underlying exposure and the maturity of the hedge must both be defined conservatively. The effective maturity of the underlying must be gauged as the longest possible remaining time before the counterparty is scheduled to fulfil its obligation, taking into account any applicable grace period. For the hedge, embedded options which may reduce the term of the hedge must be taken into account so that the shortest possible effective maturity is used. Where a call is at the discretion of the protection seller, the maturity will always be at the first call date. If the call is at the discretion of the protection buying bank but the terms of the arrangement at origination of the hedge contain a positive incentive for the bank to call the transaction before contractual maturity, the remaining time to the first call date will be deemed to be the effective maturity (For example, where there is a step-up in cost in conjunction with a call feature or where the effective cost of cover increases over time even if credit quality remains the same or increases, the effective maturity will be the remaining time to the first call).

              b) Risk weights for maturity mismatches

              139.As outlined in paragraph 95, hedges with maturity mismatches are only recognized when their original maturities are greater than or equal to one year. As a result, the maturity of hedges for exposures with original maturities of less than one year must be matched to be recognised. In all cases, hedges with maturity mismatches will no longer be recognised when they have a residual maturity of three months or less.

              140.When there is a maturity mismatch with recognised credit risk mitigants (collateral, on-balance sheet netting, guarantees and credit derivatives) the following adjustment will be applied.

              Pa=P×(t0.25)/(T0.25)

              where:

              Pa=Value of the credit protection adjusted for maturity mismatch;
              P=Credit protection (e.g., collateral amount, guarantee amount) adjusted for any haircuts;
              t=min (T, residual maturity of the credit protection arrangement) expressed in years; and
              T=min (5, residual maturity of the exposure) expressed in years.
               
            • G. Other Items Related to the Treatment of CRM Techniques

              a) Treatment of pools of CRM techniques

              141.In the case where a bank has multiple CRM techniques covering a single exposure (e.g. a bank has both collateral and guarantee partially covering an exposure), the bank will be required to subdivide the exposure into portions covered by each type of CRM technique (e.g. portion covered by collateral, portion covered by guarantee) and the risk-weighted assets of each portion must be calculated separately. When credit protection provided by a single protection provider has differing maturities, they must be subdivided into separate protection as well.

              b) First-to-default credit derivatives

              142.There are cases where a bank obtains credit protection for a basket of reference names and where the first default among the reference names triggers the credit protection and the credit event also terminates the contract. In this case, the bank may recognize regulatory capital relief for the asset within the basket with the lowest risk-weighted amount, but only if the notional amount is less than or equal to the notional amount of the credit derivative.

              143.With regard to the bank providing credit protection through such an instrument, if the product has an external credit assessment from an eligible credit assessment institution, the risk weight applied to securitisation tranches will be specified in the Securitisation Standard. If the product is not rated by an eligible external credit assessment institution, the risk weights of the assets included in the basket will be aggregated up to a maximum of 1250% and multiplied by the nominal amount of the protection provided by the credit derivative to obtain the risk-weighted asset amount.

              c) Second-to-default credit derivatives

              144.In the case where the second default among the assets within the basket triggers the credit protection, the bank obtaining credit protection through such a product will only be able to recognise any capital relief if first-default-protection has also been obtained or when one of the assets within the basket has already defaulted.

              145.For banks providing credit protection through such a product, the capital treatment is the same as in paragraph 143, with one exception. The exception is that, in aggregating the risk weights, the asset with the lowest risk weighted amount can be excluded from the calculation.

          • V. Review Requirements

            146.Bank calculations under this Standard and associated bank processes must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge. Reviews must cover material aspects of the calculations under this Standard, including but not limited to the measurement of on-balance-sheet and off-balance-sheet exposures, the use of credit conversion factors, the application of CRM, and the accuracy for all components of the credit risk capital calculation reported to the Central Bank as part of regulatory reporting.

          • VI. Shari’ah Implementation

            Banks providing Islamic financial services must comply with the requirements and provisions of this Standard for their Shari’ah compliant transactions that are alternative to transactions referred to in this Standard, provided it is acceptable by Islamic Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant Standards and/or guidelines are issued specifically for the transactions of banks offering Islamic financial services.

             

        • V. Counterparty Credit Risk

          • I. Introduction and Scope

            1.This Standard articulates specific requirements for the calculation of risk-weighted assets (RWA) to recognize exposure amounts for Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR) for banks in the UAE. It replaces any and all previous approaches to assessment of counterparty credit risk for purposes of regulatory capital calculations. The Standard is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, specifically the Standardized Approach for CCR as articulated in The standardized approach for measuring counterparty credit risk exposures, March 2014 (rev. April 2014), and subsequent clarifications thereto by the Basel Committee.

            2.This Standard applies to all derivatives transactions, whether exchange-traded or over-the-counter, and also applies to long-settlement transactions (the “in-scope” transactions). In this Standard, references to “derivatives” should be understood to apply to all in-scope transactions.

            3.This Standard formulates capital adequacy requirements that needs to be applied to all banks in UAE on a consolidated basis.

            4.The Standards follow the calibration developed by the Basel Committee, which includes a maximum risk weight of 1250%, calibrated on a total capital adequacy requirement of 8%. The UAE instituted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% (excluding capital buffers), applicable to all licensed banks. Consequently, the maximum capital charge for a single exposure will be the lesser of the value of the exposure after applying valid credit risk mitigation, netting and haircuts, and the capital resulting from applying a risk weight of 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%) to this exposure.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            • A basis transaction is a non-foreign-exchange (that is, denominated in a single currency) transaction in which the cash flows due to one counterparty depend on a risk factor that differs from the risk factor (from the same asset class) that determines payments due to the other counterparty.
            • A central counterparty (CCP) is an entity that interposes itself between counterparties to contracts traded within one or more financial markets, becoming the legal counterparty such that it is the buyer to every seller and the seller to every buyer.
            • A centrally cleared derivative transaction is a derivatives transaction that is cleared though a central counterparty.
            • A clearing member is an entity that conducts transactions through a central counterparty as a member of that central counterparty.
            • A commodity type is a set of commodities that have broadly similar risk drivers, such that the prices or volatilities of commodities of the same commodity type may reasonably be expected to move with similar direction and timing and to bear predictable relationships to one another.
            • Counterparty credit risk is the risk of loss due to a failure by a counterparty to an in-scope transaction to deliver to the bank according to contractual terms at settlement.
            • A hedging set is a set of transactions within a single netting set exposed to similar risk factors, and for which partial or full offsetting may be recognized in the calculation of the potential future exposure add-on.
            • The independent collateral amount (ICA) is collateral posted by a counterparty that the bank may seize upon default of the counterparty. ICA may be defined by the Independent Amount parameter in standard industry documentation. ICA may change in response to factors such as the value of the collateral or a change in the number of transactions in the netting set, but (unlike variation margin) not in response to the value of the transactions it secures.
            • A long settlement transaction is one in which a counterparty undertakes to deliver a security, commodity, or foreign exchange amount against cash, other financial instruments, or commodities at a contractually specified settlement or delivery date that exceeds the market standards for settlement or delivery of the particular instrument, or if that settlement date is more than five business days from the date the transaction is initiated.
            • The margin period of risk for a derivatives contract is the length of time from the last exchange of collateral covering a netting set until transactions with a defaulting counterparty can be closed out and the resulting risk re-hedged.
            • Margined transactions are those in which variation margin is exchanged between counterparties; other transactions are un-margined.
            • Net Current Value (NCV) for a netting set is the total current market value of all transactions (which may be negative) minus the net value of any collateral held by a bank, after application of any collateral haircuts.
            • The net independent collateral amount (NICA) is the difference between the ICA posted by a counterparty and any ICA posted by the bank for that counterparty, excluding any collateral that the bank has posted to a segregated, bankruptcy remote account.
            • Netting by novation refers to a netting arrangement in which any obligation between two counterparties to deliver a given currency on a given value date is automatically combined with all other obligations for the same currency and value date, legally substituting one single amount for the previous gross obligations.
            • A netting set is a group of contracts with a single counterparty subject to a legally enforceable agreement for net settlement, and satisfying all of the conditions for netting sets specified in this Standard.
            • Potential Future Exposure (PFE) is an estimate of the potential increase in exposure to counterparty credit risk against which regulatory capital must be held.
            • A Qualifying Central Counterparty (QCCP) is a CCP that meets certain qualification requirements articulated in this Standard.
            • The remaining maturity of a derivative transaction is the time remaining until the latest date at which the contract may still be active. If a derivative contract has another derivative contract as its underlying (for example, a swaption) and may be physically exercised into the underlying contract (that is, a bank would assume a position in the underlying contract in the event of exercise), then the remaining maturity of the contract is the time until the final settlement date of the underlying derivative contract. For a derivative contract that is structured such that any outstanding exposure is settled on specified dates and the terms are reset so that the fair value of the contract is zero, the remaining maturity equals the time until the next reset date.
            • Variation margin (VM) means margin in the form of cash or financial assets exchanged on a periodic basis between counterparties to recognize changes in contract value due to changes in market factors.
            • A volatility transaction is one in which the settlement amount of the contract depends on the level of volatility of a risk factor.
            • A bank’s position in a particular trade or transaction is long or long in the primary risk factor if the market value of the transaction increases when the value of the primary risk factor increases; alternatively, the position is short or short in the primary risk factor if the market value of the transaction decreases when the value of the primary risk factor increases.
          • III. Requirements for Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR)

            • Netting Sets

              5.Banks must calculate RWA for CCR at the level of nettings sets for derivatives. Accordingly, a bank must group all exposures for each counterparty into one or more netting sets. In every such case where netting is applied, a bank must satisfy the Central Bank that it has:

              • A contract with the counterparty or other agreement that creates a single legal obligation, covering all included transactions, such that the bank would have either a claim to receive or obligation to pay only the net sum of the positive and negative mark-to-market values of included individual transactions in the event a counterparty fails to perform due to default, bankruptcy, liquidation, or similar circumstances.
              • Written and reasoned legal reviews that in the event of a legal challenge, the relevant courts and administrative authorities would find the bank’s exposure to be such a net amount under:
                • The law of the jurisdiction in which the counterparty is chartered and, if the foreign branch of a counterparty is involved, then also under the law of the jurisdiction in which the branch is located;
                • The law that governs the individual transactions; and
                • The law that governs any contract or agreement necessary to affect the netting.
              • Procedures in place to ensure that the legal characteristics of netting arrangements are kept under review in light of the possible changes in relevant law.

              6.The Central Bank, after consultation when necessary with other relevant supervisors, must be satisfied that the netting is enforceable under the laws of each of the relevant jurisdictions.

            • Exposure at Default and Risk-Weighted Assets

              7.A bank must calculate RWA for CCR by (i) calculating the Exposure At Default (EAD) for each netting set associated with a counterparty, (ii) summing EAD across netting sets for that counterparty, (iii) calculating risk-weighted EAD by multiplying the total EAD for a counterparty by the risk-weight corresponding to the exposure class to which that counterparty belongs under general risk-based capital requirements, (iv) summing the resulting risk-weighted EAD across all counterparties within a given exposure class and (v) summing across exposure classes.

              8.Banks must calculate EAD separately for each netting set, as the sum of the Replacement Cost (RC) of the netting set plus the calculated Potential Future Exposure (PFE) for the netting set, with the sum of the two multiplied by a factor of 1.4:

              EAD=(RC+PFE)×1.4
               

              9.Margined and un-margined netting sets require different calculation methods for RC and PFE. The EAD for a margined netting set is capped at the EAD of the same netting set calculated on an un-margined basis. That is, for a netting set covered by a margin agreement, the bank may calculate EAD as if the netting set is un-margined, and may use that value as the EAD if it is lower than the EAD calculation considering margin.

              10.The time-period for the haircut applicable to non-cash collateral for the RC calculation should be one year for un-margined trades, and the relevant margin period of risk for margined trades.

            • Replacement Cost

              11.Banks must calculate replacement cost at the netting set level. Calculations for margined and un-margined transactions differ.

              12.Banks first must calculate the total current market value of the derivative contracts in the netting set. Banks may net transactions within a netting set that are subject to any legally valid form of bilateral netting, including netting by novation. Banks must then subtract from that total current market value the net value of collateral (after application of collateral haircuts) held by the bank for the netting set. The result is the Net Current Value (NCV) of the transactions in the netting set.

              13.For un-margined transactions, RC for a netting set is equal to the NCV, provided the NCV is greater than zero. If that value is not greater than zero, RC equals zero.

              14.For margined transactions, RC depends on the greatest exposure that would not trigger a call for variation margin, taking into account the mechanics of collateral exchanges in the margining agreements. That critical exposure level is equal to the threshold level of variation that would require a transfer of collateral, plus the minimum transfer amount of the collateral. The bank should subtract from that exposure amount the NICA, if any, to calculate the RC for margined transactions. However, the resulting RC may be no less than the RC if the netting set were un-margined. That is, for a margined netting set the RC is equal to the larger of the amount calculated according to this paragraph, or the RC for the same netting set if un-margined.

              15.Bilateral transactions with a one-way margining agreement in favor of the bank’s counterparty (that is, where the bank posts margin but the counterparty does not) must be treated as un-margined transactions.

              16.If multiple margin agreements apply to a single netting set, the bank must divide the netting set into sub-netting sets that align with each respective margin agreement, and calculate RC for each sub-netting set separately.

            • Potential Future Exposure

              17.Calculation of PFE relies on computation of various “add-on” amounts, which are intermediate measures of exposure that are combined in various ways to compute PFE. The bank must calculate PFE for each netting set as a simple summation of the add-ons computed for each of the various asset classes within that netting set, multiplied by a multiplier that allows for recognition of excess collateral or negative mark-to-market value for the transactions. Requirements for calculation of the multiplier and the add-ons for each asset class are described below in this Standard.

              18.The bank must allocate all derivatives transactions to one or more of the following asset classes based on the primary risk driver of the transaction:

              • Interest Rate Derivatives
              • Foreign Exchange Derivatives
              • Credit Derivatives
              • Equity Derivatives
              • Commodity Derivatives

              19.As described in more detail below in this Standard, trades within each of these asset classes are further divided into hedging sets, and an aggregation method is applied to aggregate trade-level inputs at the hedging set level and finally at the asset class level. For derivative transactions within the credit, equity, and commodity asset classes, this aggregation involves a supervisory correlation parameter to capture important aspects of basis risk and diversification.
               

              20.For trades that may have more than one risk driver (e.g. multi-asset or hybrid derivatives), banks must apply an analysis based on risk-driver sensitivities and volatility of the underlying reference price or rate to determine the existence of a dominant risk driver, and make the asset class allocation accordingly. When a derivative is materially exposed to risk drivers spanning more than one asset class, a bank must assign the position to each relevant asset class rather than to a single asset class, with appropriate delta adjustment. The Central Bank may direct banks to assign complex derivatives to multiple asset classes, regardless of analysis that the bank may or may not have conducted.

              21.As is the case with Replacement Cost, if multiple margin agreements apply to a single netting set, the bank must divide the netting set into sub-netting sets that align with each respective margin agreement, and calculate the PFE for each sub-netting set separately.

            • Adjusted Notional Amount

              22.Banks must calculate adjusted notional amounts from trade-level notional amounts for each transaction as described in this Standard.

              23.For foreign exchange derivatives, the adjusted notional is defined as the notional of the foreign currency leg of the contract, converted to the domestic currency. If both legs of a foreign exchange derivative are denominated in currencies other than the domestic currency, the notional amount of each leg should be converted to the domestic currency, and the adjusted notional amount is equal to the value of the leg with the larger domestic currency value.

              24.For equity and commodity derivatives, the adjusted notional is equal to the product of the current price of one unit of the stock or commodity and the number of units referenced by the trade. For equity and commodity volatility transactions, adjusted notional is equal to the product of the underlying volatility and the notional value of the transaction.

              25.For interest rate derivatives and credit derivatives, the trade-level adjusted notional in units of domestic currency must be multiplied by a supervisory duration (SD) measure as follows:

              1. a)First, the bank must determine the start date of the time period referenced by the interest rate or credit contract, and time that remains until that start date, measured in years; this is “S.” If the derivative references the value of another interest rate or credit instrument (as with a swaption or bond option), the time period is that of the underlying instrument. If the time-period referenced by the derivative has already started, the bank must set S to zero.
              2. b)Next, the bank must determine the end date of the time period referenced by the interest rate or credit contract, and the time remaining until that end date, measured in years; this is “E.” If the derivative references the value of another interest rate or credit instrument (as with a swaption or bond option), the time period is that of the underlying instrument.
              3. c)The bank then must compute SD for the transaction using the following formula, with the identified values of S and E based on the terms of the contract (where “exp” denotes the exponential function):

                1
                 

              4. d)Finally, the bank calculates the adjusted notional amount for the transaction by multiplying the trade notional amount by the supervisory duration SD.

              26.Banks also must apply the following rules when determining trade notional amounts, for transaction covered by the cases noted below:

              1. a)For transactions with payoffs that are state contingent such as digital options or target redemption forwards, a bank must calculate the trade notional amount for each state, and use the largest resulting calculation.
              2. b)If the notional is based on a formula that depends on market values, the bank must enter the current market values to determine the trade notional amount to be used in computing adjusted notional amount.
              3. c)For variable notional swaps such as amortizing and accreting swaps, banks must use the average notional over the remaining life of the swap as the trade notional amount.
              4. d)For leveraged swaps in which rates are multiplied by a factor, the bank must multiply the stated notional by the same factor to determine the trade notional amount.
              5. e)For a derivative contract with multiple exchanges of principle, the bank must multiply the notional by the number of exchanges of principle in the derivative contract to determine the trade notional amount.
            • Supervisory Delta Adjustment and Effective Notional Amount

              27.Banks must determine a supervisory delta adjustment for each transaction for use in calculations of effective notional amounts. Banks must apply supervisory delta adjustments at the trade level that reflect the direction of the transaction - that is, whether the position is long or short in the primary risk driver - and on whether the transaction is an option, CDO tranche, or neither. Supervisory delta adjustments are provided in Table 1.

              Table 1: Supervisory Delta Adjustments

              Type of Derivative TransactionSupervisory Delta Adjustment
              Purchased Call OptionF
              Purchased Put OptionF-1
              Sold Call Option-F
              Sold Put Option1-F
              Purchased CDO Tranche (Long Protection)G
              Sold CDO Tranche (Short Protection)-G
              Any Other Derivative Type, Long in the Primary Risk Factor+1
              Any Other Derivative Type, Short in the Primary Risk Factor-1

               

              Definitions for Table 1


              For options:
               

              1

              In this expression, P is the current forward value of the underlying price or rate, K is the exercise or strike price of the option, T is the time to the latest contractual exercise date of the option, a is the appropriate supervisory volatility from Table 2, and 0 is the standard normal cumulative density function. A supervisory volatility of 50% should be used on swaptions for all currencies.


              For CDO tranches:

              2

              In this expression, A is the attachment point of the CDO tranche and D is the detachment point of the CDO tranche.


            • Maturity Factor

              28.Banks must determine a maturity factor (MF) for each transaction for use in calculations of effective notional amounts, with the specific calculation method for MF depending on whether the derivative transaction is margined or un-margined.

              29.For un-margined transactions, the maturity factor must be set equal to 1.0, unless the remaining maturity of the derivative transaction is less than one year. If the remaining maturity is less than one year, the maturity factor for an un-margined transaction is computed as the square root of the remaining maturity expressed in years, on a business-day-count basis, as follows:

              1

               

              30.If an un-margined transaction has a remaining maturity of 10 business days or less, the bank must set the maturity factor equal to the square root of (10/250).

              31.For margined transactions, the maturity factor MF must be based on the margin period of risk (MPOR) appropriate for the margining agreement containing the transaction, measured in days, and computed as follows:

              2

               

              32.The bank must determine MPOR based on the terms of the margined transaction, subject to the following minimums:

              1. a)At least ten business days for non-centrally-cleared derivative transactions subject to daily margin agreements.
              2. b)At least five business days for centrally cleared derivative transactions subject to daily margin agreements that clearing members have with their clients.
              3. c)At least twenty business days for netting sets consisting of 5000 or more transactions that are not centrally cleared.

              33.The bank must double the MPOR for netting sets that have experienced more than two margin call disputes over the previous two calendar quarters if those disputes were not resolved within a period corresponding to the MPOR that would otherwise be applicable.

              Allocation of Transactions to Hedging Sets

              34.Banks must allocate every transaction within each netting set to a hedging set according to the following rules for each asset class:

              1. a)Interest Rate Derivatives: A hedging set must be created for each set of interest rate derivatives that reference interest rates of the same currency. Interest rate derivative hedging sets are further subdivided into maturity categories, as described below. In interest rate hedging sets, full offset is recognized between long and short positions within one maturity category, and partial offset across maturity categories. Note that the number of interest rate hedging sets may differ between different netting sets, depending on the number of distinct currencies.
              2. b)Foreign Exchange Derivatives: A hedging set consists of derivatives that reference the same currency pair. Full offset is recognized between long and short positions in any currency pair. Note that the number of foreign exchange hedging sets may vary between different netting sets.
              3. c)Credit Derivatives: All credit derivatives should be allocated to a single hedging set. Full offset is recognized between long and short positions referencing the same entity (name or index) within the hedging set.
              4. d)Equity Derivatives: All equity derivatives should be allocated to a single hedging set. Full offset is recognized between long and short positions referencing the same entity (name or index) within the hedging set.
              5. e)Commodity Derivatives: In the commodity asset class, separate hedging sets are used for energy, metals, agriculture, and other commodities. Full offset of long and short positions is recognized between derivatives referencing the same commodity type, while PFE add-on calculations provide partial offset between different commodity types within the same commodity hedging set.

              35.Basis transactions and volatility transactions must form separate hedging sets within their respective asset classes.

              1. a)All basis transactions in a netting set that belong to the same asset class and reference the same pair of risk factors form a single hedging set, and follow the hedging set aggregation rules for the relevant asset class. The bank must treat each pair of risk factors as a separate hedging set.
              2. b)The bank must place all volatility transactions in a netting set into a distinct hedging set within the corresponding asset class, according to the rules of that asset class. For example, all equity volatility transactions within a netting set form a single volatility hedging set within that netting set.

              Add-on for Interest Rate Derivatives

              36.For interest rate derivatives, banks must assign each contract to one of three maturity categories based on the remaining life of the contract:
               

              • Maturity Category 1: Less than one year
              • Maturity Category 2: From one year to five years
              • Maturity Category 3: Greater than five years

              37.The bank must then calculate the effective notional amount for each interest rate derivative hedging set (that is, for the set of interest rate derivatives in any single currency) by summing across transactions within a maturity category the product of the adjusted notional amount of the transaction, the maturity factor for the transaction, and the supervisory delta adjustment. That is, for each individual interest rate derivative within a maturity category in a single hedging set, the bank must calculate:

              Adjusted Notional Amount×Supervisory Delta Adjustment×MF
               

              and then sum that product across all interest rate derivatives in one maturity category in that hedging set to get the effective notional amount.

              38.For each interest rate hedging set, the result will be three effective notional amounts, one for each maturity category: D1 for Category 1, D2 for Category 2, and D3 for Category 3. The bank may then combine these effective notional amounts from each maturity category using the following formula:

              3

               

              39.As an alternative, the bank may choose to combine the effective notional values as the simple sum of the absolute values for each of the three maturity categories within a hedging set, which has the effect of ignoring potential offsets. That is, as an alternative to the calculation above, the bank may calculate:

              |D1|+|D2|+|D3|
               

              40.Regardless of the approach used to combine the effective notional amounts, the bank must multiply the result of the calculation by the supervisory factor for the interest rate asset class from Table 2, and sum across all interest rate hedging sets to calculate the aggregate add-on for the interest rate asset class.

              Add-on for Foreign Exchange Derivatives

              41.For foreign exchange derivatives, banks must calculate the effective notional amount for each hedging set (that is, for the set of foreign exchange derivatives referencing a single currency pair) by summing across transactions within a hedging set the product of the adjusted notional amount of the transaction, the maturity factor for the transaction, and the supervisory delta adjustment. That is, for each individual foreign exchange derivative in a single hedging set (that is, referencing a single currency pair), the bank must calculate:

              Adjusted Notional Amount×Supervisory Delta Adjustment×MF
               

              and then sum that product across all foreign exchange derivatives in that hedging set to get the effective notional amount for the hedging set.

              42.The bank must multiply the absolute value of the resulting effective notional amount for each hedging set (each currency pair) by the supervisory factor for the foreign exchange asset class from Table 2, and sum across all foreign exchange hedging sets to calculate the aggregate add-on for the foreign exchange asset class.

              Add-on for Credit Derivatives

              43.For credit derivatives, banks must calculate the effective notional amount for each entity (that is, for each set of credit derivatives referencing a single name or credit index) by summing, across all credit derivative transactions that reference that entity, the product of the adjusted notional amount of the transaction, the maturity factor for the transaction, and the supervisory delta adjustment. That is, for each individual credit derivative referencing any single entity, the bank must calculate:

              Adjusted Notional Amount×Supervisory Delta Adjustment×MF
               

              for each transaction and then sum that product across all credit derivatives that reference that entity to get the effective notional amount for the entity.

              44.The bank must calculate the entity-level add-on by multiplying the result of this calculation by the appropriate supervisory factor from Table 2, depending on the rating of the entity (for single-name derivatives) or depending on whether the index is investment grade or speculative grade (for index derivatives).

              45.For credit derivatives that reference unrated single-name entities, the bank should use the Supervisory Factor corresponding to BBB rated entities. However, where the entity has an elevated risk of default, banks should use the Supervisory Factor corresponding to BB rated entities. For credit index entities, the classification into investment grade or speculative grade should be determined based on the credit quality of the majority of the individual components of the index.

              46.The bank must use the entity-level add-ons to calculate the add-on for the credit derivative hedging set. This is done through a calculation based on the use of supervisory correlation factors from Table 2. Specifically, the bank must calculate the add-on for the credit derivative hedging set by calculating:

              7

               

              where Ai is the entity-level add-on for one entity (each “i” is a different entity, either single-name or index), and

              ρi is the supervisory correlation (either 0.5 or 0.8) for that entity.

              47.Note that credit derivatives that are basis or volatility transactions must be treated in separate hedging sets within the credit derivatives asset class, with adjustments to supervisory factors as required under this Standard. In that case, the add-on for the credit derivatives asset class is the sum of the hedging set add-on calculated above, plus add-ons for any basis or volatility hedging sets.

              Add-on for Equity Derivatives

              48.For equity derivatives, banks must calculate the effective notional amount for each entity (that is, for each set of equity derivatives referencing a single name or equity index) by summing, across all equity derivatives transactions that reference that entity, the product of the adjusted notional amount of the transaction, the maturity factor for the transaction, and the supervisory delta adjustment. That is, for each individual equity derivative referencing any single entity, the bank must calculate:

              Adjusted Notional Amount×Supervisory Delta Adjustment×MF
               

              for each transaction and then sum that product across all equity derivatives that reference that entity to get the effective notional amount for the entity.

              49.The bank must calculate the entity-level add-on by multiplying the result of this calculation by the appropriate supervisory factor from Table 2.

              50.The bank must use the entity-level add-ons to calculate the add-on for the equity derivative hedging set. This is done through a calculation based on the use of supervisory correlation factors from Table 2 for single-name equities and equity indexes. Specifically, the bank must calculate the add-on for the equity derivative hedging set by calculating:

              8

              where,

              Ai is the entity-level add-on for one entity (each “i” is a different entity, either single-name or index), and

              ρi is the supervisory correlation for that entity from Table 2.

              51.Note that equity derivatives that are basis or volatility transactions must be treated in separate hedging sets within the equity derivatives asset class, with adjustments to supervisory factors as required under this Standard. In that case, the add-on for the equity derivatives asset class is the sum of the hedging set add-on calculated above, plus add-ons for any basis or volatility hedging sets.

              Add-on for Commodity Derivatives

              52.For the commodity asset class, a bank must assign each commodity derivative to one of the four hedging sets: energy, metals, agriculture, or other. The bank should also define one or more commodity types within each hedging set, and assign each derivative transaction to one of those commodity types. Long and short trades within a single commodity type can be fully offset.

              53.The bank must establish appropriate governance processes for the creation and maintenance of the list of defined commodity types that are used for CCR calculations. These types should have clear definitions stated in written policies, and independent internal review or validation processes should ensure that the commodity types are applied properly. Internal review and validation processes also should determine that commodities grouped as a single type are in fact reasonably similar. Only commodity types established through adequately controlled internal processes may be used.

              54.Banks must calculate the effective notional amount for each commodity type (that is, for each set of commodity derivatives that reference commodities of the same type) by summing, across all transactions that reference that commodity type, the product of the adjusted notional amount of the transaction, the maturity factor for the transaction, and the supervisory delta adjustment. That is, for each individual commodity derivative referencing any single commodity type, the bank must calculate:

              Adjusted Notional Amount×Supervisory Delta Adjustment×MF
               

              for each transaction and then sum that product across all commodity derivatives that reference that commodity type to get the effective notional amount for the commodity type.

              55.The bank must calculate the add-on for each commodity type by multiplying the result of this calculation by the appropriate supervisory factor from Table 2.

              56.The bank must use the add-ons for each commodity type to calculate the add-on for each hedging set (energy, metals, agriculture, and other). This is done through a calculation using the supervisory correlation factor for commodity derivatives. Specifically, the bank must calculate the add-on for each of the four commodity derivative hedging sets by calculating:

              9

               

              where ρ is the supervisory correlation factor for commodity derivatives,

              and Ai is the add-on for one commodity type within the hedging set (each “i” is a different commodity type within a given hedging set).

              57.Note that commodity derivatives that are basis or volatility transactions must be treated in separate hedging sets within the commodity derivatives asset class, with adjustments to supervisory factors as required under this Standard.

              58.The add-on for the commodity derivatives asset class is the sum of the four hedging set add-ons as calculated above (some of which may be zero if the bank has no derivatives within one of the four hedging sets), plus corresponding add-ons for any basis or volatility hedging sets.

              59.Commodity hedging sets have been defined in this Standard without regard to other potentially important characteristics of commodities, such as location and quality. For example, the energy hedging set contains commodity types such as crude oil, electricity, natural gas, and coal. The Central Bank may require a bank to use more refined definitions of commodity types if the Central Bank determines that the bank is significantly exposed to the basis risk of different products within any bank-defined commodity type.

            • Supervisory Factors, Correlations, and Volatilities

              60.Table 2 provides the values of Supervisory Factors, correlations, and supervisory option volatilities for use with each asset class and subclass.

              61.For any basis transaction hedging set, the Supervisory Factor applicable to its relevant asset class or sub-class must be multiplied by 0.5.

              62.For any volatility transaction hedging set, the Supervisory Factor applicable to its relevant asset class or sub-class must be multiplied by 5.0.

              Table 2: Supervisory Factors, Correlations, and Volatilities

              Asset ClassHedging SetsSubclassSupervisory FactorCorrelationSupervisory Option Volatility
              Interest RateOne hedging set for each currency 0.50%N/A50%
              Foreign ExchangeOne hedging set for each currency pair 4.00%N/A15%
              Credit, Single NameOne hedging set for all credit derivativesAAA
              AA
              A
              BBB
              BB
              B
              CCC
              0.38%
              0.38%
              0.42%
              0.54%
              1.06%
              1.60%
              6.00%
              50%100%
              Credit, IndexInvestment Grade
              Speculative Grade
              0.38%
              1.06%
              80%80%
              Equity, Single NameOne hedging set for all equity derivativesSingle Name32.00%50%120%
              Equity, IndexIndex20.00%80%75%
              CommodityEnergyElectricity
              Other Energy
              40.00%
              18.00%
              18.00%
              18.00%
              18.00%
              40%150%
              70%
              70%
              70%
              70%
              MetalsMetals
              AgricultureAgriculture
              All otherAll other

               

            • PFE Multiplier

              63.For each netting set, the bank must compute a PFE multiplier and multiply the sum of the asset class add-ons for the netting set by that multiplier. The bank must calculate the PFE multiplier using the NCV and the aggregate add-on for the netting set (AddOnagg) according to the following formula (where “exp” denotes the exponential function):

              1

               

              64.Consistent with international regulatory standards, the Floor for this calculation is established at the level of 0.05 (5%) under this Standard.

              65.If the PFE multiplier for a netting set is greater than 1.0 when calculated according to the formula above (which generally occurs when NCV>0), the bank should set the PFE multiplier equal to 1.0 when calculating PFE. Note that NCV is the same as the calculation of RC for un-margined transactions, but without the limitation of a lower bound of zero (that is, NCV can be negative).

            • Margin Agreements Covering Multiple Netting Sets

              66.If a single margin agreement applies to several netting sets, so that collateral is exchanged based on mark-to-market values that are netted across all transactions covered under the margin agreement irrespective of netting sets, calculations of both RC and PFE are affected as described in this Standard. Special treatment is necessary because it is problematic to allocate the common collateral to individual netting sets.

              67.A bank must compute a single combined RC for all netting sets covered by the margin agreement. Combined RC is the sum of two elements, each of which must be no less than zero. The first element is equal to the un-margined current exposure the bank has to the counterparty, aggregated across all netting sets covered by the margin agreement, less the cash equivalent value of any collateral available to the bank at the time (including both VM and NICA) if the bank is a net holder of collateral. The second term is added only when the bank is a net provider of collateral, and is equal to the current net value of the posted collateral, reduced by the un-margined current exposure of the counterparty to the bank aggregated across all netting sets covered by the margin agreement.

              68.The bank must calculate PFE for transactions subject to a single margin agreement covering multiple netting sets as if those transactions were un-margined, with the resulting calculations of PFE for each netting set then aggregated through summation. Both the multiplier and the PFE add-on should be calculated as if the transactions were un-margined.

            • IV. Requirements for Bank Exposures to Central Counterparties

              69.The Financial Stability Board has determined that central clearing of over-the-counter derivatives reduces global systemic risk. Accordingly, the Central Bank assigns lower risk weights to bank exposures to central counterparties (CCPs) that meet certain standards for qualification, as described below for Qualifying Central Counterparties (QCCPs).

              70.Banks must treat exposures to non-qualifying CCPs as they would treat exposures to any other non-qualifying counterparty. If a CCP being treated as a QCCP ceases to qualify as a QCCP, exposures to that former QCCP may continue to be treated as though they were QCCP exposures for a period of three months, unless the Central Bank requires otherwise. After the three-month period, the bank’s exposures to such a CCP must be treated as bilateral counterparty credit exposures.

            • Qualifying Central Counterparties

              71.For a counterparty entity to be considered a QCCP for purposes of this Standard, the entity must meet the following conditions:

              • Be licensed to operate as a CCP and permitted to operate as such by the appropriate regulator or overseer with respect to the products that are centrally cleared.
              • Provide UAE banks with the information required to calculate RWA for any default fund exposures to the CCP according to the requirements stated in this Standard.
              • Be based and prudentially supervised in a jurisdiction where the relevant regulator or overseer has established and publicly indicated that domestic rules and regulations consistent with the CPMI-IOSCO Principles for Financial Market Infrastructures apply to the CCP on an ongoing basis. For CCPs in jurisdictions that do not have a CCP regulator applying the Principles to the CCP, the Central Bank may make a determination regarding whether the CCP meets the requirements for treatment as a QCCP.

              72.A bank must have robust internal procedures to identify specific CCPs that qualify for treatment as QCCPs under this Standard. The internal identification process should reflect the conditions stated above in this Standard, and produce evidence the bank then provides to the Central Bank to demonstrate that a specific CCP meets the conditions for qualification. A bank may not treat any CCP as a QCCP for capital purposes unless and until the Central Bank reviews the bank’s determination and indicates no objection.

            • Exposures to QCCPs

              73.A bank must calculate RWA for exposures to QCCPs to reflect credit risk due to trade exposures (either as a clearing member of the QCCP or as a client of a clearing member), posted collateral, and default fund contributions. If a bank’s combined RWA for trade exposures to a QCCP and default fund contribution for that QCCP is higher than would apply for those same exposures if the QCCP were a non-qualifying CCP, the bank may treat the exposures as if the QCCP was non-qualifying.

              Trade exposures to the QCCP

              74.A risk weight of 2% applies to a bank’s trade exposure to the QCCP where the bank as a clearing member of the QCCP trades for its own account. The risk weight of 2% also applies to trade exposures to the QCCP arising from clearing services the bank provides to clients where the bank is obligated to reimburse those clients for losses in the event that the QCCP defaults.

              75.In general, a bank must calculate exposure amounts for trade exposures to QCCPs as for other derivatives exposure under this Standard. Banks must use a minimum MPOR of 10 days for the calculation of trade exposures to QCCPs on over-the-counter derivatives. Where QCCPs retain variation margin against certain trades and the member collateral is not protected against the insolvency of the QCCP, the minimum horizon applied to the bank’s QCCP trade exposures must be the lesser of one year and the remaining maturity of the transaction, with a floor of 10 business days.

              Treatment of posted collateral

              76.Any assets or collateral posted to the QCCP by the bank must receive the banking book or trading book treatment it would receive under the capital adequacy framework, regardless of the fact that such assets have been posted as collateral. Where the entity holding such assets or collateral is the QCCP, a risk-weight of 2% applies to collateral included in the definition of trade exposures. The relevant risk-weight of the QCCP will apply to assets or collateral posted for other purposes.

              77.A risk weight of zero applies to all collateral (including cash, securities, other pledged assets, and excess initial or variation margin) posted by the clearing member that is held by a custodian and is bankruptcy remote from the QCCP. Collateral posted by a client that is held by a custodian and is bankruptcy remote from the QCCP, the bank, and other clients of the bank is not subject to a CCR capital requirement.

              78.Where a bank posts assets or collateral (either as a clearing member or on behalf of a client) with a QCCP or a clearing member, and the assets or collateral is not held in a bankruptcy remote manner, the bank must recognize credit risk based upon the creditworthiness of the entity holding such assets or collateral. Posted collateral not held in a bankruptcy remote manner must be accounted for in the NICA term for CCR calculations.

              Default fund exposures

              79.A bank’s default fund contributions as a clearing member of a QCCP must be included in the bank’s calculation of risk-weighted assets. Certain inputs required for the RWA calculation must be provided to the bank by the QCCP, its supervisor, or some other body with access to the required data, as described below. Provision of the necessary inputs is a condition for CCP qualification.

              80.Risk-weighted assets for the bank’s default fund contributions should be calculated as:

              1

               

              where

              • RW is a risk weight of 20% unless the Central Bank determines that banks must apply a higher risk weight, for example to reflect a QCCP membership composed of relatively high-risk members;
              • DFM is the bank’s total pre-funded contributions to the QCCP’s default fund;
              • DF is the total value of the QCCP’s default fund, including its own funds and the prefunded contributions from members; and
              • EAD is the sum of the QCCP’s exposure to all clearing members accounts, including clearing members’ own transactions, client transactions guaranteed by clearing members, and the value of all collateral held by the QCCP against those transactions (including clearing members’ prefunded default fund contributions) prior to exchange of margin in the final margin call on the date of the calculation. This exposure should include the exposure arising from client sub-accounts to the clearing member’s proprietary business where clearing members provide client-clearing services and the client transactions and collateral are held in separate (individual or omnibus) subaccounts.

              81.However, if the RWA from the calculation above is less than 2% of the amount of the bank’s pre-funded contributions to the default fund, then the bank must set RWA equal to 2% of its pre-funded contributions to the default fund, which is 2%×DFM.

              82.Exposure to each clearing member for the QCCP’s EAD calculation is the bilateral CCR trade exposure the QCCP has to the clearing member as calculated under this Standard, using MPOR of 10 days. All collateral held by a QCCP to which that QCCP has a legal claim in the event of the default of the member or client, including default fund contributions of that member, is used to offset the QCCP’s exposure to that member or client for the PFE multiplier. If the default fund contributions of the member are not split with regard to client and sub-accounts, they must be allocated to sub-accounts according to the initial margin of that sub-account as a fraction of the total initial margin posted by or for the account of the clearing member.

              83.If clearing member default fund contributions are segregated by product types and only accessible for specific product types, the RWA calculation must be performed for each specific product giving rise to counterparty credit risk. Any contributions by the bank to prepaid default funds covering settlement-risk-only products should be risk-weighted at 0%. If the QCCP’s own prefunded resources cover multiple product types, the QCCP must allocate those funds to each of the calculations, in proportion to the respective product-specific EAD.

              84.However, where a default fund is shared between products or types of business with settlement risk only (such as equities and bonds) and products or types of business which give rise to counterparty credit risk, all of the default fund contributions receive the risk weight determined above, without apportioning to different classes or types of business or products.

              85.Banks must apply a risk weight of 1250% to default fund contributions to a non-qualifying CCP. For the purposes of this paragraph, the default fund contributions of such banks will include both the funded contributions and any unfunded contributions for which the bank could be liable upon demand by the CCP.

              86.As a requirement for QCCP qualification, the CCP, its supervisor, or another body with access to the required data must calculate and provide values for EAD, DFM, and DF in such a way to permit the supervisor of the CCP to oversee those calculations, and must share sufficient information about the calculation results to permit banks to calculate capital requirements for their exposures to the default fund, as well as to permit the Central Bank to review and confirm such calculations. The information must be provided at least quarterly, although the Central Bank may require more frequent calculations in the event of material changes, such as material changes to the number or size of cleared transactions, material changes to the financial resources of the QCCP, or initiation by the QCCP of clearing of a new product.

              Clearing member exposures to clients

              87.A bank as a clearing member of a QCCP must treat its exposure to clients as bilateral trades, irrespective of whether the bank as clearing member guarantees the trade or acts as an intermediary between the client and the QCCP.

              88.If a bank as a clearing member of a QCCP collects collateral from a client and passes this collateral on to the QCCP, the bank may recognize this collateral for both the exposure to the QCCP and the exposure to the client.

              89.If a bank as a clearing member conducts an exchange-traded derivatives transaction on a bilateral basis with a client, it is treated as a bilateral counterparty credit risk exposure rather than a QCCP exposure. In this case, the bank can compute the exposure to the client using a margin period of risk, subject to a minimum MPOR of at least five days.

              90.These requirements also apply to transactions between lower-level clients and higher-level clients in a multi-level client structure. (A multi-level client structure is one in which banks can centrally clear as an indirect client of a clearing member; that is, when clearing services are provided to the bank by an institution that is not a direct clearing member, but is itself a client of a clearing member or another clearing client.)

              Bank exposures as a client of clearing members

              91.Where a bank is a client of a clearing member, and enters into a transaction with a clearing member who completes an offsetting transaction with the QCCP, of if a clearing member guarantees QCCP performance to the bank as a client, the bank’s exposures to the clearing member may be treated as trade exposures to the QCCP with a risk weight of 2% if the conditions below are met. (This also applies to exposures of lower-level clients to higher- level clients in a multi-level client structure, provided that for all intermediate client levels the two conditions below are met.)

              • Condition 1: Relevant laws, regulation, rules, contractual, or administrative arrangements make it highly likely that, in the event that the clearing member defaults or becomes insolvent, the offsetting transactions with the defaulted or insolvent clearing member would continue to be indirectly transacted through or by the QCCP, and that client positions and collateral with the QCCP would be transferred or closed out at market value.
              • Condition 2: Offsetting transactions are identified by the QCCP as client transactions, and collateral to support them is held by the QCCP and/or the clearing member under arrangements that prevent any losses to the client due to the default or insolvency of either the clearing member or other clients of the clearing member, or of a joint default or insolvency of the clearing member and any of its other clients.

              92.Where a bank is a client of the clearing member and the two conditions above are not met, the bank must treat its exposures to the clearing member as an ordinary bilateral exposure under this Standard, not a QCCP exposure. If the two conditions above are met with the exception of the requirement regarding joint default or insolvency of the clearing member and any of its other clients, a 4% risk weight must be applied instead of 2%.

              93.A bank must have conducted sufficient legal review (and undertake such further review as necessary to ensure continuing enforceability) and have a well-founded basis to conclude that, in the event of legal challenge, the relevant courts and administrative authorities would find that such arrangements mentioned above would be legal, valid, binding and enforceable under the relevant laws of the relevant jurisdictions. Upon the insolvency of the clearing member, there should be no legal impediment (other than the need to obtain an appropriate court order) to the transfer of the bank’s collateral to one or more surviving clearing members or to the bank or the bank’s nominee.

              94.The treatment described here also applies to exposures resulting from posting of collateral by the bank as a client of a clearing member that is held by the QCCP on the bank’s behalf but not on a bankruptcy remote basis.

              95.If a bank conducts an exchange-traded derivatives transaction on a bilateral basis with a clearing member as a client of that clearing member, the transaction is treated as a bilateral counterparty credit risk exposure, not a QCCP exposure. The same applies to transactions between lower-level clients and higher-level clients in a multi-level client structure.

            • Requirements for Bank Risk Management Related to QCCPs

              96.The fact that a CCP qualifies as a QCCP does not relieve a bank of the responsibility to ensure that it maintains adequate capital to cover the risk of its exposures. Where the bank is acting as a clearing member, the bank should assess whether the level of capital held against exposures to a QCCP adequately addresses the inherent risks of those transactions through appropriate scenario analysis and stress testing.

              97.A bank must monitor and report to its senior management and Board, or an appropriate committee of the Board, on a regular basis all of its exposures to QCCPs, including exposures arising from trading through a QCCP and exposures arising from QCCP membership obligations such as default fund contributions.

            • V. Review Requirements

              98.Bank calculations for Counterparty Credit Risk under this Standard and associated bank processes must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge. Reviews must cover material aspects of the calculations under this Standard, including but not limited to the determination of netting sets, the assignment of individual transactions to asset classes and hedging sets, the application of supervisory parameters, the definition of commodity types, the treatment of complex derivatives transactions, and the identification of QCCPs.

            • VI. Shari’ah Implementation

              99.Banks offering Islamic financial services that use Shari’ah Compliant alternatives to derivatives approved by their internal Shari’ah control committees should calculate the risk weighted asset (RWA) to recognize the exposure amounts for counterparty credit risk (CCR) as a result of obligations arising from terms and conditions of contracts and documents of those Shari’ah compliant alternatives in accordance with provisions set out in this standard/guidance and in the manner acceptable by Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidance in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services.

        • VI. Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)

          • I. Introduction

            1.This Standard articulates specific requirements for the calculation of the risk- weighted assets (RWA) for Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) risk for banks in the UAE. It is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, specifically the Standardized Approach for CVA as articulated in Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems, December 2010 (rev June 2011), and subsequent clarifications thereto by the Basel Committee.

            2.This Standard covers all derivative transactions except those transacted directly with a central counterparty. In addition, it covers all securities financing transactions (SFTs) that are subject to fair-value accounting, unless the Central Bank concludes that the bank's CVA loss exposures arising from fair-valued SFTs are not material. The CVA capital calculation encompasses a bank's CVA portfolio, which includes the bank's entire portfolio of covered transactions as well as eligible CVA hedges.

            3.This Standard formulates capital adequacy requirements that needs to be applied to all banks in UAE on a consolidated basis.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. (a)Credit Default Swap (CDS): A financial swap agreement in which the seller of the CDS agrees to compensate the buyer in the event of a default or other credit event by the reference obligor in exchange for a series of payments during the life of the CDS.
            2. (b)Contingent CDS: A CDS in which one or more aspects of the payout are contingent on both the occurrence of a credit event and some other event specified in the contract, such as the level of or change in a particular market variable.
            3. (c)Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA): Reflects the adjustment of default risk-free prices of derivatives due to a potential default of the counterparty. Regulatory CVA may differ from CVA used for accounting purposes. Unless explicitly specified otherwise, the term CVA in this document means regulatory CVA.
            4. (d)CVA portfolio: Includes all CVA hedges that meet the eligibility requirements stated in these Standards, as well as all covered transactions.
            5. (e)CVA Risk: Defined as the risk of losses arising from changing CVA values in response to changes in counterparty credit spreads and market risk factors that drive prices of derivative transactions.
            6. (f)Derivatives Transactions: Transactions concerning financial contracts that are traded in the Market, their values are dependent on the value of the financial assets underlying such contracts - such as commodities, indexes, currencies or any other financial products considered as such by the Central Bank.
            7. (g)Qualified Financial Contract: Any financial agreement, contract or transaction, including any terms and conditions incorporated by reference in any such financial agreement, contract or transaction, pursuant to which payment or delivery obligations are due to be performed at a certain time or within a certain period of time and whether or not subject to any condition or contingency excluding securities and commodities or any other agreement, contract or transaction as notified by the Central Bank at any time.
            8. (h)Securities Financing Transactions (SFTs): Transactions such as repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, security lending and borrowing, and margin lending transactions, where the value of the transactions depends on market valuations and the transactions are often subject to margin agreements.
            • III. Requirements

              Banks are required to calculate RWA for CVA as a multiple of capital for CVA risk calculated as specified in these Standards. The calculation relies on regulatory measures of counterparty credit risk exposure, and recognizes the impact of differences in maturity, as well as adjustments to reflect certain common hedging activities that banks use to manage CVA risk. The relevant requirements are described in this Standard.

              • A. Counterparty Exposure for CVA Calculations

                4.A bank must use a measure of exposure at default (EAD) for each counterparty to calculate CVA capital for the CVA portfolio. For derivatives exposures, the bank must use the EAD for each counterparty as calculated under the Central Bank's Counterparty Credit Risk Standard (the CCR Standard), including any effects of collateral or offsets per that Standards.

                5.For SFTs, the bank must use the measure of counterparty exposure as calculated for the leverage ratio exposure measure. For that measure, the EAD for SFTs is calculated as current exposure without an add-on for potential future exposure, with current exposure calculated as follows:

                1. (a)Where a qualifying master netting agreement (MNA) is in place, the current exposure (E*) is the greater of zero and the total fair value of securities and cash lent to a counterparty for all transactions included in the qualifying MNA (>Ei), less the total fair value of cash and securities received from the counterparty for those transactions (>Ci). This is illustrated in the following formula:

                  E* = max {0, [∑Ei − ∑Ci]}

                  where E* = current exposure,

                  ∑Ei = total fair value of securities and cash lent to counterparty “i” and

                  ∑Ci = total fair value of securities and cash received from “i”.

                2. (b)Where no qualifying MNA is in place, the current exposure for transactions with a counterparty must be calculated on a transaction-by-transaction basis – that is, each transaction is treated as its own netting set, as shown in the following formula:

                  E* = max {0, [EC]}

                  where E* = current exposure,

                  E = total fair value of securities and cash lent in the transaction, and

                  C = total fair value of securities and cash received in the transaction.

              • B. CVA Hedges

                6.To qualify as an eligible CVA hedge for purposes of the CVA capital calculation, hedge transactions must meet the eligibility requirements stated here:

                1. (a)The hedge instrument must be an index CDS, or a single-name CDS, single-name contingent CDS, or equivalent hedging instrument that directly references the counterparty being hedged; and
                2. (b)The transaction must be a component of the bank's CVA risk management program, entered into with the intent to mitigate the counterparty credit spread component of CVA risk and managed by the bank in a manner consistent with that intent.

                7.Eligible hedges that are included in the CVA calculation as CVA hedges are excluded from a bank's market risk capital calculations. A bank must treat transactions that are not eligible as CVA hedges as they would any other similar instrument for regulatory capital purposes.

              • C. CVA Capital Calculation

                8.The bank must calculate the discounted counterparty exposure for each counterparty by multiplying the total EAD for the counterparty as calculated under these Standards by a supervisory discount factor (DF) for each netting set that reflects notional weighted-average maturity of the counterparty exposures:


                1

                where

                EADiTotal is the sum of the EADs for all of the exposures to counterparty “i” within the netting set,

                2

                Mi is the weighted average maturity for the netting set for counterparty “i”, using notional values for the weighting.

                If the bank has more than one netting set with a counterparty, the bank should perform this calculation for each netting set with that counterparty separately, and sum across the netting sets.

                9.For any eligible single-name hedges for the counterparty, the bank computes the discounted value of the hedges, again using a supervisory discount factor that depends on the maturity of the hedge:

                3

                where

                Hi is the notional value of a purchased eligible single-name hedge referencing counterparty ‘i’ and used to hedge the CVA risk,

                4

                Mh is the maturity of that hedge instrument.

                If the bank has more than one instrument hedging single-name CVA risk for the counterparty, the bank should sum the discounted values of the individual hedges within each netting set.

                10.For each counterparty, the bank should calculate single-name exposure (SNE) as the discounted counterparty exposure minus the discounted value of eligible single-name CVA hedges. With a single netting set and single hedge instrument, this calculation is:

                5

                 

                11.With multiple netting sets for the counterparty (for EAD) or multiple-single name hedge instruments (for H), the corresponding terms in the SNE calculation would be the summations for the given counterparty as required above.

                12.If the bank uses single-name hedging only, the bank must use SNE for its counterparties to calculate CVA capital using the following formula:

                6

                 

                where Wi is the risk weight applicable to counterparty "i" from Table 1.

                13.Each counterparty must be assigned to one of the seven rating categories in Table 1, based on the external credit rating of the counterparty. When a counterparty does not have an external rating, the bank should follow the approach used in the CCR Standard for credit derivatives that reference unrated entities. A bank should map alternative rating scales to the ratings in Table 1 based on an analysis of historical loss experience for each rating grade.

                Table 1: Risk Weights for CVA Capital Calculation

                RatingRisk Weight
                AAA0.7%
                AA0.7%
                A0.8%
                BBB1.0%
                BB2.0%
                B3.0%
                CCC10.0%

                 

                14.If the bank also uses index hedges for CVA risk management, the CVA capital calculation is modified to include an additional reduction in systematic risk according to the following formula:

                1

                 

                where

                Hind is the notional of an eligible index hedge instrument used to hedge CVA risk,

                5

                Mind is the maturity of that index hedge, and

                other variables are as defined above in this Standard.

                The summation is taken across all index hedges. To determine the applicable risk weight for any index hedge, the bank should determine the risk weight from Table 1 that would apply to each component of the index, and use the weighted-average of these risk weights as Wind, with weights based on the notional composition of the index.

                15.An alternative version of the full calculation (including index hedges) that gives the same result, but without the intermediate step of calculating SNE, is the following:

                16

                 

                16.For any counterparty that is also a constituent of an index referenced by a CDS used for hedging CVA risk, the bank may, with supervisory approval, subtract the notional amount attributable to that single name within the index CDS (as based on its reference entity weight) from the index CDS notional amount (Hind), and treat that amount within the CVA capital calculation as a single-name hedge (Hi) of the individual counterparty with maturity equal to the maturity of the index.

              • D. Risk-Weighted Assets

                17.A bank must determine the RWA for CVA by multiplying K as calculated above by the factor 12.5:

                CVA RWA=K×12.5
                 

              • E. Simple Alternative Approach

                18.Any bank with aggregate notional amount of covered transactions less than or equal to AED 400 billion may choose to set the bank's CVA RWA equal to its RWA for counterparty credit risk as computed under the CCR Standard. If the bank chooses this approach, it must be applied to all of the bank's covered transactions. In addition, a bank adopting this simple approach may not recognize the risk-reducing effects of CVA hedges. A bank meeting the requirements for using the Simple Alternative may choose to use either the Simple Alternative or the general CVA requirements, and may change that choice at any time with the approval of the Central Bank.

            • IV. Review Requirements

              19.Bank calculations for CVA risk under these Standard and associated bank processes must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge. Reviews must cover material aspects of the calculations under these Standards, including but not limited to determination of eligible hedges, determination of maturities and amounts, mapping of counterparties to risk weights based on credit rating, and the CVA capital calculation.

            • V. Shari’ah Implementation

              20.Banks offering Islamic financial services that use Shari’ah Compliant alternatives to derivatives and Securities financing transactions (SFTs) approved by their internal Shari’ah control committees should calculate the risk weighted asset (RWA) for Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) of these Shari’ah compliant alternatives in accordance with provisions set out in this standard/guidance and in the manner acceptable by Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidance in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services

        • VII. Equity Investments in Funds

          • I. Introduction

            1.This Standard articulates specific capital requirements for equity investments in funds held in the banking book by UAE Banks. It is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), specifically as articulated in Capital requirements for banks’ equity investments in funds, (BCBS 266, published December 2013).

            2.This Standard formulates capital adequacy requirements that needs to be applied to all banks in UAE on a consolidated basis.

            The requirements apply to all equity investments by banks in all types of funds that are held in the banking book (in-scope equity positions), including off-balance sheet exposures such as unfunded commitments to subscribe to a fund’s future capital calls. The requirements do not apply to exposures, including underlying exposures held by the fund, that would be deducted from capital under the Central Bank’s Guidance re Capital Supply.

            3.This Standard requires banks to calculate risk-weighted assets (RWA) for any fund in which the bank has an in-scope equity position, with RWA calculated as if the bank held the fund’s exposures directly rather than indirectly through investment in the fund. Banks are required to use a hierarchy of three successive approaches with varying degrees of risk sensitivity and conservatism, as described below in these Standards. This Standard also incorporates a leverage adjustment to RWA to reflect a fund’s leverage appropriately. These requirements are discussed below in these Standards.

            4.The Standards follow the calibration developed by the Basel Committee, which includes a maximum risk weight of 1250%, calibrated on a total capital adequacy requirement of 8%. The UAE instituted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% (excluding capital buffers), applicable to all licensed banks. Consequently, the maximum capital charge for a single exposure will be the lesser of the value of the exposure after applying valid credit risk mitigation, netting and haircuts, and the capital resulting from applying a risk weight of 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%) to this exposure.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms used in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In particular, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a.Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) reflects the adjustment of default risk-free prices of derivatives due to a potential default of the counterparty. Regulatory CVA may differ from CVA used for accounting purposes. Unless explicitly specified otherwise, the term CVA in this document means regulatory CVA.
            2. b.CVA Risk is defined as the risk of losses arising from changing CVA values in response to changes in counterparty credit spreads and market risk factors that drive prices of derivative transactions.
            3. c.Fund is a financial vehicle, whether established inside or outside the UAE, engaged in the activity of receiving investors' money for the purpose of investment against the issue of fund units of equal value and rights. This includes, but is not limited to, mutual funds, private equity funds and hedge funds, open-end funds, closed-end funds, debt funds and hedge funds.
            4. d.Mandate means instruction to manage a pool of capital, or a particular pile of funds, using a specific strategy and within certain risk parameters.
            5. e.Potential Future Exposure (PFE) is an estimate of the potential increase in exposure to counterparty credit risk against which a bank must hold regulatory capital.
          • III. Requirements

            • A. Approaches

              5.Banks must treat in-scope equity positions in a manner consistent with one or more of the following three approaches: the “look-through approach”, the “mandate-based approach” and the “fall-back approach”.

              1.Look-through approach (LTA)

              6.The look-through approach (LTA) requires a bank to risk weight the underlying exposures of a fund as if the bank held the exposures directly. LTA must be used by a bank when:

              1. (iii)there is sufficient and frequent information provided to the bank regarding the underlying exposures of the fund to determine the applicable risk weights and exposure amounts; and
              2. (iv)such information is subject to verification by an independent third party.

              7.To satisfy condition (i) above, the frequency of financial reporting of the fund must be the same as, or more frequent than, the financial reporting obligation of the bank, and the granularity of the financial information must be sufficient to calculate the corresponding risk weights and exposure amounts without requiring an external audit. To satisfy condition (ii) above, there must be verification of the underlying exposures by an independent third party, such as a depository or custodian bank or, where applicable, a fund management company.

              8.Under the LTA, a bank must risk weight all underlying exposures of a fund as if the bank held those exposures directly. This includes, for example, any underlying exposure arising from the fund’s derivatives activities and the counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposure associated with those derivatives. However, instead of determining the applicable credit valuation adjustment (CVA) capital associated with the fund’s derivatives exposures, a bank should instead increase the CCR exposure by 50 percent (that is, multiply the CCR exposure by a factor of 1.5) before applying the risk weight associated with the counterparty. Banks are not required to apply the 1.5 factor to transactions for which the CVA capital charge would not otherwise be applicable, such as those conducted directly with central counterparties.

              9.Banks may rely on third-party calculations to determine the risk weights associated with equity investments in funds (that is, the underlying risk weights of the exposures of the fund) if they cannot obtain adequate data or information themselves to perform the calculations. In such cases, however, the bank must increase the resulting risk weight by 20 percent (that is, multiplied by a factor of 1.2) relative to the risk weight that would be applicable if the bank held the exposure directly.

              10.Banks should use the risk weights from the LTA to compute RWA for the fund. After calculating the RWA for a fund according to the LTA, banks must calculate the average risk weight for that fund (Avg RWfund) by dividing the total RWA of the fund by the total (unweighted) assets of the fund.

              2.Mandate-based approach (MBA)

              11.Banks should use the second approach, the mandate-based approach (MBA), only when the conditions for applying the LTA are not met. Banks should use the information contained in a fund’s mandate or in the relevant regulations governing such investment funds to perform a conservative calculation of the applicable risk weights for the assets of the fund.

              12.Under the MBA, on-balance-sheet exposures (that is, the fund’s assets) are risk weighted assuming that the underlying portfolios are invested to the maximum extent allowed under the fund’s mandate in assets that would attract the highest risk weights, and then progressively in other assets that attract lower risk weights. If more than one risk weight could be applied to a given exposure, the bank should use the highest applicable risk weight.

              13.The notional amount of derivative exposures and off-balance-sheet items should be risk-weighted according to the requirements of the risk-based capital standards.

              14.Banks should calculate the CCR exposure associated with a fund’s derivative positions in accordance with the Central Bank’s Standard for Counterparty Credit Risk Capital. If replacement cost cannot be determined, the bank should use the notional amount of the derivative as the replacement cost. If the Potential Future Exposure (PFE) cannot be determined, the bank should use an amount equal to 15 percent of the notional value as the PFE.

              15.As with the LTA, banks should account for CVA Risk on derivatives by increasing the CCR exposure by 50 percent (that is, multiply the CCR exposure by a factor of 1.5) before applying the risk weight associated with the counterparty. Banks are not required to apply the 1.5 factor for transactions to which the CVA capital charge would not otherwise be applicable, such as those conducted directly with central counterparties.

              16.As with the LTA, after calculating the RWA for a fund according to the MBA, banks must calculate the average risk weight for that fund (Avg RWfund) by dividing the RWA of the fund by the total (unweighted) assets of the fund.

              3.Fall-back approach (FBA)

              17.When the conditions for applying either the LTA or the MBA are not met, banks are required to apply the FBA, under which Avg RWfund for a bank’s investment in the fund is set equal to 1250 percent.

            • B. Partial use of the Approaches

              18.A bank may use a combination of the three approaches when determining the capital requirements for an equity investment in an individual fund, with one approach applied to a portion of the fund’s exposures and one or more other approaches applied to the fund’s other exposures. The requirements for each approach as articulated under this Standard must be met for any portions of the fund to which the LTA or MBA are applied. RWA calculations from each applied approach should be added together with the sum then divided by the total fund assets to compute Avg RWfund.

            • C. Treatment of Funds That Invest in Other Funds

              19.When a bank has an investment in one fund (e.g., Fund A) that itself has an investment in another fund (e.g., Fund B), the risk weight applied to the investment holding of the first fund (that is, Fund A’s investment in Fund B) should be determined by using the same three approaches set out above (LTA, MBA, and FBA). If fund investments are further layered (for example, if Fund B has investments in a Fund C), the risk weights applied to the additional layers of investment (that is, Fund B’s investment in Fund C) can be determined using the LTA, but only if the LTA was also used for determining the risk weight for the investment in the fund at the previous layer (Fund A’s investment in Fund B). Otherwise, the bank must apply the FBA to the additional investment layers.

            • D. Exclusions to the LTA, MBA and FBA

              20.Equity holdings in entities whose debt obligations qualify for a zero risk weight can be excluded from the LTA, MBA and FBA approaches (including government sponsored entities where a zero risk weight can be applied), at the discretion of the UAE Central Bank. If the UAE Central Bank makes such exclusion, this will be available to all banks.

              21.The UAE Central Bank may, in its absolute discretion, change the risk weighting of debt obligations from time to time as it finds necessary.

            • E. Leverage Adjustment

              22.When determining the risk weight for a bank’s equity investment in a fund, a bank must apply a leverage adjustment to the average risk weight of the fund as calculated above.

              23.Leverage for a fund is calculated as the ratio of total fund assets (not risk weighted) to total fund equity. Under the LTA, this ratio should be calculated from the information obtained on the fund’s asset holdings and financing. Under the MBA, banks should assume the maximum financial leverage permitted in the fund’s mandate, or the maximum permitted under the regulations governing the fund.

            • F. RWA for Equity Investments in Funds

              24.Banks must calculate the risk weight to be applied to their equity investments in any fund as the product of the fund’s average risk weight and the fund’s leverage:

              Risk Weight = Avg RWfund × Leverage

              where Avg RWfund = the average risk-weight for the fund’s assets as calculated under this Standard, and

              Leverage = the fund’s leverage as measured by the fund’s ratio of assets to equity as calculated under this Standard.

              25.The risk weight for a bank’s equity investment in any fund is subject to a cap of 1250 percent. If the calculation described in the paragraph above produces a result in excess of 1250 percent, the bank should use the maximum risk weight of 1250 percent instead.

              26.Banks should compute the RWA for their investments in funds by multiplying the amount of the equity investment in a given fund by the risk weight calculated as described in this Standard, based on Avg RWfund and the leverage of the fund determined according to this Standard.

          • IV. Review Requirements

            27.Bank calculations of risk-weighted assets for equity investments in funds under this Standard must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review by third parties and challenge. Reviews must cover associated bank processes including the identification of in-scope equity positions, determination of the appropriate approach under the hierarchy of approaches, and the processes for collection of information about the funds’ exposures or mandates, as well as material aspects of the calculations under this Standard, including but not limited to the risk weights applied to the underlying exposures (including on-balance-sheet, off-balance-sheet and derivative exposures as well as PFE), the average risk weights for funds and the calculation of fund leverage.

          • V. Shari’ah Implementation

            28.Banks offering Islamic financial services that use Shari’ah-Compliant Equity Investment in Funds held in the banking book which is approved by their internal Shari’ah control committees should calculate the relevant risk weighted asset (RWA) in line with this standard and guidelines, to accordingly maintain the appropriate amount of capital, in accordance with the provisions set out in this standard and guidance in a manner acceptable by Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidelines in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services.

        • VIII. Securitisation

          • I. Introduction

            1.This Standard provides requirements for risk-based capital for securitisation-related exposures in the banking book for banks in the UAE. It is based closely on requirements of the securitisation framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), specifically as articulated in Revisions to the securitisation framework, (BCBS 374, published December 2014, revised July 2016).

            2.The Central Bank securitisation framework aims to ensure that banks in the UAE adopt practices to manage the risks associated with securitisation, and to ensure that banks hold sufficient regulatory capital against the associated credit risk.

            3.Regulatory capital is required for banks’ securitisation exposures, including those arising from the provision of credit risk mitigants to a securitisation transaction, investments in asset-backed securities, retention of subordinate tranches, and extension of liquidity facilities or credit enhancements, as set forth below.

            4.This Standard formulates capital adequacy requirements that needs to be applied to all banks in UAE on a consolidated basis. Banks must apply the Central Bank securitisation framework for determining regulatory capital requirements on banking book exposures arising from traditional and synthetic securitisations or similar structures. Banks should consult with Central Bank when there is uncertainty about whether a given transaction should be considered a securitisation.

            5.The Standards follow the calibration developed by the Basel Committee, which includes a maximum risk weight of 1250%, calibrated on a total capital adequacy requirement of 8%. The UAE instituted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% (excluding capital buffers), applicable to all licensed banks. Consequently, the maximum capital charge for a single exposure will be the lesser of the value of the exposure after applying valid credit risk mitigation, netting and haircuts, and the capital resulting from applying a risk weight of 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%) to this exposure.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a)asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) program is a structure that issues commercial paper to third-party investors and is backed by assets or other exposures held in a bankruptcy-remote, special purpose entity;
            2. b)Clean-up call is an option that permits securitisation exposures to be called before all of the underlying exposures or have been repaid. In the case of a traditional securitisation, this generally is accomplished by repurchasing the remaining securitisation exposures once the pool balance or outstanding securities have fallen below some specified level. In the case of a synthetic transaction, a clean-up call may take the form of a clause that extinguishes the credit protection;
            3. c)credit enhancement is a contractual arrangement in which a bank or other entity retains or assumes a securitisation exposure and, in substance, provides some degree of added protection to other parties to the transaction;
            4. d)credit-enhancing interest-only strip is an on-balance sheet asset that (i) represents a valuation of cash flows related to excess spread, and (ii) is subordinated;
            5. e)early amortization provision is a mechanism that, once triggered, accelerates the reduction of the investor’s interest in the underlying exposures of a securitisation of revolving credit facilities and allows investors to be receive pay-outs prior to the originally stated maturity of the securities issued;
            6. f)excess spread (or future margin income) is total gross finance charge collections and other income received by the trust or special purpose entity (SPE) minus certificate interest, servicing fees, charge-offs, and other senior trust or SPE expenses;
            7. g)implicit support is support provided by a bank to a securitisation in excess of its explicit contractual obligations;
            8. h)originating bank is a bank that meets either of the following conditions with regard to a particular securitisation:
              1. a.the bank originates directly or indirectly underlying exposures included in the securitisation; or
              2. b.the bank serves as a sponsor of an asset-backed commercial paper conduit or similar program that acquires exposures from third-party entities; in the context of such programs, a bank would generally be considered a sponsor and, in turn, an originator if it, in fact or in substance, manages or advises the program, places securities into the market, or provides liquidity and/or credit enhancements;
            9. i)pool is the underlying exposure or group of exposures that are the underlying instruments being securitized; these may include but are not restricted to the following: loans, commitments, asset-backed and mortgage-backed securities, corporate bonds, equity securities, and private equity investments;
            10. j)resecuritisation exposure is a securitisation exposure in which the risk associated with an underlying pool of exposures is tranched and at least one of the underlying exposures is a securitisation exposure. In addition, an exposure to one or more resecuritisation exposures is a resecuritisation exposure. An exposure resulting from re-tranching of a securitisation exposure is not a resecuritisation exposure if the bank is able to demonstrate that the cash flows to and from the bank could be replicated in all circumstances and conditions by an exposure to the securitisation of a pool of assets that contains no securitisation exposures;
            11. k)securitisation is the creation of a contractual structure under which the cash flow from an underlying pool of exposures is used to service at least two different stratified risk positions or tranches reflecting different degrees of credit risk;
            12. l)securitisation exposure is a bank exposure to a securitisation, which may include but are not restricted to the following: asset-backed securities, mortgage-backed securities, repurchased securitisation exposures, credit enhancements, liquidity facilities, interest rate or currency swaps, credit derivatives, tranched cover, and reserve accounts, such as cash collateral accounts, recorded as an asset by the originating bank;
            13. m)securitisation of revolving credit facilities is a securitisation in which one or more underlying exposures represent, directly or indirectly, current or future draws on a revolving credit facility, including but not limited to credit card exposures, home equity lines of credit, commercial lines of credit, and other lines of credit;
            14. n)senior securitisation exposure is a securitisation exposure (such as a tranche) that is effectively backed or secured by a first claim on the entire amount of the assets in the underlying securitized pool. Different maturities of several senior tranches that share pro rata loss allocation shall have no effect on the seniority of these tranches, since they benefit from the same level of credit enhancement;
            15. o)Special purpose entity (SPE) is corporation, trust, or other entity organized for a specific purpose, the activities of which are limited to those appropriate to accomplish the purpose of the SPE, and the structure of which is intended to isolate the SPE from the credit risk of an originator or seller of exposures in a securitisation. Exposures commonly are sold to an SPE in exchange for cash or other assets funded by debt that is issued by the SPE;
            16. p)simple, transparent, and comparable (STC) securitisations are less-complex securitisations that meet the requirements for simplicity, transparency, and comparability specified in the Appendix below in this Standard;
            17. q)synthetic securitisation is a structure with at least two different stratified risk positions or tranches that reflect different degrees of credit risk where credit risk of an underlying pool of exposures is transferred, in whole or in part, through the use of funded instruments (e.g., credit-linked notes) or unfunded credit derivatives or guarantees (e.g., credit default swaps) that serve to hedge the credit risk of the portfolio, such that the risk to investors depends on the performance of the underlying pool;
            18. r)traditional securitisation is a securitisation that is neither a synthetic securitisation nor a resecuritisation; and
            19. s)Tranche is a set of securities issued as part of a securitisation with a common priority claim on a common underlying pool of assets or exposures.

            The Central Bank may modify these definitions pursuant to a circular or otherwise.

          • III. Operational Requirements for The Recognition Of Risk Transference

            • A. Operational Requirements for Traditional Securitisations

              6.An originating bank may exclude underlying exposures from the calculation of risk-weighted assets only if all of the following conditions for risk transference have been met.

              1. a.Significant credit risk associated with the underlying exposures has been transferred to third parties.
              2. b.Banks should obtain legal opinion that confirms true sale, that the transferor does not maintain effective or indirect control over the transferred exposures; that is, that the exposures are legally isolated from the transferor in such a way (e.g., through the sale of assets or through sub-participation) that the exposures are put beyond the reach of the transferor and its creditors, even in bankruptcy or receivership.
              3. c.The transferor is not able to repurchase from the transferee the previously transferred exposures in order to realize their benefits and is not obligated to retain the risk of the transferred exposures.
              4. d.The securities issued are not obligations of the transferor. Thus, investors who purchase the securities only have a claim on the underlying exposures.
              5. e.The transferee is an SPE and the holders of the beneficial interests in that entity have the right to pledge or exchange them without restriction.
              6. f.Clean-up calls satisfy the conditions set out in Section D below.
              7. g.The securitisation does not contain clauses that (i) require the originating bank to alter the underlying exposures such that the pool’s credit quality is improved unless this is achieved by selling exposures to independent and unaffiliated third parties at market prices; (ii) allow for increases in a retained first-loss position or credit enhancement provided by the originating bank after the transaction’s inception; or (iii) increase the yield payable to parties other than the originating bank, such as investors and third-party providers of credit enhancements, in response to a deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying pool.
              8. h.There are no termination options or triggers except eligible clean-up calls meeting the requirements of Section D below, termination for specific changes in tax and regulation, or early amortization provisions that result in the securitisation transaction failing the operational requirements set out in Section D below.
              9. i.Such other conditions as the Central Bank shall provide after notification to banks pursuant to a circular or otherwise.

              Banks meeting these above conditions must still hold regulatory capital against any exposure they retain under the securitisation.

              7.The transferor’s retention of servicing rights to the exposures does not in itself constitute indirect control of the exposures.

            • B. Operational Requirements for Synthetic Securitisations

              8.For synthetic securitisations, the use of credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques (i.e., collateral, guarantees and credit derivatives) for hedging the underlying exposure may be recognized for risk-based capital purposes only if the conditions outlined below are satisfied:

              1. a.Credit risk mitigants comply with the requirements set out for CRM in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk.
              2. b.Eligible collateral is limited to that specified as eligible under in the Central Bank’s Standards for Credit Risk (eligible collateral pledged by SPEs may be recognized).
              3. c.Eligible guarantors are as defined in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk (SPEs are not considered to be eligible guarantors).
              4. d.Significant credit risk associated with the underlying exposures is transferred by the bank to third parties.
              5. e.Instruments used to transfer credit risk do not contain terms or conditions that limit the amount of credit risk transferred.
              6. f.The bank obtains a legal opinion that confirms the enforceability of the contract.
              7. g.Such other conditions as the Central Bank shall provide after notification to banks pursuant to a circular or otherwise.

              9.Clean-up calls for synthetic securitisations also must satisfy the conditions set out in Section D below. If a synthetic securitisation incorporates a call (other than a clean-up call) that effectively terminates the transaction and the purchased credit protection on a specific date, the bank should treat this as required under the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk for CRM maturity mismatch. This requirement does not apply to synthetic securitisations that are assigned a risk weight of 1250%.

            • C. Operational Requirements for Securitisations Containing Early Amortisation Provisions

              10.A transaction is deemed to fail the operational requirements for traditional or synthetic securitisations stated above in this Standard if the bank originates or sponsors a securitisation transaction that includes one or more revolving credit facilities, and the securitisation transaction incorporates an early amortization or similar provision that, if triggered, would:

              1. i.Subordinate the bank’s senior or pari passu interest in the underlying revolving credit facilities to the interest of other investors;
              2. ii.Subordinate the bank’s subordinated interest to an even greater degree relative to the interests of other parties;
              3. iii.In other ways increases the bank’s exposure to losses associated with the underlying revolving credit facilities; or
              4. iv.Not satisfy any conditions as set by the Central Bank after notification to banks pursuant to a circular or otherwise.

              11.If a transaction contains one of the following examples of an early amortization provision but otherwise meets the operational requirements for traditional or synthetic securitisations stated above in this Standard, the originating bank may exclude the underlying exposures associated with such a transaction from the calculation of risk-weighted assets, but must still hold regulatory capital against any securitisation exposures they retain in connection with the transaction:

              1. a.Replenishment structures where the underlying exposures do not revolve and early amortization terminates the ability of the bank to add new exposures;
              2. b.Transactions with revolving credit facilities containing early amortization features that mimic term structures (i.e., where the risk on the underlying revolving credit facilities does not return to the originating bank) and where the early amortization provision does not effectively result in subordination of the originator’s interest;
              3. c.Structures where a bank securitizes one or more revolving credit facilities and where investors remain fully exposed to future drawdowns by borrowers even after an early amortization event has occurred; or
              4. d.The early amortization provision is triggered solely by events not related to the performance of the underlying assets or the selling bank, such as material changes in tax laws or regulations.
            • D. Operational Requirements and Treatment of Clean-Up Calls

              12.For securitisation transactions that include a clean-up call, no capital shall be required due to the presence of a clean-up call if the following conditions are met:

              1. a.The exercise of the clean-up call is not mandatory, in form or in substance, but rather is at the discretion of the originating bank;
              2. b.The clean-up call is not structured to avoid allocating losses to credit enhancements or positions held by investors or otherwise structured to provide credit enhancement; and
              3. c.The clean-up call is exercisable only when 10% or less of the original underlying portfolio or securities issued remains, or, for synthetic securitisations, when 10% or less of the original reference portfolio value remains.
              4. d.Such other conditions as the Central Bank shall provide after notification to banks pursuant to a circular or otherwise.

              13.Securitisation transactions that include a clean-up call that does not meet all of the criteria stated in the immediately preceding paragraph result in a capital requirement for the originating bank. For a traditional securitisation, the bank must treat the underlying exposures as if they were not securitized. Additionally, banks must not recognize in regulatory capital any gain on sale. For synthetic securitisations, the bank purchasing protection must hold capital against the entire amount of the securitized exposures as if they did not benefit from any credit protection.

              14.If a clean-up call, when exercised, is found to serve as a credit enhancement, the exercise of the clean-up call must be considered a form of implicit support provided by the bank, and must be treated as such in accordance with the requirements related to implicit support stated below in this Standard.

            • E. Operational Requirement for UAE Originating Banks

              15.The following types of securitisations, if the originating bank is UAE based, will only be permitted in specific instances and require the Central Bank’s approval:

              1. a.securitisation of revolving credit facilities
              2. b.synthetic securitisation
              3. c.resecuritisation exposure
          • IV. Due Diligence Requirements

            16.A bank must meet all the requirements listed below to use any of the approaches specified in the Standard. If a bank does not perform the level of due diligence as described in this section, it must then assign a 1250% risk weight to any securitisation (or resecuritisation) exposure.

            17.On an ongoing basis, the bank must have a comprehensive understanding of the risk characteristics of its individual securitisation exposures, whether on- or off-balance sheet, as well as the risk characteristics of the pools underlying its securitisation exposures. The extent of a bank’s due diligence should be appropriate to the nature and complexity of the bank’s securitisation related exposures. The bank should have in place effective internal policies, processes, and systems to ensure that the necessary due diligence activities are performed and should be able to demonstrate to the Central Bank that the due diligence analysis conducted is appropriate and effective.

            18.Banks must be able to obtain performance information on the underlying pools on an ongoing basis in a timely manner. Such information may include, as appropriate: exposure type; percentage of loans 30, 60 and 90 days past due; default rates; prepayment rates; loans in foreclosure; property type; occupancy; average credit score or other measures of creditworthiness; average loan-to-value ratio; and industry and geographical diversification. For resecuritisations, banks should have information not only on the underlying securitisation tranches, such as the issuer name and credit quality, but also on the characteristics and performance of the pools underlying those securitisation tranches.

            19.A bank must have a thorough understanding of all structural features of a securitisation transaction that would materially affect the performance of the bank’s exposures to the transaction, such as the contractual waterfall and waterfall-related triggers, credit enhancements, liquidity enhancements, market value triggers, and deal-specific definitions of default.

          • V. Treatment Of Securitisation Exposures

            • A. Calculation of Exposure Amounts and Risk-Weighted Assets

              20.For regulatory capital purposes, the exposure amount of a securitisation exposure shall be calculated as the sum of the on-balance sheet amount of the exposure, or carrying value – taking into account purchase discounts and write-downs or specific provisions the bank took on this securitisation exposure – and any off-balance sheet exposure amount as applicable, in accordance with the requirements in the following paragraphs.

              21.For credit risk mitigants sold or purchased by the bank, the exposure amount should be determined using the treatment of credit risk mitigation set out below in the section on treatment of credit risk mitigation in this Standard. For all off-balance-sheet facilities that are not credit risk mitigants, the bank should apply a credit conversion factor (CCF) of 100%.

              22.For securitisation-related derivatives other than credit risk derivatives (such as interest rate or currency swaps sold or purchased as part of the securitisation), the Central Bank’s Standard on Counterparty Credit Risk should be used to calculate the exposure amount.

              23.Banks shall compute the risk-weighted asset amount for a securitisation exposure by multiplying the exposure amount as defined in this section by the appropriate risk weight determined under one of the approaches discussed below in this Standard. Risk weight caps may apply, as described in the this Standard on risk-weight caps for securitisation.

              24.Banks may adjust risk weights for overlapping exposures. An exposure A overlaps another exposure B if in all circumstances the bank can avoid any loss on exposure B by fulfilling its obligations with respect to exposure A. A bank may also recognize overlap between relevant capital charges for exposures in the trading book and securitisation exposures in the banking book, provided that the bank is able to calculate and compare the capital charges for the relevant exposures.

              25.Banks must deduct from Common Equity Tier 1 any increase in equity capital resulting from a securitisation transaction, such as a gain on a sale associated with expected future margin income.

            • B. Approaches for Risk-Weighted Assets

              26.Securitisation exposures are risk-weighted under one of two available approaches for securitisation, the Securitisation External Ratings-Based Approach (SEC-ERBA) or the Standardized Approach (SEC-SA). A bank must use SEC-ERBA if the exposure has an external credit assessment that meets the operational requirements for an external credit assessment, or an inferred rating that meets the operational requirements for inferred ratings. If a bank cannot use the SEC-ERBA, the bank must use the SEC-SA. Banks that are unable to apply either approach a securitisation exposure must assign such an exposure a risk weight of 1250%.

              1.Calculation of Attachment and Detachment Points
               

              27.Both the SEC-ERBA and the SEC-SA rely on the identification of attachment and detachment points for each securitisation tranche, which are decimal values between zero and one that capture the pool-loss conditions under which a securitisation exposure would experience losses due to the credit performance of the underlying pool of exposures.

              28.The attachment point (A) represents the threshold (as a fraction of the pool’s total exposure) at which losses within the underlying pool would first be allocated to the securitisation exposure. The attachment point is calculated as:

              (i) the outstanding balance of all underlying assets in the securitisation

              minus

              (ii) the outstanding balance of all tranches that rank senior or pari passu to the tranche that contains the securitisation exposure of the bank (including the exposure itself)

              divided by

              (ii) the outstanding balance of all underlying assets in the securitisation.

              29.The detachment point (D) represents the threshold at which losses within the underlying pool result in a total loss of principal for the tranche in which a securitisation exposure resides. The detachment point is calculated as:

              (i) the outstanding balance of all underlying assets in the securitisation

              minus

              (ii) the outstanding balance of all tranches that rank senior to the tranche that contains the securitisation exposure of the bank

              divided by

              (ii) the outstanding balance of all underlying assets in the securitisation.

              30.Both A and D must be no less than zero.

              31.For the calculation of A and D: (i) overcollateralization and funded reserve accounts must be recognized as tranches; and (ii) the assets forming these reserve accounts must be recognized as underlying assets. A bank can recognize only the loss-absorbing part of the funded reserve accounts that provide credit enhancement for this purpose. Unfunded reserve accounts, such as those to be funded from future receipts from the underlying exposures (e.g. unrealized excess spread) and assets that do not provide credit enhancement like pure liquidity support, currency or interest-rate swaps, or cash collateral accounts related to these instruments must not be included in the above calculation of A and D. Banks should take into consideration the economic substance of the transaction and apply these definitions conservatively.

              2.External Ratings-Based Approach (SEC-ERBA)
               

              32.For securitisation exposures that are externally rated, or for which a rating can be inferred as described below, risk-weighted assets under the SEC-ERBA will be determined by multiplying securitisation exposure amounts by the appropriate risk weights determined from Tables 1 and 2, provided that the following operational criteria for the use of external ratings are met:

              1. a.The external credit assessments must take into account and reflect the entire amount of credit risk exposure the bank has with regard to all payments owed to it.
              2. b.The external credit assessments must be from an eligible external credit assessment institution (ECAI) which is also approved by the Central Bank.
              3. c.The rating must be published in an accessible form, such as on a public website or in a periodically distributed paper publication. Loss and cash flow analysis as well as sensitivity of ratings to changes in the underlying rating assumptions should be publicly available.
              4. d.Eligible ECAIs must have a demonstrated expertise in assessing securitisations, which may be evidenced by strong market acceptance.

              33.A bank may infer a rating for an unrated position from an externally rated “reference exposure” for purposes of the SEC-ERBA provided that the following operational requirements are satisfied:

              1. a.The reference securitisation exposure must rank pari passu or be subordinate in all respects to the unrated securitisation exposure. Credit enhancements, if any, must be taken into account when assessing the relative subordination of the unrated exposure and the reference securitisation exposure.
              2. b.The maturity of the reference securitisation exposure must be equal to or longer than that of the unrated exposure.
              3. c.The inferred rating must be updated on an ongoing basis to reflect any subordination of the unrated position or changes in the external rating of the reference securitisation exposure.
              4. d.The external rating of the reference securitisation exposure must satisfy the general requirements for recognition of external ratings as defined in this Standard.

              34.Where CRM is provided to specific underlying exposures or to the entire pool by an eligible guarantor and the CRM is reflected in the external credit assessment of a securitisation exposure, banks should use the risk weight associated with that external credit assessment. In order to avoid any double-counting, no additional capital recognition is permitted. If the CRM provider is not recognized as an eligible guarantor, banks should treat the covered securitisation exposures as unrated.

              35.In the situation where a credit risk mitigant solely protects a specific securitisation exposure within a given structure (e.g., an asset-backed security tranche) and this protection is reflected in the external credit assessment, the bank must treat the exposure as if it is unrated and then apply the CRM treatment specified in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk.

              36.A bank is not permitted to use any external credit assessment for risk-weighting purposes where the assessment is based at least partly on unfunded support provided by the bank (such as a letter of credit provided by the bank that enhance the credit quality of the securitisation). If a bank buys ABCP where it provides an unfunded securitisation exposure extended to the ABCP program (e.g., liquidity facility or credit enhancement), and that exposure plays a role in determining the credit assessment on the ABCP, the bank must treat the ABCP as if it were not rated. The bank must continue to hold capital against the other securitisation exposures it provides (e.g., against the liquidity facility and/or credit enhancement).

              37.For exposures with short-term ratings, or when an inferred rating based on a short-term rating is available, the risk weights in Table 1 apply unless otherwise notified by the Central Bank.

              Table 1: SEC-ERBA risk weights for short-term ratings2

              External credit assessmentA-1/P-1A-2/P-2A-3/P-3All other ratings
              Risk weight15%50%100%1250%

               

              38.For exposures with long-term ratings, or with an inferred rating based on a long-term rating, risk weights are determined according to Table 2, after adjustment for tranche maturity as specified below and, for non-senior tranches, tranche thickness as specified below (unless otherwise notified by the Central Bank).

              Table 2: SEC-ERBA risk weights for long-term ratings

              (Subject to adjustment for tranche maturity and tranche thickness)

              RatingSeniorNon-senior (thin) tranche
              Tranche maturity (MT)Tranche maturity (MT)
              1 year5 years1 year5 years
              AAA15%20%15%70%
              AA+15%30%15%90%
              AA25%40%30%120%
              AA–30%45%40%140%
              A+40%50%60%160%
              A50%65%80%180%
              A–60%70%120%210%
              BBB+75%90%170%260%
              BBB90%105%220%310%
              BBB–120%140%330%420%
              BB+140%160%470%580%
              BB160%180%620%760%
              BB–200%225%750%860%
              B+250%280%900%950%
              B310%340%1050%1050%
              B–380%420%1130%1130%
              CCC+/CCC/CCC–460%505%1250%1250%
              Below CCC–1250%1250%1250%1250%

               

              39.To account for tranche maturity, banks shall use tranche maturity (MT) calculated as described below to derive the risk weight through linear interpolation between the risk weights for one year and five years from the table.

              40.To account for tranche thickness, for non-senior tranches banks must multiply the risk weight derived from the table by a factor of 1-(D-A). However, the resulting risk weight must be no less than half the risk weight derived directly from the table based on maturity.

              41.The risk weight is subject to a floor of 15%. In addition, the resulting risk weight should never be lower than the risk weight corresponding to a senior tranche of the same securitisation with the same rating and maturity.

              Tranche maturity (MT)

              42.Tranche maturity is a tranche’s remaining effective maturity in years, calculated in one of the following two ways, subject to a floor of one year and a cap of five years:

              1. (a)Weighted-average maturity, calculated as the weighted-average maturity of the contractual cash flows of the tranche:

              1

              where:

              CFt denotes the cash flows (principal, interest payments and fees) contractually payable by the borrower in period t; or

              1. (b)Legal maturity, based on final legal maturity of the tranche as follows:

                2

                 

                where ML is the final legal maturity of the tranche in years.

              43.Banks have discretion to choose either method to calculate tranche maturity. However, under the weighted-average maturity method, contractual payments must be unconditional and must not be dependent on the actual performance of the securitized assets. If such unconditional contractual payment dates are not available, the bank must use the legal maturity calculation.

              44.When determining the maturity of a securitisation exposure, banks should take into account the maximum period of time they are exposed to potential losses from the securitized assets. In cases where a bank provides a commitment, the bank should calculate the maturity of the securitisation exposure resulting from this commitment as the sum of the contractual maturity of the commitment and the longest maturity of the assets to which the bank would be exposed after a draw has occurred. If those assets are revolving, banks should use the longest contractually possible remaining maturity of assets that might be added during the revolving period, rather than the longest maturity of the assets currently in the pool. An exception applies for credit protection instruments that are only exposed to losses that occur up to the maturity of that instrument. In such cases, a bank is allowed to apply the contractual maturity of the credit protection and is not required to look through to the protected position.

              3.Standardized Approach (SEC-SA)
               

              45.Under the SEC-SA, a bank calculates risk weights using a supervisory formula and the following bank-supplied inputs:

              W : the ratio of delinquent underlying exposures to total underlying exposures in the securitisation pool;

              KSA : the capital charge that would apply to the underlying exposures had they not been securitized;

              A : the tranche attachment point as defined above; and

              D : the tranche detachment point as defined above.

              46.KSA is the weighted-average capital charge of the entire portfolio of underlying exposures, calculated as 8% multiplied by the average risk weight of the underlying pool exposures. The average risk weight is the total risk-weighted asset amount divided by the sum of the underlying exposure amounts. This calculation should take into account the effects of any credit risk mitigation applied to the underlying exposures (either individually or to the entire pool). KSA is expressed as a decimal between zero and one; that is, a weighted-average risk weight of 100% means that KSA would equal 0.08.

              47.For structures involving an SPE, banks should treat all of the SPE’s exposures related to the securitisation as exposures in the pool, including assets in which the sPE may-have invested such as reserve accounts or cash collateral accounts, and claims against counterparties resulting from interest swaps or currency swaps. A bank can exclude exposures from the calculation if the bank can demonstrate to the Central Bank that the risk does not affect its particular securitisation exposure or that the risk is immaterial, for example because it has been mitigated.

              48.In the case of funded synthetic securitisations, any proceeds of the issuances of credit-linked notes or other funded obligations of the sPE that serve as collateral for the repayment of the securitisation exposure in question, and which the bank cannot demonstrate to the Central Bank are immaterial, must be included in the calculation of KSA if the default risk of the collateral is subject to the tranched loss allocation.

              49.In cases where a bank has set aside a specific provision or has a non-refundable purchase price discount on an exposure in the pool, KSA must be calculated using the gross amount of the exposure without the specific provision and/or non-refundable purchase price discount.

              50.The variable W equals the ratio of the sum of the nominal amount of delinquent underlying exposures to the nominal amount of underlying exposures. Delinquent underlying exposures are defined as underlying exposures that are 90 days or more past due, subject to bankruptcy or insolvency proceedings, in the process of foreclosure, held as real estate owned, or in default, where default is defined within the securitisation deal documents.

              51.The inputs KSA and W are used as inputs to calculate KA, as follows:

              3

               

              52.If a bank does not know the delinquency status of the entire pool, the bank should adjust the calculation of KA as follows, using the relevant nominal amounts of exposures in the pool (denoted EAD below):

              53

               

              However, if the portion of the pool for which the bank does not know the delinquency status exceeds 5 percent of the total pool, the securitisation exposure must be risk weighted at 1250%.

              53.The capital requirement per unit of the securitisation exposure under the SEC-SA is:

              6

               

              where:

              7

              U=DKA

              L=max[(AKA),0]

              54.The supervisory parameter ρ is set equal to 1 for a securitisation exposure that is not a resecuritisation exposure. (See below for the case of resecuritisation exposures.)

              55.The risk weight assigned to a securitisation exposure when applying the SEC-SA is calculated as follows:

              • When D for a securitisation exposure is less than or equal to KA, the exposure must be assigned a risk weight of 1250%.
              • When A for a securitisation exposure is greater than or equal to KA, the risk weight of the exposure, expressed as a percentage, is 12.5×K.

              When A is less than KA and D is greater than KA, the applicable risk weight is a weighted average of 1250% and 12.5×K according to the following formula:

              8

               

              56.The risk weight for market-risk hedges such as currency or interest rate swaps shall be inferred from a securitisation exposure that is pari passu to the swaps or, if such an exposure does not exist, from the next subordinated tranche.

              57.The SEC-SA risk weights are subject to a floor risk weight of 15%. Moreover, when a bank applies the SEC-SA to an unrated junior exposure in a transaction where the more senior tranches (exposures) are rated and no rating can be inferred for the junior exposure, the resulting risk weight under SEC-SA for the junior unrated exposure shall not be lower than the risk weight for the next more senior rated exposure.


              2 The rating designations used in this an all other tables are for illustrative purposes only, and do not indicate any preference for, or endorsement of, any particular external assessment system.

            • C. Risk Weight Caps for Securitisation Exposures

              58.Banks may apply a “look-through” approach to senior securitisation exposures, whereby the risk weight for the senior securitisation exposure is at most equal to the exposure-weighted average risk weight applicable to the underlying pool exposures. To apply a maximum risk weight from this look-through approach, the bank must be able to know the composition of the underlying exposures at all times. For an originating or sponsor bank, capital requirements on securitisation exposures are capped at what the capital requirement would have been on the underlying exposures if they had not been securitized.

              59.The maximum required capital ratio for the aggregate of a bank’s securitisation exposures to a given securitisation shall be computed as KSA multiplied by P, where P is the largest proportion of interest the bank holds.

              • For a bank that has one or more securitisation exposures that reside in a single tranche of a given pool, P equals the proportion (expressed as a percentage) of securitisation exposure that the bank holds in that given tranche (calculated as the bank’s total exposure in the tranche) divided by the total nominal amount of the tranche.
              • For a bank that has securitisation exposures that reside in different tranches of a given securitisation, P equals the maximum proportion of interest across tranches, where the proportion of interest for each of the different tranches should be calculated as described above.

              60.Where this risk-weight cap results in a lower risk weight than the floor risk weight of 15%, the bank should use the risk weight resulting from the cap.

              61.In applying the capital charge cap, banks must deduct the entire amount of any gain on sale, and the amount of credit-enhancing interest-only strips arising from the securitisation transaction.

              62.The caps described here do not apply to resecuritisation exposures.

          • VI. Treatment of Resecuritisation

            For risk weighting of resecuritisation exposures, banks must apply only the SEC-SA as specified above (not the SEC-ERBA), with the following adjustments:

            • The capital requirement (KSA) of the underlying securitisation exposures is calculated using the securitisation framework;
            • Delinquencies (W) are set to zero for any exposure to a securitisation tranche in the underlying pool; and
            • The supervisory parameter ρ is set equal to 1.5, rather than 1 as for securitisation exposures.

            63.The resulting risk weight for resecuritisation exposures is subject to a minimum risk weight of 100%.

            64.If the underlying portfolio of a resecuritisation consists partly of a pool of exposures to securitisation tranches and partly of other assets, banks should separate the exposures to securitisation tranches from exposures to assets that are not securitisations. Banks should calculate the KA parameter separately for each individual subset. Separate W parameters should be applied to each subset, set to zero where the exposures are to securitisation tranches, or calculated according to this Standard for the subsets where the exposures are to assets that are not securitisation tranches. The KA for the resecuritisation exposure is then the exposure-weighted average of the calculated KA values for the separate subsets.

          • VII. Implicit Support

            65.The originator shall not provide any implicit support to investors in a securitisation transaction.

            66.When a bank provides implicit support to a securitisation, it must hold capital against all of the underlying exposures associated with the securitisation transaction as if they had not been securitized. Additionally, the bank is not permitted to recognize in regulatory capital any gain on sale. Furthermore, the bank is required to disclose publicly (a) that it has provided non-contractual support and (b) the capital impact of doing so.

            67.Where a securitisation transaction contains a clean-up call and the clean up call can be exercised by the originator in circumstances where exercise of the clean up call effectively provides credit enhancement, the clean up call shall be treated as implicit support and the concerned securitisation transaction will attract the above prescriptions.

          • VIII. Treatment of Credit Risk Mitigation for Securitisation Exposures

            68.A bank may recognize the following forms of purchased credit protection in accordance with the CRM framework when calculating capital requirements:

            • collateral eligible for CRM under the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk, including collateral pledged by SPEs;
            • credit protection provided by eligible guarantors, but not including SPEs; and
            • Guarantees or credit derivatives that fulfil the requirements for CRM under the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk.

            69.When a bank provides full (or pro rata) credit protection to a securitisation exposure, the bank must calculate its capital requirements as if it directly holds the portion of the securitisation exposure on which it has provided credit protection, using the requirements of this Standard.

            Tranched protection

            70.With tranched credit protection, the original securitisation tranche is decomposed into protected and unprotected sub-tranches. A provider of tranched credit protection must calculate required capital as if directly exposed to the particular sub-tranche of the securitisation exposure on which it is providing protection, according to the capital requirements for securitisations under this Standard.

            71.A buyer of tranched credit protection may recognize tranched protection on the guaranteed or protected portion according to the applicable CRM framework, provided that the conditions for recognition of credit risk mitigation are met.

            72.For a bank using the SEC-SA for the original securitisation exposure, the parameters A and D should be calculated separately for each unprotected sub-tranche as if they were directly issued as separate tranches at the inception of the transaction.

            73.For a bank using the SEC-ERBA for the original securitisation exposure, the relevant risk weights for the different sub-tranches are as follows:

            • For the sub-tranche of highest priority, the bank should use the risk weight of the original securitisation exposure.
            • For a sub-tranche of lower priority, if the bank can infer a rating from one of the subordinated tranches of the original transaction, the risk weight of the sub-tranche can be determined by applying the inferred rating for the SEC-ERBA, with the tranche thickness computed for the sub-tranche of lower priority only.
            • For a sub-tranche of lower priority where the bank cannot infer a rating, the risk weight for the sub-tranche of lower priority is the larger of (a) the SEC-SA risk weight with the parameters A and D calculated separately for each of the sub-tranches as if they were directly issued as separate tranches at the inception of the transaction, or (b) the SEC-ERBA risk weight of the original securitisation exposure prior to recognition of protection.

            74.Under all approaches, a lower-priority sub-tranche must be treated as a non-senior securitisation exposure even if the original securitisation exposure prior to protection qualified as senior.

            Maturity mismatches

            75.A maturity mismatch exists when the residual maturity of a hedge is less than that of the underlying exposure.

            76.In the case of a maturity mismatch on protection provided for a securitisation exposure, the banks should follow the approach to maturity mismatches specified in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk. When the exposures being hedged have different maturities, the longest maturity must be used.

            77.Banks that synthetically securitize exposures held on their balance sheet by purchasing tranched credit protection must apply the maturity mismatch treatment specified in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk. When the exposures being hedged have different maturities, banks must use the longest maturity. However, for securitisation exposures that are assigned a risk weight of 1250%, maturity mismatches are not taken into account.

          • IX. Capital Treatment for STC Securitisation

            • A. Scope and Identification of STC Securitisations

              78.For regulatory capital purposes, only the following types of exposures can be STC-compliant:

              • Exposures to non-ABCP, traditional securitisations that meet the criteria in Appendix 1 below.
              • Exposures to ABCP conduits and/or transactions financed by ABCP conduits, where the conduit and/or the transactions financed meet the criteria in Appendix 2 below.

              79Synthetic securitisations, securitisation of revolving credit facilities and resecuritisations are not considered as STC-compliant.

              80.STC treatment will not be applied if banks having investment in international securitisation

            • B. Compliance With the STC Criteria and the Additional Criteria for Capital Purpose and Oversight

              81.The originator or sponsor must disclose to investors all necessary information at the transaction level to allow investors to determine whether the securitisation is STC-compliant. Based on the information provided by the originator or sponsor, the investor must make an assessment of the STC compliance status of the securitisation for regulatory capital purposes.

              82.For retained positions where the originator has achieved significant risk transfer in accordance with the operational requirements of this Standard, the determination shall be made by the originator retaining the position.

              83.STC criteria must be met at all times. Checking compliance with some of the criteria might only be necessary at origination (or at the time of initiating the exposure, in case of guarantees or liquidity facilities). Investors and holders of the securitisation positions are expected to take into account developments that may invalidate previous compliance assessments, for example deficiencies in the frequency and content of the investor reports, in the alignment of interest, or changes in the transaction documentation at variance with relevant STC criteria. For dynamic pools, the criteria should be checked every time assets are added to the pool.

            • C. Alternative Capital Treatment for STC-Compliant Securitisations

              84.Securitisation transactions that are assessed as STC-compliant for capital purposes shall be subject to securitisation capital requirements as modified by this Standard. The resulting risk weights are subject to a floor risk weight of 10% for senior tranches, and 15% for non-senior tranches.

              1.External Ratings-Based Approach for STC Securitisation Exposures
               

              85.When the SEC-ERBA is used, for exposures with short-term ratings or an inferred rating based on a short-term rating, the risk weights in Table 3 apply.

              Table 3: SEC-ERBA risk weights for STCs with short-term ratings

              External credit assessmentA-1/P-1A-2/P-2A-3/P-3All other ratings
              Risk weight10%30%60%1250%

               

              86.For STC exposures with long-term ratings, risk weights under SEC-ERBA are determined according to Table 4, with adjustments for tranche maturity and (for non-senior tranches) tranche thickness as discussed above in this Standard for non-STC exposures.

              Table 4: SEC-ERBA risk weights for STCs with long-term ratings
              (Subject to adjustment for tranche maturity and tranche thickness)

              RatingSeniorNon-senior (thin) tranche
              Tranche maturity (MT)Tranche maturity (MT)
              1 year5 year1 year5 year
              AAA10%10%15%40%
              AA+10%15%15%55%
              AA15%20%15%70%
              AA–15%25%25%80%
              A+20%30%35%95%
              A30%40%60%135%
              A–35%40%95%170%
              BBB+45%55%150%225%
              BBB55%65%180%255%
              BBB–70%85%270%345%
              BB+120%135%405%500%
              BB135%155%535%655%
              BB–170%195%645%740%
              B+225%250%810%855%
              B280%305%945%945%
              B–340%380%1015%1015%
              CCC+/CCC/CC415%455%1250%1250%
              Below CCC–1250%1250%1250%1250%

               

              2.Standardized Approach for STC Securitisation Exposures
               

              87.If a bank uses the SEC-SA for an STC securitisation exposure, the bank should set the supervisory parameter p equal to 0.5. The SEC-SA framework is otherwise unchanged for STC exposures.

          • X. Review Requirements

            88.Bank calculations and associated bank processes related to capital requirements for securitisations under this Standard must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge. Reviews must cover material aspects of the calculations and processes under this Standard, including but not limited to the internal assessment and control process for the various operational requirements, calculation of exposure amounts for both on-balance-sheet and any off-balance-sheet securitisation-related exposures, calculation of tranche maturity and tranche thickness and the related risk-weight adjustments for the SEC-ERBA, and the calculation of all necessary parameters for the SEC-SA.

          • XI. Shari’ah Implementation

            89.Banks offering Islamic financial services that use Shari’ah Compliant Securitisation Exposures held in the banking book which are approved by their internal Shari’ah control committees should manage the risks associated with securitisation and calculate the risk weighted asset (RWA) in line with this standard and guidance, to accordingly maintain the appropriate amount of capital, in accordance with the provisions set out in this standard and guidance in a manner acceptable by Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidance in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial service.

             

             

             

          • XII. Appendix

            • Appendix 1: Criteria for STC Exposures

              This Appendix 1 provides criteria, as well as certain guidance and clarifications, for Simple, Transparent, and Comparable (STC) securitisation exposures, together with certain additional requirements that must be satisfied in order for a securitisation to receive alternative regulatory capital treatment. These criteria do not cover short-term securitisations such as ABCP conduits or similar programs; criteria for such short-term securitisations are covered in Appendix 2 below.

              • A. Asset risk

                1.Nature of Assets
                 

                In simple, transparent and comparable securitisations, the assets underlying the securitisation should be credit claims or receivables that are homogeneous. In assessing homogeneity, consideration should be given to asset type, jurisdiction, legal system and currency.

                As more exotic asset classes require more complex and deeper analysis, credit claims or receivables should have contractually identified periodic payment streams relating to rental,3 principal, interest, or principal and interest payments. Any referenced interest payments or discount rates should be based on commonly encountered market interest rates, but should not reference complex or complicated formulas or exotic derivatives as specified below.

                Homogeneity

                For capital purposes, the homogeneity of assets in the pool should be assessed taking into account the following principles:

                • The nature of assets should be such that investors would not need to analyse and assess materially different legal and/or credit risk factors and risk profiles when carrying out risk analysis and due diligence checks.
                • Homogeneity should be assessed on the basis of common risk drivers, including similar risk factors and risk profiles.
                • Credit claims or receivables included in the securitisation should have standard obligations, in terms of rights to payments and/or income from assets and that result in a periodic and well-defined stream of payments to investors. Credit card facilities should be deemed to result in a periodic and well-defined stream of payments to investors for the purposes of this criterion.
                • Repayment of noteholders should mainly rely on the principal and interest proceeds from the securitized assets. Partial reliance on refinancing or re-sale of the asset securing the exposure may occur provided that re-financing is sufficiently distributed within the pool and the residual values on which the transaction relies are sufficiently low and that the reliance on refinancing is thus not substantial.

                Commonly encountered market interest rates

                The term “commonly encountered market interest rates” should be understood to encompass rates reflective of a lender’s cost of funds, to the extent that sufficient data are provided to investors to allow them to assess their relation to other market rates. Examples of these would include:

                • Interbank rates and rates set by monetary policy authorities, such as LIBOR, EURIBOR, EIBOR and the Fed funds rate; and
                • Sectoral rates reflective of a lender’s cost of funds, such as internal interest rates that directly reflect the market costs of a bank’s funding or that of a subset of institutions.

                Exotic derivatives

                Determination of whether particular derivatives are “exotic” is inevitably somewhat subjective, but banks should apply a reasonable and conservative process to identifying exotic instruments. The Global Association of Risk Professionals (GARP) defines an exotic instrument as a financial asset or instrument with features making it more complex than simpler, plain vanilla, products. Interest rate caps and/or floors would not automatically be considered exotic derivatives.

                2.Asset performance history
                 

                In order to provide investors with sufficient information on an asset class to conduct appropriate due diligence and access to a sufficiently rich data set to enable a more accurate calculation of expected loss in different stress scenarios, verifiable loss performance data, such as delinquency and default data, should be available for credit claims and receivables with substantially similar risk characteristics to those being securitized, for a time period long enough to permit meaningful evaluation by investors. Sources of and access to data, and the basis for claiming similarity to credit claims or receivables being securitized, should be clearly disclosed to all market participants.

                In addition to the history of the asset class within a jurisdiction, investors should consider whether the originator, sponsor, servicer and other parties with fiduciary responsibilities to the securitisation have an established performance history for substantially similar credit claims or receivables to those being securitized and for an appropriately long period.

                The originator or sponsor of the securitisation, as well as the original lender, who underwrites the assets, must have sufficient experience in originating exposures similar to those securitized.

                When determining whether the performance history of the originator and the original lender for substantially similar claims or receivables to those being securitized has been established for an “appropriately long period of time,” investors should consider a performance history no shorter than a period of seven years for non-retail exposures. For retail exposures, the minimum performance history is five years.

                3.Payment status
                 

                Non-performing credit claims and receivables are likely to require more complex and heightened analysis. In order to ensure that only performing credit claims and receivables are assigned to a securitisation, credit claims or receivables being transferred to the securitisation may not, at the time of inclusion in the pool, include obligations that are in default or delinquent or obligations for which the transferor (e.g. the originator or sponsor) or parties to the securitisation (e.g. the servicer or a party with a fiduciary responsibility) are aware of evidence indicating a material increase in expected losses or of enforcement actions.

                To prevent credit claims or receivables arising from credit-impaired borrowers from being transferred to the securitisation, the originator or sponsor should verify that the credit claims or receivables meet the following conditions:

                1. a.The obligor has not been the subject of an insolvency or debt restructuring process due to financial difficulties within three years prior to the date of origination;4
                2. b.The obligor is not recorded on a public credit registry of persons with an adverse credit history;
                3. c.The obligor does not have a credit assessment by an ECAI or a credit score indicating a significant risk of default; and
                4. d.The credit claim or receivable is not subject to a dispute between the obligor and the original lender.

                The assessment of these conditions should be carried out by the originator or sponsor no earlier than 45 days prior to the closing date. Additionally, at the time of this assessment, there should be to the best knowledge of the originator or sponsor no evidence indicating likely deterioration in the performance status of the credit claim or receivable.

                Additionally, at the time of their inclusion in the pool, at least one payment should have been made on the underlying exposures, except in the case of revolving asset trust structures such as those for credit card receivables, trade receivables, and other exposures payable in a single instalment at maturity.

                4.Consistency of underwriting
                 

                Investor analysis generally is simpler and more straightforward where the securitisation is of credit claims or receivables that satisfy robust origination standards. To ensure that the quality of the securitized credit claims and receivables is not affected by changes in underwriting standards, the originator should demonstrate to investors that any credit claims or receivables being transferred to the securitisation have been originated in the ordinary course of the originator’s business, without material deterioration in underwriting standards. Where underwriting standards change, the originator should disclose the timing and purpose of such changes. Underwriting standards should not be less stringent than those applied to credit claims and receivables retained on the balance sheet.

                In all circumstances, all credit claims or receivables must be originated in accordance with sound and prudent underwriting criteria based on an assessment that the obligor has the “ability and volition to make timely payments” on its obligations, or in the case of granular pools of obligors, originated in the ordinary course of the originator’s business with expected cash flows modelled to meet stated obligations of the securitisation under prudently stressed loan loss scenarios.

                The originator or sponsor of the securitisation is expected, where underlying credit claims or receivables have been acquired from third parties, to review the underwriting standards of these third parties (i.e. to check their existence and assess their quality) and to ascertain that they have assessed the “ability and volition to make timely payments on obligations” for the obligors.

                5.Asset selection and transfer
                 

                The performance of the securitisation should not rely upon the ongoing selection of assets through active management on a discretionary basis of the securitisation’s underlying portfolio. Credit claims or receivables transferred to a securitisation should satisfy clearly defined eligibility criteria (such as criteria related to size of the obligation, age of the borrower, loan-to-value ratios, debt-to-income ratios, or debt service coverage ratios). Credit claims or receivables transferred to a securitisation after the closing date may not be actively selected, actively managed or otherwise cherry-picked on a discretionary basis. Investors should be able to assess the credit risk of the asset pool prior to their investment decisions. Provided they are not actively selected or otherwise cherry-picked on a discretionary basis, the addition of credit claims or receivables during the revolving periods or their substitution or repurchasing due to the breach of representations and warranties do not represent active portfolio management.

                In order to meet the principle of true sale, the securitisation should effect true sale such that the underlying credit claims or receivables:

                1. a.are enforceable against the obligor and their enforceability is included in the representations and warranties of the securitisation;
                2. b.Are beyond the reach of the seller, its creditors or liquidators and are not subject to material re-characterization or claw-back risks;
                3. c.are not effected through credit default swaps, derivatives or guarantees, but by a transfer5 of the credit claims or the receivables to the securitisation; and
                4. d.demonstrate effective recourse to the ultimate obligation for the underlying credit claims or receivables and are not a securitisation of other securitisations.

                An independent third-party legal opinion must support the claim that the true sale and the transfer of assets under the applicable laws comply with points (a) through (d) above.

                In applicable jurisdictions, securitisations employing transfers of credit claims or receivables by other means should demonstrate the existence of material obstacles preventing true sale at issuance (such as the immediate realization of transfer tax or the requirement to notify all obligors of the transfer) and should clearly demonstrate the method of recourse to ultimate obligors.6 In such jurisdictions, any conditions where the transfer of the credit claims or receivable is delayed or contingent upon specific events and any factors affecting timely perfection of claims by the securitisation should be clearly disclosed.

                The originator should provide representations and warranties that the credit claims or receivables being transferred to the securitisation are not subject to any condition or encumbrance that can be foreseen to adversely affect enforceability in respect of collections due.

                6.Initial and ongoing data
                 

                To assist investors in conducting appropriate due diligence prior to investing in a new offering, sufficient loan-level data in accordance with applicable laws or, in the case of granular pools, summary stratification data on the relevant risk characteristics of the underlying pool should be available to potential investors before pricing of a securitisation.

                To assist investors in conducting appropriate and ongoing monitoring of performance and so that investors wishing to purchase a securitisation in the secondary market have sufficient information to conduct appropriate due diligence, timely loan-level data in accordance with applicable laws or granular pool stratification data on the risk characteristics of the underlying pool and standardized investor reports should be readily available to current and potential investors at least quarterly throughout the life of the securitisation. Cut-off dates for the loan-level or granular pool stratification data should be aligned with those used for investor reporting.

                To provide a level of assurance that the reporting of the underlying credit claims or receivables is accurate and that the underlying credit claims or receivables meet the eligibility requirements, the initial portfolio should be reviewed7 for conformity with the eligibility requirements by an appropriate legally accountable and independent third party, such as an independent accounting practice or the calculation agent or management company for the securitisation. The review should confirm that the credit claims or receivables transferred to the securitisation meet the portfolio eligibility requirements. The review could, for example, be undertaken on a representative sample of the initial portfolio, with the application of a minimum confidence level. The verification report need not be provided but its results, including any material exceptions, should be disclosed in the initial offering documentation.


                3 Payments on operating and financing leases are typically considered to be rental payments rather than payments of principal and interest.

                4 This condition would not apply to borrowers that previously had credit incidents but were subsequently removed from credit registries as a result of the borrower cleaning their records. This is the case in jurisdictions in which borrowers have the “right to be forgotten.”

                5 The requirement should not affect jurisdictions whose legal frameworks provide for a true sale with the same effects as described above, but by means other than a transfer of the credit claims or receivables.

                6 E.g., equitable assignment, perfected contingent transfer.

                7 The review should confirm that the credit claims or receivables transferred to the securitisation meet the portfolio eligibility requirements. The review could, for example, be undertaken on a representative sample of the initial portfolio, with the application of a minimum confidence level. The verification report need not be provided but its results, including any material exceptions, should be disclosed in the initial offering documentation

              • B. Structural Risk

                1.Redemption cash flows
                 

                Liabilities subject to the refinancing risk of the underlying credit claims or receivables are likely to require more complex and heightened analysis. To help ensure that the underlying credit claims or receivables do not need to be refinanced over a short period of time, there should not be a reliance on the sale or refinancing of the underlying credit claims or receivables in order to repay the liabilities, unless the underlying pool of credit claims or receivables is sufficiently granular and has sufficiently distributed repayment profiles. Rights to receive income from the assets specified to support redemption payments should be considered as eligible credit claims or receivables in this regard.8

                2.Currency and interest rate asset and liability mismatches
                 

                To reduce the payment risk arising from the different interest rate and currency profiles of assets and liabilities and to improve investors’ ability to model cash flows, interest rate and foreign currency risks should be appropriately mitigated at all times, and if any hedging transaction is executed the transaction should be documented according to industry- standard master agreements. Only derivatives used for genuine hedging of asset and liability mismatches of interest rate and / or currency should be allowed.

                The term “appropriately mitigated” should be understood as not necessarily requiring a completely perfect hedge. The appropriateness of the mitigation of interest rate and foreign currency through the life of the transaction must be demonstrated by making available to potential investors, in a timely and regular manner, quantitative information including the fraction of notional amounts that are hedged, as well as sensitivity analysis that illustrates the effectiveness of the hedge under extreme but plausible scenarios.

                If hedges are not performed through derivatives, then those risk-mitigating measures are only permitted if they are specifically created and used for the purpose of hedging an individual and specific risk, and not multiple risks at the same time (such as credit and interest rate risks). Non-derivative risk mitigation measures must be fully funded and available at all times.

                3.Payment priorities and observability
                 

                To prevent investors being subjected to unexpected repayment profiles during the life of a securitisation, the priorities of payments for all liabilities in all circumstances should be clearly defined at the time of securitisation and appropriate legal comfort regarding their enforceability should be provided.

                Junior liabilities should not have payment preference over senior liabilities that are due and payable. The securitisation should not be structured as a “reverse” cash flow waterfall such that junior liabilities are paid where due and payable senior liabilities have not been paid.

                To help provide investors with full transparency into any changes, all triggers affecting the cash flow waterfall, payment profile, or priority of payments of the securitisation should be clearly and fully disclosed both in offering documents and in investor reports, with information in the investor report that clearly identifies the breach status, the ability for the breach to be reversed and the consequences of the breach. Investor reports should contain information that allows investors to monitor the evolution of indicators that are subject to triggers. Any triggers breached between payment dates should be disclosed to investors on a timely basis in accordance with the terms and conditions of all underlying transaction documents.

                Securitisations featuring a revolving period should include provisions for appropriate early amortization events and/or triggers of termination of the revolving period, including, notably: (i) deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures; (ii) a failure to acquire sufficient new underlying exposures of similar credit quality; and (iii) the occurrence of an insolvency-related event with regard to the originator or the servicer.

                Following the occurrence of a performance-related trigger, an event of default or an acceleration event, the securitisation positions should be repaid in accordance with a sequential amortization priority of payments, in order of tranche seniority, and there should not be provisions requiring immediate liquidation of the underlying assets at market value.

                To assist investors in their ability to appropriately model the cash flow waterfall of the securitisation, the originator or sponsor should make available to investors, both before pricing of the securitisation and on an ongoing basis, a liability cash flow model or information on the cash flow provisions allowing appropriate modelling of the securitisation cash flow waterfall.

                To ensure that debt forgiveness, forbearance, payment holidays and other asset performance remedies can be clearly identified, policies and procedures, definitions, remedies and actions relating to delinquency, default or restructuring of underlying debtors should be provided in clear and consistent terms so that investors can clearly identify debt forgiveness, forbearance, payment holidays, restructuring and other asset performance remedies on an ongoing basis.

                4.Voting and enforcement rights
                 

                To help ensure clarity for securitisation note holders of their rights and ability to control and enforce on the underlying credit claims or receivables, upon insolvency of the originator or sponsor, all voting and enforcement rights related to the credit claims or receivables should be transferred to the securitisation. Investors’ rights in the securitisation should be clearly defined in all circumstances, including the rights of senior versus junior note holders.

                5.Documentation disclosure and legal review
                 

                To help investors to fully understand the terms, conditions, legal and commercial information prior to investing in a new offering and to ensure that this information is set out in a clear and effective manner for all programs and offerings, sufficient initial offering9 and draft underlying10 documentation should be made available to investors (and readily available to potential investors on a continuous basis) within a reasonably sufficient period of time prior to pricing, or when legally permissible, such that the investor is provided with full disclosure of the legal and commercial information and comprehensive risk factors needed to make informed investment decisions. Any type of securitisation can fulfil these requirements once it meets its prescribed standards of disclosure and legal review. Final offering documents should be available from the closing date and all final underlying transaction documents shortly thereafter. These should be composed such that readers can readily find, understand, and use relevant information.

                To ensure that all the securitisation’s underlying documentation has been subject to appropriate review prior to publication, the terms and documentation of the securitisation should be subject to appropriate third-party legal review, such as experienced legal counsel already instructed by one of the transaction parties (for example, by the arranger or the trustee). Investors should be notified in a timely fashion of any changes in such documents that have an impact on the structural risks in the securitisation.

                6.Alignment of interest
                 

                In order to align the interests of those responsible for the underwriting of the credit claims or receivables with those of investors, the originator or sponsor of the credit claims or receivables should retain a material net economic exposure and demonstrate a financial incentive in the performance of these assets following their securitisation.


                8 For example, associated savings plans designed to repay principal at maturity.

                9 E.g., draft offering circular, draft offering memorandum, draft offering document or draft prospectus, such as a “red herring”.

                10 For example, asset sale agreement, assignment, novation or transfer agreement; servicing, backup servicing, administration and cash management agreements; trust/management deed, security deed, agency agreement, account bank agreement, guaranteed investment contract, incorporated terms or master trust framework or master definitions agreement as applicable; any relevant inter-creditor agreements, swap or derivative documentation, subordinated loan agreements, start-up loan agreements and liquidity facility agreements; and any other relevant underlying documentation, including legal opinions.

              • C. Fiduciary and Servicer Risk

                1.Fiduciary and contractual responsibilities
                 

                To help ensure that servicers have extensive workout expertise, thorough legal and collateral knowledge and a proven track record in loss mitigation, such parties should be able to demonstrate expertise in the servicing of the underlying credit claims or receivables, servicing should be supported by a management team with extensive industry experience. The servicer should at all times act in accordance with reasonable and prudent standards. Policies, procedures and risk management controls should be well documented and adhere to good market practices and relevant regulatory regimes. There should be strong systems and reporting capabilities in place. In assessing whether “strong systems and reporting capabilities” are in place for non-banking entities, well-documented policies, procedures and risk management controls, as well as strong systems and reporting capabilities, may be substantiated by an independent third-party review.

                The party or parties with fiduciary responsibility should act on a timely basis in the best interests of the securitisation note holders, and both the initial offering and all underlying documentation should contain provisions facilitating the timely resolution of conflicts between different classes of note holders by the trustees, to the extent permitted by applicable law. The party or parties with fiduciary responsibility to the securitisation and to investors should be able to demonstrate sufficient skills and resources to comply with their duties of care in the administration of the securitisation vehicle.

                To increase the likelihood that those identified as having a fiduciary responsibility towards investors as well as the servicer execute their duties in full on a timely basis, remuneration should be such that these parties are incentivized and able to meet their responsibilities in full and on a timely basis.

                2.Transparency to investors
                 

                To help provide full transparency to investors, to assist investors in the conduct of their due diligence, and to prevent investors from being subject to unexpected disruptions in cash flow collections and servicing, the contractual obligations, duties, and responsibilities of all key parties to the securitisation, both those with a fiduciary responsibility and ancillary service providers, should be defined clearly both in the initial offering and all underlying documentation. Provisions should be documented for the replacement of servicers, bank account providers, derivatives counterparties and liquidity providers in the event of failure, non-performance, insolvency, or other deterioration of creditworthiness of any such counterparty to the securitisation.

                To enhance transparency and visibility of all receipts, payments, and ledger entries at all times, the performance reports to investors should report the securitisation’s income and disbursements, such as scheduled principal, redemption principal, scheduled interest, prepaid principal, past due interest and fees and charges, delinquent, defaulted and restructured amounts under debt forgiveness and payment holidays, and should include accurate accounting for amounts attributable to principal and interest deficiency ledgers. The term “income and disbursements” should also be understood as including deferment, forbearance, and repurchases.

              • D. Additional Criteria for Capital Purposes

                1.Credit risk of underlying exposures
                 

                At the cut-off date for addition of exposures to the pool, the underlying exposures must meet the conditions to be assigned a risk weight equal to or smaller than:

                • 40% on a value-weighted average exposure basis for a portfolio where the exposures are loans secured by residential mortgages or fully guaranteed residential loans;
                • 50% on an individual exposure basis where the exposure is a loan secured by a commercial mortgage;
                • 75% on an individual exposure basis where the exposure is a retail exposure; or
                • 100% on an individual exposure basis for any other exposure.

                These risk weights should be after taking into account any eligible credit risk mitigation. The thresholds as set are based on the current Standardized Approach to credit risk, and may be revisited if the Standardized Approach for credit risk is subsequently revised.

                2.Granularity of the pool
                 

                At the portfolio cut-off date, the aggregate value of all exposures to a single obligor shall not exceed 1% of the aggregated outstanding exposure value of all exposures in the portfolio.

                 

                 

                 

            • Appendix 2: Criteria for Short-Term STC Exposures

              This Appendix provides criteria, including certain guidance and clarifications, for short-term Simple, Transparent, and Comparable (STC) securitisation exposures, together with certain additional requirements that must be satisfied in order for a securitisation to receive alternative regulatory capital treatment.

              For an ABCP conduit to be considered STC, the criteria in this Appendix need to be met at both the conduit level and the transaction level.

              • For exposures at the conduit level (e.g. exposure arising from investing in the commercial paper issued by an ABCP program or sponsoring arrangements at the conduit/program level), compliance with the short-term STC capital criteria is achieved only if the criteria are satisfied at both the conduit level and the transaction level.
              • In the case of exposures at the transaction level, compliance with the short-term STC capital criteria is considered to be achieved if the transaction-level criteria are satisfied for the transactions to which support is provided.

              In each section, any requirements specific to either the conduit level or the transaction level are noted separately, together with more general requirements that apply to both levels.

              • A. Definitions

                1. (a)Asset-backed commercial paper (ABCP) conduit is a special purpose vehicle that can issue commercial paper against claims on underlying assets.
                2. (b)ABCP program is a program of commercial paper issued by an ABCP conduit.
                3. (c)Assets or asset pool means the credit claims and/or receivables underlying a transaction in which the ABCP conduit holds a beneficial interest.
                4. (d)The investor is the holder of commercial paper issued under an ABCP program, or of any type of exposure to the conduit representing a financing liability of the conduit, such as loans.
                5. (e)The obligor is the borrower or counterparty who is obliged to make payments on the underlying credit claim or a receivable that is part of an asset pool.
                6. (f)The seller is the party that (i) concluded (in its capacity as original lender) the original agreement that created the obligations or potential obligations (under a credit claim or a receivable) of an obligor or purchased the obligations or potential obligations from the original lender(s), and (ii) transferred those assets through a transaction or passed on the interest to the ABCP conduit.
                7. (g)The sponsor means the sponsor of an ABCP conduit; other relevant parties with a fiduciary responsibility in the management and administration of the ABCP conduit may bear some of the responsibilities of a sponsor.
                8. (h)A transaction means an individual transaction in which the ABCP conduit holds a beneficial interest. A transaction may qualify as a securitisation, but may also be a direct asset purchase, the acquisition of undivided interest in a revolving pool of asset, a secured loan etc.
              • B. Asset Risk

                1.Nature of assets

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should make representations and warranties to investors that the criteria at the transaction level are met, and explain how this is the case on an overall basis. Only if specified should this be done for each transaction.

                Provided that each individual underlying transaction is homogeneous in terms of asset type, a conduit may be used to finance transactions of different asset types.

                Program-wide credit enhancement should not prevent a conduit from qualifying for STC, regardless of whether such enhancement technically creates a type of resecuritisation.

                Transaction level

                The assets underlying a transaction in a conduit should be credit claims or receivables that are homogeneous, in terms of asset type. (This does not automatically exclude securitisations of equipment leases and securitisations of auto loans and leases from the short-term STC framework.)

                The assets underlying each individual transaction in a conduit should not be composed of “securitisation exposures” as defined in the Central Bank’s Standard on Required Capital for Securitisation Exposures. The transaction-level requirement is still met if the conduit does not purchase the underlying asset with a refundable purchase price discount but instead acquires a beneficial interest in the form of a note which itself might qualify as a securitisation exposure, as long as the securitisation exposure is not subject to any further tranching (i.e. has the same economic characteristic as the purchase of the underlying asset with a refundable purchase price discount).

                Credit claims or receivables underlying a transaction in a conduit should have contractually identified periodic payment streams relating to rental,11 principal, interest, or principal and interest payments. Credit claims or receivables generating a single payment stream would equally qualify as eligible. Any referenced interest payments or discount rates should be based on commonly encountered market interest rates, but should not reference complex or complicated formulae or exotic derivatives.

                 

                Homogeneity

                For capital purposes, homogeneity should be assessed taking into account the following principles:

                • The nature of assets should be such that there would be no need to analyse and assess materially different legal and/or credit risk factors and risk profiles when carrying out risk analysis and due diligence checks for the transaction.
                • Homogeneity should be assessed based on common risk drivers, including similar risk factors and risk profiles.
                • Credit claims or receivables included in the securitisation should have standards obligations, in terms of rights to payments and/or income from assets and that result in a periodic and well-defined stream of payments to investors. Credit card facilities should be deemed to result in a periodic and well-defined stream of payments to investors for the purposes of this criterion.
                • Repayment of the securitisation exposure should mainly rely on the principal and interest proceeds from the securitized assets. Partial reliance on refinancing or re-sale of the asset securing the exposure may occur provided that re-financing is sufficiently distributed within the pool and the residual values on which the transaction relies are sufficiently low and that the reliance on refinancing is thus not substantial.

                Commonly encountered market interest rates

                The term “commonly encountered market interest rates” should be understood to encompass rates reflective of a lender’s cost of funds, to the extent that sufficient data are provided to the sponsors to allow them to assess their relation to other market rates. Examples of these would include:

                • Interbank rates and rates set by monetary policy authorities, such as LIBOR, EURIBOR, EIBOR, and the Federal funds rate; and
                • Sectoral rates reflective of a lender’s cost of funds, such as internal interest rates that directly reflect the market costs of a bank’s funding or that of a subset of institutions.

                Exotic derivatives

                Determination of whether particular derivatives are “exotic” is inevitably somewhat subjective, but banks should apply a reasonable and conservative process to identifying exotic instruments. The Global Association of Risk Professionals (GARP) defines an exotic instrument as a financial asset or instrument with features making it more complex than simpler, plain vanilla, products. Interest rate caps and/or floors would not automatically be considered exotic derivatives.

                2.Asset performance history

                Conduit level

                In order to provide investors with sufficient information on the performance history of the asset types backing the transactions, the sponsor should make available to investors sufficient loss performance data on claims and receivables with substantially similar risk characteristics, such as delinquency and default data on similar claims, and for a time period long enough to permit meaningful evaluation. The sponsor should disclose to investors the sources of such data and the basis for claiming similarity to credit claims or receivables financed by the conduit.

                Such loss performance data may be provided on a stratified basis. Examples of such data might include:

                • all materially relevant data on the conduit’s composition (outstanding balances, industry sector, obligor concentrations, maturities etc) and conduit’s overview; and
                • all materially relevant data on the credit quality and performance of underlying transactions, allowing investors to identify collections, and, as applicable, debt restructuring, forgiveness, forbearance, payment holidays, repurchases, delinquencies and defaults.
                Transaction level

                In order to provide the sponsor with sufficient information on the performance history of each asset type backing the transactions and to conduct appropriate due diligence and to have access to a sufficiently rich data set to enable a more accurate calculation of expected loss in different stress scenarios, verifiable loss performance data, such as delinquency and default data, should be available for credit claims and receivables with risk characteristics substantially similar to those being financed by the conduit, for a time period long enough to permit meaningful evaluation by the sponsor.

                 

                The sponsor of the securitisation, as well as the original lender that underwrites the assets, must have sufficient experience in the risk analysis/underwriting of exposures or transactions with underlying exposures similar to those securitized. The sponsor should have well documented procedures and policies regarding the underwriting of transactions and the ongoing monitoring of the performance of the securitized exposures. The sponsor should ensure that the seller(s) and all other parties involved in the origination of the receivables have experience in originating same or similar assets, and are supported by a management with industry experience. For the purpose of meeting the short-term STC capital criteria, investors must request confirmation from the sponsor that the performance history of the originator and the original lender for claims or receivables substantially similar to those being securitized has been established for an “appropriately long period of time.” This performance history must be no shorter than a period of five years for non-retail exposures. For retail exposures, the minimum performance history is three years.

                3.Payment status

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should, to the best of its knowledge and based on representations from sellers, make representations and warranties to investors that the STC criteria at the transaction level are met with respect to each transaction.

                Transaction level

                The sponsor should obtain representations from sellers that the credit claims or receivables underlying each individual transaction are not, at the time of acquisition of the interests to be financed by the conduit, in default or delinquent or subject to a material increase in expected losses or of enforcement actions.

                 

                To prevent credit claims or receivables arising from credit-impaired borrowers from being transferred to the securitisation, the original seller or sponsor should verify that the credit claims or receivables meet the following conditions for each transaction:

                • The obligor has not been the subject of an insolvency or debt restructuring process due to financial difficulties in the three years prior to the date of origination;12
                • The obligor is not recorded on a public credit registry of persons with an adverse credit history;
                • The obligor does not have a credit assessment by an external credit assessment institution or a credit score indicating a significant risk of default; and
                • The credit claim or receivable is not subject to a dispute between the obligor and the original lender.

                The assessment of these conditions should be carried out by the original seller or sponsor no earlier than 45 days prior to acquisition of the transaction by the conduit or, in the case of replenishing transactions, no earlier than 45 days prior to new exposures being added to the transaction. In addition, at the time of the assessment, there should be, to the best knowledge of the original seller or sponsor, no evidence indicating likely deterioration in the performance status of the credit claim or receivable.

                Further, at the time of their inclusion in the pool, at least one payment should have been made on the underlying exposures, except in the case of replenishing asset trust structures such as those for credit card receivables, trade receivables, and other exposures payable in a single instalment at maturity.

                4.Consistency of underwriting

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should make representations and warranties to investors that:

                1. 1.It has taken steps to verify that, for the transactions in the conduit, any underlying credit claims and receivables have been subject to consistent underwriting standards, and explain how; and
                2. 2.When there are material changes to underwriting standards, it will receive from sellers disclosure about the timing and purpose of such changes.

                The sponsor should also inform investors of the material selection criteria applied when selecting sellers (including where they are not financial institutions).

                Transaction level

                The sponsor should ensure that sellers (in their capacity as original lenders) in transactions with the conduit demonstrate to it that:

                1. a.Any credit claims or receivables being transferred to or through a transaction held by the conduit have been originated in the ordinary course of the seller’s business subject to materially non-deteriorating underwriting standards. Those underwriting standards should also not be less stringent than those applied to credit claims and receivables retained on the balance sheet of the seller and not financed by the conduit; and
                2. b.The obligors have been assessed as having the ability and volition to make timely payments on obligations.

                The sponsor should also ensure that sellers disclose to it the timing and purpose of material changes to underwriting standards.

                 

                In all circumstances, all credit claims or receivables must be originated in accordance with sound and prudent underwriting criteria based on an assessment that the obligor has the “ability and volition to make timely payments” on its obligations.

                The sponsor of the securitisation is expected, where underlying credit claims or receivables have been acquired from third parties, to review the underwriting standards (i.e. to check their existence and assess their quality) of these third parties and to ascertain that they have assessed the obligors’ “ability and volition to make timely payments” on their obligations.

                If the sponsor of the securitisation did not originate the assets, the additional requirement will ensure that the seller has to check (a) the existence and quality of the underwriting standards; (b) that the borrowers to whom the acquired loans are extended have been screened by the lender; and (c) that their ability and their willingness to repay have been assessed by the original lender. This should not, however, be understood as an obligation for the seller to perform this assessment itself.

                5.Asset selection and transfer

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should:

                1. 1.Provide representations and warranties to investors about the checks, in terms of their nature and frequency, it has conducted regarding enforceability of underlying assets; and
                2. 2.Disclose to investors the receipt of appropriate representations and warranties from sellers that the credit claims or receivables being transferred to the transactions in the conduit are not subject to any condition or encumbrance that can be foreseen to adversely affect enforceability in respect of collections due.
                Transaction level

                The sponsor should ensure that credit claims or receivables transferred to or through a transaction financed by the conduit:

                1. a.Satisfy clearly defined eligibility criteria;
                2. b.Are not actively selected after the closing date, actively managed or otherwise cherry-picked.13

                An in-house legal opinion or an independent third-party legal opinion must support the claim that the true sale and the transfer of assets under the applicable laws comply with points (a) and (b) at the transaction level.

                The sponsor should be able to assess thoroughly the credit risk of the asset pool prior to its decision to provide full support to any given transaction or to the conduit.

                The sponsor should ensure that the transactions in the conduit effect true sale such that the underlying credit claims or receivables:

                1. 1.Are enforceable against the obligor;
                2. 2.Are beyond the reach of the seller, its creditors, or liquidators and are not subject to material re-characterization risks or claw-back risks (in which the insolvency or bankruptcy of the seller could result in the assets being taken back from the pool by creditors or liquidators);
                3. 3.Are not effected through credit default swaps, derivatives or guarantees, but by a transfer14 of the credit claims or the receivables to the transaction; and
                4. 4.Demonstrate effective recourse to the ultimate obligation for the underlying credit claims or receivables and are not a re-securitisation position.

                The sponsor should ensure that, in applicable jurisdictions, for conduits employing transfers of credit claims or receivables by other means, sellers can demonstrate to it the existence of material obstacles preventing true sale at issuance15 and should clearly demonstrate the method of recourse to ultimate obligors.16 In such jurisdictions, any conditions where the transfer of the credit claims or receivables is delayed or contingent upon specific events and any factors affecting timely perfection of claims by the conduit should be clearly disclosed.

                The sponsor should ensure that it receives from the individual sellers (in their capacity either as original lender or servicer) representations and warranties that the credit claims or receivables being transferred to or through the transaction are not subject to any condition or encumbrance that can be foreseen to adversely affect enforceability in respect of collections due.

                6.Initial and ongoing data

                Conduit level

                To assist investors in conducting appropriate due diligence prior to investing in a new program offering, the sponsor should provide to potential investors sufficient aggregated data that illustrate the relevant risk characteristics of the underlying asset pools in accordance with applicable laws.

                To assist investors in conducting appropriate and ongoing monitoring of their investments’ performance and so that investors who wish to purchase commercial paper have sufficient information to conduct appropriate due diligence, the sponsor should provide timely and sufficient aggregated data that convey the relevant risk characteristics of the underlying pools in accordance with applicable laws. The sponsor should ensure that standardized investor reports are readily available to current and potential investors at least monthly. Cut-off dates of the aggregated data should be aligned with those used for investor reporting.

                Transaction level

                The sponsor should ensure that the individual sellers (in their capacity as servicers) provide it with:

                1. (a)sufficient asset-level data in accordance with applicable laws or, in the case of granular pools, summary stratification data on the relevant risk characteristics of the underlying pool before transferring any credit claims or receivables to such underlying pool; and
                2. (b)Timely asset-level data in accordance with applicable laws or granular pool stratification data on the risk characteristics of the underlying pool on an ongoing basis. Those data should allow the sponsor to fulfil its fiduciary duty at the conduit level in terms of disclosing information to investors, including the alignment of cut-off dates of the asset-level or granular pool stratification data with those used for investor reporting.

                The seller may delegate some of these tasks, in which case the sponsor should ensure that there is appropriate oversight of the outsourced arrangements.

                 

                The standardized investor reports that are made readily available to current and potential investors at least monthly should include the following information:

                • Materially relevant data on the credit quality and performance of underlying assets, including data allowing investors to identify dilution, delinquencies and defaults, restructured receivables, forbearance, repurchases, losses, recoveries and other asset performance remedies in the pool;
                • The form and amount of credit enhancement provided by the seller and sponsor at the transaction and the conduit level, respectively;
                • Relevant information on the support provided by the sponsor; and
                • The status and definitions of relevant triggers (such as performance, termination or counterparty replacement triggers).

                11 Payments on operating and financing lease are typically considered to be rental payments rather than payments of principal and interest.

                12 This condition would not apply to borrowers that previously had credit incidents but were subsequently removed from credit registries as a result of the borrowers cleaning their records. This is the case in jurisdictions in which borrowers have the “right to be forgotten.”

                13 Provided they are not actively selected or otherwise cherry-picked, the addition of credit claims or receivables during the revolving periods or their substitution or repurchasing due to the breach of representations and warranties do not represent active portfolio management.

                14 This requirement should not affect jurisdictions whose legal frameworks provide for a true sale with the same effects as described above, but by means other than a transfer of the credit claims or receivables.

                15 For instance, the immediate realization of transfer tax or the requirement to notify all obligors of the transfer.

                16 For instance, equitable assignment or perfected contingent transfer.

              • C. Structural Risk

                1.Full support

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should provide the liquidity facility and the credit protection support17 for any ABCP program issued by a conduit. Such facility and support should ensure that investors are fully protected against credit risks, liquidity risks and any material dilution risks of the underlying asset pools financed by the conduit. On that basis, investors should be able to rely on the sponsor to ensure timely and full repayment of the commercial paper. This is not a comprehensive list of risks, but rather provides typical examples.

                The full support provided should be able to irrevocably and unconditionally pay the ABCP liabilities in full and on time.

                 

                Number of sponsors providing support

                While liquidity and credit protection support at both the conduit level and transaction level can be provided by more than one sponsor, the majority of the support (assessed in terms of coverage) has to be made by a single sponsor (referred to as the “main sponsor”).18 An exception can, however, be made for a limited period of time, where the main sponsor has to be replaced due to a material deterioration in its credit standing.

                General requirements

                Under the terms of the liquidity facility agreement:

                • Upon specified events affecting its creditworthiness, the sponsor shall be obliged to collateralize its commitment in cash to the benefit of the investors or otherwise replace itself with another liquidity provider.
                • If the sponsor does not renew its funding commitment for a specific transaction or the conduit in its entirety, the sponsor shall collateralize its commitments regarding a specific transaction or, if relevant, to the conduit in cash at the latest 30 days prior to the expiration of the liquidity facility, and no new receivables should be purchased under the affected commitment.

                The sponsor should provide investors with full information about the terms of the liquidity facility and the credit support provided to the ABCP conduit and the underlying transactions (in relation to the transactions, redacted where necessary to protect confidentiality).

                To ensure that investors in the notes issued by the ABCP conduit are fully protected by the facility provided to the ABCP conduit, if the creditworthiness of the liquidity providers deteriorates or if a commitment is not renewed, the liquidity provider shall be required to fully collateralize the facility in cash to ensure the payment of maturing notes. As an alternative, a backup facility provider could be used in case the creditworthiness of the current provider is no longer sufficient. The facility should also be drawn down and used to redeem the outstanding notes in case it is not renewed at least 30 days prior to its expiration.

                Information about the support provided to the ABCP structure, at the conduit and the transaction level, as well as the maturity of the facility provided to the ABCP structure, shall also be disclosed to investors. This will enable investors to assess the liquidity risks associated with their exposures to the ABCP structure.

                2.Redemption cash flow

                Transaction level

                Unless the underlying pool of credit claims or receivables is sufficiently granular and has sufficiently distributed repayment profiles, the sponsor should ensure that the repayment of the credit claims or receivables underlying any of the individual transactions relies primarily on the general ability and willingness of the obligor to pay rather than the possibility that the obligor refinances or sells the collateral and that such repayment does not primarily rely on the drawing of an external liquidity facility provided to this transaction.

                 

                For capital purposes, sponsors cannot use support provided by their own liquidity and credit facilities towards meeting this criterion. For the avoidance of doubt, the requirement that the repayment shall not primarily rely on the drawing of an external liquidity facility does not apply to exposures in the form of the notes issued by the ABCP conduit.

                3.Currency and interest rate asset and liability mismatches

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should ensure that any payment risk arising from different interest rate and currency profiles that is not mitigated at transaction level, or that may arise at the conduit level, is appropriately mitigated.

                The sponsor should also ensure that derivatives are used for genuine hedging purposes only and that hedging transactions are documented according to industry-standard master agreements.

                The sponsor should provide sufficient information to investors to allow them to assess how the payment risk arising from the different interest rate and currency profiles of assets and liabilities is appropriately mitigated, whether at the conduit level or at the transaction level.

                Transaction level

                To reduce the payment risk arising from the different interest rate and currency profiles of assets and liabilities, if any, and to improve the sponsor’s ability to analyze cash flows of transactions, the sponsor should ensure that interest rate and foreign currency risks are appropriately mitigated. The sponsor should also ensure that derivatives are used for genuine hedging purposes only and that hedging transactions are documented according to industry-standard master agreements.

                 

                The term “appropriately mitigated” should be understood as not necessarily requiring a completely perfect hedge. The appropriateness of the mitigation of interest rate and foreign currency risks through the life of the transaction must be demonstrated by making available, in a timely and regular manner, quantitative information, including the fraction of notional amounts that are hedged, as well as sensitivity analysis that illustrates the effectiveness of the hedge in extreme but plausible scenarios.

                The use of risk-mitigating measures other than derivatives is permitted only if the measures are specifically created and used for the purpose of hedging an individual and specific risk. Non-derivative risk mitigation measures must be fully funded and available at all times.

                4.Payment priorities and observability

                Conduit level

                The commercial paper issued by the ABCP program should not include extension options or other features which may extend the final maturity of the asset-backed commercial paper, where the right to trigger does not belong exclusively to investors.

                The sponsor should:

                (i) make representations and warranties to investors that the STC criteria are met at the transaction level and, in particular, that it has the ability to appropriately analyse the cash flow waterfall for each transaction which qualifies as a securitisation; and

                (ii) make available to investors a summary (illustrating the functioning) of these waterfalls and of the credit enhancement available at program level and transaction level.

                Transaction level

                To prevent the conduit from being subjected to unexpected repayment profiles from the transactions, the sponsor should ensure that:

                1. 1.Priorities of payments are clearly defined at the time of acquisition of the interests in these transactions by the conduit; and
                2. 2.Appropriate legal comfort regarding the enforceability is provided.

                For all transactions which qualify as a securitisation, the sponsor should ensure that all triggers affecting the cash flow waterfall, payment profile or priority of payments are clearly and fully disclosed to the sponsor in both the transactions’ documentation and reports, with information in the reports that clearly identifies any breach status, the ability for the breach to be reversed and the consequences of the breach. Reports should contain information that allows sponsors to easily ascertain the likelihood of a trigger being breached or reversed. Any triggers breached between payment dates should be disclosed to sponsors on a timely basis in accordance with the terms and conditions of the transaction documents.

                For any of the transactions where the beneficial interest held by the conduit qualifies as a securitisation position, the sponsor should ensure that any subordinated positions do not have inappropriate payment preference over payments to the conduit (which should always rank senior to any other position) and which are due and payable.

                Transactions featuring a revolving period should include provisions for appropriate early amortization events and/or triggers of termination of the revolving period, including, notably: (i) deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures; (ii) a failure to replenish sufficient new underlying exposures of similar credit quality; and (iii) the occurrence of an insolvency-related event with regard to the individual sellers.

                To ensure that debt forgiveness, forbearance, payment holidays, restructuring, dilution and other asset performance remedies can be clearly identified, policies and procedures, definitions, remedies and actions relating to delinquency, default, dilution or restructuring of underlying debtors should be provided in clear and consistent terms, such that the sponsor can clearly identify debt forgiveness, forbearance, payment holidays, restructuring, dilution and other asset performance remedies on an ongoing basis.

                For each transaction which qualifies as a securitisation, the sponsor should ensure that it receives, both before the conduit acquires a beneficial interest in the transaction and on an ongoing basis, the liability cash flow analysis or information on the cash flow provisions allowing appropriate analysis of the cash flow waterfall of these transactions.

                5.Voting and enforcement rights

                Conduit level

                To provide clarity to investors, the sponsor should make sufficient information available in order for investors to understand their enforcement rights on the underlying credit claims or receivables in the event of insolvency of the sponsor.

                Transaction level

                For each transaction, the sponsor should ensure that, in particular upon insolvency of the seller or where the obligor is in default on its obligation, all voting and enforcement rights related to the credit claims or receivables are, if applicable:

                1. 1.Transferred to the conduit; and
                2. 2.Clearly defined under all circumstances, including with respect to the rights of the conduit versus other parties with an interest (e.g. sellers), where relevant.

                6.Documentation disclosure and legal review

                Conduit level

                To help investors understand fully the terms, conditions, and legal information prior to investing in a new program offering and to ensure that this information is set out in a clear and effective manner for all program offerings, the sponsor should ensure that sufficient initial offering documentation for the ABCP program is provided to investors (and readily available to potential investors on a continuous basis) within a reasonable period of time prior to issuance, such that the investor is provided with full disclosure of the legal information and comprehensive risk factors needed to make informed investment decisions. These should be composed such that readers can readily find, understand and use relevant information.

                The sponsor should ensure that the terms and documentation of a conduit and the ABCP program it issues are reviewed and verified by an appropriately experienced and independent legal practice prior to publication and in the event of material changes. The sponsor should notify investors in a timely fashion of any changes in such documents that have an impact on the structural risks in the ABCP program.

                 

                To understand fully the terms, conditions and legal information prior to including a new transaction in the ABCP conduit and ensure that this information is set out in a clear and effective manner, the sponsor should ensure that it receives sufficient initial offering documentation for each transaction and that it is provided within a reasonable period of time prior to the inclusion in the conduit, with full disclosure of the legal information and comprehensive risk factors needed to supply liquidity and/or credit support facilities. The initial offering document for each transaction should be composed such that readers can readily find, understand and use relevant information.

                The sponsor should also ensure that the terms and documentation of a transaction are reviewed and verified by an appropriately experienced and independent legal practice prior to the acquisition of the transaction and in the event of material changes.

                7.Alignment of interest

                Conduit level

                In order to align the interests of those responsible for the underwriting of the credit claims and receivables with those of investors, a material net economic exposure should be retained by the sellers or the sponsor at the transaction level, or by the sponsor at the conduit level.

                Ultimately, the sponsor should disclose to investors how and where a material net economic exposure is retained by the seller at the transaction level or by the sponsor at the transaction or the conduit level, and demonstrate the existence of a financial incentive in the performance of the assets.

                8.Cap on maturity transformation

                Conduit level

                Maturity transformation undertaken through ABCP conduits should be limited. The sponsor should verify and disclose to investors that the weighted average maturity of all the transactions financed under the ABCP conduit is three years or less.

                This number should be calculated as the higher of:

                1. the exposure-weighted average residual maturity of the conduit’s beneficial interests held or the assets purchased by the conduit in order to finance the transactions of the conduit;19

                2. the exposure-weighted average maturity of the underlying assets financed by the conduit calculated by:

                a. taking an exposure-weighted average of residual maturities of the underlying assets in each pool; and then

                b. taking an exposure-weighted average across the conduit of the pool-level averages as calculated in Step 2a.

                Where it is impractical for the sponsor to calculate the pool-level weighted average maturity in Step 2a (because the pool is very granular or dynamic), sponsors may instead use the maximum maturity of the assets in the pool as defined in the legal agreements governing the pool (e.g. investment guidelines).

                 


                17 A sponsor can provide full support either at the ABCP program level or at the transaction level, i.e. by fully supporting each transaction within an ABCP program.

                18 “Liquidity and credit protection support” refers to support provided by the sponsors. Any support provided by the seller is excluded.

                19 Including purchased securitisation notes, loans, asset-backed deposits and purchased credit claims and/or receivables held directly on the conduit’s balance sheet

              • D. Fiduciary and Servicer Risk

                1.Financial institution

                The sponsor should be a financial institution that is licensed to take deposits from the public, and is subject to appropriate prudential standards and levels of supervision.

                2.Fiduciary and contractual responsibilities

                Conduit level

                The sponsor should, based on the representations received from seller(s) and all other parties responsible for originating and servicing the asset pools, make representations and warranties to investors that:

                1. 1.The various criteria defined at the level of each underlying transaction are met, and explain how; and
                2. 2.The seller’s (or sellers’) policies, procedures and risk management controls are well documented, adhere to good market practices and comply with the relevant regulatory regimes; and that strong systems and reporting capabilities are in place to ensure appropriate origination and servicing of the underlying assets.

                The sponsor should be able to demonstrate expertise in providing liquidity and credit support in the context of ABCP conduits, and that it is supported by a management team with extensive industry experience.

                The sponsor should at all times act in accordance with reasonable and prudent standards. The policies, procedures and risk management controls of the sponsor should be well documented, and the sponsor should adhere to good market practices and relevant regulatory regime. There should be strong systems and reporting capabilities in place at the sponsor.

                The party or parties with fiduciary responsibility should act on a timely basis in the best interests of the investors.

                Transaction level

                The sponsor should ensure that it receives representations from the seller(s) and all other parties responsible for originating and servicing the asset pools that they:

                1. 1.Have well documented procedures and policies in place to ensure appropriate servicing of the underlying assets;
                2. 2.Have expertise in the origination of assets that are the same as or similar to those in the asset pools;
                3. 3.Have extensive servicing and workout expertise, thorough legal and collateral knowledge and a track record in loss mitigation for the same or similar assets;
                4. 4.Have expertise in the servicing of the underlying credit claims or receivables; and
                5. 5.Are supported by a management team with extensive industry experience.

                 

                In assessing whether “strong systems and reporting capabilities are in place”, well documented policies, procedures and risk management controls, as well as strong systems and reporting capabilities, may be substantiated by an independent third-party review for sellers that are non-banking entities.

                3.Transparency to investors

                Conduit level

                To help provide full transparency to investors and to assist them in the conduct of their due diligence, the sponsor should ensure that the contractual obligations, duties and responsibilities of all key parties to the conduit, both those with a fiduciary responsibility and the ancillary service providers, are defined clearly both in the initial offering and in any relevant underlying documentation20 of the conduit and the ABCP program it issues.

                The sponsor should also make representations and warranties to investors that the duties and responsibilities of all key parties are clearly defined at the transaction level.

                The sponsor should ensure that the initial offering documentation disclosed to investors contains adequate provisions regarding the replacement of key counterparties of the conduit (e.g. bank account providers and derivatives counterparties) in the event of failure or non-performance or insolvency or deterioration of creditworthiness of any such counterparty.

                The sponsor should also make representations and warranties to investors that provisions regarding the replacement of key counterparties at the transaction level are well documented.

                The sponsor should provide sufficient information to investors about the liquidity facility and credit support provided to the ABCP program for them to understand its functioning and key risks.

                Transaction level

                The sponsor should conduct due diligence with respect to the transactions on behalf of the investors.

                To assist the sponsor in meeting its fiduciary and contractual obligations, the duties and responsibilities of all key parties to all transactions (both those with a fiduciary responsibility and the ancillary service providers) should be defined clearly in all the documentation underlying these transactions and made available to the sponsor.

                The sponsor should ensure that provisions regarding the replacement of key counterparties (in particular, the servicer or liquidity provider) in the event of failure or nonperformance or insolvency or other deterioration of any such counterparty for the transactions are well documented (in the documentation of these individual transactions).

                To enhance the transparency and visibility of all receipts, payments and ledger entries at all times, the sponsor should ensure that, for all transactions, the performance reports include all of the following: the transactions’ income and disbursements, such as scheduled principal, redemption principal, scheduled interest, prepaid principal, past due interest and fees and charges, and delinquent, defaulted, restructured and diluted amounts; and accurate accounting for amounts attributable to principal and interest deficiency ledgers.

                 


                20 “Underlying documentation” does not refer to the documentation of the underlying transactions.

              • E. Additional Criteria for Capital Purposes

                1.Credit risk of underlying exposures
                 

                At the date of acquisition of the assets, the underlying exposures must meet the conditions to be assigned a risk weight equal to or smaller than:

                1. 6.40% on a value-weighted average exposure basis for the portfolio where the exposures are loans secured by residential mortgages or fully guaranteed residential loans;
                2. 7.50% on an individual exposure basis where the exposure is a loan secured by a commercial mortgage;
                3. 8.75% on an individual exposure basis where the exposure is a retail exposure; or
                4. 9.100% on an individual exposure basis for any other exposure.

                These risk weights should be after taking into account any eligible credit risk mitigation. The thresholds as set are based on the current Standardized Approach to credit risk, and may be revisited if the Standardized Approach for credit risk is subsequently revised.

                2.Granularity of the pool
                 

                At the date of acquisition of any assets securitized by one of the conduits’ transactions, the aggregated value of all exposures to a single obligor at that date shall not exceed 2% of the aggregated outstanding exposure value of all exposures in the program. In the case of trade receivables where the credit risk of those trade receivables is fully covered by credit protection, provided that the protection provider is a financial institution, only the portion of the trade receivables remaining after taking into account the effective of any purchase price discount and overcollateralization shall be included in the determination of whether the 2% limit is breached.

        • IX. Market Risk

          • I. Introduction

            1.This Standard articulates specific requirements for the calculation of the market risk capital requirement for banks in the UAE. It is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), specifically as articulated in Basel II: International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, June 2006, and subsequent revisions and clarifications thereto.

            2.This Standard applies to:

            • the risks pertaining to interest rate related instruments and equities in the trading book; and
            • foreign exchange risk and commodities risk throughout the bank.

            3.Capital requirements for market risk apply on a consolidated basis for all banks in the UAE. Note that the capital required for general and specific market risk under this Standard is in addition to, not in place of, any capital required under other Central Bank Standards. Banks should follow the requirements of all other applicable Central Bank Standards to determine overall capital adequacy requirements; for example, the Counterparty Credit Risk Standard.

            4.The Standards follow the calibration developed by the Basel Committee, which includes a maximum risk weight of 1250%, calibrated on a total capital adequacy requirement of 8%. The UAE instituted a higher minimum capital requirement of 10.5% (excluding capital buffers), applicable to all licensed banks. Consequently, the maximum capital charge for a single exposure will be the lesser of the value of the exposure after applying valid credit risk mitigation, netting and haircuts, and the capital resulting from applying a risk weight of 952% (reciprocal of 10.5%) to this exposure.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a)A commodity is defined as a physical product that is or can be traded on a secondary market, e.g. agricultural products, minerals (including oil) and precious metals.
            2. b)Convertible bonds are debt issues or preference shares that are convertible, at a stated price, into common shares of the issuer.
            3. c)Deep-discount bonds are defined as bonds with a coupon of less than 3%.
            4. d)A financial asset is any asset that is cash, the right to receive cash or another financial asset; or the contractual right to exchange financial assets on potentially favorable terms, or an equity instrument.
            5. e)A financial instrument is any contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one entity and a financial liability or equity instrument of another entity. Financial instruments include either primary financial instruments (or cash instruments) and derivative financial instruments.
            6. f)A financial liability is the contractual obligation to deliver cash or another financial asset or to exchange financial liabilities under conditions that are potentially unfavorable.
            7. g)General market risk is market risk related to broad movements in overall market prices or rates that reflect common movements among many related market instruments.
            8. h)Marked-to-model refers to the use of quantitative models to determine the value of positions or exposures, typically in the absence of reliable market prices.
            9. i)Market risk is defined as the risk of losses in on-balance-sheet and off-balance-sheet positions arising from movements in market prices.
            10. j)A special purpose entity is an entity, typically created to be bankruptcy-remote from the sponsoring entity, with operations limited to the acquisition and financing of specific assets as a method of isolating risk.
            11. k)Specific risk is market risk related to factors affecting a specific issuer, rate, currency, or commodity rather than to broad market movements.
            12. l)A two-way market is deemed to exist where there are independent bona fide offers to buy and sell so that a price reasonably related to the last sales price or current bona fide competitive bid and offer quotations can be determined within one day and settled at such price within a relatively short time conforming to trade custom.
          • III. Requirements

            • A. Scope and Coverage

              5.The capital charges, as explained below, for interest rate related instruments and equities would apply to the trading book. The capital charges for foreign exchange risk and for commodities risk will apply to banks’ total currency and commodity positions.

              6.Banks must have clearly defined policies and procedures for determining which exposures to include in, and to exclude from, the trading book for purposes of calculating their regulatory capital, to ensure compliance with the criteria for trading book set forth in this Standard and taking into account the bank’s risk management capabilities and practices. These policies and procedures must be fully documented and subject to periodic internal audit, and at a minimum address the general considerations listed below:

              • The activities the bank considers to be trading and as constituting part of the trading book for regulatory capital purposes;
              • The extent to which an exposure can be marked-to-market daily by reference to an active, liquid two-way market;
              • For exposures that are marked-to-model, the extent to which the bank can:
                • Identify the material risks of the exposure;
                • Hedge the material risks of the exposure and the extent to which hedging instruments would have an active, liquid two-way market;
                • Derive reliable estimates for the key assumptions and parameters used in the model.
              • The extent to which the bank can and is required to generate valuations for the exposure that can be validated externally in a consistent manner;
              • The extent to which legal restrictions or other operational requirements would impede the bank’s ability to effect an immediate liquidation of the exposure;
              • The extent to which the bank is required to, and can, actively risk manage the exposure within its trading operations; and
              • The extent to which the bank may transfer risk or exposures between the banking and the trading books and criteria for such transfers.

              7.The following will be the basic requirements for positions eligible to receive trading book capital treatment:

              • Clearly documented trading strategy for the position/instrument or portfolios, approved by senior management (which would include expected holding horizon);
              • Clearly defined policies and procedures for the active management of the position, which must include;
                • positions are managed on a trading desk;
                • position limits are set and monitored for appropriateness;
                • dealers have the autonomy to enter into/manage the position within agreed limits and according to the agreed strategy;
                • positions are marked to market at least daily and when marking to model the parameters must be assessed on a daily basis;
                • positions are reported to senior management as an integral part of the institution’s risk management process; and
                • positions are actively monitored with reference to market information sources (assessment should be made of the market liquidity or the ability to hedge positions or the portfolio risk profiles). This would include assessing the quality and availability of market inputs to the valuation process, level of market turnover, sizes of positions traded in the market, etc; and
              • Clearly defined policy and procedures to monitor the positions against the bank’s trading strategy including the monitoring of turnover and stale positions in the bank’s trading book.

              8.Term trading-related repo-style transactions that meet the requirements for trading- book treatment as stated in the paragraph above may be included in the bank’s trading book for regulatory capital purposes even if a bank accounts for those transactions in the banking book. If the bank does so, all such repo-style transactions must be included in the trading book, and both legs of such transactions, either cash or securities, must be included in the trading book. Regardless of where they are booked, all repo-style transactions are subject to a credit risk capital requirement under the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk Capital.

              9.When a bank hedges a banking book credit risk exposure using a credit derivative booked in its trading book (i.e. using an internal hedge), the banking book exposure is not deemed to be hedged for capital purposes unless the bank purchases from an eligible third party protection provider a credit derivative meeting the requirements in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk Capital. Where such third party protection is purchased and is recognized as a hedge of a banking book exposure for regulatory capital purposes, neither the internal nor external credit derivative hedge would be included in the trading book for regulatory capital purposes.

              10.Positions in the bank’s own eligible regulatory capital instruments are deducted from capital. Positions in other banks’, securities firms’, and other financial entities’ eligible regulatory capital instruments, as well as intangible assets, will receive the same treatment as that set down by the Central Bank for such assets held in the banking book. Where a bank demonstrates to the Central Bank that it is an active market maker, then the Central Bank may establish a dealer exception for holdings of other banks’, securities firms’, and other financial entities’ capital instruments in the trading book. In order to qualify for the dealer exception, the bank must have adequate systems and controls surrounding the trading of financial institutions’ eligible regulatory capital instruments.

              11.For the purposes of these Standards, the correlation trading portfolio incorporates securitisation exposures and nth-to-default credit derivatives that meet the following criteria:

              • The positions are neither resecuritisation positions, nor derivatives of securitisation exposures that do not provide a pro-rata share in the proceeds of a securitisation tranche; and
              • All reference entities are single-name products, including single-name credit derivatives, for which a liquid two-way market exists. This includes commonly traded indices based on these reference entities. Positions that reference an underlying that would be treated as a retail exposure, a residential mortgage exposure, or a commercial mortgage exposure under the standardized approach to credit risk are not included in the correlation-trading portfolio. Positions that reference a claim on a special purpose entity also are not included. A bank may include in the correlation trading portfolio positions that are hedges of securitisation exposures or nth-to-default credit derivatives, but that are not themselves either securitisation exposures or nth-to-default credit derivatives, where a liquid two-way market exists for the instrument or its underlying.
            • B. Standardized Measurement Methods

              1.Interest rate risk

              12.This Standard describes the framework for measuring the risk of holding or taking positions in debt securities and other interest rate related instruments in the trading book. The instruments covered include all fixed-rate and floating-rate debt securities and instruments that behave like them, including non-convertible preference shares. Banks should treat convertible bonds as debt securities if they trade like debt securities and as equities if they trade like equities.

              13.The minimum capital requirement is expressed in terms of two separately calculated charges, one applying to the “specific risk” of each security, whether it is a short or a long position, and the other to the interest rate risk in the portfolio (“general mark

              et risk”) where long and short positions in different securities or instruments can be offset.

              Specific risk

              14.In measuring the capital charge for specific risk, offsetting of long and short positions is restricted to matched positions in the identical issue (including positions in derivatives). No offsetting is permitted between different issues, even if the issuer is the same.
               

              15.The specific risk capital charges for interest rate risk are as specified in Table 1 below.

              Table 1: Specific Risk Charges for Interest Rate Risk

              CategoriesExternal credit assessmentSpecific risk capital charge
              GovernmentAAA to AA-0%
              A+ to BBB-

              0.25% (residual term to final maturity 6 months or less)

              1.00% (residual term to final maturity greater than 6 and up to and including 24 months)

              1.60% (residual term to final maturity exceeding 24 months)

              BB+ to B-8%
              Below B-12%
              Unrated8%
              Qualifying 

              0.25% (residual term to final maturity 6 months or less)

              1.00% (residual term to final maturity greater than 6 and up to and including 24 months)

              1.60% (residual term to final maturity exceeding 24 months)

              OtherBB+ to BB-8%
              Below BB-12%
              Unrated8%

               

              16.The category “government” includes all forms of government paper as defined in the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk. Exposure to the Federal Government and Emirates Government receive 0% risk weight, if such exposures are denominated and funded in AED or USD for a transition period of 7 years from the date of implementation of this Standard. After the transition period, 0% risk weights are only applied to exposures that are denominated and funded in AED. In general, only government debt rated AA- or better is eligible for the 0% specific risk charge. However, for debt rated below AA-, when the government paper is denominated in the domestic currency and funded by the bank in the same currency, the Central Bank uses national discretion to apply a 0% specific risk charge.21 The national discretion is limited to GCC Sovereigns.

              17.The “qualifying” category includes securities issued by public sector entities and multilateral development banks, plus other securities that are rated investment-grade by at least two credit rating agencies recognized by the Central Bank for this purpose per Central Bank standards, or are rated investment-grade by one rating agency and not less than investment-grade by any other rating agency recognized by the Central Bank. Unrated securities may be considered “qualifying” subject to Central Bank approval on a case-by-case basis if the bank deems them to be of comparable investment quality and the issuer has securities listed on a recognized stock exchange. Unrated securities that are considered “qualifying” by the Central Bank can be recategorised from time to time if the Central Bank deems this necessary.

              18.The specific risk charges stated in Table 1 for instruments issued by a non-qualifying issuer may considerably underestimate the specific risk for certain debt instruments with a high yield to redemption relative to government debt securities. In such cases, the Central Bank may direct a bank to apply a higher specific risk charge to such instruments, and/or to disallow offsetting of general market risk between such instruments and any other debt instruments.

              19.Banks must determine the specific risk capital charge for the correlation trading portfolio by computing (i) the total specific risk capital charges that would apply just to the net long positions from the net long correlation trading exposures combined, and (ii) the total specific risk capital charges that would apply just to the net short positions from the net short correlation trading exposures combined. The larger of these two amounts in terms of domestic currency is then the specific risk capital charge for the correlation-trading portfolio.

              Specific risk rules for positions covered under the securitisation framework

              20.The specific risk charges for securitisation exposures held in the trading book are based on the risk weights assigned to securitisation exposures under the Central Bank’s Standard on Required Capital for Securitisation Exposures. Specifically, banks should determine the applicable risk weight applied to such positions in the banking book, and multiply the result by 8% to obtain the specific risk charge for the trading book exposure.
               

              21.A securitisation exposure subject to a risk weight of 1250% under the Central Bank requirements (and therefore to a 100% specific risk charge under this Standard) may be excluded from the calculation of capital for general market risk.

              Limitation of the specific risk capital charge to the maximum possible loss

              22.Banks may limit the capital required for an individual position in a credit derivative or securitisation instrument to the maximum possible loss. For a short risk position, this limit can be calculated as the change in value due to the underlying names immediately becoming default risk-free. For a long risk position, the maximum possible loss could be calculated as the change in value in the event that all the underlying names were to default with zero recoveries. The maximum possible loss must be calculated for each individual position.
               

              Specific risk capital charges for positions hedged by credit derivatives

              23.Full allowance and offset can be recognized when the values of two legs, that is, long and short, always move in opposite directions and move broadly to the same extent. This would be the case when the two legs consist of completely identical instruments (e.g. two instruments with exactly the same issuer, coupon, currency, and maturity), or when a long cash position is hedged by a total rate of return swap (or vice versa) and there is an exact match between the reference obligation and the underlying cash position. (The maturity of the swap itself may be different from that of the underlying exposure.) In these cases, no specific risk capital requirement applies to either side of the position.
               

              24.An 80% offset can be recognized when the value of long and short legs always move in opposite directions, but do not move broadly to the same extent. This would be the case when a long cash position is hedged by a credit default swap or a credit linked note (or vice versa) and there is an exact match in terms of the reference obligation, the maturity of both the reference obligation and the credit derivative, and the currency of the underlying exposure. In addition, key features of the credit derivative contract should not cause the price movement of the credit derivative to materially deviate from the price movements of the cash position. To the extent that the transaction transfers risk, that is taking account of restrictive payout provisions such as fixed payouts and materiality thresholds, an 80% specific risk offset can be applied to the side of the transaction with the higher capital charge, while the specific risk requirement on the other side is zero.

              25.Partial allowance and offset can be recognized when the value of the long and short legs usually, but not necessarily always, move in opposite directions. This is the case in the following situations:

              • The position would meet the conditions for full allowance but there is not an exact match between the reference obligation and the underlying exposure; the position otherwise meets the operational requirements for credit derivatives for credit risk mitigation under the Central Bank’s Standard for Credit Risk Capital.
              • The position would meet the conditions for full allowance but there is a currency or maturity mismatch between the credit protection and the underlying asset.
              • The position would meet the conditions for full allowance but there is an asset mismatch between the cash position and the credit derivative. However, the underlying asset is included in the (deliverable) obligations in the credit derivative documentation.

              In each of the cases above, rather than adding the specific risk capital requirements for each side of the transaction (i.e. the credit protection and the underlying asset), the bank can apply only the higher of the two capital requirements. Otherwise, in cases that do not meet the conditions above, a specific risk capital charge must be assessed against both sides of the position.

              26.The capital charge for specific risk for a first-to-default credit derivative is the lesser of (1) the sum of the specific risk capital charges for the individual reference credit instruments in the basket, and (2) the maximum possible credit event payment under the contract. Where a bank has a risk position in one of the reference credit instruments underlying a first-to-default credit derivative and this credit derivative hedges the bank’s risk position, the bank may reduce with respect to the hedged amount both the capital charge for specific risk for the reference credit instrument and that part of the capital charge for specific risk for the credit derivative that relates to this particular reference credit instrument. Where a bank has multiple risk positions in reference credit instruments underlying a first-to-default credit derivative, this offset is allowed only for that underlying reference credit instrument having the lowest specific risk capital charge.

              27.For nth-to-default credit derivatives with n greater than one, no offset of the capital charge for specific risk with any underlying reference credit instrument is allowed. If the nth-to-default credit derivative is externally rated, then the protection seller must calculate the specific risk capital charge using the approach applied for securitisation exposures held in the trading book. Specifically, banks should determine the applicable risk weight applied to such positions as securitisation exposures in the banking book, and multiply the result by 8% to obtain the specific risk charge for the derivative exposure. Otherwise, the capital charge for specific risk for nth-to-default credit derivative with n greater than one is the lesser of (1) the sum of the specific risk capital charges for the individual reference credit instruments in the basket but disregarding the n-1 obligations with the lowest specific risk capital charges; and (2) the maximum possible credit event payment under the contract. The capital charge for nth-to-default credit derivative positions applies irrespective of whether the bank has a long or short position, that is, whether the bank obtains or provides protection.

              General market risk

              28.For general market risk, positions are slotted into time bands. The capital charge is the sum of four components calculated from amounts in each time band:

              • The net short or long position in the whole trading book;
              • A small proportion of the matched positions in each time-band (the “vertical disallowance”);
              • A larger proportion of the matched positions across different time-bands (the “horizontal disallowance”); and
              • Where applicable, a net charge for positions in options.

              29.A bank can choose between two principal methods of slotting positions into time bands for general market risk: a “maturity” method and a “duration” method.

              30.In the maturity method, long or short positions in debt securities and other sources of interest rate exposures including derivative instruments are slotted into a maturity ladder comprising thirteen time-bands (or fifteen time-bands in case of low coupon instruments). Fixed rate instruments must be allocated according to the residual term to maturity and floating-rate instruments according to the residual term to the next repricing date. Opposite positions of the same amount in the same issues (but not different issues by the same issuer), whether actual or notional, can be omitted from the interest rate maturity framework, as can closely matched swaps, forwards, futures, and forward rate agreements (FRAs) that meet the conditions set out below in this Standard on allowable offsetting of matched positions.

              31.The first step in the calculation is to weight the positions in each time-band by a risk weight designed to reflect the price sensitivity of those positions to assumed changes in interest rates. The weights for each time-band are set out in the risk-weight column of Table 2. Zero-coupon bonds and deep-discount bonds (defined as bonds with a coupon of less than 3%) should be slotted according to the time-bands set out in the column labeled “Coupon less than 3%” in Table 2.

              Table 2: Risk Weights and Assumed Yield Changes for General Market Risk, by Zone and Time Band

              ZonesCoupon 3% or moreCoupon less than 3%Risk weightAssumed Yield Change
              Zone 11 month or less1 month or less0.00%1.00
              1 to 3 months1 to 3 months0.20%1.00
              3 to 6 months3 to 6 months0.40%1.00
              6 to 12 months6 to 12 months0.70%1.00
              Zone 21 to 2 years1.0 to 1.9 years1.25%0.90
              2 to 3 years1.9 to 2.8 years1.75%0.80
              3 to 4 years2.8 to 3.6 years2.25%0.75
              Zone 34 to 5 years3.6 to 4.3 years2.75%0.75
              5 to 7 years4.3 to 5.7 years3.25%0.70
              7 to 10 years5.7 to 7.3 years3.75%0.65
              10 to 15 years7.3 to 9.3 years4.50%0.60
              15 to 20 years9.3 to 10.6 years5.25%0.60
              over 20 years10.6 to 12 years6.00%0.60
               12 to 20 years8.00%0.60
               over 20 years12.50%0.60

               

              32.The next step in the calculation is to offset the weighted longs and shorts in each time-band, resulting in a single short or long position for each band. A 10% capital charge to reflect basis risk and gap risk – the vertical disallowance – is levied on the smaller of the offsetting long or short positions in each time-band. The result is two sets of weighted positions, the net long or short positions in each time-band and the vertical disallowances, which have no sign.

              33.Next, banks are allowed to conduct two rounds of “horizontal offsetting,” subject to disallowances expressed as a fraction of the matched positions. First, the weighted long and short positions in each of three zones identified in Table 2 may be offset, subject to the matched portion attracting a within-zone disallowance factor that is part of the capital charge:

              Within Zone 1:40%
              Within Zone 2 or Zone 3:30%
               

              34.Second, the residual net position in each zone may be carried over and offset against opposite positions in other zones, subject to a second set of disallowance factors that apply between zones:

              Between Zone 1 and Zone 2:40%
              Between Zone 2 and Zone 3:40%
              Between Zone 1 and Zone 3:100%
               

              35.Under the alternative duration method, banks with the necessary capability may, with the Central Bank’s consent, calculate the price sensitivity of each position separately. Banks must elect and use this method on a continuous basis unless a change in method is approved by the Central Bank. To apply the duration method, banks should apply the following steps in order:

              • Calculate the price sensitivity of each instrument in terms of a change in interest rates of between 0.6 and 1.0 percentage points depending on the maturity of the instrument per the last column of Table 2;
              • Slot the resulting sensitivity measures into the fifteen time-bands set out in the “Coupon less than 3%” column of Table 2;
              • Subject long and short positions in each time-band to a 5% vertical disallowance to reflect basis risk; and
              • Carry forward the net positions in each time-band for horizontal offsetting subject to the within-zone and between-zone horizontal disallowances specified above.

              36.Under either the maturity method or the duration method, separate maturity ladders should be used for each currency, and capital charges should be calculated for each currency separately and then summed with no offsetting across currencies between positions of opposite sign.

              37.In the case of currencies in which business is insignificant, the bank may construct a single maturity ladder, and slot within each appropriate time-band the net long or short position for each currency. However, these individual net positions must be summed within each time-band, irrespective of whether they are long or short positions, to produce a gross position figure. These gross positions in each time band are then subject to the risk weights from Table 2, with no further offsetting permitted.

              Interest rate derivatives

              38.Interest rate risk calculations for market risk capital should include all interest rate derivatives and off-balance-sheet instruments held in the trading book that respond to changes in interest rates. The derivatives should be converted into equivalent positions in the relevant underlying, and then be subject to the specific and general market risk requirements as described above. Amounts reported should be the market value of the notional amount of the underlying or of the notional underlying. For instruments where the apparent notional amount differs from the effective notional amount, banks must use the effective notional amount.

              39.Futures and forward contracts, including forward rate agreements, should be treated as a combination of a long position and a short position in a notional government security. The contractual period until delivery or exercise of a future or FRA, plus the life of the underlying instrument where applicable, should be used as the maturity. Where a range of deliverable instruments may be delivered to fulfil the contract, the bank can choose which deliverable security goes into the maturity or duration ladder, but should take into account any conversion factor defined by the exchange. In the case of a future on a corporate bond index, the position should be included in the maturity or duration ladder at the market value of the notional underlying portfolio of securities.

              40.Swaps should be treated as two notional positions in government securities with relevant maturities. For swaps that pay or receive a fixed or floating interest rate against some other reference price such as an equity price, the interest rate component should be slotted into the appropriate repricing maturity category, with the equity component being included in the equity framework. The separate legs of cross-currency swaps are to be reported in the relevant maturity ladders for the currencies concerned.

              Allowable offsetting of matched positions

              41.If a bank has matching long and short positions in the trading book, where both actual and notional match in identical instruments with exactly the same issuer, coupon, currency and maturity, those positions may be excluded from interest rate capital framework altogether, for both specific and general market risk. A matched position in a future or forward and its corresponding underlying may be fully offset, and thus excluded from the calculation. When the future or forward comprises a range of deliverable instruments, offsetting of positions in the future or forward contract and its underlying is only permissible in cases where there is a readily identifiable underlying security that is most profitable for the trader with a short position to deliver. No offsetting is allowed between positions in different currencies; the separate legs of cross-currency swaps or forward foreign exchange deals are to be treated as notional positions in the relevant instruments and included in the appropriate calculation for each currency.

              42.Under certain conditions, opposite positions in the same category of instruments, including options at their delta-equivalent value and the separate legs of different swaps, can be regarded as matched and allowed to offset fully. The positions must relate to the same underlying instruments, be of the same nominal value, and be denominated in the same currency. In addition:

              1. (i)for futures: offsetting positions in the notional or underlying instruments to which the futures contract relates must be for identical products and mature within seven days of each other;
              2. (ii)for swaps and FRAs: the reference rate (for floating rate positions) must be identical and the coupon closely matched (within 15 basis points); and
              3. (iii)for swaps, FRAs and forwards: the next interest fixing date or, for fixed coupon positions or forwards, the residual maturity must correspond to one another within the following limits:
                1. (a)less than one month hence: must be same day;
                2. (b)between one month and one year hence: must be within seven days of one another; or
                3. (c)over one year hence: must be within thirty days of one another.

              Specific risk for interest rate derivatives

              43.Interest rate and currency swaps, FRAs, forward foreign exchange contracts, and interest rate futures are not subject to a specific risk charge. This exemption also applies to futures on an interest rate index. However, in the case of futures contracts where the underlying is a debt security, or an index representing a basket of debt securities, such a specific risk charge does apply.
               

              General market risk for interest rate derivatives

              44.General market risk applies to positions in all derivative products in the same manner as for cash positions, subject only to the allowable offsetting of fully or very closely matched positions in identical instruments as defined above in this Standard. The various categories of instruments should be slotted into the maturity ladder and treated according to the rules identified earlier.

              45.Table 3 below presents a summary of the regulatory treatment for interest rate derivatives for market risk purposes. Note that a contract for which the underlying instrument is a government debt security rated AA- or better has no capital requirement for specific risk. Also, note that the specific risk charge relates to the issuer of the instrument that is referenced by the derivative contract; the derivative is still subject to a separate capital charge for counterparty credit risk under the Central Bank’s Standard for Counterparty Credit Risk.

              Table 3: Summary of treatment of interest rate derivatives

              InstrumentSpecific risk chargeGeneral market risk charge
              Futures and forward contracts on:  
              • Government debt securities
              Yes, if below AA- 
              • Corporate debt securities
              YesYes, as two positions
              • Index on interest rates
              No 
              FRAs and swapsNoYes, as two positions
              Forward foreign exchangeNoYes, as one position in each currency
              Options on: Either
              1. (a)carve out together with associated hedging positions under the simplified approach;

              or

              1. (b)calculate general market risk charge according to the delta-plus approach (gamma and vega should receive separate capital charges)
              • Government debt securities
              Yes, if below AA-
              • Corporate debt securities
              Yes
              • Index on interest rates
              No
              • FRAs and swaps
              No

               

              2.Equity position risk

              46.This section covers market risk capital for positions in equities held in the trading book. It applies to long and short positions in all instruments that exhibit market behavior similar to equities. It applies to common stocks – whether voting or non-voting – convertible securities that behave like equities, and commitments to buy or sell equity securities, but not to non-convertible preference shares.
               

              47.As with debt securities, the minimum capital standards for equities includes two separately calculated charges, one for the “specific risk” of holding a long or short position in an individual equity, and one for the “general market risk” of holding a long or short position in the market as a whole. The requirements apply in modified form to equity derivative products, stock indices, and index arbitrage; the relevant modifications are described later in this Standard.

              Specific and general market risk

              48.Specific risk is calculated as a percentage of the bank’s gross equity positions, that is, the sum of all long equity positions and all short equity positions, summed without regard to sign (that is, the sum of the absolute values of the positions in each equity). The capital charge for specific risk is calculated as 8% of gross equity positions.

              49.General market risk is calculated based on overall net position in an equity market, which is the difference between the sum of the longs and the sum of the shorts. The capital charge for general market risk is calculated as 8% of overall net equity positions.

              50.Long and short positions in the same issue may be reported on a net basis. The long or short position in the market must be calculated on a market-by-market basis, that is, a separate calculation has to be carried out for each national market in which the bank holds equities.

              Equity derivatives

              51.Equity derivatives and off-balance-sheet positions that are affected by changes in equity prices should be included in the measurement system, with the exception of certain options positions as described further below. This includes futures and swaps on both individual equities and on stock indices.

              Calculation of positions

              52.To calculate specific and general market risk, derivatives are converted into equivalent positions in the relevant underlying. Positions in derivatives should be converted into notional equity positions as follows:

              • Futures and forward contracts relating to individual equities should be reported at current market prices;
              • Futures relating to stock indices should be reported as the marked-to-market value of the notional underlying equity portfolio;
              • Equity swaps should be treated as two notional positions; and
              • Equity options and stock index options should either be “carved out” together with the associated underlying or be incorporated in the measure of general market risk described in this section according to the delta-plus method.

              53.Matched positions in each identical equity or stock index in each market may be fully offset, resulting in a single net short or long position to which the specific and general market risk charges will apply. For example, a future in a given equity may be offset against an opposite cash position in the same equity. Any interest rate risk arising out of the future, however, should be treated per the requirements for interest rate risk in the trading book.

              Specific Risk and General Market Risk for Equity Derivatives

              54.Table 4 below presents a summary of the regulatory treatment for equity derivatives for market risk purposes. Note that derivatives are also subject to a separate capital charge for counterparty credit risk under the Central Bank’s Standard for Counterparty Credit Risk.

               

              Table 4: Summary of treatment of equity derivatives

              InstrumentSpecific risk chargeGeneral market risk charge
              Futures and forward contracts on:  
              • Individual equities
              YesYes, as underlying
              • Equity indexes
              2%
              Options on: Either
              1. (a)carve out together with associated hedging positions under the simplified approach;

              or

              1. (b)calculate general market risk charge according to the delta-plus approach (gamma and vega should receive separate capital charges)
              • Individual equities
              Yes
              • Equity indexes
              2%

               

              55.In addition to the general market risk requirement, a further capital charge of 2% must be applied to the net long or short position in index contracts on a diversified portfolio of equities, to cover factors such as execution risk.

              56.Where a bank engages in a deliberate arbitrage strategy under which a basket of stocks is matched against a futures contract on a broadly-based index, a modified capital requirement applies, provided:

              • The trade has been deliberately entered into and separately controlled as part of the strategy; and
              • The composition of the basket of stocks represents at least 90% of the index when broken down into its notional components.

              In such a case, the capital requirement is 2% of the gross value of the positions on each side. This requirement applies even if all of the stocks comprising the index are held in identical proportions. Any excess value of the stocks comprising the basket over the value of the futures contract or excess value of the futures contract over the value of the basket must be treated as an open long or short equity position.

              57.However, on certain futures-related arbitrage strategies, the additional 2% capital charge is applied to only one side of the trade, with the opposite position exempt from this capital charge. This special treatment applies:

              • When a bank takes an opposite position in exactly the same index at different dates or in different market centers; or
              • When a bank has opposite positions in contracts involving different but similar indices at the same date (in which case, the Central Bank may determine whether the two indices in such a strategy are sufficiently similar, with sufficient common components).

              58.A bank with a position in depository receipts against an opposite position in the underlying equity, or identical equities in different markets, may offset the positions the long and short positions, provided that any costs on conversion are fully taken into account. (Such trades may also introduce foreign exchange risk requiring market risk capital.)

              3.Foreign exchange risk

              59.This section sets out minimum capital standards to cover the risk of holding or taking positions in foreign currencies, including gold. Gold is treated as a foreign exchange position for purposes of market risk rather than as a commodity, because its volatility is more in line with foreign currencies and because banks typically manage gold exposures in a similar manner to foreign currencies. These requirements apply to all foreign currency and gold exposures throughout the entire bank, in both the trading book and the banking book.

              Measuring the exposure in a single currency

              60.The bank’s net open position in each currency, long or short, should be calculated by summing:

              • The net spot position calculated as all asset items less all liability items denominated in a given currency, including accrued interest and accrued expenses;
              • The net forward position calculated as all amounts to be received less all amounts to be paid under forward foreign exchange transactions in a given currency, including currency futures and the principal on currency swaps not included in the spot position;
              • Guarantees (and similar instruments) in the given currency that are certain to be called and are likely to be irrecoverable;
              • At the discretion of the reporting bank, net future income and expenses not yet accrued but already fully hedged;
              • Any other item representing a profit or loss in foreign currencies; and
              • The net delta-based equivalent of the total book of foreign currency options. (Options are also subject to additional considerations as described below in this Standard.)

              61.Expected but unearned future interest and expenses may be excluded unless the amounts are certain and have been hedged. If a bank includes future income and expenses, it must do so on a consistent basis, and is not permitted to select only those expected future flows that reduce required capital.

              62.Positions in composite currencies (such as SDRs or synthetic currencies) should be separately reported, but may be either treated as currencies in their own right or split into their component parts for measuring the bank’s open positions. While either approach may be used, the selected approach should be used consistently by the bank.

              63.Positions (either spot or forward) in gold should first be expressed in common units (e.g. kilos or pounds), with the net position converted at current spot rates into UAE Dirham equivalent value. Where gold is part of a forward contract (quantity of gold to be received or to be delivered), any interest rate or foreign currency exposure from the other leg of the contract should be reported as set out for interest rate and currency exposures under this Standard.

              64.Forward positions may be valued at current spot market exchange rates. However, banks that use net present values of positions in their normal management accounting are expected to use those net present values, discounted using current interest rates and valued at current spot rates, for measuring their forward currency and gold positions.

              65.Items that are deducted from a bank’s capital when calculating its capital base, such as investments in non-consolidated subsidiaries, or other long-term participations denominated in foreign currencies, which are reported in the published accounts at historic cost, do not need to be included as foreign currency exposures for the foreign exchange risk calculation.

              66.When assessing foreign exchange risk on a consolidated basis, it may be technically impractical in the case of some marginal operations to include the currency positions of some foreign branches or subsidiaries. In such cases, the bank may use an established internal position limit in each currency as a proxy for the actual position, provided there is adequate ex-post monitoring of actual positions against such limits to confirm that the limits are effective. The bank should add the limits, without regard to sign, to the net open position in each currency.

              67.Banks should convert the nominal amount (or net present value) of the net position in each foreign currency and in gold at current spot rates into UAE Dirham (AED) equivalent for purposes of reporting and capital calculations.

              Measuring market risk for foreign exchange positions

              68.Calculation of market risk capital for foreign currency positions is based on the net open positions in foreign currencies and in gold. For purposes of market risk capital requirements, the Central Bank takes into account the stable relationship between the AED and the US dollar, which results in UAE banks facing no material foreign exchange market risk with respect to open US dollar positions.
               

              69.A bank should calculate its overall net open foreign exchange position for the bank as follows:

              • Calculate the sum of all net short foreign currency positions, and the sum of all net long foreign currency positions, excluding the net open position in the US dollar.
              • Take the larger of the two sums, from the step above, and add the absolute value of the net position (short or long) in gold.

              The capital charge for foreign exchange market risk is 8% of the position resulting from the calculation above.

              70.A bank doing negligible business in foreign currency that does not take foreign exchange positions for its own account may, at the discretion of the Central Bank, be exempted from capital requirements on these positions provided that:

              • Its foreign currency business, measured as the greater of the sum of its gross long positions and the sum of its gross short positions in all foreign currencies including the US dollar, does not exceed 100% of total capital; and
              • Its overall net open foreign exchange position as defined in this section does not exceed 2% of total capital.

              4.Commodities risk

              71.This section establishes a minimum capital standard to cover the risk of holding or taking positions in commodities, including precious metals but excluding gold. Banks may choose between two alternative approaches for measuring commodities position risk: a maturity ladder approach based on seven time-bands, and a simplified approach.

              72.Under either approach, long and short positions may be offset to calculate open positions in each commodity. Banks first express each commodity position (spot plus forward) in a standard unit of measurement (barrels, kilos, grams etc.), then convert the net position in each commodity into a value in AED at current spot rates. For markets that have daily delivery dates, any contracts maturing within ten days of one another may be offset.

              73.In general, long and short positions in different commodities may not be offset. However, the Central Bank permits banks to offset long and short positions in different commodities within a given commodity type in cases where the commodities are deliverable against one another, where “commodity type” has the meaning as defined in the Counterparty Credit Risk Standard. The Central Bank may also permit offsetting if the commodities are close substitutes for each other and a minimum correlation of 0.9 between their price movements can be clearly established by the bank over a minimum period of one year. However, a bank basing its capital calculation on correlations must satisfy the Central Bank of the accuracy of the method chosen for assessing correlation, and must obtain the Central Bank’s prior approval. In addition, the bank must have an approved process for identifying commodity types under the Counterparty Credit Risk Standard.22

              74.All commodity derivatives and off-balance-sheet positions that are affected by changes in commodity prices should be included in this measurement framework. This includes commodity futures, commodity swaps, and options where the “delta plus” method is used. In order to calculate the risk, commodity derivatives should be converted into notional commodities positions and assigned to maturities as follows:

              • Futures and forward contracts relating to individual commodities should be incorporated in the measurement system as notional amounts of barrels, kilos etc. and should be assigned a maturity with reference to expiry date.
              • Commodity swaps where one leg is a fixed price and the other is the current market price should be incorporated as a series of positions equal to the notional amount of the contract, with one position corresponding to each payment on the swap and slotted into the maturity ladder accordingly. The positions would be long positions if the bank is paying fixed and receiving floating, and short positions if the bank is receiving fixed and paying floating.

              75.Banks should incorporate commodity swaps where the legs are in different commodities into the relevant maturity ladder, with no offsetting allowed.

              Maturity ladder approach

              76.Under the maturity ladder approach, the bank assigns positions in each commodity to one of seven time bands, as shown in Table 5 below. Banks must use a separate maturity ladder for each commodity. Holdings of physical stocks of any commodity should be allocated to the shortest time band (that is, 0-1 month).

              Table 5: Time-bands for the maturity ladder

              Time bandMaturity range
              10- 1month
              21- 3months
              33- 6months
              46- 12months
              51- 2years
              62- 3years
              7over  3years

               

              77.Capital for commodity market risk consists of two broad components: a set of capital charges on the gross positions (long plus short) in each time band and capital charges against a series of net position calculations. Each component is described further below.

              78.For the first component, the bank should calculate 1.5% of the gross position (long plus short, without offsetting) in each of the seven time bands, and sum the results across time bands.

              79.For the second component, the bank should first calculate 0.6% of the net position (the absolute value of the difference between long and short positions) in time band 1. To this, the bank should add 0.6% of the net position in time bands 1 and 2 combined. The bank should do the same for time bands 1 through 3 combined, 1 through 4 combined, 1 through 5 combined, and 1 through 6 combined, each time adding 0.6% of the calculated net position. Finally, the bank should add 15% of the net position across all time bands (1 through 7).

              80.Required capital for commodity market risk is then the sum of the two broad components calculated per the two paragraphs above.

              Simplified approach

              81.Under the simplified approach, the capital charge is set at 15% of the net position, long or short, in each commodity. However, each commodity is subject to an additional capital charge of 3% of the bank’s gross position - long plus short - in that particular commodity. In valuing the gross positions in commodity derivatives for this purpose, banks should use the current spot price.
               

              5.Treatment of options

              82.Two alternative approaches apply to options. Banks with purchased options only (rather than written or sold options) can choose to use a simplified approach described below. Banks with more complex option positions that also write options must use the delta- plus approach rather than the simplified approach.

              83.If a bank has written option positions, but all of those written options are hedged by perfectly matched long positions in exactly the same options, no capital is required for market risk on those options.

              Simplified approach

              84.Under the simplified approach, banks use the following treatments for option positions as noted:

              Purchased call or purchased put: The capital charge is the lesser of (1) the market value of the underlying security multiplied by the sum of specific and general market risk charges for the underlying, or (2) the market value of the option. Where the position does not fall within the trading book (i.e. options on certain foreign exchange or commodities positions not belonging to the trading book), it may be acceptable to use the book value instead of the market value.

              Purchased put with a long position in the underlying cash instrument, or purchased call with a short position in the underlying cash instrument: The capital charge is the market value of the underlying security multiplied by the sum of specific and general market risk charges for the underlying, less the amount the option is in the money (if any), bounded at zero. For options with a residual maturity of more than six months, the strike price should be compared with the forward, not current, price. A bank unable to do this must take the in-the-money amount to be zero.

              85.In some cases, such as foreign exchange, it may be unclear which side is the “underlying security.” In such cases, the asset that would be received if the option were exercised should be considered as the underlying. In addition, the nominal value should be used for items where the market value of the underlying instrument could be zero, such as caps and floors, swaptions, or similar instruments.

              Delta-plus approach

              86.Options should be included in market risk calculations for each type of risk as a delta-weighted position equal to the market value of the underlying multiplied by the delta.
               

              87.For options with equities as the underlying, the delta-weighted positions should be incorporated into the equity market risk capital calculation described above in this Standard. For purposes of this calculation, each national market should be treated as a separate underlying. Similarly, the capital charge for options on foreign exchange and gold positions should be based on the method set out in the section on foreign exchange risk. The net delta-based equivalent of the foreign currency and gold options should be incorporated into the measurement of the exposure for the respective currency (or gold) position. The capital charge for options on commodities should be based on either the simplified or the maturity ladder approach.

              88.Delta-weighted positions with debt securities or interest rates as the underlying should be slotted into the interest rate time-bands, using either the maturity method or the duration method, under the following procedure. A two-legged approach should be used as for other derivatives, requiring one entry at the time the underlying contract takes effect and a second at the time the underlying contract matures. For instance, a purchased call option on a June three-month interest-rate future should in April be considered, on the basis of its delta-equivalent value, to be a long position with a maturity of five months and a short position with a maturity of two months. A written option should be similarly slotted as a long position with a maturity of two months and a short position with a maturity of five months. Floating rate instruments with caps or floors should be treated as a combination of floating rate securities and a series of European-style options.

              89.In addition to the capital charges arising from delta risk as described above, banks using the delta-plus approach are subject to capital charges for gamma and Vega risk as described below. Banks are required to determine the gamma and Vega for each option position (including hedge positions) separately. These sensitivities must be calculated using an approved exchange model, or using the bank’s proprietary options pricing models subject to oversight by the Central Bank. The capital charges should be calculated as follows:

              1. (i)for each individual option a “gamma impact” should be calculated as:

                Gamma impact = ½ × Gamma × VU2
                 

                         where VU = Variation of the underlying of the option.

              2. (ii)VU will be calculated as follows:
                • For interest rate options if the underlying is a bond, the market value of the underlying should be multiplied by the risk weights set out in Table 2. An equivalent calculation should be carried out where the underlying is an interest rate, again based on the assumed changes in yield from Table 2;
                • For options on equities and equity indices, the market value of the underlying should be multiplied by 8%;
                • For foreign exchange and gold options, the market value of the underlying should be multiplied by 8%;
                • For options on commodities, the market value of the underlying should be multiplied by 15%.
              3. (iii)For the purpose of this calculation the following positions should be treated as the same underlying:
                • For interest rates, each time-band as set out in Table 2;
                • For equities and stock indices, each national market;
                • For foreign currencies, each currency pair (and gold);
                • For commodities, each individual commodity.
              4. (iv)Each option on the same underlying will have a gamma impact that is either positive or negative. These individual gamma impacts should be summed; resulting in a net gamma impact for each underlying that is either positive or negative. Only those net gamma impacts that are negative should be included in the capital calculation.

              90.The total gamma capital charge is the sum of the absolute value of the net negative gamma impacts as calculated above.

              91.For volatility risk or Vega, banks are required to calculate the capital charges by multiplying the sum of the Vegas for all options on the same underlying, as defined above, by a proportional shift in volatility of +/-25%. The total capital charge for Vega risk is the sum of the absolute value of the individual capital charges that have been calculated for Vega risk.


              21 This use of national discretion aligns the Market Risk Standard with the similar treatment under the Credit Risk Standard.

              22 The Central Bank has exercised the national discretion provided under the BCBS framework to permit offsetting of long and short positions in closely related commodities under the conditions described in this Standards. The Central Bank believes that this approach provides appropriate recognition of the actual underlying risks, while requiring well-controlled processes to identify the relevant offsetting commodity positions. It also aligns the treatment of commodities under this Standards with the corresponding treatment of commodity positions with respect to market-driven exposure under the Central Bank’s counterparty credit risk requirements.

          • IV. Risk-Weighted Assets

            92.The total minimum required capital charge for market risk is the sum of the separate calculations for interest rate risk, equity risk, foreign exchange risk, and commodities risk as defined above, with additional capital for options positions as appropriate A bank must calculate the RWA for market risk by multiplying the total capital requirement for market risk as calculated above by the factor 12.5:

            Market Risk RWA = (Capital Charge × 12.5)

          • V. Review Requirements

            93.Bank calculations under this Standard and associated bank processes must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge. Reviews must cover material aspects of the calculations under this Standard, including but not limited to the processes for identification of relevant positions in the trading book and/or banking book, the application of the requirements for calculation of specific risk and general risk for each type of market risk, the identification of offsetting long and short positions, and the treatment of options positions under either the simplified approach or the delta-plus approach.

          • VI. Shari’ah Implementation

            94.Banks offering Islamic financial services which have market exposure in their Shari’ah compliant transactions held in the banking and trading books, which are parallel to the transactions stated in this standard, shall calculate the relevant risk weighted assets to maintain an appropriate level of capital in accordance with the provisions of this Standard, provided that it is in a manner that is Shari’ah compliant.

          • VII. Appendix: Prudent Valuation Guidance

            95.Banks should apply prudent valuation practices for the trading book. These practices should at a minimum include the systems and controls, as well as the aspects of valuation methodologies, described in this Appendix.

            • A. Systems and Controls

              96.Banks must establish and maintain adequate systems and controls sufficient to give management and the Central Bank confidence that their valuation estimates are prudent and reliable. These systems must be integrated with other risk management systems within the organization (such as credit analysis). Such systems must include:

              • Documented policies and procedures for the process of valuation. This includes clearly defined responsibilities of the various areas involved in the determination of the valuation, sources of market information and review of their appropriateness, guidelines for the use of unobservable inputs reflecting the bank’s assumptions of what market participants would use in pricing the position, frequency of independent valuation, timing of closing prices, procedures for adjusting valuations, end of the month and ad-hoc verification procedures; and
              • Clear and independent (i.e. independent of front office) reporting lines for the department accountable for the valuation process. The reporting line should ultimately be to a main board executive director.
            • B. Valuation Methodologies

              1.Marking to market

              97.Marking to market is the at-least-daily valuation of positions at readily available close out prices that are sourced independently. Examples of readily available close out prices include exchange prices, screen prices, or quotes from several independent reputable brokers.

              98.Banks must mark to market as much as possible. The more prudent side of a bid/offer spread should be used unless the institution is a significant market maker in a particular position type and it can close out at mid-market. Banks should maximize the use of relevant observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs when estimating fair value using a valuation technique. However, some observable inputs or transactions may not be relevant, such as in a forced liquidation or distressed sale, or transactions may not be observable, such as when markets are inactive. In such cases, the observable data should be considered, but may not be determinative.

              2.Marking to model

              99.Only where marking to market is not possible should banks mark to model, but this must be demonstrated to be prudent. Marking to model is defined as any valuation that has to be benchmarked, extrapolated, or otherwise calculated from a market input. When marking to model, an extra degree of conservatism is appropriate. The Central Bank will consider the following in assessing whether a mark-to-model valuation is prudent:

              • Senior management should be aware of the elements of the trading book or of other fair-valued positions that are subject to mark to model and should understand the materiality of the uncertainty this creates in the reporting of the risk/performance of the business.
              • Market inputs should be sourced, to the extent possible, in line with market prices (as discussed above). The appropriateness of the market inputs for the particular position being valued should be reviewed regularly.
              • Where available, generally accepted valuation methodologies for particular products should be used as far as possible.
              • Where the institution itself develops the model, it should be based on appropriate assumptions that have been assessed and challenged by suitably qualified parties independent of the development process. The model should be developed or approved independently of the front office. The model should be independently tested, including validation of the mathematics, the assumptions, and the software implementation.
              • There should be formal change control procedures in place, and a secure copy of the model should be held and periodically used to check valuations.
              • Risk management should be aware of the weaknesses or limitations of the models used, and should account for those model weaknesses or limitations when using the valuation output.
              • The model should be subject to periodic review to assess its performance (e.g. assessing continued appropriateness of the assumptions, analysis of P&L versus risk factors, comparison of actual close out values to model outputs).
              • Valuation adjustments should be made as appropriate, for example, to cover the uncertainty of the model valuation.

              3.Independent price verification

              100.Independent price verification is distinct from daily marking to market. It is the process by which market prices or model inputs are regularly verified for accuracy. While daily marking to market may be performed by dealers, verification of market prices or model inputs should be performed by a unit independent of the dealing room, at least monthly (or, depending on the nature of the market/trading activity, more frequently). It need not be performed as frequently as daily marking to market, since independent marking of positions should reveal any error or bias in pricing, which should result in the elimination of inaccurate daily marks.

              101.Independent price verification entails a higher standard of accuracy in that the market prices or model inputs are used to determine profit and loss figures, whereas daily marks are used primarily for management reporting. For independent price verification, where pricing sources are more subjective, for example where there is only one available broker quote, prudent measures such as valuation adjustments may be appropriate.

              4.Valuation adjustments

              102.As part of their procedures for marking to market, banks must establish and maintain procedures for considering valuation adjustments. The Central Bank expects banks using third-party valuations to consider whether valuation adjustments are necessary. Such considerations are also necessary when marking to model.

              103.The Central Bank expects the following valuation adjustments/reserves to be formally considered at a minimum: unearned credit spreads, close-out costs, operational risks, early termination, investing and funding costs, and future administrative costs and, where appropriate, model risk.

              104.Banks must establish and maintain procedures for judging the necessity of and calculating an adjustment to the current valuation of less liquid positions for regulatory capital purposes. This adjustment may be in addition to any changes to the value of the position required for financial reporting purposes and should be designed to reflect the illiquidity of the position. Banks should consider the need for an adjustment to a position’s valuation to reflect current illiquidity whether the position is marked to market using market prices or observable inputs, valued using third-party valuations, or marked to model. Such adjustments to the current valuation of less liquid positions should impact Tier 1 regulatory capital, and may exceed valuation adjustments made under financial reporting standards.

              105.Bearing in mind that the assumptions made about liquidity in the market risk capital charge may not be consistent with the bank’s ability to sell or hedge out less liquid positions, where appropriate, banks must take an adjustment to the current valuation of these positions, and review their continued appropriateness on an on-going basis. Closeout prices for concentrated positions and/or stale positions should be considered in establishing the adjustment. Banks must consider all relevant factors when determining the appropriateness of the adjustment for less liquid positions. These factors may include, but are not limited to, the amount of time it would take to hedge out the position/risks within the position, the average volatility of bid/offer spreads, the availability of independent market quotes (number and identity of market makers), the average and volatility of trading volumes (including trading volumes during periods of market stress), market concentrations, the aging of positions, the extent to which valuation relies on marking to model, and the impact of other model risks.

              106.For complex products such as securitisation exposures and nth-to-default credit derivatives, banks must explicitly assess the need for valuation adjustments to reflect both the model risk associated with using a possibly incorrect valuation methodology, and the risk associated with using unobservable (and possibly incorrect) calibration parameters in the valuation model.

        • X. Operational Risk

          • I. Introduction

            1.This Standard articulates specific requirements for the calculation of the operational risk capital requirement for banks in the UAE. It is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), specifically as articulated in Basel II: International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards, June 2006, and subsequent revisions and clarifications thereto.

            2.Banks are required to calculate operational risk capital charges according to the methods and criteria addressed in this Standard.

            3.Capital requirements for Operational Risk apply on a consolidated basis for all banks in the UAE. Banks should follow the requirements of all other applicable Central Bank Standards to determine overall capital adequacy requirements.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a.Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or from external events. Operational risk includes legal and compliance risk but excludes strategic and reputational risk.
            2. b.Gross income: net interest income plus net non-interest income, as defined by the Central Bank and/or applicable accounting standards. This measure should:
              • Be gross of any provisions (e.g., for unpaid interest);
              • Be gross of operating expenses, including fees paid to outsourcing service providers but excluding fees received by banks that provide outsourcing services (i.e., such outsourcing fees received shall be included in the definition of gross income);
              • Exclude realised profits/losses from the sale of securities in the banking book (such as securities classified as “held to maturity” and “available for sale” under IFRS, which typically constitute items of the banking book); and
              • Exclude extraordinary or irregular items as well as income derived from insurance.
            3. c.Loans and advances: drawn amounts on credit facilities provided by banks to borrowers.
          • III. Requirements

            • A. Approaches

              4.Banks can apply one of two methods for calculating the Pillar 1 capital requirement for operational risk as below:

              1. (i)Basic Indicator Approach (BIA); or
              2. (ii)Standardised Approach (SA).

              5.The Standardised Approach includes the Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA), which is a simplified version of the Standardised Approach that may be appropriate to small domestic banks focusing on retail or commercial banking activities.

              6.Banks are encouraged to move from the BIA to SA as they develop more sophisticated operational risk measurement systems and practices. Qualifying criteria for the Standardised Approach are presented below in Section B.

              7.Internationally active banks and banks with significant operational risk exposures (for example, specialised processing banks) are expected to use the SA.

              8.The Central Bank will review the capital requirement produced by the operational risk approach used by a bank (whether BIA or SA) for general credibility, especially in relation to a bank’s peer. In the event that credibility is lacking, the Central Bank will consider appropriate supervisory action under Pillar 2.

              9.A bank is required to use the same approach, either the BIA or the SA, for all parts of its operations. The use of SA is subject to qualification by the Central Bank on the basis of the qualification criteria outlined in Section B.

              10.A bank using the SA is not allowed without supervisory approval to choose to revert to the BIA once it has been approved for the SA. However, if the Central Bank determines that a bank using SA no longer meets the qualifying criteria for this approach, it may require the bank to revert to the BIA.

              1.The Basic Indicator Approach (BIA)

              11.Banks using the BIA shall hold capital for operational risk equal to the average over the previous three years of a fixed percentage (denoted alpha) of positive annual gross income. Figures for any year in which annual gross income is negative or zero shall be excluded from both the numerator and denominator when calculating the gross income average.

              12.The capital requirement shall be calculated as follows:

              KBIA = [∑(GI1..n × α)]/n

              where:

               
              KBIA=The capital charge under the BIA;
              GI=Annual gross income, where positive, over the previous three years;
              n=Number of the previous three years for which gross income is positive; and
              α=15%, relating the industry wide level of required capital to the industry wide level of the indicator.

              2.The Standardised Approach (SA)

              13.In the SA, banks’ activities are divided into eight business lines, including corporate finance, trading & sales, retail banking, commercial banking, payment & settlement, agency services, asset management, and retail brokerage. The business lines are defined in the table under Paragraph 12.

              Principles for business line mapping:

              14.The principles that banks shall apply for mapping their own business lines into the regulatory eight business lines as defined by the SA for the purpose of calculating the minimum capital required for operational risk are listed below.

              Mapping of Business Lines
               

              Level 1Level 2Activity Groups
              Corporate FinanceCorporate FinanceMergers and acquisitions, underwriting, privatisations, securitisation, research, debt (government and high yield), equity, syndications, IPO, secondary private placements
              Municipal/Government Finance
              Merchant Banking
              Advisory Services
              Trading and SalesSalesFixed income, equity, foreign exchanges, commodities, credit, funding, own position securities, lending and repos, brokerage, debt, prime brokerage
              Market Making
              Proprietary Positions
              Treasury
              Retail BankingRetail BankingRetail lending and deposits, banking services, trust and estates
              Private BankingPrivate lending and deposits, banking services, trust and estate, investment advice
              Card ServicesMerchant/commercial/corporate cards, private labels and retail
              Commercial BankingCommercial BankingProject finance, real estate, export finance, trade finance, factoring, leasing, lending, guarantees, bills of exchange
              Payment and SettlementExternal ClientsPayments and collections, funds transfer, clearing and settlement
              Agency ServicesCustodyEscrow, depository receipts, securities lending (customers) corporate actions
              Corporate AgencyIssuer and paying agents
              Corporate Trust 
              Asset ManagementDiscretionary Fund ManagementPooled, segregated, retail, institutional, closed, open, private equity
              Non-Discretionary Fund ManagementPooled, segregated, retail, institutional, closed, open
              Retail BrokerageRetail BrokerageExecution and full service

               

              1. (i)All activities must be mapped into the eight level 1 business lines in a mutually exclusive and jointly exhaustive manner;
              2. (ii)Any banking or non-banking activity which cannot be readily mapped into the business line framework, but which represents an ancillary function must be allocated to the business line it supports. If more than one business line is supported through the ancillary activity, an objective mapping criteria must be used;
              3. (iii)When mapping gross income, if an activity cannot be mapped into a particular business line then the business line yielding the highest charge must be used. The same business line equally applies to any associated ancillary activity;
              4. (iv)Banks may use internal pricing methods to allocate gross income between business lines provided that total gross income for the bank (as would be recorded under the BIA) still equals the sum of gross income for the eight business lines;
              5. (v)The mapping of activities into business lines for operational risk capital purposes must be consistent with the definitions of business lines used for regulatory capital calculations in other risk categories (i.e., credit and market risk). Any deviations from this principle must be clearly motivated and documented;
              6. (vi)The mapping process used must be clearly documented. In particular, written business line definitions must be clear and detailed enough to allow third parties to replicate the business line mapping. Documentation must, among other things, clearly motivate any exceptions or overrides and be kept on record;
              7. (vii)Processes must be in place to define the mapping of any new activities or products;
              8. (viii)Senior management is responsible for the mapping policy (which is subject to the approval by the board of directors); and
              9. (ix)The mapping process to business lines must be subject to independent review.

              Supplementary business line mapping guidance:

              15.There is a variety of valid approaches that banks may use to map their activities to the eight business lines, provided the approach used meets the business line mapping principles set out above. The following is therefore an example of one possible approach that could be used by a bank to map its gross income and it is hereby presented for guidance only.

              1. (i)Gross income for retail banking consists of net interest income on loans and advances to retail customers and SMEs treated as retail, plus fees related to traditional retail activities, net income from swaps and derivatives held to hedge the retail banking book, and income on purchased retail receivables. To calculate net interest income for retail banking, a bank takes the interest earned on its loans and advances to retail customers less the weighted average cost of funding of the loans (from whatever source — retail or other deposits).
              2. (ii)Similarly, gross income for commercial banking consists of the net interest income on loans and advances to corporate (plus SMEs treated as corporate), interbank and sovereign customers and income on purchased corporate receivables, plus fees related to traditional commercial banking activities including commitments, guarantees, bills of exchange, net income (e.g., from coupons and dividends) on securities held in the banking book, and profits/losses on swaps and derivatives held to hedge the commercial banking book. The calculation of net interest income is based on interest earned on loans and advances to corporate, interbank and sovereign customers less the weighted average cost of funding for these loans (from whatever source).
              3. (iii)For trading and sales, gross income consists of profits/losses on instruments held for trading purposes (i.e., in the mark-to-market book), net of funding cost, plus fees from wholesale brokerage.
              4. (iv)For the other five business lines, gross income consists primarily of the net fees/commissions earned in each of these businesses. Payment and settlement consists of fees to cover provision of payment/settlement facilities for wholesale counterparties. Payment and settlement losses related to bank’s own activities should also be incorporated in the loss experience of the affected business line. Asset management is management of assets on behalf of others.

              Capital Calculation under the Standardised Approach:

              16.Within each business line, gross income is a broad indicator that serves as a proxy for the scale of business operations and thus the likely scale of operational risk exposure within each of these business lines. The capital charge for each business line is calculated by multiplying gross income by a factor (denoted by beta) assigned to that business line. Beta serves as a proxy for the industry-wide relationship between the operational risk loss experience for a given business line and the aggregate level of gross income for that business line. It should be noted that in the SA gross income is measured for each business line, not the whole institution, (e.g., in corporate finance, the indicator is the gross income generated in the corporate finance business line).

              17.The total capital charge is calculated as the three-year average of the simple summation of the regulatory capital charges across each of the business lines in each year. In any given year, negative capital charges (resulting from negative gross income) in any business line may offset positive capital charges in other business lines without limit. However, where the aggregate capital charge across all business lines within a given year is negative, then the input to the numerator for that year shall be zero. The total capital charge may be expressed as:

              1

              where:

               
              KTSA=The capital charge under the SA;
              GI1-8=Annual gross income in a given year, as defined above in the BIA, for each of the eight business lines; and
              β1-8=A fixed percentage relating the level of required capital to the level of the gross income for each of the eight business lines.
               

              The values of the betas are detailed below.

              Business LinesBeta Factors
              Corporate finance (β1)18%
              Trading and sales (β2)18%
              Retail banking (β3)12%
              Commercial banking (β4)15%
              Payment and settlement (β5)18%
              Agency services (β6)15%
              Asset management (β7)12%
              Retail brokerage (β8)12%

               

              Capital Calculation under the Alternative Standardised Approach:

               

              18.The Central Bank may allow a bank to use the ASA provided the bank is able to satisfy the Central Bank that this alternative approach provides an improved basis for capturing its operational risk. Once a bank has been allowed to use the ASA, it will not be allowed to revert to use of the SA without the permission of the Central Bank. Large diversified banks in major markets are not authorized to use the ASA.

              19.Under the ASA, the operational risk capital charge and methodology are the same as for the SA except for two business lines — retail banking and commercial banking. For these business lines, loans and advances — multiplied by a fixed factor ‘m’ — replaces grossincome as the exposure indicator. The betas for retail and commercial banking are unchanged from the SA. The ASA operational risk capital charge for retail banking (with the same basic formula for commercial banking) can be expressed as:

              KRB = βRB × m × LARB

              where

               
              KRB=The capital charge for the retail banking business line;
              βRB=The beta for the retail banking business line;
              LARB=Total outstanding retail loans and advances (non-risk weighted and gross of provisions), averaged over the past three years; and
              m=0.035.
               

              20.For the purposes of the ASA, total loans and advances in the retail banking business line consists of the total drawn amounts in the following credit portfolios: retail, SMEs treated as retail, and purchased retail receivables.

              21.For commercial banking, total loans and advances consists of the drawn amounts in the following credit portfolios: corporate, sovereign, bank, specialised lending, SMEs treated as corporate and purchased corporate receivables. The book value of securities held in the banking book should also be included.

              22.Under the ASA, banks may aggregate retail and commercial banking (if they wish to) using a beta of 15%.

              23.Similarly, those banks that are unable to disaggregate their gross income into the other six business lines can aggregate the total gross income for these six business lines using a beta of 18%, with negative gross income treated as described in paragraph 15 above.

              24.As under the SA, the total capital charge for the ASA is calculated as the simple summation of the regulatory capital charges across each of the eight business lines.

            • B. Qualifying Criteria for the SA and the ASA

              25.In order to qualify for use of the SA or ASA, a bank shall satisfy the Central Bank that, at a minimum:

              1. (i)Its board of directors and senior management, as appropriate, are actively involved in the oversight of the operational risk management framework;
              2. (ii)It has an operational risk management system that is conceptually sound and is implemented with integrity; and
              3. (iii)It has sufficient resources in the use of the approach in the major business lines as well as the control and audit areas.

              26.The Central Bank may insist on a period of initial monitoring of a bank’s SA or ASA before it is used for regulatory capital purposes.

              27.A bank shall develop specific policies and have documented criteria for mapping gross income for current business lines and activities into the standardised framework. The criteria shall be reviewed and adjusted for new or changing business activities as appropriate. These criteria shall be compliant with the principles for business line mapping that are set out above in paragraph 12.

              28.Banks shall also meet the following additional criteria:

              1. (i)The bank shall have an operational risk management system with clear responsibilities assigned to an operational risk management function. The operational risk management function shall be responsible for developing strategies to identify, assess, monitor and control/mitigate operational risk; for codifying firm-level policies and procedures concerning operational risk management and controls; for the design and implementation of the firm’s operational risk assessment methodology; and for the design and implementation of a risk-reporting system for operational risk;
              2. (ii)As part of the bank’s internal operational risk assessment system, the bank shall systematically track relevant operational risk data including material losses by business line. Its operational risk assessment system shall be closely integrated into the risk management processes of the bank. Its output shall be an integral part of the process of monitoring and controlling the banks operational risk profile. For instance, this information shall play a prominent role in risk reporting, management reporting, and risk analysis. The bank shall have techniques for creating incentives to improve the management of operational risk throughout the firm;
              3. (iii)The bank shall have regular reporting of operational risk exposures, including material operational losses, to business unit management, senior management, and to the board of directors. The bank shall have procedures for taking appropriate action according to the information within the management reports;
              4. (iv)The bank’s operational risk management system shall be well documented. The bank shall have a routine in place for ensuring compliance with a documented set of internal policies, controls and procedures concerning the operational risk management system, which shall include policies for the treatment of noncompliance issues;
              5. (v)The bank’s operational risk management processes and assessment system shall be subject to validation and regular independent review. These reviews shall include both the activities of the business units and of the operational risk management function; and
              6. (vi)The bank’s operational risk assessment system (including the internal validation processes) shall be subject to regular review by external auditors and/or the Central Bank.

              Additional Qualifying criteria specifically for the ASA

              29.Large diversified banks are not allowed to use the ASA.

              30.To be permitted to use the ASA, a bank shall demonstrate to the Central Bank that it meets all the following conditions:

              1. (i)Its retail or commercial banking activities shall account for at least 90% of its income;
              2. (ii)The gross income is not a reliable operational risk exposure indicator; for instance a significant proportion of its retail or commercial banking activities comprise loans associated with a high default probability and therefore interest rate income is inflated and operational risk may be overstated; and
              3. (iii)A bank should be able to demonstrate to the Central Bank that the ASA provides a more appropriate basis than the SA for calculating its capital requirement for operational risk.

              31.The Central Bank may determine additional qualifying criteria for the ASA.

          • IV. Review Requirements

            32.Bank calculations of operational risk capital requirements under this Standard shall be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge by third parties. Reviews shall cover business line mapping and allocation of gross income and loans and advances to the regulatory-defined business lines.

          • V. Risk Weighted Assets

            33.A bank must calculate the RWA for operational risk by multiplying the total capital requirement for operational risk as calculated above by the factor 12.5:

            Operational Risk RWA = Capital Charge × 12.5
             

          • VI. Shari’ah Implementation

            34.Banks offering Islamic financial services engaging in Shari’ah with respect to operational risks as approved by their internal Shari’ah control committees should calculate the Operational risk capital in accordance with provisions set out in this standard/guidance and in the manner acceptable by Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidance in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services

      • Pillar 2

        • XI. Pillar 2 – Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)

          • I. Introduction and Scope

            1.This Standard discusses the key principles of supervisory review, with respect to banking risks, including guidance relating to, among other things, the treatment of interest rate risk in the banking book, credit risk (stress testing, residual risk, and credit concentration risk), operational risk, enhanced cross-border communication and cooperation, and securitisation.

            2.Banks are only permitted to perform a Pillar I Plus approach. Internal models are not allowed in ICAAP for estimating capital requirements for credit, market or operational risk. For risk management purposes, banks may use internal models, but figures reported to the Central Bank should be based on the Standardised Approach.

            3.All buffers are to be in addition to existing requirements. An off-setting of certain requirements is not permitted i.e. lower Pillar 2 for Pillar 1 risks are not allowed.

            4.The type of capital which the Central Bank will require banks to provide for pillar 2 risks will be solely at the discretion of the Central Bank; this may be CET1 only, or a mix between CET1, AT1 and Tier 2.

            5.It should be noted that given a normal business model the capital risk charge for Pillar 2 should always be positive if the risk exists (in particular for the IRRBB and Concentration risk).

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other regulations and standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a.Concentration risk is the potential for a loss in value of an investment portfolio of a bank when an individual or group of exposures move together in an unfavorable direction.
            2. b.Cyber risk means any risk of financial loss, disruption or damage to the reputation of an organisation from some sort of failure of its information technology systems.
            3. c.Management information system, or MIS: Any process, systems or framework used by an institution to collect, store or disseminate data in the form of useful information to the relevant stakeholders for decision-making.
            4. d.Operational Risk: The risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems or from external events. This definition includes legal risk but excludes strategic and reputational risk.
          • III. Importance of Supervisory Review

            6.The supervisory review process, as set forth by the Central Bank, is intended not only to ensure that banks in the UAE have adequate capital to support all the risks in their business, but also to encourage banks to develop and use better risk management techniques in monitoring and managing risks.

            7.The supervisory review process recognises the responsibility of bank management in developing an internal capital assessment process and setting minimum capital requirements that are commensurate with the bank’s risk profile and control environment. Bank management continues to bear responsibility for ensuring that the bank has adequate capital to support its risks beyond the core minimum requirements in Pillar 1.

            8.The Central Bank will evaluate how well banks are assessing their capital needs relative to their risks and intervene, where appropriate. This interaction is intended to foster an active dialogue between banks, the Central Bank such that when deficiencies are identified, prompt, and decisive action can be taken to reduce risk or restore capital.

            9.The Central Bank recognises the relationship that exists between the amount of capital held by the bank against its risks and the strength and effectiveness of the bank’s risk management and internal control processes. However, increased capital must not be viewed as sufficient for addressing increased risks confronting the bank. Other, complementary, means for addressing risk, such as strengthening risk management, applying internal limits, strengthening the level of provisions and reserves, and improving internal controls, must also be considered as complimentary measures. Furthermore, capital must not be regarded as a substitute for addressing fundamentally inadequate control or risk management processes. However, the Central Bank may require banks to hold more capital to compensate for deficiencies.

            10.There are three main areas that will be particularly suited for its treatment under Pillar 2: risks considered under Pillar 1 that are not fully captured by the Pillar 1 framework (e.g. credit concentration risk); those factors not taken into account by the Pillar 1 framework (e.g. interest rate risk in the banking book, business and strategic risk); and factors external to the bank (e.g. business cycle effects). A further important aspect of Pillar 2 is the assessment of compliance with the minimum standards and disclosure requirements of the more advanced methods in Pillar 1. The Central Bank will ensure that these requirements are being met, both as qualifying criteria and on a continuing basis. The quality of risk management will also be considered and any shortcoming may warrant a capital add-on by the bank or by the Central Bank.

          • IV. Four Key Principles of Supervisory Review

            11.The Central Bank has followed the international standards23 set out by the BCBS and identified four key principles of supervisory review.

            Principle 1: Banks must have a process for assessing their overall capital adequacy in relation to their risk profile and a strategy for maintaining their capital levels.

            12.Banks must be able to demonstrate that the decided minimum capital levels are well founded and that these levels are consistent with their overall risk profile and current operating environment. In assessing capital adequacy, bank management needs to be mindful of the particular stage of the business cycle in which the bank is operating. Rigorous forward-looking stress testing that identifies possible events or changes in market conditions that could adversely affect the bank must be performed. Bank management clearly bears the responsibility for ensuring that the bank has adequate capital to support its risks.

            13.The seven main features of a rigorous process are as follows:

            1. i.Active board and senior management oversight;
            2. ii.Appropriate policies, methodologies for assessment of capital needs, procedures and limits;
            3. iii.Sound capital assessment;
            4. iv.Comprehensive and timely identification, measurement, mitigation, controlling, monitoring and reporting of risks;
            5. v.Appropriate management information systems (MIS) at the business and firm-wide level;
            6. vi.Comprehensive internal controls;
            7. vii.For the completion of ICAAP, regulatory requirements (Pillar I) is required as the first step of computation.

            It should also be noted that under no circumstances could Pillar I and Pillar II be netted against each other. They are both separate requirements.


            23 BCBS128 and BCBS157

            • A. Board and Senior Management Oversight

              14.It is the responsibility of the Board of Directors and senior management to define the bank’s risk appetite and to ensure that the bank’s risk management framework includes detailed policies and methodologies that set specific firm-wide prudential limits on the bank’s activities, which are consistent with its risk taking appetite and capacity. In order to determine the overall risk appetite, the board and senior management must first have an understanding of risk exposures on a firm-wide basis. To achieve this understanding, senior management must bring together the perspectives of the key business and control functions. In order to develop an integrated firm-wide perspective on risk, senior management must overcome organisational silos between business lines and share information on market developments, risks and risk mitigation techniques. Senior management must establish a risk management process that is not limited to credit, market, liquidity and operational risks, but incorporates all material risks. This includes reputational, legal, anti-money laundering, conduct risk and strategic risks, as well as risks that do not appear to be significant in isolation, but when combined with other risks could lead to material losses. The analysis of a bank’s current and future capital requirements in relation to its strategic objectives is a vital element of the strategic planning process. The strategic plan must clearly outline the bank’s capital needs, anticipated capital depletion expenditures, minimum internally assessed required capital level, and external capital sources. Senior management and the board must view capital planning as a crucial element in being able to achieve its desired strategic objectives.

              15.The board of directors and senior management must possess sufficient knowledge of all major business lines to ensure that appropriate policies, controls and risk monitoring systems are effective. They must have the necessary expertise to understand the capital markets activities in which the bank is involved – such as securitisation and off-balance sheet activities – and the associated risks. The board and senior management must remain informed on an on-going basis about these risks as financial markets, risk management practices and the bank’s activities evolve. In addition, the board and senior management must ensure that accountability and lines of authority are clearly defined.

              16.With respect to new or complex products and activities, senior management must understand the underlying assumptions regarding business models, valuation and risk management practices. In addition, senior management must evaluate the potential risk exposure if those assumptions fail.

              17.Before embarking on new activities or introducing products new to the bank, the board and senior management must identify and review the changes in firm-wide risks arising from these potential new products or activities and ensure that the infrastructure and internal controls necessary to manage the related risks are in place. In this review, a bank must also consider and address the possible difficulty in valuing the new products and how they might perform in a stressed economic environment. It is also the responsibility of the banks to assess prudential and market conduct risks when reviewing new products or activities.

              18.A bank’s risk function and its Chief Risk Officer (CRO) or equivalent position must be independent of the individual business lines and report directly to the bank’s Board of Directors. In addition, the risk function must highlight to senior management and the board risk management concerns, such as risk concentrations, violations of risk appetite limits as well as violations of minimum internally set capital requirements.

            • B. Appropriate Policies, Procedures and Limits

              19.Firm-wide risk management programmes must include detailed policies that set specific firm-wide prudential limits on the principal risks relevant to a bank’s activities. Additionally, a bank must have a clearly defined risk appetite for market conduct risk (non-prudential risks). A bank’s policies and procedures must provide specific guidance for the implementation of broad business strategies and must establish, where appropriate, internal limits for the various types of risk to which the bank may be exposed. These limits must consider the bank’s role in the financial system and be defined in relation to the bank’s capital, total assets, and earnings or, where adequate measures exist, its overall risk level.

              20.A bank’s policies, procedures and limits must:

              1. i.Provide for adequate and timely identification, measurement, monitoring, control and mitigation of the risks (prudential and market conduct risks) posed by its lending, investing, trading, securitisation, off-balance sheet, fiduciary and other significant activities at the business line and firm wide levels;
              2. ii.Ensure that the economic substance of a bank’s risk exposures, including reputational risk and valuation uncertainty, are fully recognised and incorporated into the bank’s risk management processes;
              3. iii.Be consistent with the bank’s stated requirements and objectives, as well as its overall financial strength;
              4. iv.Clearly define accountability and lines of authority across the bank’s various business activities, and ensure there is a clear separation between business lines and the risk management function;
              5. v.Escalate and address breaches of internal position limits;
              6. vi.Provide for the review of new businesses and products by bringing together all relevant risk management, control and business lines to ensure that the bank is able to manage and control the activity prior to it being initiated; and
              7. vii.Include a schedule and process for reviewing the policies, procedures and limits and for updating them as appropriate.
            • C. Sound Capital Assessment

              21.Fundamental elements of sound capital assessment include:

              1. i.Policies, procedures and methodologies designed to ensure that the bank identifies, measures, and reports all material risks;
              2. ii.A process that relates capital to the level of risk;
              3. iii.A process that states capital adequacy requirements (i.e. minimum thresholds for CAR ratio) with respect to risk, taking account of the bank’s strategic focus and business plan; and
              4. iv.A process of internal controls, reviews and audits to ensure the integrity of the overall management process.
            • D. Comprehensive Assessment of Risks

              22.All material risks faced by the bank must be addressed in the capital assessment process. While the Central Bank recognises that not all risks can be measured precisely, a process must be developed to estimate risks. Therefore, the following risk exposures, which by no means constitute a comprehensive list of all risks, must be considered:

              23.Credit risk: Banks must have methodologies that enable them to assess the credit risk involved in exposures to individual borrowers or counterparties as well as at the portfolio level. For banks, the credit review assessment of capital adequacy, at a minimum, must cover four areas: risk rating systems, portfolio analysis/aggregation, securitisation/complex credit derivatives, and large exposures and risk concentrations.

              24.Internal risk ratings are an important tool in monitoring credit risk. Internal risk ratings must be adequate to support the identification and measurement of risk from all credit exposures, and must be integrated into a banks’ overall analysis of credit risk and capital adequacy. The ratings system must provide detailed ratings for all assets, not only for watch list or for problem assets. Appropriateness of loan loss reserves must be included in the credit risk assessment for capital adequacy.

              25.The analysis of credit risk must adequately identify any weaknesses at the portfolio level, including any concentrations of risk. It must also adequately take into consideration the risks involved in managing credit concentrations and other portfolio issues through such mechanisms as securitisation programmes and complex credit derivatives.

              26.Operational risk: The failure to properly manage operational risk can result in a misstatement of a bank’s risk/return profile and expose the bank to significant losses.

              27.A bank must develop a framework for managing operational risk (including cyber risk) and evaluate the adequacy of capital given this framework. The framework must cover the bank’s appetite and tolerance for operational risk, as specified through the policies for managing this risk, including the extent and manner in which operational risk is transferred outside the bank. It must also include policies outlining the bank’s approach to identifying, assessing, monitoring and controlling/mitigating the risk.

              28.Market risk: Banks must have methodologies that enable them to assess and actively manage all market risks, wherever they arise, at position, desk, business line and firm-wide level. For banks, their assessment of internal capital adequacy for market risk, at a minimum, must be based on stress testing, including an assessment of concentration risk and the assessment of illiquidity under stressful market scenarios, although all firms’ assessments must include stress testing appropriate to their trading activity.

              29.A bank must demonstrate that it has enough capital to not only meet the minimum capital requirements but also to withstand a range of severe but plausible market shocks. In particular, it must factor in, where appropriate:

              1. i.Illiquidity of prices;
              2. ii.Concentrated positions (in relation to market turnover);
              3. iii.One-way markets;
              4. iv.Non-linear products/deep out-of-the money positions;
              5. v.Events and jumps-to-defaults;
              6. vi.Significant shifts in correlations;

              30.The stress tests applied by a bank for market risk and, in particular, the calibration of those tests (e.g. the parameters of the shocks or types of events considered) must be reconciled back to a clear statement setting out the premise upon which the bank’s internal capital assessment is based (e.g. ensuring there is adequate capital to manage the traded portfolios within stated limits through what may be a prolonged period of market stress and illiquidity, or that there is adequate capital to ensure that, over a given time horizon to a specified confidence level, all positions can be liquidated or the risk hedged in an orderly fashion). The market shocks applied in the tests must reflect the nature of portfolios and the time it could take to hedge out or manage risks under severe market conditions.

              31.Concentration risk must be pro-actively managed and assessed by firms and concentrated positions must be routinely reported to senior management.

              32.Banks must demonstrate how they combine their risk measurement approaches to arrive at the overall internal capital for market risk.

              33.Interest rate risk in the banking book: The measurement process must include all material interest rate positions of the bank and consider all relevant repricing and maturity data, including modelling maturity assumptions. Such information will generally include current balance and contractual rate of interest associated with the instruments and portfolios, principal payments, interest reset dates, maturities, the rate index used for repricing, and contractual interest rate ceilings or floors for adjustable-rate items. The system must also have well-documented assumptions and techniques.

              34.Regardless of the type and level of complexity of the measurement system used, bank management must ensure the adequacy and completeness of the system. Because the quality and reliability of the measurement system is largely dependent on the various assumptions used in the model which will be checked by the Central Bank for reasonability, management must give particular attention to these items.

              35.Liquidity risk: Liquidity is crucial to the ongoing viability of any banking organisation. Banks’ capital positions can have an effect on their ability to obtain liquidity, especially in a crisis. Each bank must have adequate systems for measuring, monitoring and controlling liquidity risk. Banks must evaluate the adequacy of capital given their own liquidity profile and the liquidity of the markets in which they operate. Please refer to the Regulation regarding Liquidity Risk Circular No: 33/2015

              36.Other risks: Although the Central Bank recognises that ‘other’ risks, such as reputational, strategic and anti-money laundering, are not easily measurable, it expects banks to further develop techniques for managing all aspects of these risks.

              • E. Monitoring and Reporting

                37.The bank must establish an adequate system for monitoring and reporting risk exposures and assessing how the bank’s changing risk profile affects the need for capital. The bank’s senior management or board of directors must, on a regular basis, receive reports on the bank’s risk profile and capital needs. These reports must allow senior management to:

                1. i.Evaluate the level and trend of material risks and their effect on capital levels;
                2. ii.Evaluate the sensitivity and reasonableness of key assumptions used in the capital assessment measurement system;
                3. iii.Determine whether the bank holds sufficient capital against the various risks and is in compliance with established internal capital adequacy requirements; and
                4. iv.Assess its future capital requirements based on the bank’s reported risk profile (3 to 5 years) and make necessary adjustments to the bank’s strategic plan accordingly as well as the effect of any anticipated changes to regulatory requirements.

                38.A bank’s MIS must provide the board and senior management in a clear and concise manner with timely and relevant information concerning their bank’ risk profile. This information must include all risk exposures, including those that are off-balance sheet. Management must understand the assumptions behind and limitations inherent in specific risk measures.

                39.The key elements necessary for the aggregation of risks are an appropriate infrastructure and MIS that (i) allow for the aggregation of exposures and risk measures across business lines and (ii) support customised identification of concentrations and emerging risks. MIS developed to achieve this objective must support the ability to evaluate the impact of various types of economic and financial shocks that affect the whole bank. Further, a bank’s systems must be flexible enough to incorporate hedging and other risk mitigation actions to be carried out on a firm-wide basis while taking into account the various related basis risks.

                40.To enable proactive management of risk, the board and senior management need to ensure that MIS is capable of providing regular, accurate and timely information on the bank’s aggregate risk profile, as well as the main assumptions used for risk aggregation. MIS must be adaptable and responsive to changes in the bank’s underlying risk assumptions and must incorporate multiple perspectives of risk exposure to account for uncertainties in risk measurement. In addition, it must be sufficiently flexible so that the bank can generate forward-looking bank-wide scenario analyses that capture management’s interpretation of evolving market conditions and stressed conditions. Third-party inputs or other tools used within MIS (e.g. credit ratings, risk measures, models) must be subject to initial and ongoing validation.

                41.Banks are required that their MIS must be capable of capturing limit breaches and there must be procedures in place to promptly report such breaches to senior management, as well as to ensure that appropriate follow-up actions are taken. For instance, similar exposures must be aggregated across business platforms (including the banking and trading books) to determine whether there is a concentration or a breach of an internal position limit.

              • F. Internal Control Review

                42.The bank’s internal control structure is essential to the capital assessment process. Effective control of the capital assessment process includes an independent review and, where appropriate, the involvement of internal and external audit. The bank’s board of directors has a responsibility to ensure that management establishes a system for assessing the various risks, develops a system to relate risk to the bank’s capital level, and establishes a method for monitoring compliance with internal policies. The board must regularly verify whether its system of internal controls is adequate to ensure well-ordered and prudent conduct of business.

                43.Risk management processes must be frequently monitored and tested by independent control areas and internal, as well as external, auditors. The aim is to ensure that the information on which decisions are based is accurate so that processes fully reflect management policies and that regular reporting, including the reporting of limit breaches and other exception-based reporting, is undertaken effectively. The risk management function of banks must be independent of the business lines in order to ensure an adequate separation of duties and to avoid conflicts of interest.

                44.The purpose of periodic reviews of the risk management process is to ensure its integrity, accuracy, and reasonableness. Areas that the Central Bank will review include:

                1. i.Appropriateness of the bank’s capital assessment process given the nature, scope and complexity of its activities;
                2. ii.Identification of large exposures and risk concentrations;
                3. iii.Accuracy and completeness of data inputs into the bank’s assessment process;
                4. iv.Reasonableness and validity of scenarios used in the assessment process (scenarios and modelling assumptions behind banks’ response to those scenarios); and
                5. v.Stress testing and analysis of assumptions and inputs together with the resultant outputs.
                6. vi.Validation of the output (not only of the process) with proper benchmarking to peers and best practice.

                Principle 2: The Central Bank will review and evaluate banks’ internal capital adequacy assessments and strategies, as well as their ability to monitor and ensure their compliance with regulatory capital Ratios. The Central Bank will take appropriate supervisory action if it is not satisfied with the result of this process.

                45.The Central Bank will regularly review the process by which a bank assesses its capital adequacy, risk position, resulting minimum required capital levels, and quality of capital held. The Central Bank will also evaluate the degree to which a bank has in place a sound internal process to assess capital adequacy. The emphasis of the review must be on the quality of the bank’s risk management and controls with the Central Bank setting the minimum required capital. The periodic review can involve some combination of:

                1. i.On-site examinations or inspections;
                2. ii.Off-site review;
                3. iii.Discussions with bank management;
                4. iv.Review of work done by internal auditors and where appropriate external auditors;
                5. v.Periodic reporting; and

                46.The substantial impact that errors in the methodology or assumptions of formal analyses can have on resulting capital requirements requires a detailed review by the Central Bank of each bank’s internal analysis. The Central Bank will have its own methodologies to benchmark the outcomes of the ICAAP and, if necessary, impose additional capital requirements.

              • Supervisory Review Process

                • A. Review of Adequacy of Risk Assessment

                  47.The Central Bank will assess the degree to which internal requirements and processes incorporate the full range of material risks faced by the bank. The Central Bank will also review the adequacy of risk measures used in assessing internal capital adequacy and the extent to which these risk measures are also used operationally in setting limits, evaluating business line performance, and evaluating and controlling risks more generally. In addition, the Central Bank will review the results of stress tests (including sensitivity analyses and scenario analyses) conducted by the banks and how these results relate to capital plans.

                • B. Assessment of Capital Adequacy

                  48.The Central Bank will review the bank’s processes to determine that:

                  1. i.Minimum capital requirements chosen are comprehensive and relevant to the current operating environment and the risk profile of the bank;
                  2. ii.Minimum capital requirements are properly monitored and reviewed by senior management; and
                  3. iii.The composition of capital is appropriate for the nature and scale of the bank’s business.

                  49.The Central Bank will also consider the extent to which the bank has provided for unexpected events in setting its minimum capital requirements. This analysis must cover a wide range of external conditions and scenarios, and the sophistication of techniques and stress tests used must be commensurate with the bank’s activities.

                • C. Assessment of the Control Environment

                  50.The Central Bank will consider the quality of the bank’s management information reporting and systems, the manner in which business risks and activities are aggregated, and management’s record in responding to emerging or changing risks.

                  51.In all instances, the capital requirement at an individual bank must be determined according to the bank’s risk profile and adequacy of its risk management process and internal controls. External factors such as business cycle effects and the macroeconomic environment must also be considered. Another consideration is the variability in a bank’s profitability in normal circumstances.

                • D. The Central Bank’s Review of the Regulatory Framework

                  52.In order for certain internal methodologies (e.g. VaR), credit risk mitigation techniques and asset securitisations to be recognised for regulatory capital purposes, banks will need to meet a number of requirements, including risk management standards and disclosures. In particular, banks will be required to disclose features of their internal methodologies used in calculating minimum capital requirements. As part of the supervisory review process, the Central Bank will ensure that these conditions are met on an ongoing basis.

                  53.The Central Bank regards this review of as an integral part of the supervisory review process under Principle 2.

                  54.The Central Bank will also perform a review of compliance with certain conditions and requirements set for standardised approaches.

                  Principle 3: The Central Bank expects banks to operate above the minimum regulatory capital ratios and may require banks to hold capital in excess of the minimum.

                  55.The Central Bank will take appropriate action if it is not satisfied with the results of the bank’s own risk assessment and capital allocation or with the minimum capital levels as determined by the bank. The Central Bank will add additional capital requirements where the Central Bank is not satisfied that all risks have been identified. Important to note is that banks shall not disclose this publicly.

                  56.Pillar 1 capital requirements shall include a buffer for uncertainties surrounding the Pillar 1 regime that affect the banking population as a whole. Bank-specific uncertainties will be treated under Pillar 2. The Central Bank require banks to operate with a buffer, over and above the Pillar 1 standards. Banks must maintain this buffer for example:

                  1. i.Pillar 1 minimums are anticipated to be set to achieve a level of bank creditworthiness in markets that is below the level of creditworthiness sought by many banks for their own reasons. For example, most international banks appear to prefer to have low risk profile and thus be highly rated by internationally recognised rating agencies. This is currently the case in the UAE. Thus, banks are likely to choose to operate above Pillar 1 minimums for competitive reasons.
                  2. ii.In the normal course of business, the type and volume of activities will change, as will the different risk exposures, causing fluctuations in the overall capital ratio.
                  3. iii.It may be costly for banks to raise additional capital, especially if this needs to be done quickly or at a time when market conditions are unfavourable.
                  4. iv.For banks to fall below minimum regulatory capital requirements is a serious matter. It will place banks in breach of the relevant law and/or prompt nondiscretionary corrective action on the part of supervisors such as withdrawal of license.
                  5. v.There may be risks, either specific to individual banks, or more generally to an economy at large, that are not taken into account in Pillar 1. The Central Bank uses its own internal benchmarks and may request banks at any time for additional data to calculate an add-on.

                  57.There are several means available to the Central Bank for ensuring that individual banks are operating with adequate levels of capital. Among other methods, the Central Bank may set higher minimum capital requirements or define categories above minimum ratios (e.g. well capitalised and adequately capitalised) for identifying the capitalisation level of the bank.

                  Principle 4: The Central Bank will intervene at an early stage to prevent capital from falling below the minimum levels required to support the risk characteristics of a particular bank and will require rapid remedial action if capital is not maintained or restored.

                  58.The Central Bank will consider a range of options if it becomes concerned that a bank is not meeting the requirements embodied in the supervisory principles outlined above. These actions may trigger the recovery plan that includes and not limited to intensifying the monitoring of the bank, restricting the payment of dividends, requiring the bank to prepare and implement a satisfactory capital adequacy restoration plan, and requiring the bank to raise additional capital immediately. The Central Bank have the discretion to use the tools best suited to the circumstances of the bank and its operating environment.

                  59.The permanent solution to banks’ difficulties is not exclusively increased capital. However, some of the required measures (such as improving systems and controls) may take some time to implement. Therefore, increased capital requirements might be used as an interim measure while permanent measures to improve the bank’s position are being put in place. Once these permanent measures have been put in place and have been seen by the Central Bank to be effective, the interim increase in capital requirements may be removed.

          • V. Specific Issues to be Addressed Under the Supervisory Review Process

            60.Below are a few important issues that the Central Bank will particularly focus on when carrying out the supervisory review process. These issues include some key risks that are not directly addressed under Pillar 1.

            • A. Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book

              61.Interest rate risk in the banking book is a potentially significant risk that requires capital. There is considerable heterogeneity across UAE banks in terms of the nature of the underlying risk and the processes for monitoring and managing it. In light of this, the Central Bank considers it is most appropriate to treat interest rate risk in the banking book under Pillar 2 of the Framework.

              62.To facilitate the Central Bank’s monitoring of interest rate risk exposures across banks, banks would have to provide the results of their internal measurement systems, expressed in terms of both, economic value and net interest income, relative to capital, using a standardised interest rate shock as described in the accompanying guidance document.

              63.If the Central Bank determines that banks are not holding capital commensurate with the level of interest rate risk, they must require the bank to reduce its risk, to hold a specific additional amount of capital or some combination of the two.

            • B. Stress Tests

              64.A bank should ensure that it has sufficient capital to meet the Pillar 1 requirements and the results (where a deficiency has been indicated) of the credit risk stress test performed. The Central Bank will review how the stress test has been carried out.

              65.Central bank will use the reference model to challenge the stress test results Reference model is based on +/- 200 basis point shock based on NII and EVE. Central Bank assumes a higher basis point for stress testing which is described in the accompanying guidance document.

              66.The results of the stress test will thus contribute directly to the expectation that a bank will operate above the Pillar 1 minimum regulatory capital ratios. The outcome of the Central Bank stress tests will be used as a benchmark. If there is an impact of more than 200bps, the Central Bank will require setting higher minimum capital requirements so that capital resources could cover the Pillar 1 requirements plus the result of a recalculated stress test.

            • C. Residual Risk

              67.This section allows banks to offset credit or counterparty risk with collateral, guarantees or credit derivatives, leading to reduced capital charges in Pillar 1. While banks use credit risk mitigation (CRM) techniques to reduce their credit risk, these techniques give rise to risks that may render the overall risk reduction less effective. Accordingly, these risks (e.g. operational risk or liquidity risk) to which banks are exposed are of supervisory concern. Where such risks arise, and irrespective of fulfilling the minimum requirements set out in Pillar 1, a bank could find itself with greater credit risk exposure to the underlying counterparty than it had expected. Examples of these risks include:

              1. i.Inability to seize, or realise in a timely manner, collateral pledged (on default of the counterparty);
              2. ii.Refusal or delay by a guarantor to pay; and
              3. iii.Ineffectiveness of untested documentation.

              68.The Central Bank will require banks to have in place appropriate written CRM policies and procedures in order to control these residual risks. A bank may be required to submit these policies and procedures to the Central Bank and must regularly review their appropriateness, effectiveness and operation.

              69.In its CRM policies and procedures, a bank must consider whether, when calculating capital requirements, it is appropriate to give the full recognition of the value of the credit risk mitigant as permitted in Pillar 1 and must demonstrate that its CRM management policies and procedures are appropriate to the level of capital benefit that it is recognising. Where the Central Bank is not satisfied as to the robustness, suitability or application of these policies and procedures they may direct the bank to take immediate remedial action or hold additional capital against residual risk until the deficiencies in the CRM procedures are rectified to the satisfaction of the Central Bank. For example, the Central Bank may direct a bank to:

              1. i.Make adjustments to the assumptions on holding periods, supervisory haircuts, or volatility (in the own haircuts approach);
              2. ii.Give less than full recognition of credit risk mitigants (on the whole credit portfolio or by specific product line); and/or
              3. iii.Hold a specific additional amount of capital.
            • D. Risk Concentration

              70.Unmanaged risk and excessive concentrations are an important cause of major problems in banks. A bank must aggregate all similar direct and indirect exposures regardless of where the exposures have been booked. A risk concentration is any single exposure or group of similar exposures (e.g. to the same borrower or counterparty, including protection providers, geographic area, industry or other risk factors) with the potential to produce (i) losses large enough (relative to a bank’s earnings, capital, total assets or overall risk level) to threaten a bank’s creditworthiness or ability to maintain its core operations or (ii) a change in a bank’s risk profile. Risk concentrations must be analysed on both a bank legal entity and consolidated basis, as an unmanaged concentration at a subsidiary bank may appear immaterial at the consolidated level, but can nonetheless threaten the viability of the subsidiary. A change in the concentration risk is identified as a significant change.

              71.Risk concentrations must be viewed in the context of a single or a set of closely related risk-drivers that may have different impacts on a bank. These concentrations must be integrated when assessing a bank’s overall risk exposure. A bank must consider concentrations that are based on common or correlated risk factors that reflect more subtle or more situation-specific factors than traditional concentrations, such as correlations between market, credit risks and liquidity risk.

              72.The growth of market-based intermediation has increased the possibility that different areas of a bank are exposed to a common set of products, risk factors or counterparties. This has created new challenges for risk aggregation and concentration management. Through its risk management processes and MIS, a bank must be able to identify and aggregate similar risk exposures across the firm, including across legal entities, asset types (e.g. loans, derivatives and structured products), risk areas (e.g. the trading book) and geographic regions. The typical situations in which risk concentrations can arise include:

              1. i.Exposures to a single counterparty, borrower or group of connected counterparties or borrowers;
              2. ii.Industry or economic sectors, including exposures to both regulated and nonregulated financial institutions such as hedge funds and private equity firms;
              3. iii.Geographical regions;
              4. iv.Exposures arising from credit risk mitigation techniques, including exposure to similar collateral types or to a single or closely related credit protection provider;
              5. v.Trading exposures;
              6. vi.Exposures to counterparties (e.g. hedge funds and hedge counterparties) through the execution or processing of transactions (either product or service);
              7. vii.Assets that are held in the banking book or trading book, such as loans, derivatives and structured products; and
              8. viii.Off-balance sheet exposures, including guarantees, liquidity lines and other commitments.

              73.Risk concentrations can also arise through a combination of exposures across these broad categories. A bank must have an understanding of its firm-wide risk concentrations resulting from similar exposures across its different business lines.

              74.While risk concentrations often arise due to direct exposures to borrowers and obligors, a bank may also incur a concentration to a particular asset type indirectly through investments backed by such assets (e.g. collateralised debt obligations – CDOs), as well as exposure to protection providers guaranteeing the performance of the specific asset type (e.g. monoline insurers). A bank must have in place adequate, systematic procedures for identifying high correlation between the creditworthiness of a protection provider and the obligors of the underlying exposures due to their performance being dependent on common factors beyond systematic risk (i.e. “wrong way risk”).

              75.Procedures must be in place to communicate risk concentrations to the board of directors and senior management in a manner that clearly indicates where in the organisation each segment of a risk concentration resides. A bank must have credible risk mitigation strategies in place that have senior management approval. This may include altering business strategies, reducing limits or increasing minimum capital requirements in line with the desired risk profile. While it implements risk mitigation strategies, the bank must be aware of possible concentrations that might arise because of employing risk mitigation techniques.

              76.Banks must employ a number of techniques, as appropriate, to measure risk concentrations. These techniques include shocks to various risk factors; use of business level and firm-wide scenarios; and the use of integrated stress testing and economic capital models. The Central Bank will use the reference model to challenge the credit concentration risk. The reference model is based on Herfindahl-Hirschman index (HHI), therefore the Central Bank requires all the banks to calculate and report the credit concentration risk using Herfindahl-Hirschman Index (HHI) methodology (single name and sector concentration) to be part of ICAAP document irrespective of the approach chosen by the bank. Identified concentrations must be measured in a number of ways, including for example, consideration of gross versus net exposures, use of notional amounts, and analysis of exposures with and without counterparty hedges. A bank must establish internal position limits for concentrations to which it may be exposed. When conducting periodic stress tests, a bank must incorporate all major risk concentrations and identify and respond to potential changes in market conditions that could adversely have an impact on their performance and capital adequacy.

              77.The assessment of such risks under a bank’s ICAAP and the supervisory review process must not be a mechanical process, but one in which each bank determines, depending on its business model, its own specific vulnerabilities. Every bank must discuss these vulnerabilities with the Central Bank. An appropriate level of capital for risk concentrations must be incorporated in a bank’s ICAAP, as well as in Pillar 2 assessments.

              78.A bank must have in place effective internal policies, systems and controls to identify, measure, monitor, manage, control and mitigate its risk concentrations in a timely manner. Not only must normal market conditions be considered, but also the potential build-up of concentrations under stressed market conditions, economic downturns and periods of general market illiquidity. In addition, the bank must assess scenarios that consider possible concentrations arising from contractual and non-contractual contingent claims. The scenarios must also combine the potential build-up of pipeline exposures together with the loss of market liquidity and a significant decline in asset values. The Central Bank will use its own benchmarking to determine if banks estimation of additional capital requirements is sufficient.

            • E. Counterparty Credit Risk

              79.Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR) represents a form of credit risk and is covered in Pillar 1.

              80.The bank must have counterparty credit risk management policies, processes and systems that are conceptually sound and implemented with integrity relative to the sophistication and complexity of a firm’s holdings of exposures that give rise to CCR. A sound counterparty credit risk management framework shall include the identification, measurement, management, approval and internal reporting of CCR.

              81.The bank’s risk management policies must take account of the market, liquidity and operational riks that can be associated with CCR and, to the extent practicable, interrelationships among those risks. The bank must not undertake business with a counterparty without assessing its creditworthiness and must take due account of both settlement and pre-settlement credit risk. These risks must be managed as comprehensively as practicable at the counterparty level (aggregating counterparty exposures with other credit exposures) and at the firm-wide level.

              82.The board of directors and senior management must be actively involved in the CCR control process and must regard this as an essential aspect of the business to which significant resources need to be devoted.

              83.The bank’s CCR management system must be used in conjunction with internal credit and trading limits. In this regard, credit and trading limits must be the outcome of the firm’s risk measurement model in a manner that is consistent over time and that is well understood by credit managers, traders and senior management.

              84.The bank must have a routine and rigorous program of stress testing in place as a supplement to the CCR analysis based on the day-to-day output of the bank’s risk measurement model. The results of this stress testing must be reviewed periodically by senior management and must be reflected in the CCR policies and limits set by management and the board of directors. Where stress tests reveal particular vulnerability to a given set of circumstances, management must explicitly consider appropriate risk management strategies (e.g. by hedging against that outcome, or reducing the size of the firm’s exposures).

              85.The bank must have a routine in place for ensuring compliance with a documented set of internal policies, controls and procedures concerning the operation of the CCR management system. The firm’s CCR management system must be well documented, for example, through a risk management manual that describes the basic principles of the risk management system and that provides an explanation of the empirical techniques used to measure CCR.

              86.The bank must conduct an independent review of the CCR management system regularly through its own internal auditing process. This review must include both the activities of the business credit and trading units and of the independent CCR control. A review of the overall CCR management process must take place at regular intervals (ideally not less than once a year) and must specifically address, at a minimum:

              1. i.The adequacy of the documentation of the CCR management system and process;
              2. ii.The organisation of the CCR control;
              3. iii.The integration of CCR measures into daily risk management;
              4. iv.The approval process for risk pricing models and valuation systems used by front and back-office personnel;
              5. v.The validation of any significant change in the CCR measurement process;
              6. vi.The scope of counterparty credit risks captured by the risk measurement model;
              7. vii.The integrity of the management information system;
              8. viii.The accuracy and completeness of CCR data;
              9. ix.The verification of the consistency, timeliness and reliability of data sources used to run internal models, including the independence of such data sources;
              10. x.The accuracy and appropriateness of volatility and correlation assumptions;
              11. xi.The accuracy of valuation and risk transformation calculations;
              12. xii.The verification of the model’s accuracy through frequent back testing.
            • F. Operational Risk

              87.Gross income, used in the Basic Indicator and Standardised Approaches for operational risk, is only a proxy for the scale of operational risk exposure of a bank and can in some cases underestimate the need for capital for operational risk. The Central Bank will consider whether the capital requirement generated by the Pillar 1 calculation gives a consistent picture of the individual bank’s operational risk exposure, for example in comparison with other banks of similar size and with similar operations. The use of Pillar 2 to charge capital for inadequacy in risk management may also be applied by the Central Bank.

              88.A bank offering Islamic financial services must ensure that its operational risk management framework addresses any operational risks arising from potential noncompliance with Sharī’ah provisions and Higher Shari’ah Authority resolutions.

            • G. Market Risk

              Policies and procedures for trading book eligibility

              89.Clear policies and procedures used to determine the exposures that may be included in, and those that must be excluded from, the trading book for purposes of calculating regulatory capital are critical to ensure the consistency and integrity of a bank’s trading book. The Central Bank must be satisfied that the policies and procedures clearly delineate the boundaries of the bank’s trading book and consistent with the bank’s risk management capabilities and practices. The Central Bank must also be satisfied that transfers of positions between banking and trading books can only occur in a very limited set of circumstances. The Central Bank will require a bank to modify its policies and procedures when they prove insufficient with the general principles set forth in this Standard, or not consistent with the bank’s risk management capabilities and practices.
               

              Valuation

              90.Prudent valuation policies and procedures form the foundation on which any robust assessment of market risk capital adequacy must be built. For a well-diversified portfolio consisting of highly liquid cash instruments, and without market concentration, the valuation of the portfolio, combined with the minimum quantitative standards may deliver sufficient capital to enable a bank, in adverse market conditions, to close out or hedge its positions in a quick and orderly fashion. However, for less well diversified portfolios, for portfolios containing less liquid instruments, for portfolios with concentrations in relation to market turnover, and/or for portfolios which contain large numbers of positions that are marked-to-model this is less likely to be the case. In such circumstances, the Central Bank will consider whether a bank has sufficient capital. To the extent, if there is a shortfall, the Central Bank will react appropriately. This will usually require the bank to reduce its risks and set higher minimum capital requirements.
               

            • H. Reputational Risk and Implicit Support

              91.Reputational risk of the bank can be defined as the risk arising from negative perception on the part of customers, counterparties, shareholders, investors, debt-holders, market analysts, other relevant parties or regulators that can adversely affect a bank’s ability to maintain existing, or establish new, business relationships and continued access to sources of funding (e.g. through the interbank or securitisation markets). Reputational risk is multidimensional and reflects the perception of other market participants. Furthermore, it exists throughout the organisation and exposure to reputational risk is essentially a function of the adequacy of the bank’s internal risk management processes, as well as the manner and efficiency with which management responds to external influences on bank-related transactions.

              92.Reputational risk can lead to the provision of implicit support by the bank, which may give rise to credit, liquidity, market and legal risk – all of which can have a negative impact on a bank’s earnings, liquidity and capital position. A bank must identify potential sources of reputational risk to which it is exposed. These include the bank’s business lines, liabilities, affiliated operations, off-balance sheet vehicles and the markets in which it operates. The risks that arise must be incorporated into the bank’s risk management processes and appropriately addressed in its ICAAP and liquidity contingency plans.

              93.A bank must incorporate the exposures that could give rise to reputational risk into its assessments of whether the requirements under the securitisation framework have been met and the potential adverse impact of providing implicit support.

              94.Reputational risk also may affect a bank’s liabilities, since market confidence and a bank’s ability to fund its business are closely related to its reputation. For instance, to avoid damaging its reputation, a bank may call its liabilities even though this might negatively affect its liquidity profile. This is particularly true for liabilities that are components of regulatory capital, such as hybrid/subordinated debt. In such cases, a bank’s capital position is likely to suffer.

              95.Bank management must have appropriate policies in place to identify sources of reputational risk when entering new markets, products or lines of activities. In addition, a bank’s stress testing procedures must take account of reputational risk so management has a firm understanding of the consequences and second round effects of reputational risk.

              96.Once a bank identifies potential exposures arising from reputational concerns, it must measure the amount of support it might have to provide (including implicit support of securitisations) or losses it might experience under adverse market conditions. In particular, in order to avoid reputational damages and to maintain market confidence, a bank must develop methodologies to measure as precisely as possible the effect of reputational risk in terms of other risk types (e.g. credit, liquidity, market or operational risk) to which it may be exposed. This could be accomplished by including reputational risk scenarios in regular stress tests. For instance, non-contractual off-balance sheet exposures could be included in the stress tests to determine the effect on a bank’s credit, market and liquidity risk profiles. Methodologies also could include comparing the actual amount of exposure carried on the balance sheet versus the maximum exposure amount held off-balance sheet, that is, the potential amount to which the bank could be exposed.

              97.A bank must pay particular attention to the effects of reputational risk on its overall liquidity position, taking into account both possible increases in the asset side of the balance sheet and possible restrictions on funding, as well as the loss of reputation as a result in various counterparties’ loss of confidence.

              98.In contrast to contractual credit exposures, such as guarantees, implicit support is a more subtle form of exposure. Implicit support arises when a bank provides post-sale support to a securitisation transaction in excess of any contractual obligation. Such non-contractual support exposes a bank to the risk of loss, such as loss arising from deterioration in the credit quality of the securitisation’s underlying assets.

              99.By providing implicit support, a bank signals to the market that all of the risks inherent in the securitised assets are still held by the organisation and, in effect, had not been transferred. Since the risk arising from the potential provision of implicit support is not captured ex ante under Pillar 1, it must be considered as part of the Pillar 2 process. In addition, the processes for approving new products or strategic initiatives must consider the potential provision of implicit support and must be incorporated in a bank’s ICAAP.

            • I. Market Conduct Risk

              100.This Standard will focus on regulatory supervision of market conduct by the Central Bank. Supervision will rely on the supervisory activities identified in the previous chapters and is supplemented by the follow requirements and activities.

              101.The Central Bank has taken steps to strengthen its regulatory and supervisory framework regarding market conduct of financial institutions by creating a separate Consumer Protection Department (CPD) that will have the resources and mandate to focus on monitoring market conduct, providing regulatory supervision and addressing issues of compliance / enforcement. It also has a mandate to improve consumer financial literacy through consumer education programs and outreach activities.

              Consumer Protection Framework

              102.A Consumer Protection Framework (CPF) is a regulatory and supervisory response designed to protect consumers by establishing standards of market conduct for institutional behaviour to mitigate potential risks of misconduct and protect consumers from harm.
               

              103.Market conduct is defined simply as to how a financial institution conducts itself in the marketplace in terms of the level of integrity, fairness, and competency that it demonstrates in dealing with consumers. It includes the behaviour and actions of a financial institution in the market place involving such matters as:

              1. i.product design, development
              2. ii.marketing and sales practices,
              3. iii.advertising,
              4. iv.compliance with laws,
              5. v.fulfilling its obligations to customers,
              6. vi.treatment of customer’s / dispute resolution,
              7. vii.conflicts of interest,
              8. viii.transparency and disclosure
              9. ix.Market competition, pricing, etc.

              104.The supervisory activities under the CPF are risk-based and requires a comprehensive understanding of the retail operations of the financial institutions; the risks created by the behaviour of these organisations, the risks from products and services offered, and how these risks are being managed. The risk-based approach assesses the nature of the institution’s business activities and the risks that are inherent to each type of activity undertaken. The supervisory framework requires open, transparent and frequent flow of quality data and information between the financial institutions and the Central Bank that allows CPD to effectively perform up-to-date market conduct assessments.

              Importance of Supervisory Review – Market Conduct

              105.Many of the supervisory requirements discussed in previous sections of these Standards fully apply to the supervision of market conduct. However, supervision of market conduct adds another dimension and perspective in regulatory supervision. The additional supervisory concerns are highlighted as follows.
               

              Board and Senior Management Oversight

              106.In addition to the previous chapters, it is expected that effective reporting occur quarterly regarding any compliance issues regarding retail operations, analysis of consumer complaints / trends and identification of systemic issues. Boards should be confident that its retail workers have had the training and qualification to fulfil their responsibilities and regulatory responsibilities and those effective verifications are carried out.
               

              Appropriate Policies, Procedures and Limits:

              107.More specifically, market conduct will focus on policies, procedures, practices and related training associated with product design, development, distribution, marketing, advertising and sales. The Central Bank will evaluate the same elements for third parties carrying out outsourced retail activities.
               

              Comprehensive Risk Assessment:

              Operational Risk:

              108.The financial institution must have a framework for monitoring, identifying and mitigating market conduct risks association with business lines and the products and services offered at the retail level. This includes identifying risks associated with institutional errors or misconduct. Risk analysis must consider such activities including product design, development, marketing, pricing, distribution, sales, advertising, disclosure, suitability, affordability, product assumptions and accuracy / method of calculations, fraud, technology downtime, etc. Institutions must also evaluate the risks related to third party distributors, suppliers / contractors.

              109.An important differentiation from prudent supervision is the matter of materiality. It is not the basis for mitigating conduct risks in the retail market place. The regulatory concerns are on proactive mitigation of risks with the objectives of promoting consumer confident in the integrity of the market place, preventing harm done to the consumer and ensuring proper dispute resolution and redress where there is harm.

              Reputational Risks:

              110.The institution must also evaluate the impact that a risk event in the retail operations may have on its reputation in the market place, (a) whether it is an event of significant misselling or improper disclosure or calculation errors, these may be systemic issues that will attract regulatory actions, may attract public awareness and media attention and (b) what measures will the institution have in place to mitigate this risk and associated response by consumers.

              Monitoring and Reporting:

              111.Institutions are expected to have an adequate system for monitoring and reporting on their retails operations. The bank’s senior management or board of directors must, ensure proper monitoring and reporting including risk analysis and trends in consumer inquires and complaints. Reporting to the board should evaluate the quality and frequency of training of front line staff; the proper qualifications of staff to sell or market products, the meeting of performance indicators, the identification and frequency of bank errors, compliance with regulatory requirements and other matters of conduct risk.

              112.Financial institutions will provide timely and accurate information as requested by the Central Bank including complaint information as required by the Central Bank as per Notice 383/2017 regarding setting up a Complaint Unit.

              113.Financial institutions will provide notice to the Central Bank of any material changes and/or important issues that may affect consumers or the retail operations of the financial institution.

            • J. Liquidity Risk Management and Supervision

              114.The financial market crisis underscores the importance of assessing the potential impact of liquidity risk on capital adequacy in a bank’s ICAAP. Senior management must consider the relationship between liquidity and capital since liquidity risk can affect capital adequacy, which, in turn, can aggravate a bank’s liquidity profile.

              115.Another facet of liquidity risk management is that a bank must appropriately price the costs, benefits and risks of liquidity into the internal pricing, performance measurement, and new product approval process of all significant business activities.

              116.A bank is expected to be able to thoroughly identify, measure and control liquidity risks, especially with regard to complex products and contingent commitments (both contractual and non-contractual). This process must involve the ability to project cash flows arising from assets, liabilities and off-balance sheet items over various time horizons, and must ensure diversification in both the tenor and source of funding. A bank must utilise early warning indicators to identify the emergence of increased risk or vulnerabilities in its liquidity position or funding needs. It must have the ability to control liquidity risk exposure and funding needs, regardless of its organisation structure, within and across legal entities, business lines, and currencies, taking into account any legal, regulatory and operational limitations to the transferability of liquidity.

              117.A bank’s failure to effectively manage intraday liquidity could leave it unable to meet its payment obligations at the time expected, which could lead to liquidity dislocations that cascade quickly across many systems and institutions. As such, the bank’s management of intraday liquidity risks must be considered as a crucial part of liquidity risk management. It must also actively manage its collateral positions and have the ability to calculate all of its collateral positions.

              118.While banks typically manage liquidity under “normal” circumstances, they must also be prepared to manage liquidity under stressed conditions. A bank must perform stress tests or scenario analyses on a regular basis in order to identify and quantify their exposures to possible future liquidity stresses, analysing possible impacts on the bank’s cash flows, liquidity positions, profitability, and solvency. The results of these stress tests must be discussed thoroughly by management, and based on this discussion, must form the basis for taking remedial or mitigating actions to limit the bank’s exposures, build up a liquidity cushion, and adjust its liquidity profile to fit its risk tolerance. The results of stress tests must also play a key role in shaping the bank’s contingency funding planning, which must outline policies for managing a range of stress events and clearly sets out strategies for addressing liquidity shortfalls in emergencies.

              119.The Central Bank’s reserves the right to set higher liquidity requirements in Pillar 2.

            • K. Valuation Practices

              120.In order to enhance the supervisory assessment of banks’ valuation practices, the Basel Committee published Supervisory guidance for assessing banks’ financial instrument fair value practices in April 2009. This guidance applies to all positions that are measured at fair value and at all times, not only during times of stress.

              121.The characteristics of complex structured products as well as simple but illiquid products, including securitisation transactions, make their valuation inherently difficult due, in part, to the absence of active and liquid markets, the complexity and uniqueness of the cash waterfalls, and the links between valuations and underlying risk factors. The absence of a transparent price from a liquid market means that the valuation must rely on models or proxy-pricing methodologies, as well as on expert judgment. The outputs of such models and processes are highly sensitive to the inputs and parameter assumptions adopted, which may themselves be subject to estimation error and uncertainty. Moreover, calibration of the valuation methodologies is often complicated by the lack of readily available benchmarks.

              122.Therefore, a bank is expected to have adequate governance structures and control processes for fair valuing exposures for risk management and financial reporting purposes. The valuation governance structures and related processes must be embedded in the overall governance structure of the bank, and consistent for both risk management and reporting purposes. The governance structures and processes are expected to explicitly cover the role of the board and senior management. In addition, the board must receive reports from senior management on the valuation oversight and valuation model performance issues that are brought to senior management for resolution, as well as all significant changes to valuation policies.

              123.A bank must also have clear and robust governance structures for the production, assignment and verification of financial instrument valuations. Policies must ensure that the approvals of all valuation methodologies are well documented. In addition, policies and procedures must set forth the range of acceptable practices for the initial pricing, marking-to-market/model, valuation adjustments and periodic independent revaluation. New product approval processes (which has to be established in the first place) must include all internal stakeholders relevant to risk measurement, risk management, and the assignment and verification of valuations of financial instruments.

              124.A bank’s control processes for testing and reporting valuations must be consistently applied across the firm and integrated with risk measurement and management processes. In particular, valuation controls must be applied consistently across similar instruments (risks) and consistent across business lines (books). These controls must be subject to internal audit. Regardless of the booking location of a new product, reviews and approval of valuation methodologies must be guided by a minimum set of considerations. Furthermore, the valuation/new product approval process must be supported by a transparent, well-documented inventory of acceptable valuation methodologies that are specific to products and businesses. The Board must be familiar with and approve the basic assumptions behind these methodologies.

              125.In order to establish and verify valuations for instruments and transactions in which it engages, a bank must have adequate capacity, including during periods of stress. This capacity must be commensurate with the importance, riskiness and size of these exposures in the context of the business profile of the bank. In addition, for those exposures that represent material risk, a bank is expected to have the capacity to produce valuations using alternative methods that cannot just solely rely on the valuations provided by its counterparts in the event that primary inputs and approaches become unreliable, unavailable or not relevant due to market discontinuities or illiquidity. A bank must test and review the performance of its models under stress conditions so that it understands the limitations of the models under stress conditions.

              126.The relevance and reliability of valuations is directly related to the quality and reliability of the inputs. Where values are determined to be in an active market, a bank must maximise the use of relevant observable inputs and minimise the use of unobservable inputs when estimating fair value using a valuation technique. However, where a market is deemed inactive, observable inputs or transactions may not be relevant, such as in a forced liquidation or distress sale, or transactions may not be observable, such as when markets are inactive. In such cases, accounting fair value guidance provides assistance on what must be considered, but may not be determinative. In assessing whether a source is reliable and relevant, a bank must consider, among other things:

              1. i.The frequency and availability of the prices/quotes;
              2. ii.Whether those prices represent actual regularly occurring transactions on an arm's length basis;
              3. iii.The breadth of the distribution of the data and whether it is generally available to the relevant participants in the market;
              4. iv.The timeliness of the information relative to the frequency of valuations;
              5. v.The number of independent sources that produce the quotes/prices;
              6. vi.The maturity of the market; and
              7. vii.The similarity between the financial instrument sold in a transaction and the instrument held by the bank.
            • L. Sound Stress Testing Practices

              127.In order to strengthen banks’ stress testing practices, as well as improve supervision of those practices, in October 2018 the Basel Committee published Principles for sound stress testing practices and supervision. Improvements in stress testing alone cannot address all risk management weaknesses, but as part of a comprehensive approach, stress testing has a leading role to play in strengthening bank corporate governance and the resilience of individual banks and the financial system.

              128.Stress testing is an important tool that is used by banks as part of their internal risk management that alerts bank management to adverse unexpected outcomes related to a broad variety of risks, and provides an indication to banks of how much capital might be needed to absorb losses if large shocks occur. Moreover, stress testing supplements other risk management approaches and measures. It plays a particularly important role in:

              1. i.Providing forward looking assessments of risk,
              2. ii.Overcoming limitations of models and historical data,
              3. iii.Supporting internal and external communication,
              4. iv.Feeding into capital and liquidity planning procedures,
              5. v.Informing the setting of a banks’ risk tolerance,
              6. vi.Addressing existing or potential, firm-wide risk concentrations, and
              7. vii.Facilitating the development of risk mitigation or contingency plans across a range of stressed conditions.

              129.Stress testing is especially important after long periods of benign risk, when the fading memory of negative economic conditions can lead to complacency and the underpricing of risk, and when innovation leads to the rapid growth of new products for which there is limited or no loss data.

              130.Stress testing must form an integral part of the overall governance and risk management culture of the bank. Board and senior management involvement in setting stress testing objectives, defining scenarios, discussing the results of stress tests, assessing potential actions and decision making is critical in ensuring the appropriate use of stress testing in banks’ risk governance and capital planning. Senior management must take an active interest in the development and operation of stress testing. The results of stress tests must contribute to strategic decision making and foster internal debate regarding assumptions, such as the cost, risk and speed with which new capital could be raised or that positions could be hedged or sold. Board and senior management involvement in the stress-testing program is essential for its effective operation.

              131.Therefore, a bank’s capital planning process must incorporate rigorous, forward-looking stress testing that identifies possible events or changes in market conditions that could adversely have an impact on the bank. Banks, in their ICAAPs must examine future capital resources and capital requirements under adverse scenarios. In particular, the results of forward-looking stress testing must be considered when evaluating the adequacy of a bank’s capital buffer. Capital adequacy must be assessed under stressed conditions against a variety of capital ratios, including regulatory ratios. In addition, the possibility that a crisis impairs the ability of even very healthy banks to raise funds at reasonable cost must be considered.

              132.In addition, a bank must develop methodologies to measure the effect of reputational risk arising from other risk types, namely credit, liquidity, market and other risks that they may be exposed to in order to avoid reputational damages and in order to maintain market confidence. This could be done by including reputational risk scenarios in regular stress tests. For instance, AML sanctions.

              133.A bank must carefully assess the risks with respect to commitments to off-balance sheet vehicles and third-party firms related to structured credit securities and the possibility that assets will need to be taken on-balance sheet for reputational reasons. Therefore, in its stress-testing programme, a bank must include scenarios assessing the size and soundness of such vehicles and firms relative to its own financial, liquidity and regulatory capital positions. This analysis must include structural, solvency, liquidity and other risk issues, including the effects of covenants and triggers.

              134.The Central Bank will assess the effectiveness of banks’ stress testing programme in identifying relevant vulnerabilities. The Central Bank will review the key assumptions driving stress-testing results and challenge their continuing relevance in view of existing and potentially changing market conditions. The Central Bank will challenge the banks on how stress testing is used and the way it affects decision-making. Where this assessment reveals material shortcomings, the Central Bank will require a bank to detail a plan of corrective action

          • VI. Other Aspects of the Supervisory Review Process

            • Supervisory Transparency and Accountability

              135.The supervision of banks is not an exact science, and therefore, discretionary elements within the supervisory review process are inevitable. The Central Bank will carry out its obligations in a transparent and accountable manner. The Central Bank will make publicly available the criteria (defined in the accompanying Guidance) to be used in the review of banks’ internal capital assessments. If the Central Bank chooses to set higher minimum capital requirements or to set categories of capital in excess of the regulatory minimum, factors that may be considered in doing so will be publicly available. Where the capital requirements are set above the minimum for an individual bank, the Central Bank will explain to the bank the risk characteristics specific to the bank, which resulted in the requirement and any remedial action necessary.

            • Supervisory Review Process for Securitisation

              136.Further to the Pillar 1 principle that banks must take account of the economic substance of transactions in their determination of capital adequacy, the Central Bank will monitor, as appropriate, whether banks have done so adequately. As a result, regulatory capital treatments for specific securitisation exposures might differ from those specified in Pillar 1 of the Framework, particularly in instances where the general capital requirement would not adequately and sufficiently reflect the risks to which an individual banking organisation is exposed.

              137.Amongst other things, the Central Bank will review where relevant a bank’s own assessment of its capital needs and how that has been reflected in the capital calculation as well as the documentation of certain transactions to determine whether the capital requirements accord with the risk profile (e.g. substitution clauses). The Central Bank will also review the manner in which banks have addressed the issue of maturity mismatch in relation to retained positions in their economic capital calculations. In particular, they will be vigilant in monitoring for the structuring of maturity mismatches in transactions to artificially reduce capital requirements. Additionally, the Central Bank will review the bank’s economic capital assessment of actual correlation between assets in the pool and how they have reflected that in the calculation. Where the Central Bank considers that a bank’s approach is not adequate, they will take appropriate action. Such action might include denying or reducing capital relief in the case of originated assets, or increasing the capital required against securitisation exposures acquired.

            • Significance of Risk Transfer

              138.Securitisation transactions may be carried out for purposes other than credit risk transfer (e.g. funding). Where this is the case, there might still be a limited transfer of credit risk. However, for an originating bank to achieve reductions in capital requirements, the risk transfer arising from a securitisation has to be deemed significant by the Central Bank. If the risk transfer is considered insufficient or non-existent, the Central Bank will require the application of a higher capital requirement than prescribed under Pillar 1 or, alternatively, may deny a bank from obtaining any capital relief from the securitisations. Therefore, the capital relief that can be achieved will correspond to the amount of credit risk that is effectively transferred. The following includes a set of examples where the Central Bank will have concerns about the degree of risk transfer, such as retaining or repurchasing significant amounts of risk or “cherry picking” the exposures to be transferred via a securitisation.

              139.Retaining or repurchasing significant securitisation exposures, depending on the proportion of risk held by the originator, might undermine the intent of a securitisation to transfer credit risk. Specifically, the Central Bank might expect that a significant portion of the credit risk and of the nominal value of the pool be transferred to at least one independent third party at inception and on an ongoing basis. Where banks repurchase risk for market making purposes, the Central Bank could find it appropriate for an originator to buy part of a transaction but not, for example, to repurchase a whole tranche. The Central Bank will expect that where positions have been bought for market making purposes, these positions must be resold within an appropriate period, thereby remaining true to the initial intention to transfer risk.

              140.Another implication of realising only a non-significant risk transfer, especially if related to good quality unrated exposures, is that both the poorer quality unrated assets and most of the credit risk embedded in the exposures underlying the securitised transaction are likely to remain with the originator. Accordingly, and depending on the outcome of the supervisory review process, the Central Bank will increase the capital requirement for particular exposures or even increase the overall level of capital the bank is required to hold.

            • Market Innovations

              141.As the minimum capital requirements for securitisation may not be able to address all potential issues, the Central Bank will consider new features of securitisation transactions as they arise. Such assessments would include reviewing the impact new features may have on credit risk transfer and, where appropriate, the Central Bank will be expected to take appropriate action under Pillar 2. A Pillar 1 response may be formulated to take account of market innovations. Such a response may take the form of a set of operational requirements and/or a specific capital treatment.

            • Risk Evaluation and Management

              142.A bank must conduct analyses of the underlying risks when investing in the structured products and must not solely rely on the external credit ratings assigned to securitisation exposures by the credit rating agencies. A bank must be aware that external ratings are a useful starting point for credit analysis, but are no substitute for full and proper understanding of the underlying risk, especially where ratings for certain asset classes have a short history or have been shown to be volatile. Moreover, a bank also must conduct credit analysis of the securitisation exposure at acquisition and on an ongoing basis. It must also have in place the necessary quantitative tools, valuation models and stress tests of sufficient sophistication to reliably assess all relevant risks.

              143.When assessing securitisation exposures, a bank must ensure that it fully understands the credit quality and risk characteristics of the underlying exposures in structured credit transactions, including any risk concentrations. In addition, a bank must review the maturity of the exposures underlying structured credit transactions relative to the issued liabilities in order to assess potential maturity mismatches.

              144.A bank must track credit risk in securitisation exposures at the transaction level and across securitisations exposures within each business line and across business lines. It must produce reliable measures of aggregate risk. A bank also must track all meaningful concentrations in securitisation exposures, such as name, product or sector concentrations, and feed this information to firm-wide risk aggregation systems that track, for example, credit exposure to a particular obligor.

              145.A bank’s own assessment of risk needs to be based on a comprehensive understanding of the structure of the securitisation transaction. It must identify the various types of triggers, credit events and other legal provisions that may affect the performance of its on- and off-balance sheet exposures and integrate these triggers and provisions into its funding/liquidity, credit and balance sheet management. The impact of the events or triggers on a bank’s liquidity and capital position must also be considered.

              146.Banks either underestimated or did not anticipate that a market-wide disruption could prevent them from securitising warehoused or pipeline exposures and did not anticipate the effect this could have on liquidity, earnings and capital adequacy. As part of its risk management processes, a bank must consider and, where appropriate, mark-to-market warehoused positions, as well as those in the pipeline, regardless of the probability of securitising the exposures. It must consider scenarios that may prevent it from securitising its assets as part of its stress testing and identify the potential effect of such exposures on its liquidity, earnings and capital adequacy.

              147.A bank must develop prudent contingency plans specifying how it would respond to funding, capital and other pressures that arise when access to securitisation markets is reduced. The contingency plans must also address how the bank would address valuation challenges for potentially illiquid positions held for sale or for trading. The risk measures, stress testing results and contingency plans must be incorporated into the bank’s risk management processes and its ICAAP, and must result in an appropriate level of capital under Pillar 2 in excess of the minimum requirements.

              148.A bank that employs risk mitigation techniques must fully understand the risks to be mitigated, the potential effects of that mitigation and whether or not the mitigation is fully effective. This is to help ensure that the bank does not understate the true risk in its assessment of capital. In particular, it must consider whether it would provide support to the securitisation structures in stressed scenarios due to the reliance on securitisation as a funding tool.

            • Provision of Implicit Support

              149.Support to a transaction, whether contractual (i.e. credit enhancements provided at the inception of a securitised transaction) or non-contractual (implicit support) can take numerous forms. For instance, contractual support can include over collateralisation, credit derivatives, spread accounts, contractual recourse obligations, subordinated notes, credit risk mitigants provided to a specific tranche, the subordination of fee or interest income or the deferral of margin income, and clean-up calls that exceed 10 percent of the initial issuance. Examples of implicit support include the purchase of deteriorating credit risk exposures from the underlying pool, the sale of discounted credit risk exposures into the pool of securitized credit risk exposures, the purchase of underlying exposures at above market price or an increase in the first loss position according to the deterioration of the underlying exposures.

              150.The provision of implicit (or non-contractual) support, as opposed to contractual credit support (i.e. credit enhancements), raises significant supervisory concerns. For traditional securitisation structures the provision of implicit support undermines the clean break criteria, which when satisfied would allow banks to exclude the securitised assets from regulatory capital calculations. For synthetic securitisation structures, it negates the significance of risk transference. By providing implicit support, banks signal to the market that the risk is still with the bank and has not in effect been transferred. The bank’s capital calculation therefore understates the true risk. Accordingly, the Central Bank will take appropriate action when a banking organisation provides implicit support.

              151.When a bank has been found to provide implicit support to a securitisation, it will be required to hold capital against all of the underlying exposures associated with the structure as if they had not been securitised. It will also be required to disclose publicly that it was found to have provided non-contractual support, as well as the resulting increase in the capital charge (as noted above). The aim is to require banks to hold capital against exposures for which they assume the credit risk, and to discourage them from providing non-contractual support.

              152.If a bank is found to have provided implicit support on more than one occasion, the bank is required to disclose its transgression publicly and the Central Bank will take appropriate action that may include, but is not limited to, one or more of the following:

              1. i.The bank may be prevented from gaining favourable capital treatment on securitised assets for a period of time to be determined by the Central Bank;
              2. ii.The bank may be required to hold capital against all securitised assets as though the bank had created a commitment to them, by applying a conversion factor to the risk weight of the underlying assets;
              3. iii.For purposes of capital calculations, the bank may be required to treat all securitised assets as if they remained on the balance sheet;
              4. iv.The bank must be required by the Central Bank to hold regulatory capital in excess of the minimum risk-based capital ratios.

              153.The Central Bank will be vigilant in determining implicit support and will take appropriate supervisory action to mitigate the effects. Pending any investigation, the bank may be prohibited from any capital relief for planned securitisation transactions (moratorium). The Central Bank’s response will be aimed at changing the bank’s behaviour with regard to the provision of implicit support, and to correct market perception as to the willingness of the bank to provide future recourse beyond contractual obligations.

            • Residual Rrisks

              154.As with credit risk mitigation techniques more generally, the Central Bank will review the appropriateness of banks’ approaches to the recognition of credit protection. In particular, with regard to securitisations, the Central Bank will review the appropriateness of protection recognised against first loss credit enhancements. On these positions, expected loss is less likely to be a significant element of the risk and is likely to be retained by the protection buyer through the pricing. Therefore, the Central Bank will expect banks’ policies to take account of this in determining their economic capital. If the Central Bank does not consider the approach to protection recognised as adequate, action will be taken. Such action may include increasing the capital requirement against a particular transaction or class of transactions.

            • Call Provisions

              155.The Central Bank expects a bank not to make use of clauses that entitles it to call the securitisation transaction or the coverage of credit protection prematurely if this would increase the bank’s exposure to losses or deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures.

              156.Besides the general principle stated above, the Central Bank expects banks to only execute clean-up calls for economic business purposes, such as when the cost of servicing the outstanding credit exposures exceeds the benefits of servicing the underlying credit exposures.

              157.Subject to national discretion, the Central Bank will require a review prior to the bank exercising a call which can be expected to include consideration of:

              1. i.The rationale for the bank’s decision to exercise the call; and
              2. ii.The impact of the exercise of the call on the bank’s regulatory capital ratio.

              158.The Central Bank will also require the bank to enter into a follow-up transaction, if necessary, depending on the bank’s overall risk profile, and existing market conditions.

              159.Date related calls must be set at a date no earlier than the duration or the weighted average life of the underlying securitisation exposures. Accordingly, supervisory authorities may require a minimum period to elapse before the first possible call date can be set, given, for instance, the existence of up-front sunk costs of a capital market securitisation transaction.

            • Early Amortisation

              160.The Central Bank will review how banks internally measure, monitor, and manage risks associated with securitisations of revolving credit facilities, including an assessment of the risk and likelihood of early amortisation of such transactions. At a minimum, the Central Bank will ensure that banks have implemented reasonable methods for allocating economic capital against the economic substance of the credit risk arising from revolving securitisations and must expect banks to have adequate capital and liquidity contingency plans that evaluate the probability of an early amortisation occurring and address the implications of both scheduled and early amortisation. In addition, the capital contingency plan must address the possibility that the bank will face higher levels of required capital under the early amortisation Pillar 1 capital requirement.

              161.Because most early amortisation triggers are tied to excess spread levels, the factors affecting these levels must be well understood, monitored, and managed, to the extent possible by the originating bank. For example, the following factors affecting excess spread must generally be considered:

              1. i.Interest payments made by borrowers on the underlying receivable balances;
              2. ii.Other fees and charges to be paid by the underlying obligors (e.g. late-payment fees, cash advance fees, over-limit fees);
              3. iii.Gross charge-offs;
              4. iv.Principal payments;
              5. v.Recoveries on charged-off loans;
              6. vi.Interchange income;
              7. vii.Interest paid on investors’ certificates;
              8. viii.Macroeconomic factors such as bankruptcy rates, interest rate movements, unemployment rates; etc.

              162.Banks must consider the effects that changes in portfolio management or business strategies may have on the levels of excess spread and on the likelihood of an early amortisation event. For example, marketing strategies or underwriting changes that result in lower finance charges or higher charge-offs, might also lower excess spread levels and increase the likelihood of an early amortisation event.

              163.Banks must use techniques such as static pool cash collections analyses and stress tests to better understand pool performance. These techniques can highlight adverse trends or potential adverse impacts. Banks must have policies in place to respond promptly to adverse or unanticipated changes. The Central Bank will take appropriate action where they do not consider these policies adequate. Such action may include, but is not limited to, directing a bank to obtain a dedicated liquidity line or raising the early amortisation credit conversion factor, thus, increasing the bank’s capital requirements.

              164.While the early amortisation capital charge described in Pillar 1 is meant to address potential supervisory concerns associated with an early amortisation event, such as the inability of excess spread to cover potential losses, the policies and monitoring described in this section recognise that a given level of excess spread is not, by itself, a perfect proxy for credit performance of the underlying pool of exposures. In some circumstances, for example, excess spread levels may decline so rapidly as to not provide a timely indicator of underlying credit deterioration. Further, excess spread levels may reside far above trigger levels, but still exhibit a high degree of volatility, which could warrant supervisory attention. In addition, excess spread levels can fluctuate for reasons unrelated to underlying credit risk, such as a mismatch in the rate at which finance charges reprice relative to investor certificate rates. Routine fluctuations of excess spread might not generate supervisory concerns, even when they result in different capital requirements. This is particularly the case as a bank moves in or out of the first step of the early amortisation credit conversion factors. On the other hand, existing excess spread levels may be maintained by adding (or designating) an increasing number of new accounts to the master trust, an action that would tend to mask potential deterioration in a portfolio. For all of these reasons, supervisors will place particular emphasis on internal management, controls, and risk monitoring activities with respect to securitisations with early amortisation features.

              165.The Central Bank expects that the sophistication of a bank’s system in monitoring the likelihood and risks of an early amortisation event will be commensurate with the size and complexity of the bank’s securitisation activities that involve early amortisation provisions.

              166.For controlled amortisations specifically, the Central Bank will also review the process by which a bank determines the minimum amortisation period required to pay down 90% of the outstanding balance at the point of early amortisation. Where the Central Bank does not consider this adequate, it will take appropriate action, such as increasing the conversion factor associated with a particular transaction or class of transactions.

          • VIII. Shari’ah Implementation

            Banks providing Islamic financial services must comply with the requirements and provisions of this standard for their Shari’ah compliant transactions that are alternative to transactions referred to in this Standard, provided it is acceptable by Islamic Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidance are issued specifically for transactions of banks offering Islamic financial services

      • Pillar 3

        • XII. Pillar 3 – Market Disclosure

          • I. Scope and Application

            The revised disclosure requirements presented in this Standard supersede the existing Pillar 3 disclosure requirements issued in 2009. These revised requirements are an integral part of the Basel framework and they complement other disclosure requirements issued separately by Central Bank, which are uploaded on Central Bank's online portal for banks to download. Pillar 3 Disclosure requirements apply to all banks in the UAE at consolidated level for local banks and all branches of foreign banks.

            Implementation date

            The Pillar 3 tables and disclosures will be effective from Q2, 2020 for the previous quarter/year's figures and every quarter/year going forward. Banks need to report in each table as per the requirements for that table set out in the Appendix since few tables are required to be reported every quarter or semi-annually or annually.
             

            Reporting

            Banks should publish their Pillar 3 report in a stand-alone document on the bank’s UAE-specific website that provides a readily accessible source of prudential measures for users. The Pillar 3 report may be appended to form a discrete section of a bank’s financial reporting, but the full report will be needed to be disclosed separately in the Pillar 3 tables as well.
             

          • II. Shari’ah Implementation

            Banks offering Islamic financial services should comply with these disclosure requirements. These requirements are applicable to their activities that are in line with Islamic Shari’ah rules and principals, which are neither interest-based lending nor borrowing but are parallel to the activities described in these Guidance and Explanatory Notes

            Further guidance on Pillar 3 disclosure requirements has been set out in the document, “Guidance for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE”.

      • Leverage Ratio

        • XIII. Leverage Ratio

          • I. Introduction and Scope

            1.This Standard articulates specific requirements for the calculation of the leverage ratio capital requirement for banks in the UAE. It is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, specifically as articulated in Basel III: Finalising post-crisis reforms, December 2017.

            2.The Central Bank leverage ratio framework introduces a simple, transparent, non-risk based measure to act as a credible supplement to the risk-based capital requirements. The leverage ratio is intended to:

            • Restrict the build-up of leverage in the banking sector to avoid destabilizing deleveraging processes that can damage the broader financial system and the economy; and
            • Reinforce the risk-based requirements with a simple, non-risk based “backstop” measure.

            3.The Central Bank is of the view that:

            1. A simple leverage ratio framework is critical and complementary to the risk-based capital framework; and
            2. A credible leverage ratio is one that ensures broad and adequate capture of both the on- and off-balance-sheet sources of banks’ leverage.

            4.This Standards supports the Central Bank’s Regulations Re Capital Adequacy and shall be applied as set forth therein.

          • II. Definitions

            In general, terms in this Standard have the meanings defined in other Regulations and Standards issued by the Central Bank. In addition, for this Standard, the following terms have the meanings defined in this section.

            1. a.A central counterparty (CCP) is an entity that interposes itself between counterparties to contracts traded within one or more financial markets, becoming the legal counterparty such that it is the buyer to every seller and the seller to every buyer.
            2. b.A clearing member (CM) is defined as a member of, or direct participant in, a CCP that is entitled to enter into transactions with the CCP.
            3. c.A clearing member client is defined as a party to a cleared transaction associated with a CCP in which a CM either acts as a financial intermediary with respect to the party or guarantees the performance of the party to the CCP.
            4. d.Commitment means any contractual arrangement that has been offered by the bank and accepted by the client to extend credit, purchase assets or issue credit substitutes. It includes any such arrangement that can be unconditionally cancelled by the bank at any time without prior notice to the obligor. It also includes any such arrangement that can be cancelled by the bank if the obligor fails to meet conditions set out in the facility document, including conditions that must be met by the obligor prior to any initial or subsequent drawdown arrangement.
            5. e.General provisions or general loan loss reserves are reserves held against future, presently unidentified losses that are freely available to meet losses which subsequently materialize. Provisions ascribed to identify deterioration of particular assets or known liabilities, whether individual or grouped, should be excluded.
            6. f.A multi-level client structure is one in which banks can centrally clear as indirect clients; that is, when clearing services are provided to the bank by an institution which is not a direct CM, but is itself a client of a CM or another clearing client. The term “higher level client” refers to the institution that provides clearing services.
            7. g.A netting set is a group of contracts with a single counterparty subject to a legally enforceable agreement for net settlement, and satisfying all of the conditions for netting sets specified in this Standards.
            8. h.Potential future exposure (PFE) is an estimate of the potential increase in exposure to counterparty risk against which regulatory capital must be held.
            9. i.A qualifying central counterparty (QCCP) is a CCP that meets the conditions for QCCPs established by the Central Bank.
            10. j.Regular-way purchases or sales are purchases or sales of financial assets under contracts for which the terms require delivery of the assets within the time frame established generally by regulation or convention in the marketplace concerned.
            11. k.The remaining maturity of a derivative transaction is the time remaining until the latest date at which the contract may still be active. If a derivative contract has another derivative contract as its underlying (for example, a swaption) and may be physically exercised into the underlying contract (that is, a bank would assume a position in the underlying contract in the event of exercise), then the remaining maturity of the contract is the time until the final settlement date of the underlying derivative contract. For a derivative contract that is structured such that any outstanding exposure is settled on specified dates and the terms are reset so that the fair value of the contract is zero, the remaining maturity equals the time until the next reset date.
            12. l.Securities financing transactions (SFTs) are transactions such as repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, security lending and borrowing, and margin lending transactions, where the value of the transactions depends on market valuations and the transactions are often subject to margin agreements.
            13. m.Variation margin (VM) means margin in the form of cash or financial assets exchanged on a periodic basis between counterparties to recognize changes in contract value due to changes in market factors.
            14. n.A walkaway clause is a provision that permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make only limited payments or no payment at all, to the estate of a defaulter, even if the defaulter is a net creditor.
          • III. Requirements

            • A. Leverage Ratio

              5.The Central Bank leverage ratio is defined as the capital measure (the numerator) divided by the exposure measure (the denominator), with this ratio expressed as a percentage:

              2

               

              6.The capital measure for the leverage ratio is Tier 1 capital – comprising Common Equity Tier 1 and/or Additional Tier 1 instruments – as defined in the Central Bank’s Capital Supply Standards.

              7.Both the capital measure and the exposure measure are to be calculated on a quarter-end basis. However, banks may, subject to Central Bank approval, use more frequent calculations (e.g. daily or monthly averaging) as long as they do so consistently.

              8.Banks must at all times maintain a leverage ratio that equals or exceeds the minimum required leverage ratio as specified in UAE regulations.

            • B. Scope of Consolidation

              9.The leverage ratio framework follows the same scope of regulatory consolidation, including consolidation criteria, as is used for the risk-based capital framework.

              10.Treatment of investments in the capital of banking, financial, insurance and commercial entities that are outside the regulatory scope of consolidation: where a banking, financial, insurance or commercial entity is outside the scope of regulatory consolidation, only the investment in the capital of such entities (i.e. only the carrying value of the investment, as opposed to the underlying assets and other exposures of the investee) is to be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure. However, investments in the capital of such entities that are deducted from Tier 1 capital may be excluded from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

            • C. Exposure Measure

              11.The leverage ratio exposure measure generally follows gross accounting values.

              12.Unless specified differently below, banks must not take account of physical or financial collateral, guarantees or other credit risk mitigation techniques to reduce the leverage ratio exposure measure, nor may banks net assets and liabilities.

              13.To ensure consistency, any item deducted from Tier 1 capital according to the Central Bank’s risk-based capital framework and regulatory adjustments other than those related to liabilities may be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              14.Liability items must not be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              15.With regard to traditional securitizations, an originating bank may exclude securitized exposures from its leverage ratio exposure measure if the securitization meets the operational requirements for the recognition of risk transference according to the Central Bank’s securitization framework. Banks meeting these conditions must include any retained securitization exposures in their leverage ratio exposure measure. In all other cases, the securitized exposures must be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              16.Where the Central Bank is concerned that transactions are not adequately captured in the leverage ratio exposure measure or may lead to a potentially destabilizing deleveraging process, it will carefully scrutinize these transactions and consider a range of actions to address such concerns. Central Bank actions may include requiring enhancements in banks’ management of leverage, imposing operational requirements (e.g. additional reporting to supervisors), requiring that the relevant exposure is adequately capitalized through a Pillar 2 capital charge, or any other measures deemed appropriate.

              17.To facilitate the implementation of monetary policies, the Central Bank may consider temporarily exempting certain central bank reserves (that is, bank balances or placements at the central bank) from the leverage ratio exposure measure in exceptional macroeconomic circumstances. In such an event, the Central Bank would also increase the calibration of the minimum leverage ratio requirement commensurately to offset the impact of exempting central bank reserves. In addition, banks would be required to disclose the impact of any temporary exemption alongside ongoing public disclosure of the leverage ratio without application of such exemption.

              18.A bank’s total leverage ratio exposure measure is the sum of the following exposures:

              • On balance sheet exposures (excluding on-balance-sheet derivative and SFT exposures);
              • derivative exposures;
              • SFT exposures; and
              • Off-balance sheet items.

              The specific treatments for these four main exposure types are defined below.

              • 1. On-Balance-Sheet Exposures

                19.Banks must include all balance sheet assets in their leverage ratio exposure measure, including on-balance-sheet derivatives collateral and collateral for SFTs, with the exception of on-balance-sheet derivative and SFT assets that are covered in subsections two and three below.

                20.On-balance-sheet, non-derivative assets are included in the leverage ratio exposure measure at their accounting values less deductions for associated specific provisions. In addition, general provisions or general loan loss reserves, which have reduced Tier 1 capital, may be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                21.Regular-way purchases or sales of financial assets that have not been settled (hereafter “unsettled trades”) can be accounted for either on the trade date (trade date accounting) or on the settlement date (settlement date accounting). For the purpose of the leverage ratio exposure measure, banks using trade date accounting must reverse out any offsetting between cash receivables for unsettled sales and cash payables for unsettled purchases of financial assets that may be recognized under the applicable accounting framework, but may offset between those cash receivables and cash payables (regardless of whether such offsetting is recognized under the applicable accounting framework) if the following conditions are met:

                • the financial assets bought and sold that are associated with cash payables and receivables are fair valued through income and included in the bank’s regulatory trading book; and
                • the transactions of the financial assets are settled on a delivery-versus-payment basis.

                Banks using settlement date accounting will be subject to the treatment set out in the off-balance sheet of this Standard.

                22.Cash pooling refers to arrangements involving treasury products whereby a bank combines the credit and/or debit balances of several individual participating customer accounts into a single account balance to facilitate cash and/or liquidity management. For the purposes of the leverage ratio exposure measure, where a cash pooling arrangement entails a transfer at least on a daily basis of the credit and/or debit balances of the individual participating customer accounts into a single account balance, the individual participating customer accounts are deemed to be extinguished and transformed into a single account balance upon the transfer, provided the bank is not liable for the balances on an individual basis upon the transfer. When the transfer of credit and/or debit balances of the individual participating customer accounts does not occur daily, for purposes of the leverage ratio exposure measure, extinguishment and transformation into a single account balance is deemed to occur and this single account balance may serve as the basis of the leverage ratio exposure measure provided all of the following conditions are met:

                • in addition to providing for the several individual participating customer accounts, the cash pooling arrangement provides for a single account, into which the balances of all individual participating customer accounts can be transferred and thus extinguished;
                • the bank (i) has a legally enforceable right to transfer the balances of the individual participating customer accounts into a single account so that the bank is not liable for the balances on an individual basis and (ii) at any point in time, the bank must have the discretion and be in a position to exercise this right;
                • the Central Bank does not deem as inadequate the frequency by which the balances of individual participating customer accounts are transferred to a single account;
                • there are no maturity mismatches among the balances of the individual participating customer accounts included in the cash pooling arrangement or all balances are either overnight or on demand; and
                • the bank charges or pays interest and/or fees based on the combined balance of the individual participating customer accounts included in the cash pooling arrangement.

                In the event the abovementioned conditions are not met, the individual balances of the participating customer accounts must be reflected separately in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              • 2. Derivative Exposures

                23.In general, for the purpose of the leverage ratio exposure measure, exposures for derivatives are calculated in accordance with the Central Bank’s Standard for Counterparty Credit Risk Capital through the two components of replacement cost (RC) and PFE, as follows:

                Exposure measure = (RC + PFE) × 1.4
                 

                Where, RC is Replacement Cost, and PFE is Potential Future Exposure.

                24.Where a valid bilateral netting contract is in place, the exposure measure is calculated at the netting set level. However, contracts containing walkaway clauses are not eligible for netting for the purpose of calculating the leverage ratio exposure measure pursuant to this Standards.

                25.The PFE for derivative exposures must be calculated in accordance with the Central Bank’s Standard for Counterparty Credit Risk Capital. Mathematically:

                PFE = (PFE multiplier) × (AddOnagg)
                 

                where PFE multiplier is as specified in the Standards, and

                AddOnagg is the aggregate Add On for derivatives exposure as specified in the Standards.

                However, for the purposes of this Standards, the PFE multiplier from the Standards is fixed at a value of one. Therefore, for the purposes of calculating derivatives exposure for the leverage ratio, PFE is simply equal to the aggregate Add On.

                26.Derivative transactions in which a bank sells protection using a written credit derivative are included in this exposure measure as derivatives, but may also create an additional credit exposure that is included as exposure for purposes of the leverage ratio, as set out below in this Standards.

                27.As a general principle of the leverage ratio framework, collateral received may not be netted against derivative exposures. Hence, when calculating the exposure amount as set forth above, a bank must not reduce the leverage ratio exposure measure amount by any collateral received from the counterparty. However, the maturity factor in the PFE add-on calculation can recognize the PFE-reducing effect from the regular exchange of VM.

                28.Similarly, with regard to collateral provided, banks must gross up their leverage ratio exposure measure by the amount of any derivatives collateral provided where the provision of that collateral has reduced the value of their balance sheet assets under their operative accounting framework.

                29.For purposes of this standards, RC of a transaction or netting set is measured as follows:

                RC = max(V - CVMr, +CVMp, 0)

                where:

                V is the market value of the individual derivative transaction or of the derivative transactions in a netting set;

                CVMr is the cash VM received that meets the conditions set out below and for which the amount has not already reduced the market value of the derivative transaction V under the bank’s operative accounting standards; and

                CVMp is the cash VM provided by the bank and that meets the same conditions.

                • 2.a. Cash Variation Margin

                  30.In the treatment of derivative exposures for the purpose of the leverage ratio exposure measure, the cash portion of VM exchanged between counterparties may be viewed as a form of pre-settlement payment if the following conditions are met:

                  • For trades not cleared through a QCCP, the cash received by the recipient counterparty is not segregated. Cash VM would satisfy the non-segregation criterion if the recipient counterparty has no restrictions by law, regulation, or any agreement with the counterparty on the ability to use the cash received (i.e. the cash VM received is used as its own cash).
                  • VM is calculated and exchanged on at least a daily basis based on mark-to-market valuation of derivative positions. To meet this criterion, derivative positions must be valued daily and cash VM must be transferred at least daily to the counterparty or to the counterparty’s account, as appropriate. Cash VM exchanged on the morning of the subsequent trading day based on the previous, end-of-day market values would meet this criterion.
                  • The VM is received in a currency specified in the derivative contract, governing master netting agreement (MNA), credit support annex to the qualifying MNA, or as defined by any netting agreement with a CCP.
                  • VM exchanged is the full amount that would be necessary to extinguish the mark-to-market exposure of the derivative subject to the threshold and minimum transfer amounts applicable to the counterparty.
                  • Derivative transactions and VM are covered by a single MNA between the legal entities that are the counterparties in the derivative transaction. The MNA must explicitly stipulate that the counterparties agree to settle net any payment obligations covered by such a netting agreement, taking into account any VM received or provided if a credit event occurs involving either counterparty. The MNA must be legally enforceable and effective in all relevant jurisdictions, including in the event of default and bankruptcy or insolvency. For the purposes of this paragraph, the term “MNA” includes any netting agreement that provides legally enforceable rights of offset and a Master MNA may be deemed to be a single MNA.

                  31.If the conditions in the paragraph above are met, the cash portion of VM received may be used to reduce the RC portion of the leverage ratio exposure measure, and the receivables assets from cash VM provided may be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure as follows:

                  • In the case of cash VM received, the receiving bank may reduce the RC (but not the PFE component) of the exposure amount of the derivative asset.
                  • In the case of cash VM provided to a counterparty, the posting bank may deduct the resulting receivable from its leverage ratio exposure measure where the cash VM has been recognized as an asset under the bank’s operative accounting framework, and instead include the cash VM provided in the calculation of the derivative RC.
                • 2.b. Clearing-Related Exposures

                  32.Where a bank acting as CM offers clearing services to clients, the CM’s trade exposures to the CCP that arise when the CM is obligated to reimburse the client for any losses suffered due to changes in the value of its transactions in the event that the CCP defaults must be captured by applying the same treatment that applies to any other type of derivative transaction. However, if the CM, based on the contractual arrangements with the client, is not obligated to reimburse the client for any losses suffered in the event that a QCCP defaults, the CM need not recognize the resulting trade exposures to the QCCP in the leverage ratio exposure measure. In addition, where a bank provides clearing services as a “higher level client” within a multi-level client structure, the bank need not recognize in its leverage ratio exposure measure the resulting trade exposures to the CM or to an entity that serves as a higher level client to the bank in the leverage ratio exposure measure if it meets all of the following conditions:

                  • The offsetting transactions are identified by the QCCP as higher level client transactions and collateral to support them is held by the QCCP and/or the CM, as applicable, under arrangements that prevent any losses to the higher level client due to: (i) the default or insolvency of the CM, (ii) the default or insolvency of the CM’s other clients, and (iii) the joint default or insolvency of the CM and any of its other clients;
                  • The bank must have conducted a sufficient legal review (and undertake such further review as necessary to ensure continuing enforceability) and have a wellfounded basis to conclude that, in the event of legal challenge, the relevant courts and administrative authorities would find that such arrangements mentioned above would be legal, valid, binding and enforceable under relevant laws of the relevant jurisdiction(s);
                  • Relevant laws, regulation, rules, contractual or administrative arrangements provide that the offsetting transactions with the defaulted or insolvent CM are highly likely to continue to be indirectly transacted through the QCCP, or by the QCCP, if the CM defaults or becomes insolvent. In such circumstances, the higher level client positions and collateral with the QCCP will be transferred at market value unless the higher level client requests to close out the position at market value; and
                  • The bank is not obligated to reimburse its client for any losses suffered in the event of default of either the CM or the QCCP.

                  33.Where a client enters directly into a derivative transaction with the CCP and the CM guarantees the performance of its client’s derivative trade exposures to the CCP, the bank acting as the CM for the client to the CCP must calculate its related leverage ratio exposure resulting from the guarantee as a derivative exposure as if it had entered directly into the transaction with the client, including with regard to the receipt or provision of cash VM.

                  34.For the above treatment of clearing services, an entity affiliated to the bank acting as a CM may be considered a client if it is outside the relevant scope of regulatory consolidation at the level at which the leverage ratio is applied. In contrast, if an affiliate entity falls within the regulatory scope of consolidation, the trade between the affiliate entity and the CM is eliminated in the course of consolidation but the CM still has a trade exposure to the CCP. In this case, the transaction with the CCP will be considered proprietary and must be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                • 2.c. Written Credit Derivatives

                  35.In addition to the CCR exposure arising from the fair value of the contracts, written credit derivatives create a notional credit exposure arising from the creditworthiness of the reference entity. Therefore, written credit derivatives must be treated consistently with cash instruments (e.g. loans, bonds) for the purposes of the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                  36.The effective notional amount referenced by a written credit derivative is to be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure unless the written credit derivative is included in a transaction cleared on behalf of a client of the bank acting as a CM (or acting as a clearing services provider in a multi-level client structure) and the transaction meets the requirements for the exclusion of trade exposures to the QCCP (or, in the case of a multi- level client structure, the requirements for the exclusion of trade exposures to the CM or the QCCP). The “effective notional amount” is obtained by adjusting the notional amount to reflect the true exposure of contracts that are leveraged or otherwise enhanced by the structure of the transaction. Further, the effective notional amount of a written credit derivative may be reduced by any negative change in fair value amount that has been incorporated into the calculation of Tier 1 capital with respect to the written credit derivative.

                  The resulting amount may be further reduced by the effective notional amount of a purchased credit derivative on the same reference name, provided that:

                  • the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is otherwise subject to the same or more conservative material terms as those in the corresponding written credit derivative. Material terms include the level of subordination, optionality, credit events, reference and any other characteristics relevant to the valuation of the derivative;
                  • the remaining maturity of the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is equal to or greater than the remaining maturity of the written credit derivative;
                  • the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is not purchased from a counterparty whose credit quality is highly correlated with the value of the reference obligation;
                  • in the event that the effective notional amount of a written credit derivative is reduced by any negative change in fair value reflected in the bank’s Tier 1 capital, the effective notional amount of the offsetting credit protection purchased through credit derivatives must also be reduced by any resulting positive change in fair value reflected in Tier 1 capital; and
                  • the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is not included in a transaction that has been cleared on behalf of a client (or that has been cleared by the bank in its role as a clearing services provider in a multi-level client services structure) and for which the effective notional amount referenced by the corresponding written credit derivative is excluded from the leverage ratio exposure measure according to this paragraph.

                  37.For the purposes of the leverage ratio, the term “written credit derivative” refers to a broad range of credit derivatives through which a bank effectively provides credit protection and is not limited solely to credit default swaps and total return swaps. When written options create a similar potential credit exposure to an underlying entity, that credit exposure also must be included in the leverage ratio exposure.

                  38.For the purposes of the leverage ratio, two reference names are considered to be the same only if they refer to the same legal entity.

                  39.Credit protection on a pool of reference names purchased through credit derivatives may offset credit protection sold on individual reference names if the credit protection purchased is economically equivalent to purchasing credit protection separately on each of the individual names in the pool. If a bank purchases credit protection on a pool of reference names through credit derivatives, but the credit protection purchased does not cover the entire pool (i.e. the protection covers only a subset of the pool, as in the case of an nth-to- default credit derivative or a securitization tranche), then the written credit derivatives on the individual reference names may not be offset. However, such purchased credit protection may offset written credit derivatives on a pool provided that the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives covers the entirety of the subset of the pool on which the credit protection has been sold.

                  40.Where a bank purchases credit protection through a total return swap and records the net payments received as net income, but does not record offsetting deterioration in the value of the written credit derivative (either through reductions in fair value or by an addition to reserves) in Tier 1 capital, the credit protection will not be recognized for the purpose of offsetting the effective notional amounts related to written credit derivatives.

                  41.Banks may choose to exclude from the netting set for the PFE calculation the portion of a written credit derivative which is not offset and for which the effective notional amount is included in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

              • 3. Securities Financing Transaction Exposures

                42.SFTs are included in the leverage ratio exposure measure according to the treatment described below.

                • 3.a. General Treatment (Bank Acting as Principal)

                  43.For a bank acting as principal to an SFT, two components of exposure must be calculated, summed, and included in the leverage ratio exposure measure: adjusted gross SFT assets as described in the following paragraph, and a measure of CCR, as described below.

                  44.Gross SFT assets as recognized for accounting purposes (i.e. with no recognition of accounting netting) should be reduced by the value of any securities received under an SFT where the bank has recognized the securities as an asset on its balance sheet. In addition, cash payables and cash receivables in SFTs with the same counterparty may be measured net if all the following criteria are met:

                  • The transactions have the same explicit final settlement date (transactions with no explicit end date but that can be unwound at any time by either party to the transaction are not eligible);
                  • The right to set off the amount owed to the counterparty with the amount owed by the counterparty is legally enforceable both currently in the normal course of business and in the event of the counterparty’s default, insolvency, or bankruptcy; and
                  • The counterparties intend to settle net, settle simultaneously, or the transactions are subject to a settlement mechanism that results in the functional equivalent of net settlement – that is, the cash flows of the transactions are equivalent, in effect, to a single net amount on the settlement date. To achieve such equivalence, both transactions must be settled through the same settlement system and the settlement arrangements must be supported by cash and/or intraday credit facilities intended to ensure that settlement of both transactions will occur by the end of the business day and that any issues arising from the securities legs of the SFTs do not interfere with the completion of the net settlement of the cash receivables and payables. If there is a failure of the securities leg of a transaction in such a mechanism at the end of the window for settlement in the settlement mechanism, then this transaction and its matching cash leg must be split out from the netting set and treated gross.

                  45.A bank must add a measure of CCR for SFTs to the adjusted gross SFT assets as calculated per the previous paragraph. The CCR measure is calculated as current exposure without an add-on for PFE, with current exposure calculated as follows:

                  • Where a qualifying MNA is in place, the current exposure (E*) is the greater of zero and the total fair value of securities and cash lent to a counterparty for all transactions included in the qualifying MNA (∑Ei), less the total fair value of cash and securities received from the counterparty for those transactions (∑Ci). This is illustrated in the following formula:

                    E* = max {0, [∑Ei – ∑Ci]}

                             Where, E* = current exposure,

                             ∑Ei = total fair value of securities and cash lent to counterparty “i” and

                             ∑Ci = total fair value of securities and cash received from “i”

                  • Where no qualifying MNA is in place, the current exposure for transactions with a counterparty must be calculated on a transaction-by-transaction basis – that is, each transaction is treated as its own netting set, as shown in the following formula:

                    E* = max {0, [EC]}

                             where E* = current exposure,

                             E = total fair value of securities and cash lent in the transaction, and C = total fair value of securities and cash received in the transaction.

                  E* may be set to zero if E is the cash lent to a counterparty, the transaction is treated as its own netting set, and the associated cash receivable is not eligible for the netting treatment in paragraph 45. For the purposes of this subparagraph, the term “counterparty” includes not only the counterparty of the bilateral repo transactions but also triparty repo agents that receive collateral in deposit and manage the collateral in the case of triparty repo transactions. Therefore, securities deposited at triparty repo agents are included in “total value of securities and cash lent to a counterparty”

                  (E) up to the amount effectively lent to the counterparty in a repo transaction. However, excess collateral that has been deposited at triparty agents but that has not been lent out may be excluded.

                • 3.b. Sale Accounting Transactions

                  46.Where sale accounting is achieved for an SFT under the bank’s operative accounting framework, the bank must reverse all sales-related accounting entries, and then calculate its exposure as if the SFT had been treated as a financing transaction under the operative accounting framework (i.e. the bank must include the sum of amounts in paragraphs 45 and 46 for such an SFT) for the purpose of determining its leverage ratio exposure measure.

                • 3.c. Bank Acting as Agent

                  47.If a bank acting as agent in an SFT provides an indemnity or guarantee to only one of the two parties involved, and only for the difference between the value of the security or cash its customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided, the bank is exposed to the counterparty of its customer for the difference in values rather than to the full exposure to the underlying security or cash of the transaction.

                  48.Where a bank acting as agent in an SFT provides an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty for any difference between the value of the security or cash the customer has lent and the value of collateral the borrower has provided and the bank does not own or control the underlying cash or security resource, then the bank will be required to include a measure of CCR in its leverage ratio exposure measure by applying paragraph 46.

                  49.A bank acting as agent in an SFT and providing an indemnity or guarantee to a customer or counterparty will be considered eligible for the exceptional treatment set out in the paragraph above only if the bank’s exposure to the transaction is limited to the guaranteed difference between the value of the security or cash its customer has lent and the value of the collateral the borrower has provided. In situations where the bank is further economically exposed (i.e. beyond the guarantee for the difference) to the underlying security or cash in the transaction, a further exposure equal to the full amount of the security or cash must be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                  50.Where a bank acting as agent provides an indemnity or guarantee to both parties involved in an SFT (i.e. securities lender and securities borrower), the bank will be required to calculate its leverage ratio exposure measure separately for each party involved in the transaction.

                • 3.d. Netting for SFTs

                  51.The effects of bilateral netting agreements for covering SFTs will be recognized on a counterparty-by-counterparty basis if the agreements are legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default and regardless of whether the counterparty is insolvent or bankrupt. In addition, netting agreements must:

                  • provide the non-defaulting party with the right to terminate and close out in a timely manner all transactions under the agreement upon an event of default, including in the event of insolvency or bankruptcy of the counterparty;
                  • provide for the netting of gains and losses on transactions (including the value of any collateral) terminated and closed out under it so that a single net amount is owed by one party to the other;
                  • allow for the prompt liquidation or setoff of collateral upon the event of default; and
                  • be legally enforceable in each relevant jurisdiction upon the occurrence of an event of default regardless of the counterparty’s insolvency or bankruptcy.

                  52.Netting across positions held in the banking book and trading book will only be recognized when all netted transactions are marked to market daily, and the collateral instruments used in the transactions are recognized as eligible financial collateral in the banking book.

              • 4. Off-Balance-Sheet Items

                53.Off-balance sheet items include commitments (including liquidity facilities), whether or not unconditionally cancellable, direct credit substitutes, acceptances, standby letters of credit and trade letters of credit. If the off-balance sheet item is treated as a derivative exposure per the bank’s relevant accounting standards, then the item must be measured as a derivative exposure for the purpose of the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                54.For the purposes of the leverage ratio, off-balance sheet items will be converted into credit exposures by multiplying the committed but undrawn amount by a credit conversion factor (CCF).

                55.A 100% CCF will be applied to the following items:

                • direct credit substitutes;
                • forward asset purchases, forward deposits and partly paid shares and securities, which represent commitments with certain drawdown;
                • the exposure amount associated with unsettled financial asset purchases (i.e. the commitment to pay) where regular-way unsettled trades are accounted for at settlement date. Banks may offset commitments to pay for unsettled purchases and cash to be received for unsettled sales provided that the following conditions are met:
                  (i) the financial assets bought and sold that are associated with cash payables and receivables are fair valued through income and included in the bank’s regulatory trading book; and (ii) the transactions of the financial assets are settled on a delivery- versus-payment basis; and
                • Off-balance sheet items that are credit substitutes not explicitly included in any other category.

                56.A 50% CCF will be applied to note issuance facilities and revolving underwriting facilities regardless of the maturity of the underlying facility.

                57.A 50% CCF will be applied to certain transaction-related contingent items (e.g. performance bonds, bid bonds, warranties and standby letters of credit related to particular transactions).

                58.A 40% CCF will be applied to commitments, regardless of the maturity of the underlying facility, unless they qualify for a lower CCF.

                59.A 20% CCF will be applied to both the issuing and confirming banks of short-term (i.e. with a maturity below one year), self-liquidating trade letters of credit arising from the movement of goods.

                60.A 10% CCF will be applied to commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the bank without prior notice, or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower’s creditworthiness. As appropriate, the Central Bank may apply a higher CCF to certain commitments provided that constraints on a bank’s ability to cancel such commitments are observed.

                61.Where there is an undertaking to provide a commitment on an off-balance-sheet item, banks are to apply the lower of the two applicable CCFs.

                62.Off-balance sheet securitization exposures must be treated in accordance with the Central Bank’s requirements on securitizations as stated in applicable regulations and standards.

                63.In addition, specific and general provisions set aside against off-balance sheet exposures that have decreased Tier 1 capital may be deducted from the credit exposure equivalent amount of those exposures (i.e. the exposure amount after the application of the relevant CCF). However, the resulting total off-balance-sheet equivalent amount for off-balance sheet exposures cannot be less than zero.

          • IV. Review and Audit Requirements

            64.Bank calculations under this Standard and associated bank processes must be subject to appropriate levels of independent review and challenge. Reviews must cover material aspects of the calculations under this Standards, including but not limited to the computation of Tier 1 capital, the measurement of on-balance-sheet, derivative, SFT, and off-balance-sheet exposures, any netting, deductions, or offsets applied in the process, and the accuracy for all components of the leverage calculation reported to the Central Bank as part of regulatory reporting.

            65.Banks must meet the minimum leverage ratio requirement at all times. For the purpose of disclosure requirements, banks must calculate the leverage ratio on a quarter-end basis to prevent potential regulatory arbitrage by banks and temporary reductions of transaction volumes in key financial markets around reference dates with the aim of reporting and publicly disclosing elevated leverage ratios. Such leverage ratios are misleading, suggesting that a bank’s reliance on debt to fund its activities is deceptively less than the actual amounts between the reference dates. This misleads stakeholders about its true resilience, and risks disrupting the operations of financial markets.

            Accordingly, in evaluating its leverage ratio exposure, a bank should assess the volatility of transaction volumes throughout reporting periods, and the effect on its leverage ratio requirements. Banks should also desist from undertaking transactions with the sole purpose of reporting and disclosing higher leverage ratios at reporting days only.

          • V. Shari’ah Implementation

            66.Banks offering Islamic financial services engaging in Shari’ah compliant leverage practices as approved by their internal Shari’ah control committees should calculate the leverage ratio capital in accordance with provisions set out in these standards & guidance and in the manner acceptable by Shari’ah. This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidance in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services

          • VI. List of Abbreviations

            ABCP:Asset-Backed Commercial Paper
            AED:Arab Emirates Dirham
            AIIB:Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank (AIIB)
            ASA:Alternative Standardised Approach
            Avg RWfund:Average Risk Weight for an investment fund
            BCBS:Basel Committee on Banking Supervision
            BIA:Basic Indicator Approach
            CBR:Combined Buffer Requirement
            CCFCredit Conversion Factor
            CCPCentral Counterparty
            CCR:Counterparty Credit Risk
            CDOCollateralized Debt Obligation
            CDSCredit Default Swap
            CMClearing Member
            CPMICommittee on Payments and Market Infrastructures
            CRM:Credit Risk Mitigation
            CVA:Credit Valuation Adjustment
            DvP:Delivery-Versus-Payment
            EAD:Exposure at Default
            ECAI:External Credit Assessment Institution
            EIF:European Investment Fund
            ESFS:European Financial Stability Facility
            ESM:European Stability Mechanism
            FBA:Fall-back Approach
            FRA:Forward Rate Agreements
            GRE:Government related Entities
            IBRD:International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
            ICAIndependent Collateral Amount
            IDA:International Development Association
            IFC:International Finance Corporation
            IFFIm:International Finance Facility for Immunization
            IFRS:International Financial Reporting Standards
            IOSCOInternational Organization of Securities Commissions
            LTA:Look-Through Approach
            LTV:Loan to Value Ratio
            MBA:Mandate-Based Approach
            MDBs:Multilateral Development Banks
            MFMaturity Factor
            MIGA:Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency
            MNAMaster Netting Agreement
            MPORMargin Period of Risk
            NCVNet Current Value
            NIB:Nordic Investment Bank
            NICANet Independent Collateral Amount
            OTC:Over the Counter
            PFE:Potential Future Exposure
            PSEs:Public Sector Entities
            PvP:Payment-Versus-Payment
            QCCPQualifying Central Counterparty
            RCReplacement Cost
            RWA:Risk Weighted Assets
            SA:Standardised Approach
            SA-CCR:Standardized Approach - Counterparty Credit Risk
            SDSupervisory Duration
            SDR:Special Drawing Rights
            SEC-ERBA:Securitisation External Ratings Based Approach
            SEC-SA:Securitisation Standardized Approach
            SFTSecurities Financing Transaction
            SME:Small- and Medium-sized Entities
            SNESingle-Name Exposure
            SPE:Special Purpose Entity
            STC:Simple, Transparent, and Comparable
            UAE:United Arab Emirates
            UCITS:Undertakings for Collective Investments in Transferable Securities
            VMVariation Margin
            VU:Variation of the Underlying of an option

             

    • Guidance for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE

      C 52/2017 STA Effective from 1/4/2021
      • Introduction and Scope

        This document articulates all guidance that have been drafted for banks in the UAE with regards to capital.

        The Guidance is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision.

        This Guidance should be read in conjunction with the associated Standards issued by the Central Bank (Standards for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE - October 2019).

      • Pillar 1

        • I. Tier Capital Supply

          • Introduction

            This guidance explains how banks can comply with the Tier Capital Supply Standard. It must be read in conjunction with the Capital Regulation and Standards for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE. Guidance regarding Minimum Capital Requirement and Capital buffer as stated in the document have to be followed by all banks for the purpose of regulatory compliance.

            1.To help and ensure a consistent and transparent implementation of Capital supply standards, Central Bank will review and update this guidance document periodically.

            2.The guidance document has structured into six main sections

            1. 1.Scope of Application
            2. 2.Eligible capital
            3. 3.Regulatory adjustments
            4. 4.Threshold deductions
            5. 5.Significant investment in commercial entities
            6. 6.Frequently Asked Questions
          • 1. Scope of Application

            3.“Financial activities” do not include insurance activities and “financial entities” do not include insurance entities.

            4.Examples of the types of activities that financial entities might be involved in include financial leasing, issuing credit cards, portfolio management, investment advisory, custodial and safekeeping services and other similar activities that are ancillary to the business of banking

            Treatment of investment in Insurance Entities

            5.Insurance subsidiaries are to be deconsolidated for regulatory capital purposes (i.e. all equity, assets, liabilities and third-party capital investments in such insurance entities are to be removed from the bank’s balance sheet) and the book value of the investment in the subsidiary is to be included in the aggregate investments.

            6.Investments in the capital of insurance entities where the bank owns more than 10% of the insurance entity’s common share capital will be subject to the “Threshold deductions” treatment. Amounts below the threshold that are not deducted are to be risk weighted at 250 %.

            (Investments in insurance entities wherein ownership is greater than 10% will also include insurance subsidiaries)

          • 2. Eligible Capital

            • Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income and Other Disclosed Reserve

              7.For unrealized fair value reserves relating to financial instruments to be included in CET1 capital banks and their auditor must only recognize such gains or losses that are prudently valued and independently verifiable (e.g. by reference to market prices). Prior prudent valuations, and the independent verification thereof, are mandatory.

              8.The amount of cumulative unrealized losses arising from the changes in fair value of financial instruments, including loans/financing and receivables, classified as “available-for-sale” shall be fully deducted in the calculation of CET1 Capital.

              9.Revaluation reserves or cumulative unrealized gains shall be added to CET 1 with a haircut of 55%.

              10.The amount of cumulative unrealized gains arising from the changes in the fair value or revaluation of bank’s own premises and real estate investment are not allowed to be included as part of Asset Revaluation reserve for regulatory purposes.

              11.IFRS9 will be implemented during 2018. Banks that are impacted significantly from the implementation of IFRS9 may approach the Central Bank to apply for a transition period for the IFRS9 impact. Such applications will be analysed and considered on a case-by-case basis.

            • Retained Earnings

              12.The amount reported under accumulated retained earnings (5.1.4.1) should be as per the audited financial statement at year end and should remain the same for the entire financial year.

              13.Current financial year’s/quarter’s profits can only be taken into account after they are properly audited/ reviewed by the external auditors of the bank. Current financial years /quarter’s loss if incurred have to be deducted from the capital.

              14.Dividend expected/ proposed for the financial year should be reported under 5.1.4.3 and will be deducted from Retained Earnings/ (Loss) (5.1.4). Expected dividend applies only for Q4 until dividend is actually paid.

              15.The dividend deduction must be updated based on each of the following events, if the amount changes, after Annual General meeting, or the approval from the Central Ban, or the release of the Financial Statements by the auditors.

              16.Other adjustments to the Retained Earnings includes

              1. a.Prudential filter: Partial addback of ECL in accordance with the Regulation Regarding Accounting Provisions and Capital Requirements - Transitional Arrangements should be reported under 5.1.4.4 IFRS transitional arrangement.
              2. b.CBUAE Regulatory deductions:
                1. i.Amount exceeding Large Exposure threshold: Any amount that is in violation of Large Exposure regulation of notice 300/2013 shall be deducted from the capital. Any amount deducted from CET1 under 5.1.4.5 of the BRF 95 due to a Large Exposure violation of notice no.226/2018 may be excluded for the calculation of risk weighted assets. However, amounts that are not deducted must be included in risk weighted assets. Furthermore, any counterparty credit risk (under CR2a) associated with such exposure must remain included in the calculation of risk weighted asset.
                2. ii.Loans to directors: The circular 83/2019 on Corporate Governance regulations for Banks, under the article (6) “Transaction with Related parties” requires if the transaction with the related parties are not provided on arm’s length basis, then on general or case by case basis, deduct such exposure from capital. The deduction should be reported under 5.1.4.5 of the BRF 95.
            • Capital Buffers - Countercyclical Buffer

              17.The buffer for internationally active banks will be a weighted average of the buffers deployed across all the jurisdictions to which it has credit exposures. The buffer that will apply to each bank will reflect the geographic composition of its portfolio of credit exposures. When considering the jurisdiction to which a private sector credit exposure relates, banks should use, where possible, an ultimate risk basis; i.e. it should use the country where the guarantor of the exposure resides, not where the exposure has been booked.

              18.Banks will have to look at the geographic location of their private sector credit exposures (including non-bank financial sector exposures) and calculate their countercyclical capital buffer requirement as a weighted average of the buffers that are being applied in jurisdictions to which they have an exposure. Credit exposures in this case include all private sector credit exposures that attract a credit risk capital charge or the risk weighted equivalent trading book capital charges for specific risk and securitisation.

              19.The weighting applied to the buffer in place in each jurisdiction will be the bank’s total credit risk charge that relates to private sector credit exposures in that jurisdiction, divided by the bank’s total credit risk charge that relates to private sector credit exposures across all jurisdictions. Banks must determine whether the ultimate counterparty is a private sector exposure, as well as the location of the “ultimate risk”, to the extent possible.

              20.The charge for the relevant portfolio should be allocated to the geographic regions of the constituents of the portfolio by calculating the proportion of the portfolio’s total credit exposure arising from credit exposure to counterparties in each geographic region.

              Please refer to Question 15 of the FAQs below for further guidance and examples of countercyclical buffers.

          • 3. Regulatory Adjustments

            • Goodwill and Other Intangibles

              21.Intangible assets typically do not generate any cash flows and hence their value, when a bank is in need of immediate additional capital to absorb losses, is uncertain. For this reason, all intangible assets are deducted from CET1 (5.1.8.1).

              22.From regulatory perspective, goodwill and intangible assets have the same meaning as under IFRS.

              23.Capitalized software costs that is not “integral to hardware” is to be treated as an intangible asset and software that is “integral to hardware” is to be treated as property, plant and equipment (i.e. as a fixed asset).

              24.The amount of intangible assets to be deducted should be net of any associated deferred tax liability (DTL) that would be extinguished if the asset became impaired or derecognised under the applicable accounting standards.

              25.Goodwill and intangible assets that are deducted from CET1, they are excluded from the calculation of RWA for credit risk exposure value.

            • Deferred Tax Assets

              26.Deferred tax assets (DTAs) typically arise when a bank:

              1. suffers a net loss in a financial year and is permitted to carry forward this loss to offset future profits when calculating its tax bill (net losses carried forward)
              2. has to reduce the value of an asset on the balance sheet, but this 'loss in value' is not recognised by the tax authorities until a future period (temporary timing difference)

              27.DTAs arising from net losses carried forward have to be deducted in full from a bank's CET1 (5.1.8.2). This recognises that their value can only be derived through the existence of future taxable income. On the other hand, a DTA relying on future profitability and arising from temporary timing differences is subject to the 'threshold deduction rule' (5.1.9.2).

          • 4. Threshold Deduction

            28.The purpose of calculating the threshold is to limit the significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial institutions (banks, insurance and other financial entities) and deferred tax assets (arising from temporary differences) to 15% of the CET1 after all deduction (Deduction includes regulatory deductions and the amount of significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial institutions and deferred tax assets in full).

            29.Therefore, significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial institutions and deferred tax assets may receive limited recognition of 10% CET1 individually (CET after regulatory adjustment outlined in section 3 of the Tier Capital Supply Standard).

            30.The amount that is recognised will receive risk weight of 250% and the remaining amount will be deducted.

            See Appendix 5 for an example.

          • 5. Significant Investment in Commercial Entities

            31. For purposes of this section, 'significant investments' in a commercial entity is defined as any investment in the capital instruments of a commercial entity by a bank which is equivalent to or more than 10% of CET 1 of the bank (after application of regulatory and threshold deduction). See Appendix 3 for an example.

          • 6. Frequently Asked Questions

            Question 1: When will the Standards, Guidance and Template with regards to Solo reporting be issued by the Central Bank?
            The Central Bank will issue all related material regarding Solo reporting during 2020. Formal communication will be issued in advance.

            Question 2: What is meant by the book value of an investment?
            The book value of an investment shall be in accordance with the applicable accounting framework (IFRS). This valuation must be accepted by an external auditor.

            Question 3: Are capital shortfalls of non-consolidated insurance companies to be deducted from CET1?
            Yes, any capital shortfall on a company has to be deducted.

            Question 4: If the Bank meets minimum CET1 ratios can the excess CET1 also be counted to meet AT1 and Total CAR?
            Yes.

            Question 5: Please clarify whether minority interest related to any other regulated financial entity (which is not a bank) should be included or not.
            Only minority interest of the subsidiary that are subject to the same minimum prudential standards and level of supervision as a bank be eligible for inclusion in the capital.

            Question 6: Is the bank able to include the profit & loss in the year-end CAR calculation before the issuance of the audited financial statements?
            Bank may include interim profit/ yearend profit in CET1 capital only if reviewed or audited by external auditors. Furthermore, the expected dividend should be deducted in Q4.

            Question 7: Is subordinated Debt currently considered Tier 2 as per Basel III, hence no amortization is required?
            Grandfathering rule plus amortization in last 5 years - refer to Standards for Capital Adequacy of banks in UAE, Tier Capital Supply Standard- paragraph 27 (iv)(b) . Reference should also be made to the Tier Capital Instruments Standards.

            Question 8: Do dividends need to be deducted from CET1 after the proposal from the Board or after Central Bank approval or after approval from shareholders at the Annual General Meeting?
            Please refer to Question 6

            Question 9: How do you treat goodwill and intangible assets arising on an insurance subsidiary? Should it be considered since the standards mentions insurance subsidiaries are to be completely deconsolidated and hence there will be no goodwill?
            Goodwill and other intangible must be deducted in the calculation of CET1. In particular deduction is also applied to any goodwill included in the valuation of significant investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities that are outside the scope of consolidation.

            Question 10: Subsidiaries which are used for providing manpower services at cost, should these be classified as commercial entities or financial entities?
            A non-financial sector entity is an entity that is not:

            1. a)a financial sector entity; or
            2. b)a direct extension of banking; or
            3. c)ancillary to banking; or
            4. d)leasing, factoring, the management of unit trusts, the management of data processing services or any other similar services"

            Question 11: Obtain an understanding to the timeline by when the Central Bank may advise specific Banks of specific countercyclical buffers?
            The underlying process for the implementation of countercyclical buffers will be set and communicated during 2018

            Question 12: Criterion 4 for Additional Tier 1 capital. Can the Central Bank give additional guidance on what will be considered to be an incentive to redeem?
            The following list provides some examples of what would be considered to be an incentive to redeem:

            A call option combined with an increase in the credit spread of the instrument if the call is not exercised.

            A call option combined with a requirement or an investor option to convert the instrument into shares if the call is not exercised.

            A call option combined with a change in reference rate where the credit spread over the second reference rate is greater than the initial payment rate less the swap rate (ie the fixed rate paid to the call date to receive the second reference rate). For example, if the initial reference rate is 0.9%, the credit spread over the initial reference rate is 2% (ie the initial payment rate is 2.9%), and the swap rate to the call date is 1.2%, a credit spread over the second reference rate greater than 1.7% (2.9-1.2%) would be considered an incentive to redeem.

            Conversion from a fixed rate to a floating rate (or vice versa) in combination with a call option without any increase in credit spread will not in itself be viewed as an incentive to redeem. However, as required by criteria 5, the bank must not do anything that creates an expectation that the call will be exercised.

            The above is not an exhaustive list of what is considered an incentive to redeem and so banks should seek guidance from Central Bank on specific features and instruments. Banks must not expect Central Bank to approve the exercise of a call option for the purpose of satisfying investor expectations that a call will be exercised.

            Question 13: Criteria 4 and 5 for Additional Tier 1 capital. An instrument is structured with a first call date after 5 years but thereafter is callable quarterly at every interest payment due date (subject to supervisory approval). The instrument does not have a step-up. Does instrument meet criteria 4 and 5 in terms of being perpetual with no incentive to redeem?
            Criterion 5 allows an instrument to be called by an issuer after a minimum period of 5 years. It does not preclude calling at times after that date or preclude multiple dates on which a call may be exercised. However, the specification of multiple dates upon which a call might be exercised must not be used to create an expectation that the instrument will be redeemed at the first call date, as this is prohibited by criterion.

            Question 14: Can an option to call the instrument after five years but prior to the start of the amortisation period viewed as an incentive to redeem?
            No, it can’t be viewed as an incentive to redeem.

            Question 15: With regards to countercyclical buffer, what are “private sector credit exposures”? What does “geographic location” mean? How should the geographic location of exposures on the banking book and the trading book be identified? What is the difference between (the jurisdiction of) “ultimate risk” and (the jurisdiction of) “immediate counterparty” exposures?
            “Private sector credit exposures” refers to exposures to private sector counterparties which attract a credit risk capital charge in the banking book, and the risk weighted equivalent trading book capital charges for specific risk, the incremental risk charge, and securitisation. Interbank exposures and exposures to the public sector are excluded, but non-bank financial sector exposures are included. The geographic location of a bank’s private sector credit exposures is determined by the location of the counterparties that make up the capital charge, irrespective of the bank’s own physical location or its country of incorporation. The location is identified according to the concept of “ultimate risk”. The geographic location identifies the jurisdiction that has announced countercyclical capital buffer add-on rate is to be applied by the bank to the corresponding credit exposure, appropriately weighted

            The concepts of “ultimate risk” and “immediate risk” are those used by the BIS' International Banking Statistics. The jurisdiction of “immediate counterparty” refers to the jurisdiction of residence of immediate counterparties, while the jurisdiction of “ultimate risk” is where the final risk lies. For the purpose of the countercyclical capital buffer, banks should use, where possible, exposures on an “ultimate risk” basis.

            For example, a bank could face the situation where the exposures to a borrower is in one jurisdiction (country A), and the risk mitigant (e.g. guarantee) is in another jurisdiction (country B). In this case, the “immediate counterparty” is in country A, but the “ultimate risk” is in country B. This means that if the bank has a debt claim on an investment vehicle, the ultimate risk exposure should be allocated to the jurisdiction where the vehicle (or if applicable, its parent/guarantor) resides. If the bank has an equity claim, the ultimate risk exposure should be allocated proportionately to the jurisdictions where the ultimate risk exposures of the vehicle resides.

          • Appendix

            • Appendix 1: Banking, Securities, Insurance and Other Financial Entities - Significant Investment (Ownership in the Entity More Than 10%)

              Significant investment (ownership in the entity more than 10% )
              EntityEntity activityInvestment ClassificationListed/UnlistedBank's ownership in the entity (% of Holding)Investment Amount
              ABankingBanking BookListed40%60
              BInsuranceBanking BookListed18%35
              CSecuritiesBanking BookUnlisted16%28
              DBankingTrading BookListed11%18
              a. Total significant investment (Banking, Securities, insurance and other financial entities)141
              b. Bank's CET1 (after applying all the regulatory deduction except section 3.9 and 3.10 of the Tier Capital Supply Standard)1000
              c. Limit (10 % of bank's CET1)100
              d. Amount to be deducted from bank's CET141
              e. Amount not deducted to considered for aggregate threshold deduction100

               

              The remaining amount of 100 is to be distributed amongst the investments on a pro rata / proportionate basis and risk weighted at 250% (assuming no threshold deduction apply).The total of 250 RWA (100 *250%) will be distributed as follows.

              EntityInvestment ClassificationInvestment Amountas a % of all such investmentCalculation of amount not deducted to be risk weightedRisk weightRWASection
              ABanking Book6042%43 (100 x 43%)250%106.38Credit Risk
              BBanking Book3525%25 (100 x 25%)250%62.06Credit Risk
              CBanking Book2820%20 (100 x 20%)250%49.65Credit Risk
              DTrading Book1813%13 (100 x 13%)Equity Risk - Market risk section
                141100%100 

               

            • Appendix 2: Banking, Securities, Insurance and Other Financial Entities - Investment with Ownership Not More Than 10%

              Investment (ownership not more than 10%)
              EntityEntity activityInvestment ClassificationListed/UnlistedBank's ownership in the entity (% of Holding)Investment Amount
              EBankingBanking BookListed10%50
              FBankingTrading BookListed3%11
              GSecuritiesBanking BookUnlisted8%40
              HInsuranceBanking BookListed2%9
              a.Total investment (Banking, Securities, insurance and other financial entities)110
              b. Bank's CET1 (after applying all the regulatory deduction except section 3.9 and 3.10 of the Tier Capital Supply Standards)1000
              c. Limit (10% of bank's CET1)100
              d. Amount to be deducted from bank's CET1 (a-c)10
              e. Amount not deducted to be risk weighted (Remaining amount) (a-d)100

               

              The remaining amount of 75 is to be distributed amongst the investments on a pro rata / proportionate basis and risk weighted as stated below

              EntityInvestment ClassificationInvestment Amountas a % of all such investmentCalculation of amount not deducted to be risk weightedListed/ UnlistedRisk weightRWASection
              EBanking Book5045.5%45.50 (100 x 45.5 %)Listed100%34.50Credit Risk
              FTrading Book1110.0%10 (100 x 10.00%)ListedEquity Risk - Market risk section
              GBanking Book4036.4%36.4 (100 x 36.4%)Unlisted150%40.50Credit Risk
              HBanking Book98.2%8.2 (100 x 8.2%)Listed100%6.00Credit Risk
               110100%100 

               

            • Appendix 3: Significant Investments in Commercial Entities.

              Individual Investment Limit Check and its treatment
              Bank's CET1 (after applying all the regulatory and threshold deduction)1000
              Individual Limit (10% of bank's CET1D)100

               

              Step 1: Individual Limit check

              Significant investments in commercial entities
              EntityEntity activityInvestment ClassificationListed/ UnlistedInvestment AmountAmount as a % of bank's CET1Significant InvestmentAmount to RW at 952%Remaining amount
              ICommercialBanking BookListed14014%Yes40100
              JCommercialBanking BookListed12012%Yes20100
              KCommercialBanking BookUnlisted11011%Yes10100
              LCommercialBanking BookListed11512%Yes15100
              MCommercialBanking BookListed758%No 75
              NCommercialBanking BookListed455%No 45
              OCommercialBanking BookListed505%No 50
               655 85570

               

              Risk weighting at 952% on account of 10% threshold on individual basis is 85.

              Step 2: Aggregate Limit check

              Aggregate of remaining amount of investments after 10% deduction (entity I,J,K,L,M,N & O)570
              Aggregate Limit (25% of bank's CET1)250
              The amount to be risk-weighted at 952% based on the 25% threshold on aggregate basis250
              Remaining amount of investments to be risk-weighted under the applicable risk weighting rules (100% RW for listed and 150% unlisted)320

               

              Total amount to be risk weighted at 952%: 335 (85 + 250)

            • Appendix 4: Minority Interest Illustrative Example

              This Appendix illustrates the treatment of minority interest and other capital issued out of subsidiaries to third parties, which is set out in section 2.7 of the Tier Capital Supply Standard (Paragraph 35 to 41).

              A banking group consists of two legal entities that are both banks. Bank P is the parent, Bank S is the subsidiary, and their unconsolidated balance sheets are set out below

              Bank P Balance sheetAmount (AED)Bank S Balance sheetAmount (AED)
              Assets Assets 
              Loan to customers100Loan to customers150
              Investment in CET 1 of Bank S7  
              Investment in AT1 of Bank S4  
              Investment in T2 of Bank S2  
              Total Assets113Total Assets150
              Liabilities and Equities Liabilities and Equities 
              Depositors70Depositors127
              Common Equity (CET1)26Common Equity (CET1)10
              Additional Tier1 (AT1)7Additional Tier1 (AT1)5
              Tier 210Tier 28
              Total Liabilities and Equities113Total Liabilities and Equities150

               

              The balance sheet of Bank P shows that in addition to its loans to customers, it owns 70% of the common shares of Bank S, 80% of the Additional Tier 1 of Bank S and 25% of the Tier 2 capital of Bank S. The ownership of the capital of Bank S is therefore as follows:

              Capital issued by Bank S
               Amount Issued to ParentAmount Issued to third partyTotal
              Common Equity (CET1)7310
              Additional Tier1 (AT1)415
              Tier 111415
              Tier 2268
              Total Capital (TC)131023

               

              The consolidated balance sheet of the banking group is set out below:

              Consolidated Balance sheet of Bank P
              AssetsAmount (AED)
              Loan to customers250
              Total Assets250
              Liabilities and Equities 
              Depositors197
              Common Equity (CET1)26
              Additional Tier1 (AT1)7
              Tier 210
              Minority Interest 
              Common Equity (CET1)3
              Additional Tier1 (AT1)1
              Tier 26
              Liabilities and Equities250

               

              For illustrative purposes, Bank S is assumed to have risk-weighted assets of 100. In this example, the minimum capital requirements of Bank S and the subsidiary’s contribution to the consolidated requirements are the same since Bank S does not have any loans to Bank P. This means that it is subject to the following minimum plus capital conservation buffer requirements and has the following surplus capital:

              Minimum and surplus capital of Bank S
              CapitalMinimum plus Capital conservation BufferSurplus
              CET1(7% + 2.5%) of 100 = 9.50.50
              (10- 9.5 )
              T1(8.5%+ 2.5%) of 100 = 114.00
              (10+5-11)
              TC(10.5% +2.5%) of 100 = 1310
              (10+5+8 -13)

               

              The following table illustrates how to calculate the amount of capital issued by Bank S to include in consolidated capital, following the calculation procedure set out in paragraphs 35 to 41 of the Tier Capital Supply Standards.

              Bank S: amount of capital issued to third parties included in the consolidated capital.
              CapitalTotal Amount Issued (A)Total Amount Issued to third party (B)Surplus (C)Surplus attributable to third parties (i.e. amount excluded from consolidated capital) (D) = ( C) * (B/A)Amount Included in the consolidated capital (E) = (B)-(D)
              CET11030.50.152.85
              T115441.072.93
              TC2310104.355.65

               

              The following table summarizes the components of capital for the consolidated group based on the amounts calculated in the table above. Additional Tier 1 is calculated as the difference between Common Equity Tier 1 and Tier 1 and Tier 2 is the difference between Total Capital and Tier 1.

              Bank S: amount of capital issued to third parties included in the consolidated capital.
              CapitalTotal amount issued by Parent (all of which is to be included in consolidated capital)Amount issued by subsidiaries to third parties to be included in the consolidated capitalTotal amount of capital issued by parent and subsidiary to be included in the consolidated capital
              CET1262.8528.85
              AT170.087.08
              T1332.9335.93
              T2102.7212.72
              TC435.6548.65

               

            • Appendix 5: Threshold Deduction

              This Appendix is meant to clarify the reporting of threshold deduction and calculation of the 10% limit on significant investments in the common shares of unconsolidated financial institutions (banks, insurance and other financial entities); and the 10% limit on deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences.

              CET1 Capital (prior to regulatory deductions)1000
              Regulatory deductions:300
              Total CET1 after the regulatory adjustments above (CET1C)700
              Total amount of significant investments in the common share of banking, financial and insurance entities150
              Total amount of Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences150
              1

              *This is a “hypothetical” amount of CET1 that is used only for the purpose of determining the deduction of above two items for the aggregate limit. Amount of CET1 = Total CET1 (prior to deduction) – All the deduction except the threshold deduction (i.e. all deduction outlined in para 44 to 68 of the Tier Capital Supply Standards) minus the total amount of both DTA that rely on future profitability and arise from temporary difference and significant investments in the unconsolidated financial institutions.

            • Appendix 6: Effective Countercyclical Buffer

              Assume a bank has the following capital ratios

              Capital BaseMinimum Capital RequirementsBank's Capital Ratio
              Common Equity Tier 1 Capital Ratio7.00%9.50%
              Tier 1 Capital Ratio8.50%0.00%
              Tier 2 Capital Ratio2.00%4.00%
              Total Capital Ratio10.50%13.50%

               

              From the above table, the bank has fulfilled all minimum capital requirements. In addition, the bank has to meet the additional capital buffers:

              Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB)2.50%
              Countercyclical Buffer0.00%
              D- SIB1.00%
              Aggregated Buffer requirement (effective CCB)3.50%

               

              The table below shows the adjusted quartiles accordingly:

              Freely available
              CET 1 Ratio
              Minimum Capital Conservation Ratios (expressed as a percentage of earnings)
              Within 1st quartile of buffer: 0.0 % - 0.875%100 %
              Within 2nd quartile of buffer: > 0.875% - 1.75%80 %
              Within 3rd quartile of buffer: > 1.75% - 2.625%60 %
              Within 4th quartile of buffer: > 2.625% - 3.5%40 %
              Above top of the buffer: > 3.5%0 %

               

              As the bank does not have Additional Tier 1, the bank has to use 8.5% of its available CET1 to fulfill the minimum Tier 1 requirement of 8.5%. Only the proportion of CET1 that is not allocated to fulfill the minimum capital requirements is freely available to fulfill the buffer requirement. For this bank, 1% CET1 is freely available, because the bank already used 8.5% of its CET1 to fulfill the Tier 1 ratio. (9.5% available CET1 - 8.5% CET1 required to fulfill the Tier 1 minimum requirement of 8.5%).

              Impact: The bank breaches the effective CCB with 1% freely available CET1. Capital conservation is required by at least 80% of the bank’s earnings. Distributions to shareholders is limited to maximal 20% of the bank’s earnings (Central Bank approval of dividends still required).

        • II. Tier Capital Instruments

          • Introduction

            1.This guidance explains how banks should comply with the Tier Capital Instruments Standard. It must be read in conjunction with the Capital Regulation and Standards for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE. It also ensures that banks issue robust and simple Tier capital instruments.

            2.A bank needs to take into consideration the below points when issuing capital publicly or privately:

            1. a.The Central Bank expects that issuers will formulate the terms and conditions so that they are not complex, but as simple and as clear as possible.
            2. b.Prudential clauses of importance from a prudential point of view should not be written in italics. They should also not be worded in a way that makes it unclear whether they do actually apply (e.g. ‘it is expected that’, ‘if required by the regulation’, etc.). Terms and conditions must be worded clearly.
            3. c.The wording used must be in accordance with that in the Capital Standards/ Guidance.
            4. d.The text should avoid making references to ‘as determined by the bank’ or to regulatory reporting dates. All requirements must be fulfilled at any time.
            5. e.It is not desirable to specify the reference to say ‘under applicable law’ or ‘if required by the applicable banking rules’ when it is clear that legal requirements come directly from the Central Bank, Capital Regulation, Standards or as Guidance.
            6. f.A detailed list may easily create the impression that the list maybe exhaustive. The bank has to clearly note when a list is not exhaustive.

            Distributable Items:

            3.The definition of distributable items may change when the Central Bank introduces the solo level concept.

            Subordination:

            4.Additional Tier 1 instruments will rank below Tier 2 instruments by virtue of subordination. The instrument should not be subject to set-off or netting arrangements that would undermine the instrument's capacity to absorb losses.

            Redemption Notices:

            5.Where a notice has not been revoked as of the relevant date, it follows that a payment is due to the holder. Any non-payment thereafter may trigger an enforcement event. Any notice for redemption should become void and null as soon as the Central Bank declares that a PONV trigger event has occurred.

            Call of Instruments:

            1. a.Optional Call:
              The Central Bank does not prohibit the issuer to call the instrument at its option but only after a period of 5 years.
            2. b.Regulatory Call:
              The Central Bank does not prohibit the issuer to call the instrument in case of a capital event so that they become or, as appropriate, remain, qualified regulatory capital. However, the amount in case of a capital event can be the outstanding amount or the amount that qualifies as regulatory capital, if some amount of the instrument is held by the issuer or whose purchase is funded by the issuer, save where such non-qualification is only as a result of any applicable limitation on the amount of such capital.
            3. c.Tax Call:
              The Central Bank does not prohibit the issuer to call the instruments in case of a tax event. A tax event may occur at any time on or after the issue date. A tax event can occur as a result of a change in the applicable tax treatment of the instrument.

            Note that both the optional call and the tax call require the Central Bank’s approval.

            Changes of Terms and conditions:

            a. Insignificant Changes to Terms and Conditions (Variation):

            The issuer may vary the terms and conditions of the instrument subject to the condition of redemption in the Tier capital instrument Standard. Variation of the terms and conditions of the instrument can occur on optional call regulatory call, or tax call. Changes must be legally enforceable.

            b. Significant Changes to Terms and Conditions:

            Significant changes to the terms and conditions of the instrument will require the approval of the holders. Every instrument that undergoes significant changes needs to meet all requirements of the Tier Capital Instruments Standard.

            Every instrument with changed terms and conditions need to be re-approved by the Central Bank by applying Stage 2 of the Approval Process in Appendix B of the Tier Capital Instruments Standard (Stage 1 of the Approval Process can be omitted in this case).

            Coupon Payments:

            6.No provision should link a change in payments to contractual, statutory or other obligations, as payments are fully discretionary. Payments should also not be linked to payments on other Additional Tier 1 instruments.

            Dividend and Redemption Restrictions:

            7.Dividend stopper arrangements that prevent for example dividend payments on common shares are not prohibited by the Central Bank. Furthermore, dividend stopper arrangements that prevent dividend payments on other Additional Tier 1 instruments are not prohibited by Central Bank. However, stoppers must not impede the full discretion that bank must have at all times to cancel distributions/payments on the instrument, nor must they act in a way that could hinder the recapitalization of the bank. For example, it would not be permitted for a stopper on an Additional Tier 1 instrument to:

            1. i.attempt to stop payment on another instrument where the payments on this other instrument were not also fully discretionary;
            2. ii.prevent distributions to shareholders for a period that extends beyond the point in time that dividends/coupons on the instrument are resumed;
            3. iii.impede the normal operation of the bank or any restructuring activity (including acquisitions/disposals).

            8.A dividend stopper may act to prohibit actions that are equivalent to the payment of dividend, such as the bank undertaking discretionary share buybacks. The dividend stopper will remain until one coupon following the dividend stopper date has been made in full or an amount equal to the same has been duly set aside or provided for in full for the benefit of the holders of the instrument.

            Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA):

            To further clarify the MDA’s calculation, below is an example of the calculation:

            Bank Capital Holdings14.0%
              
            Bank Capital Requirements%
              
            CET17.0%
            AT11.5%
            Tier 22.0%
            Pillar 20.0%
            Capital Conservation Buffer2.5%
            Countercyclical Buffer0.000%
            D-SIB Buffer1.5%
            Total14.5%
              
            Combined Buffer4.0%
            Quartile of Buffer1.0%
            Bank Capital Gap0.5%

             

            Quartile 1Quartile 2Quartile 3Quartile 4
            0.01.0%1.0%2.0%2.0%3.0%3.0%4.0%

             

            The bank first will need to fulfill all minimum requirements. As the bank only has CET1 capital available, it needs to use CET1 capital to fulfill all minimum capital requirements (10.5%=7%+1.5%+2%). After fulfilling the minimum capital requirements, the bank has still 3.5% (=14.0%-10.5%) CET1 capital available to fulfill the combined buffer requirements of 4%. Hence, the Bank’s capital gap is 0.5%.

            From the table above 3.5% means that the bank is in the fourth of the buffer requirements. Therefore, the MDA is restricted to 60% of the bank’s earnings, which means the bank may distribute no other restrictions and limitations considered, up to 60% of the earnings in the form of dividend, Additional Tier 1 payments, and variable remuneration.

            Note that items considered to be distributions include dividends and share buybacks, discretionary payments on other Tier 1 capital instruments and discretionary bonus payments to staff. Payments that do not result in a depletion of CET1, which may for example include certain scrip dividends, are not considered distributions.

            Note also that earnings are defined as distributable profits calculated prior to the deduction of elements subject to the restriction on distributions. Earnings are calculated after the tax, which would have been reported had none of the distributable items been paid. As such, any tax impact of making, such distributions are reversed out. Where a bank does not have positive earnings and has a CET1 ratio less than 9.5%, it would be restricted from making positive net distributions.

            Gross-up Clauses:

            Gross-up clauses for Additional Tier 1:

            9.Gross up clauses are acceptable only if:

            1. i.It is activated by decision of the local tax authority of the issuer and not the investor,
            2. ii.The increased payments do not exceed distributable items,
            3. iii.The gross-up is in relation to the dividend and not the principal.

            Gross up Clauses for Tier 2:

            10.The second condition related to distributable items is not relevant for Tier 2 instruments, as Tier 2 coupons are not restricted by the amount of available distributable items. Therefore, Tier 2 gross-up clauses can be considered as acceptable if they are activated by a decision of the local tax authority of the issuer, and if they relate to dividend and not on principal. The other two conditions on gross-up clauses are, however, activation is still required by a local tax authority of the issuer and not the investor, and the gross-up is in relation to the dividend payments only not principal.

            Point of Non-Viability (PONV):

            11.The issuance of any new shares as a result of the Point of Non-Viability must occur prior to any public sector injection of capital so that the capital provided by the public sector is not diluted.

            Further guidance on grandfathering:

            12.If a Tier 2 instrument eligible for grandfathering begins its final five-year amortisation period prior to 1st January 2018, the base for grandfathering in this case must take into account the amortised amount, not the full nominal amount. As for the rate, if a Tier 2 instrument eligible for grandfathering begins its final amortisation period on 1st January 2018, then individual instruments will continue to be amortised at a rate of 20% per year while the grandfathering cap will be reduced at a rate of 10% per year. Note that each tranche needs to be treated as a separate tranche.

            Amortisation of Tier 2 instruments:

            13.During the last 5 years of the eligibility before maturity, the eligibility of Tier 2 instruments is written down by 20% per year, i.e. the eligible amount is calculated by multiplying:

            1. i.The nominal amount of the instruments on the first day of the final five year period of their contractual maturity divided by the number of calendar days in that period;
            2. ii.The number of remaining calendar days until the contractual maturity of the instruments.

            Documents required to be submitted for the application to issue new Tier Capital Instruments

            1. 1.The CN-01 form should be completed, filled and signed by the bank's Chief Executive Officer (CEO), Chief Financial Officer (CFO), Head of Internal Audit, Head of Compliance and Head of Risk.
            2. 2.Full terms and conditions, together with the risk factors relating to the instrument.
              1. i.Instruments of Islamic banks issued through an SPV must also provide the contract between the bank and the SPV
            3. 3.Shareholder Approval:
              1. i.Tier capital instruments require shareholder approval.
              2. ii.The approval shall relate to an issuance of the specific planned Tier capital instrument (Additional Tier 1 or subordinated Tier 2). Moreover, the approval should clearly mention that the instrument is subordinated; coupon payments may not be paid under certain circumstances, and contains a Point of Non-Viability (PONV) condition.
            4. 4.Legal opinion letters:
              1. i.Legal Opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the terms and conditions are compliant with the requirements detailed in the Capital Regulations, Standards and Guidance.
              2. ii.Legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the obligations contained in terms and conditions will constitute legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.
              3. iii.Legal opinion of an independent appropriately qualified and experienced lawyer that the Self-Assessment of the issuing bank meets the Conditions and the Capital Regulations
            5. 5.Capital planning and forecast:

            The Business as Usual (BAU) case should be formulated, such as:

            1. a)Amount of assumed issuance and the expected issuance date (e.g. Q1 2018).
            2. b)Capital structure: % in CET1, AT1, Tier 2 and deductions (using Basel 3 capital components)
            3. c)Five (5) year forecast of the Balance sheet, Profit & loss P&L, Risk Weighted Assets RWA.
            4. d)Amortization of Tier Capital Issuances: Subordinated Tier 2 in the last 5 years prior to maturity and AT1 Instruments, if they fall under a grandfathering rule, for example, 10% per year.
            5. e)Key assumptions and analysis (e.g. on balance growth, asset structure, conversation factors CCF for off balance, operational and market risk, total assets growth, of which businesses that will be the main driver for such growth) and CRWA (i.e. on balance sheet exposure in different industry) in numerical as well as qualitative aspect.

            6. Stress Testing Scenarios:

            The Stress Testing should be submitted in form of a presentation including the underlying data in Excel sheet.

            Two Scenarios should be provided as part of the presentation:

            1. a)Top 2 customers defaulting (point in time analysis permitted: End of Year): Definition of top 2 customers; name of top 2 customers; exposure (including on and off balance exposures); what type of eligible collateral and value of collateral, with two sub-scenarios:
              1. i.With average provisioning level of similar assets, and
              2. ii.75% provisioning level
            2. b)Central Bank’s Macro-Economic Stress Test
              1. Assumptions and results of the latest Macroeconomic stress tests performed by the Central Bank.
            3. 7.Non-Funding Notice: Neither the bank nor a related party over which the bank exercises control or significant influence can have purchased the instrument, nor can the bank directly or indirectly have funded the purchase of the instrument.
            4. Private Placements
            5. Offer letter is required for private placements, including risk factors and the bank's financial and risk situation.
            6. Market Conformity Analysis: The bank has to provide evidence on why the pricing of the instrument conforms to the market rate.
          • Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

            Question 1: The last bullet point mentions “Liability accounted instruments must set the loss absorption trigger at a level of 7.625%.” Is it Central Bank decision to have this trigger set at 7.625%? Are any triggers likely to be set for equity accounted instruments?
            It is Central Bank’s decision for the trigger level. However, the trigger level derives directly from Basel. Minimum capital requirement plus 0.625%. Note, that the consultation documents do not consult on a trigger for equity accounted AT1. However, in particular in conjunction with the development of a recovery/ resolution regulation, the introduction of a trigger level may also be discussed again, as pointed out in the presentation that was circulated with the Tier capital instrument documents.

            Question 2: Point of Non-Viability mentions that “A Point of Non-Viability means that the Regulator has determined that the issuer has or will become, Non-Viable without: (a) a Write-down; or (b) a public injection of capital (or equivalent support).”. We need clarification as to whether the PONV will be determined by the regulator or the issuer. Also, please advise under what circumstance will partial Write-down be permitted. The regulator determines whether the bank is non-viable or not. Partial write-down will be permitted only for exceptional cases. Explicit examples will not be provided to prevent any expectation.

            Question 3: Appendix A: Application Process 1.4: It is mentioned that “Stress Testing with a stress scenario of top 2 customers are defaulting”. Since many UAE banks have concentrations in this area, what loss rate needs to be applied in this stress scenario?
            Current status quo is two sub scenarios: 75% loss rate and average loss rate of the bank for such customers.

             

        • III. Credit Risk

          • I. Introduction

            1.This section provides the guidance for the computation of Credit Risk Weighted Assets (CRWAs) under the Standardised Approach (SA). This guidance should be read in conjunction with the Central Bank’s Standard on Credit Risk.

            2.A bank must apply risk weights to its on-balance-sheet and off-balance-sheet items using the risk- weighted assets approach. Risk weights are based on credit ratings or fixed risk weights and are broadly aligned with the likelihood of obligor or counterparty default.

            3.A bank may use the ratings determined by an External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) for credit ratings. In general, banks should only use solicited ratings from recognised ECAIs for the purposes of calculating capital requirement under the SA. However, in exceptional cases, the bank may use unsolicited ratings with the Central Bank approval.

            4.Note that all exposures subject to the SA should be risk weighted net of specific allowances and interest in suspense. The guidance must be read in conjunction with Securitisation, Equity Investments in Funds, Counterparty Credit Risk and Credit Valuation Guidance.

            5.The guidance set out in this section applies to all exposures in the banking book. Exposures in the trading book should be captured as part of a bank’s market risk capital calculations.

          • II. Clarification and Guiding Principles

            • A. Claims on Sovereigns

              6.UAE Sovereigns: The UAE Sovereign asset class consists of exposures to Federal Government and Emirates governments.

              7.Federal Government includes all the UAE Federal entities and Central Bank of the UAE (Central Bank). Banks have transition period of 7 years from the date of implementation for exposures to Federal Government that receive a 0% RW, if such exposures are denominated in AED or USD and funded in AED or USD. However, any claim on UAE Federal Government in foreign currency other than USD should be risk weighted according to the published credit risk rating of UAE Federal Government. In the absence of solicited rating for UAE Federal Government, unsolicited ratings are permissible for assigning risk weights for UAE Federal Government exposures.

              8.Emirates Governments’ exposures include exposures to the Ruler and the Crown Prince of each emirate acting in the capacity as ruler and crown prince, as well as exposures to the ministries, municipalities and other Emirates government departments. Banks have transition period of 7 years from the date of implementation for exposures to Emirates Governments that receive a 0% RW, if such exposures are denominated in AED or USD and funded in AED or USD. Any claim on Emirates governments in a foreign currency other than USD should be risk weighted according to the rating of the Emirate Government.

              9.GCC Sovereigns: If the regulators in GCC exercise their discretion to permit banks in their jurisdiction to allocate a lower risk weight to claims on that jurisdiction’s sovereign, denominated in the domestic currency of that jurisdiction and funded in that currency, the same, lower risk weight may be allocated to such claims (e.g. 0% assigned to the Government of Saudi Arabia if the exposure is denominated and funded in SAR). This is limited only to GCC sovereign exposures and this lower risk weight may be extended to the risk weighting of collateral and guarantees (refer to section on credit risk mitigation).

              10.All other exposures to sovereigns should be risk weighted according to the sovereign rating even if the national supervisory authority adopts preferential risk weights.

            • B. Claims on Public Sector Entities (PSEs)

              Non-Commercial PSEs

              11.Non-Commercial PSEs include administrative bodies responsible to the UAE Federal Government, to the Emirates Governments, or to local authorities and other non-commercial undertakings owned by the Federal governments, Emirates Governments or local authorities. These non-commercial PSEs do not have specific revenue- raising powers or specific institutional arrangements the effect of which is to reduce their risks of default. The risk of non-commercial PSE exposures is not equivalent to the risk of sovereign exposures and hence the treatment of claims on sovereigns cannot be applied to non-commercial PSE. However, in exceptional cases, a Non-Commercial PSE may receive the same treatment as its sovereign, if the entity has proven formal arrangements in place to the effect that there is no distinction between the risk of the entity and the risk of its sovereign. The Central Bank's GRE List would reflect this accordingly.

              12.If the UAE borrower satisfies the criteria in paragraph 13, the risk weight shall be the same as that for claims on banks. However, the preferential treatment for short-term claims on banks may not be applied. In particular, unrated non-commercial PSE qualify for 50% risk weight. The criteria are based on the principle that non-commercial PSEs qualify for lower risk weights because they have significantly lower risk than a commercial company does. In addition, banks are specifically required to ensure compliance with other aspects of the banking regulations when lending to these entities, for example, but not limited to, the Central Bank large exposure regulations.

              13.The alternative criteria listed are to be applied in determining whether an entity qualifies for treatment as a non-commercial PSE. The Central Bank provides a list (so-called GRE List) to all the banks in the UAE which includes non-commercial PSEs.

              1. i.Direct government (Federal or Emirate) ownership >50% directly or through a qualifying PSE that itself is majority owned by government.
              2. ii.An entity whose complete activities are functions of a government.
              3. iii.Its services are of public benefit including when services are sold directly to the public (e.g. electricity and water). The service provided should be of substantial public benefit and the entity should have a monopolistic nature and there should be a significant likelihood that the government would not let the entity go bankrupt.
              4. iv.Not listed on any stock exchange.
              5. v.Provides internal services to parent or sister companies only, and the parent company is itself a non-commercial PSE.
              6. vi.The function of the company is of a non-commercial nature and does not operate in a competitive market.
              7. vii.Does not operate overseas.

              14.In the case of a UAE sovereign guarantee given to a non-commercial PSE, with the Central Bank approval, the guarantee may be treated as eligible credit risk mitigation (CRM) to reduce the exposure provided the bank ensures compliance with the entire minimum regulatory requirements and operational requirements stated in the credit risk standard.

              Government Related Entities (GRE)

              15.These are commercial undertakings that are fully owned or more than 50% in ownership by Federal governments, or by Emirates governments. As these entities function as a corporate in the competitive markets even though the government is the major shareholder, Central Bank requires such exposures to be classified under GRE and get the same treatment of claims on corporate with the appropriate risk weights based on the credit rating of the entity.

              16.All banks must comply with the latest version of the GRE list for classification and risk weighting of entities. Banks that have information that would lead to the addition (or removal) of an entity to (or from) the GRE list must submit such information to the Central Bank. All banks must comply with the GRE list unless any addition or removal of entities is reflected in the GRE list.

              17.Banks Internal audit/compliance department should perform regular reviews to ensure the PSE and GRE classification complies with the Central Bank GRE list.

            • C. Claims on Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs)

              18.Exposures to MDBs shall in general be treated similar to claim on banks, but without using the preferential treatment for short term claims. However, highly rated MDBs, which meet certain criteria specified below, are eligible for a preferential 0% risk weight.

              1. i.Very high quality long-term issuer ratings, i.e. a majority of an MDB's external assessments must be AAA;
              2. ii.Shareholder structure is comprised of a significant proportion of sovereigns with long-term issuer credit assessments of AA- or better, or the majority of the MDB's fund-raising is in the form of paid-in equity/capital and there is little or no leverage;
              3. iii.Strong shareholder support demonstrated by the amount of paid-in capital contributed by the shareholders; the amount of further capital the MDBs have the right to call, if required, to repay their liabilities; and continued capital contributions and new pledges from sovereign shareholders;
              4. iv.Adequate level of capital and liquidity (a case-by-case approach is necessary in order to assess whether each MDB's capital and liquidity are adequate), and
              5. v.Strict statutory lending requirements and conservative financial policies, which would include among other conditions a structured approval process, internal creditworthiness and risk concentration limits (per country, sector, and individual exposure and credit category), large exposures approval by the board or a committee of the board, fixed repayment schedules, effective monitoring of use of proceeds, status review process, and rigorous assessment of risk and provisioning to loan loss reserve.

              19.MDBs currently eligible for 0% risk weight are the World Bank Group comprised of the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the International Finance Corporation, the Multilateral Investment Guarantee Agency and the International Development Association, the Asian Development Bank, the African Development Bank, the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, the Inter-American Development Bank, the European Investment Bank, the European Investment Fund, the Nordic Investment Bank, the Caribbean Development Bank, the Islamic Development Bank, the Council of Europe Development Bank, the International Finance Facility for Immunisation and the Asian Infrastructure Investment Bank. The list of MDBs is by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) and can be found on the website www.bis.org. All banks are required to refer to and comply with the BCBS list. Whilst the BCBS evaluates the eligibility of the entities on a case-by-case basis, the Central Bank has no role in the assessment and decision of entities being eligible for 0% risk weight.

            • D. Claims on Banks

              20.The types of claims that fall under this asset class are claims not limited to those due from banks, nostro accounts, certificates of deposit (CD) issued by banks, and repurchase agreements (repos). A risk weight of 50% (long term) and 20% (short term) is applied to claims on unrated banks. However, this treatment is subject to the provision that no claim on an unrated bank may receive a risk weight lower than that applied to claims on its sovereign of incorporation.

              21.Exposure to intra-group of the bank have to be risk weighted according to the external rating of the counterparty entity (e.g. exposures to the head office shall receive the risk weight according to the rating of the head office).

            • E. Claims on Securities Firms

              In addition to providing loans to other banks in the interbank market, banks provide loans to securities firms. The securities firms use these loans to fund the purchase of securities. Exposures to these securities firms shall be treated as claims on banks if these firms are subject to prudential standards and a level of supervision that is equivalent to those applicable to banks. Such supervision must include at least both capital and liquidity requirements. Exposures to all other securities firms that are not treated as claims on banks will be treated as exposures to corporates.

            • F. Claims on Corporates

              22.For the purposes of calculating capital requirements, exposures to corporates include, but are not limited to, exposures (loans, bonds, receivables, etc.) to incorporated entities, associations, partnerships, proprietorships, trusts, funds and other entities with similar characteristics, except those which qualify for one of the other exposure classes. The corporate exposure class does not include exposures to individuals.

              23.Claims on corporates may be risk- weighted based on the entity’s external credit rating assessment. The Central Bank may increase the standard risk weight for unrated claims where it judges that a higher risk weight is warranted by the overall default experience. As part of the supervisory review process, the Central Bank may also consider whether the credit quality of corporate claims held by banks warrants a risk weight higher than 100%.

            • G. Claims Included in the Regulatory Retail Portfolios

              To qualify for a 75% risk weight in the regulatory retail portfolio, claims must meet the four criteria stated in the Credit Risk Standard (orientation criterion, product criterion, granularity criterion and value criterion). All other retail claims should be risk weighted at 100%. For granularity criterion and value criterion, the aggregated exposure means gross amount (i.e. not taking any credit risk mitigation into account) of all forms of retail exposures, excluding residential real estate exposures. In case of off-balance sheet items, the gross amount will be calculated after applying credit conversion factors. In addition, “to one counterparty” means one or several entities that may be considered as a single beneficiary (e.g. in the case of a small business that is affiliated to another small business, the limit would apply to the bank’s aggregated exposure on both businesses).

              24.Claims secured by residential property and past due retail loans are to be excluded from the overall regulatory retail portfolio for risk weighting purposes. These are addressed separately in the asset classes for residential property or commercial real estate.

            • H. Claims Secured by Residential Property

              25.Claims secured by residential property are defined as loans secured by residential property that is either self-occupied or rented out. The property must be fully mortgaged in favor of the bank.

              26.The Loan-to-Value (LTV) ratio is the outstanding loan exposure divided by the value of the property. The value of the property will be maintained at the value at origination unless the Central Bank requires banks to revise the property value downward. The value must be adjusted if an extraordinary, idiosyncratic event occurs resulting in a permanent reduction of the property value. Such adjustment must be notified to the Central Bank. If the value has been adjusted downwards, a subsequent upwards adjustment can be made but not to a higher value than the value at origination.

              27.A 35% risk weighting shall apply to eligible residential claims if the LTV ratio is less than 85% and the exposure is less than AED 10 million. When the loan amount exceeds AED 10 million and the LTV is below 85%, the loan amount up to AED 10 million will receive 35% risk weight and the remaining amount above AED 10 million receives 100% risk weight.

              28.A risk weight of 75% may be applied by banks that do not hold information regarding LTVs for individual exposures

              29.For residential exposures that meet the criteria for regulatory retail claims and have an LTV greater than 85%, the 75% risk weight must be applied to the whole loan, i.e. the loan should not be split.

              30.The risk-weights in this asset class may be applied to a limit of four individual properties made to a single individual customer that are owner- occupied or rented out by a retail borrower. Any additional exposure to a customer with loans for four individual properties shall be classified as a claim on a commercial property and risk weighted with 100%.

            • I. Claims Secured by Commercial Real Estate

              31.Commercial real estate is defined as a loan granted by a bank to a customer specifically for the purpose of buying or constructing commercial property including residential towers and mixed use towers.

            • J. Past Due Loans

              32.Risk weights of past due loans depend on the degree of provision coverage on the claim. For any past due loan, 100% Credit Conversion Factor (CCF) should be applied for the off-balance sheet component to calculate the credit risk-weighted assets. Any exposure that is past due for more than 90 days should be reported under this asset class, net of specific provisions (including partial write-offs). This differs from the IFRS 9 classification as the past due asset includes any loans more than 90 days past due.

            • K. Higher-Risk Categories

              33.Higher risk weights may be applied to assets that reflect higher risks. A bank may decide to apply a risk weight of 150% or higher.

            • L. Other Assets

              34.Assets in this class include any other form of exposure that does not fit into the specific exposure classes. The standard risk weight for all other assets will be 100%, with the exception of the following exposures:

              a)0% risk weight applied to

              1. i.cash owned and held at the bank or in transit;
              2. ii.Gold bullion held at the bank or held in another bank on an allocated basis, to the extent the gold bullion assets are backed by gold bullion liabilities;
              3. iii.All the deductions from capital according to the Tier capital supply of Standards of Capital Adequacy in the UAE, for reconciliation between the regulatory return and the audited/reviewed financial statement.

              b)20% risk weight:

              1. i.Cash items in the process of collection.

              c)100% risk weight

              1. i.Investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities to which a credit risk standardised approach applies, unless they are deducted from regulatory capital according to section 3.9 of Tier capital supply of Standards Capital Adequacy in the UAE. (listed entity)
              2. ii.Investments in commercial entities below the materiality thresholds according to section 5 of Tier capital supply of Standards of Capital Adequacy in the UAE (listed);
              3. iii.Premises, plant and equipment and other fixed assets,
              4. iv.Prepaid expenses such as property taxes and utilities,
              5. v.All other assets

              d)150% risk weight

              1. i.The amount of investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities to which a credit risk standardised approach applies unless they are deducted from regulatory capital deduction according to section 3.9 of Tier capital supply of Standards of Capital Adequacy in the UAE (unlisted entity);
              2. ii.Investments in commercial entities below the materiality thresholds according to section 5 of Tier capital supply of Standards of Capital Adequacy in the UAE (unlisted entity).

              e)250% risk weight

              1. i.Investments in the capital of banking, financial and insurance entities to which a credit risk standardised approach, applies unless they are deducted from regulatory capital according to the threshold deduction described in section 3.10 of Tier capital supply of Standards of Capital Adequacy in the UAE.
              2. ii.Deferred tax assets (DTAs) which depend on future profitability and arise from temporary differences unless they are not deducted under threshold deductions described in section 4 of Tier capital supply of Standards of Capital Adequacy in the UAE.

              f)1250% risk weight

              1. i.Investments in commercial entities in excess of the materiality thresholds must be risk-weighted at 1/ (Minimum capital requirement) (i.e. 1250%).
            • M. Off-Balance Sheet Items: Credit Conversion Factors

              35.Under the standardised approach, off-balance sheet items are converted into credit exposure equivalents with Credit Conversion Factors (CCFs). CCFs approximate the potential amount of the off-balance sheet facility that would have been drawn down by the client by the time of its default. The credit equivalent amount is treated in a manner similar to an on-balance sheet instrument and is assigned the risk weight appropriate to the counterparty. The categories of off-balance sheet and its appropriate CCFs are outlined in the standard.

                  Calculating credit equivalent amounts for off-balance sheet item:

                  (Principal amount – provision amount) * CCF = Credit equivalent amount.

              Bank guarantees

              36.There are two types of bank guarantees viz. financial guarantees (direct credit substitutes); and performance guarantees (transaction-related contingent items).

              37.Financial guarantees essentially carry the same credit risk as a direct extension of credit i.e. the risk of loss is directly linked to the creditworthiness of the counterparty against whom a potential claim is acquired, and therefore attracts a CCF of 100%.

              38.Performance guarantees are essentially transaction-related contingencies that involve an irrevocable undertaking to pay a third party in the event the counterparty fails to fulfil or perform a contractual non-financial obligation. In such transactions, the risk of loss depends on the event which need not necessarily be related to the creditworthiness of the counterparty involved. Performance guarantees attract a CCF of 50%.

              Commitments

              39.The credit conversion factor applied to a commitment is dependent on its maturity. Banks should use original maturity to report these instruments.

              40.Longer maturity commitments are considered to be of higher risk because there is a longer period between credit reviews and less opportunity to withdraw the commitment if the credit quality of the customer deteriorates. Commitments with an original maturity up to one year and commitments with an original maturity over one year will receive a CCF of 20% and 50%, respectively.

              41.However, any commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the bank without prior notice, or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower’s creditworthiness, will receive a 0% CCF. This requires that banks conduct formal reviews of the facilities regularly and this provides the opportunity to take note of any perceived deterioration in credit quality and thereby cancellability by the bank.

              42.For exposures that give rise to counterparty credit risk, the exposure amount to be used in the determination of RWA is to be calculated according to the standardised approach for Counterparty Credit Risk (SA-CCR).

            • N. Credit Risk Mitigation (CRM)

              43.Only eligible collateral, guarantees, credit derivatives, and netting under legally enforceable bilateral agreements (such as ISDAs) are eligible for CRM purposes. For example, a commitment to provide collateral or a guarantee is not recognised as an eligible CRM technique for capital adequacy purposes until the commitment to do so is actually fulfilled.

              44.No additional CRM will be recognised for capital adequacy purposes on exposures where the risk weight is mapped from a rating specific to a debt security where that rating already reflects CRM. For example, if the rating has already taken into account a guarantee pledged by the parent or sovereign entity, then the guarantee shall not be considered again for credit risk mitigation purposes.

              45.Banks should ensure that all minimum legal and the operational requirements set out in the Standard are fulfilled.

              CRM treatment by substitution of risk weights

              46.The method of substitution of risk weight is applicable for the recognition of the guarantees and credit derivatives as CRM techniques under both the simple approach and the comprehensive approach. Under this method, an exposure is divided into two portions: the portion covered by credit protection and the remaining uncovered portion.

              47.For guarantees and credit derivatives, the value of credit protection to be recorded is the nominal value. However, where the credit protection is denominated in a currency different from that of the underlying obligation, the covered portion should be reduced by a standard supervisory haircut defined in the Credit Risk Standard for the currency mismatch.

              48.For eligible collateral, the value of credit protection to be recorded is its market value, subject to a minimum revaluation frequency of 6 months for performing assets, and 3 months for past due assets (if this is not achieved then no value can be recognised). Where the collateral includes cash deposits, certificates of deposit, cash funded credit-linked notes, or other comparable instruments, which are held at a third-party bank in a non-custodial arrangement and unconditionally and irrevocably pledged or assigned to the bank, the collateral will be allocated the same risk weight as that of the third party bank.

              Simple Approach

              49.Under simple approach, the eligible collateral must be pledged for at least the life of the exposure, i.e. maturity mismatch is not allowed.

              50.Where a bank has collateral in the form of shares and uses the simple approach, a 100% risk weight is applied for listed shares and 150% risk weight for unlisted shares.

              Comprehensive Approach

              51.Under the comprehensive approach, the collateral adjusted value is deducted from the risk exposure (before assigning the risk weight). Standard supervisory haircuts as defined in the Credit Risk Standard are applied to the collateral because collateral is subject to risk, which could reduce the realisation value of the collateral when liquidated.

              52.If the exposure and collateral are held in different currencies, the bank must adjust downwards the volatility- adjusted collateral amount to take into account possible future fluctuations in exchange rates.

              53.There is no distinction for applying supervisory haircuts between main index equities and equities listed at a recognised exchange. A 25% haircut applies to all equities.

              Capital Add-on under Pillar 2

              54.While the use of CRM techniques reduces or transfers credit risk, it gives rise to other risks that need to be adequately controlled and managed. Banks should take all appropriate steps to ensure the effectiveness of the CRM and to address related risks. Where these risks are not adequately controlled, the Central Bank may impose additional capital charges or take other supervisory actions as outlined in Pillar 2 Standard.

          • III. Shari’ah Implementation

            55.Banks that conduct all or part of their activities in accordance with the provisions of Shari’ah laws and have exposure to risks similar to those mentioned in the Credit Risk Standard, shall, for the purpose of maintaining an appropriate level of capital, calculate the relevant risk weighted asset in line with these guidelines. This must be done in a manner compliant with the Shari’ah laws.

            56.This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidelines in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services.

          • IV. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

            During the industry consultation the Central Bank received a number of questions related to the Credit Risk Standard and Guidance. To ensure consistent implementation of the Credit Risk Standard in the UAE, the main questions are addressed hereunder.

            Claims on Sovereigns

            Question 1: What does the 7-year transition for USD exposure to the Federal Government and Emirates Government mean for banks?
            During the 7-year transition period, banks are required to have a forward looking plan on USD exposures to Federal and Emirate governments. Banks shall monitor and manage the impact of the change in risk weights of exposures in USD on the bank’s capital position. Exposures in USD as well as the banks’ capital plans will be monitored by the Central Bank.

            Question 2: What is the appropriate risk weight for exposures to other GCC sovereigns?
            A 0% risk weight is applied to GCC Sovereign exposures denominated and funded in the domestic currency of their country. However, exposures in non-domestic currencies (including USD) shall be risk weighted according to the rating of sovereigns.

            Question 3: Does the Central Bank allow banks to apply unsolicited ratings in the same way as solicited ratings?
            Bank should use ratings determined by an eligible External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAIs). Only solicited ratings are allowed to be used. The Central Bank only allows unsolicited ratings from an eligible ECAI for the UAE federal government. All other exposures shall be risk weighted using solicited ratings.

            Claims on Non-Commercial Public Sector Enterprises

            Question 4: Can the bank include claims on a GCC PSE denominated in their local currency under claims of Non-Commercial PSEs?
            No, the preferential risk weights for Non-Commercial PSEs are only granted for UAE entities.

            Question 5: Do all the seven criteria stated in the credit risk guidance have to be met or any of the criterion can be met to classify an entity as non-commercial PSE? In addition, does the bank just follow the so-called GRE list or shall the bank apply the criteria to classify entities as non-commercial PSE?
            To classify entities as Non-commercial PSE, the Central Bank will consider in its approval process all seven criteria and in principle all seven criteria must be satisfied. A bank may approach the Central Bank, if the bank thinks that certain entities satisfy the criteria for a Non-commercial PSE that can be added to the GRE list. If banks have information that would lead to changes to of the GRE List, banks should inform the Central Bank accordingly.

            Question 6: The guidance requires that the bank’s internal audit/ compliance departments perform regular reviews to ensure the PSE and GRE classification complies with the Central Bank's GRE list. What is the expected frequency of such a review?
            The frequency of internal audit/compliance should be commensurate with the bank's size, the nature and risks of bank’s operations and the complexity of the bank.

            Claims on Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs)

            Question 7: Does an MDB need to satisfy all of the stated criteria or any one of the criteria to apply a 0% risk-weight?
            Exposures to MDBs may receive a risk weight of 0% if they fulfill all five criteria. However, the Central Bank does not decide whether an MDB satisfies the criteria or not. The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) evaluates each MDB’s eligibility for inclusion in the list of 0% RW on a case-by-case basis.

            Claims on Banks

            Question 8: For claims on an unrated bank, can the bank apply the preferential rating as per risk weight table for short-term exposures?
            A risk weight of 50% for long term exposures and 20% for short term exposures are applied to claims on unrated banks. However, no claim on an unrated bank may receive a risk weight lower than the risk weight applied to claims on its sovereign of incorporation, irrespectively of the exposure being short-term or long-term.

            Claims on Corporates

            Question 9: Should loans to High Net Worth Individuals (HNIs) be reported under claims in regulatory retail portfolio or claims on corporate?
            No, HNI classification should be aligned with the BRF explanatory note and should be reported under claims on corporate.

            Question 10: What is the treatment for SMEs and in which asset class are SME exposures reported?
            Answer: Banks have to follow BRF explanatory note 6.21 for the definition of SME. Exposures classified as SME according to BRF explanatory note, are for capital adequacy reporting purposes classified as “Retail SME” and “corporate SME”. SME exposures fulfilling all of four retail criteria as stated in Section III G of the Credit Risk Standard are reported under “claims on retail”. SME that do not fulfill the retail criteria are treated under claims on corporates as per Section III F of the Credit Risk Standard.

            Claims secured by Residential Property

            Question 11: Does the bank have to assign 100% RW for customers with more than 4 properties?
            Yes, if a customer has more than 4 properties, a bank has to report all properties of that customer as claims on commercial properties and the risk weight of the properties shall be 100%.

            Question 12: Can the bank apply a preferential RW of 35% for properties under construction?
            No, the preferential risk weight of 35% applies only to completed properties, as under construction, residential properties incur higher risks than buying completed properties.

            Claims Secured by Commercial Real Estate

            Question 13: Do loans with a collateral of a completed commercial property, irrespective of their purpose, fall under Claims secured by Commercial Real Estate?
            No, this asset class is for exposures specifically for the purpose of buying/ constructing commercial property, i.e. real estate loans.

            Higher-risk Categories

            Question 14: What type of exposure would fall under higher risk categories? What is the appropriate RW for higher risk categories?
            Almost all the exposures that receive 150% risk weight are reported under the respective asset class. The Central Bank will apply a 150% or higher risk weight, reflecting the higher risks associated with assets that require separate disclosure. For example, but not limited to, real estate acquired in settlement of debt and not liquidated within the statutory period shall be reported under the higher risk asset class with a 150% RW.

            Other Assets

            Question 15: The Credit Risk Standard states in section 5, that equity investment in commercial entities that are below the thresholds shall be risk weighted at 150% if the entity is unlisted. However, if the banking group has full control over the commercial subsidiary, can a lower risk weight be applied?
            A 150% risk weight reflects the additional risk the commercial subsidiary underpins on unlisted equity (absence of regulatory requirement, illiquidity, etc.) exposures than listed equity exposures.

            Issuer and Issuance Rating

            Question 16: What will be the treatment of a rated entity (e.g. corporate) that issues a bond?
            The bank must classify the bond based on the entity classification (Claim on Corporate) and assign risk weight based on the rating of the entity.

            Question 17: What will be the treatment of a rated entity (e.g. corporate) that issues a bond with a guarantee by the sovereign specific to the issuance and the bond gets a higher rating than the entity itself?
            Classify the bond based on the entity classification (Claim on Corporate) and assign risk weight based on the rating of the bond.

            Question 18: What will be the treatment of a rated entity (e.g. corporate) that issues a bond with a lower rating than entity?
            Classify the bond based on the entity classification (Claim on Corporate) and assign risk weight based on the rating of the bond.

            Question 19: What will be the treatment if an unrated entity (e.g. corporate) that issues a bond (unrated), but the bond has the guarantee from sovereign, specific and direct guarantee?
            Classify the bond based on the entity classification (Claim on Corporate) and assign the risk weight based on the bond rating (unrated). The guarantee should be used for credit risk mitigation by substituting the risk weight of the bond using the claims on sovereign mapping table (e.g. AAA - 0% risk weight).

            Question 20: What will be the treatment if an unrated entity (e.g. corporate) that issues a bond with a guarantee given by the sovereign to the entity (and not the bond)?
            Classify the bond based on the entity classification (Claim on Corporate) and assign the risk weight related to the unrated entity. The guarantee should be used for credit risk mitigation by substituting the risk weight of the bond using the claims on corporate mapping table (e.g. AAA - 20% risk weight).

            Off Balance-sheet Items

            Question 22: The Credit Risk Standards states that, “Any commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the bank without prior notice, or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower’s creditworthiness must be converted into credit exposure equivalents using CCF of 0%”. For using CCF of 0%, please provide explanation on being cancellable at any time without prior notice.
            Majority of the unconditionally cancellable commitments are subject to certain contractual conditions, which in practice may not render them as unconditionally cancelled and thereby do not qualify them for 0% CCF, implying that all the off-balance sheet items bear a risk to the bank. Bank shall conduct a formal review of the commitments at regular intervals to ensure that commitments can be cancelled from a legal and practical perspective.

            Credit Risk Mitigation

            Question 23: Is an approval required from the Central Bank to switch between the simple and comprehensive approach for Credit Risk Mitigation techniques? For a bank that applies the comprehensive approach, is an approval required to go back to the simple approach?
            A bank that intends to apply the comprehensive approach requires prior approval from the Central Bank. Once approved and if the bank wishes to go back to simple approach, a bank requires the Central Bank's approval again to go to the simple approach.

          • V. Appendix: Computation of Exposures with Credit Risk Mitigation Effects

            Bank A repos out cash of AED 1000 to a corporate with an external rating of AA. The corporate provides collateral in the form of debt securities issued by a bank with an external rating of AA. The debt securities have a remaining maturity of 7 years and a market value of AED 990.

            Minimum holding period for various products
            Transaction typeMinimum holding periodCondition
            Repo-style transaction5 Business daysDaily remargining
            Other capital market transactions10 Business daysDaily remargining
            Secured lending20 Business daysDaily revaluation

             

            The haircut for the transaction with other than 10 business days minimum holding period, as indicated above, will have to be adjusted by scaling up or down the haircut for 10 business days as per the formula given below:

            1

             

            VariablesDetails of the VariablesSupervisory haircutsScaling factorAdjusted haircuts
            HeHaircut appropriate to the underlying exposureExposure in the form of cash, supervisory haircut 0%0Not applicable
            HcHaircut appropriate to the CollateralDebt securities issued by a bank supervisory haircut 8%0.71Supervisory haircut (8%)* Scaling factor (0.71 )= 6%
            HfxHaircut appropriate for Currency MismatchNo Currency Mismatch0Not applicable

             

            The exposure amount after risk mitigation is calculated as follows:

            VariablesE*= max {0, [E x (1 + He) – C x (1 – Hc – Hfx)]}Value
            E*Net credit exposure (i.e. exposure value after CRM)69.4
            EPrincipal Amount, which is net of specific provisions, if any For off-balance sheet, it is the credit equivalent amount1000
            HeHaircut appropriate to the underlying exposure (cash)0
            CValue of the collateral before CRM990
            HcHaircut appropriate to the Collateral6%
            HfxHaircut appropriate for Currency Mismatch0

              Risk weighted asset for the exposure = (69.40 * 50% (AA)) = 34.70

              (Exposure * Risk weight)
             

        • IV. Counterparty Credit Risk

          • I. Introduction

            14.In March 2014, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) published a new approach for measurement of counterparty credit risk exposure associated with OTC derivatives, exchange-traded derivatives, and long settlement transactions, the standardised approach for CCR (SA-CCR). The approach in the Central Bank’s Standards for CCR closely follows the SA-CCR as developed by the BCBS in all material areas of substance.

            15.The BCBS developed the SA-CCR to replace the two previous non-internal model methods, the Current Exposure Method (CEM) and the Standardized Method (SM). The SA-CCR was designed to be more risk sensitive than CEM and SM. It accurately recognizes the effects of collateralization and recognizes a benefit from over-collateralization. It also provides incentives for centralized clearing of derivative transactions.

            16.As is the case with the CEM, under the SA-CCR the exposure at default (EAD) is calculated as the sum of two components: (i) replacement cost (RC), which reflects the current value of the exposure adjusted for the effects of net collateral including thresholds, minimum transfer amounts, and independent amounts; and (ii) potential future exposure (PFE), which reflects the potential increase in exposure until the closure or replacement of the transactions. The PFE portion consists of a multiplier that accounts for over-collateralization, and an aggregate add-on derived from the summation of add-ons for each asset class (interest rate, foreign exchange, credit, equity, and commodity), which in turn are calculated at the hedging set level.

          • II. Clarifications

            • A. Replacement Cost

              17.Note that in mathematical terms, replacement cost for un-margined transactions is calculated as:

              RC = max(VC; 0)
               

              where RC is replacement cost, V is the total current market value of all derivative contracts in the netting set combined, and C is the net value of collateral for the netting set, after application of relevant haircuts. (In the CCR Standards, the quantity V-C is referred to as the Net Current Value, or NCV.)

              18.For margined transactions, the calculation becomes:

              RC = max(VC; TH + MTANICA; 0)
               

              where TH is the threshold level of variation that would require a transfer of collateral, MTA is the minimum transfer amount of the collateral, and NICA is the Net Independent Collateral Amount equal to the difference between the value of any independent collateral posted by a counterparty and any independent collateral posted by the bank for that counterparty, excluding any collateral that the bank has posted to a segregated, bankruptcy remote account.

              19.When determining the RC component of a netting set, the netting contract must not contain any clause which, in the event of default of a counterparty, permits a non-defaulting counterparty to make limited payments only, or no payments at all, to the estate of the defaulting party, even if the defaulting party is a net creditor.

            • B. Netting

              20.The Standards requires that a bank should apply netting only when it can satisfy the Central Bank that netting is appropriate, according to the specific requirements established in the Standards. Banks should recognize that this requirement would likely be difficult to meet in the case of trades conducted in jurisdictions lacking clear legal recognition of netting, which at present is the case in the UAE.

              21.If netting is not recognized, then netting sets still should be used for the calculation. However, since each netting set must contain only trades that can be netted, each netting set is likely to consist of a single transaction. The calculations of EAD can still be performed, although they simplify considerably.

              22.Note that there may be more than one netting set for a given counterparty. In that case, the CCR calculations should be performed for each netting set individually. The individual netting set calculations can be aggregated to the counterparty level for reporting or other purposes.

            • C. PFE Multiplier

              23.For the multiplier of the PFE component, when the collateral held is less than the net market value of the derivative contracts (“under-collateralization”), the current replacement cost is positive and the multiplier is equal to one (i.e. the PFE component is equal to the full value of the aggregate add-on). Where the collateral held is greater than the net market value of the derivative contracts (“over-collateralization”), the current replacement cost is zero and the multiplier is less than one (i.e. the PFE component is less than the full value of the aggregate add-on).

            • D. Supervisory Duration

              24.The Supervisory Duration calculation required in the Standards is in effect the present value of a continuous-time annuity of unit nominal value, discounted at a rate of 5%. The implied annuity is received between dates S and E (the start date and the end date, respectively), and the present value is taken to the current date.

              25.For interest rate and credit derivatives, the supervisory measure of duration depends on each transaction’s start date S and end date E. The following Table presents example transactions and illustrates the values of S and E, expressed in years, which would be associated with each transaction, together with the maturity M of the transaction.

              InstrumentMSE
              Interest rate or credit default swap maturing in 10 years10010
              10-year interest rate swap, forward starting in 3 years13313
              Forward rate agreement for time period starting in 125 days and ending in one year10.51
              Cash-settled European swaption referencing 5-year interest rate swap with exercise date in 125 days0.50.55.5
              Physically-settled European swaption referencing 5-year interest rate swap with exercise date in 125 days5.50.55.5
              Interest rate cap or floor specified for semi-annual interest with maturity 6 years606
              Option on a 5-year maturity bond, with the last possible exercise date in 1 year115
              3-month Eurodollar futures maturing in 1 year111.25
              Futures on 20-year bond maturing in 2 years2222
              6-month option on 2-year futures on a 20-year bond2222

               

              26.Note there is a distinction between the period spanned by the underlying transaction and the remaining maturity of the derivative contract. For example, a European interest rate swaption with expiry of 1 year and the term of the underlying swap of 5 years has S=1 year and E=6 years. An interest rate swap, or an index CDS, maturing in 10 years has S=0 years and E=10 years. The parameters S and E are only used for interest rate derivatives and credit-related derivatives.

            • E. Aggregation of Maturity Category Effective Notional Amounts

              27.The Standards allows banks to choose between two options for aggregating the effective notional amounts that are calculated for each maturity category for interest rate derivatives. The primary formula is the following:

              1

               

              28.In this formula, D1 is the effective notional amount for maturity category 1, D2 is the effective notional amount for maturity category 2, and D3 is the effective notional amount for maturity category 3. As defined in the Standards, maturity category 1 is less than one year, maturity category 2 is one to five years, and maturity category 3 is more than five years.

              29.As an alternative, the bank may choose to combine the effective notional values as the simple sum of the absolute values of D1, D2, and D3 within a hedging set, which has the effect of ignoring potential diversification benefits. That is, as an alternative to the calculation above, the bank may calculate:

              |D1| + |D2| + |D3|
               

              This alternative is a simpler calculation, but is more conservative in the sense that it always produces a larger result. To see this, note that the two calculations would give identical results only if the values 1.4 and 0.6 in the first formula are replaced with the value 2.0. Since the actual coefficient values are smaller than 2.0, the first formula gives a smaller result than the second formula. Choosing the second formula is equivalent to choosing to use the first formula with the 1.4 and 0.6 values replaced by 2.0, increasing measured CCR exposure and therefore minimum required capital.

            • F. Maturity Factor

              30.Note that the Standards requires the use of a standard 250-day trading or business year for the calculation of the maturity factor and the MPOR. The view of the Central Bank is that a single, standardised definition of one year for this purpose will enhance comparability across banks and over time. However, the BCBS has indicated that the number of business days used for the purpose of determining the maturity factor be calculated appropriately for each transaction, taking into account the market conventions of the relevant jurisdiction. If a bank believes that use of a different definition of one year is appropriate, or would significantly reduce its compliance burden, the bank may discuss the matter with bank supervisors.

            • G. Delta Adjustment

              31.Supervisory delta adjustments reflect the fact that the notional value of a transaction is not by itself a good indication of the associated risk. In particular, exposure to future market movements depends on the direction of the transaction and any non-linearity in the structure.

              32.With respect to direction, a derivative may be long exposure to the underlying risk factor (price, rate, volatility, etc.), in which case the value of the derivative will move in the same direction as the underlying – gaining value with increases, losing value with decreases – and the delta is positive to reflect this relationship. The alternative is that a derivative may be short exposure to the underlying risk factor, in which case the value of the derivative moves opposite to the underlying – losing value with increases, and gaining value with decreases – and thus the delta is negative.

              33.The non-linearity effects are prominent with transactions that involve contingent payoffs or option-like elements. Options and CDOs are notable examples. For such derivative transactions, the impact of a change in the price of the underlying instrument is not linear or one-for-one. For example, with an option on a foreign currency, when the exchange rate changes by a given amount, the change in the value of the derivative – the option contract – will almost always be less than the change in the exchange rate. Moreover, the amount by which the change is less than one-for-one will vary depending on a number of factors, including the current exchange rate relative to the exercise price of the option, the time remaining to expiration of the option, and the current volatility of the exchange rate. Without an adjustment for that difference, the notional amounts alone would be misleading indications of the potential for counterparty credit risk.

              34.The supervisory delta adjustments for all derivatives are presented in the table below, which is repeated from the CCR Standards. These adjustments are defined at the trade level, and are applied to the adjusted notional amounts to reflect the direction of the transaction and its non-linearity.

              35.Note that the supervisory delta adjustments for the various option transactions are closely related to the delta from the widely used Black-Scholes model of option prices, although the risk-free interest rate – which would ordinarily appear in this expression – is not included. In general, banks should use a forward price or rate, ideally reflecting any interim cash flows on the underlying instrument, as P in the supervisory delta calculation.

              36.The expression for the supervisory delta adjustment for CDOs is based on attachment and detachment points for any tranche of the CDO. The precise specification (including the values of the embedded constants of 14 and 15) is the result of an empirical exercise conducted by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision to identify a relatively simple functional form that would provide a sufficiently close fit to CDO sensitivities as reported by a set of globally active banks.

              Supervisory Delta Adjustments
              Type of Derivative TransactionSupervisory Delta Adjustment
              Purchased Call OptionF
              Purchased Put OptionF-1
              Sold Call Option-F
              Sold Put Option1-F
              Purchased CDO Tranche (Long Protection)G
              Sold CDO Tranche (Short Protection)-G
              Any Other Derivative Type, Long in the Primary Risk Factor+1
              Any Other Derivative Type, Short in the Primary Risk Factor-1

               

              Definitions


              For options:

              2

               

              In this expression, P is the current forward value of the underlying price or rate, K is the exercise or strike price of the option, T is the time to the latest contractual exercise date of the option, σ is the appropriate supervisory volatility from Table 2, and Φ is the standard normal cumulative density function. A supervisory volatility of 50% should be used on swaptions for all currencies.


              For CDO tranches:

              2

               

              In this expression, A is the attachment point of the CDO tranche and D is the detachment point of the CDO tranche.


               

            • H. Complex Derivatives

              37.The Standards requires that complex trades with more than one risk driver (e.g. multi-asset or hybrid derivatives) must be allocated to more than one asset class when the material risk drivers span more than one asset class. The full amount of the trade must be included in the PFE calculation for each of the relevant asset classes. Asset-class allocation of complex derivatives is a point of national discretion in the Basel framework, and the Central Bank believes that requiring banks to identify such trades and allocate them accordingly places appropriate responsibility on banks that choose to engage in such trades.

              38.Examples of derivatives that reference the basis between two risk factors and are denominated in a single currency (basis transactions) include three-month Libor versus six-month Libor, three-month Libor versus three-month T-Bill, one-month Libor versus OIS rate, or Brent Crude oil versus Henry Hub gas. These examples are provided as illustrations, and do not represent an exhaustive list.

              39.Hedging sets for derivatives that reference the volatility of a risk factor (volatility transactions) must follow the same hedging set construction outlined in the Standards for derivatives in that asset class; for example, all equity volatility transactions form a single hedging set. Examples of volatility transactions include variance and volatility swaps, or options on realized or implied volatility.

              • I. Unrated Reference Assets

                40.The supervisory factor for credit derivatives depends on the credit rating of the underlying reference asset. The Basel framework does not provide a specific treatment of unrated reference assets. The Central Bank believes that credit derivatives on unrated reference entities are likely to be rare. However, for the sake of completeness, the Standards requires that any such credit derivatives be treated in a manner that is broadly consistent with the treatment of unrated entities in other aspects of the risk-based capital framework, through use of a Supervisory Factor corresponding to BBB or BB ratings as described in the Standards.

                41.For an entity for which a credit rating is not available, a bank should use the Supervisory Factor corresponding to BBB. However, where the exposure is associated with an elevated risk of default, the bank should use the Supervisory Factor for BB. In this context, “elevated risk of default” should also be understood to include instances in which it is difficult or impossible to assess adequately whether the exposure has high risk of loss due to default by the obligor. A bank trading credit derivatives referencing unrated entities should conduct their own analysis to examine this risk.

              • J. Commodity Derivatives

                42.Note that the Standards defines the term “commodity type” for purposes of calculation of exposure for CCR. A commodity type is defined as a set of commodities with broadly similar risk drivers, such that the prices or volatilities of commodities of the same commodity type may reasonably be expected to move with similar direction and timing and to bear predictable relationships to one another. For example, a commodity type such as coal might include several types of coal, and a commodity type such as oil might include oil of different grades from different sources. The prices of commodities of a given type may not move precisely in lock step, but they are likely to move in the same direction at roughly the same time, due to their dependence on common forces in commodity markets. Long and short trades within a single commodity type can be fully offset.

                43.For commodity derivatives, defining individual commodity types is operationally difficult. In fact, it is generally not possible to fully specify all relevant distinctions between commodity types, and as a result, a single commodity type is likely to include individual commodities that in practice differ to some extent in the dynamic behaviour they exhibit. As a result, not all basis risk is likely to be captured. Nonetheless, banks should attempt to minimize unrecognized basis risk through sound definitions of commodity types.

                44.The Standards requires a bank to establish appropriate governance processes for the creation and maintenance of the list of defined commodity types used by the bank for CCR calculations, with clear definitions and independent internal review or validation processes to ensure that commodities grouped as a single type are in fact similar. A bank can only use the specifically defined commodity types it has established through its adequately controlled internal processes.

                45.Trades within the same commodity hedging set (Energy, Metals, Agriculture, and Other) enjoy partial offsetting through the use of correlation values established in the Standards, with correlation values varying by asset subclass. More specifically, partial offsetting applies only to the systematic component, not the issuer-specific or idiosyncratic component. Note that Electricity is a sub-class of the Commodity asset class, but is itself part of the broader Energy hedging set, rather than constituting a distinct hedging set.

              • K. Single-Name and Index Derivatives

                46.For credit derivatives, there is one credit reference entity for each reference debt instrument that underlies a single-name transaction allocated to the credit risk category. Single-name transactions should be assigned to the same credit reference entity only where the underlying reference debt instrument of those transactions is issued by the same issuer.

                47.The approach for establishing the reference entity for equity derivatives should correspond to the general approach for credit derivatives.

                48.For credit derivatives with indices as the underlying instrument, there should be one reference entity for each group of reference debt instruments or single-name credit derivatives that underlie a multi-name transaction. Multi-name transactions should be assigned to the same credit reference entity only where the group of underlying reference debt instruments or single-name credit derivatives of those transactions has the same constituents. The determination of whether an index is investment grade or speculative grade should be based on the credit quality of the majority of its individual constituents.

                49.Again, the approach for equity index derivatives should follow the general approach for credit index derivatives.

              • L. Special Cases of Margin Agreements

                50.When multiple margin agreements apply to a single netting set, the netting set should be broken down into sub-netting sets that align with the respective margin agreement for calculating both RC and PFE.

                51.When a single margin agreement applies to multiple netting sets, RC at any given time is determined by the sum of two terms. The first term is equal to the un-margined current exposure of the bank to the counterparty aggregated across all netting sets within the margin agreement reduced by the positive current net collateral (i.e. collateral is subtracted only when the bank is a net receiver of collateral). The second term is non-zero only when the bank is a net poster of collateral: it is equal to the current net posted collateral (if there is any) reduced by the un-margined current exposure of the counterparty to the bank aggregated across all netting sets within the margin agreement. Net collateral available to the bank should include both VM and NICA. Mathematically, RC for the entire margin agreement is:

                1

                 

                where the summation NS ∈ MA is across the netting sets covered by the margin agreement (hence the notation), VNS is the current mark-to-market value of the netting set NS and CMA is the cash equivalent value of all currently available collateral under the margin agreement.

                52.An alternative description of this calculation is as follows:

                Step 1: Compute the net value, positive or negative, of each netting set. These calculated values correspond to the terms VNS in the expression above.

                Step 2: Sum the values of all netting sets with positive value, to get Total Positive Value (TPV). This corresponds to the term in the expression above:

                2

                 

                Step 3: Sum the values of all of netting sets with negative value, to get Total Negative Value (TNV). This corresponds to the term in the expression above:

                3

                 

                Step 4: Calculate the net current cash value of collateral, including NICA and VM. This corresponds to the term CMA in the expression above. If the bank is net holder of collateral, then CMA is positive; it is the net value held (NVH). If the bank is a net provider of collateral, then CMA is negative, and its absolute value is the net value provided (NVP). Note that either NVH>0 and NVP=0, or NVP>0 and NVH=0.

                One of the following cases then applies:

                Step 5a: If NVH>0 (so NVP=0), then RC = TPV – NVH, but with a minimum of zero – that is, RC cannot be negative.
                 

                or
                 

                Step 5b: If NVH=0 (so NVP>0), then RC = TPV + NVP – TNV, but with a minimum of TPV – that is, RC cannot be less than TPV.

                 

                53.To calculate PFE when a single margin agreement applies to multiple netting sets, netting set level un-margined PFEs should be calculated and aggregated, i.e. PFE should be calculated as the sum of all the individual netting sets considered as if they were not subject to any form of margin agreement.

          • III. Summary of the EAD Calculation Process

            The following diagram provides a visual summary of the CCR calculation of EAD for derivatives, based on replacement cost and potential future exposure.

            1

            2

          • IV. Frequently Asked Questions

            • A. Netting

              Question A1: Does a bank need written approval for each netting agreement it has in place, or will the Central Bank provide a list of pre-approved jurisdictions or counterparties?
              The bank should establish an internal process that considers the factors identified in the Standards. That process should be subject to internal review and challenge per the Standards. The Central Bank will review the identification of netting sets as part of the supervisory process, and notify the bank of any determinations that netting is not appropriate. The Central Bank will not provide a list of pre-approved jurisdictions or counterparties.

              Question A2: Do amendments to existing netting agreements require approval from the Central Bank?
              Amendments that do not raise new questions about the validity of netting need not be raised to the Central Bank for consideration.

              Question A3: What if netting is not valid? Can netting sets still be used for the calculation?
              If the requirements of the Standards for recognition of netting are not satisfied, then each transaction is its own netting set – a netting set consisting of a single transaction – and many of the calculations are much simpler.

              Question A4: Is use of the standard ISDA agreement sufficient to apply netting?
              No, use of the standard ISDA agreement is not in itself sufficient to demonstrate that netting is valid and legally enforceable in the relevant jurisdictions under the requirements of the Standards.

              Question A5: Can we treat trades with a UAE counterparty (UAE Bank or Foreign Bank operating in the UAE) having a signed ISDA / CSA as a netting set even though the UAE is not a netting jurisdiction?
              No, as noted above, use of the standard ISDA agreement is not in itself sufficient to demonstrate that netting is valid and legally enforceable in the relevant jurisdictions under the requirements of the Standards, and is not a replacement for a determination regarding the legal enforceability of netting.

              Question A6: If there is no netting agreement of any sort in place, what would the treatment be for trades with negative mark to market? Will they be included or excluded from the exposure calculation?
              Trades with negative value have RC=0, but still have counterparty credit risk, which will be reflected in the calculation of the PFE component of exposure.

            • B. Collateral

              Question B1: What haircuts should be applied to collateral for the calculations of exposure net of collateral?
              Banks should apply the standard supervisory haircuts from the capital framework.

              Question B2: If a counterparty places initial cash margin against a derivatives facility, but has no signed ISDA / CSA in place, can this cash margin be considered as collateral for Replacement Cost calculations?
              Yes, provided the arrangement allows the bank to retain the cash in the event of a default by the counterparty.

              Question B3: Can collateral received under a CSA be considered as part of the RC calculation in absence of a netting agreement?
              Yes. Note that in the absence of netting, the netting set would consist of a single trade and any collateral corresponding to that trade.

            • C. Classification of Trades

              Question C1: For a currency swap involving principal and interest exchange, since there is exchange rate risk in addition to interest rate risk, do we need to assign the notional to both the currency and interest rate classes?
              Yes, derivatives with exposure to more than one primary risk factor should be allocated to all relevant asset classes for the PFE calculation, so this transaction should be included in its full amount in both the Foreign Exchange hedging set and the Interest Rate hedging set.

              Question C2: In a cross-currency swap with principal exchange at the beginning and at the end, and with fixed-rate to fixed-rate interest exchange so that there is no interest rate risk, should this trade be included only in the foreign currency category?
              Yes, it should be treated as FX exposure.

              Question C3: Is there any prescribed PFE treatment for a derivative such as a weather derivative?
              Derivatives with "unusual" underlying such as weather or mortality are included in the "Other" hedging set within the Commodity asset class.

              Question C4: Can trades with gold as the underlying asset be treated as currency derivatives?
              No. Although gold often has been grouped with foreign exchange historically, for the CCR Standards it is to be treated as a metal within the commodity asset class.

            • D. Supervisory Delta Adjustment

              Question D1: What is the Supervisory Delta for FX Swaps and FX Forwards?
              These are linear contracts, so the Supervisory Delta is either +1 (for long positions) or -1 (for short positions).

              Question D2: The Standards states that the Supervisory Delta for a short position (one that is not an option or CDO) should be -1. However, if netting is not permitted, should the Supervisory Delta be set to +1 for all the short (as well as the long) positions?
              In principle, the Supervisory Delta should be -1 if the position is short. However, in the case of a single-trade netting set, there is no possibility of offsetting, so the sign of the Supervisory Delta does not affect the calculation.

              Question D3: In the case of an option strategy such as a straddle or strangle involving more than one type of option (e.g. a long call and a long put), which Supervisory Delta should be used?
              In the case of positions that involve combinations of options, the position should be decomposed into its simpler option components, appropriate Supervisory Deltas determined for each component, and the weighted average Supervisory Delta applied to the position as a whole.

              Question D4: In the case of an option strategy involving multiple options with only one leg having a possibility of exercise, can we consider this structure as a "short" position if we are net receiver of the premium and a "long" position if we are net payer of premium?
              As noted above, in the case of positions that involve combinations of options, the position should be decomposed into its simpler option components, appropriate Supervisory Deltas determined for each component, and the weighted average Supervisory Delta applied to the position as a whole. In this case, some of the Supervisory Deltas would be positive, and some would be negative. The sign of the overall Supervisory Delta would depend on the relative size of the positions, and the associated magnitude (in absolute value) of the deltas.

              Question D5: Should the same set of Supervisory Deltas be used in the case of path dependent options such as barrier options, or other complex options? For such products, the simple option delta formula may not be appropriate.
              Banks should apply the standardised formulas for the CCR calculations, including the Supervisory Delta adjustment for all options. Note that use of a single, simplified formula for the Supervisory Delta for options is a feature of the Standardised Approach. Like all standardised approaches, the SA-CCR involves numerous trade-offs between precision and simplicity. Many other aspects of the Standardised Approach use approximations, such as the assumption that a single correlation should be used for all commodity derivatives, or the use of a single volatility for all FX options. Banks should certainly use more analytically appropriate deltas for internal purposes such as valuation and risk management.

            • E. Hedging Sets

              Question E1: Can different floating rates within the same base currency be included in single hedging set?
              Yes, for interest rate derivatives, all rates within one base currency should be included in a single hedging set.

              Question E2: Is it possible to determine a hedging set in the absence of a netting set?
              Yes, without a netting set, the hedging set would consist of a single transaction, and the add-on would be simply the effective notional amount of that one transaction.

            • F. Maturity and Supervisory Duration

              Question F1: For Supervisory Duration, should S and E be based on original maturity or residual maturity?
              Calculation of S and E should be computed relative to the current date, not the date at which the trade was initiated; hence, they are most similar to residual maturity.

              Question F2: When calculating the remaining maturity in business days, should we follow the business calendar given in the master agreement, or the business calendar within the jurisdiction in which the bank is operating?
              The Basel Committee has provided guidance that the number of business days used for the purpose of determining the maturity factor must be calculated appropriately for each transaction, taking into account the market conventions of the relevant jurisdiction. The Central Bank follows this approach as well.

              Question F3: What is the maturity factor if the remaining maturity is greater than 250 business days?
              In that case, the maturity factor for the CCR calculations is equal to 1.0.

              Question F4: What would be the maturity of a derivative with multiple exchanges of notional over a period of time?
              The maturity date is the date of the final exchange or payment under the contract.

              Question F5: What is the Maturity Factor for deals such as callable range accruals where the call date is less than 1 year, but the deal maturity is more than 1 year?
              Since the deal maturity is more than one year, the Maturity Factor would be equal to 1.0.

            • G. Other

              Question G1: For certain capital calculations in the past, exchange rate contracts with an original maturity of 14 calendar days or less were excluded from certain capital requirements. Is that applicable for the CCR Standards?
              No, all in-scope exchange rate contracts must be included, regardless of original or remaining maturity.

              Question G2: A single hedging set might include derivatives on underlying rates, prices, or entities that span different Basel categories (e.g. corporates, financials, sovereigns); do these need to be calculated separately in order to compute and report RWA in the format required by the reporting template?
              No, the risk-weight, and the category for reporting in the Central Bank’s template, depends on the nature of the counterparty, not the nature of the underlying reference asset. The counterparty for any netting set will fall into one and only one category for risk weighting and for reporting.

              Question G3: For a variable notional swap, how should the average notional be calculated?
              Use the time-weighted average notional in the CCR calculations.

              Question G4: Should the current spot rate be used to compute adjusted notional?
              Yes, the current spot rate should be used.

              Question G5: Bank ask in case of calculating discounted counterparty exposure is a double count and will inflate CVA Capital charge given SA-CCR EAD already factors in maturity adjustment while computing adjusted notional which is product of trade notional & supervisory duration?
              The use of the discount factor in the CVA capital charge does not result in double counting. While there is superficial similarity between the supervisory duration (SD) adjustment in SA-CCR and the discount factor (DF) in CVA, they are actually capturing different aspects of risk exposure. The use of SD in SA-CCR adjusts the notional amount of the derivatives to reflect its sensitivity to changes in interest rates, since longer-term derivatives are more sensitive to rate changes than are shorter-term derivatives. In contrast, the use of DF in the CVA calculation reflects the fact that a bank is exposed to CVA risk not only during the first year of a derivative contract, but over the life of the contract; the DF term recognizes the present value of the exposure over the life of the contract. Thus, these two factors, although they have similar functional forms and therefore appear somewhat similar, are not in fact duplicative.

          • V. Illustrations of EAD Calculations

            • A. Illustration 1

              Consider a netting set with three interest rates derivatives: two fixed versus floating interest rate swaps and one purchased physically settled European swaption. The table below summarizes the relevant contractual terms of the three derivatives. All notional amounts and market values in the table are given in USD. We also know that this netting set is not subject to a margin agreement and there is no exchange of collateral (independent amount/initial margin) at inception.

              Trade #NatureResidual maturityBase currencyNotional (thousands)Pay Leg (*)Receive Leg (*)Market value (thousands)
              1Interest rate swap10 yearsUSD10,000FixedFloating30
              2Interest rate swap4 yearsUSD10,000FloatingFixed-20
              3European swaption1 into 10 yearsEUR5,000FloatingFixed50

              (*) For the swaption, the legs are those of the underlying swap.

              The EAD for un-margined netting sets is given by:

              EAD = 1.4 * (RC + PFE)
               

              • 1. Replacement Cost Calculation

                The replacement cost is calculated at the netting set level as a simple algebraic sum (floored at zero) of the derivatives’ market values at the reference date. Thus, using the market values indicated in the table (expressed in thousands):

                RC = max {V - C; 0} = max {30 - 20 + 50; 0} = 60
                 

                Since V-C is positive (equal to V of 60,000), the value of the multiplier is 1, as explained in the Standards.

              • 2. Potential Future Exposure Calculation

                All the transactions in the netting set belong to the interest rate asset class. So the Add-on for interest rate class must be calculated as well as the multiplier since

                PFE = multiplier × Add-onagg
                 

                For the calculation of the interest rate add-on, the three trades must be assigned to a hedging set (based on the currency) and to a maturity category (based on the end date of the transaction). In this example, the netting set is comprised of two hedging sets, since the trades refer to interest rates denominated in two different currencies (USD and EUR). Within hedging set “USD”, Trade 1 falls into the third maturity category (>5 years) and Trade 2 falls into the second maturity category (1-5 years). Trade 3 falls into the third maturity category (>5 years) of hedging set “EUR”.

                S and E represent the start date and end date, respectively, of the time period referenced by the interest rate transactions.

                Trade #Hedging setTime bucketNotional (thousands)SE
                1USD310,000010
                2USD210,00004
                3EUR35,000111

                 

                The following table illustrates the steps typically followed for the add-on calculation:

                StepsActivities
                1. Calculate Effective NotionalCalculate supervisory duration
                Calculate trade-level adjusted notional as trade notional (in domestic currency) × supervisory duration
                Effective notional for each maturity category = Σ(trade-level adjusted notional × supervisory delta × maturity factor), with full offsetting for each of the three maturity categories, in each hedging set (that is, same currency)
                2. Apply Supervisory FactorsAdd-on for each maturity category in a hedging set (that is, same currency) = Effective Notional Amount for maturity category × interest rate supervisory factor
                3. Apply Supervisory CorrelationsAdd-on for each hedging set = Σ(Add-ons for maturity categories), aggregating across maturity categories for a hedging set. One hedging set for each currency.
                4. AggregateSimple summation of the add-ons for the different hedging sets
                   Calculate Effective Notional Amount

                The adjusted notional of each trade is calculated by multiplying the notional amount by the calculated supervisory duration SD as defined in the Standards.

                d = Trade Notional × SD = Trade Notional × (exp(-0.05×S) – exp(-0.05 × E)) / 0.05

                TradeNotional AmountTime BucketSESupervisory Duration SDAdjusted Notional d
                Trade 110,000,00030107.86938680678,693,868.06
                Trade 210,000,0002043.62538493836,253,849.38
                Trade 35,000,00031117.48559228237,427,961.41
                   Calculate Maturity Category Effective Notional

                A supervisory delta is assigned to each trade in accordance with the Standards. In particular:

                1. Trade 1 is long in the primary risk factor (the reference floating rate) and is not an option so the supervisory delta is equal to 1.
                2. Trade 2 is short in the primary risk factor and is not an option; thus, the supervisory delta is equal to -1.
                3. Trade 3 is an option to enter into an interest rate swap that is short in the primary risk factor and therefore is treated as a purchased put option. As such, the supervisory delta is determined by applying the relevant formula using 50% as the supervisory option volatility and 1 (year) as the option exercise date. Assume that the underlying price (the appropriate forward swap rate) is 6% and the strike price (the swaption’s fixed rate) is 5%.

                The trade-level supervisory delta is therefore:

                TradeDeltanstrument Type
                Trade 11inear, long (forward and swap)
                Trade 2-1inear, short (forward and swap)
                Trade 31purchased put option

                 

                The Maturity Factor MF is 1 for all the trades since they are un-margined and have remaining maturities in excess of one year.

                Based on the maturity categories, the Effective Notional D for the USE and EUR hedging sets at the level of the maturity categories are as shown in the table below:

                Hedging SetTime BucketAdjusted NotionalSupervisory DeltaMaturity FactorMaturity category-level Effective Notional D
                HS 1 (USD)378,693,8681178,693,868
                236,253,849-11-36,253,849
                HS 2 (EUR)337,427,961-0.271-10,105,550

                In particular:

                Hedging set USD, time bucket 3: D = 1 * 78,693,868 * 1 = 78,693,868

                Hedging set USD, time bucket 2: D = -1 * 36,253,849 * 1 = -36,253,849

                Hedging set EUR, time bucket 3: D = -0.27 * 37,427,961 * 1 = -10,105,550

                   Apply Supervisory Factor

                The add-on must be calculated for each hedging set.

                For the USD hedging set there is partial offset between the two USD trades:

                Effective notional(IR) USD = [D22 + D32 + 1.4 x D2 x D3]1/2

                   = [(-36,253,849)2 + 78,693,8682 + 1.4 × (-36,253,849) × 78,693,868]1/2

                   = 59,269,963

                For the Hedging set EUR there is only one trade (and one maturity category):

                  Effective notional(IR)EUR = 10,105,550

                In summary:

                Hedging setTime BucketMaturity category-level Effective Notional Dj,kHedging Set level Effective Notional Dj,k (IR)
                HS 1 (USD)378,693,86859,269,963
                (Partial offset)
                2-36,253,849
                HS 2 (EUR)3-10,105,55010,105,549.58

                 

                Aggregation of the calculated add-ons across different hedging sets:

                Effective Notional(IR) = 59,269,963 + 10,105,550 = 69,375,513(No offset between hedging sets)

                 

                The asset class is interest rates; thus the applicable Supervisory factor is 0.50%. As a result:

                 Add-on = SF × Effective Notional = 0.005 × 69,375,513 = 346,878

                   Supervisory Correlation Parameters

                Correlation is not applicable to the interest rate asset class, and there is no other asset class in the netting set in this example.

                   Add-on Aggregation

                For this netting set, the interest rate add-on is also the aggregate add-on because there are no trades assigned to other asset classes. Thus, the aggregate add-on = 346,878

                   Multiplier

                The multiplier is given by:

                multiplier = min { 1; Floor+(1-Floor) × exp [(V-C) /(2 ×(1-Floor)×Add-onagg)]}

                   = min {1; 0.05 + 0.95 × exp [60,000 / (2 × 0.95 × 346,878]}

                     =1

                   Final Calculation of PFE

                In this case the multiplier is equal to one, so the PFE is the same as the aggregate Add-On:

                PFE = multiplier × Add-onagg = 1 × 346,878 = 346,878
                 

              • 3. EAD Calculation

                The exposure EAD to be risk weighted for counterparty credit risk capital requirements purposes is therefore

                EAD = 1.4 * (RC + PFE) = 1.4 x (60,000 + 346,878) = 569,629
                 

            • B. Illustration 2

              Consider a netting set with three credit derivatives: one long single-name CDS written on Firm A (rated AA), one short single-name CDS written on Firm B (rated BBB), and one long CDS index (investment grade). All notional amounts and market values are denominated in USD. This netting set is not subject to a margin agreement and there is no exchange of collateral (independent amount/initial margin) at inception. The table below summarizes the relevant contractual terms of the three derivatives.

              Trade #NatureReference entity / index nameRating reference entityResidual maturityBase currencyNotional (thousands)PositionMarket value (thousands)
              1Single-name CDSFirm AAA3 yearsUSD10,000Protection buyer20
              2Single-name CDSFirm BBBB6 yearsEUR10,000Protection seller-40
              3CDS indexCD X.IGInvestment grade5 yearsUSD10,000Protection buyer0

               

              According to the Standards, the EAD for un-margined netting sets is given by:

              EAD = 1.4 * (RC + PFE)
               

              • 1. Replacement Cost Calculation

                The replacement cost is calculated at the netting set level as a simple algebraic sum (floored at zero) of the derivatives’ market values at the reference date. Thus, using the market values indicated in the table (expressed in thousands):

                RC = max {V - C; 0} = max {20 - 40 + 0; 0} = 0
                 

                Since V-C is negative (i.e. -20,000), the multiplier will be activated (i.e. it will be less than 1). Before calculating its value, the aggregate add-on needs to be determined.

              • 2. Potential Future Exposure Calculation

                The following table illustrates the steps typically followed for the add-on calculation:

                StepsActivities
                1. Calculate Effective NotionalCalculate supervisory duration
                Calculate trade-level adjusted notional = trade notional (in domestic currency) × supervisory duration
                Calculate trade-level effective notional amount = trade-level adjusted notional × supervisory delta × maturity factor
                Calculate effective notional amount for each entity by summing the trade-level effective notional amounts for all trades referencing the same entity (either a single entity or an index) with full offsetting
                2. Apply Supervisory FactorsAdd-on for each entity in a hedging set = Entity-level Effective Notional Amount × Supervisory Factor, which depends on entity’s credit rating (or investment/speculative for index entities)
                3. Apply Supervisory CorrelationsEntity-level add-ons are divided into systematic and idiosyncratic components weighted by the correlation factor
                4. AggregateAggregation of entity-level add-ons with full offsetting in the systematic component and no offsetting in the idiosyncratic component

                 

                   Effective Notional Amount

                The adjusted notional of each trade is calculated by multiplying the notional amount with the calculated supervisory duration SD specified in the Standards.

                d= Trade Notional × SD = Trade Notional × {exp(-0.05×S) – exp(-0.05 × E)} / 0.05

                TradeNotional AmountSESupervisory Duration SDAdjusted Notional d
                Trade 110,000,000032.78584047127,858,405
                Trade 210,000,000065.18363558651,836,356
                Trade 310,000,000054.42398433944,239,843

                 

                The appropriate supervisory delta must be assigned to each trade: in particular, since Trade 1 and Trade 3 are long in the primary risk factor (CDS spread), their delta is 1; in contrast, the supervisory delta for Trade 2 is -1.

                TradeDeltaInstrument Type
                Trade 11linear, long (forward and swap)
                Trade 2-1linear, short (forward and swap)
                Trade 31linear, long (forward and swap)

                 

                Thus, the entity-level effective notional is equal to the adjusted notional times the supervisory delta times the maturity factor (where the maturity factor is 1 for all three derivatives).

                1

                 

                 

                TradeAdjusted NotionalSupervisory DeltaMaturity FactorEntity Level Effective Notional
                Trade 127,858,4051127,858,405
                Trade 251,836,356-11-51,836,356
                Trade 344,239,8431144,239,843

                 

                   Supervisory Factor

                 

                The add-on must now be calculated for each entity. Note that all derivatives refer to different entities (single names/indices). A supervisory factor is assigned to each single-name entity based on the rating of the reference entity, as specified in Table 1 in the relevant Standards. This means assigning a supervisory factor of 0.38% for AA-rated firms (Trade 1) and 0.54% for BBB-rated firms (for Trade 2). For CDS indices (Trade 3), the supervisory factor is assigned according to whether the index is investment or speculative grade; in this example, its value is 0.38% since the index is investment grade.

                 

                Asset ClassSubclassρSF
                Credit, Single NameAA50%0.38%
                Credit, Single NameBBB50%0.54%
                Credit, IndexIG80%0.38%

                 

                 

                 

                Thus, the entity level add-ons are as follows:

                 

                Add-on(Entity) = SF × Effective Notional
                 

                 

                TradeEffective NotionalSupervisory factor SFAdd-on (Entity)
                Trade 127,858,4050.38%105,862
                Trade 2-51,836,3560.54%-279,916
                Trade 344,239,8430.38%168,111

                 

                Supervisory Correlation Parameters

                 

                The add-on calculation separates the entity level add-ons into systematic and idiosyncratic components, which are combined through weighting by the correlation factor. The correlation parameter ρ is equal to 0.5 for the single-name entities (Trade 1-Firm A and Trade 2-Firm B) and 0.8 for the index (Trade 3-CDX.IG) in accordance with the requirements of the Standards.

                 

                Add-on(Credit) = [ [ ∑k ρk CR × Add-on (Entityk) ]2 + ∑k (1- (ρk CR)2) × (Add-on (Entityk))2]1/2

                 

                 

                 

                TradeρAdd-on(Entityk)ρ × Add-on(Entityk)(1 – ρ2)(1 – ρ2) × (Add-on(Entityk))2
                Trade 150%105,86252,9310.758,405,062,425
                Trade 250%-279,916-139,9580.7558,764,860,350
                Trade 380 %168,111134,4890.3610,174,120,000
                Systematic Component47,462Idiosyncratic Component77,344,042,776
                Full offsettingNo offsetting

                 

                   Add-on Aggregation

                 

                For this netting set, the interest rate add-on is also the aggregate add-on because there are no trades assigned to other asset classes. Thus, the aggregate add-on = 346,878

                 

                Aggregation of entity-level add-ons with full offsetting in the systematic component and no offsetting benefit in the idiosyncratic component.

                 

                Systematic Component47,462
                Idiosyncratic Component77,344,042,776

                 

                 

                 

                   Thus,

                 

                Add-on = [ (47,462)2 + 77,344,042,776 ]1/2 = 282,129

                 

                   Multiplier

                 

                   The multiplier is given by

                 

                multiplier = min {1; Floor+(1-Floor) × exp [(V-C)/(2×(1-Floor)×Add-onagg)]}

                 

                   = min {1; 0.05 + 0.95 × exp [-20,000 / (2 × 0.95 × 282,129)]}

                 

                      =0.96521

                 

                   Final Calculation of PFE

                 

                PFE = multiplier × Add-onagg = 0.96521 × 282,129= 272,313
                 

                 

              • 3. EAD Calculation

                The exposure that would be risk-weighted for the purpose of counterparty credit risk capital requirements is therefore:

                EAD = 1.4 * (RC + PFE) = 1.4 x (0 + 272,313) = 381,238
                 

            • C. Illustration 3

              Consider a netting set with three commodity forward contracts. All notional amounts and market values are denominated in USD. This netting set is not subject to a margin agreement and there is no exchange of collateral (independent amount/initial margin) at inception. The table below summarizes the relevant contractual terms of the three commodity derivatives.

              Trade #NatureUnderlyingPositionDirectionResidual maturityNotional (thousands)Market value (thousands)
              1Forward(WTI)
              Crude Oil
              Protection BuyerLong9 months10,000-50
              2Forward(Brent)
              Crude Oil
              Protection SellerShort2 years20,000-30
              3ForwardSilverProtection BuyerLong5 years10,000100

               

              • 1. Replacement Cost Calculation

                The replacement cost is calculated at the netting set level as a simple algebraic sum (floored at zero) of the derivatives’ market values at the reference date, provided that value is positive. Thus, using the market values indicated in the table (expressed in thousands):

                RC = max {V - C; 0} = max {100 - 30 - 50; 0} = 20
                 

                The replacement cost is positive and there is no exchange of collateral (so the bank has not received excess collateral), which means the multiplier will be equal to 1.

              • 2. Potential Future Exposure Calculation

                The following table illustrates the steps typically followed for the add-on calculation, for each of the four commodity hedging sets with non-zero exposure:

                StepsActivities
                1. Calculate Effective NotionalCalculate trade-level adjusted notional = current price × number of units referenced by derivative
                Calculate trade-level effective notional amount = trade-level adjusted notional × supervisory delta × maturity factor
                Calculate effective notional for each commodity-type = Σ(trade-level effective notional) for trades referencing the same commodity type, with full offsetting in commodity type
                2. Apply Supervisory FactorsAdd-on for each commodity type in a hedging set = Commodity-type Effective Notional Amount × Supervisory Factor
                3. Apply Supervisory CorrelationsCommodity-type add-ons are divided into systematic and idiosyncratic components weighted by the correlation factor
                4. AggregateAggregation of commodity-type add-ons with full offsetting in the systematic component and no offsetting in the idiosyncratic component
                Simple summation of absolute values of add-ons across the four hedging sets
                   Effective Notional Amount

                Trade-level Adjusted Notional calculation for each commodity derivative trade:

                di(COM) = current price per unit × number of units in the trade
                 

                TradeCurrent price per unit (unit is barrel for oil; ounces for silver)Number of units in the tradeAdjusted Notional
                Trade 1100100 barrels10,000
                Trade 2100200 barrels20,000
                Trade 320500 ounces10,000

                 

                The appropriate supervisory delta must be assigned to each trade:

                TradeDeltaInstrument Type
                Trade 11linear, long (forward & swap)
                Trade 2-1linear, short (forward & swap)
                Trade 31linear, long (forward & swap)

                 

                Since the remaining maturity of Trade 1 is less than a year, at nine months (approximately 187 business days), and the trade is un-margined, its maturity factor is scaled down by the square root of 187/250 in accordance with the requirements of the Standards. On the other hand, the maturity factor is 1 for Trade 2 and for Trade 3, since the remaining maturity of those two trades is greater than one year and they are un-margined.

                The trade-level effective notional is equal to the adjusted notional times the supervisory delta times the maturity factor. The basic difference between the WTI and Brent forward contracts effectively is ignored since they belong to the same commodity type, namely “Crude Oil” within the “Energy” hedging set, thus allowing for full offsetting. (In contrast, if one of the two forward contracts were on a different commodity type within the “Energy” hedging set, such as natural gas, with the other on crude oil, then only partial offsetting would have been allowed between the two trades.) Therefore, Trade 1 and Trade 2 can be aggregated into a single effective notional, taking into account each trade’s supervisory delta and maturity factor.

                1

                 

                Hedging SetCommodity TypeTradeAdjusted NotionalSupervisory DeltaMaturity FactorEffective Notional
                EnergyCrude OilTrade 110,0001 187250=0.865 10,000 x 1 x 0.865 + 20,000x(-1)x1 =-11,350 (full off-setting within the ‘Crude Oil’ commodity type)
                EnergyCrude OilTrade 220,000-11
                MetalsSilverTrade 310,0001110,000
                   Supervisory Factor

                For each commodity-type in a hedging set, the effective notional amount must be multiplied by the correct Supervisory Factor (SF). As described in the Standards, the Supervisory Factor for both the Crude Oil commodity type in the Energy hedging set and the Silver commodity type in the Metals hedging set is SF=18%.

                Thus, the add-on by hedging set and commodity type is as follows:

                Add-on(Typekj) = SFTypek(Com) × Effective NotionalTypek(Com)
                 

                Hedging SetCommodity TypeEffective NotionalSupervisory Factor SFAdd-on by HS and Commodity type
                EnergyCrude Oil-11,35018%-2,043
                MetalsSilver10,00018%1,800
                   Supervisory Correlation Parameters

                The commodity-type add-ons in a hedging set are decomposed into systematic and idiosyncratic components. The commodity subclass correlations parameters are as stated in the Standards, in this case 40% for commodities.

                Thus, the hedging set level add-ons are calculated for each commodity hedging set:

                Add-on(COM) = [( Σk ρj(COM) × Add-on (Typekj) )2 + Σk (1- (ρj(COM) )2) × (Add-on (Type j))2]k1/2

                Hedging SetCommodity TypeρAdd-on(Typek)Systematic Component (ρ × Add-on(Typek))2(1 – ρ2)Idiosyncratic Component (1 – ρ2) x (Add-on(Typek)) 2Add-onj (Only one commodity type in each HS) 
                EnergyCrude Oil40%-2,043(-817)20.840.84 × (-2,043)22,043 
                MetalsSilver40%1,800(720)20.840.84 × (1,800)21,800 

                 

                However, in this example, since only one commodity type within the “Energy” hedging set is populated (i.e. all other commodity types within that hedging set have a zero add-on), the resulting add-on for the hedging set is the same as the add-on for the commodity type. This calculation shows that when there is only one commodity type within a commodity hedging set, the hedging-set add-on is equal to the absolute value of the commodity-type add-on. (The same comment applies to the commodity type “Silver” in the “Metals” hedging set.)

                   Add-on Aggregation

                Aggregation of commodity-type add-ons uses full offsetting in the systematic component and no offsetting benefit in the idiosyncratic component in each hedging set. As noted earlier, in this example there is only one commodity type per hedging set, which means no offsetting benefits. Computing the simple summation of absolute values of add-ons for the hedging sets:

                Add-on = Σj Add-onj

                Add-On = 2,043 + 1,800 = 3,843

                   Multiplier

                The multiplier is given by

                multiplier = min {1; Floor+(1-Floor) × exp [(V-C)/(2×(1-Floor)×Add-onagg)]}

                   = min {1; 0.05 + 0.95 × exp [20 / (2 × 0.95 × 3,843)]}

                      = 1, since V-C is positive.

                   Final Calculation of PFE

                PFE = multiplier × Add-onagg = 1 × 3,843 = 3,843
                 

              • 3. EAD Calculation

                The exposure EAD to be risk weighted for counterparty credit risk capital requirements purposes is therefore

                EAD = 1.4 * (RC + PFE) = 1.4 x (20 + 3,843) = 5,408
                 

          • VI. Illustrations of Replacement Cost Calculations with Margining

            Calculation of Replacement Cost (RC) depends whether or not a trade is collateralized, as illustrated below and in the summary table.

            1

             

            Transaction CharacteristicsReplacement Cost (RC)
            No collateralValue of the derivative transactions in the netting set, if that value is positive (else RC=0)
            Collateralized, no marginValue of the derivative transactions in the netting set minus the value of the collateral after applicable haircuts, if positive (else RC=0)
            Collateralized and marginedSame as the no margin case, unless TH+MTA-NICA (see definitions below) is greater than the resulting RC

             

            1. TH = positive threshold before the counterparty must send collateral to the bank
            2. MTA = minimum transfer amount applicable to the counterparty
            3. NICA = net independent collateral amount other than variation margin (unsegregated or segregated) posted to the bank, minus the unsegregated collateral posted by the bank. The quantity TH + MTA – NICA represents the largest net exposure, including all collateral held or posted under the margin agreement that would not trigger a collateral call.

             

            • A. Illustration 1: Margined Transaction

              A bank has AED80 million in trades with a counterparty. The bank currently has met all past variation margin (VM) calls, so the value of trades with the counterparty is offset by cumulative VM in the form of cash collateral received. Furthermore, an “Independent Amount” (IA) of AED 10 million was agreed in favour of the bank, and none in favour of its counterparty. This leads to a credit support amount of AED 90 million (80 million plus 10 million), which is assumed to have been fully received as of the reporting date. There is a small “Minimum Transfer Amount” (MTA) of AED1 million, and a “Threshold” (TH) of zero.

              In this example, the V-C term in the replacement cost (RC) formula is zero, since the value of the trades is more than offset by collateral received; AED80 million – AED90 million = -10 million. The term (TH + MTA - NICA) is -9 million (0 TH + 1 million MTA - 10 million of NICA held). Using the replacing cost formula:

              RC = MAX {(V-C), (TH+MTA-NICA), 0}

              = MAX{(80-90),(0+1-10),0}

              = MAX{-10,-9,0} = 0
               

              Because both V-C and TH+MTA-NICA are negative, the replacement cost is zero. This occurs because of the large amount of collateral posted by the bank’s counterparty.

            • B. Illustration 2: Initial Margin

              A bank, in its capacity as clearing member of a CCP, has posted VM to the CCP in an amount equal to the value of the trades it has with the CCP. The bank has posted AED10 million in cash as initial margin, and the initial margin is held in such a manner as to be bankruptcy-remote from the CCP. Assume that the value of trades with the CCP are -50 million, and the bank has posted AED50 million in VM to the CCP. Also assume that MTA and TH are both zero under the terms of clearing at the CCP.

              In this case, the V-C term is zero, since the already posted VM offsets the negative value of V. The TH+MTA-NICA term is also zero, since MTA and TH both equal zero, and the initial margin held by the CCP is bankruptcy remote and thus does not affect NICA. Thus:

              RC = MAX {(V-C), (TH+MTA-NICA), 0}

              = MAX{(-50-(-50)), (0+0-0), 0}

              = MAX{0,0,0} = 0
               

              Therefore, the replacement cost RC is zero.

            • C. Illustration 3: Initial Margin Not Bankruptcy Remote

              Consider the same case as in Illustration 2, except that the initial margin posted to the CCP is not bankruptcy remote. Since this now counts as part of the collateral C, the value of V-C is AED10 million. The value of the TH+MTA-NICA term is AED10 million due to the negative NICA of -10 million. In this case:

              RC = MAX {(V-C), (TH+MTA-NICA), 0}

              = MAX{(-50-(-50)-(-10)), (0+0-(-10)), 0}

              = MAX{10,10,0} = 10
               

              The RC is now AED10 million, representing the initial margin posted to the CCP that would be lost if the CCP were to default.

            • D. Illustration 4: Maintenance Margin Agreement

              Some margin agreements specify that a counterparty must maintain a level of collateral that is a fixed percentage of the mark-to-market (MtM) of the transactions in the netting set. For this type of margining agreement, the Independent Collateral Amount (ICA) is the percentage of MtM that the counterparty must maintain above the net MtM of the transactions covered by the margin agreement. For example, suppose the agreement states that a counterparty must maintain a collateral balance of at least 140% of the MtM of its transactions. Further suppose for purposes of this illustration that there is no TH and no MTA, and that the MTM of the derivative transactions is 50. The counterparty posts 80 in cash collateral. ICA in this case is the amount that the counterparty is required to post above the MTM (140%x50 – 50 = 20). Since MtM minus the collateral is negative (50-80 = -30), and MTA+TH-NICA also is negative (0+0-20 = -20), the replacement cost RC is zero. In terms of the replacement cost formula:

              RC = MAX {(V-C), (TH+MTA-NICA), 0}

              = MAX{(50-80), (0+0-20), 0}

              = MAX{-30,-20,0} = 0
               

        • V. Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)

          • VI. Equity Investments in Funds

            • I. Introduction

              1.A credit valuation adjustment (CVA) is an adjustment to the fair value of a derivative instrument to account for counterparty credit risk. CVA is commonly viewed as the cost of counterparty credit risk. For any given position with a counterparty, this cost depends on the market’s perception of the riskiness of the counterparty, as reflected for example in counterparty credit spreads, as well as on the market value of the exposure, which typically depends on underlying market factors.

              2.During the financial crisis, banks suffered significant losses due to counterparty risk exposure on over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives. Various analyses have concluded that the majority of these losses came not from counterparty defaults but from fair value adjustments on derivatives. The value of outstanding derivative assets was written down as it became apparent that counterparties had become less likely to meet their obligations. These types of credit-related losses, reflected in changes in CVA, are now widely recognized as a source of risk for banks involved in derivatives activity.

              3.Under the Basel II market risk framework, firms were required to hold capital against the variability in the market value of their derivatives in the trading book, but there was no requirement to capitalize against variability in CVA. Counterparty credit risk capital under Basel II was based on the credit risk framework, and designed to provide protection against default and migration risk rather than the potential losses that can arise through variations in CVA.

              4.To address this gap in the prudential capital framework, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) introduced the CVA capital charge as part of Basel III in December 2010. The purpose of the Basel III CVA capital charge is to ensure that bank capital provides adequate protection against the risks of future changes in CVA.

              5.In line with the requirements of Basel III, UAE banks are required to calculate risk-weighted assets (RWA) for CVA risk under one of two approaches. Banks must use either:

              1. A standardised approach, described in the Standards and closely based on the standardised approach to CVA risk capital developed by the BCBS; or
              2. A simple alternative approach, under which a bank with an aggregate notional amount of non-centrally cleared derivatives less than or equal to 400 billion AED may calculate RWA for CVA by setting it equal to the bank’s counterparty credit risk (CCR) RWA.

              6.The Central Bank is fully aware of the BCBS view that CVA risk cannot be modelled by banks in a robust and prudent manner at this time. Accordingly, the Central Bank has determined that CVA approaches that rely on banks’ internal CVA models, or that use inputs derived from those models, are not appropriate for use in regulatory capital calculations by UAE banks.

              • I. Introduction

                1.In December 2013, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) published a revised framework for calculating the capital requirements for banks’ equity investments in funds held in the banking book. This followed a BCBS review of the risk-based capital requirements for banks’ exposures to funds, undertaken as part of the work of the Financial Stability Board (FSB) to strengthen the oversight and regulation of shadow banking. The BCBS review was undertaken to clarify the existing treatment of such exposures in the Basel II capital adequacy framework and to achieve a more internationally consistent and risk-sensitive capital treatment for banks’ investments in the equity of funds, reflecting both the risk of the fund’s underlying investments and its leverage.

                2.Following the approach developed by the BCBS in Capital requirements for banks’ equity investments in funds, (BCBS 266, published December 2013), the Central Bank Standards for minimum required capital for banks’ equity investments in funds relies on a hierarchy of three successive approaches to risk weighting of fund assets, with varying degrees of risk sensitivity and conservatism:

                1. The “look-through approach” (LTA): The LTA is the most granular approach. Subject to meeting the conditions set out for its use, banks employing the LTA must apply the risk weight of the fund’s underlying exposures as if the exposures were held directly by the bank;
                2. The “mandate-based approach” (MBA): The MBA provides a degree of risk sensitivity, and can be used when banks do not meet the conditions for applying the LTA. Banks employing the MBA assign risk weights on the basis of the information contained in a fund’s mandate or in relevant regulations, national legislation, or other similar rules under which the fund is required to operate; and
                3. The “fall-back approach” (FBA): When neither of the above approaches is feasible, the FBA must be used. The FBA applies a 1250 percent risk weight to a bank’s equity investment in the fund.

                To ensure that banks have appropriate incentives to enhance the risk management of their exposures, the degree of conservatism increases with each successive approach.

                3.The capital framework for banks’ equity investments in funds also incorporates a leverage adjustment to the risk-weighted assets derived from the above approaches to appropriately reflect a fund’s leverage.

              • II. Clarifications

                • II. Clarifications

                  • A. Scope

                    7.The CVA standards covers all of a bank’s non-centrally cleared derivative exposures. In the context of the CVA standards, derivatives are instruments whose value is based upon the price or value associated with an underlying reference entity. In general, derivatives exhibit the following abstract characteristics:

                    1. The transactions generate a current exposure or market value.
                    2. The transactions have an associated random future market value based on market variables.
                    3. The transactions have contractual terms that provide for an exchange of payments or an exchange of a financial instrument (including commodities) against payment.
                    4. The transactions are undertaken with an identified counterparty.

                    8.Other common characteristics of derivative transactions may include the following:

                    1. Collateral may be used to mitigate risk exposure, and may be inherent in the nature of some transactions.
                    2. Netting may be used to mitigate risk or to simplify operational aspects of the transaction.
                    3. Positions are frequently valued (most commonly on a daily basis), with the value dependent on market variables or their changes.
                    4. Margin payments may be employed, with margin held in various forms, and with re-margining agreements that allow for the adjustment of margin either daily or at some other established frequency.

                    9.In addition, the Central Bank has used national discretion to include securities financing transactions (SFTs) – transactions such as repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, security lending and borrowing, and margin lending transactions – within the scope of the CVA calculation. However, as the Standards note, if the Central Bank determines that SFT exposures at any individual bank are not a material source of CVA risk, the Central Bank may direct the bank to exclude SFTs from CVA capital calculations.

                    10.Consistent with the BCBS framework, all derivative transactions for which a central counterparty is the direct counterparty are excluded from the CVA capital calculation. Banks must calculate RWA for those centrally cleared transactions as specified in the Central Bank’s CCR Standards.

                    • A. Scope

                      4.The Standards covers banks’ equity investments held in the banking book. Note that equity positions within the trading book are covered by the market risk capital requirements that apply to trading book positions.

                      5.The Central Bank has chosen not to use the national discretion provided within the BCBS framework to exclude from the standard equity positions in entities whose debt obligations qualify for a zero risk weight. The Central Bank also has chosen not to use the national discretion provided within the BCBS framework to exclude from the scope of the standard equity investments made under identified official programs that support specified sectors of the economy

                    • B. CVA Overview

                      11.The Central Bank’s approach to minimum required capital for CVA risk is based closely on the standardised approach to CVA risk capital described in Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems (BCBS 189, December 2010, rev June 2011). A few elements also draw on clarifications and other information provided in BCBS publications responding to Frequently Asked Questions, or clarifications contained in Basel III: Finalising post-crisis reforms published by the BCBS in December 2017.

                      12.Regulatory CVA may differ from the CVA calculated under IFRS or other accounting standards. In particular, regulatory CVA excludes any consideration of the effect of changes in a bank’s own credit risk as perceived by the market. This means that regulatory CVA calculations do not consider so-called debit valuation adjustments, or DVA.

                      • B. General Design of the Capital Requirement

                        6.At a high level, the framework is designed such that the risk-weight for a bank’s equity investment in a fund depends on the average risk weight that would be applicable to the assets of the fund, and on the extent of use of leverage by the fund. The approach to the average risk weight for any fund will reflect one or more of the three approaches described briefly above (and described more fully in the Standards).

                        7.The illustration below gives a general overview of how the average risk weight and leverage are combined, subject to a cap of 1250%, and then applied to the bank’s equity investment in the funds.

                        1

                        8.For example, if the average risk weight of the assets held by the fund is 80%, and the fund is financed through half debt and half equity, then the ratio of assets to equity would be 2.0 and the risk weight applied to a bank’s investment in the fund would be:

                        80% x 2.0 = 160%

                        If instead the same fund is financed 90% by debt, then the ratio of assets to equity would be 10, and the risk weight applied to the bank’s investment in the fund would be 800% (80% x 10).

                        9.Another way to view the capital requirement for equity investments in funds is that a bank generally must count a proportional amount of the risk-weighted assets (RWA) of the fund as the bank’s own RWA for capital purposes, in proportion to the bank’s share of the equity of the fund. Ignoring the 1250% limit for simplicity, the RWA calculation can be written as:

                        2

                        The rearrangement of the terms in the equation highlights that the bank’s RWA from the EIF is the bank’s proportional share of the fund’s RWA – if the bank holds a 5% share of the equity in the fund, then the bank’s RWA is 5% of the total RWA of the fund. This is a logical treatment – if a bank effectively owns 5% of a fund, the bank must hold capital as if it owns 5% of the fund’s risk-weighted assets.

                         

                      • C. Hedging

                        13.The calculation allows banks to recognize the risk mitigating benefits of certain eligible CVA hedges. The Standards allows only certain types of instruments to serve as eligible hedges for CVA, specifically an index credit default swap (CDS), or a single-name CDS, single-name contingent CDS, or equivalent hedging instrument that directly references the counterparty being hedged. An option on an eligible CDS (that is, a swaption on such a CDS) can be eligible, provided the swaption does not contain a “knock out” clause that terminates the swaption in the case of a credit event. Eligible hedges that are included in the CVA capital charge are removed from the bank’s market risk capital calculation.

                        14.Other types of instruments must not be reflected as hedges within the calculation of the CVA capital charge, even if the bank views them as mitigating counterparty credit risk. For example, tranched or nth-to-default CDS instruments are not eligible CVA hedges. These instead must be treated as any other similar instrument in the bank’s portfolio for regulatory capital purposes.

                        15.In addition to the restrictions regarding the types of instruments that a bank may recognize as CVA hedges, only transactions entered into explicitly for the purpose of hedging the counterparty credit spread component of CVA risk can be eligible hedges. This means, for example, that a bank might have a single-name CDS referencing an OTC counterparty in its portfolio, and yet that CDS would not be eligible to offset the single-name CVA exposure within the CVA calculation if that CDS was not originated or acquired as part of the bank’s process to manage CVA risk for that particular counterparty.

                        16.To clearly demonstrate intent to manage CVA risk, the bank should have a documented CVA risk management process or program, so that any CVA hedging transaction is demonstrably consistent with the design and operation of that program, was entered into with the intent to mitigate the counterparty credit spread component of CVA risk, and continues to be managed by the bank in a manner consistent with that intent. The Central Bank expects that any bank wishing to recognize the benefits of hedges in CVA capital calculations will maintain policies and procedures to govern this process. If the Central Bank concludes that a bank’s CVA hedging policies and procedures are inadequate, the Central Bank may limit the bank’s ability to recognize hedges in CVA capital calculations.

                        17.Another key principle for CVA hedging is that risk mitigation should transfer risk to third parties external to the bank. Some banks use internal transactions to transfer risk between different desks or business units within the bank as part of a broader risk management program, with these transactions typically subject to some type of internal transfer pricing mechanism. Such transactions are permissible and can be a valid component of the management of CVA risk within a bank, but the risk ultimately should be transferred out of the bank, which generally requires a corresponding external transaction to reduce CVA risk.

                        • C. Look-Through Approach

                          10.The LTA requires a bank to assign the same risk weights to the underlying exposures of a fund as would be assigned if the bank held the exposures directly. The information used for to determine the risk weights must meet the requirements stated in the Standards, including sufficiency, frequency, and third party review. However, that information is not required to be derived from sources that are subject to an external audit.

                          11.RWA and assets of investment funds should, to the extent possible, be evaluated using the same accounting standards the bank would apply if the assets were held directly. However, where this is not possible due to constraints on available information, the evaluation can be based on the accounting standards applied by the investment fund, provided the treatment of the numerator (RWA) and the denominator (total unweighted assets) is consistent.

                          12.If a bank relies on third-party calculations for determining the underlying risk weights of the exposures of the fund, the risk weights should be increased by a factor of 1.2 times to compensate for the fact that the bank cannot be certain about the accuracy of third-party information. For instance, any exposure that is ordinarily subject to a 20% risk weight under the risk-based capital standards would be weighted at 24% (1.2×20%) when the look-through is performed by a third party.

                        • D. CVA Capital Concept

                          18.The standardised approach for calculation of CVA capital is a form of a value-at-risk calculation, an approach commonly used to set capital requirements. Changes in CVA can be viewed as following some distribution, such as the normal distribution illustrated in Figure 2. Conceptually, the general approach to CVA capital is to estimate a level of CVA losses that should be expected to be exceeded no more than a given percentage of the time. The CVA capital calculation reflects a value-at-risk calculation with a one-year, 99% confidence level for CVA risk. Assuming a normal distribution (or equivalently, a log-normal distribution for the underlying risk factors), losses can be expected to be within 2.33 standard deviations of the mean 99% of the time. That concept is illustrated in Figure 2, where the 1% negative tail of the distribution has been highlighted (in this case, σ is the standard deviation).

                          Figure 2

                          1

                          19. Accordingly, the general form of the CVA capital calculation depends on the standard deviation of CVA losses:

                          1

                           

                          The normality assumption, together with a desired 99% confidence level, is the reason for the inclusion of a 2.33 multiplication factor in the CVA capital formula. Other elements of the CVA capital calculation reflect a theoretical approximation of the variance of changes in CVA.

                          • D. Mandate-Based Approach

                            13.Under the MBA, banks may use the information contained in a fund’s mandate, or in the rules or regulations governing such investment funds in the relevant jurisdiction. Information used for this purpose is not strictly limited to a fund’s mandate or to national regulations or other requirements that govern such funds. For example, a bank could obtain information from the fund’s prospectus or from other disclosures of the fund.

                            14.To ensure that all underlying risks are taken into account (including CCR) and that the MBA renders capital requirements no less than the LTA, the Standards requires that risk-weighted assets for funds’ exposures be calculated as the sum of three items:

                            1. On-balance-sheet exposures;
                            2. Off-balance-sheet exposures including notional value of derivatives exposures; and
                            3. CCR exposure for derivatives.

                            15.As with the LTA, for purposes of the MBA the RWA and assets of investment funds should, to the extent possible, be evaluated using the same accounting standards the bank would apply if the assets were held directly. However, where this is not possible due to constraints on available information, the evaluation can be based on the accounting standards applied by the investment fund, provided the treatment of the numerator (RWA) and the denominator (total unweighted assets) is consistent.

                            16.In general, the MBA aims to take a conservative approach by calculating the highest risk-weighted assets the fund could achieve under the terms of its mandate or governing laws and regulations. Under the MBA, the bank should assume that the fund’s assets are first invested to the maximum extent allowable in assets that would attract the highest risk weight, and then to the maximum extent allowable in the next riskiest type of asset, and so on until all of the fund’s balance sheet assets have been assigned to a risk-weight category. If more than one risk weight could be applied to a given exposure, the bank must use the maximum applicable risk weight. For example, if the mandate does not place restrictions on the rating quality of the fund’s investments in corporate bonds, the bank should apply a risk weight of 150% to the fund’s corporate bond positions.

                            17.For derivatives, when the replacement cost is unknown, the Standards takes a conservative approach by setting replacement cost equal to the notional amount of the derivatives contracts. When the notional amount of a fund’s derivative exposure is unknown, the approach again is conservative: the bank should use the maximum notional amount of derivatives allowed under the fund’s mandate. When the PFE for derivatives is unknown, the PFE add-on should be set at 15% of the notional value. Thus, if the replacement cost and PFE add-on both are unknown, a total multiplication factor of 1.15 must be applied to the notional amount to reflect the CCR exposure.

                            18.Instead of determining a CVA charge associated with the fund’s derivative exposures, the Standards allows banks to multiply the CCR exposure by a factor of 1.5 before applying the risk weight associated with the counterparty. However, a bank is not required to apply the 1.5 factor for situations in which the CVA capital charge would not otherwise be applicable. Notably, this includes derivative transactions for which the direct counterparty is a qualifying central counterparty.

                          • E. CVA Capital Formula

                            20.In the BCBS publication of Basel III, banks using the standardised approach to calculate CVA capital are to use the following formula:

                            1

                             

                            21.The Central Bank’s CVA calculation, while based directly on the BCBS formula and producing the same result, uses different (generally simpler) notation. The nature of, and motivation for, the main notational differences are explained in this section.

                            22.A minor difference in notation is the omission of the multiplicative term “2” from the BCBS formulation. This term was included by the BCBS to allow the CVA capital calculation to be adjusted to an appropriate prudential horizon. However, in the ultimate calibration of the CVA calculation the horizon h was established at one year, and hence h=1. Since the square root of 1 is also 1, and the term is a multiplicative factor, it has no impact on the resulting capital. Some other jurisdictions have recognized this fact, and have omitted the 3from the CVA calculation for simplicity in their published capital regulations. The Central Bank has followed this approach.

                            23.Another difference between the BCBS notation and the presentation of the formula in the Standards is the concept of “single-name exposure” or SNE. Under the Standards, a bank calculates SNE for each counterparty as:

                            SNEi = EADiTotal × DFiHi × DFH
                             

                            In this calculation, EADiTotal is the bank’s total exposure to counterparty “i” across all derivatives netting sets plus the counterparty exposure measure arising from SFTs with that counterparty, and Hi is the total notional of eligible single-name CVA hedges for that counterparty. (The symbol H is used in place of B in the BCBS formula, an appropriate adjustment of notation since it reflects hedge instruments. DF is a supervisory discount factor, described further below.) In effect, the discounted value of the individual counterparty exposure is offset by the discounted value of eligible single-name CVA hedges for that counterparty. The Central Bank regards SNE as a useful concept, because it reflects single-name exposure net of hedges. Its use also simplifies presentation of the CVA capital formulas.

                            24.The form of the supervisory discount factor DF in the Standards differs somewhat from the corresponding BCBS notation. Specifically, DF is defined in the CVA Standards as:

                            2

                             

                            This form of DF is in effect the continuous-time present value of an M-period annuity of one AED discounted at a rate of 5%.

                             

                            25. In contrast, the BCBS formula includes the maturity term M directly in the denominator of the supervisory discount factor, as follows:

                             

                            3

                             

                            However, the BCBS formula for CVA capital also multiplies by M as part of the CVA capital calculation. As a result of that multiplication, the M in the denominator of the discount factor is cancelled out, making the overall result the same as that provided by DF in the Standards. The formulation in the BCBS text was designed to accommodate the fact that banks using internal models incorporate discounting into the calculation of counterparty exposure, and those banks are required to set the BCBS supervisory discount factor to one, while retaining the multiplication by M. However, since internal-model approaches are not used for regulatory capital purposes in the UAE, this flexibility is not needed, and the simpler version of the calculation has been specified in the Standards. If for operational or other reasons a bank finds using the Basel formulation of the discount factor more convenient, its use is acceptable, provided the bank also multiplies the resulting discount factor by M.

                             

                            26.If the bank uses single-name hedging only, the bank aggregates SNE across counterparties to calculate CVA capital using the following formula:

                             

                            4

                             

                            where K is CVA capital, and Wi is the risk weight applicable to counterparty “i” taken from the risk-weight table in the Standards.

                             

                            27.An important insight is that CVA risk has both a systematic component and an idiosyncratic component. The systematic component reflects the fact that credit risks of different counterparties tend to be at least somewhat correlated with one another and move in concert, due to a degree of dependence on the same general economic or market factors. This kind of common risk potentially can be hedged, but cannot be reduced through diversification across counterparties. The non-systematic, or idiosyncratic, component of CVA risk arises from factors that affect credit spreads but are specific to an individual counterparty. In contrast to the systematic risk, the idiosyncratic part of CVA risk can be reduced through diversification, as well as through hedging. If a CVA portfolio is diversified to include many counterparties, it is not very likely that they would all suffer idiosyncratic credit deterioration at the same time, so overall risk is reduced; gains on some may offset losses on others.

                             

                            28.The CVA capital calculation recognizes the difference between these two kinds of risk, and treats them differently in the calculation. The first term in the square root in the capital calculation reflects the systematic component of CVA variance:

                             

                            4

                             

                            The exposures are weighted and summed before squaring. Holding risk weights constant, spreading a given amount of exposure across more counterparties has no effect on this sum; although there will be more individual terms in the summation, the sum will be the same, and thus there are no gains from diversification. The second term in the square root reflects the idiosyncratic CVA risk:

                             

                            5

                             

                            Here, because the weighted exposures are squared before summing, spreading a given amount of exposure across more counterparties reduces the total, reflecting the beneficial, risk-reducing effects of diversifying the idiosyncratic component of counterparty credit risk.

                             

                            29.An alternative arrangement of the CVA capital calculation may provide additional intuition:

                             

                            6

                             

                            This form, which separates the factor of 0.5 from the rest of the systematic portion before it is raised to the second power, highlights the fact that the CVA calculation can be viewed as effectively a weighted average of two components, a systematic component with a weight of 25%, and an idiosyncratic component with a weight of 75%. The 25% weight on the idiosyncratic component is the theoretically correct weight if counterparties have a common systematic correlation with the broader market of 50%. Note that this form is simply a mathematical restatement of the capital calculation, yielding an identical answer for the stated case (that is, single-name hedging only, no index hedges).

                             

                            30.The portfolio-level calculation of CVA risk also recognizes that index hedges may reduce systematic CVA risk. The calculation including index hedges is:

                             

                            7

                             

                            where Hind is the notional of an eligible purchased index hedge instrument that is used to hedge CVA risk, 4 is the applicable supervisory discount factor, and Mind is the maturity of the index hedge. Note that the effect of the index hedge appears only in the systematic component of CVA risk within the square root. Also, note that there is no correlation-related coefficient associated with the index hedges, analogous to the 0.5 or 0.75 coefficients for the single-name exposure terms. This reflects the fact that an index CDS closely tracks the market, with a correlation expected to be near perfect. The correct coefficient on the index hedge terms in the model would be approximately 1.0, which is the reason for their omission.

                             

                            31.The Standards also includes a version of the formula that more closely resembles the full formula used in the BCBS framework:

                             

                            1

                             

                             

                             

                             

                            In this form, the intermediate calculation of SNE is not used. However, the results of the calculation are exactly the same as those produced by the formulation using SNE.

                            • E. Leverage Adjustment

                              19.A leverage adjustment is applied to the average risk weight of the fund under either the LTA or the MBA. A similar leverage adjustment is not necessary for the FBA, because the risk weight of 1250% applied under the FBA to equity investments in funds is fixed at that maximum value.

                              20.When determining the leverage adjustment under the MBA, banks are required to make conservative assumptions using information from the fund’s mandate. Specifically, the Standards requires that banks assume the fund will use financial leverage up to the maximum amount permitted under the fund’s mandate, or up to the maximum permitted under the regulations governing that fund. This maximum may be significantly greater than the actual leverage for the fund at any point in time.

                            • F. Maturity Calculation

                              32.When computing the maturity M for a netting set, banks are required to use a weighted average, with notional values as the weights. For example, suppose a netting set with a particular counterparty includes two exposures, a 2-year swap with a notional amount of 200, and a 3-year swap with a notional amount of 400. The total notional value of the netting set is therefore 200+400=600. The weighted average maturity would be calculated as:

                              1

                               

                            • G. Risk Weights

                              33.Derivatives exposures and CVA hedges enter the CVA capital calculation with associated risk weights that depend on the credit rating of the bank’s counterparties for the covered exposures, or on the credit rating of the underlying entity for hedge instruments. In the case of unrated counterparties or entities, banks should follow the approach applied by the Central Bank for credit derivatives that reference unrated entities in the CCR Standards, treating them as BBB rated unless the counterparty or entity has an elevated risk of default, in which case they should be treated as BB rated.

                              34.The CVA Standards follows the BCBS framework in specifying an array of risk weights that align with an external rating scale that is most similar to the one used by Standard and Poor’s. Use of this rating scale for purposes of the CVA Standards should not be viewed as an endorsement of that or any other external rating agency. Banks may use other ratings, and should map those ratings to the scale included in the Standards using the historical default experience for the various rating grades as published by the relevant external rating agencies.

                            • H. Risk-Weighted Assets

                              35.The formula developed by the BCBS to determine CVA capital reflects a calibration based on the 8% minimum capital ratio applied in the Basel capital framework. To calculate a corresponding RWA amount, the Standards requires banks to multiply the calculated CVA capital by a factor of 12.5, which is the reciprocal of 8%. That is, 1/(0.08) = 12.5. This multiplication is appropriate even if the Central Bank applies a higher minimum capital requirement to the resulting RWA, because the purpose of the multiplication by 12.5 is to reverse the calibration implicitly used by the BCBS to produce a capital number in the original formulation.

                            • I. Threshold for the Simple Alternative

                              36.As part of the finalization of Basel III, the BCBS introduced a materiality threshold, and provided an option for any bank whose aggregate notional amount of non-centrally cleared derivatives is less than or equal to 100 billion euro to choose to set its CVA capital equal to 100% of its capital for counterparty credit risk.

                              37.To implement this option in the UAE, the Central Bank has established a materiality threshold of 400 billion AED. Banks with an aggregate notional amount of covered transactions less than or equal to 400 billion AED may choose to set CVA RWA equal to the bank’s RWA for counterparty credit risk as calculated under the Central Bank’s CCR Standards. The Central Bank has determined that this threshold is appropriate for the UAE, and is comparable to the 100 Billion Euro threshold included in Basel.

                              38.If a bank chooses this CDS, it must be applied to all of the bank’s covered transactions, as required under the BCBS framework. In addition, a bank adopting this simple approach may not recognize the risk-reducing effects of CVA hedges.

                              39.The Central Bank may prohibit a bank from using this simple alternative if the Central bank determines that CVA risk resulting from the bank’s derivative positions and SFTs materially contributes to the bank’s overall risk, and therefore warrants a more sophisticated approach.

                • III. Frequently Asked Questions

                  Question 1: Are all transactions with Central Counterparties excluded from the CVA capital calculation?
                  No, only transactions for which the direct counterparty is a qualifying CCP (QCCP) are excluded. Note that under the CCR Standard, the bank must have a determination of non-objection from the Central Bank with regard to any specific QCCP.

                  Question 2: Should debit valuation adjustment (DVA) be netted from CVA for the capital calculation?
                  No, DVA cannot be taken into account to reduce regulatory CVA for the capital calculation.

                  Question 3: What types of transactions can qualify as CVA hedges?
                  A CVA hedge can be any financial instrument or contract that refers specifically to the counterparty by name, and whose value increases when the credit quality of the counterparty being hedged deteriorates. However, the Standards does not permit "nth-to-default" credit derivatives (index or basket credit derivatives in which payment is made only on the event of the “nth” default by a reference entity in the basket, rather than the first default) to be used as CVA hedges.

                  Question 4: If a CDS serves as an eligible CVA hedge for one counterparty, does it also create counterparty exposure to the counterparty for the CDS?
                  Yes, a CDS or other hedging instrument used for CVA hedging also can create counterparty exposure, and in that case requires capital to cover the associated risks presented by that counterparty, including CVA. For example, if a bank has CVA exposure to counterparty A, and hedges that exposure by purchasing a credit default swap from counterparty B, the CVA charge for exposure to counterparty A may be reduced, but the bank now likely is exposed to CVA risk on counterparty B.

                  Question 5: For calculating the weighted average maturity, should we use the original deal notional values, or the effective notional values per the CCR standards?
                  Either approach is acceptable, provided the bank is consistent in its selected approach.

                  Question 6: If there is no valid netting set with a counterparty, how should average maturity be calculated?
                  Average maturity is calculated at the netting set level, for each netting set with each counterparty. If netting is not valid, then the “netting set” consists of a single transaction, which will have its own maturity per the contractual terms of the transaction. Without valid netting, there may be as many “netting sets” for a counterparty as there are derivative transactions with that counterparty.

                  Question 7: To compute weighted average maturity, we have conservatively treated each trade as a stand-alone netting set. Is this conservative treatment acceptable?
                  Yes, this treatment is acceptable.

                  Question 8: When calculating average maturity for a netting set, should we consider each asset class separately?
                  Maturity calculations for CVA must be calculated for each netting set, reflecting all covered transactions within a given netting set, regardless of asset class.

                  Question 9: If an entity has ratings from multiple rating agencies, which one should be used to determine the risk weight for CVA capital?
                  If there are ratings from two different rating agencies that map to different risk weights, the higher risk weight should be applied. If there are ratings from three or more rating agencies that map to different risk weights, the two ratings that correspond to the lowest risk weights should be referred to. If these two ratings give rise to the same risk weight, that risk weight should be applied. If the two are different, the higher of the two risk weights should be applied.

                  Question 10: If a counterparty is within a legal organizational structure that includes multiple entities with different ratings, which rating should be used for the CVA capital calculation?
                  The bank should use the rating for the entity that is actually obligated as a counterparty to the bank under the terms of the transactions within the applicable netting set.

                  Question 11: Is there any special CVA treatment for counterparties that have a zero risk weight for credit risk under the risk-based capital standards?
                  No, they are treated like all other counterparties (other than CCPs). Note that CVA risk is different from the more general type of credit risk treated under the risk-based standards. The risk weights in the CVA standards are intended to reflect credit spread risk, and generally differ from the risk weights used for other capital requirements. For all counterparties, apply the CVA risk weight that corresponds to the rating of the entity, or if unrated, apply the approach specified for unrated counterparties.

                  Question 12: We prefer to map unrated counterparties to CCC as a conservative treatment; is that acceptable, or must they be mapped to BBB?
                  The bank is free to apply a more conservative treatment to unrated counterparties, and should do so if it considers the more conservative treatment to be appropriate. However, the bank should be consistent in its approach, and should not apply this process in a way that might reduce exposure for the CVA calculation relative to the treatment stated in the standards.

                  Question 13: Should all SFT exposures be considered in scope for the CVA calculation, or only those that create gross SFT assets per the leverage ratio exposure measure? Will SFT exposures be classified separately for the computation of Credit RWAs in CAR computation?
                  All SFTs should be reflected in the CVA calculation, whether or not they create non-zero gross SFT asset values for the leverage ratio.

                  Credit risk capital for SFT exposures is addressed as part of the general credit risk standards for risk-based capital adequacy requirements.

                  Question 14: When determining exposure for SFTs, are haircuts to be applied to the fair value of the securities?
                  No, haircuts should not be applied – use the fair value without haircuts.

                  Question 15: Can the weighted average maturity for SFT exposures be based on the exposure amounts?
                  Yes, that approach is acceptable, provided it is applied consistently.

                  Question 16: Can we consider Global Master Repo Agreements signed with banks in the UAE as qualifying master netting agreements (MNA) for SFT exposure computation?
                  Banks should apply the requirements for valid netting agreements as stated in the Central Bank’s Standards for Counterparty Credit Risk to determine whether netting is valid in any particular case, rather than using broad categorical criteria.

                  Question 17: Will the Central Bank establish a specific quantitative materiality threshold to determine whether SFTs are in scope for CVA capital?
                  The Central Bank does not intend to establish a specific threshold, but instead will determine the materiality of CVA risk from SFTs on a case-by-case basis, taking into account all relevant factors that may affect the CVA risk posed by SFTs at each bank.

                  Question 18: The CVA guidelines require computation of single-name exposure (SNE), while the CCR Standards is based on hedging sets; different names may be included in the same hedging set. Does this create an inconsistency?
                  It does not. Note that the single “name” for CVA capital is the derivatives or SFT counterparty. It does not depend on any underlying reference names for credit derivatives or other transactions with a given counterparty. Suppose for example that a bank has two credit derivatives that depend on the performance of Company A and Company B (that is, those are the underlying reference names for the credit derivatives), and that the bank’s counterparty for both credit derivatives is another bank, Bank C. Under the CCR standards, assuming that the netting requirements are met, the two credit derivatives would be in a single hedging set within a netting set with Bank C. For calculation of CVA capital, the SNE would reflect the bank’s CCR exposure to the single “name” that is Bank C; neither the names nor the ratings of Company A or Company B enter the CVA calculation directly. The CVA risk-weight for the bank’s CVA capital calculation would depend on the credit rating of Bank C, not the ratings of either Company A or Company B.

                  Question 19: Should we multiply the sum of replacement cost and potential future exposure by the same 1.4 scaling factor used in the SA-CCR standards issued by Central Bank?
                  Yes, that is correct; the same multiplicative scaling factor of 1.4 should be used for the CVA calculation as well.

                  Question 20: Can banks used the Basic Approach for CVA (BA-CVA) recently published by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision in December 2017?
                  Not at this time. The Central Bank may consider the BA-CVA at a later date.

                  Question 21: Bank ask in case of calculating discounted counterparty exposure is a double count and will inflate CVA Capital charge given SA-CCR EAD already factors in maturity adjustment while computing adjusted notional which is product of trade notional & supervisory duration?
                  The use of the discount factor in the CVA capital charge does not result in double counting. While there is superficial similarity between the supervisory duration (SD) adjustment in SA-CCR and the discount factor (DF) in CVA, they are actually capturing different aspects of risk exposure. The use of SD in SA-CCR adjusts the notional amount of the derivatives to reflect its sensitivity to changes in interest rates, since longer-term derivatives are more sensitive to rate changes than are shorter-term derivatives. In contrast, the use of DF in the CVA calculation reflects the fact that a bank is exposed to CVA risk not only during the first year of a derivative contract, but over the life of the contract; the DF term recognizes the present value of the exposure over the life of the contract. Thus, these two factors, although they have similar functional forms and therefore appear somewhat similar, are not in fact duplicative.

                  Question 22: Further elaboration on "equivalent hedging instrument that directly references the counterparty being hedged"?
                  This could be any instrument or contract that refers specifically to the counterparty by name, and whose value increases when the credit quality of the counterparty being hedged deteriorates.

                  However, it does not include "nth-to-default" credit derivatives.

                  Question 23: What if a Bank hold a CVA liability in our books, charged to P&L, once we have the additional capital requirement on CVA, will this liability be netted off against the CVA capital requirement, or an add back to the capital for this P&L charge will be incorporated?
                  Incurred CVA losses should be used to reduce EAD.

                  • III. Frequently Asked Questions

                    Question 1: BCBS 266 states “Equity holdings in entities whose debt obligations qualify for a zero risk weight can be excluded from the LTA, MBA and FBA approaches (including those publicly sponsored entities where a zero risk weight can be applied), at the discretion of the national supervisor.” Are such equity holdings excluded under the Central Bank’s Standards?
                    No, the Central Bank of the UAE has chosen not to adopt this point of national discretion. Bank investments in such funds are subject to the requirements of the Standards.

                    Question 2: If a bank makes a “seed capital investment” in a fund that is out of scope of consolidation, and is considered a significant investment in the common shares of a banking, financial, or insurance entity, is it within scope as an equity investment in a fund?
                    If the investment is one that the bank would be required to deduct from capital, then the investment is not in scope for this Standards.

                    Question 3: If a bank makes a “seed capital investment” in a fund, and that fund is managed by a Fund Manager hired by the bank, is the investment considered to be a direct investment in the fund, or indirect?
                    Assuming that the fund in question is not consolidated into the bank under accounting rules for financial reporting, such an investment is considered a direct investment under the Standards.

                    Question 4: Under the Standards, what methodology should a bank use to compute counterparty credit risk exposure for funds in which the bank has an equity investment?
                    The Standards states that banks must risk weight all exposures as if the bank held those exposures directly. Thus, the risk weights and the exposure amounts for counterparty credit risk should be determined using the standards that would apply to the bank. For banks in the UAE, the applicable standards for counterparty credit risk is the Central Bank’s Standards for Counterparty Credit Risk Capital, which reflects the Standardised Approach to Counterparty Credit Risk (SA-CCR).

                    Question 5: If a bank relies on a third-party information provider for information used to calculate the leverage adjustment for a fund, does the 1.2 multiplication factor apply?
                    No, as the Standards states, the factor of 1.2 applies when the bank relies on a third party for the risk weights of the underlying exposures. This is a conservative adjustment to recognize the uncertainty associated with such information about risk weights. It does not apply to the leverage ratio calculation.

                    Question 6: The FBA applies a risk weight of 1250%, which is significantly higher than the current risk weights of 100% or 150% that apply to equity investments in funds under previous capital requirements. Should this risk weight be lower?
                    The risk weight of 1250% is aligned with international capital standards as developed by the Basel Committee, and is being adopted by the Central Bank under this Standards. Considering the higher minimum capital requirements in the UAE (10.5% vs 8%), the final risk weight is capped at 952%.

                    Question 7: What happens when the bank has mandated intermediaries to invest in fixed income? Would this investment be included or excluded in the calculation of Equity Investments?
                    Banks having mandated Intermediaries have to go through same framework approach. This means that if the bank has information for these intermediaries, the bank may use the LTA approach. If the bank does not have information, then it has to use the MBA or FBA approach.

                    Question 8: The EIF standards allows for partial use of approaches for reporting EIF and the RWA calculations from each applied approach are summed, and then divided by total fund assets to compute “Avg RWfund”. Should the leverage of the fund be proportioned according to use of approach?
                    No, the leverage ratio is a single number that applies to the entire fund. When a bank uses more than one approach to determine the risk weight (that is, LTA, MBA, and/or FBA), the bank should report the amounts on separate lines in the reporting template.

                  • IV. Examples

                    • IV. Example Calculations

                      • A. CVA Capital and RWA with No Hedging

                        For this example, a bank has only two derivatives counterparties, Galaxy Financial with a AA credit rating, and Solar Systems with a BB credit rating. The bank computes counterparty credit risk (CCR) exposure as 800 for Galaxy, and 200 for Solar, following the requirements of the CCR Standards. The bank uses the standardised approach rather than the simple alternative to compute CVA capital and RWA.

                        The bank calculates the weighted average maturity for exposures to Galaxy at 3 years, and for Solar 1 year. In this example, the bank has no eligible hedges for CVA risk for either counterparty.

                        Example: Derivatives Portfolio for the Bank

                        #Counterparty NameCredit RatingCCR ExposureMaturity
                        1Galaxy FinancialAA8003 years
                        2Solar SystemsBB2001 year

                         

                        The bank must compute the supervisory discount factor, DFi, for each of the two counterparties. Using the formula in the Standards, the calculations are:

                        1

                         

                        Using these supervisory discount factors, the bank calculates single-name exposure for each counterparty, taking into account the fact that there are no eligible CVA hedges:

                        2

                         

                        The bank must also determine the appropriate risk weights for each of these single-name exposures. Because Galaxy is rated AA, the appropriate risk weight is 0.7% from Table 1 of the Standards. Solar is rated BB, so the corresponding risk weight is 2.0%. That is, W1=0.007, and W2=0.02.

                        The bank’s calculation of CVA capital must use the formula in the Standards:

                        3

                         

                        Substituting in the relevant values for Galaxy and Solar, the calculation is:

                         

                        4

                         

                        In the final step, the bank must compute RWA for CVA using the multiplicative factor of 12.5 as required in the Standards:

                        CVA RWA = K × 12.5 = 39.61 × 12.5 = 495.16

                        • A. Example of Calculation of Risk-Weighted Assets Using the LTA

                          21.Consider a fund that aims to replicate an equity index using a strategy based on forward contracts. Assume the fund holds short-term forward contracts for this purpose with a notional amount of 100 that are cleared through a qualifying central counterparty. Further, assume that the fund’s financial position can be represented by the following T-account balance sheet:

                          AssetsLiabilities and Equity
                          Cash20Notes payable5
                          Government bonds (AAA)30  
                          Variation margin receivable on forward contracts50Equity95
                           100 100

                           

                          Finally, assume that the bank’s equity investment in the fund comprises 20% of the shares of the fund, and therefore is 20% × 95 = 19.

                          Using the LTA, the fund’s balance sheet exposures of 100 are risk weighted according to the risk weights that would be applied to these assets by the bank. For cash, the risk weight is 0%; for the government bonds, the risk weight is also 0%. The margin receivable is an exposure to a qualifying CCP, which has 2% risk weight. The underlying risk weight for equity exposures (100%) is applied to the notional amount of the forward contracts.

                          Assume that the bank is able to determine that the amount of the CCR exposure to the CCP is 10, which then receives the 2% risk weight for exposures to a qualifying CCP. Note that there is no CVA charge because the forward contracts are cleared through the qualifying CCP.

                          The total RWA for the fund is:

                          20×0% + 30×0% + 50×2% + 100×100% + 10×2% = 101.2
                           

                          Given the total assets of the fund of 100, the average risk-weight for the fund is:

                          Avg RWfund = 101.2 / 100 = 101.2%
                           

                          With fund assets of 100 and fund equity of 95, leverage is calculated as the assets-to-equity ratio, or 100/95≈1.05. Therefore, the risk-weight for the bank’s equity investment in the fund is:

                          Risk Weight = 101.2% × (100/95) = 106.5%
                           

                          Applying this risk weight to the bank’s equity investment in the fund of 19, the bank’s RWA on the position for the purpose of calculating minimum required capital is 106.5% × 19 = 20.24.

                        • B. CVA Capital and RWA with a Single-Name Hedge

                          The bank from the previous example has the same portfolio, but in this example enters into a CDS with a third party that provides protection on Galaxy Financial, to protect against a potential increase in credit spreads that would reduce the fair value of transactions with Galaxy if Galaxy’s credit quality deteriorates. The notional value of the CDS is 400, with a maturity of 2 years. Thus, the calculation must now take into account the impact of an eligible single-name CVA hedge, with H1 = 400 and Mh = 2.

                          The bank must compute the supervisory discount factor for the CVA hedge:

                          1

                           

                          The presence of the CVA hedge for Galaxy changes. Galaxy’s SNE calculation:

                          2

                           

                          The remainder of the computations proceed as before, with the new vaue for SNE1:

                          3

                           

                          In the final step, the bank computes RWA for CVA using the multiplicative factor of 12.5 as required in the Standards:

                          4

                          This example illustrates the impact of CVA risk mitigation, as the presence of the eligible CVA hedge reduces CVA capital and RWA compared to the previous example with no hedging.

                           

                          • B. Example of Calculation of Risk-Weighted Assets Using the MBA

                            22.Consider a fund with current balance-sheet assets of 100, and assume that the bank is unable to apply the LTA due to a lack of adequate information. Suppose that the fund’s mandate states that the fund’s investment objective is to replicate an equity index. In addition to being permitted to invest in equities directly as assets and to hold cash balances, the mandate allows the fund to take long positions in equity index futures up to a maximum notional amount equivalent to 80% of the fund’s balance sheet. Since this means that with 100 in assets the fund could have futures with a notional value of 80, the total on-balance-sheet and off-balance-sheet exposures of the fund could reach 180.

                            Suppose that the fund’s mandate also places a restriction on leverage, allowing the fund to issue debt up to a maximum of 10% of the total value of the fund’s assets. This debt constraint implies that with 100 in assets, the fund’s maximum financial leverage would be at a mixture of 10 debt and 90 equity, for a maximum assets-to-equity ratio of 100/90≈1.11.

                            Finally, assume that the value of the bank’s investment in the fund is 20.

                            For the computation of RWA, the on-balance-sheet assets are assumed to be invested to the maximum extent possible in the riskiest type of asset permitted under the mandate. The mandate allows either cash (which has a zero risk weight) or equities, so the full 100 is assumed to be in equities, with a 100% risk weight.

                            Next, the fund is assumed to enter into derivatives contracts to the maximum extent allowable under its mandate – stated as 80% of total assets – implying a maximum derivatives notional of 80. This amount receives the risk weight associated with the underlying of the derivatives position, which in this example is 100% for publicly traded equity holdings.

                            The calculation of RWA must include an amount for the counterparty credit risk associated with derivatives. If the bank cannot determine the replacement cost associated with the futures contracts, then the replacement cost must be approximated by the maximum notional amount of 80. If the PFE is similarly indeterminate, an additional 15% of the notional amount must be added for PFE. Thus, the CCR exposure is 1.4 x (80×1.15) = 129. Assuming the futures contracts clear through a qualifying CCP, a risk weight of 2% applies to the CCR exposure, and no CVA charge is assessed for the CCP.

                            The total RWA for the fund is the sum of the components for on-balance-sheet assets, off-balance-sheet exposures, and CCR:

                            100×100% + 80×100% + 129×2% = 182.58
                             

                            Given the total assets of the fund of 100, the average risk-weight for the fund is:

                            Avg RWfund = 182.58 / 100 = 182.58%
                             

                            As noted above, the fund’s maximum leverage is approximately 1.11 at an assets-to-equity ratio of 100/90. Therefore, the risk-weight for the bank’s equity investment in the fund is:

                            Risk Weight = 182.58% × (100/90) = 202.87%
                             

                            Applying this risk weight of 202.87% to the bank’s equity investment in the fund of 20, the bank’s RWA on the position for the purpose of calculating minimum required capital is 202.87% × 20 = 40.57.

                          • C. CVA Capital and RWA with an Index Hedge

                            The bank from the previous example has the same portfolio, including the single-name hedge of Galaxy Financial, but now enters into an index CDS that provides credit spread protection against a basket of twenty named entities. The notional value of the index CDS is 300, with a maturity of 1.5 years. The bank’s calculation of CVA capital now takes into account the impact of an eligible index hedge, which reduces systematic CVA risk. The relevant form of the calculation from the Standards is:

                            1

                            Because the bank has only one index hedge, the summation for index hedges inside the calculation has only a single (Wind Hind DFind) term. As stated above, the notional value of the hedge is Hind=300. The bank needs to calculate the appropriate supervisory discount factor for the index CDS, based on the maturity Mind=1.5 years:

                            2

                             

                            To determine the risk weight, the bank must determine the credit rating for each of the twenty reference names in the index basket, the corresponding risk weight for each rating (from Table 1 in the Standards), and the weighted average of those risk weights using the relative notional values of the component names for the weights. Suppose that through this process of analysis, the bank determines that the weighted average is 1.2% (slightly worse than BBB). As a result, Wind=0.012. The impact of risk mitigation from the index CDS enters the calculation through the term:

                            WindHindDFind = 0.012 × 300 × 1.445 = 5.20

                             

                            The bank can now calculate CVA capital, taking into account the impact of the index hedge that mitigates systematic risk. Many of the relevant values are unchanged from the previous example, but there is the addition of the index hedge effect on systematic CVA risk:

                            3

                             

                            As before, the bank computes RWA for CVA using the multiplicative factor of 12.5as required in the Standards:

                            4

                             

          • VII. Securitisation

            • I. Introduction

              1.In December 2014, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) published a revised framework for calculating bank capital requirements for securitisation exposures, with further revisions in July 2016. The revised securitisation framework aimed to address a number of shortcomings in the Basel II securitisation framework and to strengthen the capital standards for securitisation exposures held in the banking book. The Central Bank’s Standards on Required Capital for Securitisation Exposures is based closely on the BCBS framework.

              2.A central feature of the revised framework is a hierarchy of approaches to risk-weighted asset calculations. The BCBS framework includes approaches based on internal credit risk ratings of banks. These approaches have not been included in the Central Bank’s Standards, as internal ratings-based approaches are not deemed appropriate for use in capital calculations at this time by banks in the UAE.

              3.Consequently, the hierarchy of approaches within the Central Bank’s Standards begins with the revised External Ratings-Based Approach (SEC-ERBA), and below that in the hierarchy the revised Standardised Approach (SEC-SA). For resecuritisations, the hierarchy excludes the SEC-ERBA, and instead begins with the SEC-SA. If neither the SEC-ERBA nor the SEC-SA can be applied for a particular securitisation exposure, a maximum risk weight of 1250% must be used for the exposure.

              4.Calculations under both the SEC-ERBA and the SEC-SA depend to some degree on a measure of “tranche thickness.” The thickness of a tranche is determined by the size of the tranche relative to the entire securitisation transaction. In general, for a given attachment point, a thinner tranche is riskier than a thicker tranche, and therefore warrants a higher risk weight for risk-based capital adequacy purposes. While credit rating agencies capture some aspects of the risk related to tranche thickness in their external ratings, analysis performed by the BCBS suggested that capital requirements for a given rating of a mezzanine tranche should differ significantly based on tranche thickness, and this is reflected in the Standards.

              5.Under the SEC-ERBA, risk weights also are adjusted to reflect tranche maturity. The BCBS incorporated a maturity adjustment to reflect unexpected losses appropriately in the capital calculations. External ratings used for SEC-ERBA typically reflect expected credit loss rates, and the BCBS concluded through analysis during the development process that the mapping between these expected losses and unexpected losses (the quantity that capital is intended to cover) depends on maturity.

            • II. Clarifications

              • A. Securitisation

                6.The Standards defines a securitisation as a contractual structure under which the cash flow from an underlying pool of exposures is used to service claims with at least two different stratified risk positions or tranches reflecting different degrees of credit risk. The creation of distinct tranches is the key feature of securitisation; similar structures that merely “pass through” the cash flows to the claims without modification are not considered securitisations.

                7.For securitisation exposures, payments to the investors depend upon the performance of the specified underlying exposures, as opposed to being derived from an obligation of the entity originating those exposures. The stratified/tranched structures that characterize securitisations differ from ordinary senior/subordinated debt instruments in that junior securitisation tranches can absorb losses without interrupting contractual payments to more senior tranches, whereas subordination in a senior/subordinated debt structure is a matter of priority of rights to the proceeds of a liquidation.

                8.In some cases, transactions that have some of the features of securitisations should not be treated as such for capital purposes. For example, transactions involving cash flows from real estate (e.g., in the form of rents) may be considered specialized lending exposures. Banks should consult with Central Bank when there is uncertainty about whether a given transaction should be considered a securitisation.

              • B. Senior Securitisation Exposures

                9.A securitisation exposure is considered a senior exposure if it is effectively backed or secured by a first claim on the entire amount of the assets in the underlying securitised pool.

                10.While this generally includes only the most senior position within a securitisation tranche, in some instances there may be other claims that, in a technical sense, may be more senior in the waterfall (e.g., a swap claim) but may be disregarded for the purpose of determining which positions are treated as senior.

                11.If a senior tranche is retranched or partially hedged (i.e., not on a pro rata basis), only the new senior part would be treated as senior for capital purposes.

                12.In some cases, several senior tranches of different maturities may share pro rata in loss allocation. In that case, the seniority of these tranches is unaffected – they all are considered to be senior – since they all benefit from the same level of credit enhancement. (Note that in this case, the material effects of differing tranche maturities are captured by maturity adjustments to the risk weights assigned to the securitisation exposures, per the Standards.)

                13.In a traditional securitisation where all tranches above the first-loss piece are rated, the most highly rated position should be treated as a senior tranche. When there are several tranches that share the same rating, only the most senior tranche in the cash flow waterfall should be treated as senior (unless the only difference among them is the effective maturity). In addition, when the different ratings of several senior tranches only result from a difference in maturity, all of these tranches should be treated as senior.

                14.In a typical synthetic securitisation, an unrated tranche can be treated as a senior tranche provided that all of the conditions for inferring a rating from a lower tranche that meets the definition of a senior tranche are fulfilled.

                15.Usually, a liquidity facility supporting an ABCP program would not be the most senior position within the program; instead, the commercial paper issued by the program, which benefits from the liquidity support, typically would be the most senior position. However, when a liquidity facility that is sized to cover all of the outstanding commercial paper and other senior debt supported by the pool is structured so that no cash flows from the underlying pool can be transferred to other creditors until any liquidity draws are repaid in full, the liquidity facility can be treated as a senior exposure. Otherwise, if these conditions are not satisfied, or if for other reasons the liquidity facility constitutes a mezzanine position in economic substance rather than a senior position in the underlying pool, the liquidity facility should be treated as a non-senior exposure.

              • C. Operational Requirements for the Recognition of Risk Transference

                16.The Standards requires that banks obtain a legal opinion to confirm true sale to demonstrate that the transferor does not maintain effective or indirect control over the transferred exposures and that the exposures are legally isolated from the transferor in such a way (e.g., through the sale of assets or through sub-participation) that the exposures are put beyond the reach of the transferor and its creditors, even in bankruptcy or receivership. However, that legal opinion need not be limited to legal advice from qualified external legal counsel; it may be in the form of written advice from in-house lawyers.

                17.For synthetic securitisations, risk transference through instruments such as credit derivatives may be recognized only if the instruments used to transfer credit risk do not contain terms or conditions that limit the amount of credit risk transferred. Examples of terms or conditions that would violate this requirement include the following:

                1. (a)Clauses that materially limit the credit protection or credit risk transference, such as an early amortization provision in a securitisation of revolving credit facilities that effectively subordinates the bank’s interest, significant materiality thresholds below which credit protection is deemed not to be triggered even if a credit event occurs, or clauses that allow for the termination of the protection due to deterioration in the credit quality of the underlying exposures.
                2. (b)Clauses that require the originating bank to alter the underlying exposures to improve the pool’s average credit quality.
                3. (c)Clauses that increase the bank’s cost of credit protection in response to deterioration in the pool’s quality.
                4. (d)Clauses that increase the yield payable to parties other than the originating bank, such as investors and third-party providers of credit enhancements, in response to a deterioration in the credit quality of the reference pool.
                5. (e)Clauses that provide for increases in a retained first-loss position or credit enhancement provided by the originating bank after the transaction’s inception.
              • D. Due Diligence

                18.The Standards requires banks to have a thorough understanding of all structural features of a securitisation transaction that would materially affect the performance of the bank’s exposures to the transaction. Common structural features that are particularly relevant include those related to the payment waterfall incorporated in the structure, which is the description of the order of payment for the securitisation, under which higher-tier tranches receive principal and interest first, before lower-tier tranches are paid. Credit enhancements and liquidity enhancements also are important structural features; these may take the form of cash advance facilities, letters of credit, guarantees, or credit derivatives, among others. Effective due diligence also should consider unusual or unique aspects of a particular securitisation structure, such as the specific nature of the conditions that would constitute default under the structure.

              • E. Treatment of Securitisation Exposures

                • 1. Risk Weights for Off-Balance-Sheet Exposures

                  19.The Standards requires that banks apply a 100% CCF to any securitisation-related off-balance-sheet exposures that are not credit risk mitigants. One example of such an off-balance-sheet exposure that may arise with securitisations is a commitment for servicer cash advances, under which a servicer enters into a contract to advance cash to ensure an uninterrupted flow of payments to investors. The BCBS securitisation framework provides national discretion to permit the undrawn portion of servicer cash advances that are unconditionally cancellable without prior notice to receive the CCF for unconditionally cancellable. The Central Bank has chosen not to adopt this discretionary treatment, and instead requires a 100% CCF for all off-balance-sheet exposures, including undrawn servicer cash advances.

                • 2. Adjustment of Risk-Weights for Overlapping Exposures

                  20.Banks may adjust risk weights for overlapping exposures. An exposure A overlaps another exposure B if in all circumstances the bank can avoid any loss on exposure B by fulfilling its obligations with respect to exposure A. For example, if a bank holds notes as an investor but provides full credit support to those notes, its full credit support obligation precludes any loss from its exposure to the notes. If a bank can verify that fulfilling its obligations with respect to exposure A will preclude a loss from its exposure to B under any circumstance, the bank does not need to calculate risk-weighted assets for its exposure B.

                  21.To demonstrate an overlap, a bank may, for the purposes of calculating capital requirements, split or expand its exposures. That is, splitting exposures into portions that overlap with another exposure held by the bank and other portions that do not overlap, or expanding exposures by assuming for capital purposes that obligations with respect to one of the overlapping exposures are larger than those established contractually. The latter could be done, for instance, by expanding either the assumed extent of the obligation, or the trigger events to exercise the facility. A bank may also recognize overlap between exposures in the trading book and securitisation exposures in the banking book, provided that the bank is able to calculate and compare the capital charges for the relevant exposures.

                • 3. External Ratings-Based Approach (SEC-ERBA)

                  22.To be eligible for use in the securitisation framework, the external credit assessment must take into account and reflect the entire amount of credit risk exposure the bank has with regard to all payments owed to it. For example, if a bank is owed both principal and interest, the assessment must fully take into account and reflect the credit risk associated with timely repayment of both principal and interest.

                  23.A bank is not permitted to use any external credit assessment for risk-weighting purposes where the assessment is at least partly based on unfunded support provided by the bank itself. For example, if a bank buys ABCP where it provides an unfunded securitisation exposure extended to the ABCP program (e.g., liquidity facility or credit enhancement), and that exposure plays a role in determining the credit assessment on the ABCP, the bank must treat the ABCP as if it were not rated. The bank also must hold capital against the liquidity facility and/or credit enhancement as a securitisation exposure.

                  24.External credit assessments used for the SEC-ERBA must be from an eligible external credit assessment institution (ECAI) as recognized by the Central Bank in accordance with the Central Bank standards on rating agency recognition. However, the securitisation Standards additionally requires that the credit assessment, procedures, methodologies, assumptions and the key elements underlying the assessments must be publicly available, on a non-selective basis and free of charge. Consequently, ratings that are made available only to the parties to a transaction do not satisfy this requirement. Where the eligible credit assessment is not publicly available free of charge, the ECAI should provide an adequate justification, within its own publicly available code of conduct, in accordance with the “comply or explain” nature of the International Organization of Securities Commissions’ Code of Conduct Fundamentals for Credit Rating Agencies.

                  25.Under the Standards, a bank may infer a rating for an unrated position from an externally rated “reference exposure” for purposes of the SEC-ERBA provided that the reference securitisation exposure ranks pari passu or is subordinate in all respects to the unrated securitisation exposure. Credit enhancements, if any, must be taken into account when assessing the relative subordination of the unrated exposure and the reference securitisation exposure. For example, if the reference securitisation exposure benefits from any third-party guarantees or other credit enhancements that are not available to the unrated exposure, then the latter may not be assigned an inferred rating based on the reference securitisation exposure.

                • 4. Standardised Approach (SEC-SA)

                  26.The supervisory formula used for the calculations within the SEC-SA has been calibrated by the BCBS to generate required capital under an assumed minimum 8% risk-based capital ratio. As a result, the appropriate conversion to risk-weighted assets for the SEC-SA generally requires multiplication of the computed capital ratio by a factor of 12.5 (the reciprocal of 8%) to produce the risk weight used within broader calculations of risk-based capital adequacy. This multiplication by 12.5 is reflected in the requirements as articulated in the Central Bank’s Securitisation Standards.

                  27.If the underlying pool of exposures receives a risk weight of 1250%, then paragraph 5 of the Introduction of the Standards for Capital Adequacy of banks in the UAE is applicable.

                  28.When applying the supervisory formula for the SEC-SA to structures involving an SPE, all of the SPE’s exposures related to the securitisation are to be treated as exposures in the pool. In particular, in the case of swaps other than credit derivatives, the exposure should include the positive current market value times the risk weight of the swap provider. However, under the Standards, a bank can exclude the exposures of the SPE from the pool for capital calculation purposes if the bank can demonstrate that the risk does not affect its particular securitisation exposure or that the risk is immaterial, for example because it has been mitigated. Certain market practices may eliminate or at least significantly reduce the potential risk from a default of a swap provider. Examples of such features could be:

                  1. cash collateralization of the market value in combination with an agreement of prompt additional payments in case of an increase of the market value of the swap; or
                  2. minimum credit quality of the swap provider with the obligation to post collateral or present an alternative swap provider without any costs for the SPE in the event of a credit deterioration on the part of the original swap provider.

                  If the bank is able to demonstrate that the risk is mitigated in this way, and that the exposures do not contribute materially to the risks faced by the bank as a holder of the securitisation exposure, the bank may exclude these exposures from the KSA calculation.

              • F. Treatment of Credit Risk Mitigation for Securitisation Exposures

                • 1. Tranched Protection

                  29.In the case of tranched credit protection, the original securitisation tranche should be decomposed into protected and unprotected sub-tranches. However, this decomposition is a theoretical construction, and should not be viewed as creating a new securitisation transaction. Similarly, the resulting sub- tranches should not be considered resecuritisations solely due to the presence of the credit protection.

                  30.For a bank using the SEC-ERBA for the original securitisation exposure, the bank should use the risk weight of the original securitisation for the sub-tranche of highest priority. Note that the term “sub-tranche of highest priority” only describes the relative priority of the decomposed tranche. The calculation of the risk weight of each sub-tranche is independent from the question of whether the sub-tranche is protected (i.e., risk is taken by the protection provider) or is unprotected (i.e., risk is taken by the protection buyer).

                • 2. Maturity Mismatches

                  31.For synthetic securitisations, maturity mismatches may arise when protection is bought on securitised assets (when, for example, a bank uses credit derivatives to transfer part or all of the credit risk of a specific pool of assets to third parties). When the credit derivatives unwind, the transaction will terminate. This implies that the effective maturity of all the tranches of the synthetic securitisation may differ from that of the underlying exposures.

              • G. Simple, Transparent, and Comparable Criteria

                32.In general, to qualify for treatment as simple, transparent, and comparable (STC), a securitisation must meet all of the criteria specified in the Standards, including the Appendix to the Standards. The criteria include a requirement that the aggregated value of all exposures to a single obligor as of the acquisition date not exceed 2% of the aggregated outstanding exposure value of all exposures in the securitisation. However, the BCBS has permitted flexibility for jurisdictions with structurally concentrated corporate loan markets. In those cases, for corporate exposures only, the applicable maximum concentration threshold for STC treatment can be increased to 3%. This increase is subject to ex ante supervisory approval, and banks with such exposures should consult with the Central Bank regarding STC treatment. In addition, the seller or sponsor of such a pool must retain subordinated positions that provide loss-absorbing credit enhancement covering at least the first 10% of losses. These credit-enhancing positions retained by the sellers or sponsor are not eligible for STC capital treatment.

            • III. Example Calculations

              • A. Standardised Approach

                33.Consider a bank applying the SEC-SA to a securitisation exposure for which the underlying pool of assets has a required capital ratio of 9% under the standardised approach to credit risk. Suppose that the delinquency rate is unknown for 1% of the exposures in the underlying pool, but for the remaining 99% of the pool the delinquency rate is known to be 6%. The bank holds an investment of 100 million in a tranche that has an attachment point of 5% and a detachment point of 25%. Finally, assume that the pool does not itself contain any securitisation exposures, so the exposure is not a resecuritisation.

                34.In this example, KSA is given at 9%. To adjust for the known delinquency rate on the pooled assets, the bank computes an adjusted capital ratio:

                (1 − W) × KSA + (W × 0.5) = 0.94 × 0.09 + 0.06 × 0.5 = 0.1146
                 

                35.This calculated capital ratio must be further adjusted for the fact that the delinquency rate is unknown for a small portion (1%) of the underlying asset pool:

                KA = 0.99 × 0.1146 + 0.01 = 0.1235
                 

                36.Next, the bank applies the supervisory formula to calculate the capital required per unit of securitisation exposure, using the values of the attachment point A, the detachment point D, the calculated value of KA, and the appropriate value of the supervisory parameter ρ, and noting that D>KA:

                1

                where:

                2

                 

                Note that because this is not a resecuritisation exposure, the appropriate value of the supervisory calibration parameter rho is 1 (ρ=1).

                37.Substituting the values of a, U, and L into the supervisory formula gives:

                 

                3

                 

                38.This tranche represents a case in which the attachment point A is less than KA but the detachment point D is greater than KA. Thus, according to the Standards, the risk weight for the bank’s exposure is calculated as a weighted average of 12.5 and 12.5×K:

                 

                4

                 

                39.With a tranche risk weight of 954%, the bank’s risk-weighted asset amount for this securitisation would be 954% of the 100 million investment, or 954 million. If, for example, the bank chose to apply a capital ratio of 13% to this exposure, then the bank’s required capital would be 13% of 954 million, or approximately 85 million, on the investment of 100 million in this securitisation tranche.

                 

              • B. External Ratings-Based Approach

                40.Consider a non-senior securitisation tranche that has been assigned a rating by one of the eligible rating agencies corresponding to a rating of BB+. Suppose that the tranche has an attachment point A of 5%, a detachment point D of 30%, and effective tranche maturity of MT = 2 years.

                1. From the look-up table for SEC-ERBA, a non-senior securitisation exposure rated BB+ with one-year maturity has a risk weight of 470%; the risk weight for a five-year maturity is 580%.
                2. The tranche maturity of 2 years is one-quarter of the way between one year and five years, so the relevant maturity-adjusted risk weight based on linear interpolation is one quarter of the way between 470% and 580%, or 497.5%.
                3. Because this is a non-senior tranche, it must also be adjusted for tranche thickness, which is the difference between D=30% and A=5%, a difference of 25%. The interpolated risk weight from the table should be multiplied by a factor of 1-(D-A)=0.75, which exceeds the floor of 50% and therefore should be used by the bank in the calculation (0.75 x 497.5%).
                4. The resulting tranche risk weight is 373%.

                41.Banks using the SEC-ERBA for securitisation exposures may prefer to incorporate the main features of the ERBA look-up tables into formal calculations of risk weights, including the relevant adjustments for tranche maturity and tranche thickness. In that case, each pair of 1-year and 5-year risk weights can be viewed as coefficients for a formulaic calculation of the risk weight for a tranche of given maturity MT, and in the case of non-senior tranches, thickness D-A.

                42.For example, for a non-senior tranche rated BB+ with MT between one year and five years, the tranche risk weight RWT can be computed with a single formula as:

                1

                 

                where the coefficients 4.7 and 5.8 correspond to the relevant values from the look-up table of 470% for one-year maturity and 580% for five-year maturity. Substituting in the values for A, D, and MT from the example above:

                2

                 

                43.Senior tranches are not adjusted for thickness; hence, the calculation of the tranche risk weight RWT for a senior BB+ rated tranche would be computed as:

                3

                 

                where again the coefficients 1.4 and 1.6 correspond to the relevant values from the senior tranche columns of the look-up table, specifically 140% for 1-year maturity and 160% for 5-year maturity.

          • VIII. Market Risk

            • I. Introduction and Scope

              1.This section supports the Market risk standards in clarifying the calculation of the market risk capital requirement.

              2.The capital charges for interest rate related instruments and equities will apply to the trading book. The capital charges for foreign exchange risk and for commodities risk will apply to banks’ total currency and commodity positions (i.e. entire book).

              3.Capital requirements for market risk apply on a consolidated basis. Note that the capital required for general and specific market risk under these Standards is in addition to, not in place of, any capital required under other Central Bank Standards. Banks should follow the requirements of all other applicable Central Bank standards to determine overall capital adequacy requirements.

            • II. Identifying Market Risk Drivers

              4.For a particular instrument, the risk drivers that influence the market prices of that instrument must be identified. In a portfolio, the correlations between instruments also influence the risk profile of the entire portfolio (i.e. Banking and Trading book).

              5.The market price of an asset incorporates virtually all known information concerning that asset. In practice; however, it is very difficult to clearly separate the main sources that influence an instrument's market price and risk level.

              As a simplification, the following are generally recognised as the main market risk drivers:

              • A. Interest Rate Risk

                6.Interest rate risk is the potential for losses in on- or off-balance sheet positions from adverse changes in interest rates. Instruments covered by the standardised approach for interest rate risk include all fixed rate and floating rate related instruments, such as debt securities, swaps, forwards and futures.

                7.The standardised approach provides a framework for measuring interest rate risk. It takes into account the maturity or duration of the positions, basis risk, and certain correlations among risk factors.

                8.Duration is a measure of the average maturity of a debt instrument's cash flows from both coupons and principal repayment. It is expressed in years and allows debt instruments with different coupons and maturities to be compared. Based on the duration, the sensitivity of a fixed income security's price with respect to a small change in its yield can be determined.

                9.When hedging positions, basis risk is a key risk for the hedged position and needs to be managed and closely monitored.

                Typically, two distinct components of market risk are recognised:

                   1.General Market Risk

                10.General market risk refers to changes in market prices resulting from general market behavior.

                For example, in the case of an equity position, general market risk can arise from a change in a stock market index. In the case of a fixed income instrument, general market risk is driven by a change in the yield curve.

                The capital charge for general market risk is designed to capture the risk of loss arising from adverse changes in market interest rates.

                There are two steps for calculating the general market risk capital charge:

                Step 1: Map each interest rate position to a time band

                Interest rate positions have different price sensitivities to interest rate shifts depending on their residual maturity. Interest rate shifts are changes in the yield curve. Each interest rate position is mapped to a time band.

                There are two methods for mapping interest rate positions:

                a)Maturity method maps each position to a maturity ladder based on the residual maturity of each position.

                Fixed weightings are used to adjust the positions for sensitivity to the changes in interest rates as per the relevant table under the standard.

                Time Bands for the Maturity Method

                1. Fixed income instruments with low coupons have higher sensitivity to changes in the yield curve than fixed income instruments with high coupons, all other things being equal.
                2. Fixed income instruments with long maturities have higher sensitivity to changes in the yield curve than fixed income instruments with short maturities, all other things being equal.

                This is why the maturity method uses a finer grid of time bands for low coupon instruments (less than 3%) with long maturities.

                Fixed and Floating Rate Instruments

                Fixed rate instruments are mapped according to the residual term to maturity. Floating rate instruments are allocated according to the residual term to the next repricing date.

                b)Duration method

                11.This method maps each position according to its duration to a duration ladder. Duration is a measure of the average maturity of a debt instrument’s cash flows from both coupons and principal repayment. It is expressed in years and allows debt instruments with different coupons and maturities to be compared. The duration method allows banks the necessary capability to calculate price sensitivity based on an instruments’ duration (with the supervisory consent).

                Step 2: Calculate the capital charge

                The capital charge is the sum of four components calculated from amounts in each time band:

                :

                1. A charge on the net short or long position in the whole trading book:
                2. A vertical disallowance charge:

                It is a charge, which is levied on the matched position in each time band. This charges accounts for basis risk and gap risk, which can arise because each time band includes different instruments with different maturities. Gap risk, or interest mismatch risk, is the risk of losses due to interest rate changes that arise when the periods over which assets and liabilities are priced, differs. This charge is levied on the matched position in each time band at:

                1. 10% if the bank uses the maturity method
                2. 5% of the bank uses the duration method

                The matched position is the smaller absolute value of the long and short positions. For example: if you have a long position of 1,200 and a short position of 700, the matched position is 700 (the net open position is long 500).

                1. A horizontal disallowance charge:

                It is a charge against correlation among the different time bands. It is allowed for correlation to offset positions across different time bands.

                There are three rounds of horizontal disallowance:

                1. Round 1 levies a charge on the matched position in each zone. The charge is:
                  1. o40% for zone 1
                  2. o30% for zone 2 and zone 3
                2. Round 2 levies a charge of 40% on the matched positions between adjacent zones. The adjacent zones are:
                  1. oZone 1 and zone 2
                  2. oZone 2 and zone 3
                3. Round 3 levies a charge of 100% on the matched position between zone 1 and zone 3.
                4. Where applicable, a net charge for positions in options.
                   2.Specific Risk

                12.Specific risk refers to changes in market prices specific to an instrument owing to factors related to the issuer of that instrument.

                13.Specific risk does not affect foreign exchange- and commodities-related instruments. This is because changes in FX rates and commodities prices are dependent on general market movements.

                14.The charge for specific risk protects against price movements in a security owing to factors related to the individual issuer, that is, price moves that are not initiated by the general market.

                a)Offsetting

                15.When specific risk is measured, offsetting between positions is restricted.

                1. Offsetting is only permitted for matched positions in an identical issue.
                2. Offsetting is not allowed between different issues, even if the issuer is the same. This is because differences in coupon rates, liquidity, call features, and so on, mean that prices may diverge in the short run.
                b)Specific Risk – Capital Charge

                16.Under the standardised approach, market risk exposures are categorised according to external credit assessments (ratings) and based on those assessments a capital charge is assigned. This broad methodology for calculating the specific risk capital charge was not changed by Basel 2.5.

                17.The capital charges assigned to those external credit assessments are similar to the credit risk charges under the standardised approach to credit risk.

                Categorisation of Securities

                18.Consistent with other sections, a lower specific risk charge can be applied to government paper denominated in the domestic currency and funded by the bank in the same currency. The national discretion is limited to GCC Sovereigns. This use of national discretion aligns the Market Risk Standards with the similar treatment under the credit risk standards. The Market Risk Standard is also aligned to the Credit Risk Standard when it comes to the transition period permitted for USD funded and denominated exposures of the individual Emirates.

                Qualifying includes securities issued by public sector entities and multilateral development banks, plus other securities that are rated with investment grades by two rating agencies. Unrated securities can also be included, subject to supervisory approval (such as securities deemed to be of comparable investment quality).

                Other securities comprise of securities that do not meet the definition of government or the definition of qualifying securities. This category receives the same risk charge as non-investment grade borrowers under the standardised approach to credit risk. However, it is recognised that for some high yielding debt instruments, an 8% specific risk charge may underestimate the specific risk.

                Calculating the Capital Requirement for Market and Credit Risk

                19.The standards contain different processes for calculating the capital requirement for market and credit risk. For credit risk, assets are first risk weighted (by multiplying them by a risk weight) and then a capital requirement is applied. In contrast, for market risk, exposures are simply multiplied by a specific risk capital charge. For an exposure with a given external credit assessment (rating), the specific risk capital charge is the same as the capital requirement calculated under the standardised approach for credit risk.

                Specific Risk – Capital Charge for Positions Covered Under the Securitisation Framework

                20.Following the 2009 enhancements to the BCF, the specific risk of securitisation positions held in the trading book are generally calculated in the same way as securitisation positions in the banking book.

                21.Specific risk – the capital charges for positions covered under the standardised approach for securitisation exposures.

                22.The default position for unrated securitisations can be thought of as a capital charge of 100 percent (that is, equivalent to a risk weight of 1250 percent where the capital charge is 8 percent).

                23.Where the specific risk capital charge for an exposure is 100% such that capital is held for the full value of the exposure, it may be excluded from the calculation of the capital charge for general market risk. For further details, please refer to the securitisation framework.

                Treatment of Interest Rate Derivatives

                24.The interest rate risk measurement system should include all interest rate derivatives and off-balance sheet instruments assigned to the trading book that are sensitive to changes in interest rates.

                25.The derivatives are converted into positions in the relevant underlying. These positions are subject to the general market risk charges and, where applicable, the specific risk charges for interest rate risk. The amounts reported should be the market value of the principal amount of the underlying or notional underlying.

                26.For instruments where the apparent notional amount differs from the effective notional amount, banks will use the effective notional amount.

                Interest rate derivatives include:

                1. forward rate agreements (FRAs)
                2. other forward contracts
                3. bond futures
                4. interest rate swaps
                5. cross currency swaps
                6. forward foreign exchange positions
                7. interest rate options

                Refer to the examples below in this section for numerical illustrations

              • B. Equity Risk

                27.Market risk can be influenced by changes in equity prices, that is, equity risk.

                28.Equity risk is the risk that movement in equity prices will have a negative effect on the value of equity positions. The capital charge for equity risk is the sum of the charges for general and specific market risk.

                29.The Central Bank sets out a minimum capital standard to cover the risk of equity positions held in the trading book. It applies to long and short positions in all instruments that exhibit behavior similar to equities, with the exception of non-convertible preference shares, which fall under interest rate risk requirements.

                   1.Capital Charges for Equity Risk

                30.To calculate the minimum capital charge for equity risk, you must calculate two separate charges:

                1. A general market risk charge of 8% is applied to the net overall position.
                2. A specific risk charge of 8% is applied to the gross equity position. After offsetting long and short positions in the same issue, a bank's gross equity position is the sum of the absolute values of all long equity positions and all short equity positions.

                31.Since banks may hold equities in different national markets, separate calculations for general and specific risk must be carried out for each of these markets.

                Offsetting

                Long and short positions in the same issue can be fully offset, resulting in a single net long or short position.

                   2.Treatment of Equity Derivatives

                32.Equity derivatives and off-balance-sheet positions that are affected by changes in equity prices should be included in the measurement system, with the exception of certain options positions. This includes futures and swaps on both individual equities and on stock indices.

                33.Positions in these equity derivatives should be converted into notional positions in the relevant underlying stock or portfolio of stocks. For example, stock index futures should be reported as the marked-to-market value of the notional underlying equity portfolio. A stock index future is an agreement to buy or sell a standard quantity of a specific stock index, on a recognised exchange, at a price agreed between two parties, and with delivery to be executed on a standardised future settlement date. As it is obviously not feasible to deliver an actual stock index, stock index futures contracts are settled by cash, calculated with reference to the difference between the purchase price and the level of the index at settlement.

                34.An equity swap is an agreement between two counterparties to swap the returns on a stock or a stock index for a stream of payments based on some other form of asset return. Often, one payment leg is determined by a stock index with the second leg determined by a fixed or floating rate of interest. Alternatively, the second leg may be determined by some other stock index (often referred to as a relative performance swap).

                35.Equity swaps should be treated as two notional positions. For example, in an equity swap where a bank is receiving an amount based on the change in value of one stock index and paying an amount based on a different index, the bank is regarded as having a long position in the former index and a short position in the latter index.

                36.In addition to the general market risk requirement, a further capital charge of 2% will be applied to the net long or short position in index contracts on a diversified portfolio of equities, to cover factors such as execution risk. As the standard stated.

                Refer to the examples below in this section for numerical illustrations

              • C. Foreign Exchange Rates

                37.Market risk can be influenced by changes in foreign exchange rates, that is, foreign exchange risk.

                38.Foreign exchange risk is the risk that the value of foreign exchange positions may be adversely affected by movements in currency exchange rates. Foreign exchange positions or exposures incur only general market risk. The capital charge for foreign exchange risk also include a charge for positions in gold. For purposes of market risk capital requirements, the Central Bank takes into account the stable relationship between the AED and the US dollar, with the result that no capital is charged for open positions in USD. Foreign currency is any currency other than the bank's reporting currency.

                39.Two steps are required to calculate the overall net open position:

                Step 1: Determine the Exposure in Each Currency

                The first step is to calculate the bank's open position, long or short in each currency.

                The open position in each currency is the sum of:

                1. the net spot FX position (Includes also all asset items less all liability items, including accrued interest, denominated in the currency)
                2. the net forward FX position (Because forward FX rates reflect interest rate differentials, forward positions are normally valued at current spot exchange rates. The net forward position in an exposure should consist of all amounts to be received less all amounts to be paid under forward FX transactions, including currency futures and the principal on currency swaps not included in the spot position. For banks that base their management accounting on the net present values (NPVs), the NPV of each position should be used; discounted using current interest rates and valued at current spot rates)
                3. guarantees and similar instruments that are certain to be called and are likely to be irrecoverable.
                4. net future income and expenses not yet accrued but already fully hedged
                5. any other item representing a profit or loss in foreign currencies
                6. the net delta-based equivalent of the total book of foreign currency options

                Step 2: Determine the Overall Net Open Position across FX Exposures

                The second step in calculating the capital requirement for FX risk is to measure the risk in the bank's portfolio of foreign currency and gold positions.

                You can determine the overall net open position of the portfolio by first converting the exposure in each foreign currency into the reporting currency at the spot rates. Then, calculate the overall net position by summing the following:

                1. the greater of the sum of the net short positions or the sum of the net long positions (excluding the net open position in the US dollar
                2. Take the larger of the two sums, from the step above, and add the absolute value of the net position (short or long) in gold.

                The capital charge for foreign exchange market risk is 8% of the position resulting from the calculation above.

                Foreign Exchange (FX) Exceptions

                40.The Central Bank of UAE may allow banks to exclude certain FX positions from the capital charges calculation. Banks have to comply with both the requirement of para 70 of the Market Risk section of the standards.

                41.Items that are deducted from a bank’s capital when calculating its capital base, such as investments in non-consolidated subsidiaries, or other long-term participations denominated in foreign currencies, which are reported in the published accounts at historic cost, do not need to be included as foreign currency exposures for the foreign exchange risk calculation.

                42.Banks with negligible business in foreign currencies and with no FX positions taken for their own account may exclude their FX positions if they meet both of the following requirements:

                1. their FX business (the greater of the sum of their gross long positions and the sum of their gross short positions) does not exceed 100% of total capital (Tier 1 + Tier 2)
                2. their overall net open position does not exceed 2% of its total capital
              • D. Commodity Risk

                43.Market risk can be influenced by changes in commodity prices, that is, commodity risk. Commodity risk is the risk that on- or off-balance sheet positions will be adversely affected by movements in commodity prices.

                44.A commodity is defined as a physical product that can be traded on a secondary market, for example, agricultural products, minerals and precious metals. Gold; however, is covered under the framework for foreign exchange.

                45.Price risk in commodities is often more complex and volatile than price risk associated with currencies and interest rates. One reason for this is that commodity prices are influenced by natural events such as floods and droughts. Changes in supply and demand also have more dramatic effects on price and volatility, and commodity markets often lack liquidity.

                46.Commodity risk only has a general market risk component because commodity prices are not influenced by specific risk.

                47.Banks using portfolio strategies involving forward and derivative contracts on commodities are exposed to a variety of additional risks, such as:

                1. Basis risk. the risk of changes in the cost of carry for forward positions and options. Cost of carry is a margin and refers to the net effect of borrowing funds for a certain period of time and investing them in a financial instrument or commodity for the same period of time. If the interest earned on the instrument or commodity is greater than the cost of borrowing, then the cost of carry is positive. The cost of carry can also be negative if the cost of borrowing is greater than the interest earned.
                2. Forward gap risk. This is the risk wherein forward prices may change for reasons other than a change in interest rates.

                48.It is important to note that these risks could well exceed the risk associated with changes in spot prices of commodities.

                   1.Treatment of Commodities
                Offsetting

                49.When measuring risk in commodities, offsetting between positions is restricted.

                1. Offsetting is allowed between long and short positions in exactly the same commodity to calculate open positions.
                2. In general, offsetting is not allowed between positions in different commodities. However, the Central Bank may permit offset between different sub-categories of the same commodity, for example, different categories of crude oil, if:
                  1. they are deliverable against each other
                  2. they are close substitutes for each other, with a minimum correlation of 0.9 between price movements over a period of at least one year
                Correlations

                50.Banks using correlations between commodities to offset commodity positions must have obtained prior approval from the Central bank of UAE.

                   2.Calculating the Capital Charge

                51.Two alternative approaches for calculating the capital charge for commodities are set out by the standardised measurement method:

                a)Simplified Approach

                52.Under the simplified approach, banks must express each commodity position, spot plus forward, in terms of the standard unit of measurement (barrels, kilos, grams, and so on).

                The capital charge is the sum of two charges:

                1. 15% of the net position in each commodity. All commodity derivatives and off-balance sheet positions affected by changes in commodity prices should be included.
                2. 3% of the bank's gross commodity positions, that is, the sum of the net long plus net short positions in each commodity, calculated using the current spot price. This charge addresses basis risk, interest rate risk and forward gap risk.
                b)Maturity Ladder Approach

                53.There are seven steps involved in calculating the capital charge for commodities using the maturity ladder approach. A separate maturity ladder must be used for each commodity.

                The maturity ladder approach
                Step 1Express each commodity position in terms of the standard unit of measurement, and value in the reporting currency at the current spot price
                Step 2Slot each position into a time band in the maturity ladder according to remaining maturity
                Step 3Apply a capital charge of 1.5% to the sum of the matched long and short positions in each time band to capture spread risk. Instead of applying the 1.5% spread risk charge to the sum of matched long and short positions in each time band, some countries apply a 3% spread risk charge to the matched position.
                Step 4Apply a capital charge of 0.6% to the residual net position carried forward to the next relevant time band, multiplied by the number of time bands it is carried.
                Step 5Repeat step 3 and step 4 for each time band.
                Step 6Apply a capital charge of 15% to the overall long or short net open position.
                Step 7Derive the total capital charge by summing the charges for spread risk, for positions carried forward and for the overall net open position.
                   3.Treatment of Commodity Derivatives

                54.All commodity derivatives and off-balance sheet positions affected by changes in commodity prices should be included in the commodities risk measurement framework. This includes commodity futures, commodity swaps, and options where the “delta plus” method is used.

              • E. Options

                Treatment of Options

                55.There is a section of the market risk framework devoted to the treatment of options.

                The market risk charge for options can be calculated using one of the following methods:

                1. the simplified approach
                2. an intermediate approach: the delta-plus method

                56.The more significant a bank's trading activities, the more sophisticated the approach it should use. The following table shows which methods a bank can use:

                 Simplified approachIntermediate approach
                  Delta- plus method
                Bank uses purchased options only
                Bank writes optionsx

                 

                57.Banks that solely use purchased options are free to use the simplified approach, whereas banks that also write options are expected to use the intermediate approach. If a bank has option positions, but all of those written options are hedged by perfectly matched long positions in exactly the same options, no capital is required for market risk on those options. However, banks need to report the hedged options in the respective sheet.

                a)Simplified Approach

                58.Option positions and their associated underlying (cash or forward) are 'carved out' from other risk types in the standardised approach. They are subject to separately calculated capital charges that incorporate both general market risk and specific risk. These charges are then added to the capital charges for the relevant risk categories: interest rate risk, equities risk, foreign exchange risk or commodities risk.

                59.In some cases, such as foreign exchange, it may be unclear which side is the “underlying security.” In such cases, the asset that would be received if the option were exercised should be considered as the underlying. In addition, the nominal value should be used for items where the market value of the underlying instrument could be zero, such as caps and floors, swaptions, or similar instruments.

                60.The capital charges under the simplified approach are as follows:

                Simplified approach : capital charges
                PositionTreatment
                Hedged positions: long cash position in the underlying instrument and long put or short cash position in the underlying instrument and long callThe capital charge is the market value of the underlying security multiplied by the sum of specific and general market risk charges for the underlying, less the amount the option is in-the-money (if any) bounded at zero.
                Outright option positions: long call or long putThe capital charge is the lesser of:
                1. The market value of the underlying security multiplied by the sum of specific and general market risk charges for the underlying
                2. The market value of the option
                b)Intermediate Approach

                61.The procedure for general market risk is explained below. The specific risk capital charges are determined separately by multiplying the delta-equivalent of each option by the specific risk charges for each risk category.

                   The delta-plus method

                62.The delta-plus method uses the sensitivity parameters or Greek letters associated with options to measure their market risk and capital requirements.

                63.Options should be included in market risk calculations for each type of risk as a delta- weighted position equal to the market value of the underlying multiplied by the delta.

                64.The delta-equivalent position of each option becomes part of the standardised approach, with the delta-equivalent amount subject to the applicable market risk capital charges. Separate capital charges are then applied to the gamma and Vega risks of the option positions.

                Greek Letters: Five coefficients are used to help explain how option values behave in relation to changes in market parameters (price of the underlying asset, the strike price, the volatility of the underlying, the time to maturity and the risk-free interest rate). These are represented by the Greek letters delta, gamma, Vega, theta and rho, and are referred to as the 'option Greeks'.

                1. Delta (Δ) measures the rate of change in the value of an option with respect to a change in the price of the underlying asset.
                2. Gamma (Γ) measures the rate of change in the delta of an option with respect to a change in the price of the underlying asset.
                3. Vega (Λ) measures the rate of change in an option price with respect to a change in market volatility for the underlying asset price.
            • III. Shari’ah Implementation:

              65.Bank that conduct all or part of their activities in accordance with the provisions of Shari’ah and have exposure to risks similar to those mentioned in the Market Risk Standard, shall, for the purpose of maintaining an appropriate level of capital, calculate the relevant risk weighted asset (RWA) in line with these guidelines. This must be done in a manner compliant to the Shari’ah.

              66.This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidelines in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services.

            • IV. Frequently Asked Questions

              Question 1: Are issues rated AA- or better by Supranational issuers qualify for 0% specific risk charge? For such issues, the Country of Risk = SNAT as classification in Bloomberg would be considered as Supranational
              No, there is no specification to supranational and thereby low risk charge.

              Question 2: Please clarify whether futures or options on ETFs and volatility indices such as VIX are treated as equity index instrument.
              Yes, it will be part of equity and reported under equity derivative. Please refer to the Market risk section of the standards for further guidance.

              Question 3: Under the treatment of interest rate derivatives for general market risk, in reference to table 3, credit derivatives have not been listed. Kindly advise if these products are excluded from the capital requirement stipulated under general market risk.
              Credit derivatives (including CDS and TRS) are subject to the general market risk treatment for interest rate risk if the instrument involves periodic payments of interest. Credit derivatives are subject to specific risk capital as described in paragraphs 26 and 27 of the Market Risk section of the Standards. Note that Table 3 in the text covers only interest rate derivatives, and therefore credit derivatives should not be included. Credit derivatives must be analysed whether they are subject to the general market risk treatment for interest rate risk. For example, Credit Default Swaps are usually not subject to general interest rate risk, whereas Total Return Swaps and credit linked notes are usually subject to general market risk. Please note, that the analysis to which risk types a specific instrument type is exposed, must be provided to the Central Bank upon request.

              Question 4: Clarity is needed on what constitutes trading book. For example, Investment Grade bonds classified as AFS, however with no active trading and a holding period of almost till maturity (e.g. callable, decision to sell closer to maturity) does this need to be banking book? Similarly, HTM under this description can be either trading or banking book.
              The Market Risk Standard as published does not change the definition of trading book. The requirements of BCBS 128 paragraphs 685 to 689 have been applied in the text of the Standards. Please refer to the Market Risk Regulation under Notice 3018/2018 for the full definition of trading book.

              Question 5: For Qualifying category, if the issuer of the security is a rated corporate by any one of rated agencies i.e. Moody's, S&P, Fitch with investment grade. Should it be included under Qualifying Category?
              Yes, this will fall under qualifying category as long as it rated investment grade by at least two credit rating agencies.

              Question 6: Should general criteria for all investment grade securities other than Government Issuers be taken under the category of Qualifying?
              Yes, these instruments will be classified as qualifying provided in paragraphs 16-19.

              Question 7: As per the Standards, "the separate legs of cross-currency swaps or forward foreign exchange deals are to be treated as notional positions in the relevant instruments and included in the appropriate calculation for each currency". Under which method these are required to be included in MR-3 i.e Maturity method or Duration method.
              General risk can be computed using Maturity and Duration approach. Paragraph 41 on "Allowable offsetting of matched positions" of the market risk standard applies to both approaches and depends on what approach the bank uses for reporting.

              Question 8: If the options are hedged, do we need to input the numbers in the template.
              If it is fully micro hedged, then Net Forward Purchase (Sales) & Delta weighted positions for Options will be zero. Refer to VII Appendix: Prudent Valuation Guidance as part of Market risk standard.

              Question 9: Banks have the possibility to include the repo transactions in the trading book for regulatory capital calculation even though they are accounted in the banking book?
              Term trading-related repo-style transactions that meet the requirements for trading-book treatment may be included in the bank’s trading book for regulatory capital purposes even if a bank accounts for those transactions in the banking book. If the bank does so, all such repo-style transactions must be included in the trading book, and both legs of such transactions, either cash or securities, must be included in the trading book. Regardless of where they are booked, all repo-style transactions are subject to a credit risk capital requirement under the Central Bank’s Standards for Credit Risk Capital. The secured part of the exposure is risk weighted based on the credit rating/type of the issuer the security serving as collateral, and the unsecured part is risk weighted based on the credit rating/type (bank-sovereign-corporate) of the counterparty. In addition, how/where the reporting should be under which risk type (e.g. interest rate risk (Specific and/or General), FX, Equity, etc.) depends on the nature of the cash placement (one ‘leg’) and that of the security/collateral (other ‘leg’). The two legs are reportable to the relevant market risk type. For example, if the cash placement is floating rate and denominated in foreign currency it would be reported under FX. In regards to position risk (interest rate and equity risk types), it would be under General risk.

              Question 10: How do we treat the capital charge when an exposure in the Banking book is hedged via a derivative in the trading book?
              As long as the position got an open leg under one of the two books (i.e. Banking or trading), applicable capital charge should be taken in place. When a bank hedges a banking book credit risk exposure using a credit derivative booked in its trading book (i.e. using an internal hedge), the banking book exposure is not deemed to be hedged for capital purposes unless the bank purchases from an eligible third party protection provider a credit derivative meeting the requirements in the Central Bank’s Standards for Credit Risk. Where such third party protection is purchased and is recognised as a hedge of a banking book exposure for regulatory capital purposes, neither the internal nor external credit derivative hedge would be included in the trading book for regulatory capital purposes.

              Question 11: BCBS standards provides banks two options to include large swap books in the maturity or duration ladder (Convert the payments into their present values or to calculate the sensitivity of the net present value). It would be useful to clarify which methods are acceptable.
              Currently both methods are acceptable but to move forward with sensitivity or NPV approach, the bank shall seek Central Bank approval by providing all relevant documents.

              Question 12: How to treat Multilateral Development Banks (MDBs), PSEs and GREs that qualify 0% risk weight as per Credit Risk Section of the Standards for the “Qualifying” criteria of Specific Risk?
              All MDBs are considered “qualifying” for this purpose and will receive a RW of 0%.

              PSE that meets the conditions to be treated like a sovereign for credit risk can be considered “government" for specific risk.

              Commercial GREs that are treated as corporates for credit risk should also be treated as corporates for market risk, for consistency.

              Question 13: Can the securities issued by local government be reported under government? If yes, what capital charge will be applied?
              Only if they qualify for treatment as “sovereign” under the credit risk framework, a 0% can be applied.

              Question 14: What is meant by 'broadly' in paragraphs 23 and 24 of the Market Risk Standard. Any threshold for the size of the movement e.g. a negative correlation of more than 0.6?
              No, there is no specific threshold. "Broadly" in this context means "with close approximation," to allow for minor deviations from perfect correlation. The bank should have a sensible policy to ensure that objective, which should be subject to supervisory review.

              Question 15: What is meant by "long term participation"? What is included in it?
              Long-term participations could take a number of forms, but a typical example would be investments accounted at historical cost (and in this context, denominated in a foreign currency). Paragraph 65 edited for clear understanding.

              Question 16: Do the banks have to meet certain criteria to apply duration or maturity approach or is the choice of method fully within the bank's discretion?
              Maturity approach shall be the initial approach to be used. In case the bank requires to apply Duration approach, then banks will have to seek Central Bank consent to switch between the approaches.

              Question 17: Under Specific interest rate risk, what will be the treatment for the debt securities that are denominated and funded in domestic currency or foreign currency?
              The preferential treatment/national discretion will be applicable to GCC sovereign’s papers denominated and funded in local currency. In addition, exposures to the Federal Government and Emirates Government receive 0% risk weight, if such exposures are denominated and funded in AED or USD for a transition period of 7 years from the date of implementation of this Standard. After the transition period, 0% risk weights are only applied to exposures that are denominated and funded in AED. Elsewise (if denominated and funded in foreign currency and if the debt security is not GCC sovereign paper) rating and residual maturity shall be applied.

              Question 18: Interest Rate Risk: How are derivatives treated from a market risk and credit risk perspective that a foreign branch has with its head office and other branches of the group? Are all the derivative transactions under the umbrella of the group, can such derivatives be excluded from the capital charge?

              1. Exemption is not eligible; all derivatives are to be included under credit and market risk.
              2. If the branch and the head office both have the same ISDA contract, netting and collateral will not be eligible. However, if the ISDA contract contains only the deals from the branch, then netting and collateral would be eligible.
              3. From Market risk perspective, if the bank's transactions are fully hedged, i.e. certain derivatives with UAE customers are fully hedged back to back with the head office, then the bank can offset for example the general and specific interest rate risks (based on paragraphs 41 to 45). However, counterparty credit risk is still to be considered.

              Question 19: Treatment of Options: Do banks have to meet certain criteria to apply the simplified approach or the delta plus method? Or is the choice of method fully within bank's discretion?
              As per Para 82 (Standard), two alternative approaches apply to options. Banks that only purchase options (rather than written options) can choose to use a simplified approach. Unless all written option positions (under the simplified approach) are hedged by perfectly matched long positions in exactly the same options, in which case no capital charge for market risk is required. Banks with more complex option positions that also write options must use the delta-plus approach rather than the simplified approach.

              Question 20: Specific Interest Rate Risk: When the securities are not externally credit rated, does the Central Bank have a list of specific treatment for issuers/ issues that are unrated?
              The Central Bank does not have a discretionary list of customers that do receive a special treatment if an external rating is not available.

              1. The standard is exhaustive for all special treatments. For example: UAE and GCC sovereign exposure that are funded and denominated in the domestic currency receive 0% RW (independent of the external rating of that sovereign)
              2. Exposures to the Federal Government and Emirates Government receive 0% risk weight, if such exposures are denominated and funded in AED or USD for a transition period of 7 years from the date of implementation of this Standard. After the transition period, 0% risk weights are only applied to exposures that are denominated and funded in AED.

              Question 21: If a bank has exposure in equity investments in the trading book, how will this exposure be treated under Market risk?
              Risk-weighted assets for equity exposures arising from bank investments in funds that are held in the trading book are subject to the market risk capital rules. Equity investments in funds will be allocated to the trading book if the bank is able to “look through” to the fund’s underlying assets (i.e. determine capital requirements based on the underlying positions held by the fund), or where the bank has access both to daily price quotes and to the information contained in the mandate of the fund. The reporting is based on the underlying positions held by the fund; it could be covered under different areas of the market risk (e.g. FX, IRR and equity risk).

              Question 22: As per paragraph 21 of the Market Risk Standard, it is mentioned that a securitisation exposure subject to a risk weight of 1250% under the Central Bank requirements (and therefore to a 100% specific risk charge under this Standard) may be excluded from the calculation of capital for general market risk. Should the cap for the UAE be 1250% or 952% as mentioned in paragraph 5 of the Introduction of the standards?
              Yes, the RW has to be capped at 952% as mentioned in the introduction of the standards.

            • V. Examples

              Note that capital charges calculated in all examples below still need to be converted into risk weighted assets via Section IV in the Market Risk Standards.

              • A. Interest Rate Risk

                   1.Calculating the General Market risk charge

                Calculate the general market risk capital charge for XYZ bank’s interest rate positions using the maturity method.

                Long position in a qualifying bond: Market value AED 13.33m. Residual maturity 8 years & coupon 8%

                Long position in a government bond: Market value AED 75m. Residual maturity 2 months & coupon 7%

                Interest rate swap: Notional value AED 150m. Residual life of swap 8 years & bank receives floating rate interest and pays fixed. Next interest fixing after 9 months

                Long position in interest rate government bond future: Contract size AED 50mn.

                The treatment of interest rate future positions assume a bank is exposed to a long position in a 6-month interest rate future bought today and settled in two months' time. The long position in interest rates needs to be slotted into the 6-12 months’ time band because the maturity of the long position is considered to be eight months. This is because the position is taken on today and will be settled in two months with a maturity of six months.

                Delivery date after 6 months & remaining maturity of the CTD government security 3.5 years.

                Cheapest to deliver CTD refers to the underlying instrument that result in the greatest profit or the least loss when delivered in satisfaction of futures contracts.

                Calculating the general market risk capital charge comprises two main steps and a number of sub-steps.

                Step 1: Map each interest rate position

                We are using the maturity method to map the positions. None of the bank’s positions have a coupon of less than 3%, so we will use a ladder of 13 time bands. Each position is mapped to the appropriate time band according to its residual maturity.

                Step 2: calculate the total capital charge

                Overall net open position

                 Zone 1 (months)Zone 2 (years)Zone 3 (years)
                Time band0-11-33-66-121-22-33-44-55-77-1010-1515-20>20
                Weighted position (AED m) +0.15-0.2+1.05  +1.125  -5.625+0.5   

                 

                The net open position is the sum of all the positions across all the time bands. The net open position is AED 3m short, which leads to a capital charge at 100% of AED 3,000,000.

                Calculation:

                +75*0.2%=+0.15

                -50*0.4%=-0.2

                +150*0.7%=+1.05

                +50*2.25%=+1.125

                -150*3.75%=-5.625

                +13.33*3.75%=+0.5

                Vertical disallowance

                The long position of AED 0.5m is offset against the short position of AED 5.625m as per the marked area. The matched position is AED 0.5m and the net open position is AED -5.125m.

                This leads to a capital charge of 10% of AED 0.5m, or AED 50,000

                 Zone 1 (months)Zone 2 (years)Zone 3 (years)
                Time band0-11-33-66-121-22-33-44-55-77-1010-1515-20>20
                Weighted position (AED m) +0.15-0.2+1.05  +1.125  -5.625+0.5   
                Vertical disallowance         -5.125   
                Calculation

                Matched position = 0.5

                Net open position = -5.625+0.5= -5.125

                Horizontal disallowance

                The third part of the capital charge is a charge for the horizontal disallowance. There are three rounds of horizontal offsetting.

                In round 1, the horizontal disallowance within each zone is calculated. In this example, charge applies to zone 1 only because it is the only zone with a long and a short position. (With more than one position). The short position, -0.2 is offset against the total long position, +1.2. The matched position is 0.2 and the net open position is +1.

                The capital charge for the horizontal disallowance within zone 1 is 40% of AED 0.2m, or AED 80,000

                In round 2, calculate the horizontal disallowance between adjacent zones, i.e., between:

                Zone 1 and zone 2

                Zone 2 and zone 3

                In this example, zone 1 and zone 2 both contain long positions, so there is no matched position and therefore no offsetting between these zones. The long position of 1.125 in zone 2 is offset against the short position of -5.125 in zone 3. The matched position is 1.125 and the net open position is -4. The capital charge for the horizontal disallowance between zones 2 and 3 is 40% of AED 1.125m= AED 450,000.

                In round 3, we calculate the horizontal disallowance between zones 1 and 3.

                In this example, the long position of 1 in zone 1 is offset against the short position of -4 in zone 3. The matched position is 1 and the net open position is -3. The capital charge for the horizontal disallowance between zones 1 and 3 is 100% of AED 1m = AED 1m.

                After the three rounds of horizontal offsetting, the total charge for the horizontal disallowance is AED 80,000 + AED 450,000 + AED 1,000,000 = AED 1,530,000

                Having completed the horizontal and vertical offsetting, the remaining overall net open position is AED 3m, which is equivalent to the overall net open position we calculated across all time bands when we calculated the first part of the capital charge.

                 Zone 1 (months)Zone 2 (years)Zone 3 (years)
                Time band0-11-33-66-121-22-33-44-55-77-1010-1515-20>20
                Weighted position (AED m) +0.15-0.2+1.05  +1.125  -5.625+0.5   
                Vertical disallowance -5.125 
                Horizontal disallowance Round 1+1 
                Horizontal disallowance Round 2    -4
                Horizontal disallowance Round 3     -3

                 

                We have now calculated the total capital charge for general market risk for this example.

                Capital chargeAED
                1A charge for the net open position3,000,000
                2A charge for the vertical disallowance50,000
                3A charge for horizontal disallowance 
                Round 1: Charge for the horizontal disallowance within each zone80,000 
                Round 2: Charge for the horizontal disallowance between adjacent zones450,000 
                Round 3: Charge for the horizontal disallowance between zones 1 and 31,000,0001,530,000
                 net charge for positions in options 0
                 Total capital charge 4,580,000
                   2.Specific Market Risk – Example

                Relate to the same example as above.

                Given that, the government bonds are AAA-rated and that the qualifying bond is BBB-rated.

                The interest rate swap does not incur a specific risk charge. The AAA-rate government bonds incur a 0% specific risk charge. The qualifying bond has a residual maturity of 8 years and is BBB-rated, so if has a specific risk charge of 1.6%

                The capital charge is 1.6% of AED 13.33m, or AED 213,280.

              • B. Equity Risk – Calculating the Capital Charge

                Bank XYZ has the following positions in its equity portfolio for a particular national market.

                CompanyPositionNo. of sharesMarket price (AED)Market value (AED)
                A Corp.Long10,00035350,000
                B Corp.Short20,00025500,000
                C Corp.Short5,00050250,000
                D Corp.Long15,00020300,000
                E Corp.Short2,00060120,000

                 

                To calculate the general market risk charge, we must first determine the overall net open position. The sum of the net long positions is AED 650,000 and the sum of the net short positions is AED 870,000. The overall net open position is short AED 220,000.

                The capital charge for general market risk is 8% of AED 220,000, or AED 17,600.

                Next, we must work out the specific risk charge.

                The capital charge for specific risk is 8% of AED 1,520,000 or AED 121,600.

                That lead to, overall capital charge for this portfolio is AED 17,600 + AED 121,000, or AED 139,200.

              • C. FX Risk – Calculating the Capital Charge

                Below is an example of calculating the capital charge for FX risk.

                A bank has the following positions that have been converted at spot rates into its reporting currency, United Arab dirhams (AED).

                CurrencyJPYEURGBPAUDUSDGold
                Net position (AEDm)+50+100+150-20-180-35

                 

                The higher of the sum of the net long and net short currency positions is AED 300m.

                The capital charge is therefore calculated as 8% of AED 300m, plus the net position in gold (AED 35m):

                Capital charge = 8% of AED 335m = AED 26.8m

                Another example;

                A bank has the following positions that have been converted at spot rates into its reporting currency (AED)

                CurrencyEURJPYGBPAUDSGD
                Net position (AEDm)+150-100+75-30-15

                 

                The sum of the net long positions is AED 225m and the sum of the net short positions is -AED 145m. The capital charge is calculated as 8% of the higher of these two positions, so the charge is 8% of AED 225m, or AED 18m.

              • D. Commodity Risk

                   1.Simplified approach

                XYZ bank is exposed to a number of positions in the same commodity. The bank’s reporting currency is AED. The following positions are held in EUR:

                PositionStandard units (kg)Maturity
                Long1284 months
                Short-1605 months
                Long9613 months
                Short-964 years

                 

                Firstly, calculate the current value for these positons in the reporting currency.

                The following is the current situation:

                Current spot price of the commodity per unit (kg) in local currency5.00EUR per kg
                Current EUR/AED FX spot rate4.251 EUR = 4.25 AED

                 

                Further calculation to the position after conversion to local reporting bank’s currency

                PositionStandard units (kg)Spot priceValue (EUR)FX spot rate 1 EUR = 4.25 AEDValue (AED)Maturity
                Long1285.006404.252,7204 months
                Short-1605.00-8004.25-3,4005 months
                Long965.004804.252,04013 months
                Short-965.00-4804.25-2,0404 years

                 

                640*4.25=2,720
                -800*4.25=-3,400
                480*4.25=2,040
                -480*4.25=-2,040

                Calculate the capital charge, first a capital charge of 15% of the overall net open position in the commodity is required.

                The overall net position is the sum of the long and short positions:
                AED 2,720 – AED 3,400 + AED 2,040 – AED 2,040 = - AED 680
                The overall net positon is short AED 680. This leads to a capital charge of AED 102 (680 * 15%) Next, a capital charge of 3% of the bank’s gross positon in the commodity is required.
                The gross position is the sum of the absolute values of the long and short positions:
                AED 2,720 + AED 3,400 + AED 2,040 + AED 2,040 = AED 10,200

                XYZ bank’s gross position is AED 10,200. This leads to a capital charge of AED 306 (10,200 * 3%).
                Now, sum the charges to find the total capital charge for this commodity. The charge for the overall net open position is AED 102, and the charge for the bank’s gross position in the commodity is AED 306.
                Therefore, XYZ bank’s total market risk capital charge for positions held in this commodity is AED 102 + AED 306, or AED 408.

                   2.Maturity ladder approach

                Recall that XYZ bank is exposed to a number of positions in the same commodity. The bank’s reporting currency is AED. The following positions are held in EUR:

                PositionStandard units (kg)Maturity
                Long1284 months
                Short-1605 months
                Long9613 months
                Short-964 years

                 

                Step 1:

                First express each commodity position in terms of the standard unit of measurement, and value in the reporting currency at the current spot price.

                The following is the current situation:

                Current spot price of the commodity per unit (kg) in local currency5.00EUR per kg
                Current EUR/AED FX spot rate4.251 EUR = 4.25 AED

                This is done the same way as for the simplified approach.

                PositionStandard units (kg)Spot priceValue (EUR)FX spot rate 1 EUR = 4.25 AEDValue (AED)Maturity
                Long1285.006404.252,7204 months
                Short-1605.00-8004.25-3,4005 months
                Long965.004804.252,04013 months
                Short-965.00-4804.25-2,0404 years

                 

                Step 2:

                Slot each position into a time band in the maturity ladder according to its remaining maturity. Physical stocks should be allocated to the first time band.

                Maturity ladder
                Time bandsPositions (AED)
                 LongShort
                0-1 months  
                1-3 months  
                3-6 months2,720-3,400
                6-12 months  
                1-2 years2,040 
                2-3 years  
                Over 3 years -2,040

                 

                Step 3:

                Apply a capital charge: of 1.5% to the sum of the matched long and short positions in each time band to capture spread risk.

                Maturity ladderMatched positionCapital charge for spread risk rate = 1.5%
                Time bandsPositions (AED)
                 LongShort
                0-1 months    
                1-3 months    
                3-6 months2,720-3,4002,72081.6*
                6-12 months    
                1-2 years2,040   
                2-3 years    
                Over 3 years -2,040  

                *start with the 3-6 months’ time band.
                Multiply the sum of the ling and short matched positions by the spread rate 1.5%, to calculate the capital charge: (AED 2,720 + AED 2,720) * 1.5% = AED 81.6

                Step 4:

                Apply a capital charge of 0.6% to the residual net position carried forward to the next relevant time band, multiplied by the number of time bands it is carried forward.

                The maturity ladder approach allows for netting between unmatched long and short positions across time bands. The residual net position in a time band can be carried forward to the next relevant time band, thus offsetting exposures in time bands further out. Because this is imprecise, resulting in an “imperfect hedge”; a capital charge is required.

                The residual net position in the 3-6 months’ band is short AED 680. This net position is carried forward two time bands to offset exposures in the next relevant time band, the 1-2 years’ band.

                Maturity ladderMatched positionNet positionCapital charge for spread risk rate = 1.5%Capital charge for positions carried forward rate = 0.6%
                Time bandsPositions (AED)
                 LongShort
                0-1 months      
                1-3 months      
                3-6 months2,720-3,4002,720-680 (3400-2720)81.68.16*
                6-12 months      
                1-2 years2,040-680    
                2-3 years      
                Over 3 years -2,040    

                *The capital charge is calculated as follows: AED 680 * 2 * 0.6% = AED 8.16

                Step 5:

                Repeat step 3 and step 4 for each time band.

                When determining the matched position in each time band, take into account the residual net position carried forward.

                Maturity ladderMatched positionNet positionCapital charge for spread risk rate = 1.5%Capital charge for positions carried forward rate = 0.6%
                Time bandsPositions (AED)
                 LongShort
                0-1 months      
                1-3 months      
                3-6 months2,720-3,4002,720-680 (3400-2720)81.68.16
                6-12 months      
                1-2 years2,040-6806801,36020.4*16.32**
                2-3 years      
                Over 3 years1,360-2,0401,360- 68040.8*** 

                *(680+680)*1.5% = AED 20.4
                **(1,360*2*0.6%) = AED 16.32
                ***(1,360+1360) *1.5% = AED 40.8

                Step 6:

                Apply a capital charge of 15% to the overall long or short net open position.

                The net position in the final time band is subject to a capital charge of 15% as to say 680 * 15% = AED 102

                Step 7:

                Derive the total capital charge by summing the charges for spread risk, for positions carried forward and for the overall net open position.

                Capital chargesAED
                Charge for spread risk142.8
                Charge for the positions carried forward24.48
                Charge for the overall net position102
                Total capital charge269.28

                In this example, the capital charge calculated using the maturity ladder approach; AED 269.28 is significantly lower than that calculated using the simplified approach, AED 408.

              • E. Options

                   Simplified approach

                A bank holds 100 shares currently valued at USD 10, and also holds an equivalent number of put options with a strike price of USD 11 (each option entitles the bank to sell one share).
                Since these are equity options, they are subject to the capital charges for general market risk and specific risk according to the standardised framework for equity risk. The capital charge is levied at 8% for general market risk and 8% for specific risk, giving a summed charge of 16%.

                Market value of 100 shares = USD 1,000

                First, multiply the market value by the sum of general market risk and specific risk charges.
                USD 1,000 x 16% = USD 160
                Then, calculate the amount the option is in-the-money.

                (USD 11 - USD 10) x 100 = USD 100

                The capital charge is the general market risk and specific risk charge less the amount the option is in-the-money.
                USD 160 - USD 100 = USD 60

                A similar methodology applies for options whose underlying is a foreign currency, an interest rate related instrument or a commodity.

                Another example for simplified approach
                A bank holds 500 shares currently valued at USD 25.50 and holds an equivalent number of put options with a strike price of USD 26.25 (each option entitles the bank to sell one share).

                The capital charge is calculated as follows:
                Market value of 500 shares = USD 12,750
                USD 12,750 x 16% (that is, 8% specific plus 8% general market risk) = USD 2,040

                The amount the option is in-the-money = (USD 26.25 - USD 25.50) x 500 = USD 375.
                This gives a capital charge of USD 2,040 - USD 375 = USD 1,665

          • IX. Operational Risk

            • I. Introduction and Scope

              1.This section of the guidance supports the Operational Risk Standard in clarifying the calculation of the Operational risk capital requirement.

              2.Operational risk has existed since banks have been in business. However, it is only in recent decades that the management of operational risk (including measurement techniques) has evolved into a distinct discipline, long after this was the case for both credit risk and market risk.

              3.In this same period, the significance of operational risk in banks became widely recognised. This development was influenced by numerous high-profile operational risk events and related losses, along with such factors as banks' greater reliance on technology and increased use of outsourcing, the growing sophistication of cyber threats, and the pace of change in the financial services sector.

            • II. Clarification

              4.Operational risk includes legal and compliance risk but excludes strategic and reputational risk. The exclusion of strategic and reputational risk is because they relate more to indirect losses, the definition, measurement and quantification of which would give rise to significant complexities.

              5.The operational risk capital charge represents the amount of capital that a bank should maintain as a cushion against losses arising from operational risk.

              6.The operational risk capital charge is first calculated using the appropriate approach under Basel III. It is then converted into a risk-weighted asset equivalent by multiplying the charge by 12.5 and adding the result to the total risk-weighted assets for credit risk.

            • III. Approaches

              7.The calculation of the operational risk capital charge is covered under the Standards for Capital Adequacy of banks in the UAE.

              8.The approaches represent a continuum of increasing sophistication and risk sensitivity. The charge is to be calculated using one of the following two approaches:

              • a. Basic Indicator Approach (BIA)

                9.The Basic Indicator Approach (BIA) is a simple approach for calculating the capital charge for operational risk. It can be used by banks that are not internationally active, as well as by banks that are internationally active but may not yet have risk management systems in place for using the more advanced approaches for measuring operational risk.

                10.While the approach is available for all banks as a 'point of entry', irrespective of their level of sophistication, Central Bank expects internationally active banks and banks with significant operational risk to discontinue indefinitely with the Basic Indicator Approach.

                The Basic Indicator Approach Components

                11.The operational risk capital charge under the BIA is based on two components:

                1. 1.The exposure indicator, represented by the Gross Income (GI) of a bank as a whole.
                2. 2.The fixed factor, alpha (α), set by the Basel Committee.

                The formula for calculating the capital charge for operational risk under the BIA is as follows:

                KBIA=[(GI1..n×α)]/n

                 

                Where:

                 

                KBIA = The capital charge under the BIA;

                GI = Annual gross income, where positive, over the previous three years;

                n = Number of the previous three years for which gross income is positive; and

                α =15%, relating the industry wide level of required capital to the industry wide level of the indicator.

                 

                1.Gross Income of the Bank

                12.Gross income is a broad indicator that serves as a proxy for the likely exposure of a bank to operational risk. It is the total of net interest income plus net non-interest income of a bank as a whole. Net interest income is defined as interest income of a bank (for example, from loans and advances) minus the interest expenses (for example, interest paid on deposits). Net non-interest income is defined as fees and commissions earned minus the non-interest expenses (that is, fees and commissions paid) and other income.

                13.Gross income used in the calculation of the capital charge for operational risk should be:

                1. -Gross of any provisions, for example, for unpaid interest. This is because such amounts should have normally formed part of a bank's income but have been set aside for likely credit losses.
                2. -Gross of operating expenses, including fees paid to outsourcing service providers. This is because outsourcing of activities does not fully transfer operational risk to the service provider. Outsourcing is the strategic use of outside resources to perform business functions that are traditionally managed by internal staff. Outsourcing offers the advantage of access to specialised and experienced personnel that may not be available internally, and enables banks to concentrate on their core business and reduce costs.

                14.Only sustainable, renewable and recurrent sources of income are to be used as the basis for calculating the operational risk capital charge. Banks should perform a reconciliation between the gross income reported on the capital adequacy return and the audited financial statements. This information should be available to the Central Bank upon request. As such, gross income should exclude:

                1. -realised profits/losses from the sale of securities classified as 'held to maturity' and 'available for sale', which typically constitute items of the banking book under certain accounting standards. The intention is to hold such securities for some time or up to their full term and not for trading purposes. Their sale does not represent sustainable income from normal business.
                2. -Held to maturity securities are those that the bank intends to hold indefinitely or until the security reaches its maturity. Available for sale securities includes securities that are neither held for trading purposes nor intended to be held till maturity. These are securities that the bank intends to hold in the short or medium term, but may ultimately sell. Banking book relates to positions that are held to maturity with no trading intent associated with them. Most loans and advances are included in the banking book as they are intended to be held until maturity. At times, there may also be liquid positions assigned to the banking book if they are intended to be held over a longer term or to maturity.
                3. -Extraordinary or irregular items as well as income derived from insurance claims. Again, these items are to be excluded, as they are not sustainable sources of income for a bank.

                15.Banks sometimes outsource certain activities, such as processing and maintaining data on loan collection services to external service providers. Alternatively, banks may act as service providers to other banks. This results in the payment or receipt of a fee for the outsourced service.

                16.Basel provides the following guidance for the treatment of outsourcing fees paid or received, while calculating the gross income for the purpose of calculating the operational risk capital charge:

                1. -Outsourcing fees paid by a bank to a service provider do not reduce the gross income of the bank.
                2. -Outsourcing fees received by a bank for providing outsourcing services are included in the definition of gross income.

                 

                2.Alpha

                17.Alpha is a fixed factor, set by the Basel Committee. It serves as a proxy for the industry-wide relationship between operational risk loss experience of a bank and the aggregate level of the operational risk exposure as reflected in its gross income.

                 

                Treatment of Negative Gross Income

                18.The operational risk capital charge under the BIA is assumed that a bank has positive gross income for all of the previous three years. However, some banks may have negative gross income for some year(s), for example, resulting from poor financial performance. Figures for any year in which annual gross income is negative or zero shall be excluded from both the numerator and denominator when calculating the gross income average.

                19.On this basis, the figures presented in the 3 years' calculations should reconcile (or be reconcilable) with the bank’s audited financial statements.

              • b. Standardised Approach (SA)

                20.The Standardised Approach (SA) represents a refinement along the continuum of approaches for calculating the operational risk capital charge. While this approach also relies on fixed factors as a percentage of gross income, it allows banks to use up to eight such factors, called betas, depending upon their business lines.

                21.The calculation of the operational risk charge under this approach is more risk sensitive than the BIA.

                The Standardised Approach Capital Charge

                22.Under the Standardised Approach (SA), the operational risk capital charge is based on the operational risk capital charges for individual business lines in a bank. The formula for calculating the operational risk capital charge under the SA is as follows:

                1

                Where:

                KTSA = the capital charge under the Standardised Approach

                GI1-8 = the annual gross income in a given year, as defined in the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA), for each of the eight business lines

                β 1-8 = a fixed percentage, set by the committee, relating the level of required capital to the level of the gross income for each of the eight business lines

                The Standardised Approach Components

                23.The Standardised Approach identifies two main components to be used in calculating the operational risk capital charge:

                1.Gross Income of Eight Business Lines

                24.Eight business lines are recommended for use by the Basel Committee in calculating the operational risk charge under the SA. These business lines are considered as being representative of the various kinds of businesses undertaken by banks. The identified business lines briefed below are:

                1. 1.Corporate finance: banking arrangements and facilities provided to large commercial enterprises, multinational companies, non-bank financial institutions, government departments etc.
                2. 2.Trading and sales: treasury operations, buying and selling of securities, currencies and commodities for proprietary and client accounts.
                3. 3.Retail banking: financing arrangements for private individuals, retail clients and small businesses such as personal loans, credit cards, auto loans, etc. as well as other facilities such as trust and estates and investment advice.
                4. 4.Commercial banking: financing arrangements for commercial enterprises, including project finance, real estate, trade finance, factoring, leasing, guarantees, bills of exchange etc.
                5. 5.Payment and settlement: activities relating to payments and collections, interbank funds transfer, clearing and settlement.
                6. 6.Agency services: acting as issuing and paying agents for corporate clients, providing custodial services etc.
                7. 7.Asset management: managing funds of clients on a pooled, segregated, retail, institutional, open or closed basis under a mandate.
                8. 8.Retail brokerage: broking services provided to customers that are retail investors rather than institutional investors.

                25.Under the SA, the gross income is calculated for each of the eight business lines. It serves as a proxy for the likely scale of exposure of that business line of the bank to operational risk. Since all income has to be allocated to a business line, the sum of the gross income of the eight business lines should equal the gross income for the bank as a whole

                26. Just like in the Basic Indicator Approach, gross income for SA comprises net interest income plus net non-interest income as defined in the Operational Risk section of the Standards re Capital Adequacy.

                2.Beta

                27.Beta serves as a proxy for the industry-wide relationship between the operational risk loss experience and the level of operational risk exposure as reflected in the gross income for a business line. It is representative of the amount of loss that can be incurred by a bank given that level of exposure (represented by gross income) in a business line.

                28.The beta factors for the eight business lines as set by the Basel Committee are as follows:

                BetaBusiness lineBeta factor
                β 1Corporate finance18%
                β 2Trading and sales18%
                β 3Retail banking12%
                β 4Commercial banking15%
                β 5Payment and settlement18%
                β 6Agency services15%
                β 7Asset management12%
                β 8Retail brokerage12%

                 

                29.The beta factors have been set within a range of 12-18% depending upon the degree of operational risk perceived in a business line. Thus, a 12% beta factor for retail banking indicates that, in general, the operational risk in retail banking is lower than the operational risk in commercial banking. The latter, which has a beta of 15%, carries a lower operational risk than, for example, payment and settlement, which carries a beta factor of 18%.

                Treatment of Negative Gross Income from Business lines

                30.Some banks may have negative gross income for some years in some business lines. This will result in a negative capital charge for the business line for that year. If the gross income and the resulting capital charge of a specific business line is negative, the aggregate of the capital charges across business lines for that year could still be positive, so long as the gross income from other business lines is positive.

                31.The following guidance applies for treatment of negative capital charges under the Standardised Approach:

                1. -In any given year, negative charges in business lines may offset positive capital charges in other business lines without any limit.
                2. -If the total capital charge, after offsetting negative and positive capital charges of business lines, is negative for a given year, then the numerator for that year will be set to zero.
                3. -If negative gross income distorts the operational risk capital charge calculated under the SA, the Central Bank will consider appropriate supervisory action under Pillar 2.
                Calculating the Operational risk capital charge under the Standardised Approach (SA)

                The calculation of the capital charge for operational risk under the SA follows the following steps:

                Step 1: Calculate the capital charge for each business line using its gross income and applicable beta factor in year 1.

                If the gross income from a business line is negative, the capital charge for that business line in year 1 will be negative.

                Step 2: Sum the eight capital charges of business lines for Year 1.

                In a year, negative capital charges in some business lines may offset positive capital charges for other business lines without any limit.

                Steps 3 and 4: Follow steps 1 and 2 for the other two years.

                Step 5: Calculate the 3-year average of the aggregated capital charges. Where the aggregate capital charge across all business lines in a given year is negative, then the input to the numerator for that year will be zero. The denominator will remain 3, representing the three years included in the calculation.

                Central Bank supports the use of the Beta given in the Standards re Capital Adequacy as well as here in this guidance above as the basis for the capital calculations under SA.
                 

              • c. Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA) Capital Charge

                32.The Alternative Standardised Approach provides a different exposure indicator for two of the eight business lines, retail banking and commercial banking. These activities essentially comprise traditional banking business and still represent the main business of banks in several jurisdictions.

                Calculation of Operational Risk Capital Charge under Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA)

                33.Using the ASA, the operational risk capital charge for retail banking and commercial banking will be based on the following formulas:

                KRB=βRB×m×LARB

                 

                Where:

                Krb = is the capital charge for retail banking

                m = 0.035

                β rb = is the beta factor for retail banking (12%)

                LArb = is the total outstanding retail loans and advances (non-risk weighted and gross of provisions), averaged over the past three years

                KCB=βCB×m×LACB
                 

                Where:

                KCB = is the capital charge for commercial banking

                m = 0.035

                βCB= is the beta factor for commercial banking (15%)

                LACB = is the total outstanding commercial loans and advances (non-risk weighted and gross of provisions), averaged over the past three years

                For the other six business lines, the calculation of the operational risk capital charge will be based on the gross income and beta factor of that business line, as prescribed under the SA.

                Further Options under the Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA)

                34.Further options are available at under the ASA for calculating the operational risk capital charge to address problems in disaggregation of the exposure indicator among business lines by banks. However, the greater the disaggregation, the better will be the alignment of the capital charge with a bank's operational risk profile.

                35.Available options relate to using loans and advances in commercial and retail banking business lines and gross income in the other six business lines as the exposure indicators with different beta factor combinations:

                1. -Option 1 – using a common beta factor of 15% for commercial loans and retail loans, and the SA beta factors for the other six business lines
                2. -Option 2 – using the SA beta factors of 15% and 12%, respectively, for commercial loans and retail loans and a common beta factor of 18% for the other six business lines
                3. -Option 3 – using a common beta of 15% for commercial loans and retail loans and a common beta factor of 18% for the other six business lines

                For further details, kindly refer to the Appendix below.

                 

            • IV. Shari’ah Implementation

              36.Banks that conduct all or part of their activities in accordance with the provisions of Shari’ah law and have exposure to risks similar to those mentioned in the Operational Risk Standard, shall, for the purpose of maintaining an appropriate level of capital, calculate the relevant risk weighted asset in line with these guidelines. This must be done in a manner compliant to the Shari’ah law.

              37.This is applicable until relevant standards and/or guidelines in respect of these transactions are issued specifically for banks offering Islamic financial services.

            • V. Frequently Asked Questions

              • A. Basic Indicator Approach

                Question 1: If a bank incurs a negative gross income in any of the previous three years, will it be taken into account under the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA)?
                The basis for working out the capital charge for operational risk under the BIA is three-year average of positive gross income. If the gross income for any of the previous three years is negative or zero, the figures for that year will be excluded from both the numerator and the denominator when calculating the capital charge. The negative gross income will not be added to the numerator and the denominator will exclude the year in which the income is negative.
                As mentioned under the Basic Indicator Approach, if negative gross income distorts a bank’s Pillar 1 capital charge under the Standardised Approach, supervisors will consider appropriate supervisory action under Pillar 2.

                Question 2: Can the Central Bank detail or provide examples of the extraordinary or irregular items under the definition of Gross income. Does this cover the bank selling off certain part of its business?
                An extraordinary or irregular item consists of gains or losses included on a bank's P&L statement (usually reported separately as these items are not predictors of future performance) from events that are unusual and infrequent in nature. Such items are the result of unforeseen and atypical events that are outside the normal course of the core banking business (i.e. outside the types of income described in paragraph 13 of the Operational Risk section of Standards re Capital Adequacy in the UAE). For example, income derived from non-core banking business; income from discontinued operations; extraordinary income (e.g. from the sale of certain part a banking business).

              • B. Standardised Approach

                Question 3: Define business Segments under 'Retail Brokerage' and 'Asset Management'?
                1. Retail Brokerage - Examples of activities:
                  Execution and full service, such as:
                  1. i.Reception and transmission of orders in relation to one or more financial instruments
                  2. ii.Execution of orders on behalf of clients
                2. Asset Management- Examples of activities:
                  1. i.Portfolio management
                  2. ii.Managing of Investments funds, including: pooled funds, segregated funds, retail funds, institutional funds, closed funds, open funds, private equity funds

                Question 4: What is the objective mapping criteria for mapping ancillary business function that supports more than one business line?
                Such objective mapping criteria depends on the business and ancillary business mix of a bank. These criteria are not preset by the Central Bank. A bank should establish internally such criteria, reflecting its internal organisation, and these should be subject to independent review as per point (ix) of paragraph 12 of the Operational Risk section of Standards re Capital Adequacy in the UAE. The allocation can be done pro-rata based on the chosen criteria.
                Examples of objective criteria include:

                1. 1.number of full-time equivalent members of staff,
                2. 2.time sheet man-hours,
                3. 3.number of clients or transactions originated from each business line,
                4. 4.volume of business originated from each business line.

                Question 5: Business Segments/ functions that are to be mapped to 'Payment and Settlement' can be clearly articulated, as currently Level 2 defines the business segment as 'External Clients'
                There is no fixed definition of external clients but all clients that the bank deals with externally with regards to Payment and Settlements need to be incorporated in this business line.

              • C. Alternative Standardised Approach

                Question 6: What exposure indicator is used in the ASA approach?
                In the ASA, gross income is replaced by the credit volume in terms of outstanding loans and advances (L&A) multiplied by a factor m (fixed at 0.035), as the exposure indicator for retail and commercial banking business lines. The loans and advances are non-risk weighted and gross of provisions.

                Question 7: Why is the volume-based indicator alternative provided?
                This volume-based indicator is provided to avoid large differences in the operational risk requirement caused by differences in income margins across banks and jurisdictions in these business lines. Gross income is not an appropriate exposure indicator of the extent of operational risk in retail and commercial lending.

                Question 8: Can a bank choose to adopt ASA on its own?
                No, the Central Bank must be satisfied that the alternative approach provides an improved basis for calculating the capital charge for operational risk in the bank. Reverting to the SA after adopting ASA is only possible with the approval of the Central Bank.

                Question 9: What comprises Commercial Loans and Advances?
                Under the ASA, commercial loans and advances will include outstanding amounts (non-risk weighted and gross of provisions) averaged over the past three years, from the following credit portfolios:

                Commercial loans included for ASADefinitions
                CorporatesLoans to a corporation, partnership or proprietorship firm
                SovereignsLoans to sovereigns and their central banks, certain public sector enterprises and multilateral development banks
                BanksLoans to other banks and regulated securities firms
                Specialised lendingLoans for project finance, object finance, commodities finance, income producing real estate and commercial real estate
                Small and medium enterprises treated as corporatesLoans to small and medium enterprises belonging to a group with annual gross turnover that exceeds AED 250 million
                Purchased corporate receivablesBank finance against amounts due to corporates from third parties for goods and/or services provided by them.
                Book value of securities held in the banking bookThe value at which securities have been purchased rather than their market value. Securities that are held in the banking book are intended to be held until maturity. There is no intent of trading in these securities.

                 

                Question 10: What comprises Retail Loans?
                For the purpose of the ASA, retail loans will include total outstanding amounts (non-risk weighted and gross of provisions) averaged over the past three years in the following credit portfolios:

                Retail loans included for ASADefinitions
                RetailExposures to individuals, residential mortgage loans etc.
                SMEs treated as retailLoans extended to small and medium businesses and managed as retail exposures by the bank.
                Purchased retail receivablesBank finance against amounts due to bank’s retail clients from third parties for goods and/or services provided by them

                 

                Question 11: What is the threshold to decide a large diversified bank in terms of assets book size/composition or any other indicators?
                Currently, there is no such threshold. The Central Bank will perform an assessment for each bank applying to qualify for ASA. The qualifying criteria provided in paragraph 28 of the Operational Risk section of Standards re Capital Adequacy in the UAE, especially the first one (90% income from retail/commercial banking) are stringent. The Central Bank will review whether the bank meets the 90% standard to determine whether an additional size cut-off is appropriate.

                Question 12: Retail or commercial banking activities shall account for at least 90% of its income. Please clarify whether this needs to be seen in the current year or an average of all the 3 years based on which the Operational Risk capital is being computed
                Testing the 90% rule across a period of three consecutive years will be more appropriate.

                Question 13: "The bank's operational risk management processes and assessment system shall be subject to validation and regular independent review". Can we get clarification on the difference between the validation and the review, and what are the scope and responsible party for each?
                Validation of models and tables must be performed by the internal auditor or by the external auditor.

                Question 14: In terms of the "regular reporting", is an official ORM meeting required? For example, Operational Risk Business/ Country / Group Committee meetings?
                It is up to the bank how it conveys the regular reports to the senior management and the board of directors, but the evidence of these reports were submitted needs to be documented for example senior management signatures on the reports.

                Question 15: Is operational risk capital charge revision a quarterly activity going forward or it remains as a yearly activity at the end of the year?
                Will it be more adequate if we use current years’ gross income to compute operational risk rather last year's audited numbers only.
                If the quarterly income is audited, the bank should use the quarterly data, which means the same quarter in the previous two years needs to be taken into consideration or else, the yearly audited data needs to be incorporated
                The standards state only audited numbers need to be used and as such, if the current year’s income is audited, it can be used as part of the computation

                Question 16: Elaboration of definition and scope of Operational Risk should be helpful. For example, whether Operational Risk includes other risk types such as Fraud Risk, Business Continuity Risk etc.
                The definition and scope of Operational risk is sufficiently elaborated in the Operational Risk Standard of the Capital Adequacy Standards of Banks in the UAE and the Operational Risk Guidance. If operational risks were not sufficiently covered under Pillar I, then the uncovered risk should be part of the Pillar 2 ICAAP calculation.

                Question 17: As per the definition of gross income, "income derived from insurance" is to be excluded from the income while computing Operational RWA.
                We would request clarification if this also refers to bancassurance i.e.Bank's commission income earned on insurance products that are sold on behalf of insurance companies."

                Any income which the bank earns out of the bancassurace should be treated as income derived from insurance.

            • VI. Examples

              • A. Basic Indicator Approach

                The Basic Indicator Approach (BIA) is a simple approach for calculating the capital charge for operational risk. It can be used by banks that are not internationally active, as well as by banks that are internationally active but may not as yet have risk management systems in place for using the more advanced approaches for measuring operational risk. Below is an example of ABC bank and how the Operational risk capital charge is calculated on Basic Indicator Approach

                1- Calculating gross income through the table shows part of the income statement of ABC bank for 2003.

                  Income statement of ABC bank for 2003
                  Operating income 
                  Interest income150
                  Interest expenses110
                  Provisions made20
                  Net interest income after provisions20
                  Fees and commissions received80
                  Fees and commissions paid50
                  including fees paid for outsourcing12
                  Other income
                  From disposal of subsidiaries
                  From disposal of available for sale
                  Investments

                  10
                  8
                  0
                  Net non-interest income48
                  Total operating income68

                   

                  The net interest income to be used in gross income for calculating the operational risk capital charge after provisions. Normally banks reduce this amount to arrive at the operating income, however, in the calculation of capital charge for operational risk, net interest income is gross of provisions.

                  In this example, net interest income is interest income minus interest expenses.

                  150 – 110 = 40

                  While for calculating net non-interest income for calculating operational risk capital charge, in this example:

                  Net non-interest income is fees and commissions received (80) minus fees and commissions paid, adjusted for outsourcing fees paid (50 – 12 = 38). Therefore, the amount will be 42.

                  2- Calculating operational risk capital charge under BIA

                  The following table shows how to calculate the operational risk capital charge under the BIA.

                  YearGross income of the bank
                  2002120
                  200320
                  2004250
                  Total positive GI for 3 years390 (120+20+250)
                  Three year average of positive Gross Income130 (390/3)
                  Alpha15%
                  Operational risk capital requirement under BIA19.5 ((390*15%)/3 or 130*15%

                   

                  3- Treatment of Negative Gross Income

                  Below is the calculation of the operational risk capital charge when the bank has negative gross income for a year.

                   Amount
                  Gross income year 1-120
                  Gross income year 220
                  Gross income year 3250
                  Total of positive gross income270
                  Number of years with positive gross income2
                  Average of positive annual gross income for the last three years135 (270/2)
                  Alpha15%
                  Operational risk capital requirement20.25 (135*15%)

                   

                  Since negative gross income leads to exclusion of data points for that year from both the numerator and the denominator of the BIA operational risk formula, it could at times result in some distortions. For example, a bank that has negative gross income for one of three years might end up with a higher operational risk capital charge than if it were to have positive gross income for that year, even if it was a small amount. To ensure that such distortions do not occur, the supervisor should review and consider appropriate actions under Pillar 2.

                • B. Standardised Approach

                  1- Below is small example indicated which to include and exclude in the gross income:

                  IncludedExcluded
                  ProvisionsProfits/losses from sale of securities
                  Operating expensesExtraordinary/ irregular items

                   

                  Gross income for each business line should:

                  1. -Be gross of any provisions (for example, for unpaid interest).
                  2. -Be gross of operating expenses, including fees paid to outsourcing service providers.
                  3. -Exclude realised profits/losses from the sale of securities in the banking book.
                  4. -Exclude extraordinary or irregular items as well as income derived from insurance claims.

                  2- The following table shows how to calculate the capital charge for operational risk using the Standardised Approach:

                  Business lineBeta factorGross incomeCapital requirement
                    Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2*Year 3Average
                  Corporate finance18%250300200455436 
                  Trading and sales18%100-70-8018-12.6-14.4 
                  Retail banking12%500200-3006024-36 
                  Commercial banking15%400300400604560 
                  Payment and settlement18%300350300546354 
                  Agency services15%75504511.257.56.75 
                  Asset management12%50-100-206-12-2.4 
                  Retail brokerage12%1501008018129.6 
                  Total Gross Income 1,8251,130625    
                  Aggregate Capital Requirement**    272.25180.9113.55189***

                  *Gross Income x Beta factor

                  **Sum of eight capital charges for the year – remember within a year negative capital charges can offset positive charges among business lines

                  ***Three-year average capital charge

                  3- Another example to illustrate the negative Gross income:

                  Business lineBeta factorGross incomeCapital requirement
                    Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3Average
                  Corporate finance18%250-300200455436 
                  Trading and sales18%100-70-8018-12.6-14.4 
                  Retail banking12%500200-3006024-36 
                  Commercial banking15%400-300400604560 
                  Payment and settlement18%300350300546354 
                  Agency services15%75504511.257.56.75 
                  Asset management12%50-100-206-12-2.4 
                  Retail brokerage12%1501008018129.6 
                  Total Gross Income 1,825-70625    
                  Aggregate Capital Requirement    272.250*113.55129**

                  *Total capital charge against all business lines for year 2 is negative (-17.1), so the numerator for year 2 is set to zero

                  **Capital charge averaged for three years, with the numerator for year 2 set to zero

                • C. Alternative Standardised Approach

                  The following table shows how to calculate the capital charge for operational risk using the Alternative Standardised Approach.

                  Business lineBeta factorExposure Indicator*Capital requirement**
                    Year 1Year 2Year 3Year 1Year 2Year 3Average
                  Corporate finance18%250300200455436 
                  Trading and sales18%100-70-8018-12.6-14.4 
                  Retail banking12%700***875***945***84105113.4 
                  Commercial banking15%875***910***980***131.25136.5147 
                  Payment and settlement18%300350300546354 
                  Agency services15%75504511.257.56.75 
                  Asset management12%50-100-206-12-2.4 
                  Retail brokerage12%1501008018129.6 
                  Total Gross Income 2,5002,4152,450    
                  Aggregate Capital Requirement    367.5353.4#349.95356.95##

                  *Gross income/loans & advances x m
                  **Exposure indicator (GI or LA x m) x β
                  ***Outstanding loans and advances x m (0.035)
                  # Sum of eight capital charges for the year
                  ## Three year average capital charge

              • VII. Appendix

                Further Options under the ASA – Option 1

                Under the ASA Option 1, banks may aggregate retail and commercial banking using a common beta of 15%, instead of 12% and 15%, respectively, as prescribed under the Standardised Approach (SA). For the other six business lines, the relevant beta factors as prescribed under the SA are used. The exposure indicator remains the volume of loans and advances for commercial and retail banking and gross income for the other six business lines.

                Further Options under the ASA – Option 2

                Under Option 2, banks may maintain the SA beta factors of 12% and 15% for retail and commercial banking and aggregate the other six business lines with a beta factor of 18%. The volume of loans and advances is used as the exposure indicator for commercial and retail banking. Gross income is used for the other six business lines. Banks undertaking predominantly traditional banking activities, such as retail and commercial banking, and unable to segregate their gross income according to business lines may find it useful to adopt this option.

                Further Options under the ASA – Option 3

                Under Option 3, banks may aggregate retail and commercial banking with a beta factor of 15% and the other six business lines with a beta factor of 18%. The volume of loans and advances is used as the exposure indicator for retail banking and commercial banking. Gross income is used for the other six business lines.

            • X. External Credit Assessment Institutions

              • I. Introduction and Scope

                1.Banks are required to use external ratings to determine risk weights for certain types of exposures. However, only external ratings provided by External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAIs) that have been recognized as eligible for that purpose by the Central Bank may be used. This Guidance describes the specific requirements for the recognition of eligible ECAIs, together with certain other aspects of the use of ratings within the Central Bank’s capital adequacy framework. Note that additional requirements related to the use of ratings in capital requirements for securitisation are provided in the Central Bank’s Standards on Required Capital for Securitisation Exposures.

                2.The Guidance is based closely on requirements of the framework for capital adequacy developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), specifically the requirements articulated by the BCBS in International Convergence of Capital Measurement and Capital Standards: A Revised Framework (comprehensive version June 2006), and the revisions from Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems, December 2010 (rev June 2011).

              • II. Eligibility Criteria

                3.ECAIs may be considered eligible for recognition if they meet the criteria articulated in this section. The Central Bank also takes into account the criteria and conditions provided in the IOSCO Code of Conduct Fundamentals for Credit Rating Agencies (IOSCO CRA Code) when determining ECAI eligibility.

                4.The Central Bank’s eligibility determination for each ECAI applies only with respect to the types of claims for which the eligibility criteria have been met by that ECAI.

                • A. Objectivity

                  5.ECAI’s should have a methodology for assigning credit ratings that is rigorous and systematic, and is subject to validation based on historical experience. Ratings assessments should be based on methodologies combining qualitative and quantitative approaches. Moreover, assessments must be subject to ongoing review and responsive to changes in financial condition. To establish that an ECAI fulfils this primary component of eligibility criteria, it must demonstrate that it meets the following minimum standards:

                  1. (i)The ECAI has established rating definitions, criteria, and methodologies, and apply them consistently;
                  2. (ii)The ECAI should have a robust procedure of rating assignment based on published information, market data, interviews with management, and/or other sources of information that provide a sound basis for purposes of assigning the ratings;
                  3. (iii)When assigning risk ratings, the ECAI should take into account all major features of credit quality that are relevant under the ECAI’s applicable methodology, and should ensure that the ratings are assigned taking into account all risk factors of the rated entity or issue relevant under the ECAI’s applicable methodology;
                  4. (iv)The ECAI should demonstrate that rating methodologies are subject to quantitative back testing. For this purpose, the ECAI should calculate and publish default studies, recovery studies, rating transition matrices, or other analyses as relevant to the ECAI’s rating methodology. The analysis should reflect a definition of default that is consistent with international standards, subject to possible adjustments to take into account local practices or institutional or market conditions;
                  5. (v)The rating methodology for each market segment, including rigorous back testing, must have been established for at least one year and preferably three years;
                  6. (vi)All rating decisions should be made based on the ECAI’s established criteria and methodologies, subject to documented variations approved in accordance with the ECAI’s procedures;
                  7. (vii)The ECAI should have a mechanism to review its procedures and methodologies to adapt them to a potentially changing environment; and
                  8. (viii)The ECAI should maintain adequate systems and internal records to support its assigned ratings.
                • B. Independence

                  6.The ECAI should be free from any economic or external political pressures that may influence its credit ratings. In particular, an ECAI should not delay or refrain from taking a rating action based on its potential effect (economic, political or otherwise). The independence of an ECAI shall be assessed on the basis of the following five parameters:

                  1. (i)Ownership: The ownership structure should not be such that it could jeopardize the objectivity of the rating process. For example, the owners should not hold 10 percent or more of the equity of any entity rated by the ECAI.
                  2. (ii)Organizational Structure and Corporate Governance: The ECAI should demonstrate that its organizational structure minimizes the scope for external influences to influence the rating process inappropriately. The ECAI should have in place effective corporate governance that safeguards the independence of its credit ratings, promotes integrity, and ensures that internal disagreements over ratings are resolved in ways that do not compromise the overall effectiveness of the rating process.
                  3. (iii)Financial Resources: The ECAI must demonstrate that its business is financially viable and is able to sustain any commercial pressure that might be exerted by external entities, including the entities being rated. The ECAI’s financial position should not depend significantly on the provision of other services to the rated entities.
                  4. (iv)External Conflict of Interest: The credit rating process of the ECAI should have the ability to withstand external pressures. The ECAI should demonstrate that it is free from any type of external conflicts of interest, or that conflicts of interest are disclosed and managed.
                  5. (v)Separation: An ECAI should separate its rating business operationally, legally, and if practicable, physically from its other business operations that may present a conflict of interest, such as advisory services.
                • C. International Access and Transparency

                  7.The individual ratings, the key elements underlying the ratings, and whether the issuer participated in the rating process should be information that is publicly available on a non-selective basis.

                  8.In order to promote transparency and enable stakeholders to make decisions about the appropriateness of its credit rating methods, an ECAI should disclose sufficient information (e.g., rating definition, methods of arriving at the rating, rating process, time horizon of the rating, and the surveillance and review procedure) to facilitate such decisions. The ECAI’s general procedures, methodologies, and assumptions for arriving at ratings should be publicly available.

                • D. Disclosure

                  9.A rating should be disclosed as soon as practicably possible after issuance. When disclosing a rating, the information should be clearly worded, and should indicate the nature of the rating and relevant limitations, while providing appropriate warning to users of the potential danger of unduly relying on the rating to make investment or other decisions.

                  10.To promote transparency and market discipline, an ECAI should demonstrate that it provides access to information that enables stakeholders to make decisions about the appropriateness of ratings for the intended use or uses. At a minimum, the ECAI is expected to make public the following information:

                  1. Code of conduct;
                  2. Definition of default;
                  3. The time horizons reflected in ratings;
                  4. Rating definitions;
                  5. Rating methods;
                  6. Actual default rates experienced in each rating category;
                  7. Rating transition matrices;
                  8. Whether particular ratings are solicited or unsolicited;
                  9. The date of last review and update of ratings;
                  10. The general nature of compensation arrangements with rated entities; and
                  11. Any actual or potential conflicts of interest.

                  11.At a minimum, the following conflict-of-interest situations and their influence on the ECAI’s credit rating methodologies or credit rating actions must be disclosed:

                  1. (i)The ECAI is being paid to issue a credit rating by a rated entity or by the obligor, originator, underwriter, or arranger of a rated obligation;
                  2. (ii)The ECAI is being paid by subscribers with a financial interest that could be affected by a credit rating action of the ECAI;
                  3. (iii)The ECAI is being paid by rated entities, obligors, originators, underwriters, arrangers, or subscribers for services other than issuing credit ratings or providing access to the ECAI’s credit ratings;
                  4. (iv)The ECAI is providing a preliminary indication or similar indication of credit quality to an entity, obligor, originator, underwriter, or arranger prior to being hired to determine the final credit rating for the entity, obligor, originator, underwriter, or arranger; and
                  5. (v)The ECAI has a direct or indirect ownership interest in a rated entity or obligor, or a rated entity or obligor has a direct or indirect ownership interest in the ECAI.

                  12.An ECAI should disclose the general nature of its compensation arrangements with rated entities, obligors, lead underwriters, or arrangers. When the ECAI receives compensation unrelated to its credit rating services from a party such as a rated entity, obligor, originator, lead underwriter, or arranger, the ECAI should disclose such compensation as a percentage of the total annual compensation received from that party in the relevant credit rating report or elsewhere, as appropriate. An ECAI should disclose in the relevant credit rating report or elsewhere, as appropriate, if it receives 10% or more of its annual revenue from a single party (e.g., a rated entity, obligor, originator, lead underwriter, arranger, or subscriber, or any of their affiliates).

                • E. Resources

                  13.ECAI should possess sufficient human and technical resources to produce high quality credit ratings. Evidence of resource sufficiency includes:

                  1. (i)Technical expertise of the people should be sufficient to conduct the analysis to support the assignment of ratings, and to maintain contact with senior and operational levels within the entities that are rated. In particular, ECAIs should assign analysts with appropriate knowledge and experience to assess the creditworthiness of the type of entity or obligation being rated; and
                  2. (ii)With respect to technical resources, an ECAI is expected to apply quantitative techniques and models that can appropriately process and analyze the quantities of data required to support the rating process.
                • F. Credibility

                  14.The ECAI must demonstrate that it enjoys credibility in the markets in which it operates. Such credibility is gauged on the basis of:

                  1. (i)The extent to which it meets the resources requirements stated above;
                  2. (ii)The extent to which independent parties (investors, insurers etc.) rely on the ECAI’s risk ratings; and
                  3. (iii)The existence of internal procedures to prevent misuse of confidential information.
                • G. No Abuse of Unsolicited Ratings

                  15.The Central Bank may request the ECAI to demonstrate that it has not used unsolicited ratings to put pressure on entities to obtain solicited ratings. If the Central Bank becomes aware of an ECAI using unsolicited ratings to put pressure on entities to obtain solicited ratings, the Central Bank may consider whether it is appropriate to revoke the recognition of the ECAI as eligible for capital adequacy purposes.

                • H. Cooperation with the Supervisor

                  16.Eligible ECAIs should notify the Central Bank of significant changes to methodologies, and should provide the Central Bank with sufficient access to external ratings and other relevant data to support initial and ongoing determination of eligibility.

                • I. Code of Conduct and Regulation

                  17.The ECAI must adopt and adhere to a code of conduct that is consistent with the IOSCO CRA Code. The ECAI must be subject to effective supervision on an ongoing basis by a competent regulatory authority that has adopted a regulatory regime consistent with the IOSCO CRA Code, and that incorporates a registration system for ECAIs.

              • III. Recognition of ECAIs

                18.The Central Bank’s standards for capital adequacy include mappings that identify risk weights for various types of exposures using a scale that corresponds most closely to the rating system used by Standard & Poor’s. This is done for purposes of exposition and for consistency with the BCBS framework. However, banks should not interpret use of this scale as a Central Bank endorsement of any particular rating agency. Banks may select among all eligible rating agencies as appropriate for purposes of determining risk weights.

                19.On the basis of information assessed by the Central Bank, the following entities currently meet the criteria for eligible ECAIs described in this Guidance:

                1. (i)Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services;
                2. (ii)Moody’s Investors Service;
                3. (iii)Fitch Ratings; and
                4. (iv)Capital Intelligence.

                20.The Central Bank has concluded that banks can use the ratings of any of the above ECAIs. Banks should be aware that the Central Bank regularly reassesses the extent to which any ECAI meets the criteria stated in this Guidance. Banks must take steps to confirm that any ratings used in capital adequacy calculations are obtained from ECAIs that continue to be viewed as eligible by the Central Bank. Additional entities may be approved as eligible ECAIs in due course.

                21.Based on available information regarding the rating processes of these ECAIs, the Central Bank has established the correspondence shown in Table 1 between the long-term rating scales of the various ECAIs. However, if a bank determines that a different mapping is more appropriate, the bank should use that alternative mapping, provided the results are at least as conservative as using the mapping below.

                Table 1: Long-Term Rating Correspondence

                S & PFitchMoody’sCapital Intelligence
                AAA to AA-AAA to AA-Aaa to Aa3AAA to AA-
                A+ to A-A+ to A-A1 to A3A+ to A-
                BBB+ to BBB-BBB+ to BBB-Baa1 to Baa3BBB+ to BBB-
                BB+ to BB-BB+ to BB-Ba1 to Ba3BB+ to BB-
                B+ to B-B+ to B-B1 to B3B+ to B-
                Below B-Below B-Below B3Below B-
                UnratedUnratedUnratedUnrated

                 

                22.For certain aspects of capital adequacy calculations, short-term ratings are used. Based on available information regarding the rating processes of these ECAIs, the Central Bank has established the correspondence shown in Table 2 between the short-term rating scales of the eligible ECAIs. However, as with the long-term ratings, if a bank determines that a different mapping is more appropriate, the bank should use that alternative mapping, provided the results are at least as conservative as using the mapping below.

                Table 2: Short-Term Rating Correspondence

                S & PFitchMoody’sCapital Intelligence
                A-1+, A-1F1+, F1P-1A1+, A1
                A-2F2P-2A2
                A-3F3P-3A3
                Below A-3Below F3Not primeBelow A3

                 

              • IV. Bank Use of Ratings

                • A. Bank Use of ECAI Ratings

                  23.For the purpose of applying ECAI ratings to derive risk-weights for exposures, banks should apply the following process:

                  1. (i)Identify an ECAI (the “nominated ECAI”) whose assigned ratings the bank intends to use to derive risk weights for some type of exposure that is subject to an external ratings-based approach under Central Bank standards;
                  2. (ii)Confirm that the nominated ECAIs can provide reasonable coverage of the bank’s exposures in terms of the types of counterparties and the geographical regions covered;
                  3. (iii)Document the selection of the ECAI and the analysis demonstrating that the ratings of ECAI are appropriate for the specific use;
                  4. (iv)Notify the Central Bank of the nominated ECAI and of the intended application of the ratings of that ECAI to the bank’s external ratings-based calculations; and
                  5. (v)Use the ratings of the ECAI within external ratings-based calculations consistently.

                  24.Banks must use the chosen ECAIs and their ratings consistently for each type of claim for which the ECAI and its ratings are approved, and must seek the consent of the Central Bank on any subsequent changes to the application of those ratings. Banks may not “cherry-pick” the ratings provided by different ECAIs, and must maintain records of which ECAIs they use for various purposes within capital adequacy calculations. Banks may not use unsolicited ratings that may be provided by any ECAI.

                  25.When banks use external ratings to assign risk weight to securitisation exposures under the Central Bank’s Standards on Capital for Securitisation Exposures, additional operational requirements apply to the ratings and the ECAI that is the source of the ratings.

                • B. Multiple Ratings

                  26.If there is only one rating by a nominated ECAI for a particular claim, that rating should be used to determine the risk weight of the exposure.

                  27.If there are two ratings by nominated ECAIs that map to different risk weights, the higher risk weight must be applied.

                  28.If there are three or more ratings with different risk weights, the ratings corresponding to the two lowest risk weights should be referred to. If these give rise to the same risk weight, that risk weight should be applied. If different, the higher risk weight should be applied.

                • C. Other Considerations in the Use of Ratings

                  29.External ratings for one entity within a corporate group cannot be used to risk weight other entities within the same group.

                  30.A bank must treat a relevant exposure or the person to whom the bank has a relevant exposure as “unrated” for risk weighting purposes if that exposure or that person does not have a rating assigned to it by the ECAI otherwise used by the bank.

                  31.Where a bank is applying external ratings to an exposure that corresponds to a particular issue with an issue-specific rating, the risk weight of the claim must be based on this issue-specific rating. In other cases, the following requirements apply:

                  1. (i)In circumstances where the borrower has a specific rating for an issued debt claim, but the bank’s exposure does not relate to this particular rated claim, a high-quality credit rating (that is, one that maps to a risk weight lower than the risk weight that would apply to an unrated claim) on that specific issue may only be applied to the bank’s un-assessed exposure if the exposure ranks pari passu with or senior to the rated issue in all respects. If not, the credit rating cannot be used, and the un-assessed claim exposure should receive the risk weight for unrated claims.
                  2. (ii)In circumstances where the borrower has an issuer rating, this rating typically applies to senior unsecured claims on that issuer. Consequently, only senior claims on that issuer will benefit from a high-quality issuer rating if one exists. Other un-assessed claims of a highly assessed issuer will be treated as unrated. If either the issuer, or a particular issue from that issuer, has a low-quality rating (that is, one that would map to a risk weight equal to or higher than would apply to an unrated exposure), then a bank with an unrated exposure to the same counterparty that ranks pari passu with or is subordinated to senior unsecured (in the case of an issuer rating) or to the specific issue (in the case of an issue-specific rating) should risk-weight that exposure using the low-quality rating.

                  32.Where a bank intends to rely on an issuer or an issue-specific rating, the rating must take into account and reflect the entire amount of credit risk exposure a bank has with regard to all amounts owed to it.

                  33.Where exposures are risk-weighted based on the rating of an equivalent exposure to that borrower, foreign currency ratings should be used for exposures in foreign currency. If there is a separate domestic currency rating, it should be used only to risk-weight exposures denominated in the domestic currency.

                  34.In order to avoid double counting of credit enhancement factors, no supervisory recognition of credit risk mitigation techniques will be taken into account if the credit enhancement is already reflected in the rating of a specific issue.

              • V. Ongoing Review

                35.The Central Bank determines on an ongoing basis whether an ECAI meets the criteria for recognition according to this Guidance. In this regard, the Central Bank conducts periodic reviews of each recognized ECAI. Any changes to the list of approved ECAIs or to the established correspondence between their ratings will be publicly disclosed by the Central Bank in a timely manner.

              • VI. Requests for Recognition of ECAIs

                36.The Central Bank may consider additional ECAIs as eligible for use within capital adequacy standards. These additional ECAIs may be identified for consideration by the Central Bank, or may be identified by banks or by the ECAIs themselves. The Central Bank will evaluate potential additional ECAIs against the eligibility requirements in this Guidance, under procedures established by the Central Bank.

                37.Banks that identify potential additional ECAIs for consideration by the Central Bank must provide information about the ECAI that would allow an appropriate evaluation by the Central Bank according to this Guidance. The banks should identify the types of claims to which the ECAIs ratings might be applied, as well as the geographies covered, and explain the need for, or value of, recognizing the ECAI as eligible. Banks should provide a preliminary evaluation, subject to Central Bank review, of how the ECAI meets all of the eligibility criteria described above in this Guidance.

                38.ECAIs may also request recognition from the Central Bank. In such cases, the ECAI must provide detailed information that would allow a complete evaluation by the Central Bank under this Guidance. The ECAI should provide evidence, subject to Central Bank review, that the ECAI meets all of the eligibility criteria described above in this Guidance, including full compliance with the IOSCO CRA Code.

              • VII. Frequently Asked Questions

                Question 1: What is meant by “international standards” in connection with the definition of default?
                The most widely accepted international standards for assessing the capital adequacy of banks, i.e. the Basel framework, incorporate specific definitions of default for wholesale and retail credit. ECAI definitions of default should broadly reflect those definitions, although they need not precisely duplicate the Basel definitions.

                Question 2: Can definitions of default be adjusted to take into account local practices or institutional or market conditions?
                Yes, as the Guidance notes, certain adjustments for local conditions may be appropriate, particularly to account for default conditions that should be interpreted as demonstrating that a borrower is “unlikely to pay.” As the BCBS has noted in guidance to banks, some flexibility in the definition of default is appropriate to reflect the particular circumstances of each jurisdiction.

                Question 3: Must the quantitative back testing of ratings outcomes incorporate an analysis of recovery rates in all cases?
                No, the quantitative analysis conducted should be tailored as appropriate to demonstrate the performance of the actual rating methodology applied by the ECAI. Specifics of the analysis may differ depending on the methodology; for example, if the rating methodology solely reflects default probabilities rather than loss rates, then recovery studies may not be relevant.

                Question 4: Can unsolicited ratings be used for bank capital calculations?
                No, the Central Bank of the UAE has determined that unsolicited ratings do not provide an appropriate basis for capital calculations by banks in the UAE.

                Question 5: Does the recognition of certain rating agencies by the Central Bank imply an endorsement of those ECAIs?
                No, recognition reflects only a determination that an ECAI and its ratings meet the requirements to be used for regulatory capital calculations as articulated in Central Bank standards and regulations.

                Question 6: Does the requirement that rating methodologies be established for at least one year preclude new rating methodologies from being introduced?
                No, this requirement does not preclude the development and implementation of new rating methods by an ECAI. However, use of ratings for capital adequacy calculations (as opposed to other uses of ratings) requires a demonstration of the reliability of the ratings. Demonstration of reliability takes time; one year of experience is the minimum requirement, and longer periods of observation, perhaps operating in parallel with previous rating methodologies, are preferable.

                Question 7: Do ratings correspond to specific risk weights for capital, and if so where is that correspondence found?
                Yes, the purpose of recognition of ECAIs and the alignment of their ratings as specified in the Guidance is to facilitate the use of these ratings for risk-weight assignments in regulatory capital adequacy calculations. Please consult the relevant Standards (such as the Standards on Credit Risk) for risk weights corresponding to each rating category.

              • VIII. List of Abbreviations

                BCBS:Basel Committee on Banking Supervision
                ECAI:External Credit Assessment Institution
                IOSCO:International Organization of Securities Commissions

                 

                 

                 

        • Pillar 2

          • Pillar 2 – Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)

            Updated version of this section of the Guidance to be issued.

             

            • I. Introduction and Purpose

              1. All banks licensed by the Central Bank of the UAE must ensure that Pillar 1 risks - credit, market, and operational risk - are mitigated by capital, in compliance with the capital adequacy framework articulated in the document Central Bank “Regulations re Capital Adequacy” issued under Notice 60/2017 and the supporting capital standards and guidance, articulated in the document Central Bank “Standards and Guidance re Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE”. Incompliance with the Standards, each bank is required to quantify all risks that are not covered, or not sufficiently covered by Pillar 1 capital, and determine the additional capital required to mitigate these risks. The capital required to cover these risks is referred to as Pillar 2 capital.

              2. Each bank is required to have a process to assess its overall capital adequacy as a function of its risk profile and its strategy. Each bank is required to maintain appropriate capital levels in accordance with the Central Bank Standards on Pillar 2 capital. This process is termed the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP).

              3. As part of the Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process (SREP), the Central Bank analyses the capitalisation levels of banks among other information, referring to the results of the ICAAP with regard to the internal view of capital adequacy. If the evaluation concludes that the capital levels of the individual bank are not satisfactory, the Central Bank may require a bank to meet an adjusted Minimum Capital Adequacy ratio accordingly.

              4. Consequently, Pillar 2 is both a bank internal process reported under the ICAAP, and the evaluation of each bank’s compete capital adequacy includes the ICAAP in its regulatory process - the SREP. First, it is the responsibility of each bank to ensure that its ICAAP is comprehensive and proportionate to the nature, scale, and complexity of its activities. Each bank bears the responsibility for the appropriate identification, estimation, and reporting of risks, and the corresponding the calibration of capital necessary to mitigate these risks. Second, the ICAAP is a critical reference for supervision and for the supervisory dialogue between banks and Central Bank.

              Purpose

              5. This Guidance presents minimum expected practices to be considered by each bank in order to undertake their ICAAP, covering the process, content, outcome, and usage. It clarifies the application of the Central Bank’s expectations regarding the requirements of the Central Bank ICAAP Standards. Note, that the Central Bank plans to issue separately detailed requirements relating to the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

              6. It also intends to support each bank in the identification, measurement, reporting, and mitigation of Pillar 2 risks. This Guidance does not prescribe specific methodologies but rather, it provides a framework, within which a bank should elaborate research, analyse, and draw conclusions relevant to the risk profiles of their books. Each bank remains fully responsible for the methodology and process supporting the ICAAP.

              7. All methodologies employed by a bank for its ICAAP should be relevant to its business model, risk profile, to the geographies of its exposures, and, in particular, to the features of the UAE economy. The methodologies and processes employed by the bank in its ICAAP should be fully documented, transparent and replicable. Each bank should be in a position to justify their decisions and modelling choices with historical data and benchmarking across a range of practices, which will be subject to supervisory scrutiny. Models employed for the measurement of Pillar 2 risks should comply with the Central Bank Model Management Standards and Guidance.

              8. The Central Bank may apply proportionality for smaller and less complex banks when evaluating the ICAAP. This does not mean that smaller or less complex banks are exempted from the reporting requirements or from undertaking a comprehensive assessment of the risks they face. Smaller banks have to perform the whole ICAAP and address the full reporting scope. In cases where a bank’s capabilities lead them to use simpler methodologies, a more conservative capital treatment may be appropriate. However, the Central Bank expects a more sophisticated risk management approach from large banks and/ or banks with complex risk profiles in the assessment of their Pillar 2 risks.

              9. For the licensed operations of foreign banks in the UAE, when this document refers to the bank’s Board, it should be comprehended as the Managing Director and/ or the highest committee in the UAE operations of the bank in which the Managing Director has to be the Chairman.

              10. This Guidance serves several purposes. It

               
              (i)Explains in more detail the Central Bank’s expectations on fulfilling the requirements of the ICAAP Capital Standards, in particular, related to the ICAAP (process) at each bank and certain aspects of the content of the ICAAP report;
              (ii)Covers expectations on some processual elements of the ICAAP, such as an appropriate approval process of the ICAAP report and its submission timelines; and
              (iii)Formulates expectations about additional sections of the ICAAP report (e.g. related to internal audit findings and changes compared to the previous ICAAP report).
            • II. ICAAP Executive Summary

              11. It is important that the executive summary of the ICAAP document produced by each bank should explain the views of Senior Management and the Board on the suitability of the bank’s capital to cover the risks faced by the bank in light of its risk profile, its risk appetite and its future business plans. These views must be supported by key quantitative results including the current and expected capital position of the bank under various economic conditions including stressed circumstances. It should also provide a clear analysis of the drivers of capital consumption, including Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 risks and stress testing. The conclusion should be unambiguous, forward-looking and consider the uncertainty of the business and economic conditions.

              12. More specifically, the executive summary of the ICAAP report should contain the following elements:

               
              (i)The main findings of the ICAAP;
               
              (ii)A brief description of the ICAAP governance framework covering the stakeholders, the assessment process, the challenging process and the approval process;
               
              (iii)A brief presentation of the bank’s structure, subsidiaries, businesses, material risks, risk appetite, and risk mitigating actions, where applicable;
               
              (iv)A description of the current capital position of the bank showing the allocation of capital per risk type, covering Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 risks;
               
              (v)Each bank should complete the ICAAP Executive Summary Table (Table 3) as indicated in Appendix 2 of this document;
               
              (vi)A description of the current capital composition of the bank against minimum capital requirements covering at least CET1, AT1, and Tier 2 capital ratios;
               
              (vii)A forward-looking analysis of the budgeted capital position of the bank, based on the bank’s expected business plan over the next three (3) years, reflecting the current, and expected economic conditions. This needs to cover expected dividend distribution;
               
              (viii)An analysis of the capital position and capital ratios under several stress scenarios, the analysis of the stress scenarios should include the intended risk mitigation actions;
               
              (ix)An assessment of the adequacy of the bank’s risk management processes including critical judgment on the areas that need improvement; and
               
              (x)A conclusion of the ICAAP addressing the suitability of the capital to cover the bank’s current and expected risks.
               

              13. Appendix 3.4 lists further information and documentation that is required to accompany a bank’s ICAAP report.

            • III. ICAAP Governance

              14. Given the critical and major role of the ICAAP in banks’ sustainability and strategy, the Board of Directors is required to approve the ICAAP. The ICAAP should be subject to an effective decision-making process, by which the assumptions, projections, and conclusions are thoroughly discussed, analysed, and challenged at several levels in the organisation including (i) the relevant committees of subject matter experts, (ii) Senior Management, and (iii) the Board.

              15. The Board has ultimate ownership and responsibility of the ICAAP. It is required to approve an ICAAP on a yearly basis. The Board is also expected to approve the ICAAP governance framework with a clear and transparent assignment of responsibilities, adhering to the segregation of functions, as described in Refer to Appendix 3.1. The governance framework should ensure that the ICAAP is an integral part of the bank’s management process and decision-making. The ICAAP governance framework should include a clear approach to the regular internal review and validation by the appropriate functions of the bank.

              16. The policy framework should be approved by the Board. Senior Management has to implement the framework via effective procedures and systems. The framework must include measures reflected in the ICAAP report applied in day-to-day business and supported by suitable MIS at appropriate frequencies. A key aspect of this requirement is the “Use Test” principle covered in the next section. The risk framework has to be applied across the organisation.

            • IV. ICAAP Methodology, Scope and Use Test

              Methodology

              17. The ICAAP is an ongoing process. On an annual basis, every bank is required to submit a document outlining the outcome of the ICAAP to the Central Bank, usually referred to as its ICAAP document or report. The ICAAP supplements the Pillar 1 minimum regulatory capital requirements by (i) identifying risks that are not addressed or not fully addressed through Pillar 1 regulations, referred to as Pillar 2 risks, and (ii) determining a level of capital commensurate with the level of risk. The Central Bank requires each bank to adopt a Pillar 1 plus approach. According to this, the bank’s total capital requirements include the minimum Pillar 1 regulatory capital requirements, plus the capital required to cover Pillar 2 risks. As a result, the ICAAP should result in additional capital requirements specific to each bank’s business model.

              18. Board and Senior Management are responsible to deliver a comprehensive, effective, and accurate assessment of capital adequacy. Each bank is consequently required to conduct an ICAAP supported by appropriate methods and procedures to ensure that adequate capital covers all material risks. Each bank should adopt progressively more sophisticated approaches in measuring risks to keep up with the business model evolvement, the risk profile, size of the bank, and appropriate market practice. The key objective is for each bank to be transparent and demonstrate the relevance of the approach taken in relation to the nature of their activities and risk profile to the Board and the Central Bank.

              19. The frequency of reporting to the Board is expected to be at least quarterly, but, depending on the size, complexity, business model, risk types of the institution, and the market environment, reporting might need to be more frequent to ensure timely management actions. The quarterly reporting should comprise the internal calculation of the capital ratios (Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 under business-as-usual (BAU) and under stress scenarios), which includes determining the surplus/ shortfall of capital. Stress scenarios and internal forecasts only need to be updated on a quarterly basis, if required. Nevertheless, the ICAAP reporting to the Central Bank remains an annual exercise. However, if the quarterly results deviate significantly compared to the results of the ICAAP report as submitted to the Central Bank, then the bank should inform the Central Bank of the updated capital plan (including reasons for the deviations, capital ratios and mitigation actions).

              20. The ICAAP should be supported by robust methodologies and data. All models used directly or indirectly in the ICAAP should follow the bank’s model management framework, in compliance with the Central Bank Standards and Guidance. The data employed in the ICAAP should be comprehensive, reliable, follow rigorous quality checks, and control mechanisms.

              Scope

              21. Each bank is expected to ensure the effectiveness and consistency of the ICAAP at each level, with a special focus on the group level for local banks. The ICAAP of these banks is expected to assess capital adequacy for the bank on a stand-alone basis, at regulatory consolidated level, and for the entities of the group. The ICAAP should primarily evaluate the capital requirement and capital adequacy of the bank at group level, following the regulatory consolidation. However, each bank should analyse whether additional risks arise from the group structure of the bank. The group structure must be analysed from different perspectives. To be able to effectively assess and maintain capital adequacy across entities, strategies, risk management processes, decision-making, methodologies, and assumptions applied should be coherent across the entire group. Identified additional risks may increase the capital requirement on group level accordingly.

              22. Capital transferability within the group should be assessed conservatively and cautiously, which should be considered in the ICAAP. Each bank should have a process to ensure capital transferability that addresses any restrictions on the management's ability to transfer or allocate capital into or out of the bank's subsidiaries (for example contractual, commercial, regulatory, or statutory/legal restrictions that may apply). The capital allocation or distribution and the approval process between the bank’s holding company (group/parent) and the subsidiaries in the banking group should be well defined. The analysis should also consider risks arising from structural foreign currency positions relating to assets, liabilities, and equity.

              23. A bank that has domestic or foreign subsidiaries or branches is expected to evaluate the difference between the ICAAP determined for the bank (including its subsidiaries) and the ICAAP at solo level (without subsidiaries). Therefore, the bank should identify any potential and additional risks both at consolidated group level and at solo bank level. The analysis should also address international operations that have jurisdictional capital requirements or restrictions.

              24. Additional risks may also arise from entities that are not consolidated under Pillar 1, e.g. investments in commercial subsidiaries, including Special Purpose Vehicles (SPV), and insurance companies. Each bank should evaluate whether the required Pillar 1 capital adequately covers all risks arising from those entities. The evaluation should consider all risk types, including credit risk, reputational risk, and step-in risk, etc. The analysis should not be limited to branches and subsidiaries but should also consider affiliates, if material. Such analysis should not be limited to local banks only, also foreign banks operating in the UAE should identify and analyse all their dependencies on parent companies through centralised risk management/ shared services etc.

              Use Test

              25. The ICAAP and the bank’s business strategy form a feedback process. While the ICAAP has to reflect the bank’s business strategy, and business decisions. The bank should implement a formal process to analyse whether the outcomes of the ICAAP influence the business strategy. Banks should determine which additional capital requirements under Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 in business as usual BAU and stress scenarios on the top of the minimum regulatory requirements would be adequate and whether the bank’s risk appetite is adequate or requires to be adjusted accordingly. The formal feedback process should also include links to the banks’ business decisions, risk management process (e.g. using the ICAAP methodologies, results in the approval process, limit setting, strategic processes, such as capital planning or budgeting, and performance measurement). For that purpose, the Board and Senior Management should lead and approve the assumptions, methodology, framework, and outcome of the ICAAP. The usage of the ICAAP within the organisation and its alignment with strategic decisions is referred to as the ‘Use Test’.

              26. The ICAAP should have an interactive relationship with other key processes within the bank, including but not limited to, (i) business strategies, (ii) financial budgeting, (iii) risk management, (iv) risk appetite setting, and (v) stress tests. Metrics related to capital allocation and capital consumption should be included in the banks’ risk appetite. Conversely, the metrics pertaining to business management and to risk management should take into consideration the capital plan.

              27. Conceptually, this circular process should be articulated according to the following illustration and guidance. Each bank should design its own iterative process:

               
              (i)The Board, Senior Management and the business lines should provide their business plan and budget to construct the ICAAP;
               
              (ii)The risk management function should analyse the feasibility and the risks associated to such business plan;
               
              (iii)The ICAAP should result in an estimation of the adequate level of capital given the business and risk assumptions. This should be approved by the Board and by Senior Management; and
               
              (iv)In return, the ICAAP and capital requirements should feed back to the business lines and the risk management function in order to steer the strategy of the bank.
               

              28. The stakeholders should regularly interact with each other during the production of the ICAAP in order to (i) obtain consistent forward-looking capital projections, and (ii) use capital projections consistently in their own decision-making. The stakeholders should include, but not be limited to, the Board, Senior Management, the business lines, the risk management function, and the finance function.

              29. Each bank should demonstrate its appropriate usage of the ICAAP via the production of thorough documentation, reporting covering the process, methodology, decision-making for capital allocation, and strategy. Each bank should document the overall ICAAP design, including key elements and the mechanism by which they interact with each other. Such components should include, but not be limited to, the business strategies, risk appetite statement, risk measurement methods, stress tests programme, and reporting across the Group.

              30. Regular reporting should be constructed to measure and monitor Pillar 2 risks in addition to the annual ICAAP report exercise. Adequate metrics and associated limits should be designed in relation to the bank’s size and complexity.

              31. The Central Bank shall evaluate evidence that the bank has embraced the process for business rather than regulatory reasons. Evidence should be provided that the management has, through the ICAAP, made the business more efficient or less risky.

            • V. Capital Planning

              32. Each bank should operate above the minimum capital requirements set by the Central Bank. Each bank should have a capital plan approved by the Board. The objective of capital planning is to ensure that:

               
              (i)Each bank is compliant with minimum regulatory requirements;
               
              (ii)The bank is viable and able to endure external economic changes; and
               
              (iii)Each bank’s capital is calibrated to its risk profile in order to absorb unexpected losses through time, including periods of economic downturn.
               

              33. The ICAAP should be designed as a tool to adequately support these objectives. Each bank’s management is expected to develop and maintain an appropriate strategy that ensure the level of capital and the process to estimate such level should be commensurate with the nature, scope, scale, size, complexity, and risks of each bank.

              34. The ICAAP should be forward-looking taking into account both internal and external drivers over a period covering three (3) to five (5) years. The capital planning should take into account the bank’s business plan, its strategic development and the economic environment.

              35. The multi-year capital forecast should be assessed and calibrated through two perspectives:

               
              (i)Pillar 1: The bank’s ability to fulfil all of its capital-related regulatory, supervisory requirements, and demands; and
               
              (ii)Pillar 2: The bank’s ability to cope with capital demands beyond that of the regulatory requirements, in accordance to its risk profile.
               

              36. Both perspectives should be function of the bank’s business plan. In addition, the second perspective should incorporate a more granular, specific, and accurate measurement of risks. Both perspectives should take into account the current, expected economic environment, and consider the occurrence of stressed events.

              37. If the bank identifies a shortfall in capital pertaining to either Pillar 1 or Pillar 2. It is expected to consider measures to maintain adequate capitalisation, reverse the trend, review its strategy, and risk appetite.

              38. For each internal stress test scenario for capital planning purposes, each bank is expected to consider credible, quantifiable management actions that the bank could practically take to mitigate any capital impact of stress scenarios. Such mitigating actions for ICAAP stress scenarios may differ from actions related to recovery planning. The timing and execution of these management actions should be supported by appropriate trigger points of the bank’s capital position, which may be informed by their internal risk appetite for capital adequacy. When the bank’s capital ratios fall below its internal risk appetite, it is expected that the bank is able to execute the necessary measures, i.e. the bank should explain how the capital adequacy would be ensured/ restored (e.g. via a capital contingency plan). In assessing the effectiveness of a management action, each bank should also consider the perceived reputational impact (e.g. as viewed by the market, customers, government etc.) on taking such an action in a stress. The results should be disclosed in the ICAAP report with and without those management actions that have been approved by the bank’s Board.

              39. If the bank plans the increase of its capital base (e.g. capital issuances, rights issues, reduction in the equity, etc.), the bank may consider the capital increase in its capital planning. The bank should only consider capital increases that have obtained Senior Management approval and form part of the bank’s official capital plan and that have been discussed with the Central Bank. A bank that considers capital increases in it capital planning has to perform an additional stress test scenario to analyse the impact if the capital increase does not materialise.

              40. The following elements should be included in the ICAAP report or related appendix:

               
              (i)Assumptions related to business developments over the forecasted period;
               
              (ii)Assumptions related to the economic environment over the forecasted period;
               
              (iii)Summary of historic capital base, aggregate RWAs, and CAR ratios for a minimum of five (5) years;
               
              (iv)Disclosure of the following forecasted financial projections:
               
              (v)Detailed balance sheet;
               
              (vi)Detailed statement of profit and loss;
               
              (vii)Break down of Capital base into its regulatory components;
               
              (viii)Break down of Risk Weighted Assets (RWAs) components;
               
              (ix)Significant ratios (e.g. CET 1, Tier 1, and CAR);
               
              (x)A method to calibrate capital needs to the current and expected levels of risks, in coherence with the bank’s risk appetite, business plan, and strategy;
               
              (xi)It should include the likely future constraints on the availability and the use of capital; and
               
              (xii)Any future regulatory and accounting changes that can potentially impact such plan.
               

              41. Banks are required to fulfill internal risk appetite requirements in the bank’s self-assessment of Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 minimum regulatory capital requirements. Banks should fulfill the minimum capital requirements plus capital buffer requirements under business as usual (BAU) conditions. Under stress testing (ST) banks should fulfill the minimum capital requirements without the requirement to meet buffer requirements.

              42. The capital planning should not be limited to risk-based capital ratios but should also consider the leverage ratio of the bank. Bank should analyse and consider unaccounted foreseeable events in the capital plan, e.g. regulatory changes like the revised standardised approaches for credit, market and operational risk.

            • VI. Material Risks

              43. As a part of its risk management practices, each bank is responsible for implementing a regular process to identify, measure, report, monitor, and mitigate risks. Such risk management process should be used as direct input into the calibration of capital demand to cover both Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 risks. The framework supporting the estimation of capital consumption for each risk type should approved by Senior Management and the Board.

              44. All risks identified as material risks are expected to be addressed in the ICAAP. Risk materiality should depend on each bank’s business model and risk profile. The scope of such risk identification should cover the entire group, including all branches and subsidiaries of the bank. The Central Bank considers credit concentration risk and interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB) as defined in this Guidance, as material risks. Given the growing risk universe outside of traditional Pillar 1 risks, each bank must define, update, and review the applicable ICAAP risks on a continuous basis (e.g. quarterly).

              45. The identification of risks should distinguish between direct risks and indirect risks. Direct risks are explicit and commonly identifiable risks, such as the credit risk associated with facility underwriting. Indirect risks are arising as second order consequences of direct risks and unforeseen events. For instance, an increase in fraud and cyber-attacks as a consequence of an economic downturn or a pandemic during which employees are forced to work from home. Other examples are the credit risk arising from derivatives during periods of high market volatility or the increase in credit risk resulting from a drop in collateral values following a real estate market crash.

              46. The identification of risks should be supported by a regular and structured process. An inventory of risks should be recorded for each business activity and each portfolio on a regular basis. In addition to the regular updates (i.e. at least quarterly), it is expected to adjust the inventory whenever it no longer reflects the risks that are material, e.g. because a new product has been introduced or certain business activities have been expanded. This should support the production of ICAAP from one year to the next.

              47. The measurement of risk should be transparent, documented, and supported by subject-matter experts throughout the bank. Each expert function should contribute to its area of expertise, in such way that the ICAAP is a reflection of a collective work substantiated by thorough analysis. Each dedicated risk team should provide a comprehensive assessment of the risk drivers and materiality of the risk they manage.

              48. The estimation of the capital consumption associated with each risk should be based upon clear methodologies designed appropriately for each risk type. Each bank should identify the owner of such methodology either within the team responsible to manage risks or with a centralised team responsible for aggregating risk information and to construct the ICAAP. Ultimately, the process to identify, measure risks, and estimate the associated capital consumption should be approved by Senior Management and the Board.

              49. In the case of vendor models, this includes the expectation that such models are not expected to be imported mechanistically, but rather they are expected to be fully understood by the bank and well suited for, and tailored to, its business and its risk profile.

              50. The identification of risks should result in distinct types:

               
              (i)Pillar 1 risks that are not fully captured and that are covered by insufficient capital. For instance, the market risk capital consumption under Pillar 1 might not incorporate sufficient basis risk; and
               
              (ii)Risks that are not captured at all as part of the Pillar 1 framework.
               

              51. Each bank should not develop separate methodologies for risk measurement, if those are not employed for risk management. The Use Test assumes that the method and conclusion of the ICAAP should be coherent with the bank’s internal practices.

              52. To ensure an adequate assessment of high quality, each bank should establish, and implement an effective data quality framework, to deploy adequate processes, and control mechanisms to ensure the quality of data. The data quality framework should ensure reliable risk information that supports sound decision-making, covers all relevant risk data, and data quality dimensions.

              53. The next sections contain explanations and expectations on certain risk types (e.g. Business Model Analysis (BMA) and strategic risk, Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book, and Credit concentration risk).

              • A. Business Model Analysis (BMA) and Strategic Risk

                54. Business model analysis embodies the risk that the bank has failed to structure its organisation and operations (expertise, systems, and processes) in a way that leads to achieving its primary business and strategic objectives.

                55. Strategic risks arise when the bank’s business model, organisation structure, operations, and/or strategy are no longer adequate to deliver the objective of the bank as specified by the Board.

                56. The bank should conduct regular business model analysis (BMA) to assess its business and strategic risks to determine:

                 
                (i)The ability of the bank’s current business model to deliver suitable results over the following 12 months;
                 
                (ii)The sustainability of the bank’s strategy and its ability to deliver suitable/ acceptable results over a forward-looking period of at least three (3) to five (5) years, based on the strategic plans and financial planning;
                 
                (iii)The sustainability and sufficient diversification of income over time (three (3) to five (5) years). This analysis should consider the sources and levels of income and expenses; and
                 
                (iv)The ability of the bank to deliver total financial data across the group and for each of its key business units (includes forward-looking performance and profitability).
                 

                57. An effective BMA contains a through-the-cycle view of the sustainability of the business model in its current state and against a projected view of the bank’s funding structure, return on equity (ROE), capital supply, and capital demand, the effect this has on the product, service pricing, and resource requirements. The business planning should be clear, aligned, and integrated with the bank’s strategy, governance, risk-appetite statement, recovery plans, internal controls, stress tests, and internal reporting (MIS).

                58. Each bank should elaborate on the linkage and consistency between their strategic decisions, risk appetite, and the resources allocated for achieving those strategies. The bank should articulate the frequency of monitoring and quantifying changes in its financial projections (e.g. balance sheet, profit and loss, and concentrations) regularly to verify that they are consistent with the business model, risk appetite, and the achievement of the bank’s strategic goals.

                59. An effective BMA enables banks to identify vulnerabilities at an early stage and assess their ability to adapt to changes in their specific operating environment therefore helps to promote the safety and soundness of banks. A well-designed and comprehensive BMA approach provides banks with the basis to understand, analyse, assess the sustainability of their business models, enhance proactive, forward-looking operations, and strategy evaluation.

                60. Each bank’s business model should be based on analyses and realistic assumptions (stress tests, scenario analyses, and driver analyses, etc.) about the effect of strategic choices on financial and economic outcomes of operations performed. This will enable the bank and the Central Bank to understand the nature of the business model and the inherent risks. Each bank should perform an analysis that involves identifying, challenging the dependency of strategies on uncontrollable external factors, and assumptions (e.g. market interest rates, demand growth in the target customer markets, degree of competition in the markets, cost of entry, and compliance costs).

                61. An effective BMA addresses the banks’ ability to produce aggregate financial data across the banking group as a whole, and the bank solo level, for each of its main business units and business lines. Moreover, to make the best use of this data and transform it into relevant inputs, banks need to develop and use analytical tools including stress tests, peer group assessments, profitability forecasts and analysis, and scenario analyses.

                62. The documentation provided in support of the business model should contain an overview of the business activities of the bank and an overview of the structure/organisational details of the bank. For example a brief description of the business model, present financial condition, any expected changes in the present business model, the expected future business environment, business plans, and the projected financial condition for the following year.

                63. The following additional information and documentation should be referenced (if not part of) the ICAAP report:

                 
                (i)Bank’s strategic plan(s) with current-year, forward-looking forecasts, and underlying economic assumptions;
                 
                (ii)Financial reporting (e.g. profit and loss (P&L), and balance sheet), covering the most recent period and the whole (forward-looking) ICAAP reporting period;
                 
                (iii)Internal reporting (e.g. management information, capital reporting, liquidity reporting, and internal risk reporting);
                 
                (iv)Recovery plans, including the results of resolvability assessment, if any, and identification of critical functions;
                 
                (v)Third-party reports (e.g. audit reports, and reports by equity/credit analysts), states their main concerns and issues;
                 
                (vi)A descriptive report on the main business lines generating revenues broken down by main products, services, other activities, geographies, and market position; and
                 
                (vii)Peer group analysis segregated by competitor bank, product, or business lines targeting the same source of profits and customers (e.g. credit card businesses targeting consumers at a particular economic stratum in a specific country.
                 

                64. Business model analysis may act as a base for the development of Reverse Stress Test scenarios.

              • B. Credit Risk

                65. Credit risk is the risk of losses arising from a borrower or counterparty failing to meet its obligations as they fall due. Each bank should assess all its credit exposures and determine whether the risk weights applied to such exposures under the regulatory standardised approach for credit risk (Standardised Approach) are appropriate for the inherent risk of the exposures. Each bank should have the ability to assess credit risk at the portfolio level as well as at the exposure or counterparty level.

                66. To ensure that each bank has sufficient capital allocated for credit risk, each bank should compare their capital consumption under two methods for all credit exposures across all asset classes: (i) the Standardised Approach and (ii) an estimation under the foundation internal-rating based approach (F-IRB) in the Basel Framework (“IRB approach: risk weight functions”, CRE31).

                67. The Central Bank recognises that some banks may not have appropriately calibrated probability of defaults (PDs) for the calculation of the F-IRB approach. In the absence of such calibration, banks should rely on their 1-year PD used for IFRS provisioning purposes. Each bank should undertake this comparison at asset class level, where higher F-IRB numbers indicate additional required capital. Drivers of material differences between the two approaches should be explained.

                68. If a bank uses credit risk mitigation techniques (CRMT), it should analyse and evaluate the risks associated to such mitigation under Pillar 2 risks measurement. The bank should analyse potential effects, the enforceability and the effectiveness of such CRMT, in particular in the case of real estate collaterals in order to estimate residual credit risk with prudence.

              • C. Market Risk

                69. Market risk is the risk of losses in on- and off-balance sheet positions arising from movements in market factors such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity prices, commodities prices, credit spreads, and options volatilities. Each bank should have methodologies and limits that enable it to assess and actively manage all material market risks, at several levels of granularity including position, desk, business line, or firm-wide level.

                70. Under its ICAAP, each bank should assess its capital adequacy for market risk by considering methods other than the regulatory standardised approach for market risk. Each bank should start this assessment with the metrics already employed to measure market risk as part of regular risk management, including net open positions (NOP), value-at-risk (VaR), stressed VaR, and economic stress tests. The calibration of capital associated to Pillar 2 risks should be undertaken with prudence and should include risks such as concentration risk, market illiquidity, basis risk, and jump-to-default risk.

                71. Ultimately, market risk capital should be designed to protect the bank against market risk volatility over the long term, including periods of stress and high volatility. Therefore, each bank should ensure that such calibration include appropriate stressed periods. The analysis should be structured based on the bank’s key drivers of market risk, including portfolios, asset classes, market risk factors, geographies, product types and tenors.

                72. Each bank should analyse its amortised cost portfolio under Pillar 2, considering the difference between the market value against the book value.

              • D. Operational Risk

                73. Operational risk is the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, or systems, or external events. This definition includes legal risk and compliance risk but excludes strategic and reputational risk. The framework for operational risk management should cover the bank’s appetite and tolerance for operational risks, and the manner and extent to which operational risk is transferred outside the bank.

                74. Operational risk is a recurrent and a material source of losses for many banks but the existing approaches (the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA), the Standardised Approach (SA), and the Alternative Standardised Approach (ASA)) for calculating Pillar 1 operational risk capital may not reliably reflect the nature and scale of potential operational risk losses. The Pillar 1 Standardised Approach for operational risk uses gross income as a measure of capital. Gross income is a risk-insensitive proxy for operational risk capital, which may lead banks to underestimate the risk. This was evident during the economic downturn in 2009, when banks’ income dropped, lowering their regulatory operational risk capital requirement, yet operational risks were either constant or even elevated in some cases. Therefore, banks should ensure that their Pillar 2 capital charge covers operational risks that are not captured by regulatory capital methodologies. The analysis should include a robust and conservative forecast of operational risk losses and respective capital requirements (at least split into conduct and non-conduct risks).

                75. Legal risk is considered an operational risk. Each bank is required to analyse, assess, and quantify the impact of legal risk failures on its capital structure. Examples of legal risk include inadequate documentation, legal, regulatory incapacity, the insufficient authority of a counterparty, and contract invalidity/ unenforceability. The Legal department of each bank bear responsibility for the identification and management of this risk. They must consult with internal and external legal counsel. Subsidiaries and branches of major international banking groups typically have in-house legal departments, acting under the guidance of the group, which aims to facilitate the business of the group, by providing proactive, business-oriented advice. The outcome of legal and/or regulatory issues to which the bank is currently exposed, and others, which may arise in the future, is difficult to predict and, consequently, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a legal matters will not be material to the financial condition of the bank.

                76. Given the potential impact from operational risk, each bank should evaluate under Pillar 2 risks arising from business conduct risks and money laundering / financing of terrorism. In addition, each bank should consider internal and external operational risks faced by it, including but not limited to operational cyber risk, IT risks, and outsourcing, and each bank is expected to consider ways in which it can improve its operational resilience. Each bank should provide details in the ICAAP report on the outcome of its Risk Control Self-Assessment (RCSA) process to collate bottom-up operational risk drivers across businesses.

                77. Each bank should undertake quantitative stress testing based on its historical loss data and operational risk profile.

              • E. Credit Concentration Risk

                78. Section V.D of the ICAAP Standard requires banks to address weaknesses at the portfolio level including credit concentrations risk. Credit concentration risk is the incremental credit loss in a portfolio of credit exposures, caused by high correlation between the credit risk drivers of those exposures. Such concentration risk arises mostly due to high correlations and dependencies between individual obligors (name concentration) or between economic sectors (sectoral concentration). Credit concentration risk can affect a bank’s health or core operations, liquidity, earnings and capital ratios. The Central Bank considers concentration risk as a key material Pillar 2 risk for all UAE banks.

                79. Consequently, credit concentration arises when large exposures are associated with a small number of obligors or a small number of sectors, but not only. Credit concentration risk can arise from a seemingly granular portfolio but with high correlation between the obligors’ risk drivers.

                80. In accordance with the Central Bank re Large Exposures - Credit Concentrations Limits (Notice No.226/2018), an exposure is deemed large if it accounts for more than 10% of a bank’s capital. Such threshold has been implemented for regulatory purposes. The measurement of concentration risk for risk management purposes and for determining Pillar 2 risk capital requirements should refer to the wider definition of concentration risk. Each bank is exposed to a degree of concentration risk, even when complying with the Large Exposure Regulation.

                81. Each bank should perform a detailed risk analysis specific to the Real Estate exposures (RE) of the bank and the Central Bank re Standards for Real Estate Exposures (Notice No. 5733/2021).

                82. Credit concentration risk is a common feature of UAE banks, but currently the Central Bank regulations for banks do not include an explicit Pillar 1 capital requirement for name and sector concentration risk. Credit concentration risk is a key prudential risk for which the capital requirement is at the discretion of banks, and it should be held under Pillar 2. This risk should warrant particular attention from each bank. In particular:

                 
                (i)For the purpose of risk management, each bank should ensure that credit concentration risk is pro-actively and efficiently addressed. Each bank should develop policies and procedures for the identification, measurement, monitoring, and reporting of credit concentration risk. Credit concentration risk arises from exposures to obligors structured as conglomerates. Therefore each bank should have a mechanism in place to identify and aggregate exposures across related entities based on their legal relationships. Data should be aggregated across systems operated by different business units or entities. This should be indicated through the bank’s management information system (MIS);
                 
                (ii)For the purpose of estimating the Pillar 2 capital associated with credit concentration risk, each bank should build upon the methodologies employed for risk management. These methods should be developed further, as deemed appropriate, in order to fully measure the additional capital. Each bank should compare several methodologies and propose a choice based on clear and documented justification. At a minimum, each bank should calculate and report the additional capital using the Herfindahl-Hirschman Index (HHI) methodology; and
                 
                (iii)For the purpose of capital planning, each bank should ensure that concentration risk is taken into account adequately within its ICAAP. Each bank should assess the amount of capital, which it consider adequate to hold given the level of concentration risk in their portfolios and given their business plan and the expected economic environment.
                 
              • F. Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book (IRRBB)

                83. IRRBB is the risk of loss in the banking book caused by changes in interest rates. Interest rate risk can arise both in the banking book and/or the trading book. While interest rate risk in the trading book is addressed under the Pillar 1 market risk framework, the interest rate risk in the banking book should be addressed under Pillar 2. Conventional banks refer to this risk as IRRBB while Islamic banks are exposed to the analogous risk called profit rate risk in the banking book (PRRBB).

                84. Each bank should define a risk appetite pertaining to IRRRB that should be approved by the Board and implemented through a comprehensive risk appetite framework, i.e. policies and procedures for limiting and controlling IRRBB. Each bank should have a process supported by adequate policies to manage IRRBB appropriately. This involves, as for any other risk, comprehensive identification, measurement, reporting, monitoring, and mitigation.

                85. The measurement process should be based upon several existing Standards and Guidance:

                 
                (i)Central Bank “Standards re Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE - ICAAP Standards”;
                 
                (ii)Central Bank “Regulation and Standards re Interest Rate & Rate of Return Risk in the Banking Book” in 2018 (Notice 3021/2018 and Circular 165/2018);
                 
                (iii)Central Bank Model Management Standards and Guidance in 2022 (Notice 5052/2022); and
                 
                (iv)Basel Framework - Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book (SRP 31).
                 

                Measurement

                86. The assessment should include all positions of each bank’s potential basis risk, re-pricing gaps, commercial margins, gaps for material currencies optionality, and non-maturing deposits. The quantitative impact analysis should be supported by description and analysis of the key assumptions made by the bank, in particular, assumptions regarding loan prepayments, the behaviour of non-maturity deposits (CASA), non-rated sensitive assets, contractual interest rate ceilings or floors for adjustable-rate items, and measuring the frequency of the interest rate risk in the banking book.

                87. DSIBs and other banks with significant interest rate risk (IRR) exposure should compute the economic value of equity (EVE) at a granular facility level, while non-DSIBs may compute EVE at exposure level, which is based upon the summation of discounted gap risk across time buckets, rather than a granular net present value (NPV) estimation at exposure level.

                Scenarios

                88. For the purpose of capital calibration, each bank should employ the interest rate shock scenarios corresponding to Table 12 of Central Bank Model Management Guidance and table 2 of the SRP 31 for their AED and non-AED positions respectively.

                89. In addition to the standard shocks prescribed above, DSIBs and other banks with significant exposure to interest rate risk are expected to apply further shocks/ idiosyncratic scenarios, which will take into account:

                 
                The bank’s inherent risk profile;
                 
                Historical shocks experienced by the bank due to market sentiment and corresponding to macro-financial factors; and
                 
                Additional scenarios prescribed by the Central Bank specifically through supervisory interactions or financial stability processes.
                 

                Capital Calculation

                90. The capital requirement should be aggregated across all currencies and scenarios conservatively.

                91. The estimation of the Pillar 2 capital corresponding to IRRBB should be based on the most conservative loss arising from (i) the change in the economic value of equity (ΔEVE), and (ii) the change in net interest income (ΔNII). The most conservative result should be considered across all the scenarios calibrated by the bank. (In avoidance of doubt, the allocated capital for IRRBB should not be lower than the maximum of the absolute EVE impact and the absolute NII impact: Max(abs(EVE impact), abs(NII impact).

                92. The Central Bank considers a bank as an outlier when the IRRBB EVE impact based on the standard parallel shock leads to an economic value decline of more than 15% of its Tier 1 capital. The Central Bank may request an outlier bank to:

                 
                (i)Reduce its IRRBB exposures (e.g. by hedging);
                 
                (ii)Raise additional capital;
                 
                (iii)Set constraints on the internal risk parameters used by a bank; and/ or
                 
                (iv)Improve its risk management framework.
                 

                93. Irrespective of the approach or model chosen by the bank, at a minimum each bank should calculate and report IRRBB using the methodology described by the Central Bank Model Management Standards and Guidance.

              • G. Model Risk

                94. Models have become an integral part of decision-making in the banking sector for risk management, business decisions, and accounting. Inaccurate model results, e.g. based on wrong assumptions or valuations, may lead to actual or potential financial losses or an underestimation of risks. Therefore, the Central Bank considers model risk a significant risk type.

                95. Simple models should not be confused with poorly designed models. Poorly designed models can be misleading and interfere with sound decision-making. Small and/or unsophisticated banks can employ simple models. However, they cannot employ poorly designed models. Each bank should manage model risk in accordance to the Central Bank Model Management Standards and Guidance.

                96. Model risk should be incorporated in each banks’ risk framework alongside other key risks, as inherent consequences of conducting their activities (refer to Appendix 3.2). Consequently, model risk should be managed through a formal process incorporating the bank’s appetite for model uncertainty. The framework should be designed to identify, measure, monitor, and mitigate this risk. A bank should mitigate a large appetite for model risk by counter-measures such as conservative buffers on model results and/ or additional allocated Pillar 2 capital.

                97. The Central Bank recognises that the estimation of model risk is challenging. However, each bank should demonstrate that they have implemented steps to measure the potential losses arising from model risk. At minimum, each bank should implement a grouping approach to categorise models according to their associated model risk. The uncertainty and losses arising from models should be estimated by using a range of different techniques, including:

                 
                (i)Internal and external validations;
                 
                (ii)Comparison against alternative models;
                 
                (iii)Sensitivity analysis; and
                 
                (iv)Stress tests.
                 

                98. Each bank should also consider the quality of its model risk management in the model risk analysis, including but not limited to the quality of model documentation, data, assumptions, validation, staff, implementation, and usage.

                Risk Diversification Effects

                99. Each bank is expected to take a prudent approach whenever assuming risk diversification effects. Furthermore, each bank should be aware that the Central Bank as a matter of principle will not take into account inter-risk diversification in the SREP. Banks should be cognisant of this when applying inter-risk diversification in its ICAAP.

              • H. Financial Risks from Climate Change

                100. Banks are expected to build up Board awareness and understanding of the financial risks arising from climate change and how they will affect their business models. Each bank should use scenario analysis and stress tests to improve the risk identification process, to understand the short- and long-term financial risks to their business model from climate change, and to develop appropriate strategies accordingly.

              • I. Liquidity Risk and Funding Cost

                101. Though capital is not a direct mitigation for liquidity risk and liquidity is not a mitigation for capital risk, both risk types are interlinked. The Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP) are expected to inform each other; with respect to the underlying assumptions, stress test results, and forecasted management actions. Each bank is expected to assess the potential impact of scenarios, integrating capital and liquidity impacts, and potential feedback processes, taking into account, in particular, losses arising from the liquidation of assets, increased funding costs or availability of funding during periods of stress.

                102. For example, each bank is expected to assess the impact of deteriorating capital levels, as projected in the ICAAP, on their liquidity. A downgrade by an external rating agency could, for example, have direct implications for the refinancing ability of the bank. Vice versa, changes in funding cost could impact capital adequacy.

            • VII. ICAAP Stress Test and Reverse Stress Test

              103. Stress test helps to improve the bank’s understanding of the vulnerabilities that it faces under exceptional, but plausible events, and provide the bank with an indication of how much capital might be needed to absorb losses if such events occur, which supplements other risk management approaches and measures. These events can be financial, operational, legal, or relate to any other risk that may have an economic impact on the bank. The results derived from stress tests can also assist the bank in determining the appropriate appetite for different types of risks and in estimating the amount of capital that should be set aside to cover them.

              104. Each bank is required to implement a stress testing framework to address both the needs of the ICAAP and broader risk management. Stress tests and the stress test outcome analysis should not be confined to the ICAAP. It should be designed to support decision-making across the bank as explained in this section.

              105. Each bank should perform an in-depth review of its potential vulnerabilities, capturing all material risks on a bank-wide basis that result from its business model and operating environment in the context of adverse events, stressed macroeconomic (e.g. economic cycle risk), and financial conditions.

              106. As part of the ICAAP exercise, each bank should carry out integrated, regular, rigorous, and forward-looking stress tests that are appropriate to the nature of the bank’s business model and major sources of risk. The frequency should be annually and more frequently, when necessary, depending on the individual circumstances.

              107. The Central Bank may challenge the key assumptions and their continuing relevance to ensure that there is sufficient capital to withstand the impact of possible adverse events and/ or changes in market conditions.

              Governance

              108. The Board is responsible for the effective implementation of the stress tests framework through appropriate delegation to Senior Management and subject-matter experts across the bank. This framework should be supported by robust governance, processes, methods, and systems with associated policies and procedures approved by the Board. The Board is not only responsible for the stress testing policies, but also for oversight of the stress testing execution. It is also responsible for the potential measures to mitigate stress scenario outcomes and the key decisions and actions taken based on the stress testing results, such as the consideration of stress testing outcomes in strategy and capital planning.

              109. The stakeholders involved in a particular stress testing framework depend on the type of stress tests. The scenario design, quantification of impact and the identification of mitigating actions will involve a range of subject matter experts across the bank. Stress test-related activities are not the sole responsibility of the team in charge of preparing the ICAAP or in charge of the stress testing programme. Rather, the execution of stress tests is a collective exercise, whereby numerous stakeholders contribute to the design, measurement, reporting and analysis of stress tests. Stakeholders should include Senior Management and the Board.

              Types of stress test exercises

              110. Each bank is required to establish several distinct forms of stress test exercises as described hereunder, however for the purposes of an ICAAP the minimum expectation is to conduct internal enterprise-wide stress tests and portfolio-level stress tests. Regulatory stress tests are not acceptable as the only form of internal stress tests:

               
              a)Internal enterprise-wide stress tests: The purpose of these exercises to analyse the impact of stress events on the entire bank’s solvency, profitability, stability, and capital. The methodology and scope of such stress tests should be designed to address the specific risk profile of each bank, and will thus differ from regulatory stress tests. These exercises are generally executed as top-down exercises, with the objective to capture a wide scope of risks and portfolios. Such exercise should support strategic decision related to the risk appetite of the bank, its risk profile, and its portfolio allocation. Each bank should employ at least three (3) scenarios in the execution of internal enterprise-wide stress tests.
               
              b)Internal portfolio-level stress tests: The purpose of these exercises to execute frequent, variable and proactive stress tests on the various portfolios of the bank. These stress tests are generally executed as bottom-up exercises, with the objective to measure the stress impact at portfolio level accurately. The scenarios and the methodologies should be granular and fully tailored to the risk profile of each portfolio. Deteriorating economic circumstances are typically the drivers for conducting unscheduled stress tests on a particular portfolio, for example a declining outlook in the residential real estate sector would motivate a stress tests on the commensurate portfolio. These stress tests can result in the identification of risks that were not captured by the enterprise-wide stresses. Consequently, these exercises should support, motivate strategic, and tactical decisions at portfolio and/or facility level.
               
              c)Regulatory stress tests: These exercises are commissioned by the Central Bank or other supervisors, to whom banks’ foreign subsidiaries are accountable. These exercises follow the scenarios and methodologies prescribed by supervisors, which cover most of the bank’s portfolio. The purpose of such an exercise is to analyse the impact of stress events on the entire bank in order to assess its solvency, profitability, stability, and ultimately the suitability of its capital. While these exercises are originally designed to inform regulators for supervision purposes, they should also inform Senior Management and steer internal decision-making.
               

              111. The frequency of stress test exercises should depend on their type, scope, depth, and on the wider economic context. Each bank should execute enterprise-wide stress tests based on a set of scenarios regularly at least quarterly is recommend. Each bank should execute portfolio-level stress tests more frequently depending on the needs of risk management and the business functions. Market risk stress tests in particular may have to be performed more frequently.

              112. The capital impact results of these stress tests should be analysed, compared, incorporated, and presented in the ICAAP. One or several internal enterprise-wide stress test outcomes should be explicitly incorporated in the capital planning, and presented accordingly in the ICAAP capital planning section. The results from all types of stress tests exercise should be employed by Senior Management and the Board to assess the suitability of the bank’s capital.

              Scenarios

              113. Stress test scenarios should be designed to capture the risks and potential losses appropriately, in coherence with the characteristics of each bank’s risk profile and portfolio. The scope of these scenarios should cover all the risks identified as part of the identification process documented in the ICAAP. At a minimum, the scope of risks should cover strategic risk, credit risk, market risk, counterparty risk, operational risk, liquidity risk, IRRBB, credit concentration risk, funding risk, reputational risk, and climate risk.

              114. Stress scenarios should lead to a reliable measurement of loss under extreme but plausible events. Such scenarios are essential tool to support risk quantification in providing impact on Pillar 1 and Pillar 2. Consequently, the scenario design should be supported by a clear choice of risk factors and associated shocks. Several types of design are commonly employed:

               
              (i)Sensitivity analysis involve shifting the values of an individual risk factor or several risk factors by using standardised shocks. Sensitivity analysis is employed to estimate the P&L profile and risks to the bank from a range of shocks. This is particularly useful to identify non-linear response in the loss profile. For instance, this could include measuring NII with parallel shifts of +/-50bp, +/-100bp, +/-150bp and higher shocks applied to a yield curve. It also includes measuring expected credit loss (ECL) and capital requirements with standard parallel shocks of +/-100bp, +/-200bp, +/-300bp applied to the PD term structure of a given portfolio (e.g. worsening of credit spreads, adverse changes in interest rates, other macroeconomic or idiosyncratic variables).
               
              (ii)Scenario analysis involves measuring the combined effect of several risk factors with shocks designed in coherence with an economic narrative affecting the bank’s business operations simultaneously. Such narrative should be based on an analysis of the current economic conditions, the business environment and the operating conditions of the bank. The scope of events should be broad, consider an appropriate range of risk types, and geographies. The narrative should be constructed with a clear sequence of unfolding events leading to (a) direct risks, (b) second-order risks, and/or (c) systemic risks, and how these risks affect the profit and loss profile and risks of the bank based on a scale of shocks (e.g. an economic recession coupled with a tightening of market liquidity and declining asset prices). The scope of the narrative should take into account the economic environment and the features of each portfolio in scope. The calibration of shocks should be supported by rigorous methodologies using (a) historical data and past events, and/or (b) forward-looking assumptions. Practitioners refer to ‘historical scenarios’ and ‘hypothetical scenarios’.
               

              115. Each bank is expected to continuously monitor and identify new threats, vulnerabilities and changes in the environment to assess whether its stress testing scenarios remain appropriate at least quarterly and, if not, adapt them to the new circumstances. The impact of the scenarios is expected to be updated regularly (e.g. quarterly). In case of any material changes, the bank is expected to assess their potential impact on its capital adequacy over the course of the year.

              116. If the bank forecasts the increase of its capital base (e.g. capital issuances, rights issues, reduction in the equity, etc.) and the capital planning reflects the proposed changes, the bank must perform an additional stress scenario. In these additional stress scenarios the bank should analyse the impact under the assumption that the capital increase does not materialise. The impact analysis should include management actions and formal trigger points.

              Methodology

              117. The process of stress tests should be supported by robust and documented methodologies. All models employed in the quantification of stress results should comply with the requirements presented in the Central Bank Model Management Standards and Guidance.

              118. For the measurement of capital under stress, each bank should employ a dedicated financial model to forecast their financial statements under several economic conditions. Such projection should be constructed over a minimum of three (3) years, in coherence with the most recent capital plan and with the Central Bank regulatory exercise.

              119. Stress scenarios may be derived from stochastic models or historical events, and can be developed with varying degrees of precision, depth, and severity, particularly the impact on asset quality, profitability, and capital adequacy. Each bank should consider three (3) to five (5) scenarios (each scenario can have multiple severity levels (i.e. Low, medium, and high). Although it is expected to consider the supervisory stress tests (“stress test exercise of the Financial Stability Department (FSD)”) as one scenario, it is the bank’s responsibility to define scenarios and sensitivities in the manner that best addresses its situation and to translate them into risk, loss, and capital figures.

              Use Test

              120. Stress tests should support decision-making throughout the bank effectively. Stress tests should be embedded in banks’ business decision-making and risk management process at several levels of the organisation. Senior Management and the Board should lead and approve all assumptions, the methodology framework and authorise the use of stress test results.

              121. Stress tests do not stop with the production of results. Risk mitigations should always be considered in light of the stress severity and likelihood. If no action is deemed necessary, this should be documented and clearly justified.

              Reverse Stress Test

              122. In addition to normal stress testing, each bank is expected to conduct reverse stress tests. Reverse stress tests start with the identification of a pre-defined outcome where the bank’s business model becomes non-viable (e.g. through insolvency), or it breaches supervisory compliance minima, e.g. by breaching minimum capital requirements (i.e. the bank will breach the regulatory capital buffer and minimum capital requirements). The next step is to assess which scenarios and shocks lead to that identified outcome. Finally, the objective is to assess whether the likelihood of occurrence is realistic and the impact warrants mitigating actions. If a bank considers mitigation strategies, e.g. hedging strategies, the bank should consider if such strategies would be viable. For example, a market that is stressed at a financial system level may be characterised by a lack of market liquidity and increased counterparty credit risk.

              123. Effective reverse stress testing is a challenging exercise that requires the involvement of all material risk areas across the bank’s subject matter experts, Senior Management, and the Board.

              124. Each bank should conduct a reverse stress test at least once a year. A well-designed reverse stress test should also include enough diagnostic information to allow the identification of the sources of potential failure. This enables proactive risk management actions and implementation of an appropriate strategy for refined risk monitoring, prevention, and mitigation. The reverse stress test requires each bank to consider scenarios beyond normal business forecasts and aids identification of events linked to contagion with potential systemic implications. Reverse stress testing has important quantitative and qualitative uses, through informing Senior Management of vulnerabilities, and supporting measures to avoid them. (Please refer to Appendix 3.3).

            • VIII. ICAAP Submission and Approval

              Submission of the ICAAP report

              125. The annual ICAAP report should be submitted to the Central Bank on or before the submission dates addressed in Table 1.

              126. All documents have to be submitted to the respective Central Bank reviewer by softcopy (submitted in word or pdf format), sending a copy to bsed.basel@cbuae.gov.ae.

              127. The submission dates below as per Notice 2940/2022 differentiate between (i) national banks and foreign bank and (ii) size and importance of the banks: (Table 1)

              Table 1 - Submission date for ICAAP Report

              BanksReport for FY 2022Report for FY 2023 onwards
              Large banks: FAB, ENBD, ADCB, DIB, Mashreq, ADIB, CBD15/03/202201/03
              Other local banks and HSBC, Standard Chartered Bank, Citibank, Arab Bank, and Bank of Baroda31/03/202231/03
              Other Foreign Banks15/04/202215/04

               

              Approval of the ICAAP report:

              128. The ICAAP report should be approved by:

               
              (i)Senior Management (including the CRO): The bank should use Appendix 1 – ICAAP – Mandatory disclosure form (Table 2) and include it as an attachment to the ICAAP report;
               
              (ii)Board approval: For all local banks, the ICAAP document must be approved by the Board or Board risk committee, and Senior Management prior to submission to the Central Bank. The meeting minutes of the Board of Directors meeting should state the approval of the ICAAP document and challenges that have taken place; and
               
              (iii)For foreign branches, the ICAAP document should be approved by (a) the managing director and/ or relevant highest committee of the bank in the UAE, and by (b) their head office, stating that the ICAAP assumptions and forecasts are in line with the group’s assumptions, forecasts, and that the group’s Board approves/ endorse the results of the ICAAP.
               
            • IX. Internal Control Review

              129. The bank’s internal control structure is essential to the capital assessment process. Effective control of the internal capital adequacy assessment process should include an independent review and the involvement of both internal audit and external audit (refer to Appendix 3.1). Senior Management has a responsibility to ensure that the bank establishes a system for assessing the full scope of its risks, develops a system to relate risk to the bank’s capital level, and establishes a method for monitoring compliance with internal policies.

              130. Internal Audit should perform an audit on the bank’s ICAAP report annually. The report has to be submitted no later than three (3) months after the submission of the ICAAP report to the bank’s reviewer and in copy to bsed.basel@cbuae.gov.ae.

              131. Internal control functions should perform regular reviews of the risk management process to make sure its coherence, validity, and rationality. The review of the ICAAP should cover the following:

               
              (i)Ensuring that the ICAAP is complete and suitable as of the bank’s context , operational conditions, the reliability of controls behind it;
               
              (ii)The process of identifying all material risks;
               
              (iii)Efficiency of the information systems that support the ICAAP;
               
              (iv)Ensuring that the measurement methodologies in use are suitable to support the ICAAP valuation,
               
              (v)Ensuring the accuracy, and comprehensive of the data input to the ICAAP;
               
              (vi)Rational behind the ICAAP output and assumptions in use;
               
              (vii)Rational and suitability of stress tests and analysis of assumptions;
               
              (viii)Consolidation of the ICAAP outcomes with the risk management (e.g., limit setting and monitoring); and
               
              (ix)Rational of the capital plan and internal capital targets.
               

              132. In addition, the review should cover the integrity and validity of regulatory data submitted to the Central Bank during the course of the year relating to Pillar 1 capital requirements, which should address, but not be limited to the following:

               
              (i)Appropriate classification of risk-weighted assets (RWA);
               
              (ii)Appropriate inclusion of the off-balance sheet values and the application of credit conversion factors (CCF); and
               
              (iii)Appropriate credit risk mitigation (CRM) methodology application and values.
               

              133. The role and validity of internal control functions are also important and should be verified with regard to other topics. For example:

               
              (i)All risk quantification methodologies and models must be subject to independent validation (internal/ external); and
               
              (ii)Internal Audit should perform an independent review of the bank’s capital framework implementation every year in accordance with the Capital Standards. If the Central Bank is not satisfied with the quality of work performed by the bank’s Internal Audit function, the Central Bank may require an external review.
               
            • X. Frequently-Asked Questions (FAQ)

              Question 1: What defines independent validation?

              Answer: Independent validation can be performed by an independent function of the bank. However, in some instances an external validation/ review is required. For large banks, external validations are strongly encouraged, if not explicitly required.

              Question 2: What are sustainable business model criteria?

              Answer: Sustainable business models may be defined in different ways. For the purpose of this guidance, a bank will be considered to have a sustainable business model if it meets all the following criteria:

               
              (i)The bank generates strong and stable returns, which are acceptable given its risk appetite and funding structure;
               
              (ii)The bank does not have any material asset concentrations or unsustainable concentrated sources of income;
               
              (iii)The bank has a strong competitive position in its chosen markets and its strategy is likely to reinforce this strength;
               
              (iv)The bank’s forecasts are based on plausible assumptions about the future business environment; and
               
              (v)The bank’s strategic plans are appropriate given the current business model and management’s execution capabilities.
               

              Question 3: What is the definition of model?

              Answer: A quantitative method, system, or approach that applies statistical, economic, financial, or mathematical theories, techniques, and assumptions to process input data into quantitative estimates.

              Question 4: Who should be the owner of ICAAP, Finance or Risk Management?

              Answer: Multiple committees and working groups have to be involved in the ICAAP. However, Risk Management should have the ultimate responsibility for the final ICAAP outcome report, the ICAAP being in substance a risk evaluation process. The Board must approve the ICAAP, its outcomes, and the proposed mitigation actions.

              Question 5: The bank uses multi-period ST scenarios over three years. Which reporting year (Y1/2/3) shall be reported in the Pillar 2 template in Appendix 2 – ICAAP: Executive summary table (Table 3)?

              Answer: Banks using multi-period stress scenarios should include the most severe period of the most severe stress test results (reverse stress scenarios not considered). All other banks that perform a simpler point in time or 1-period stress scenario should include the most severe ST results (reverse stress scenarios not considered). In addition, the evaluation of Pillar 2 risks and stress test impact as of the reporting date is mandatory for all banks.

              Question 6: Does the bank have to present the capital contingency plan as part of ICAAP report?, If the bank plans to inject capital, is it required to have two capital plans, one with and a second plan without capital injection?

              Answer:

               
              (i)The bank must have a Board-approved capital contingency policy. The actual capital contingency plan as a response to the ICAAP results has to be in line with the capital contingency policy and the ICAAP report should contain at least an overview of the capital contingency plan.
               
              (ii)If the bank plan to change its capital base, the bank should have one capital plan, which reflects the capital injections (and reflects the source of injection). Injections can be considered if approved by Senior Management, if part of the official bank’s capital plan and if the Central Bank is informed on the planned capital injections. A stress test scenario has to show the impact if the injections do not materialise.
               

              Question 7: What is the ICAAP submission timeframe and can an extension be granted?

              Answer: The ICAAP submission should comply with the schedule specified in Section VIII - ICAAP Submission and Approval. An extension of the ICAAP report submission date will only be granted in exceptional cases, by the bank’s Central Bank reviewer.

              Question 8: Can banks implement the IRB methodology in full (i.e. A-IRB) while reporting credit risk under the ICAAP, and is it mandatory?

              Answer: The bank should apply whichever approach is deemed appropriate for their size and complexity, as the ICAAP is an internal process. The evaluation of whether the Pillar 1 capital is adequate for the bank's risk is mandatory. The F-IRB approach is an accepted approach. With the implementation of IFRS9 banks have a PD for every exposure, which may be used to calculate the F-IRB capital. It is, however, not mandatory to fully implement the F-IRB approach. Comparing regulatory capital requirements with those determined using the F-IRB does indicate to what extent regulatory Pillar 1 capital requirements may be insufficient. The comparison between the F-IRB approach and the regulatory standardised approach for credit risk has to be performed on an asset class level and the greater capital requirement should be applied in the ICAAP.

              The F-IRB should follow the floor on the PD of 0.03% and apply a fixed 45% LGD. The bank may consider certain eligible collateral to reduce the LGD accordingly. The bank shall not use own estimations of the LGD under the F-IRB.

              Question 9: Is it required to calculate a capital charge against the financial risks from climate change in the ICAAP? Is any calculation methodology prescribed for this?

              Answer: The bank should understand risks related to climate change and their impact on the sustainability of the bank and the risks of its business strategy. Banks should develop adequate methodologies to quantify the risk with models sophistication depending on size and business model. Stress tests and scenario analysis should be explored. Banks should consider assessing their green asset ratio (GAR) which measures a bank's “green assets” as a share of its total assets as an initial tool. The risk identification process should determine whether the risk arising from climate change is a material capital risk for the bank.

              Question 10: How commercial / non-commercial subsidiaries have be treated as part of the ICAAP exercise? And how to treat investments in insurance subsidiaries?

              Answer: One of the key components of the ICAAP is to determine whether the capital requirement under the Standardised Approach is adequately reflecting the risk. Additional risks arising from investment in subsidiaries should be addressed and assessed in the ICAAP. The bank should consider any subsidiary including commercial, non-commercial, and insurance subsidiaries.

              Question 11: The ICAAP has to be performed on consolidated level. Is it an additional requirement to perform the ICAAP also at solo level or should the ICAAP also have a solo-level analysis?

              Answer: The ICAAP needs to address additional risks that are not covered (or not fully covered) under Pillar 1. The ICAAP is expected to assess capital adequacy for the bank on a stand-alone basis, at regulatory consolidated level, and for the entities of the group. The ICAAP should evaluate the capital requirement and capital adequacy of the bank at group level, following the regulatory consolidation. However, each bank should analyse whether additional risks arise from the group structure of the bank. The ICAAP guidance lays out the importance to consider the group structure when evaluating the banks' capital adequacy, in Section IV "ICAAP Methodology, Scope and Use Test”. The bank should be in a position to report, measure and manage risks arising from its subsidiaries, branches, group entities and from the consolidation process. The ICAAP should reflect the results of the bank’s analysis. Consequently, the analysis should consider all relevant levels of the group structure (consolidated, solo, entity level, and including significant affiliate investments). Additional risks may have to be addressed as a specific additional capital add-on.

              Question 12: Does the bank require a separate capital plan approved by the Board, or is it sufficient to have the approved ICAAP that includes the capital plan?

              Answer: The capital management policy and the ICAAP complement each other. The policy sets the framework and the capital management plan describes the capital management strategy and the steps to achieve it in compliance with the policy. The capital management plan can be a separate document. However, the ICAAP report should display the full picture, including an overview of the capital management policy and the capital management plan related to the ICAAP outcomes.

              Question 13: If a bank reports regulatory operational risk capital requirements using the BIA, can the Standardised Approach be used to quantify the potential additional operational risk charge under Pillar 2 if the capital requirement is higher under the SA compared to the BIA?

              Answer: The ICAAP is an internal process and the bank must determine the most adequate methodology to quantify the extent to which regulatory capital requirements for operational risk fail to adequately address the true extent of its potential operational risk losses.

              Question 14: Can the bank use the market risk stress test template as shared for Central Bank Econometric Stress test exercise in its ICAAP?

              Answer: The bank should determine the most adequate approach to quantify its risks. The quantification methodology should obtain internal approval. The methodology needs to be explained, validated and reasoned in detail as part of the methodology development and continuous model monitoring process.

              Question 15: Does the Internal Audit (IA) review required under Section IX - Internal Control Review contradict the requirement in Appendix 3.4, which requires banks to disclose the Internal Audit findings in the ICAAP report?

              Answer: The Central Bank is of the opinion that IA is not suffering a conflict of interest by reviewing a bank’s ICAAP and by disclosing its general findings and findings specific to the ICAAP in the ICAAP report. IA is involved twofold in the ICAAP report:

               
              (i)IA has to perform a review of the ICAAP (process) periodically as part of the audit function.
               
              (ii)IA has to perform the prescribed review for each ICAAP, to be submitted within 3 months of the submission.
               

              The ICAAP report shall contain the most recent (available) audit findings, their status, and actions taken. (Note, that in the Capital Standards, para 13 under Introduction and Scope requires an annual review of the capital framework.)

              Question 16: Why does the Standard/ Guidance not address any specifics related to Islamic banking?

              Answer: The ICAAP is an internal process and the bank should determine the most adequate methodology to quantify risks arising for Islamic banks in general and Islamic banking products specifically.

              Question 17: Being a branch of an international bank, is a third party validation required, as this is already conducted at the parent company/ group level covering risk frameworks, systems and models?

              Answer: Branches and subsidiaries of foreign banks are required to validate the risk valuation methodologies deployed in their UAE operations. If the branch or subsidiary is applying head office methodologies, these should nevertheless be validated on branch or subsidiary level. In addition, the branch or subsidiary has to have a full understanding of the applied methodologies as it cannot fully rely on the head office.

            • XI. Appendices

              • Appendix 1 - ICAAP: Mandatory disclosure form (Table 2)

                134. All banks are required to disclose the following information as a separate cover sheet when submitting the ICAAP report to the Central Bank:

                Table 2 - ICAAP Mandatory Details

                BankXXXX
                Date20XX
                Contact point name and contact details[name, email, phone number]
                Scope of ICAAP (entities included)[name, email, phone number]
                I (full name) in my role as CRO hereby confirm the following on the ICAAP report:
                (i) We have identified all material risks and allocated capital accordingly[tick box if completed]
                (ii) We have set out a 3-5 year forward looking capital plan based on the strategic/ financial plan of the bank[tick box if completed]
                (iii) We have implemented a 3-5 year forward-looking stress test and measured the impact on the capital position of the bank[tick box if completed]
                (iv) The ICAAP has been signed off by:[relevant details from Board committee (Managing Director /highest committee for foreign banks)]
                (v) The ICAAP has been challenged/ by the Board (highest committee for foreign banks) and the nature of the challenge will be communicated to the Central Bank[tick box if completed]
                CRO signature[signature]
                Date[date]

                 

              • Appendix 2 - ICAAP Executive Summary

                Table 3 - ICAAP Executive Summary

                As of the reporting date of the ICAAPPillar 1 in AED '000Pillar 1 in AED '000PillarPillar 2 in AED '000
                DateReporting date of the ICAAP, e.g. 31/12/2022year with the most severe impact for the most severe ST scenario, e.g. 31/12/2024.year with the most severe impact for the most severe ST scenario, e.g. 31/12/2024.
                Effective Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) (standard CCB of 2.5% + D-SIB Buffer + CCyB) in percentage points (in %)2.50%2.50%2.50%
                Capital requirements under Business as Usual
                Total Pillar 1---
                Top 3 Pillar 2 capital requirements
                    
                    
                    
                Other Pillar 2 capital requirements   
                Total Pillar 2 -
                Minimum regulatory CAR requirement (incl. CCB)10.50%10.50%10.50%
                Actual CAR Ratio   
                Total Capital Surplus/ deficit (Measured including capital buffer requirements)---
                Minimum CET1 regulatory requirement (incl. CCB)7.00%7.00%7.00%
                Actual CET1 Ratio   
                CET 1 capital surplus/ deficit (measure includes capital buffer requirements)---
                Stress Testing
                Minimum regulatory CAR requirement (excl. CCB) 10.50%10.50%
                Actual CAR Ratio under ST   
                Additive impact of ST on CAR   
                Surplus / (Deficit, i.e., additional capital required) --
                Minimum regulatory CET1 requirement (excl. CCB) 7.00%7.00%
                Actual CET1 Ratio under ST   
                Additive impact of ST on CET1 ratio   
                CET1 capital surplus/ deficit (measure includes capital buffer requirements) --

                 

                135. The ICAAP: Executive Summary Table (Table 3) above should be used for the ICAAP report for the FY2022 ICAAP report. Each bank is required to download the most current reporting template prior to finalizing the ICAAP report from the CBUAE IRR SYSTEM (BRF/BASEL Portal) (CBUAE IRR), in the live environment for banks:

                 
                (i)Detailed reporting template including description (this report must be available upon request); and
                 
                (ii)Executive Summary report (should form part of the ICAAP report Executive Summary).
                 
              • Appendix 3 – Additional Requirements for the ICAAP

                • 3.1 Governance and Risk Management

                  136. In the ICAAP report, each bank should provide high level summaries of key areas of the risk framework of the bank: organisational structure, governance framework, risk management function and the risk control function. The bank’s high level summaries should refer to the relevant policies, procedures, manuals, and limits:

                  • 3.1.1 Organisational Structure

                    137. Each bank is expected to describe how

                     
                    (i)The bank’s Board encourages a risk culture and prudent behaviours at all levels;
                     
                    (ii)The Board Risk Committee (“BRC”) provides oversight and challenges the risk exposures, risk appetite, and tolerance; and
                     
                    (iii)The Risk Management Function (RMF) is structured, including reporting lines and a summary of functions and responsibilities. The RMF should have authority, responsibilities, and resources, to conduct risk related policies and the risk management framework, and committees addressing the risk function.
                     
                  • 3.1.2 Governance Framework

                    138. Each bank is expected to describe

                     
                    (i)Board and Senior Management oversight (i.e. ICAAP governance framework with a description of responsibilities, and the separation of functions);
                     
                    (ii)Arrangements through which the Board and Senior Management define the bank-wide risk appetite;
                     
                    (iii)Relevant policies and risk appetite/limits/tolerance; and
                     
                    (iv)How the Chief Risk Officer (CRO) is held responsible for the methodology and utilisation of the ICAAP, including
                     
                     
                     
                    reporting comprehensive, comprehensible information on risks; and
                     
                    advising the Board independently and objectively, enabling them to understand the bank’s overall risk profile and to effectively discharge their responsibilities.
                     
                  • 3.1.3 Risk Management Function (RMF) and Risk Control Function

                    139. With regard to the bank’s risk management and control function, the ICAAP report is expected to describe

                     
                    (i)How the RMF has access to all business lines and other units that might have possibility in generating risk , and to all relevant subsidiaries, and affiliates;
                     
                    (ii)RMF processes/ practices/ mechanisms through which the bank effectively identifies, measures, monitors, and reports material risks;
                     
                    (iii)Mechanisms that ensure that the policies, methodologies, controls, and risk monitoring systems are developed, validated, maintained and appropriately approved;
                     
                    (iv)Processes to effectively identify and review the changes in risks arising from the bank’s strategy, business model, new products, and changes in the economic environment;
                     
                    (v)Capital contingency plans for surviving unexpected events;
                     
                    (vi)Risk management information systems (MIS) that ensure:
                     
                    That the bank distributes regular, accurate, and timely information on the bank’s aggregate risk profile internally;
                     
                    The appropriate frequency and distribution of risk management information;
                     
                    Early warning processes for pre-empting capital limit breaches; and
                     
                    Internal decision-making process are facilitated to allow the bank’s management to authorize remedial actions before capital adequacy is compromised.
                     
                    (vii)The bank’s risk appetite as defined and used in the preparation of the ICAAP, which should be consistently referenced for taking business decisions;
                     
                    (viii)Risk quantification methodologies that are clearly articulated and documented, including high-level risk measurement assumptions and parameters;
                     
                    (ix)The approaches used to assess capital adequacy, which should include the stress test framework and a well-articulated definition of capital adequacy;
                     
                    (x)The capital planning process objectives, which should be forward-looking and aligned to the bank’s business model and strategy;
                     
                    (xi)Capital allocation processes including monitoring among business lines and identified risk types (e.g. risk limits defined for business lines, entities, or individual risks should be consistent to ensure the overall adequacy of the bank’s internal capital resources); and
                     
                    (xii)The boundary of entities included,
                     
                    (xiii)The process of risk identification, and
                     
                    (xiv)The bank’s risk inventory and classification, reflecting the materiality of risks and the treatment of those risks through capital.
                     

                    140. The internal control functions should play a vital role in contributing to the formation of a sustainable business strategy. The ICAAP report should describe the following with regard to internal control functions:

                     
                    (i)The responsibilities of Internal Audit and Compliance concerning risk management;
                     
                    (ii)Any relevant internal and external audit reviews of risk management and the conclusions reached; and
                     
                    (iii)Outsourcing arrangements that have a material effect on internal capital adequacy management, if any. This should elaborate the bank’s reliance on, or use of, any third parties such as external consultants or suppliers. The bank should provide a high-level summary reports or reviews of the outsourced functions’ related policy documentation and processes.
                     
                • 3.2 Models

                  141. The ICAAP report is required to address models used to comply with regulatory and accounting requirements, and those used for internal capital management, including but not limited to models used for:

                   
                  (i)IFRS9 accounting requirements;
                   
                  (ii)The appropriate assessment of Pillar 1 risks for capital requirements under the Pillar 2;
                   
                  (iii)The appropriate assessment of Pillar 2 risks for capital requirements;
                   
                  (iv)Regulatory stress tests requirements;
                   
                  (v)Risk Management Regulations;
                   
                  (vi)Valuation adjustments; and
                   
                  (vii)Pricing models, capital allocation models, and budgeting models.
                   
                • 3.3 Reverse Stress Testing

                  142. In addition to normal stress testing, each bank is expected to conduct reverse stress tests and document the process and outcomes of the process in the ICAAP report.

                  143. Banks are expected to apply a mix of qualitative analyses and quantitative analyses, which may vary in relation to the nature, scale, and complexity of the banks’ business activities and the risks associated with those activities. Accordingly, it may be acceptable for smaller and less complex banks to develop reverse stress tests that focus more on qualitative analyses, while larger and more banks that are complex should include more quantitative elements alongside the qualitative analyses. Appropriate scenarios differ based on each bank economic circumstances, business model and risk drivers.

                  144. A bank may consider implementing the following steps, which are presented purely for illustrative purposes:

                   
                  (i)Define specific trigger points that could threaten the bank’s viability or solvency. Such trigger points may involve situations in which:
                   
                  The bank’s capital or liquidity positions fall below the minimum regulatory requirements;
                   
                  Specific indicators which, if hit, reflect a loss of confidence by the bank’s counterparties (e.g. access to wholesale funding markets denied) or by depositors (e.g. deposit run-off rates reach a significant level); or
                   
                  The bank is unable to repay its debt obligations. Some of the indicators may render the banks unviable (e.g. due to illiquidity resulting from a substantial and rapid deposit run) before it becomes insolvent.
                   
                  (ii)Reverse-engineering the bank’s business model to the point that the trigger points are breached. In this way, it is possible to identify what adverse but plausible financial or non-financial events, either independently or combined, cause the bank to reach those trigger points notwithstanding existing management actions. That is, for reverse stress testing purposes, the bank is to tweak the parameters of a stress scenario until the point at which current systems and controls (e.g. accepted risk limits, controls, exposures and collaterals, etc.) are not able to prevent the bank from hitting the trigger point(s). The bank should understand the parameters and conditions in the scenario that precipitate a failed reverse stress test to analyse its risks and weaknesses. Feasible remedial actions should be designed that could prevent the consequences of such a scenario. For example, the bank could amend its business strategy regarding a specific sector.
                   
                • 3.4 Supplementary Content Required in an ICAAP Report

                  145. The following supplementary topics should be documented in the ICAAP report.

                   
                  (a)Summary of outstanding findings and required management actions from pertinent assessments, examinations and audits (e.g. current outstanding actions emanating from internal audits, external audits, risk management assessments, capital management reviews, Central Bank examinations, and Pillar 3, etc.), including the status of official actions;
                   
                  (b)Key items which warrant immediate Central Bank attention, such as a projected shortfall in regulatory minimum capital amount; a breach in outlier status under IRRBB, and any other material risks;
                   
                  (c)A list of the major changes compared to the previous ICAAP report, e.g. changes in data, MIS, organisation, process, and methodology; and
                   
                  (d)Key actions resulting from ICAAP discussions with the Board of Directors, in the form of meeting minutes included as an Appendix. (Relevant evidence should be made available upon request).
                   
        • Pillar 3

          • Pillar 3 – Market Disclosures

            • Introduction

              1.Market discipline has long been recognized as a key objective of the Central Bank of the UAE. The provision of meaningful information about common key risk metrics to market participants is a fundamental principle of a sound banking system. It reduces information irregularity and helps promote comparability of banks’ risk profiles within UAE. Pillar 3 of the Basel framework aims to promote market discipline through regulatory disclosure requirements. These requirements enable market participants to access key information relating to a bank’s regulatory capital and risk exposures in order to increase transparency and confidence about a bank’s exposure to risk and the overall adequacy of its regulatory capital.

              2.The revised Pillar 3 disclosures in this guidance focus on regulatory measures defined in Pillar 1 of the Basel framework, which requires banks to adopt specified approaches for measuring credit, market and operational risks and their associated resulting risk-weighted assets (RWA) and capital requirements. In some instances, Pillar 3 also requires supplementary information to be disclosed to improve the understanding of underlying risks. Central Bank continues to believe that a common disclosure framework based around Pillar 1 is an effective means of informing the market and allowing market participants to take informed investment decisions. However, in the wake of the 2007–09 financial crisis, it became apparent that the existing Pillar 3 framework failed to promote the identification of a bank’s material risks and did not provide sufficient, and sufficiently comparable, information to enable market participants to assess a bank’s overall capital adequacy and to compare it with its peers. The revised Pillar 3 disclosure requirements in this guidance are based on an extensive review of Pillar 3 reports.

              3.A key goal of the revised Pillar 3 disclosures is to improve comparability and consistency of disclosures. However, it is recognized that a balance needs to be struck between the use of mandatory templates that promote consistency of reporting and comparability across banks, and the need to allow senior management sufficient flexibility to provide commentary on a bank’s specific risk profile. For this reason, the revised disclosure regime introduces a “hierarchy” of disclosures; prescriptive fixed form templates which are used for quantitative information that is considered essential for the analysis of a bank’s regulatory capital requirements, and templates with a more flexible format are proposed for information which is considered meaningful to the UAE market but not central to the analysis of a bank’s regulatory capital adequacy. In addition, senior management may accompany the disclosure requirements in each template with a qualitative commentary that explains a bank’s particular circumstance and risk profile.

            • Disclosure of Pillar 3 Information

              • A. Scope and Implementation of the Revised Pillar 3 Framework

                Scope of application

                4.The revised disclosure requirements presented in this guidance supersede the existing Pillar 3 disclosure requirements issued in 2009. These revised requirements are an integral part of the Basel framework and they complement other disclosure requirements issued separately by Central Bank, which are uploaded on Central Bank's website/online portal for banks to download. Pillar 3 applies to all banks in the UAE at the top consolidated level for local banks and all branches of foreign banks. Banks having a banking subsidiary will be required to be consolidated at Group level as one Pillar 3 report as well as at subsidiary solo level as a separate Pillar 3 report Banks offering Islamic financial services should comply with these disclosure requirements. These requirements are applicable to their activities that are in line with Islamic Sharia rules and principals, which are neither interest-based lending nor borrowing but are parallel to the activities described in these Guidance and Explanatory Notes

                Implementation date

                5.The Pillar 3 tables and disclosures will be effective from the beginning of 2019 for the previous year's figures and every year going forward. Banks need to report in each table as per the requirements for that table set out in the Appendix since few tables are required to be reported every quarter or semi-annually or annually.

                Reporting

                6.Banks should publish their Pillar 3 report in a stand-alone document on the bank’s UAE-specific website that provides a readily accessible source of prudential measures for users. The Pillar 3 report may be appended to form a discrete section of a bank’s financial reporting, but the full report will be needed to be disclosed separately in the Pillar 3 tables as well.

                7.Signposting of disclosure requirements is permitted in certain circumstances, as set out in paragraphs 21–23 below. Banks should also make available on their websites a 5-year archive of Pillar 3 reports (i.e. quarterly, semi-annual or annual) relating to prior reporting periods (past 5 years’ data)

                Frequency and timing of disclosures

                8.The reporting frequencies for each disclosure requirement are set out in the schedule in paragraph 27 below. The frequencies vary between quarterly, semi-annual and annual reporting depending upon the nature of the specific disclosure requirement. If a bank publishes interim financial statements, then the bank should publish the quarterly Pillar 3 report, three (3) weeks after the interim financial statements are published. For banks who do not have an interim financial statement, the Pillar 3 quarterly report needs to be published 6 weeks from quarter end.

                9.A bank’s Pillar 3 report should be published with its financial report for the corresponding period as mandated in paragraph 8 above. If a Pillar 3 disclosure is required to be published for a period when a bank does not produce any financial report, the disclosure requirement should be published as soon as possible. However, the time lag should not exceed that allowed to the bank for its regular financial reporting period-ends (e.g. if a bank reports only annually and its annual financial statements are made available six weeks after the end of the annual reporting period-end, interim Pillar 3 disclosures on a quarterly and/or semi-annual basis should be available within six weeks after the end of the relevant quarter or semester).

                Assurance of Pillar 3 data

                10.The information provided by banks under Pillar 3 should be subject, at a minimum, to the same level of internal review and internal control processes as the information provided by banks for their financial reporting (i.e. the level of assurance should be the same as for information provided within the management discussion and analysis part of the financial report).

                1. The Pillar 3 Disclosures and reports have to be reviewed by internal audit of all bank for all Pillar 3 reports.
                2. All local banks and large foreign banks will need to have the annual Pillar 3 reports externally audited every two (2) years and smaller foreign banks (as defined in paragraph 27) will need to have the annual Pillar 3 reports externally audited every four (4) years.

                11.Banks should also have a formal board-approved disclosure policy for Pillar 3 information that sets out the internal controls and procedures for disclosure of such information. The key elements of this policy should be described in the year-end Pillar 3 report. The board of directors and senior management are responsible for establishing and maintaining an effective internal control structure over the disclosure of financial information, including Pillar 3 disclosures. They should also ensure that appropriate review of the disclosures takes place. One or more senior officers of a bank, ideally at board level or equivalent, should attest in writing that Pillar 3 disclosures have been prepared in accordance with the board-agreed internal control processes. For larger banks, Board member attestation will be expected.

                Proprietary and confidential information

                12.The Central Bank believes that the disclosure requirements set out below strike an appropriate balance between the need for meaningful disclosure and the protection of proprietary and confidential information. In exceptional cases, disclosure of certain items required by Pillar 3 may reveal the position of a bank or contravene its legal obligations by making public information that is proprietary or confidential in nature. In such cases, a bank would need to approach the Central Bank first and obtain approval for non-disclosure of such information they deem to be confidential. The Central Bank will review the information and provide approval if the bank does not need to disclose those specific items, but should disclose more general information about the subject matter of the requirement instead. The bank should also explain to Central Bank the specific items of information that cannot be disclosed and the reasons for this.

              • B. Guiding Principles for Banks’ Pillar 3 Disclosures

                13.The Central Bank has agreed upon five guiding principles for banks’ Pillar 3 disclosures. Pillar 3 complements the minimum risk-based capital requirements and other quantitative requirements (Pillar 1) and the supervisory review process (Pillar 2) and aims to promote market discipline by providing meaningful regulatory information to investors and other interested parties on a consistent and comparable basis. The guiding principles aim to provide a firm foundation for achieving transparent, high-quality Pillar 3 risk disclosures that will enable users to better understand and compare a bank’s business and its risks.

                14.The principles are as follows:

                Principle 1: Disclosures should be clear

                Disclosures should be presented in a form that is understandable to key stakeholders (i.e. investors, analysts, financial customers and others) and communicated through an accessible medium. Important messages should be highlighted and easy to find. Complex issues should be explained in simple language with important terms defined. Related risk information should be presented together.

                Principle 2: Disclosures should be comprehensive

                Disclosures should describe a bank’s main activities and all significant risks, supported by relevant underlying data and information. Significant changes in risk exposures between reporting periods should be described, together with the appropriate response by management.

                Disclosures should provide sufficient information in both qualitative and quantitative terms on a bank’s processes and procedures for identifying, measuring and managing those risks. The level of detail of such disclosure should be proportionate to a bank’s complexity.

                Approaches to disclosure should be sufficiently flexible to reflect how senior management and the board of directors internally assess and manage risks and strategy, helping users to better understand a bank’s risk tolerance/appetite.

                Principle 3: Disclosures should be meaningful to users

                Disclosures should highlight a bank’s most significant current and emerging risks and how those risks are managed, including information that is likely to receive market attention. Where meaningful, linkages should be provided to line items on the balance sheet or the income statement. Disclosures that do not add value to users’ understanding or do not communicate useful information should be avoided. Furthermore, information, which is no longer meaningful or relevant to users, should be removed.

                Principle 4: Disclosures should be consistent over time

                Disclosures should be consistent over time to enable key stakeholders to identify trends in a bank’s risk profile across all significant aspects of its business. Additions, deletions and other important changes in disclosures from previous reports, including those arising from a bank’s specific, regulatory or market developments, should be highlighted and explained.

                Principle 5: Disclosures should be comparable across banks

                The level of detail and the format of presentation of disclosures should enable key stakeholders to perform meaningful comparisons of business activities, prudential metrics, risks and risk management between banks and across jurisdictions.

              • C. Presentation of the Disclosure Requirements

                Templates and tables

                15.The disclosure requirements are presented either in the form of templates or of tables. Templates should be completed with quantitative data in accordance with the definitions provided. Tables generally relate to qualitative requirements, but quantitative information is also required in some instances. Banks may choose the format they prefer when presenting the information requested in tables.

                16.In line with Principle 3 above, the information provided in the templates and tables should be meaningful to users. The disclosure requirements in this guidance that necessitate an assessment from banks are specifically identified. When preparing these individual tables and templates, banks will need to consider carefully how widely the disclosure requirement should apply. If a bank considers that the information requested in a template or table would not be meaningful to users, for example because the exposures and RWA amounts are deemed immaterial, it may choose not to disclose part or all of the information requested. In such circumstances, however, the bank will be required to explain in a narrative commentary why it considers such information not to be meaningful to users. It should describe the portfolios excluded from the disclosure requirement and the aggregate total RWAs those portfolios represent.

                Templates with a fixed format

                17.Where the format of a template is described as fixed, banks should complete the fields in accordance with the instructions given.

                18.If a row/column is not considered to be relevant to a bank’s activities the bank may delete the specific row/column from the template, but the numbering of the subsequent rows and columns should not be altered. Banks may add extra rows and extra columns to fixed format templates if they wish to provide additional detail to a disclosure requirement by adding sub-rows or columns, but the numbering of prescribed rows and columns in the template should not be altered.

                Templates/tables with a flexible format

                19.Where the format of a template is described as flexible, banks may present the required information either in the format provided in this guidance or in one that better suits the bank. The format for the presentation of qualitative information in tables is not prescribed.

                20.However, where a customized presentation of the information is used, the bank should provide information comparable with that required in the disclosure requirement (i.e. at a similar level of granularity as if the template/table were completed as presented in this document).

                Signposting

                21.Banks may disclose in a document separate from their Pillar 3 report (e.g. in a bank’s annual report or through published regulatory reporting) the templates/tables with a flexible format, and the fixed format templates where the criteria in paragraph 22 are met. In such circumstances, the specific Pillar 3 table(s) may form a section in a bank’s financial reporting, but the full table will be needed to be disclosed in the Pillar 3 tables separately as well.

                22.The disclosure requirements for templates with a fixed format can be disclosed by banks in a separate document other than the Pillar 3 report provided all of the following criteria are met:

                1. the information contained in the signposted document is equivalent in terms of presentation and content to that required in the fixed template and allows users to make meaningful comparisons with information provided by banks disclosing the fixed format templates;
                2. the information contained in the signposted document is based on the same scope of consolidation as the one used in the disclosure requirement;
                3. the disclosure in the signposted document is mandatory.

                Banks should note that although signposting may be allowed in the annual report, the bank would still need to disclose this table separately in the Pillar 3 Disclosure along with all other tables mentioned in paragraph 27 below.

                23.Banks can only make use of signposting to another document if the level of assurance on the reliability of data in the separate document are equivalent to, or greater than, the internal assurance level required for the Pillar 3 report (see sections on reporting and assurance of Pillar 3 data above).

                Qualitative narrative to accompany the disclosure requirements

                24.Banks are expected to supplement the quantitative information provided in both fixed and flexible templates with a narrative commentary to explain at least any significant changes between reporting periods and any other issues that management considers to be of interest to market participants. The form taken by this additional narrative is at the bank’s discretion.

                25.Disclosure of additional quantitative and qualitative information will provide market participants with a broader picture of a bank´s risk position and promote market discipline.

                26.Additional voluntary risk disclosures allow banks to present information relevant to their business model that may not be adequately captured by the standardised requirements. Additional quantitative information that banks choose to disclose should provide sufficient meaningful information to enable market participants to understand and analyze any figures provided. It should also be accompanied by a qualitative discussion. Any additional disclosure should comply with the five guiding principles set out in paragraph 14 above.

              • D. Format and Reporting Frequency of Each Disclosure Requirement

                27.The schedule below presents a summary of the disclosure requirements, whether they are required in a fixed or flexible format. It also lists the publishing frequency associated with each template and table. Please also note that the below tables will be available as an Excel file on the Central Bank alert portal on the Central Bank's website for download.
                Please note: It is mandatory for all local banks to report all tables as per below schedule. It is also mandatory for branches of foreign banks with RWA of more than AED 5 billion to report all tables as per below schedule.
                Branches of foreign banks with RWA of less than AED 5 billion should report the below tables highlighted in Yellow and BOLD only as mandatory.

                TopicTableInformation OverviewFormatDisclosure Frequency
                Overview of risk management and RWAKM1Key metrics (at consolidated group level)FixedQuarterly
                OVABank risk management approachFlexibleAnnual
                OV1Overview of RWAFixedQuarterly

                Linkages between financial statements and regulatory exposures

                LI1Differences between accounting and regulatory scopes of consolidation and mapping of financial statement categories with regulatory risk categoriesFlexibleAnnual
                LI2Main sources of differences between regulatory exposure amounts and carrying values in financial statementsFlexibleAnnual
                LIAExplanations of differences between accounting and regulatory exposure amountsFlexibleAnnual
                Prudential valuation adjustmentsPV1Prudent valuation adjustmentsFixedAnnual

                Composition of capital

                CC1Composition of regulatory capitalFixedSemi-annual
                CC2Reconciliation of regulatory capital to balance sheetFlexibleSemi-annual
                CCAMain features of regulatory capital instrumentsFixedSemi-annual

                Macroprudential Supervisory measures

                CCyB1Geographical distribution of credit exposures used in the countercyclical bufferFlexibleSemi-annual
                LR1Summary comparison of accounting assets vs leverage ratio exposure measure (January 2014 standards)FixedQuarterly

                Leverage ratio

                LR2Leverage ratio common disclosure template (January 2014 standards)FixedQuarterly
                LIQALiquidity risk managementFlexibleAnnual

                Liquidity

                LIQ1Liquidity Coverage RatioFixedQuarterly
                LIQ2Net Stable Funding RatioFixedSemi-annual
                CRAGeneral qualitative information about credit riskFlexibleAnnual

                Credit risk

                CR1Credit quality of assetsFixedSemi-annual
                CR2Changes in the stock of defaulted loans and debt securitiesFixedSemi-annual
                CRBAdditional disclosure related to credit quality of assetsFlexibleAnnual
                CRCQualitative information on the mitigation of credit riskFlexibleAnnual
                CR3Credit risk mitigation techniques – overviewFixedSemi-annual
                CRDQualitative disclosures on banks' use of external credit ratings under the standardised approach for credit riskFlexibleAnnual
                CR4Standardised approach - credit risk exposure and CRM effectsFixedSemi-annual
                CR5Standardised approach - exposures by asset classes and risk weightsFixedSemi-annual
                CCRAQualitative disclosure related to CCRFlexibleAnnual

                Counterparty credit risk (CCR)

                CCR1Analysis of CCR by approachFixedSemi-annual
                CCR2Credit valuation adjustment capital chargeFixedSemi-annual
                CCR3Standardised approach - CCR exposures by regulatory portfolio and risk weightsFixedSemi-annual
                CCR5Composition of collateral for CCR exposureFlexibleSemi-annual
                CCR6Credit derivatives exposuresFlexibleSemi-annual
                CCR8Exposures to central counterpartiesFixedSemi-annual
                SECAQualitative disclosures related to securitisation exposuresFlexibleAnnual

                Securitisation

                SEC1Securitisation exposures in the banking bookFlexibleSemi-annual
                SEC2Securitisation exposures in the trading bookFlexibleSemi-annual
                SEC3Securitisation exposures in the banking book and associated regulatory capital requirements - bank acting as originator or as sponsorFixedSemi-annual
                SEC4Securitisation exposures in the trading book and associated capital requirements - bank acting as investorFixedSemi-annual
                MRAGeneral qualitative disclosure requirements related to market riskFlexibleAnnual

                Market risk

                MR1Market risk under the standardised approachFixedSemi-annual
                IRRBBAIRRBB risk management objectives and policiesFlexibleAnnual

                Interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB)

                IRRBB1Quantitative information on IRRBBFixedAnnual
                OR1Qualitative disclosures on operational riskFlexibleAnnual
                Operational riskREMARemuneration policyFlexibleAnnual

                Remuneration Policy

                REM1Remuneration awarded during the financial yearFlexibleAnnual
                REM2Special paymentsFlexibleAnnual
                REM3Deferred remunerationFlexibleAnnual
                    

                 

              • Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

                Question 1: One or more senior officers of a bank, ideally at board level or equivalent, should attest in writing that Pillar 3 disclosures have been prepared in accordance with the board-agreed internal control processes.For banks of foreign branches, is Country Manager or CFO at Head office attestation sufficient?
                For local banks and large foreign banks, Board member attestation will be expected. For smaller foreign bank branches, Country Manager/GM will be sufficient

                Question 2: There are requirements on the Pillar III disclosure that is dependent on the BASEL returns (BRF 95), in relation to this, the submission that mentions 6 weeks after the end of the relevant quarter starts from the BASEL quarter reporting deadline or actual quarter end?
                Pillar 3 disclosure submission will be 6 weeks after the quarter end date. For example, December quarter submission will be 6 weeks from December 31st and not 6 weeks from January 31st. Since the BRF95 should mandatorily be submitted by banks within 4 weeks from quarter end, the bank still has additional 2 weeks to complete the Pillar 3 disclosures based on BRF95.

                Question 3: Pillar 3 applies to all banks in the UAE at the top consolidated level for local banks...Please clarify in case of subsidiary of a bank, whether revised pillar 3 disclosures will be required to be prepared at consolidated Group level or stand-alone level?
                Bank subsidiaries will be consolidated at stand-alone subsidiary level and the group bank will be consolidated at the stand-alone of the group bank only without the bank’s subsidiary data.

                Question 4: Pillar 3 disclosures can be presented in a separate report; however, Can it be signposted to the audited financial statements?
                Signposting is allowed if the bank chooses to use the same template in their audited financial statements but a separate reporting template needs to be prepared as per Pillar 3 templates which is mandatory and cannot be omitted from the Pillar 3 tables.

                Question 5: If any section/ table of Template is not applicable to the Bank (i.e.DSIBs, Securitisation), shall the Bank exclude this section/ table completely irrespective of type of table.
                Yes, banks can exclude the tables/templates not pertaining to the bank, for example DSIB and Securitisation

                Question 6: Banks should also have a formal board-approved disclosure policy for Pillar 3 information that sets out the internal controls and procedures for disclosure of such information.Should this formal Disclosure policy still be submitted to Central Bank along with ICAAP or it shall only be published / disclosed as mentioned?
                The formal disclosure policy should not be submitted but should be available on request by Central Bank of UAE.

                Question 7: Will it be sufficient to publish Basel 3 disclosures on its investor relations page on the bank’s website without any physical printouts?
                Banks should publish their Pillar 3 report in a stand-alone document on the bank’s UAE-specific website. This can be anywhere on the website but it needs to be clearly visible and easily available for all stakeholders. Banks which do not have a UAE-Specific website should create a website specific to UAE so that all stakeholders can have access to the Pillar 3 disclosures of the bank.

                Question 8: For REM1 template, is Central Bank expecting the Bank to report overseas earnings or only the locally paid compensation? Are deferrals awarded in the current year only to be reported? If an employee has a deferral which has a tranche of a prior year paid out after they have left the Branch, is it expected that this would be reported or not? If a prior year tranches awarded is reported should this be reported if the individual is no longer an employee of the Branch?
                All contract earnings of all employees need to be reported even if the employee is earning compensation in UAE and outside UAE. The full contractual award needs to be mentioned and not only the physical payout

                Question 9: Is the End of Service Benefit (EOSB) i.e.severance payment for a normal leaver to be reported depending upon the definition of “other material risk taker” OR are banks also required to report any additional payment such as a redundancy type payment? Should a transfer of Senior Management personnel or Other Material Risk-takers to other branch of the Bank be considered as severance for reporting purpose?
                All payments regardless of the type of payment based on the contract needs to be reported

                Question 10: For branches of foreign banks where the Head Office reports to the home regulator, there are pre-fixed formats prepared and submitted at a frequency as stipulated by home regulator.Can the branch of foreign banks provide such reports in UAE which are submitted to the home regulator as a part of UAE Pillar 3 Disclosures?
                Reports sent between Head Office and UAE needs to be separated and only the Pillar 3 disclosures as per this Guidance needs to be reported for UAE branches in the mandatory formats published here.

                Question 11: What does “Fully loaded” ECL accounting model mean and what is the difference between total capital and fully loaded capital?
                "Fully Loaded" means bank’s regulatory capital compared with a situation where the transitional arrangement had not been applied

                Question 12: For branches of foreign banks, would Central Bank allow for a transition period if the threshold for partial disclosure is reached? (i.e.if RWA exceed AED 5 billion)
                Transition will be granted on a case by case basis

                Question 13: Currently CCyB buffer is 0% in UAE.In this case, what do banks need to report in CCyB template?
                Currently CCyB is not applicable in UAE but if banks in UAE have branches in other countries this needs to be reported if CCyB is being reported as per that foreign country’s regulations. Banks, hence, need to calculate and fill the CCyB1 as explained in the Capital Supply standards.

                Question 14: In Sheet CR5, for "Unrated" Category, should we include the Post CRM and CCF amounts in their respective Risk Weight categories or should we club it under "Others"?
                Yes, it can be placed in “Others” along with any other ratings.

                Question 15: In Sheet OV1, is the minimum requirements simply 10.5% of the RWA.
                Pillar 1 capital requirements at the reporting date will normally be RWA*10.5% but may differ if a floor is applicable or adjustments (such as scaling factors).

                Question 16: CCR8 requires Bank to report Exposures to Non QCCPs (excluding initial margin and default fund contribution) arising of (i) OTC derivatives, (ii) Exchange-traded derivatives, (iii) Securities financing transactions & (iv) Netting sets where cross-product netting has been approved.Does this mean the Exposures computed under SA-CCR which are eligible under Netting Jurisdiction to be disclosed under (iv)?
                Currently, UAE has no netting jurisdiction but such exposures reported will be taken into consideration on a case-by-case basis.

                Question 17: LIQA, Liquidity exposures and funding needs at the level of individual legal entities, foreign branches and subsidiaries, taking into account legal, regulatory and operational limitations on the transferability of capital.Are insurance or non-bank subsidiaries to be included?
                All entities that are consolidated by the bank must be included.

                Question 18: LIQA, Balance sheet and off-balance sheet items broken down into maturity buckets and the resultant liquidity gaps.Is there any format for reporting the liquidity gap report?
                As per BRF 9 reported by the bank. The bank may add a section for Off Balance sheet as required

        • Leverage Ratio

          • Leverage Ratio

            • Introduction

              1.Risk-based capital adequacy ratios measure the extent to which a bank has sufficient capital relative to the risk of its business activities. They are based on a foundational principle: that a bank that takes higher risks should have higher capital to compensate.

              2.Leverage, on the other hand, measures the extent to which a bank has financed its assets with equity. It does not matter what those assets are, or their risk characteristics. The leverage ratio, by placing an absolute cap on exposures relative to a bank’s capital, is an important component of the Central Bank capital framework, and complements the risk-based capital adequacy regime. However, neither of these parts of the framework stands alone: it is important to look at Central Bank capital requirements as a package of constraints that mutually reinforce prudent behaviour. Even though the leverage ratio has been designed as a backstop, it must be a meaningful backstop if it is to serve its intended purpose.

              3.One of the underlying causes of the global financial crisis is believed to have been the build-up of excessive on- and off-balance-sheet leverage in the banking system. At the height of the crisis, developments in financial markets forced banks to reduce leverage in a manner that likely amplified downward pressures on asset prices. This deleveraging process exacerbated the feedback loop between losses, falling bank capital, and shrinking credit availability.

              4.The Central Bank’s leverage ratio framework introduces a simple, transparent, non-risk-based leverage ratio to act as a credible supplementary measure to the risk-based capital requirements. The leverage ratio is intended to:

              restrict the build-up of leverage in the banking sector to avoid destabilizing deleveraging processes that can damage the broader financial system and the economy; and

              reinforce the risk-based requirements with a simple, non-risk-based “backstop” measure.

                5.The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) adopted the leverage ratio with the launch of Basel III in December 2010. A revised leverage ratio framework, titled Basel III Leverage Ratio Framework and Disclosure Requirements, was published in January 2014. In December 2017, the leverage ratio was finalized along with the rest of the Basel III capital framework. Prior to each release of the leverage ratio, the BCBS published consultative documentation and sought comments from the industry. Additionally, in 2015 and 2017, the BCBS published revised Pillar 3 disclosure requirements, including updated disclosure requirements for the leverage ratio.

                6.In designing the UAE leverage ratio framework, the Central Bank considered the full evolution of the BCBS leverage ratio, including consultative frameworks, reporting requirements, and comments raised by banks and industry bodies across the globe. The Central Bank’s Standards for Leverage Ratio is based closely on the requirements articulated by the BCBS in the document Basel III: Finalising post-crisis reforms, December 2017.

                7.This Guidance should be read in conjunction with the Central Bank’s Standards on Leverage Ratio, as it is intended to provide clarification of the requirements of that Standards, and together with that Standards supports the Central Bank’s Regulations Re Capital Adequacy.

              • Clarifications of the Standards

                8.The leverage ratio framework is designed to capture leverage associated with both on- and off-balance-sheet exposures. It also aims to make use of accounting measures to the greatest extent possible, while at the same time addressing concerns that (i) different accounting frameworks across jurisdictions raise level playing field issues and (ii) a framework based exclusively on accounting measures may not capture all risks.

              • Leverage Ratio and Capital

                9.The leverage ratio is defined as the capital measure divided by the exposure measure, expressed as a percentage:

                1

                 

                10.The capital measure is Tier 1 capital as defined for the purposes of the Central Bank risk-based capital framework, subject to transitional arrangements. In other words, the capital measure for the leverage ratio at a particular point in time is the applicable Tier 1 capital measure at that time under the risk-based framework.

                11.The minimum requirement for the leverage ratio is established in the Central Bank’s Regulations Re Capital Adequacy.

                12.The Standards includes the possibility that the Central Bank may consider temporarily exempting certain central bank “reserves” from the leverage ratio exposure measure to facilitate the implementation of monetary policies in exceptional macroeconomic circumstances. In this context, the term “reserves” refers to certain bank balances or placements at the Central Bank. Certain other jurisdictions have pursued monetary policies that resulted in a significant expansion of such bank balances at the Central Bank, for example through policies commonly described as “quantitative easing.” While the Central Bank has no plan to implement such policies, the inclusion of this flexibility in the Standards ensures that, in the event that such policies were to be implemented, the minimum leverage requirement could be adjusted in a manner that allows it to continue to serve its appropriate prudential role. Per the requirements of the BCBS framework, the Central Bank would also increase the calibration of the minimum leverage ratio requirement commensurately to offset the impact of exempting central bank reserves, since actual bank leverage ratios would be expected to increase due to the exclusion of these exposures.

              • Scope of Consolidation

                13.The framework applies on a consolidated basis, following the same scope of regulatory consolidation used in the risk-based capital requirements (see Regulations re Capital Adequacy). For example, if proportional consolidation is applied for regulatory consolidation under the risk-based framework, the same criteria shall be applied for leverage ratio purposes.

                14.Where a banking, financial, insurance or commercial entity is outside the scope of regulatory consolidation, only the investment in the capital of such entities (that is, only the carrying value of the investment, as opposed to the underlying assets and other exposures of the investee) is included in the exposure measure. However, any such investments that are deducted from Tier 1 capital may be excluded from the exposure measure.

              • Exposure Measure

                15.The exposure measure includes both on-balance-sheet exposures and off-balance-sheet (OBS) items. On-balance-sheet exposures are generally included at their accounting value, although exposures arising from derivatives transactions and securities financing transactions (SFTs) are subject to separate treatment.

                16.Except where a different treatment is specified, no offset is allowed for physical or financial collateral held, guarantees in favour of the bank or other credit risk mitigation techniques.

                17.Balance sheet assets that are deducted from Tier 1 capital may also be deducted from the exposure measure. For example:

                Where a banking, financial or insurance entity is not included in the regulatory scope of consolidation, the amount of any investment in the capital of that entity that is totally or partially deducted from Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) or Additional Tier 1 capital may also be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                Prudent valuation adjustments for exposures to less liquid positions that are deducted from Tier 1 capital as per the Central Bank’s Market Risk Standards may be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                  18.Liability items must not be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure. For example, gains/losses on fair valued liabilities or accounting value adjustments on derivative liabilities due to changes in the bank’s own credit risk must not be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.

                  19.The Central Bank will be vigilant to transactions and structures that have the result of inadequately capturing banks’ sources of leverage. Examples of concerns that might arise in such leverage ratio exposure measure minimizing transactions and structures may include: securities financing transactions where exposure to the counterparty increases as the counterparty’s credit quality decreases or securities financing transactions in which the credit quality of the counterparty is positively correlated with the value of the securities received in the transaction (i.e. the credit quality of the counterparty falls when the value of the securities falls); banks that normally act as principal but adopt an agency model to transact in derivatives and SFTs in order to benefit from the more favorable treatment permitted for agency transactions under the leverage ratio framework; collateral swap trades structured to mitigate inclusion in the leverage ratio exposure measure; or use of structures to move assets off the balance sheet. This list of examples is by no means exhaustive.

                • On-Balance Sheet Exposures

                  20.Where a bank recognizes fiduciary assets on the balance sheet, these assets can be excluded from the leverage ratio exposure measure provided that the assets meet the IFRS 9 criteria for de-recognition and, where applicable, IFRS 10 for deconsolidation.

                • Derivative Exposures

                  21.The basis for the framework’s treatment of derivative transactions is a modified version of Standardised Approach to Counterparty Credit Risk (SA-CCR) in Basel III. It captures both the exposure arising from the underlying of the derivative contract and the related counterparty credit risk. The exposure measure amount is generally equal to the sum of the replacement cost (the mark-to-market value of contracts with positive value) and an add-on representing the transaction’s potential future exposure, with that sum multiplied by a scaling factor of 1.4. Valid bilateral netting contracts can reduce the exposure amount, but collateral received generally cannot. There are specific rules governing the treatment of cash variation margin, clearing services and written credit derivatives.

                  22.If, under a bank’s operative accounting standards, there is no accounting measure of exposure for certain derivative instruments because they are held (completely) off balance sheet, the bank must use the sum of positive fair values of these derivatives as the replacement cost.

                  23.Netting across product categories such as derivatives and SFTs is not permitted in determining the leverage ratio exposure measure. However, where a bank has a cross-product netting agreement in place that meets the eligibility criteria; it may choose to perform netting separately in each product category provided that all other conditions for netting in this product category that are applicable to the leverage ratio framework are met.”

                  24.Variation margin may be netted against derivative exposures, but only where the margin is paid in cash. This is the appropriate treatment for the leverage calculation, since the cash margin payment is, for all intents and purposes, a settlement of a liability. It also has the advantage, as would not have otherwise been the case, of encouraging the good risk management practice of taking cash collateral against derivative exposures, and is consistent with broader regulatory objectives that promote the margining of OTC derivatives.

                  25.One of the criteria necessary in order to recognize cash variation margin received as a form of pre-settlement payment is that variation margin exchanged must be the full amount necessary to extinguish the mark-to-market exposure of the derivative. In situations where a margin dispute arises, the amount of non-disputed variation margin that has been exchanged can be recognized.

                  26.Where a bank provides clearing services as a “higher level client” within a multi-level client structure, the bank need not recognize in its leverage ratio exposure measure the resulting trade exposures to the ultimate clearing member (CM) or to an entity that provides higher-level services to the bank if it meets specific conditions.

                  27.Among these conditions is a requirement that offsetting transactions are identified by the QCCP as higher level client transactions and collateral to support them is held by the QCCP and/or the CM, as applicable, under arrangements that prevent any losses to the higher level client due to the joint default or insolvency of the CM and any of its other clients. To clarify, upon the insolvency of the clearing member, there must be no legal impediment (other than the need to obtain a court order to which the client is entitled) to the transfer of the collateral belonging to clients of a defaulting clearing member to the QCCP, to one or more other surviving clearing members or to the client or the client’s nominee.

                  28.Another required condition is that relevant laws, regulation, rules, contractual or administrative arrangements provide that the offsetting transactions with the defaulted or insolvent CM are highly likely to continue to be indirectly transacted through the QCCP, or by the QCCP, if the CM defaults or becomes insolvent. Assessing whether trades are highly likely to be ported should consider factors such as a clear precedent for transactions being ported at a QCCP, and industry intent for this practice to continue. The fact that QCCP documentation does not prohibit client trades from being ported is not sufficient to conclude that they are highly likely to be ported.

                  29.The effective notional amount referenced by a written credit derivative is to be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure. Note that this is added to the general exposure measure for derivatives because a written credit derivative exposes a bank both to counterparty credit risk and to credit risk from the underlying reference entity for the derivative.

                  30.The effective notional amount of a written credit derivative may be reduced by any negative change in fair value amount that has been incorporated into the calculation of Tier 1 capital with respect to the written credit derivative. For example, if a written credit derivative had a positive fair value of 20 on one date, but then declines by 30 to have a negative fair value of 10 on a subsequent reporting date, the effective notional amount of the credit derivative may be reduced by 10 – the effective notional amount may not be reduced by 30. However, if on the subsequent reporting date, the credit derivative has a positive fair value of five, the effective notional amount cannot be reduced at all. This treatment is consistent with the rationale that the effective notional amounts included in the exposure measure may be capped at the level of the maximum potential loss, which means that the maximum potential loss at the reporting date is the notional amount of the credit derivative minus any negative fair value that has already reduced Tier 1 capital.

                  31.The resulting exposure amount for a written credit derivative may be further reduced by the effective notional amount of a purchased credit derivative on the same reference name, provided that certain conditions are met. Among these conditions is a requirement that credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is otherwise subject to the same or more conservative terms as those in the corresponding written credit derivative. For example, the application of the same material terms would result in the following treatments:

                  In the case of single name credit derivatives, the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is on a reference obligation that ranks pari passu with, or is junior to, the underlying reference obligation of the written credit derivative. Credit protection purchased through credit derivatives that references a subordinated position may offset written credit derivatives on a more senior position of the same reference entity as long as a credit event on the senior reference asset would result in a credit event on the subordinated reference asset.

                  For tranched products, the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives must be on a reference obligation with the same level of seniority.

                    32.Another required condition is that the credit protection purchased through credit derivatives is not purchased from a counterparty whose credit quality is highly correlated with the value of the reference obligation, which would generate wrong-way risk. Specifically, the credit quality of the counterparty must not be positively correlated with the value of the reference obligation (i.e. the credit quality of the counterparty falls when the value of the reference obligation falls and the value of the purchased credit derivative increases). This determination should reflect careful analysis of the actual risk; a legal connection does not need to exist between the counterparty and the underlying reference entity.

                    33.For the purposes of the leverage ratio, the term “written credit derivative” refers to a broad range of credit derivatives through which a bank effectively provides credit protection and is not limited solely to credit default swaps and total return swaps. For example, all options where the bank has the obligation to provide credit protection under certain conditions qualify as “written credit derivatives.” The effective notional amount of such options sold by the bank may be offset by the effective notional amount of options by which the bank has the right to purchase credit protection that fulfils the conditions stated in the Standards. For example, to have the same or more conservative material terms, the strike price of the underlying purchased credit protection would need to be equal to or lower than the strike price of the underlying sold credit protection.

                  • Securities Financing Transaction (SFT) Exposures

                    34.Secured lending and borrowing in the form of SFTs is an important source of leverage. How the framework measures exposure from SFTs depends on whether the bank is acting as a principal or agent. For principal banks, the exposure measure is equal to the sum of gross SFT assets (gross receivables related to SFTs, with some adjustments) and an amount representing counterparty credit risk. When acting as an agent, depending on the structure of the SFT, a bank may be able to ignore the collateral involved and reflect only the counterparty credit risk component, or it may have to include both. The framework also includes specific rules for SFTs that qualify for sale treatment under the operative accounting regime.

                    35.A degree of netting is allowed for SFTs, but only where strict criteria are met (for example, same counterparty, same maturity date). In these cases, the net position provides the better measure of the degree of leverage in a set of transactions between counterparties.

                    36.When a bank acts as a principal, its SFT exposure is the sum of gross SFT assets (subject to adjustments) and a measure of counterparty credit risk calculated as the current exposure without an add-on for potential future exposure.

                    37.For SFT assets subject to novation and cleared through QCCPs, “gross SFT assets recognized for accounting purposes” are replaced by the final contractual exposure, that is, the exposure to the QCCP after the process of novation has been applied, given that pre-existing contracts have been replaced by new legal obligations through the novation process. However, banks can only net cash receivables and cash payables with a QCCP if the requisite criteria are met. Any other netting permitted by the QCCP is not permitted for the purposes of the Basel III leverage ratio. Gross SFT assets recognized for accounting purposes must not recognize any accounting netting of cash payables against cash receivables (e.g. as currently permitted under the IFRS accounting framework). This regulatory treatment has the benefit of avoiding inconsistencies from netting which may arise across different accounting regimes.

                    38.Where a bank acting as an agent in an SFT does not provide an indemnity or guarantee to any of the involved parties, the bank is not exposed to the SFT and therefore need not recognize those SFTs in its leverage ratio exposure measure.

                    39.In situations where a bank is economically exposed beyond providing an indemnity or guarantee for the difference between the value of the security or cash its customer has lent and the value of the collateral the borrower has provided, a further exposure equal to the full amount of the security or cash must be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure. An example of this scenario could arise due to the bank managing collateral received in the bank’s name or on its own account rather than on the customer’s or borrower’s account (e.g. by on-lending or managing unsegregated collateral, cash or securities). However, this does not apply to client omnibus accounts that are used by agent lenders to hold and manage client collateral provided that client collateral is segregated from the bank’s proprietary assets and the bank calculates the exposure on a client-by-client basis.

                  • Off-Balance Sheet Items

                    40.OBS items arise from such transactions as credit and liquidity commitments, guarantees and standby letters of credit. The amount that is included in the exposure measure is determined by multiplying the notional amount of an OBS item by the relevant credit conversion factor (CCF) from the Central Bank’s Standards for Leverage Ratio.

                    41.The off-balance-sheet exposure measure will be calculated using credit equivalent values. This reflects the fact that the degree of leverage in these transactions is not the same as if banks had made fully funded loans. That is, a 100% credit conversion factor (CCF) overestimates leverage. The use of standardised CCFs retains a consistent and conservative treatment that is not dependent on the risk of the bank’s counterparty.

                    42.Where there is an undertaking to provide a commitment on an off-balance-sheet item, banks are to apply the lower of the two applicable CCFs. For example:

                    If a bank has a commitment to open short-term self-liquidating trade letters of credit arising from the movement of goods, a 20% CCF will apply, instead of a 40% CCF; and

                    If a bank has an unconditionally cancellable commitment to issue direct credit substitutes, a 10% CCF will apply, instead of a 100% CCF.

                  • Frequently Asked Questions

                    Question 1: Is the starting point for the leverage ratio exposure calculation total on-balance-sheet assets as reported in the financial statements?
                    Yes, total assets are the correct starting point, with adjustments as specified in the Standards, and with additions for off-balance-sheet exposure as required under the Standards.

                    Question 2: Should aspects of derivatives exposures or SFT exposures that are on the balance sheet be included as part of on-balance-sheet exposure, or as part of derivatives or SFT exposure?
                    Certain exposures related to derivatives may appear on the balance sheet; the same is true for SFTs. Those exposures related to derivatives or SFTs should be excluded from the on-balance-sheet component of the leverage ratio exposure calculation, and instead included with either derivatives exposure or SFT exposure, as appropriate.

                    Question 3: Why is collateral on the bank’s balance sheet part of the exposure measure for the leverage ratio calculation?
                    The leverage ratio framework as developed by the Basel Committee treats all assets on a bank’s balance sheet as creating equal risk. If the bank holds collateral on its balance sheet, the collateral is an asset of the bank, and changes in the value of that collateral affect the bank’s total assets and capital. In this sense, the leverage ratio calculation treats collateral as an additional source of risk exposure to the bank, even though the purpose of taking the collateral may be credit risk mitigation. The leverage ratio treats most types of secured exposures the same way, on a gross basis without taking into account the effects of collateral.

                    Question 4: Is the calculation of counterparty credit risk exposure the same as the calculation used in the SA-CCR standards of the Central Bank?
                    Not quite – the CCR exposure calculation for the leverage ratio is similar, but with some differences. Potential Future Exposure is different because the PFE multiplier is set equal to 1, rather than possibly being less than 1 as under the CCR Standards. Replacement Cost also differs, due to some differences in the treatment of eligible collateral. The requirements are covered in para 44 to 46 of the Leverage Ratio Standards.

                    Question 5: Why is the PFE multiplier set to 1 for derivatives in the calculation of the leverage ratio exposure measure?
                    The PFE multiplier is set to 1 because unlike the SA-CCR calculation, there is no “credit” given to the bank for overcollateralization for the leverage ratio. This is in the spirit of other aspects of the leverage ratio exposure calculation, which strictly limits the recognition of various forms of credit risk mitigation.

                    Question 6: What types of commitments can qualify for a CCF less than 40%?
                    Commitments that are unconditionally cancellable at any time by the bank without prior notice, or that effectively provide for automatic cancellation due to deterioration in a borrower’s creditworthiness, without observed constraints on the bank’s ability to cancel such commitments. As noted in the Standards, such commitments are subject to a 10% CCF.

                    Question 7: The Standards states “general provisions or general loan loss reserves which have reduced Tier 1 capital may be deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure.” Does this imply that for banks under the standardised approach all general provisions held on the balance sheet are permitted to be deducted from the exposure measure?
                    Yes, that interpretation is correct.

                    Question 8: The Standards does not mention interest in suspense; are bank’s allowed to deduct this from the leverage ratio exposure measure?
                    No, interest in suspense should be included as an exposure. However, specific provisions for interest in suspense can be deducted.

                  • Examples: Calculation of Gross SFT Assets

                    This section provides simple examples to help clarify the calculation of adjusted gross SFT assets for the leverage ratio exposure measure. These examples are for guidance only; banks should consult the actual Leverage Ratio Standards for the specific requirements. Note that the SFT examples do not include the calculation of CCR exposure for the SFTs, which is required under the leverage ratio standards.
                    For purposes of these examples, consider a bank with a simple initial balance sheet consisting of assets of 200 cash and 400 in investment securities, funded by 600 in equity, with no other initial liabilities. In simple T-account format, the bank’s initial position is the following:

                    AssetsLiabilities and Equity
                    Cash200  
                    Investment Securities400Equity600
                     600 600

                     

                    Example 1: Single Repurchase Agreement

                    A customer obtains financing from the bank through a repurchase agreement. The customer provides securities to the bank of 110, receives cash of 100, and commits to repurchase the securities at a specified future date. This is the bank’s only SFT.
                    After the transaction, the bank’s balance sheet appears as follows:

                    AssetsLiabilities and Equity
                    Cash100  
                    Investment Securities510  
                    Repo Encumbered   
                    Securities-110  
                    Cash Receivable100Equity600
                     600 600

                     

                    For purposes of the leverage ratio, gross SFT assets would be the sum of the cash receivable created and the investment securities received, 100+110, for a total of 210. However, this total is reduced by the value of the securities received under the SFT because the bank has recognized the securities as an asset on its balance sheet, leading to an adjusted gross SFT asset value of 100 for inclusion in the leverage ratio exposure measure.
                    Note that in this example, the net effect on leverage ratio exposure would be zero, since on-balance-sheet assets exclusive of SFT assets decline by 100.

                    Example 2: Single Reverse Repurchase Agreement

                    A bank obtains funding by reversing out securities in exchange for cash. The bank receives 100 cash, repos out 110 in securities, and will repurchase the securities at a specified future date. This is the bank’s only SFT.
                    After the transaction, the bank’s balance sheet appears as follows:

                    AssetsLiabilities and Equity
                    Cash300  
                    Investment Securities290Cash Payable100
                    Repo Encumbered Securities110Equity600
                     700 700

                     

                    For purposes of the leverage ratio, gross SFT assets would be simply the 100 cash received. Note that in this example, the net effect would be to increase the measured leverage ratio exposure by 100.

                    Example 3: Simple Repo Portfolio

                    The bank has two SFTs, the repo from Example 1 above, and the reverse repo from Example 2 above. Both SFTs are with the same counterparty, and are subject to a qualifying master netting agreement under which cash payables and receivables qualify for netting. These are the bank’s only SFTs.
                    After the transaction, the bank’s balance sheet appears as follows:

                    AssetsLiabilities and Equity
                    Cash200  
                    Investment Securities400Cash Payable100
                    Cash Receivable100Equity600
                     700 700

                     

                    Because the SFT transactions have matching terms, there are offsetting accounting entries for Repo Encumbered Securities, Investment Securities, and Cash. In this case, gross SFT assets would be 310, consisting of 100 cash receivable, 110 investment securities received, and 100 cash received. However, this total is adjusted down by the amount of the securities received and held on the balance sheet (110), and by another 100 due to the netting of the cash payable and the cash receivable, leaving an adjusted total gross SFT assets of 100 to be included in the leverage ratio exposure measure.

            • Minimum Capital for Banks Regulation

              C 12/2021 Effective from 14/3/2021
              • Scope

                This Regulation applies to all Banks, including branches of foreign banks, operating in the UAE.

              • Objective

                The objective of this Regulation is to establish the minimum capital requirement for banks operating in the UAE.

              • Article (1): Definitions

                1. 1.1 Bank: Any juridical person licensed in accordance with the provisions of the Central Bank Law, to primarily carry on the activity of taking deposits, and any other Licensed Financial Activities.
                   
                2. 1.2 Central Bank: The Central Bank of the United Arab Emirates
                   
                3. 1.3 Central Bank Law: Decretal Federal Law No. (14) of 2018 Regarding the Central Bank & Organisation of Financial Institutions and Activities, and its amendments.
                   
                4. 1.4 Regulations: Any resolution, regulation, circular, rule, standard or notice issued by the Central Bank.
                   
                5. 1.5 Specialized Bank: A Specialized Bank as defined in and licensed under the Specialized Bank with low risk Regulation issued by the Central Bank.
              • Article (2): Requirement to Maintain a Minimum Level of Capital

                1. 2.1 Banks must at all times maintain a minimum level of paid up capital. The level of this requirement is set in article 3 of this Regulation.
                   
                2. 2.2 This minimum level of paid-up capital must be held on an ongoing basis and is a prerequisite for licensing.
              • Article (3): Minimum Level of Capital Required to be Held

                1. 3.1 Banks incorporated in the UAE must maintain fully paid-up capital of at least two billion Dirham (AED 2,000,000,000).
                   
                2. 3.2 Specialized Banks incorporated in the UAE must maintain fully paid-up capital of at least three hundred million Dirham (AED 300,000,000).
                   
                3. 3.3 Branches of foreign banks must maintain:
                   
                  1. 3.3.1 fully paid-up capital of at least one hundred million Dirham (AED 100,000,000) at the level of the branch; and,
                     
                  2. 3.3.2 eligible capital of at least two billion Dirham (AED 2,000,000,000) (or equivalent) at the entity level.
              • Article (4): Quality of the Capital to be Held

                1. 4.1 The minimum capital requirement in this Regulation must be met solely with fully paid-up capital.
                   
                2. 4.2 For branches of foreign banks, fully paid-up capital at branch level shall mean funds allocated to the branch with the following characteristics:
                   
                  1. 4.2.1 the allocated funds are irrevocable, unconditional, and not subject to any restrictions;
                     
                  2. 4.2.2 the allocated funds do not bear any interest;
                     
                  3. 4.2.3 the allocated funds are paid in UAE Dirham only; and,
                     
                  4. 4.2.4 the head office has signed an undertaking to cover any shortfalls in fully paid-up capital.
                     
                  5. 4.3 For branches of foreign banks, eligible capital at entity level shall mean regulatory capital as defined under the Basel framework as implemented in the jurisdiction where the bank is incorporated.
              • Article (5): Interaction with Other Capital Requirements

                1. 5.1 The minimum paid-up capital requirements as defined by this Regulation do not interact with the requirements of other Regulations, including the risk-based capital requirements.
                   
                2. 5.2 This implies that the minimum paid-up capital requirement of this Regulation should not be added to, subtracted from, or otherwise influence the requirements of other Regulations.
                   
                3. 5.3 This also implies that the paid-up capital used to comply with the requirements of this Regulation, is still fully available to meet the requirements of other Regulations.
              • Article (6): New Licensing

                1. 6.1 As part of the licensing process, the Central Bank may impose higher minimum capital requirements to those defined in Article (3), and define the quality of capital eligible to meet these requirements. These higher minimum capital requirements will remain applicable until a new capital decision is taken.
                   
                2. 6.2 As part of the licensing process, applicants are required to submit a 3-year business plan. Their proposed level of paid-up capital must be sufficient to cover the expected regulatory capital requirements over that 3 year period, based on the projected activities.
              • Article (7): Breaching the Minimum Capital Requirement

                Banks, which breach or are likely to breach the minimum paid-up capital requirement as per this Regulation must immediately inform the Central Bank thereof.

              • Article (8): Enforcement & Sanctions

                Violation of any provision of this Regulation may be subject to supervisory actions and sanctions as deemed appropriate by the Central Bank.

              • Article (9): Interpretation of Regulation

                The Regulatory Development Division of the Central Bank shall be the reference for interpretation of the provisions of this Regulation.

              • Article (10): Cancellation of Previous Circulars and Notices

                This Regulation repeals and replaces the following Central Bank Circulars and Notices:

                1. 10.1 Circular No. 80 dated 20 December 1981;
                   
                2. 10.2 Telex No. 82/2679 dated 2 June 1982;
                   
                3. 10.3 Telex 83/827 dated 9 March 1983;
                   
                4. 10.4 Circular No. 202 dated 7 June 1983;
                   
                5. 10.5 Circular No. 289 dated 30 July 1984; and,
                   
                6. 10.6 Circular No. 372 dated 14 January 1986.
              • Article (11): Publication & Effective Date

                1. 11.1 This Regulation shall be published in the Official Gazette in both Arabic and English and shall come into effect one month from the date of publication.
                   
                2. 11.2 Existing Banks not meeting the requirements of this Regulation upon its coming into force, must meet the requirements by no later than 31 December 2023.
            • Regulation Regarding Accounting Provisions and Capital Requirements - Transitional Arrangements

              C 4/2020 Effective from 22/4/2020

              After greetings,

              Please be informed that the Board of Directors of the Central Bank has issued Decision No. 49/3/2020 dated 5th April 2020, regarding the Targeted Economic Support Scheme (TESS), to contain the repercussions of the COVID-19 pandemic in the UAE.

              Arising from this, the Central Bank is issuing the attached “Regulation Regarding Accounting Provisions and Capital Requirements - Transitional Arrangements”.

              This Regulation provides for a “Prudential Filter” that permits Banks and Finance Companies to add back increases in IFRS 9 provisions to the regulatory capital over a transition period of 5 years, on a proportionate basis.

              The increase in IFRS 9 provision requirements is determined by calculating the difference between the IFRS 9 provision as at 31/12/2019 and the IFRS 9 provision as at of the respective reporting date.

              The proportion of the increase in IFRS 9 provisions that is permitted to be added-back to regulatory capital from 1 January 2020 onwards will decline over a 5-year transition period (100%, 100%, 75%, 50%, 25% for the years 2020-2024).

              This Regulation is effective immediately.

              Any queries you may have should be submitted via the following email address:

              bsed.basel@cbuae.gov.ae

              Please bring this Notice to the attention of the board of directors of your institution at the next board meeting.

              Yours faithfully,

              • Introduction

                1. 1.This Regulation is issued pursuant to the powers vested in the Central Bank of the UAE (the “CBUAE”) under the Decretal Federal Law No. 14 of 2018, Regarding the Central Bank & Organization of Financial Institutions and Activities.
                2. 2.The CBUAE recognizes that the International Financial Reporting Standard IFRS 9 has introduced fundamental changes in provisioning practices in qualitative and quantitative ways. The usage of economic models and economic forecasts can lead to higher volatility in the expected loss for the calculation of IFRS 9 accounting provisions. The change from incurred loss model to expected loss model has been advocated by the global regulatory community, but the regulators are also mindful of any unintended consequences. Arising from the Covid-19 developments, the CBUAE has decided to require a phasing-in of increases in IFRS 9 expected credit loss (ECL) provisions over a transition period.
                3. 3.This Regulation provides for a ‘prudential filter’, through transitional arrangements, to smooth the impact of ECL accounting on Capital, based on a 5-year transitional period to manage the regulatory impact. The transitional phase is implemented with immediate effect, with the initial application of the transitional arrangements commencing retroactively on 1 January 2020.
                4. 4.The portion of ECL provisions that can be included in Capital will decrease incrementally over time down to zero to ensure the full implementation of IFRS 9 by 1 January 2025.
                5. 5.The CBUAE has opted to adopt a “dynamic” approach for the transition arrangements. It is aimed to address the ongoing evolution of ECL provisions (e.g. rise in ECL due to unexpectedly worsening macroeconomic outlook) during the transition period.
              • Article (1) Definitions

                1. a)Bank: Any juridical person licensed in accordance with the provisions of the Decretal Federal Law No. (14) of 2018 Regarding the Central Bank & Organization of Financial Institutions and Activities, to primarily carry out the activity of taking deposits, and any other Licensed Financial Activities.
                2. b)Finance Company: As defined in the “Finance Companies Regulation” (Circular 112/2018).
                3. c)Capital: CET1 for banks as defined in “Regulation re Capital adequacy Circular” (52/2017) and Aggregate Capital Funds as defined in Article 11 in “Finance Companies Regulation” (Circular 112/2018).
              • Article (2) Scope of Application

                1. 6.This Regulation applies to all Banks, including branches of foreign banks, and Finance Companies operating in the UAE.
                2. 7.The ‘prudential filter’ only applies to IFRS 9 provisions and not to the CBUAE provisioning requirements contained in “Regulations for Classification of Loans and Determining their Provisions” (Circular 28/2010).
                3. 8.ECL provisions subject to phase-in arrangement are IFRS 9 provisions in Stages 1 and 2 only.
                4. 9.This Regulation amends the earlier provisions in relation to transitional arrangements contained in the CBUAE’s "Guidance Note to Banks and Finance Companies on the Implementation of IFRS 9 (Financial Instruments) in the UAE", issued in March 2018.
              • Article (3) Calculation of Transitional Adjustment Amount

                1. 10.All Banks and Finance Companies must apply the transitional arrangements in accordance with this Regulation and add back to their Capital, a portion of the ECL provisions required under IFRS 9, in accordance with the following calculation:

                  The IFRS 9 stage 1 and stage 2 provisions at the respective reporting date minus the IFRS 9 stage 1 and stage 2 provisions as at 31 December 2019.

                2. 11.The amount to be added back to the Capital on each reporting period shall be multiplied by a designated factor for each year as stated below.
                  • 100% during the period from 1 January 2020 to 31 December 2020;
                  • 100% during the period from 1 January 2021 to 31 December 2021;
                  • 75% during the period from 1 January 2022 to 31 December 2022;
                  • 50% during the period from 1 January 2023 to 31 December 2023;
                  • 25% during the period from 1 January 2024 to 31 December 2024.
                3. 12.The amount of the capital relief that shall be added back to Capital calculated as Partial add-back of ECL impact to Capital = (I - t) * K;

                  where:

                  I = the amount calculated in accordance with paragraph 10

                  t = increase of Capital that is due to tax deductibility of the amounts in paragraph 10, if applicable

                  K = the applicable factor in accordance with paragraph 11

                  Partial add-back is only applicable for positive values calculated herein.

              • Article (4) Consequential Adjustments due to Transitional Arrangement

                1. 13.All Banks and Finance Companies are required to recalculate the regulatory capital requirements which are directly affected by ECL, by making the following adjustments to regulatory capital:
                  1. a)The amount of deferred tax assets that shall be deducted by Banks from Capital in accordance with regulatory adjustment and threshold adjustment or risk weighted as per Section 3.10 of the Tier Capital Supply Standard (contained in the “Standards for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE” issued under the CBUAE Notice No. 1733/2020).
                  2. b)The specific provision credit risk adjustments by which the exposure value is reduced under the Standardized Approach for credit risk should be reduced by a factor, which has the effect of increasing the exposure value. This would ensure that Banks and Finance Companies would not benefit from both an increase in Capital due to transitional arrangements as well as a reduced exposure value.
                  3. c)The amount of Tier 2 capital for Banks calculated as per Section 2.5 of the Tier Capital Supply Standard (contained in the “Standards for Capital Adequacy of Banks in the UAE” issued under the CBUAE Notice No. 1733/2020).
                  4. d)Any other exposure or capital element which is directly affected by the ECL provision to ensure they do not receive an inappropriate capital relief.
              • Article (5) Reference to the Capital Metrics

                1. 14.The adjusted figure obtained for Capital is to be used to calculate other measures of regulatory capital as well as related measures (e.g. regulatory capital ratios, leverage ratio and large exposure limits).
              • Article (6) Transparency and Disclosure Requirement

                1. 15.Banks and Finance Companies are required to publicly disclose that the transitional arrangement is applied. Where there is a requirement to disclose Capital and other Capital related ratios (e.g. regulatory capital ratios, leverage ratio), comparative ratios to show the position had the transitional arrangements not been applied must also be disclosed. Banks should disclose this information as part of the Pillar 3 report and Finance Companies as part of the Annual report.
              • Article (7) Interpretation of this Regulation

                1. 16.The Regulatory Development Division of the CBUAE shall be the sole reference for interpretation of the provisions of this Regulation, and its interpretations thereof shall be considered final.
              • Article (8) Enforcement and Sanctions

                1. 17.Violation of any provision of this Regulation may be subject to supervisory action and sanctions as deemed appropriate by the CBUAE.
              • Article (9) Application and Publication

                1. 18.This Regulation shall be communicated to whomsoever is concerned for implementation, and shall be published in the Official Gazette in English.